Table of Contents

As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on March 24, 2014

Registration No. 333-            

 

 

 

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

 

 

FORM S-1

REGISTRATION STATEMENT

UNDER

THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933

 

 

Box, Inc.

(Exact name of Registrant as specified in its charter)

 

 

 

Delaware   7372   20-2714444
(State or other jurisdiction of
incorporation or organization)
  (Primary Standard Industrial
Classification Code Number)
  (I.R.S. Employer
Identification Number)

4440 El Camino Real

Los Altos, California 94022

(877) 729-4269

(Address, including zip code, and telephone number, including area code, of Registrant’s principal executive offices)

 

 

Aaron Levie, Chairman and Chief Executive Officer

Dan Levin, President and Chief Operating Officer

Dylan Smith, Chief Financial Officer

Box, Inc.

4440 El Camino Real

Los Altos, California 94022

(877) 729-4269

 

 

(Names, address, including zip code, and telephone number, including area code, of agents for service)

Please send copies of all communications to:

 

Steven E. Bochner, Esq.   Peter McGoff, Esq.   Richard A. Kline, Esq.
Jose F. Macias, Esq.   Senior Vice President and General Counsel   Anthony J. McCusker, Esq.
Jon C. Avina, Esq.   Box, Inc.   Goodwin Procter LLP
Wilson Sonsini Goodrich & Rosati, P.C.   4440 El Camino Real   135 Commonwealth Drive
650 Page Mill Road   Los Altos, California 94022   Menlo Park, California 94025
Palo Alto, California 94304   (877) 729-4269   (650) 752-3100
(650) 493-9300    

Approximate date of commencement of proposed sale to the public : As soon as practicable after this registration statement becomes effective.

If any of the securities being registered on this Form are to be offered on a delayed or continuous basis pursuant to Rule 415 under the Securities Act of 1933, check the following box:   ¨

If this Form is filed to register additional securities for an offering pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act, please check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.   ¨

If this Form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(c) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.   ¨

If this Form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(d) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.   ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, or a smaller reporting company. See the definitions of “large accelerated filer,” “accelerated filer” and “smaller reporting company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check one):

 

Large accelerated filer

  ¨    Accelerated filer  ¨
Non-accelerated filer   x   (Do not check if a smaller reporting company)    Smaller reporting company  ¨

 

 

CALCULATION OF REGISTRATION FEE

 

 

Title of Each Class of Securities
to be Registered
  Proposed Maximum
Aggregate Offering
Price (1)(2)
  Amount of
Registration Fee

Class A common stock, $0.0001 par value per share

  $250,000,000   $32,200

 

 

 

(1) Estimated solely for the purpose of computing the amount of the registration fee pursuant to Rule 457(o) under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended.
(2) Includes the aggregate offering price of additional shares that the underwriters have the option to purchase to cover over-allotments, if any.

The Registrant hereby amends this Registration Statement on such date or dates as may be necessary to delay its effective date until the Registrant shall file a further amendment which specifically states that this Registration Statement shall thereafter become effective in accordance with Section 8(a) of the Securities Act of 1933 or until the Registration Statement shall become effective on such date as the Commission, acting pursuant to said Section 8(a), may determine.

 

 

 


Table of Contents

LOGO


Table of Contents

LOGO

34K+ Paying organizations
25M+ Registered users
2.5BN+ Content interactions every three months


Table of Contents

LOGO

Store, share, collaborate like 225K+ great organizations.


Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

     Page  

Prospectus Summary

     1   

Risk Factors

     14   

Special Note Regarding Forward-Looking Statements

     38   

Market and Industry Data

     40   

Use of Proceeds

     41   

Dividend Policy

     41   

Capitalization

     42   

Dilution

     44   

Selected Consolidated Financial Data

     47   

Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations

     50   

Letter from Aaron Levie, Co-Founder, Chairman and CEO

     75   

Business

     77   
     Page  

Management

     104   

Executive Compensation

     111   

Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions

     120   

Principal Stockholders

     126   

Description of Capital Stock

     129   

Shares Eligible for Future Sale

     135   

Material U.S. Federal Income Tax Consequences to Non-U.S. Holders of Our Common Stock

     137   

Underwriters

     141   

Legal Matters

     148   

Experts

     148   

Where You Can Find Additional Information

     148   

Index to Consolidated Financial Statements

     F-1   
 

 

 

We have not authorized anyone to provide any information or make any representations other than those contained in this prospectus or in any free writing prospectus prepared by or on behalf of us or to which we have referred you. We take no responsibility for, and can provide no assurance as to the reliability of, any other information that others may give you. We are offering to sell, and seeking offers to buy, shares of our Class A common stock only in jurisdictions where offers and sales are permitted. The information contained in this prospectus is accurate only as of the date of this prospectus, regardless of the time of delivery of this prospectus or of any sale of our Class A common stock.

Through and including                     , 2014 (the 25th day after the date of this prospectus), all dealers effecting transactions in these securities, whether or not participating in this offering, may be required to deliver a prospectus. This is in addition to a dealer’s obligation to deliver a prospectus when acting as an underwriter and with respect to an unsold allotment or subscription.

For investors outside of the United States: Neither we nor the underwriters have done anything that would permit this offering or possession or distribution of this prospectus in any jurisdiction where action for that purpose is required, other than in the United States. You are required to inform yourselves about and to observe any restrictions relating to this offering and the distribution of this prospectus outside of the United States.


Table of Contents

PROSPECTUS SUMMARY

This summary highlights information contained elsewhere in this prospectus. This summary is not complete and does not contain all of the information you should consider in making your investment decision. You should read the following summary together with the more detailed information appearing elsewhere in this prospectus, including the sections titled “Risk Factors,” “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and our consolidated financial statements and related notes, before deciding whether to purchase shares of our Class A common stock.

BOX, INC.

Our Mission and Vision

Our mission is to make organizations more productive, competitive and collaborative by connecting people and their most important information. We believe our platform can become the cloud-based content layer that spans organizations, applications and devices to enable users to get work done more efficiently—when, where and how they want.

Overview

Box provides a cloud-based, mobile-optimized Enterprise Content Collaboration platform that enables organizations of all sizes to easily and securely manage their content and collaborate internally and externally. Our platform combines powerful, elegant and easy-to-use functionality that is designed for users with the security, scalability and administrative controls required by IT departments. We have built our platform to enable users to get their work done regardless of file format, application environment, operating system, device or location. Our paying business customers include more than 40% of Fortune 500 companies and 20% of Global 2000 companies, and our 25 million registered users include employees from 99% of Fortune 500 companies, including companies in highly regulated industries such as healthcare and life sciences, telecommunications, energy and financial services.

There are several fundamental technology trends that are dramatically changing both individual behavior and enterprise IT infrastructure. Information workers increasingly expect to be able to access and work with their business content from any internet-enabled device, and they demand solutions that are as simple to use as their consumer internet applications, such as Facebook, LinkedIn and Twitter. However, legacy on-premise IT architectures were not built for ease of use or mobility. As a result, IT departments are increasingly pressured to find easier to use solutions that address employees’ changing work styles, while also protecting confidential content, including documents, presentations, spreadsheets and multimedia.

At our founding, we recognized that content is more accessible, useful and powerful when it is centrally stored, managed and shared. We have architected our Enterprise Content Collaboration platform from the ground up to be cloud-based and mobile-optimized to meet the evolving demands of today’s information worker. Cloud-based Enterprise Content Collaboration is especially powerful because it enables users to access and collaborate on centralized content from anywhere and allows organizations to access new features and apply policies and controls across all users and content simultaneously. Our solution is especially well-suited to support globally distributed workers with multiple devices.

We are building a rich ecosystem around Box. Our platform integrates with the applications of our technology partners, including salesforce.com, NetSuite and others, giving our users full access to Box without leaving partner applications. In addition, third-party developers can rapidly build, update and provision new applications that leverage and extend the core functionality of our service, increasingly with a focus on specific

 

 

1


Table of Contents

industries and vertical market use cases. To date, tens of thousands of third-party developers have leveraged our platform as the secure content layer for their applications, including developers that are part of our Box OneCloud ecosystem, which provides users with access to more than 1,000 iOS and Android third-party applications.

Our go-to-market strategy combines user-driven adoption with a direct and indirect sales approach. We offer individuals a free basic version of Box to provide them with a first-hand experience of the simplicity and effectiveness of our service. Our solution often spreads virally within and across organizations, as users adopt Box and invite new users to collaborate. We monetize this network effect through direct and indirect sales strategies to formalize deployments within organizations and further expand our footprint. We also make it easy for users and organizations to visit our website and subscribe to both free and paid versions of our service. Frequently, an organization will purchase Box for one use case and later expand its deployment to other use cases and larger groups of employees.

Our solution is highly scalable and can support deployments ranging in size from one user to tens of thousands of users. As of January 31, 2014, we had 25 million registered users and supported over 225,000 organizations that collectively interact with their content over 2.5 billion times every three months. Our customers include more than 34,000 paying organizations globally, and our largest deployment to date is over 60,000 users. We currently offer our solution in 15 languages. Our customer base includes leading organizations across industries, including Ameriprise Financial, Inc., Bechtel, Eli Lilly and Company, Gap, Inc., Schneider Electric and Sunbelt Rentals.

We have experienced significant growth since our incorporation in 2005. For the 12 months ended December 31, 2011, January 31, 2013 and 2014, our revenue was $21.1 million, $58.8 million and $124.2 million, respectively, representing year-over-year growth of 179% and 111%. We have invested and continue to invest heavily in our business to capitalize on our large market opportunity. As a result, we incurred net losses of $50.3 million, $112.6 million and $168.6 million for the 12 months ended December 31, 2011, January 31, 2013 and 2014, respectively.

Industry Trends

Trends such as Cloud, Mobility and the Proliferation of Data are Changing How People Work

Several technology trends have driven down the cost of storage, enabled faster, more powerful applications and increased the number of connected devices, paving the way for cloud and mobile to transform the way that people live and work.

 

    Shift from On-Premise to Cloud-Based Applications . Advances in technology architectures have supported the rise of cloud computing, which enables the delivery of software-as-a-service (SaaS). Today, mission-critical applications can be delivered reliably, securely and cost-effectively to customers over the internet without the need to purchase supporting hardware, software or ongoing maintenance. The lower total cost of ownership, better functionality and flexibility of cloud applications represent a compelling alternative to traditional on-premise solutions. As a result, Gartner, Inc. (Gartner) expects total cloud spending to increase from $132 billion worldwide in 2013 to $244 billion in 2017.

 

   

Increased Functionality and Proliferation of Mobile Devices . The rapidly increasing functionality of smartphones, tablets and other mobile devices has resulted in the significant adoption of such devices within organizations. According to International Data Corporation (IDC), there were 1.4 billion mobile internet users worldwide in 2013 and there will be 2.3 billion in 2017. Forrester Research, Inc. (Forrester) estimates that 29% of the global workforce in 2012 used three or more devices, worked

 

 

2


Table of Contents
 

from multiple locations and accessed several applications. According to Gartner, the number of tablets sold has grown at a compound annual growth rate of 97% between 2010 and 2014 worldwide, and is expected to surpass personal computers (PCs), by annual number of units sold, in 2016.

 

    Explosion of Content and Data . The volume of data continues to grow significantly as users and organizations increase their usage of data-rich applications and access content from multiple connected devices. According to IDC, from 2005 to 2020, the volume of digital information will grow by a factor of 300, increasing demand for cost-efficient and scalable storage and content management solutions.

These technology advancements have enabled the rapid development of a number of highly intuitive and engaging consumer-oriented internet and mobile applications that have changed the expectations of today’s workforce. The rich functionality and usability of applications such as Facebook, LinkedIn and Twitter have led today’s generation to expect their work applications to be similarly accessible, intuitive, social and collaborative, and their content to be available in the cloud and on any of their mobile devices. In response to the growing desire among workers to access and interact with their business information through their preferred personal devices, many organizations have established “bring your own device” policies. At the same time, workers are increasingly utilizing their favorite applications in the workplace in order to be more productive without seeking approval from their IT departments.

IT is Changing to Embrace These Trends while Maintaining Security and Scalability Standards

IT departments are mandated to ensure security for enterprise content in the face of an increasing number of cyber attacks and data leaks, to comply with ever-changing regulatory requirements and to maintain control and visibility over internal and external users while also taking advantage of the benefits of cloud and mobility. While it is clear that embracing cloud and mobility is a competitive imperative, meeting the permissions, security, scalability and administrative requirements typical of IT departments has become increasingly difficult as the proliferation of devices and applications on various architectures has created a more heterogeneous IT environment. Regulatory and compliance requirements for content, collaboration and storage have grown increasingly complex across geographies and industries. At the same time, reliance on technology for critical content and data has made organizations more vulnerable to both sophisticated external cyber attacks and data leaks.

Effective Content Management is Critical to Business Success Today

The technology trends described above are changing where and how work gets done because people can now access information and do their work from anywhere at any time. Employees, clients, vendors and contractors can now be seamlessly connected, creating new opportunities for sharing, collaboration and productivity. Ultimately, these modern approaches to productivity are empowering organizations to increase information velocity and speed up decision making, thereby increasing their competitiveness in the marketplace.

Our Market Opportunity

Our Enterprise Content Collaboration platform provides a combination of intuitive, user-friendly content applications with enterprise-grade features and security to serve as a central content layer across organizations. Our platform addresses several traditional IT categories defined by IDC, including content management, cloud storage, collaboration, and project and portfolio management, which in aggregate represents an estimated $29 billion in global IT spending in 2014. We believe our opportunity includes large segments of existing enterprise IT spending as well as new use cases and users that are not currently captured by traditional market sizing studies. Customers purchase our services both to replace existing storage and content management solutions, as well as to enable entirely new use cases not well served by existing content or collaboration solutions.

 

 

3


Table of Contents

The size and importance of the Enterprise Content Collaboration market is driven by the fact that information is central to every organization’s workflow, and organizations regularly invest in new ways to increase workforce productivity. According to Forrester, there were 615 million information workers as of 2013, and there are expected to be 865 million information workers by 2016. We believe our mobile-optimized platform extends our opportunity beyond information workers to anyone who uses information to get his or her job done, including all mobile workers. According to IDC, there were 1.0 billion mobile workers as of 2010, and there will be 1.3 billion mobile workers by 2015.

The Box Solution

Our solution empowers people to share and interact with content within their organization, with external partners and across their other business applications. Our solution offers:

 

    Modern Cloud Architecture . We have built our platform from the ground up on a cloud-based architecture, which enables us to rapidly develop, update and provision our services to users.

 

    Mobility . Our solution enables users to access content securely in real time through nearly any mobile device and operating system, including iOS, Android, Windows and Blackberry.

 

    Elegant, Intuitive and User-Focused Interface . We strive to maintain an elegant, intuitive and simple interface with compelling content collaboration features to enable quick and viral user adoption.

 

    Simple and Rapid Deployment . Our cloud-based software allows organizations to easily, quickly and inexpensively deploy our product.

 

    Enterprise-Grade Security and Administrative Controls . We have invested heavily to build the security and administrative controls demanded by our largest customers. Box gives IT administrators powerful and granular tools to define access rights by user, content type, device and usage.

 

    Platform Agnostic Content Layer . We have designed our solution to serve as the horizontal content and collaboration layer across an organization and its employees. Users typically store their most important information on our platform, enabling them to interact with almost any type of content, regardless of format or file type, and from any device, location or operating system.

 

    Extensible Platform for Custom and Third-Party Application Development . We provide an open platform for independent software vendors (ISVs), companies and third-party developers to build and deploy unique applications with custom interfaces and workflows that leverage Box capabilities for content access, viewing, sharing, collaboration, security and reporting. We have a growing developer ecosystem building applications on the Box platform, including over 1,000 OneCloud mobile applications.

 

    Easy Integration with Other Cloud-Based Applications . We offer a number of off-the-shelf integrations with critical business applications, including Salesforce, NetSuite and others. Using Box Embed, customers are able to store content generated from other applications in Box and access that content through the Box platform and any integrated business application.

 

    Industry-Specific Compliance Certifications . We have obtained various regulatory and compliance certifications and have built the necessary security and controls to support specific industry vertical needs. For example, in healthcare, we facilitate compliance with the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA) and the Health Information Technology for Economic and Clinical Health (HITECH) Act by our customers.

 

    Customized Plans and Pricing . We offer our solution through multiple plans to meet the varying needs of our diverse customer base. An individual user can create a personal Box account with a set storage capacity for a monthly fee. Organizations can purchase packages with different amounts of storage, levels of functionality and monthly fees per user.

 

 

4


Table of Contents
    Version for Free Users . We offer users a free version of Box in order to promote additional usage, brand and product awareness, and adoption. Our free offering allows users to invite anyone to collaborate on Box, enabling faster content collaboration across employees, vendors, clients, contractors and other parties while exposing more potential users to our solution and helping our solution grow virally.

 

    Robust Customer Support . Our customer success team works closely with customers to ensure they are obtaining the highest value from our services. Box Consulting, our professional services team, engages with customers to understand their specific use cases and deployment needs. We believe our customer service efforts are one of the reasons why we have been successful in retaining customers and increasing their use of our service within and across their organizations.

Benefits of Our Platform

We provide the following key benefits to users, IT departments, organizations, and technology partners and third-party developers:

 

    Benefits to Users . We provide users with the ability to securely store, access, share and collaborate on content from any location using any operating system and on any device, ranging from PCs to smartphones and tablet devices. Our real-time collaboration solution enables users and their partners and customers to work together securely and more productively across functions, organizations and geographies. We provide these benefits with a service that is both powerful and simple to use.

 

    Benefits to IT Departments . Our cloud-based service is quick and inexpensive to deploy. At the same time, our solution provides IT departments with enterprise-grade security, sophisticated data encryption technologies, secure content delivery networks and an intrusion detection system to monitor network traffic. We also offer an administrative console that allows IT administrators to manage their users and content, exercise granular security control, apply permission policies and maintain visibility on actions taken within corporate accounts.

 

    Benefits to Organizations . Our solution enables organizations to replace technologies, such as File Transfer Protocol (FTP) servers, Managed File Transfer (MFT) tools and networked file servers, and experience greater ease of use at a lower total cost of ownership compared to their prior solutions. Moreover, our product is optimized for cloud and mobile, allowing organizations to extend content and collaboration to a broader base of users who work remotely using tablets and smartphones, enabling increased user productivity. Finally, by delivering our software as a cloud-based service, our customers always operate with the latest features and functionality.

 

    Benefits to Technology Partners and Third-Party Developers . We have designed Box to integrate with the applications of our technology partners, such as salesforce.com, NetSuite and over 20 others, giving our users full access to Box’s complete functionality without leaving partner applications. ISVs, system integrators and other third-party developers can rapidly build, update and provision new applications that leverage and extend the core functionality of Box. We also give developers access to an audience of 25 million registered users, which we believe allows our ecosystem of technology partners and third-party developers to address a broad set of use cases.

Our Growth Strategy

With an increasing number of information workers, industry trends toward cloud and mobility, and the increased need for global collaboration, we believe the market opportunity for Enterprise Content Collaboration is significant and growing. Key elements of our growth strategy include:

 

    Extending Our Technology Leadership . We have made, and will continue to make, significant investments in research and development to strengthen our existing platform, continually enhance usability and develop additional Enterprise Content Collaboration functionality to improve productivity.

 

 

5


Table of Contents
    Increasing Our Customer Base Globally . We plan to continue investing in direct and indirect sales and free user marketing to acquire new customers both in the United States and internationally.

 

    Growing Our Presence within Our Existing Customer Base . We will continue to expand deployment of our solution with existing customers by, among other things, growing from departmental deployments to broader implementations and addressing a broader range of use cases.

 

    Target Industry Verticals . We will continue to invest in industry verticals, such as healthcare and life sciences, financial services, legal services, media and entertainment, education, energy and government, by developing targeted sales and marketing activities, ensuring that our service meets specific industry and regulatory requirements, and building relationships with partners that develop custom applications to address the unique needs in these industries.

 

    Extending Our Sales Reach through Channel and Strategic Partners . We will continue to develop partnerships with leading channel partners, mobile device and hardware manufacturers, telecommunications service providers and system integrators.

 

    Expanding Our Platform Ecosystem . We will continue to expand our platform ecosystem by developing additional relationships with ISVs, our customers’ internal development organizations and other third-party developers. By supporting these strategic relationships, we believe our platform ecosystem will extend to new use cases that deliver more targeted, higher value solutions. We also believe that, as more ISVs and other third-party developers join the ecosystem, we will attract more customers, further strengthening our ecosystem and making it more attractive to new developers.

Risks Affecting Us

Our business is subject to numerous risks and uncertainties, including those highlighted in the section titled “Risk Factors” immediately following this prospectus summary. These risks include, but are not limited to, the following:

 

    We have a history of cumulative losses, and we do not expect to be profitable for the foreseeable future;

 

    We have a limited operating history, which makes it difficult to predict our future operating results;

 

    The market in which we participate is intensely competitive, and if we do not compete effectively, our operating results could be harmed;

 

    If the cloud-based Enterprise Content Collaboration market develops more slowly than we expect or declines, our business could be adversely affected;

 

    We have experienced rapid growth in recent periods. If we fail to manage our growth effectively, we may be unable to execute our business plan, maintain high levels of service or adequately address competitive challenges;

 

    Our business depends substantially on customers renewing their subscriptions with us and expanding their use of our services. Any decline in our customer renewals or failure to convince our customers to broaden their use of our services would harm our future operating results;

 

    If we are not able to provide successful enhancements, new features and modifications to our services, our business could be adversely affected;

 

    Actual or perceived security vulnerabilities in our services or any breaches of our security controls and unauthorized access to a customer’s data could harm our business and operating results; and

 

   

The dual class structure of our common stock has the effect of concentrating voting control with those stockholders who held our capital stock prior to the completion of this offering, including our executive

 

 

6


Table of Contents
 

officers, employees and directors and their affiliates, which will limit your ability to influence the outcome of important transactions, including a change in control. The holders of our outstanding Class B common stock will hold approximately     % of the voting power of our outstanding capital stock following this offering.

Corporate Information

Our principal executive offices are located at 4440 El Camino Real, Los Altos, California 94022, and our telephone number is (877) 729-4269. Our website address is www.box.com. Information contained on, or that can be accessed through, our website is not incorporated by reference into this prospectus, and you should not consider information on our website to be part of this prospectus. We were incorporated in 2005 as Box.Net, Inc., a Washington corporation, and later reincorporated in 2008 under the same name as a Delaware corporation. In November 2011, we changed our name to Box, Inc. We recently changed the end of our fiscal year from December 31 to January 31.

Unless expressly indicated or the context requires otherwise, the terms “Box,” “company,” “we,” “us,” and “our” in this prospectus refer to Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, and, where appropriate, its wholly-owned subsidiaries. The Box design logo, “Box” and our other registered and common law trade names, trademarks and service marks are the property of Box, Inc. This prospectus contains additional trade names, trademarks and service marks of other companies. We do not intend our use or display of other companies’ trade names, trademarks or service marks to imply a relationship with, or endorsement or sponsorship of us by, these other companies.

Emerging Growth Company

The Jumpstart Our Business Startups Act (JOBS Act) was enacted in April 2012 with the intention of encouraging capital formation in the United States and reducing the regulatory burden on newly public companies that qualify as “emerging growth companies.” We are an emerging growth company within the meaning of the JOBS Act. As an emerging growth company, we may take advantage of certain exemptions from various public reporting requirements, including the requirement that our internal control over financial reporting be audited by our independent registered public accounting firm pursuant to Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (Sarbanes-Oxley Act), certain requirements related to the disclosure of executive compensation in this prospectus and in our periodic reports and proxy statements and the requirement that we hold a nonbinding advisory vote on executive compensation and any golden parachute payments. We may take advantage of these exemptions until we are no longer an emerging growth company.

We will remain an emerging growth company until the earliest to occur of (i) the last day of the fiscal year in which we have more than $1.0 billion in annual revenue; (ii) the date we qualify as a “large accelerated filer,” with at least $700 million of equity securities held by non-affiliates; (iii) the date on which we have issued, in any three-year period, more than $1.0 billion in non-convertible debt securities; and (iv) the last day of the fiscal year ending after the fifth anniversary of the completion of this offering.

See the section titled “ Risk Factors—Risks Related to Our Business and Our Industry—We are an emerging growth company, and any decision on our part to comply only with certain reduced reporting and disclosure requirements applicable to emerging growth companies could make our Class A common stock less attractive to investors ” for certain risks related to our status as an emerging growth company.

 

 

7


Table of Contents

THE OFFERING

 

Class A common stock offered by us

  

             shares

Class A common stock to be outstanding after this offering

  

             shares

Class B common stock to be outstanding after this offering

  

             shares

Total Class A common stock and Class B common stock to be outstanding after this offering

  

             shares

Over-allotment option of Class A common stock offered by us

  

             shares

Use of proceeds

  

We estimate that our net proceeds from the sale of our Class A common stock that we are offering will be approximately $        , assuming an initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, and after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

 

The principal purposes of this offering are to increase our capitalization and financial flexibility and create a public market for our Class A common stock. We intend to use the net proceeds we receive from this offering for general corporate purposes, including working capital, operating expenses and capital expenditures. While we cannot specify with certainty the particular uses of the net proceeds we receive from this offering, we currently expect to invest at least 50% of the net proceeds in sales and marketing activities, product development, general and administrative matters and capital expenditures to support the growth in our business. We also may use a portion of the net proceeds to acquire complementary businesses, products, services or technologies. However, we do not have agreements or commitments for any specific acquisitions at this time. See the section titled “Use of Proceeds” for additional information.

Voting rights

  

Shares of our Class A common stock are entitled to one vote per share.

 

Shares of our Class B common stock are entitled to 10 votes per share.

 

Holders of our Class A common stock and Class B common stock will generally vote together as a single class, unless otherwise required by law or our amended and restated certificate of incorporation. The

 

 

8


Table of Contents
   holders of our outstanding Class B common stock will hold approximately     % of the voting power of our outstanding capital stock following this offering and will have the ability to control the outcome of matters submitted to our stockholders for approval, including the election of our directors and the approval of any change in control transaction. See the sections titled “Principal Stockholders” and “Description of Capital Stock” for additional information.

Proposed NYSE trading symbol

  

“BOX”

Prior to the completion of this offering, we had two classes of common stock: Class A common stock and Class B common stock. The rights of the holders of our Class A common stock and Class B common stock were identical except with respect to voting. The holders of our Class A common stock were entitled to one vote per share, and the holders of our Class B common stock had no voting rights.

Upon the completion of this offering, we will have authorized a new class of Class A common stock and a new class of Class B common stock. All currently outstanding shares of our Class A common stock, Class B common stock and redeemable convertible preferred stock (including shares to be issued upon the exercise of the Net Exercise Warrant described below immediately prior to the completion of this offering) will convert into shares of our new Class B common stock. In addition, all currently outstanding restricted stock units (RSUs) and options to purchase shares of our capital stock will become eligible to be settled in or exercisable for shares of our new Class B common stock.

Unless otherwise indicated, other than in our consolidated financial statements, references in this prospectus to our Class A common stock and Class B common stock are to our new Class A common stock and new Class B common stock, respectively. We refer to our Class A common stock prior to the completion of this offering as “Existing Class A common stock” and our Class B common stock prior to the completion of this offering as “Existing Class B common stock.”

The number of shares of our Class A common stock and Class B common stock that will be outstanding after this offering is based on no shares of our Class A common stock and 90,193,539 shares of our Class B common stock (including our redeemable convertible preferred stock on an as-converted basis and excluding the Net Exercise Warrant described below) outstanding as of January 31, 2014, and excludes:

 

    18,427,075 shares of our Class B common stock issuable upon the exercise of options to purchase shares of our Class B common stock outstanding as of January 31, 2014, with a weighted-average exercise price of $3.65 per share;

 

    225,300 shares of our Class B common stock issuable upon the vesting of RSUs outstanding as of January 31, 2014; and

 

                 shares of our Class A common stock reserved for future issuance under our equity compensation plans, consisting of:

 

                 shares of our Class A common stock reserved for future issuance under our 2014 Equity Incentive Plan (2014 Plan), which will become effective prior to the completion of this offering;

 

   

41,840 shares of our Class B common stock reserved for future issuance under our 2011 Equity Incentive Plan (2011 Plan) as of January 31, 2014, which number of shares will be added to the shares

 

 

9


Table of Contents
 

of our Class A common stock to be reserved under our 2014 Plan upon its effectiveness, at which time we will cease granting awards under our 2011 Plan; and

 

                 shares of our Class A common stock reserved for future issuance under our 2014 Employee Stock Purchase Plan (ESPP), which will become effective prior to the completion of this offering.

Our 2014 Plan and ESPP each provide for annual automatic increases in the number of shares reserved thereunder, and our 2014 Plan also provides for increases in the number of shares reserved thereunder based on awards under our 2011 Plan that expire, are forfeited or otherwise repurchased by us, as more fully described in the section titled “Executive Compensation—Employee Benefit and Stock Plans.”

Of the shares described above, up to 18,652,375 shares of our Class B common stock will be issuable after this offering upon the exercise or vesting of outstanding stock options or RSUs.

Unless otherwise indicated, other than in our consolidated financial statements, all information in this prospectus assumes:

 

    the filing and effectiveness of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and the effectiveness of our amended and restated bylaws, each of which will occur immediately prior to the completion of this offering;

 

    the reclassification of our outstanding Existing Class A common stock and Existing Class B common stock into an equivalent number of shares of our Class B common stock, which will occur immediately prior to the completion of this offering, and the authorization of our Class A common stock;

 

    the automatic conversion of all outstanding shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock into an aggregate of 76,238,097 shares of our Class B common stock, which will occur immediately prior to the completion of this offering;

 

 

    the issuance of              shares of our Class B common stock immediately prior to the completion of this offering upon the assumed net exercise of a warrant to purchase up to 87,140 shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock outstanding as of January 31, 2014 (Net Exercise Warrant), at an exercise price of $0.29 per share, based upon the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus; and

 

    no exercise of the underwriters’ over-allotment option.

 

 

10


Table of Contents

SUMMARY CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL DATA

We changed the end of our fiscal year from December 31 to January 31, effective for our fiscal year ended January 31, 2013, and as a result, we also present below certain summary consolidated financial information for the one-month transition period ended January 31, 2012. The summary consolidated statements of operations data presented below for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one-month period ended January 31, 2012 and the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014 are derived from our audited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus. The following summary consolidated financial data should be read together with the section titled “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and our consolidated financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus.

 

                                                                                           
     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
    One Month
Ended
January 31,

2012
    Year Ended
January 31,

2013
    Year Ended
January 31,
2014
 
          
     (in thousands, except per share data)  

Consolidated Statements of Operations Data:

        

Revenue

   $ 21,084      $ 3,376      $ 58,797      $ 124,192   

Cost of revenue (1)

     6,873        850        14,280        25,974   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

     14,211        2,526        44,517        98,218   

Operating expenses:

        

Research and development (1)

     14,396        1,915        28,996        45,967   

Sales and marketing (1)

     36,189        4,246        99,221        171,188   

General and administrative (1)

     13,480        1,125        25,429        39,843   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total operating expenses

     64,065        7,286        153,646        256,998   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss from operations

     (49,854     (4,760     (109,129     (158,780

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

     (356     (371     (1,727     (8,477

Interest income (expense), net

     (109     27        (1,764     (3,705

Other income (expense), net

     49        (8     116        (26
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss before provision (benefit) for income taxes

     (50,270     (5,112     (112,504     (170,988

Provision (benefit) for income taxes

     1        15        59        (2,431
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss

     (50,271     (5,127     (112,563     (168,557

Accretion of redeemable convertible preferred stock

     (80     (9     (226     (341
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss attributable to common stockholders

   $ (50,351   $ (5,136   $ (112,789   $ (168,898
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss per share attributable to common stockholders, basic and diluted

   $ (9.53   $ (0.84   $ (14.68   $ (14.89
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Weighted-average shares used to compute net loss per share attributable to common stockholders, basic and diluted

     5,284        6,099        7,684        11,341   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Pro forma net loss per share attributable to common stockholders, basic and diluted (unaudited)

         $ (1.93
        

 

 

 

Weighted-average shares used to compute pro forma net loss per share attributable to common stockholders, basic and diluted (unaudited)

           82,948   
        

 

 

 

 

 

11


Table of Contents

 

(1) Includes stock-based compensation expense as follows:

 

     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
     One Month
Ended
January 31,

2012
     Year Ended
January 31,

2013
     Year Ended
January 31,

2014
 
             
     (in thousands)  

Cost of revenue

   $ 686       $ 6       $ 1,087       $ 450   

Research and development

     899         19         1,211         3,154   

Sales and marketing

     837         24         1,893         5,017   

General and administrative

     3,800         23         3,345         3,128   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total stock-based compensation

   $ 6,222       $ 72       $ 7,536       $ 11,749   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Our consolidated balance sheet data as of January 31, 2014 is presented on:

 

    an actual basis;

 

    a pro forma basis, giving effect to the automatic conversion of all outstanding shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock (excluding the Net Exercise Warrant) into 76,238,097 shares of our Class B common stock, the related reclassification of the redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability to additional paid-in capital and the effectiveness of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation, as if such conversion, reclassification and effectiveness had occurred on January 31, 2014; and

 

    a pro forma as adjusted basis, giving effect to the pro forma adjustments and the sale and issuance of              shares of our Class A common stock by us in this offering, based upon the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, after deducting the estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

The pro forma as adjusted information set forth in the table below is illustrative only and will be adjusted based on the actual initial public offering price and other terms of this offering determined at pricing.

 

     January 31, 2014  
     Actual     Pro Forma      Pro Forma As
Adjusted (1)
 
     (in thousands)  

Consolidated Balance Sheet Data:

  

Cash and cash equivalents

   $ 108,851      $ 108,851       $            

Working capital

     44,289        44,289      

Total assets

     235,429        235,429      

Deferred revenue, current and non-current

     90,072        90,072      

Debt, non-current

     34,000        34,000      

Redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability, non-current

     1,346             

Redeemable convertible preferred stock

     393,217             

Total stockholders’ (deficit) equity

     (332,512     62,051      

 

(1) Each $1.00 increase (decrease) in the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, would increase (decrease) our cash and cash equivalents, working capital, total assets and total stockholders’ (deficit) equity by approximately $         million, assuming that the number of shares of our Class A common stock offered by us, as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, remains the same and after deducting the estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

 

 

12


Table of Contents

Key Business Metrics

We monitor the following key metrics to help us measure our performance, identify trends affecting our business, formulate financial projections and make strategic decisions. In addition to our results determined in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States (GAAP), we believe the following non-GAAP financial and operational measures are useful in evaluating our operating performance.

 

     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
    Year Ended
January 31,

2013
    Year Ended
January 31,

2014
 
        

Billings (in thousands)

   $ 30,391      $ 85,727      $ 174,165   

Billings growth rate

     177     182     103

Retention rate (period end)

     129     144     136

Billings

Billings represent our revenue plus the change in deferred revenue in the period. Billings we record in any particular period reflect sales to new customers plus subscription renewals and upsells to existing customers, and represent amounts invoiced for subscription, premier support and professional services (which we refer to as Box Consulting). We typically invoice our customers at the beginning of the term, in multiyear, annual, quarterly or monthly installments. If the customer elects to pay the full subscription amount at the beginning of the period, the total subscription amount for the entire term will be reflected in billings. If the customer elects to be invoiced annually or more frequently, only the amount billed for such period will be included in billings. See the section titled “Selected Consolidated Financial Data—Reconciliation of Billings to Revenue” for a reconciliation of billings to revenue, the most directly comparable GAAP financial measure, and explanations of why we track billings and why billings may be a useful measure for investors.

Retention Rate

We calculate our retention rate as of a period end by starting with the annual contract value (ACV) from customers with contract value of $5,000 or more as of 12 months prior to such period end (Prior Period ACV) and a subscription term of at least 12 months. We then calculate the ACV from these same customers as of the current period end (Current Period ACV). Finally, we divide the aggregate Current Period ACV for the trailing 12-month period by the aggregate Prior Period ACV for the trailing 12-month period to arrive at our retention rate. We believe our retention rate is an important metric that provides insight into the long-term value of our subscription agreements and our ability to retain and grow revenue from our customer base. We focus on contracts that have a value of $5,000 or more because, over time, these customers give us the best indicator for the growth of our business and the potential for incremental business as they renew and expand their deployments, and contracts with these customers represent a substantial majority of our revenue for the period ended January 31, 2014. See the section titled “Selected Consolidated Financial Data” for explanations of why we track retention rate, why retention rate may be a useful measure for investors and an explanation that there is no comparable GAAP financial measure to which we can reconcile this particular key metric.

 

 

13


Table of Contents

RISK FACTORS

Investing in our Class A common stock involves a high degree of risk. You should carefully consider the risks and uncertainties described below, together with all of the other information in this prospectus, including in the section titled “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and our consolidated financial statements and related notes, before making a decision to invest in our Class A common stock. If any of the risks actually occur, our business, financial condition, operating results and prospects could be materially and adversely affected. In that event, the market price of our Class A common stock could decline, and you could lose part or all of your investment.

Risks Related to Our Business and Our Industry

We have a history of cumulative losses, and we do not expect to be profitable for the foreseeable future.

We have incurred significant losses in each period since our inception in 2005. We incurred net losses of $50.3 million in our fiscal year ended December 31, 2011, $112.6 million in our fiscal year ended January 31, 2013, and $168.6 million in our fiscal year ended January 31, 2014. As of January 31, 2014, we had an accumulated deficit of $361.2 million. These losses and accumulated deficit reflect the substantial investments we made to acquire new customers and develop our services. We intend to continue scaling our business to increase our number of users and paying organizations and to meet the increasingly complex needs of our customers. We have invested, and expect to continue to invest, in our sales and marketing organizations to sell our services around the world and in our development organization to deliver additional features and capabilities of our cloud services to address our customers’ evolving needs. We also expect to continue to make significant investments in our datacenter infrastructure and in our professional service organization as we focus on customer success. As a result of our continuing investments to scale our business in each of these areas, we do not expect to be profitable for the foreseeable future. Furthermore, to the extent we are successful in increasing our customer base, we will also incur increased losses due to upfront costs associated with acquiring new customers, particularly as a result of the limited free trial version of our service and the nature of subscription revenue, which is generally recognized ratably over the term of the subscription period, which is typically one year, although we also offer our services for terms ranging between one month to three years or more. We cannot assure you that we will achieve profitability in the future or that, if we do become profitable, we will sustain profitability.

We have a limited operating history, which makes it difficult to predict our future operating results.

We were incorporated and introduced our first service in 2005. As a result of our limited operating history, our ability to accurately forecast our future operating results is limited and subject to a number of uncertainties. We have encountered, and will continue to encounter, risks and uncertainties frequently experienced by growing companies in rapidly changing industries, such as the risks and uncertainties described herein. If our assumptions regarding these risks and uncertainties (which we use to plan our business) are incorrect or change due to changes in our markets, or if we do not address these risks and uncertainties successfully, our operating and financial results could differ materially from our expectations, and our business could suffer.

The market in which we participate is intensely competitive, and if we do not compete effectively, our operating results could be harmed.

The market for cloud-based Enterprise Content Collaboration services is fragmented, rapidly evolving and highly competitive, with relatively low barriers to entry for certain applications and services. Many of our competitors and potential competitors are larger and have greater name recognition, much longer operating histories, larger marketing budgets and significantly greater resources than we do. Our competitors include Citrix, Dropbox, EMC, Google, and Microsoft. With the introduction of new technologies and market entrants, we expect competition to continue to intensify in the future. If we fail to compete effectively, our business will

 

14


Table of Contents

be harmed. Some of our principal competitors offer their products or services at a lower price, which has resulted in pricing pressures on our business. If we are unable to achieve our target pricing levels, our operating results would be negatively impacted. In addition, pricing pressures and increased competition generally could result in reduced sales, lower margins, losses or the failure of our services to achieve or maintain widespread market acceptance, any of which could harm our business.

Many of our competitors are able to devote greater resources to the development, promotion and sale of their products or services. In addition, many of our competitors have established marketing relationships and major distribution agreements with channel partners, consultants, system integrators and resellers. Moreover, many software vendors could bundle products or offer them at lower prices as part of a broader product sale or enterprise license arrangement. Some competitors may offer products or services that address one or a number of business execution functions at lower prices or with greater depth than our services. As a result, our competitors may be able to respond more quickly and effectively to new or changing opportunities, technologies, standards or customer requirements. Furthermore, some potential customers, particularly large enterprises, may elect to develop their own internal solutions. For all of these reasons, we may not be able to compete successfully against our current and future competitors.

If the cloud-based Enterprise Content Collaboration market develops more slowly than we expect or declines, our business could be adversely affected.

The cloud-based Enterprise Content Collaboration market is not as mature as the market for on-premise enterprise software, and it is uncertain whether a cloud-based service like ours will achieve and sustain high levels of customer demand and market acceptance. Because we derive, and expect to continue to derive, substantially all of our revenue and cash flows from sales of our cloud-based Enterprise Content Collaboration solution, our success will depend to a substantial extent on the widespread adoption of cloud computing in general and of cloud-based content collaboration services in particular. Many organizations have invested substantial personnel and financial resources to integrate traditional enterprise software into their organizations and, therefore, may be reluctant or unwilling to migrate to a cloud-based model for storing, accessing, sharing and managing their content. It is difficult to predict customer adoption rates and demand for our services, the future growth rate and size of the cloud computing market or the entry of competitive services. The expansion of a cloud-based Enterprise Content Collaboration market depends on a number of factors, including the cost, performance and perceived value associated with cloud computing, as well as the ability of companies that provide cloud-based services to address security and privacy concerns. If we or other providers of cloud-based services experience security incidents, loss of customer data, disruptions in delivery or other problems, the market for cloud-based services as a whole, including our services, may be negatively affected. If cloud-based services do not achieve widespread adoption, or there is a reduction in demand for cloud-based services caused by a lack of customer acceptance, technological challenges, weakening economic conditions, security or privacy concerns, competing technologies and products, decreases in corporate spending or otherwise, it could result in decreased revenue, harm our growth rates, and adversely affect our business and operating results.

We have experienced rapid growth in recent periods. If we fail to manage our growth effectively, we may be unable to execute our business plan, maintain high levels of service or adequately address competitive challenges.

We have recently experienced a period of rapid growth in our operations and employee headcount. In particular, we grew from 369 employees as of January 31, 2012 to 972 employees as of January 31, 2014, and have also significantly increased the size of our customer base. You should not consider our recent growth in revenue as indicative of our future performance. However, we anticipate that we will significantly expand our operations and employee headcount in the near term, including internationally. This growth has placed, and future growth will place, a significant strain on our management, administrative, operational and financial infrastructure. Our success will depend in part on our ability to manage this growth effectively. To manage the expected growth of our operations and personnel, we will need to continue to improve our operational, financial

 

15


Table of Contents

and management controls, and our reporting systems and procedures. Failure to effectively manage growth could result in difficulty or delays in deploying customers, declines in quality or customer satisfaction, increases in costs, difficulties in introducing new features or other operational difficulties. Any of these difficulties could adversely impact our business performance and operating results.

Our business depends substantially on customers renewing their subscriptions with us and expanding their use of our services. Any decline in our customer renewals or failure to convince our customers to broaden their use of our services would harm our future operating results.

In order for us to maintain or improve our operating results, it is important that our customers renew their subscriptions with us when the existing subscription term expires. Our customers have no obligation to renew their subscriptions upon expiration, and we cannot assure you that customers will renew subscriptions at the same or higher level of service, if at all. Although our retention rate has historically been high, some of our customers have elected not to renew their subscriptions with us.

Our retention rate may decline or fluctuate as a result of a number of factors, including our customers’ satisfaction or dissatisfaction with our services, the effectiveness of our customer support services, our pricing, the prices of competing products or services, mergers and acquisitions affecting our customer base, the effects of global economic conditions or reductions in our customers’ spending levels. If our customers do not renew their subscriptions, purchase fewer seats or renew on less favorable terms, our revenue may decline, and we may not realize improved operating results from our customer base.

In addition, the growth of our business depends in part on our customers expanding their use of our services. The use of our cloud-based Enterprise Content Collaboration platform often expands within an organization as new users are added or as additional services are purchased by or for other departments within an organization. Further, as we have introduced new services throughout our operating history, our existing customers have constituted a significant portion of the users of such services. If we are unable to encourage our customers to broaden their use of our services, our operating results may be adversely affected.

If we are not able to provide successful enhancements, new features and modifications to our services, our business could be adversely affected.

Our industry is marked by rapid technological developments and new and enhanced applications and services. If we are unable to provide enhancements and new features for our existing services or new services that achieve market acceptance or that keep pace with rapid technological developments, our business could be adversely affected. For example, we have recently introduced Box Notes, which allows users to create documents, take notes and share ideas in real-time with anyone. The success of enhancements, new features and services depends on several factors, including the timely completion, introduction and market acceptance of such enhancements, features or services. Failure in this regard may significantly impair our revenue growth. In addition, because our services are designed to operate on a variety of systems, we will need to continuously modify and enhance our services to keep pace with changes in internet-related hardware, mobile operating systems such as iOS and Android, and other software, communication, browser and database technologies. We may not be successful in either developing these modifications and enhancements or in bringing them to market in a timely fashion. Furthermore, modifications to existing platforms or technologies will increase our research and development expenses. Any failure of our services to operate effectively with future network platforms and technologies could reduce the demand for our services, result in customer dissatisfaction and adversely affect our business.

Actual or perceived security vulnerabilities in our services or any breaches of our security controls and unauthorized access to a customer’s data could harm our business and operating results.

The services we offer involve the storage of large amounts of our customers’ sensitive and proprietary information. Cyber attacks and other malicious internet-based activity continue to increase in frequency and in magnitude generally, and cloud-based content collaboration services have been targeted in the past. As we

 

16


Table of Contents

increase our customer base and our brand becomes more widely known and recognized, we may become more of a target for these malicious third parties. If our security measures are breached as a result of third-party action, employee negligence and/or error, malfeasance, product defects or otherwise, and this results in the disruption of the confidentiality, integrity or availability of our customers’ data, we could incur significant liability to our customers and to individuals or organizations whose information was being stored by our customers, and our business may suffer and our reputation may be damaged. Techniques used to obtain unauthorized access to, or to sabotage, systems or networks, change frequently and generally are not recognized until launched against a target. Therefore, we may be unable to anticipate these techniques, react in a timely manner, or implement adequate preventive measures. In addition, our customer contracts often include (i) specific obligations that we maintain the availability of the customer’s data through our service and that we secure customer content against unauthorized access or loss, and (ii) indemnity provisions whereby we indemnify our customers for third-party claims asserted against them that result from our failure to maintain the availability of their content or securing the same from unauthorized access or loss. While our customer contracts contain limitations on our liability in connection with these obligations and indemnities, if an actual or perceived security breach occurs, the market perception of the effectiveness of our security measures could be harmed, we could be subject to indemnity or damage claims in certain customer contracts, and we could lose future sales and customers, any of which could harm our business and operating results. Furthermore, while our errors and omissions insurance policies include liability coverage for these matters, if we experienced a widespread security breach that impacted a significant number of our customers for whom we have these indemnity obligations, we could be subject to indemnity claims that exceed such coverage.

As a substantial portion of our sales efforts are increasingly targeted at enterprise customers, our sales cycle may become lengthier and more expensive, we may encounter greater pricing pressure and implementation and customization challenges, and we may have to delay revenue recognition for more complicated transactions, all of which could harm our business and operating results.

As a substantial portion of our sales efforts are increasingly targeted at enterprise customers, we face greater costs, longer sales cycles and less predictability in the completion of some of our sales. In this market segment, the customer’s decision to use our services may be an enterprise-wide decision, in which case these types of sales require us to provide greater levels of customer education regarding the uses and benefits of our services, as well as education regarding security, privacy, and data protection laws and regulations, especially for those customers in more heavily regulated industries or those with significant international operations. In addition, larger enterprises may demand more customization, integration and support services, and features. As a result of these factors, these sales opportunities may require us to devote greater sales support and professional services resources to individual customers, which could increase our costs and sales cycle and divert our own sales and professional services resources to a smaller number of larger customers. Meanwhile, this would potentially require us to delay revenue recognition on some of these transactions until the technical or implementation requirements have been met. Professional services may also be performed by a third party or a combination of our own staff and a third party. Our strategy is to work with third parties to increase the breadth of capability and depth of capacity for delivery of these services to our customers. If a customer is not satisfied with the quality or interoperability of our services with their own IT environment, we could incur additional costs to address the situation, which could adversely affect our margins. Moreover, any customer dissatisfaction with our services could damage our ability to encourage broader adoption of our services by that customer. In addition, any negative publicity resulting from such situations, regardless of its accuracy, may further damage our business by affecting our ability to compete for new business with current and prospective customers.

Privacy concerns and laws or other domestic or foreign regulations may reduce the effectiveness of our services and harm our business.

Users can use our services to store personal or identifying information. However, federal, state and foreign government bodies and agencies have adopted or are considering adopting laws and regulations regarding the collection, use and disclosure of personal information obtained from consumers and other individuals. The costs

 

17


Table of Contents

of compliance with, and other burdens imposed by, such laws and regulations that are applicable to our business or the businesses of our customers may limit the use and adoption of our services and reduce overall demand for them.

In addition, foreign data protection, privacy and other laws and regulations are often more restrictive than those in the United States. For example, a revision to the 1995 European Union Data Protection Directive is currently being considered by European legislative bodies that may include more stringent operational requirements for data processors and significant penalties for non-compliance. Similarly, there have been a number of recent legislative proposals in the United States, at both the federal and state level, that would impose new obligations in areas such as privacy and liability for copyright infringement by third parties. These existing and proposed laws and regulations can be costly to comply with and can delay or impede the development of new products, result in negative publicity, increase our operating costs, require significant management time and attention, and subject us to claims or other remedies, including fines or demands that we modify or cease existing business practices.

These U.S. federal and state and foreign laws and regulations, which can be enforced by private parties or governmental entities, are constantly evolving and can be subject to significant change. A number of proposals are pending before federal, state and foreign legislative and regulatory bodies that could affect our business. For example, the European Commission is currently considering a data protection regulation that may include operational requirements for companies that receive personal data that are different than those currently in place in the European Union, and that may also include significant penalties for non-compliance. In addition, some countries are considering legislation requiring local storage and processing of data that could increase the cost and complexity of delivering our services.

Furthermore, government agencies may seek to access sensitive information that our users upload to Box, or restrict users’ access to Box. Laws and regulations relating to government access and restrictions are evolving, and compliance with such laws and regulations could limit adoption of our services by users and create burdens on our business. Moreover, regulatory investigations into our compliance with privacy-related laws and regulations could increase our costs and divert management attention.

If we are not able to satisfy data protection, security, privacy, and other government- and industry-specific requirements, our growth could be harmed.

There are a number of data protection, security, privacy and other government- and industry-specific requirements, including those that require companies to notify individuals of data security incidents involving certain types of personal data. Security compromises experienced by our competitors, by our customers or by us may lead to public disclosures, which could harm our reputation, erode customer confidence in the effectiveness of our security measures, negatively impact our ability to attract new customers, or cause existing customers to elect not to renew their agreements with us. In addition, some of the industries we serve have industry-specific requirements relating to compliance with certain security and regulatory standards, such as those required by the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA) and the Health Information Technology for Economic and Clinical Health (HITECH). As we expand into new verticals and regions, we will need to comply with these and other new requirements. If we cannot comply or if we incur a violation in one or more of these requirements, our growth could be adversely impacted, and we could incur significant liability.

Because we recognize revenue from subscriptions for our services over the term of the subscription, downturns or upturns in new business may not be immediately reflected in our operating results.

We generally recognize revenue from customers ratably over the terms of their subscription agreements, which are typically one year. As a result, most of the revenue we report in each quarter is the result of subscription agreements entered into during previous quarters. Consequently, a decline in new or renewed subscriptions in any one quarter may not be reflected in our revenue results for that quarter. However, any such

 

18


Table of Contents

decline will negatively affect our revenue in future quarters. Accordingly, the effect of significant downturns in sales and market acceptance of our services, and potential changes in our retention rate may not be fully reflected in our operating results until future periods. Our subscription model also makes it difficult for us to rapidly increase our revenue through additional sales in any period, as revenue from new customers must be recognized over the applicable subscription term.

Our platform must integrate with a variety of operating systems and software applications that are developed by others, and if we are unable to ensure that our solutions interoperate with such systems and applications, our service may become less competitive, and our operating results may be harmed.

We offer our services across a variety of operating systems and through the internet. We are dependent on the interoperability of our platform with third-party mobile devices, desktop and mobile operating systems, as well as web browsers that we do not control. Any changes in such systems, devices or web browsers that degrade the functionality of our services or give preferential treatment to competitive services could adversely affect usage of our services. In order to deliver high quality services, it is important that they work well with a range of operating systems, networks, devices, web browsers and standards that we do not control. In addition, because a substantial number of our users access our services through mobile devices, we are particularly dependent on the interoperability of our services with mobile devices and operating systems. We may not be successful in developing relationships with key participants in the mobile industry or in developing services that operate effectively with these operating systems, networks, devices, web browsers and standards. In the event that it is difficult for our users to access and use our services, our user growth may be harmed, and our business and operating results could be adversely affected.

We cannot accurately predict new subscription or expansion rates and the impact these rates may have on our future revenue and operating results.

In order for us to improve our operating results and continue to grow our business, it is important that we continue to attract new customers and expand deployment of our solution with existing customers. To the extent we are successful in increasing our customer base, we could incur increased losses because costs associated with new customers are generally incurred up front, while revenue is recognized ratably over the term of our subscription services. Alternatively, to the extent we are unsuccessful in increasing our customer base, we could also incur increased losses as costs associated with marketing programs and new products intended to attract new customers would not be offset by incremental revenue and cash flow. Furthermore, if our customers do not expand their deployment of our services, our revenue may grow more slowly than we expect. All of these factors can negatively impact our future revenue and operating results.

Our quarterly results may fluctuate significantly and may not fully reflect the underlying performance of our business.

Our quarterly operating results, including the levels of our revenue, gross margin, profitability, cash flow and deferred revenue, may vary significantly in the future, and period-to-period comparisons of our operating results may not be meaningful. Accordingly, the results of any one quarter should not be relied upon as an indication of future performance. Our quarterly financial results may fluctuate as a result of a variety of factors, many of which are outside of our control and, as a result, may not fully reflect the underlying performance of our business. Fluctuations in quarterly results may negatively impact the value of our Class A common stock. Factors that may cause fluctuations in our quarterly financial results include, but are not limited to:

 

    our ability to attract new customers;

 

    our ability to convert users of our limited free versions to paying customers;

 

    the addition or loss of large customers, including through acquisitions or consolidations;

 

    our retention rate;

 

19


Table of Contents
    the timing of recognition of revenue;

 

    the amount and timing of operating expenses related to the maintenance and expansion of our business, operations and infrastructure;

 

    network outages or security breaches;

 

    general economic, industry and market conditions;

 

    increases or decreases in the number of features in our services or pricing changes upon any renewals of customer agreements;

 

    changes in our pricing policies or those of our competitors;

 

    seasonal variations in sales of our services, which has historically been highest in the fourth quarter of a calendar year;

 

    the timing and success of new services and service introductions by us and our competitors or any other change in the competitive dynamics of our industry, including consolidation among competitors, customers or strategic partners; and

 

    the timing of expenses related to the development or acquisition of technologies or businesses and potential future charges for impairment of goodwill from acquired companies.

One of our marketing strategies is to offer a limited free version of our service, and we may not be able to realize the benefits of this strategy.

We offer a limited version of our service to users free of charge in order to promote additional usage, brand and product awareness, and adoption. Some users never convert from a free version to a paid version of our service. Our marketing strategy also depends in part on persuading users who use the free version of our service to convince decision-makers to purchase and deploy our service within their organization. To the extent that these users do not become, or lead others to become, paying customers, we will not realize the intended benefits of this marketing strategy, and our ability to grow our business and revenue may be harmed.

If we fail to effectively manage our technical operations infrastructure, our customers may experience service outages and delays in the further deployment of our services, which may adversely affect our business.

We have experienced significant growth in the number of users and the amount of data that our operations infrastructure supports. We seek to maintain sufficient excess capacity in our operations infrastructure to meet the needs of all of our customers. We also seek to maintain excess capacity to facilitate the rapid provisioning of new customer deployments and the expansion of existing customer deployments. In addition, we need to properly manage our technological operations infrastructure in order to support version control, changes in hardware and software parameters and the evolution of our services. However, the provision of new hosting infrastructure requires significant lead-time. We have experienced, and may in the future experience, website disruptions, outages and other performance problems. These problems may be caused by a variety of factors, including infrastructure changes, human or software errors, viruses, security attacks, fraud, spikes in customer usage and denial of service issues. In some instances, we may not be able to identify the cause or causes of these performance problems within an acceptable period of time, which may harm our reputation and operating results. Furthermore, if we do not accurately predict our infrastructure requirements, our existing customers may experience service outages that may subject us to financial penalties, financial liabilities and customer losses. If our operations infrastructure fails to keep pace with increased sales, customers may experience delays as we seek to obtain additional capacity, which could adversely affect our reputation and our revenue.

Interruptions or delays in service from our third-party datacenter hosting facilities could impair the delivery of our services and harm our business.

We currently store our customers’ information within two third-party datacenter hosting facilities located in Northern California. As part of our current disaster recovery arrangements, our production environment and all

 

20


Table of Contents

of our customers’ data is currently replicated in near real time in a facility located in Las Vegas, Nevada. In addition, all of our customers’ data is further replicated on a third-party storage platform located on the East Coast. These facilities are located in areas prone to earthquakes and are also vulnerable to damage or interruption from floods, fires, power loss, telecommunications failures and similar events. They may also be subject to break-ins, sabotage, intentional acts of vandalism and similar misconduct. Any damage to, or failure of, our systems generally could result in interruptions in our service. Interruptions in our service may reduce our revenue, cause us to issue credits or pay penalties, cause customers to terminate their subscriptions and adversely affect our renewal rate and our ability to attract new customers. Our business will also be harmed if our customers and potential customers believe our service is unreliable. Despite precautions taken at these facilities, the occurrence of a natural disaster, an act of terrorism, a decision to close the facilities without adequate notice or other unanticipated problems at these facilities could result in lengthy interruptions in our service. Even with the disaster recovery arrangements, our service could be interrupted. As we continue to add datacenters and add capacity in our existing datacenters, we may move or transfer our data and our customers’ data. Despite precautions taken during this process, any unsuccessful data transfers may impair the delivery of our service. Further, as we continue to grow and scale our business to meet the needs of our customers, additional burdens may be placed on our hosting facilities. In particular, a rapid expansion of our business could cause our network or systems to fail.

If we overestimate or underestimate our data center capacity requirements, our operating results could be adversely affected.

Only a small percentage of our customers that are organizations currently use our service as a way to organize all of their internal files. In particular, larger organizations and enterprises typically use our service to connect people and their most important information so that they are able to get work done more efficiently. However, over time, we may experience an increase in customers that look to Box as their complete content storage solution. The costs associated with leasing and maintaining our data centers already constitute a significant portion of our capital and operating expenses. We continuously evaluate our short- and long-term data center capacity requirements to ensure adequate capacity for new and existing customers while minimizing unnecessary excess capacity costs. If we overestimate the demand for our cloud-based storage service and therefore secure excess data center capacity, our operating margins could be reduced. If we underestimate our data center capacity requirements, we may not be able to service the expanding needs of new and existing customers and may be required to limit new customer acquisition, which would impair our revenue growth. Furthermore, regardless of our ability to appropriately manage our data center capacity requirements, an increase in the number of organizations, in particular large businesses and enterprises, that use our service as a larger component of their content storage requirements could result in lower gross and operating margins or otherwise have an adverse impact on our financial condition and operating results.

We depend on highly skilled personnel to grow and operate our business, and if we are unable to hire, retain and motivate our personnel, we may not be able to grow effectively.

Our future success will depend upon our continued ability to identify, hire, develop, motivate and retain highly skilled personnel, including senior management, engineers, designers, product managers, sales representatives, and customer support representatives. Our ability to execute efficiently is dependent upon contributions from our employees, including our senior management team and, in particular, Aaron Levie, our co-founder, Chairman and Chief Executive Officer. In addition, occasionally, there may be changes in our senior management team that may be disruptive to our business. If our senior management team, including any new hires that we may make, fails to work together effectively and to execute on our plans and strategies on a timely basis, our business could be harmed.

Our growth strategy also depends on our ability to expand our organization with highly skilled personnel. Identifying, recruiting, training and integrating qualified individuals will require significant time, expense and attention. In addition to hiring new employees, we must continue to focus on retaining our best employees. Many

 

21


Table of Contents

of our employees may be able to receive significant proceeds from sales of our equity in the public markets after this offering, which may reduce their motivation to continue to work for us. Competition for highly skilled personnel is intense, particularly in the San Francisco Bay Area, where our headquarters are located. We may need to invest significant amounts of cash and equity to attract and retain new employees, and we may never realize returns on these investments. If we are not able to effectively add and retain employees, our ability to achieve our strategic objectives will be adversely impacted, and our business will be harmed.

We may be sued by third parties for alleged infringement of their proprietary rights.

There is considerable patent and other intellectual property development activity in our industry. Our success depends on our not infringing upon the intellectual property rights of others. Our competitors, as well as a number of other entities, including non-practicing entities, and individuals, may own or claim to own intellectual property relating to our industry. Certain third parties have claimed that we are infringing upon their intellectual property rights, and we may be found to be infringing upon such rights. In addition, we cannot assure you that actions by other third parties alleging infringement by us of third-party patents will not be asserted or prosecuted against us. In the future, others may claim that our services and underlying technology infringe or violate their intellectual property rights. However, we may be unaware of the intellectual property rights that others may claim cover some or all of our technology or services. Any claims or litigation could cause us to incur significant expenses and, if successfully asserted against us, could require that we pay substantial damages or ongoing royalty payments, prevent us from offering our services, or require that we comply with other unfavorable terms. We may also be obligated to indemnify our customers or business partners or pay substantial settlement costs, including royalty payments, in connection with any such claim or litigation and to obtain licenses, modify services, or refund fees, which could be costly. Even if we were to prevail in such a dispute, any litigation regarding our intellectual property could be costly and time consuming and divert the attention of our management and key personnel from our business operations.

Any failure to protect our intellectual property rights could impair our ability to protect our proprietary technology and our brand.

Our success and ability to compete depend in part on our intellectual property. As of January 31, 2014, we had four issued U.S. patents, one issued Great Britain patent and more than 140 pending patent applications. We primarily rely on copyright, trade secret and trademark laws, trade secret protection and confidentiality or license agreements with our employees, customers, partners and others to protect our intellectual property rights. However, the steps we take to protect our intellectual property rights may be inadequate. We may not be able to obtain any further patents, and our pending applications may not result in the issuance of patents. We have one issued patent and pending patent applications outside the U.S., and we may have to expend significant resources to obtain additional patents as we expand our international operations.

In order to protect our intellectual property rights, we may be required to spend significant resources to monitor and protect these rights. Litigation brought to protect and enforce our intellectual property rights could be costly, time-consuming and distracting to management and could result in the impairment or loss of portions of our intellectual property. Furthermore, our efforts to enforce our intellectual property rights may be met with defenses, counterclaims and countersuits attacking the validity and enforceability of our intellectual property rights. Accordingly, we may not be able to prevent third parties from infringing upon or misappropriating our intellectual property. Our failure to secure, protect and enforce our intellectual property rights could materially adversely affect our brand and adversely impact our business.

We rely on third parties for certain financial and operational services essential to our ability to manage our business. A failure or disruption in these services could materially and adversely affect our ability to manage our business effectively.

We rely on third parties for certain essential financial and operational services. Traditionally, the vast majority of these services have been provided by large enterprise software vendors who license their software to

 

22


Table of Contents

customers. However, we receive many of these services on a subscription basis from various software-as-a-service companies that are smaller and have shorter operating histories than traditional software vendors. Moreover, these vendors provide their services to us via a cloud-based model instead of software that is installed on our premises. As a result, we depend upon these vendors providing us with services that are always available and are free of errors or defects that could cause disruptions in our business processes, which would adversely affect our ability to operate and manage our operations.

We are subject to governmental export controls that could impair our ability to compete in international markets due to licensing requirements and economic sanctions programs that subject us to liability if we are not in full compliance with applicable laws.

Certain of our services are subject to export controls, including the U.S. Department of Commerce’s Export Administration Regulations and various economic and trade sanctions regulations administered by the U.S. Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Controls. The provision of our products and services must comply with these laws. The U.S. export control laws and U.S. economic sanctions laws include prohibitions on the sale or supply of certain products and services to U.S. embargoed or sanctioned countries, governments, persons and entities and also require authorization for the export of encryption items. In addition, various countries regulate the import of certain encryption technology, including through import permitting and licensing requirements, and have enacted laws that could limit our ability to distribute our services or could limit our customers’ ability to implement our services in those countries.

Although we take precautions to prevent our services from being provided in violation of such laws, our solutions may have been in the past, and could in the future be, provided inadvertently in violation of such laws, despite the precautions we take. If we fail to comply with these laws, we and our employees could be subject to civil or criminal penalties, including the possible loss of export privileges, monetary penalties, and, in extreme cases, imprisonment of responsible employees for knowing and willful violations of these laws. We may also be adversely affected through penalties, reputational harm, loss of access to certain markets, or otherwise.

Changes in our services, or changes in export, sanctions and import laws, may delay the introduction and sale of our services in international markets, prevent our customers with international operations from deploying our services or, in some cases, prevent the export or import of our services to certain countries, governments, persons or entities altogether. Any change in export or import regulations, economic sanctions or related laws, shift in the enforcement or scope of existing regulations, or change in the countries, governments, persons or technologies targeted by such regulations, could result in decreased use of our services, or in our decreased ability to export or sell our services to existing or potential customers with international operations. Any decreased use of our services or limitation on our ability to export or sell our services would likely adversely affect our business, financial condition and operating results.

We focus on product innovation and user engagement rather than short-term operating results.

We focus heavily on developing and launching new and innovative products and features, as well as on improving the user experience for our services. We also focus on growing the number of Box users and paying organizations through direct field sales, direct inside sales, indirect channel sales and through word-of-mouth by individual users, some of whom use our services at no cost. We prioritize innovation and the experience for users on our platform, as well as the growth of our user base, over short-term operating results. We frequently make product and service decisions that may reduce our short-term operating results if we believe that the decisions are consistent with our goals to improve the user experience and to develop innovative features that we feel our users desire. These decisions may not be consistent with the short-term expectations of investors and may not produce the long-term benefits that we expect.

 

23


Table of Contents

We provide service level commitments under our subscription agreements. If we fail to meet these contractual commitments, we could be obligated to provide credits or refunds for prepaid amounts related to unused subscription services or face subscription terminations, which could adversely affect our revenue. Furthermore, any failure in our delivery of high-quality customer support services may adversely affect our relationships with our customers and our financial results.

Our subscription agreements with customers provide certain service level commitments. If we are unable to meet the stated service level commitments or suffer extended periods of downtime that exceed the periods allowed under our customer agreements, we may be obligated to provide these customers with service credits, or we could face subscription terminations, which could significantly impact our revenue. Any extended service outages could also adversely affect our reputation, which would also impact our future revenue and operating results.

Our customers depend on our customer success organization to resolve technical issues relating to our services. We may be unable to respond quickly enough to accommodate short-term increases in customer demand for support services. Increased customer demand for these services, without corresponding revenue, could increase costs and adversely affect our operating results. In addition, our sales process is highly dependent on the ease of use of our services, on our reputation and on positive recommendations from our existing customers. Any failure to maintain high-quality customer support, or a market perception that we do not maintain high-quality support, could adversely affect our reputation and our ability to sell our services to existing and prospective customers.

If our services fail to perform properly or if we are unable to scale our services to meet the needs of our customers, our reputation could be adversely affected, our market share could decline and we could be subject to liability claims.

Our services are inherently complex and may contain material defects or errors. Any defects either in functionality or that cause interruptions in the availability of our services, as well as user error, could result in:

 

    loss or delayed market acceptance and sales;

 

    breach of warranty claims;

 

    sales credits or refunds for prepaid amounts related to unused subscription services;

 

    loss of customers;

 

    diversion of development and customer service resources; and

 

    harm to our reputation.

The costs incurred in correcting any material defects or errors might be substantial and could adversely affect our operating results.

Because of the large amount of data that we collect and manage, it is possible that hardware failures, errors in our systems or user errors could result in data loss or corruption that our customers regard as significant. Furthermore, the availability or performance of our services could be adversely affected by a number of factors, including customers’ inability to access the internet, the failure of our network or software systems, security breaches or variability in customer traffic for our services. We may be required to issue credits or refunds for prepaid amounts related to unused services or otherwise be liable to our customers for damages they may incur resulting from some of these events. In addition to potential liability, if we experience interruptions in the availability of our services, our reputation could be adversely affected, which could result in the loss of customers. For example, our customers access our services through their internet service providers. If a service provider fails to provide sufficient capacity to support our services or otherwise experiences service outages, such failure could interrupt our customers’ access to our services, adversely affect their perception of our services’ reliability and consequently reduce our revenue.

 

24


Table of Contents

Our errors and omissions insurance may be inadequate or may not be available in the future on acceptable terms, or at all. In addition, our policy may not cover all claims made against us, and defending a lawsuit, regardless of its merit, could be costly and divert management’s attention.

Furthermore, we will need to ensure that our services can scale to meet the needs of our customers, particularly as we continue to focus on larger enterprise customers. If we are not able to provide our services at the scale required by our customers, potential customers may not adopt our solution and existing customers may not renew their agreements with us.

If the prices we charge for our services are unacceptable to our customers, our operating results will be harmed.

As the market for our services matures, or as new or existing competitors introduce new products or services that compete with ours, we may experience pricing pressure and be unable to renew our agreements with existing customers or attract new customers at prices that are consistent with our pricing model and operating budget. If this were to occur, it is possible that we would have to change our pricing model or reduce our prices, which could harm our revenue, gross margin and operating results.

Sales to customers outside the United States or with international operations expose us to risks inherent in international sales.

A key element of our growth strategy is to expand our international operations and develop a worldwide customer base. To date, we have not realized a substantial portion of our revenue from customers outside the United States. Operating in international markets requires significant resources and management attention and will subject us to regulatory, economic, geographic and political risks that are different from those in the United States. Because of our limited experience with international operations and significant differences between international and U.S. markets, our international expansion efforts may not be successful in creating demand for our services outside of the United States or in effectively selling subscriptions to our services in all of the international markets we enter. In addition, we will face specific risks in doing business internationally that could adversely affect our business, including:

 

    the need to localize and adapt our services for specific countries, including translation into foreign languages and associated expenses;

 

    data privacy laws that, among other things, could require that customer data be stored and processed in a designated territory;

 

    difficulties in staffing and managing foreign operations;

 

    different pricing environments, longer sales cycles and longer accounts receivable payment cycles and collections issues;

 

    new and different sources of competition;

 

    weaker protection for intellectual property and other legal rights than in the United States and practical difficulties in enforcing intellectual property and other rights outside of the United States;

 

    laws and business practices favoring local competitors;

 

    compliance challenges related to the complexity of multiple, conflicting and changing governmental laws and regulations, including employment, tax, privacy and data protection laws and regulations;

 

    increased financial accounting and reporting burdens and complexities;

 

    restrictions on the transfer of funds;

 

    adverse tax consequences; and

 

    unstable regional, economic and political conditions.

 

25


Table of Contents

We both sell our services and incur operating expenses in various currencies. Therefore, fluctuations in the value of the U.S. dollar and foreign currencies may impact our operating results when translated into U.S. dollars. We currently manage our exchange rate risk by matching foreign currency cash balances with payables but do not have any other hedging programs in place to limit the risk of exchange rate fluctuations.

Failure to adequately expand our direct sales force will impede our growth.

We will need to continue to expand and optimize our sales infrastructure in order to grow our customer base and our business. We plan to continue to expand our direct sales force, both domestically and internationally. Identifying and recruiting qualified personnel and training them requires significant time, expense and attention. Our business may be adversely affected if our efforts to expand and train our direct sales force do not generate a corresponding increase in revenue. If we are unable to hire, develop and retain talented sales personnel or if new direct sales personnel are unable to achieve desired productivity levels in a reasonable period of time, we may not be able to realize the intended benefits of this investment or increase our revenue.

If we are unable to maintain and promote our brand, our business and operating results may be harmed.

We believe that maintaining and promoting our brand is critical to expanding our customer base. Maintaining and promoting our brand will depend largely on our ability to continue to provide useful, reliable and innovative services, which we may not do successfully. We may introduce new features, products, services or terms of service that our customers do not like, which may negatively affect our brand and reputation. Additionally, the actions of third parties may affect our brand and reputation if customers do not have a positive experience using third-party apps or other services that are integrated with Box. Maintaining and enhancing our brand may require us to make substantial investments, and these investments may not achieve the desired goals. If we fail to successfully promote and maintain our brand or if we incur excessive expenses in this effort, our business and operating results could be adversely affected.

Our growth depends in part on the success of our strategic relationships with third parties.

In order to grow our business, we anticipate that we will continue to depend on our relationships with third parties, such as alliance partners, distributors, system integrators and developers. For example, we have entered into agreements with partners to market, resell, integrate with or endorse our services. We also partner with channel partners and resellers to sell our services. Identifying partners and resellers, and negotiating and documenting relationships with them, requires significant time and resources. Also, we depend on our ecosystem of system integrators and developers to create applications that will integrate with our platform. Our competitors may be effective in providing incentives to third parties to favor their products or services, or to prevent or reduce subscriptions to our services. In addition, acquisitions of our partners by our competitors could result in a decrease in the number of current and potential customers, as our partners may no longer facilitate the adoption of our services by potential customers.

If we are unsuccessful in establishing or maintaining our relationships with third parties, our ability to compete in the marketplace or to grow our revenue could be impaired and our operating results may suffer. Even if we are successful, we cannot assure you that these relationships will result in increased customer usage of our services or increased revenue.

Furthermore, if our partners and resellers fail to perform as expected, our reputation may be harmed and our business and operating results could be adversely affected.

 

26


Table of Contents

We depend on our ecosystem of system integrators and developers to create applications that will integrate with our platform.

We depend on our partner ecosystem of system integrators and developers to create applications that will integrate with our platform. This presents certain risks to our business, including:

 

    we cannot provide any assurance that these applications meet the same quality standards that we apply to our own development efforts, and to the extent that they contain bugs or defects, they may create disruptions in our customers’ use of our services or negatively affect our brand;

 

    we do not currently provide support for software applications developed by our partner ecosystem, and users may be left without support and potentially cease using our services if these system integrators and developers do not provide adequate support for their applications; and

 

    these system integrators and developers may not possess the appropriate intellectual property rights to develop and share their applications.

Many of these risks are not within our control to prevent, and our brand may be damaged if these applications do not perform to our users’ satisfaction and that dissatisfaction is attributed to us.

Our corporate culture has contributed to our success, and if we cannot maintain this culture as we grow, we could lose the innovation, creativity and teamwork fostered by our culture, and our business may be harmed.

We believe that our culture has been and will continue to be a key contributor to our success. From January 31, 2012 to January 31, 2014, we increased the size of our workforce by over 600 employees, and we expect to continue to hire aggressively as we expand. If we do not continue to develop our corporate culture or maintain our core values as we grow and evolve both in the United States and internationally, we may be unable to foster the innovation, creativity and teamwork we believe we need to support our growth. Moreover, liquidity available to our employee security holders following this offering could lead to disparities of wealth among our employees, which could adversely impact relations among employees and our culture in general. Our transition from a private company to a public company may result in a change to our corporate culture, which could harm our business.

Our services contain open source software, and we license some of our software through open source projects, which may pose particular risks to our proprietary software, products, and services in a manner that could have a negative impact on our business.

We use open source software in our services and will use open source software in the future. In addition, we regularly contribute software source code to open source projects under open source licenses or release internal software projects under open source licenses, and anticipate doing so in the future. The terms of many open source licenses to which we are subject have not been interpreted by U.S. or foreign courts, and there is a risk that open source software licenses could be construed in a manner that imposes unanticipated conditions or restrictions on our ability to provide or distribute our services. Additionally, we may from time to time face claims from third parties claiming ownership of, or demanding release of, the open source software or derivative works that we developed using such software, which could include our proprietary source code, or otherwise seeking to enforce the terms of the applicable open source license. These claims could result in litigation and could require us to make our software source code freely available, purchase a costly license or cease offering the implicated services unless and until we can re-engineer them to avoid infringement. This re-engineering process could require significant additional research and development resources, and we may not be able to complete it successfully. In addition to risks related to license requirements, use of certain open source software can lead to greater risks than use of third-party commercial software, as open source licensors generally do not provide warranties or controls on the origin of software. Additionally, because any software source code we contribute to open source projects is publicly available, our ability to protect our intellectual property rights with respect to such software source code may be limited or lost entirely, and we are unable to prevent our competitors or others

 

27


Table of Contents

from using such contributed software source code. Any of these risks could be difficult to eliminate or manage, and, if not addressed, could have a negative effect on our business, financial condition and operating results.

Future acquisitions and investments could disrupt our business and harm our financial condition and operating results.

Our success will depend, in part, on our ability to expand our services and grow our business in response to changing technologies, customer demands, and competitive pressures. In some circumstances, we may choose to do so through the acquisition of complementary businesses and technologies rather than through internal development, including, for example, our recent acquisition of Crocodoc, Inc., a company with advanced HTML5 based document rendering technology. The identification of suitable acquisition candidates can be difficult, time-consuming and costly, and we may not be able to successfully complete identified acquisitions. The risks we face in connection with acquisitions include:

 

    diversion of management time and focus from operating our business to addressing acquisition integration challenges;

 

    coordination of research and development and sales and marketing functions;

 

    retention of key employees from the acquired company;

 

    cultural challenges associated with integrating employees from the acquired company into our organization;

 

    integration of the acquired company’s accounting, management information, human resources and other administrative systems;

 

    the need to implement or improve controls, procedures, and policies at a business that prior to the acquisition may have lacked effective controls, procedures and policies;

 

    liability for activities of the acquired company before the acquisition, including intellectual property infringement claims, violations of laws, commercial disputes, tax liabilities and other known and unknown liabilities;

 

    unanticipated write-offs or charges; and

 

    litigation or other claims in connection with the acquired company, including claims from terminated employees, customers, former stockholders or other third parties.

Our failure to address these risks or other problems encountered in connection with our past or future acquisitions and investments could cause us to fail to realize the anticipated benefits of these acquisitions or investments, cause us to incur unanticipated liabilities, and harm our business generally. Future acquisitions could also result in dilutive issuances of our equity securities, the incurrence of debt, contingent liabilities, amortization expenses, incremental operating expenses or the write-off of goodwill, any of which could harm our financial condition or operating results.

We may require additional capital to support our operations or the growth of our business, and we cannot be certain that this capital will be available on reasonable terms when required, or at all.

On occasion, we may need additional financing to operate or grow our business. Our ability to obtain additional financing, if and when required, will depend on investor and lender demand, our operating performance, the condition of the capital markets and other factors. We cannot guarantee that additional financing will be available to us on favorable terms when required, or at all. If we raise additional funds through the issuance of equity, equity-linked or debt securities, those securities may have rights, preferences or privileges senior to the rights of our Class A common stock, and our existing stockholders may experience dilution. If we are unable to obtain adequate financing or financing on terms satisfactory to us when we require it, our ability to continue to support the operation or growth of our business could be significantly impaired and our operating results may be harmed.

 

28


Table of Contents

Financing agreements we are party to or may become party to may contain operating and financial covenants that restrict our business and financing activities.

Our existing credit agreement with certain lenders contains certain operating and financial restrictions and covenants, including the prohibition of the incurrence of certain indebtedness and liens, the prohibition of certain investments, restrictions against certain merger and consolidation transactions, certain restrictions against the disposition of assets and the requirement to maintain a minimum level of liquidity. These restrictions and covenants, as well as those contained in any future financing agreements that we may enter into, may restrict our ability to finance our operations, engage in, expand or otherwise pursue our business activities and strategies. Our ability to comply with these covenants may be affected by events beyond our control, and breaches of these covenants could result in a default under the credit agreement and any future financial agreements that we may enter into. If not waived, defaults could cause our outstanding indebtedness under our credit agreement and any future financing agreements that we may enter into to become immediately due and payable.

Adverse economic conditions may negatively impact our business.

Our business depends on the overall demand for Enterprise Content Collaboration and on the economic health of our current and prospective customers. The financial recession resulted in a significant weakening of the economy in the United States, Europe and worldwide, more limited availability of credit, a reduction in business confidence and activity, and other difficulties that may affect one or more of the industries to which we sell our services. In addition, there has been pressure to reduce government spending in the United States, and tax increases and spending cuts at the Federal level (the sequester) have gone into effect. In the event lawmakers cannot agree on matters such as the national debt ceiling or future budgets, the United States could default on its obligations. This may reduce demand for our services from organizations that receive funding from the U.S. government and this could negatively affect the U.S. economy, which could further reduce demand for our services. Furthermore, the economies of certain European countries have been experiencing difficulties associated with high sovereign debt levels, weakness in the banking sector and uncertainty over the future of the eurozone. We have operations in the United Kingdom, Germany and France and current and potential customers in Europe. If economic conditions in Europe and other key markets for our services continue to remain uncertain or deteriorate further, many customers may delay or reduce their information technology spending. This could result in reductions in sales of our services, longer sales cycles, reductions in subscription duration and value, slower adoption of new technologies and increased price competition. Any of these events would likely have an adverse effect on our business, operating results and financial position. In addition, there can be no assurance that Enterprise Content Collaboration spending levels will increase following any recovery.

Changes in laws and regulations related to the internet or changes in the internet infrastructure itself may diminish the demand for our services, and could have a negative impact on our business.

The future success of our business depends upon the continued use of the internet as a primary medium for commerce, communication and business services. Federal, state or foreign government bodies or agencies have in the past adopted, and may in the future adopt, laws or regulations affecting the use of the internet as a commercial medium. Changes in these laws or regulations could require us to modify our services in order to comply with these changes. In addition, government agencies or private organizations may begin to impose taxes, fees or other charges for accessing the internet or commerce conducted via the internet. These laws or charges could limit the growth of internet-related commerce or communications generally, or result in reductions in the demand for internet-based services such as ours.

In addition, the use of the internet and, in particular, the cloud as a business tool could be adversely affected due to delays in the development or adoption of new standards and protocols to handle increased demands of internet activity, security, reliability, cost, ease of use, accessibility, and quality of service. The performance of the internet and its acceptance as a business tool have been adversely affected by “viruses,” “worms” and similar malicious programs, and the internet has experienced a variety of outages and other delays as a result of damage to portions of its infrastructure. If the use of the internet is adversely affected by these issues, demand for our services could suffer.

 

29


Table of Contents

We employ third-party licensed software for use in or with our services, and the inability to maintain these licenses or errors in the software we license could result in increased costs, or reduced service levels, which would adversely affect our business.

Our services incorporate certain third-party software obtained under licenses from other companies. We anticipate that we will continue to rely on such third-party software and development tools in the future. Although we believe that there are commercially reasonable alternatives to the third-party software we currently license, this may not always be the case, or it may be difficult or costly to replace. In addition, integration of the software used in our services with new third-party software may require significant work and require substantial investment of our time and resources. Also, to the extent that our services depend upon the successful operation of third-party software in conjunction with our software, any undetected errors or defects in this third-party software could prevent the deployment or impair the functionality of our services, delay new services introductions, result in a failure of our services, and injure our reputation. Our use of additional or alternative third-party software would require us to enter into additional license agreements with third parties.

If we fail to maintain an effective system of disclosure controls and internal control over financial reporting, our ability to produce timely and accurate financial statements or comply with applicable regulations could be impaired.

As a public company, we will be subject to the reporting requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (Exchange Act), the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and the listing standards of the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE). We expect that the requirements of these rules and regulations will continue to increase our legal, accounting and financial compliance costs, make some activities more difficult, time consuming and costly, and place significant strain on our personnel, systems and resources.

The Sarbanes-Oxley Act requires, among other things, that we maintain effective disclosure controls and procedures, and internal control over financial reporting. We are continuing to develop and refine our disclosure controls and other procedures that are designed to ensure that information required to be disclosed by us in the reports that we will file with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) is recorded, processed, summarized and reported within the time periods specified in SEC rules and forms. We are also continuing to improve our internal control over financial reporting. We have expended, and anticipate that we will continue to expend, significant resources in order to maintain and improve the effectiveness of our disclosure controls and procedures and internal control over financial reporting.

Our current controls and any new controls that we develop may become inadequate because of changes in conditions in our business, including increased complexity resulting from our international expansion. Further, weaknesses in our disclosure controls or our internal control over financial reporting may be discovered in the future. Any failure to develop or maintain effective controls, or any difficulties encountered in their implementation or improvement, could harm our operating results or cause us to fail to meet our reporting obligations and may result in a restatement of our financial statements for prior periods. Any failure to implement and maintain effective internal control over financial reporting could also adversely affect the results of management reports and independent registered public accounting firm audits of our internal control over financial reporting that we will eventually be required to include in our periodic reports that will be filed with the SEC. Ineffective disclosure controls and procedures, and internal control over financial reporting could also cause investors to lose confidence in our reported financial and other information, which would likely have a negative effect on the market price of our Class A common stock. In addition, if we are unable to continue to meet these requirements, we may not be able to remain listed on the NYSE.

We are not currently required to comply with the SEC rules that implement Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, and are therefore not required to make a formal assessment of the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting for that purpose. Upon becoming a public company, we will be required to provide an annual management report on the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting commencing with our second annual report on Form 10-K. Our independent registered public accounting firm is not required to

 

30


Table of Contents

audit the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting until after we are no longer an “emerging growth company,” as defined in the JOBS Act. At such time, our independent registered public accounting firm may issue a report that is adverse in the event it is not satisfied with the level at which our internal control over financial reporting is documented, designed or operating.

Any failure to maintain effective disclosure controls and internal control over financial reporting could have a material and adverse effect on our business and operating results, and cause a decline in the market price of our Class A common stock.

We are an emerging growth company, and any decision on our part to comply only with certain reduced reporting and disclosure requirements applicable to emerging growth companies could make our Class A common stock less attractive to investors.

We are an emerging growth company, and, for as long as we continue to be an emerging growth company, we may choose to take advantage of exemptions from various reporting requirements applicable to other public companies but not to “emerging growth companies,” including: not being required to have our independent registered public accounting firm audit our internal control over financial reporting under Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, reduced disclosure obligations regarding executive compensation in our periodic reports and proxy statements, and exemptions from the requirements of holding a nonbinding advisory vote on executive compensation and stockholder approval of any golden parachute payments not previously approved. We could be an emerging growth company for up to five years following the completion of this offering. We will remain an emerging growth company until the earliest to occur of (i) the last day of the fiscal year in which we have more than $1.0 billion in annual revenue; (ii) the date we qualify as a “large accelerated filer,” with at least $700 million of equity securities held by non-affiliates; (iii) the date on which we have issued, in any three-year period, more than $1.0 billion in non-convertible debt securities; and (iv) the last day of the fiscal year ending after the fifth anniversary of the completion of this offering. We cannot predict if investors will find our Class A common stock less attractive if we choose to rely on these exemptions. If some investors find our Class A common stock less attractive as a result of any choices we make to avail ourselves of these exemptions, there may be a less active trading market for our Class A common stock and the market price of our Class A common stock may be more volatile.

Under the JOBS Act, emerging growth companies can also delay adopting new or revised accounting standards until such time as those standards apply to private companies. We have irrevocably elected not to avail ourselves of this accommodation allowing for delayed adoption of new or revised accounting standards, and, therefore, we will be subject to the same new or revised accounting standards as other public companies that are not emerging growth companies.

Our ability to use our net operating loss carryforwards and certain other tax attributes may be limited.

As of January 31, 2014, we had U.S. federal net operating loss carryforwards of approximately $263.7 million and state net operating loss carryforwards of approximately $262.6 million. Under Sections 382 and 383 of Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the Code), if a corporation undergoes an “ownership change,” the corporation’s ability to use its pre-change net operating loss carryforwards and other pre-change tax attributes, such as research tax credits, to offset its post-change income and taxes may be limited. In general, an “ownership change” occurs if there is a cumulative change in our ownership by “5% shareholders” that exceeds 50 percentage points over a rolling three-year period. Similar rules may apply under state tax laws. We have in the past experienced an ownership change which has impacted our ability to fully realize the benefit of these net operating loss carryforwards. If we experience additional ownership changes as a result of this offering or future transactions in our stock, then we may be further limited in our ability to use our net operating loss carryforwards and other tax assets to reduce taxes owed on the net taxable income that we earn. Any such limitations on the ability to use our net operating loss carryforwards and other tax assets could adversely impact our business, financial condition and operating results.

 

31


Table of Contents

Tax laws or regulations could be enacted or changed and existing tax laws or regulations could be applied to us or to our customers in a manner that could increase the costs of our services and adversely impact our business.

The application of federal, state, local and international tax laws to services provided electronically is unclear and continuously evolving. Income, sales, use or other tax laws, statutes, rules, regulations or ordinances could be enacted or amended at any time, possibly with retroactive effect, and could be applied solely or disproportionately to services provided over the internet. These enactments or amendments could adversely affect our sales activity due to the inherent cost increase the taxes would represent and ultimately result in a negative impact on our operating results and cash flows.

In addition, existing tax laws, statutes, rules, regulations or ordinances could be interpreted or applied adversely to us, possibly with retroactive effect, which could require us or our customers to pay additional tax amounts, as well as require us or our customers to pay fines or penalties, as well as interest for past amounts. If we are unsuccessful in collecting such taxes due from our customers, we could be held liable for such costs, thereby adversely impacting our operating results and cash flows.

We may be subject to additional tax liabilities.

We are subject to income, sales, use, value added and other taxes in the United States and other countries in which we conduct business, and such laws and rates vary by jurisdiction. Certain jurisdictions in which we do not collect sales, use, value added or other taxes on our sales may assert that such taxes are applicable, which could result in tax assessments, penalties and interest, and we may be required to collect such taxes in the future. Significant judgment is required in determining our worldwide provision for income taxes. These determinations are highly complex and require detailed analysis of the available information and applicable statutes and regulatory materials. In the ordinary course of our business, there are many transactions and calculations where the ultimate tax determination is uncertain. Although we believe our tax estimates are reasonable, the final determination of tax audits and any related litigation could be materially different from our historical tax practices, provisions and accruals. If we receive an adverse ruling as a result of an audit, or we unilaterally determine that we have misinterpreted provisions of the tax regulations to which we are subject, there could be a material effect on our tax provision, net income or cash flows in the period or periods for which that determination is made. In addition, liabilities associated with taxes are often subject to an extended or indefinite statute of limitations period. Therefore, we may be subject to additional tax liability (including penalties and interest) for a particular year for extended periods of time.

Our reported financial results may be adversely affected by changes in accounting principles generally accepted in the United States.

Generally accepted accounting principles in the United States are subject to interpretation by the Financial Accounting Standards Board, the SEC and various bodies formed to promulgate and interpret appropriate accounting principles. A change in these principles or interpretations could have a significant effect on our reported financial results, and could affect the reporting of transactions completed before the announcement of a change.

Risks Related to Ownership of Our Class A Common Stock and this Offering

The dual class structure of our common stock has the effect of concentrating voting control with those stockholders who held our capital stock prior to the completion of this offering, including our executive officers, employees and directors and their affiliates, which will limit your ability to influence the outcome of important transactions, including a change in control.

Our Class B common stock has 10 votes per share, and our Class A common stock, which is the stock we are offering in this offering, has one vote per share. Upon the completion of this offering, stockholders who hold

 

32


Table of Contents

shares of our Class B common stock, including our executive officers, employees and directors and their affiliates, will collectively hold approximately     % of the voting power of our outstanding capital stock. Because of the ten-to-one voting ratio between our Class B common stock and Class A common stock, after the completion of this offering, the holders of our Class B common stock will collectively continue to control a majority of the combined voting power of our capital stock and therefore be able to control all matters submitted to our stockholders for approval so long as the shares of our Class B common stock represent at least     % of all outstanding shares of our Class A common stock and Class B common stock. These holders of our Class B common stock may also have interests that differ from yours and may vote in a way with which you disagree and which may be adverse to your interests. This concentrated control may have the effect of delaying, preventing or deterring a change in control of our company, could deprive our stockholders of an opportunity to receive a premium for their capital stock as part of a sale of our company and might ultimately affect the market price of our Class A common stock.

Future transfers by holders of our Class B common stock will generally result in those shares converting into shares of our Class A common stock, subject to limited exceptions, such as certain transfers effected for estate planning or charitable purposes. The conversion of shares of our Class B common stock into shares of our Class A common stock will have the effect, over time, of increasing the relative voting power of those holders of Class B common stock who retain their shares in the long term. If, for example, Messrs. Levie, Levin and Smith retain a significant portion of their holdings of our Class B common stock for an extended period of time, they could control a significant portion of the voting power of our capital stock for the foreseeable future. As board members, Messrs. Levie, Levin and Smith each owe a fiduciary duty to our stockholders and must act in good faith and in a manner they reasonably believe to be in the best interests of our stockholders. As stockholders, Messrs. Levie, Levin and Smith are entitled to vote their shares in their own interests, which may not always be in the interests of our stockholders generally. For a description of the dual class structure, see the section titled “Description of Capital Stock.”

Anti-takeover provisions contained in our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws, as well as provisions of Delaware law, could impair a takeover attempt.

Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation, amended and restated bylaws and Delaware law contain or will contain provisions which could have the effect of rendering more difficult, delaying or preventing an acquisition deemed undesirable by our board of directors. Among other things, our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws will include provisions:

 

    creating a classified board of directors whose members serve staggered three-year terms;

 

    authorizing “blank check” preferred stock, which could be issued by our board of directors without stockholder approval and may contain voting, liquidation, dividend and other rights superior to our common stock;

 

    limiting the liability of, and providing indemnification to, our directors and officers;

 

    limiting the ability of our stockholders to call and bring business before special meetings;

 

    requiring advance notice of stockholder proposals for business to be conducted at meetings of our stockholders and for nominations of candidates for election to our board of directors;

 

    controlling the procedures for the conduct and scheduling of board of directors and stockholder meetings; and

 

    authorizing two classes of common stock, as discussed above.

These provisions, alone or together, could delay or prevent hostile takeovers and changes in control or changes in our management.

 

33


Table of Contents

As a Delaware corporation, we are also subject to provisions of Delaware law, including Section 203 of the Delaware General Corporation law, which prevents certain stockholders holding more than 15% of our outstanding capital stock from engaging in certain business combinations without approval of the holders of at least two-thirds of our outstanding common stock not held by such stockholder.

Any provision of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation, amended and restated bylaws or Delaware law that has the effect of delaying, preventing or deterring a change in control could limit the opportunity for our stockholders to receive a premium for their shares of our capital stock, and could also affect the price that some investors are willing to pay for our Class A common stock.

An active trading market for our Class A common stock may never develop or be sustained.

We intend to apply for the listing of our Class A common stock on the NYSE under the symbol “BOX.” However, we cannot assure you that an active trading market for our Class A common stock will develop on that exchange or elsewhere or, if developed, that any market will be sustained. Accordingly, we cannot assure you of the liquidity of any trading market, your ability to sell your shares of our Class A common stock when desired or the prices that you may obtain for your shares of our Class A common stock.

The market price of our Class A common stock may be volatile, and you could lose all or part of your investment.

Prior to the completion of this offering, there has been no public market for shares of our Class A common stock. The initial public offering price of our Class A common stock will be determined through negotiation between us and the underwriters. This price will not necessarily reflect the price at which investors in the market will be willing to buy and sell shares of our Class A common stock following this offering. In addition, the market price of our Class A common stock following this offering is likely to be highly volatile, may be higher or lower than the initial public offering price of our Class A common stock and could be subject to wide fluctuations in response to various factors, some of which are beyond our control and may not be related to our operating performance.

Fluctuations in the price of our Class A common stock could cause you to lose all or part of your investment because you may not be able to sell your shares at or above the price you paid in this offering. Factors that could cause fluctuations in the market price of our Class A common stock include the following:

 

    price and volume fluctuations in the overall stock market from time to time;

 

    volatility in the market prices and trading volumes of technology stocks;

 

    changes in operating performance and stock market valuations of other technology companies generally or those in our industry in particular;

 

    sales of shares of our Class A common stock by us or our stockholders;

 

    failure of securities analysts to maintain coverage of us, changes in financial estimates by securities analysts who follow us, or our failure to meet these estimates or the expectations of investors;

 

    the financial projections we may provide to the public, any changes in those projections or our failure to meet those projections;

 

    announcements by us or our competitors of new products or services;

 

    the public’s reaction to our press releases, other public announcements and filings with the SEC;

 

    rumors and market speculation involving us or other companies in our industry;

 

    actual or anticipated changes in our operating results or fluctuations in our operating results;

 

    actual or anticipated developments in our business, our competitors’ businesses or the competitive landscape generally;

 

34


Table of Contents
    litigation involving us, our industry or both, or investigations by regulators into our operations or those of our competitors;

 

    developments or disputes concerning our intellectual property or other proprietary rights;

 

    announced or completed acquisitions of businesses or technologies by us or our competitors;

 

    new laws or regulations or new interpretations of existing laws or regulations applicable to our business;

 

    changes in accounting standards, policies, guidelines, interpretations or principles;

 

    any significant change in our management; and

 

    general economic conditions and slow or negative growth of our markets.

In addition, in the past, following periods of volatility in the overall market and the market price of a particular company’s securities, securities class action litigation has often been instituted against these companies. This litigation, if instituted against us, could result in substantial costs and a diversion of our management’s attention and resources.

A total of     , or     %, of the outstanding shares of our capital stock after this offering will be restricted from immediate resale but may be sold on a stock exchange in the near future. The large number of shares of our capital stock eligible for public sale or subject to rights requiring us to register them for public sale could depress the market price of our Class A common stock.

The market price of our Class A common stock could decline as a result of sales of a large number of shares of our Class A common stock in the market after this offering, and the perception that these sales could occur may also depress the market price of our Class A common stock. Based on shares of our capital stock outstanding as of January 31, 2014, we will have              shares of our capital stock outstanding after this offering. Our executive officers, directors and the holders of substantially all of our capital stock and securities convertible into or exchangeable for our capital stock have entered into market standoff agreements with us or will enter into lock-up agreements with the underwriters under which they have agreed or will agree, subject to specific exceptions, not to sell any of our capital stock for 180 days following the date of this prospectus. As a result of these agreements, the provisions of our investors’ rights agreement described further in the section titled “Description of Capital Stock—Registration Rights” and the provisions of Rule 144 or Rule 701 under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (Securities Act), shares of our capital stock will be available for sale in the public market as follows:

 

    beginning on the date of this prospectus, all              shares of our Class A common stock sold in this offering will be immediately available for sale in the public market; and

 

    beginning 180 days after the date of this prospectus, the remainder of the shares of our capital stock will be eligible for sale in the public market from time to time thereafter, subject in some cases to the volume and other restrictions of Rule 144 and our insider trading policy.

Following the expiration of the lock-up agreements referred to above, stockholders owning an aggregate of up to 80,944,854 shares of our Class B common stock can require us to register shares of our capital stock owned by them for public sale in the United States. In addition, we intend to file a registration statement to register approximately              shares of our capital stock reserved for future issuance under our equity compensation plans. Upon effectiveness of that registration statement, subject to the satisfaction of applicable exercise periods and expiration of the market standoff agreements and lock-up agreements referred to above, the shares of our capital stock issued upon exercise of outstanding options to purchase shares of our Class B common stock and upon the vesting of outstanding RSUs will be available for immediate resale in the United States in the open market.

 

35


Table of Contents

Sales of our Class A common stock as restrictions end or pursuant to registration rights may make it more difficult for us to sell equity securities in the future at a time and at a price that we deem appropriate. These sales also could cause the market price of our Class A common stock to fall and make it more difficult for you to sell shares of our Class A common stock.

In making your investment decision, you should understand that we and the underwriters have not authorized any other party to provide you with information concerning us or this offering.

You should carefully evaluate all of the information in this prospectus. We have in the past received, and may continue to receive, a high degree of media coverage, including coverage that is not directly attributable to statements made by our officers or employees, that incorrectly reports on statements made by our officers or employees or that is misleading as a result of omitting information provided by us, our officers or employees. We and the underwriters have not authorized any other party to provide you with information concerning us or this offering.

We may invest or spend the proceeds of this offering in ways with which you may not agree or in ways which may not yield a return.

Our net proceeds from the sale of shares of our Class A common stock in this offering will be used for general corporate purposes, including working capital, operating expenses and capital expenditures. Additionally, we may use a portion of the net proceeds to acquire businesses, products, services or technologies. However, we do not have agreements or commitments for any specific material acquisitions at this time. Our management will have considerable discretion in the application of the net proceeds, and you will not have the opportunity, as part of your investment decision, to assess whether the proceeds are being used appropriately. Until the net proceeds are used, they may be placed in investments that do not produce significant income or that may lose value.

Purchasers in this offering will experience immediate and substantial dilution in the book value of their investment.

The assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, is substantially higher than the pro forma net tangible book value per share of our outstanding capital stock upon the completion of this offering. Therefore, if you purchase shares of our Class A common stock in this offering, you will incur immediate dilution of $         in the net tangible book value per share from the price you paid. In addition, investors purchasing shares of our Class A common stock from us in this offering will have contributed     % of the total consideration paid to us by all stockholders who purchased shares of our common stock, in exchange for acquiring approximately     % of the outstanding shares of our common stock as of January 31, 2014, after giving effect to this offering. The exercise of outstanding options and warrants to purchase shares of our Class B common stock and the vesting of outstanding RSUs will result in further dilution.

If securities or industry analysts do not publish or cease publishing research or reports about us, our business, our market or our competitors, or if they adversely change their recommendations regarding our Class A common stock, the market price of our Class A common stock and trading volume could decline.

The trading market for our Class A common stock will be influenced by the research and reports that securities or industry analysts may publish about us, our business, our market or our competitors. If any of the analysts who may cover us adversely change their recommendations regarding our Class A common stock or provide more favorable recommendations about our competitors, the market price of our Class A common stock would likely decline. If any of the analysts who may cover us were to cease coverage of our company or fail to regularly publish reports on us, we could lose visibility in the financial markets, which in turn could cause the market price of our Class A common stock or trading volume to decline.

 

36


Table of Contents

We do not expect to declare any dividends in the foreseeable future.

We do not anticipate declaring any cash dividends to holders of our Class A common stock in the foreseeable future. Consequently, investors may need to rely on sales of our Class A common stock after price appreciation, which may never occur, as the only way to realize any future gains on their investment. Investors seeking cash dividends should not purchase shares of our Class A common stock.

Prior to the completion of this offering, there has been limited trading of our securities at prices that may be higher than what our Class A common stock will trade at once it is listed.

Prior to the completion of this offering, our securities have not been listed on any stock exchange or other public trading market, but there has been some trading of our securities in private transactions. These transactions were speculative, and the trading prices of our securities in these transactions were privately negotiated. We cannot assure you that the market price of our Class A common stock will equal or exceed the price at which our securities have traded prior to the completion of this offering.

 

37


Table of Contents

SPECIAL NOTE REGARDING FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

This prospectus, including the sections titled “Prospectus Summary,” “Risk Factors,” “Use of Proceeds,” “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations,” “Business,” and “Executive Compensation,” contains forward-looking statements. The words “believe,” “may,” “will,” “potentially,” “estimate,” “continue,” “anticipate,” “intend,” “could,” “would,” “project,” “plan,” “expect” and similar expressions that convey uncertainty of future events or outcomes are intended to identify forward-looking statements.

These forward-looking statements include, but are not limited to, statements concerning the following:

 

    our ability to maintain an adequate rate of revenue growth;

 

    our business plan and our ability to effectively manage our growth;

 

    costs associated with defending intellectual property infringement and other claims;

 

    our ability to attract and retain end-customers;

 

    our ability to further penetrate our existing customer base;

 

    our ability to displace existing products in established markets;

 

    our ability to expand our leadership position in Enterprise Content Collaboration solutions;

 

    our ability to timely and effectively scale and adapt our existing technology;

 

    our ability to innovate new products and bring them to market in a timely manner;

 

    our ability to expand internationally;

 

    the effects of increased competition in our market and our ability to compete effectively;

 

    the effects of seasonal trends on our operating results;

 

    our expectations concerning relationships with third parties;

 

    the attraction and retention of qualified employees and key personnel;

 

    our ability to maintain, protect and enhance our brand and intellectual property; and

 

    future acquisitions of or investments in complementary companies, products, services or technologies.

These forward-looking statements are subject to a number of risks, uncertainties and assumptions, including those described in the section titled “Risk Factors” and elsewhere in this prospectus. Moreover, we operate in a very competitive and rapidly changing environment, and new risks emerge from time to time. It is not possible for our management to predict all risks, nor can we assess the impact of all factors on our business or the extent to which any factor, or combination of factors, may cause actual results to differ materially from those contained in any forward-looking statements we may make. In light of these risks, uncertainties and assumptions, the forward-looking events and circumstances discussed in this prospectus may not occur and actual results could differ materially and adversely from those anticipated or implied in the forward-looking statements.

You should not rely upon forward-looking statements as predictions of future events. Although we believe that the expectations reflected in the forward-looking statements are reasonable, we cannot guarantee that the future results, levels of activity, performance or events and circumstances reflected in the forward-looking statements will be achieved or occur. Moreover, neither we nor any other person assumes responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the forward-looking statements. We undertake no obligation to update publicly any forward-looking statements for any reason after the date of this prospectus to conform these statements to actual results or to changes in our expectations, except as required by law.

 

38


Table of Contents

You should read this prospectus and the documents that we reference in this prospectus and have filed with the SEC as exhibits to the registration statement of which this prospectus is a part with the understanding that our actual future results, levels of activity, performance, and events and circumstances may be materially different from what we expect.

 

39


Table of Contents

MARKET AND INDUSTRY DATA

This prospectus contains estimates and information concerning our industry, including market size and growth rates of the markets in which we participate, that are based on industry publications and reports. This information involves a number of assumptions and limitations, and you are cautioned not to give undue weight to these estimates. We have not independently verified the accuracy or completeness of the data contained in these industry publications and reports. The industry in which we operate is subject to a high degree of uncertainty and risk due to a variety of factors, including those described in the section titled “Risk Factors,” that could cause results to differ materially from those expressed in these publications and reports.

Certain information in the text of this prospectus is contained in independent industry publications. The source of these independent industry publications is provided below:

 

  (1)   Gartner, Inc., Forecast: Public Cloud Services, Worldwide, 2011-2017, 3Q13 Update, September 2013

 

  (2)   International Data Corporation, Worldwide New Media Market Model 1H2013, June 2013

 

  (3)   Forrester Research, Inc., 2013 Mobile Workforce Adoption Trends, February 2013

 

  (4)   Gartner, Inc., Forecast: Devices by Operating System and User Type, Worldwide, 2010-2017, 3Q13 Update, September 2013

 

  (5)   International Data Corporation, THE DIGITAL UNIVERSE IN 2020: Big Data, Bigger Digital Shadows, and Biggest Growth in the Far East, December 2012

 

  (6)   International Data Corporation, Worldwide Content Management Software 2013-2017 Forecast, June 2013

 

  (7)   International Data Corporation, Worldwide and Regional Public IT Cloud Services 2013-2017 Forecast, August 2013

 

  (8)   International Data Corporation, Worldwide Collaborative Applications 2013-2017 Forecast and 2012 Vendor Shares, June 2013

 

  (9)   International Data Corporation, Worldwide Project and Portfolio Management 2013-2017 Forecast and 2012 Vendor Shares: Resource Prioritization Amid Complexity Sustains Low-Level 2012 PPM Market Growth, September 2013

 

  (10)   Forrester Research, Inc., Info Workers Will Erase The Boundary Between Enterprise And Consumer Technologies, August 2012

 

  (11)   International Data Corporation, Worldwide Mobile Worker Population 2011-2015 Forecast, December 2011

The Gartner Reports described herein represent data, research opinion or viewpoints published, as part of a syndicated subscription service, by Gartner, Inc. and are not representations of fact. Each Gartner Report speaks as of its original publication date (and not as of the date of this prospectus) and the opinions expressed in the Gartner Reports are subject to change without notice.

 

40


Table of Contents

USE OF PROCEEDS

We estimate that our net proceeds from the sale of shares of our Class A common stock that we are offering at the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us, will be approximately $        , or $         if the underwriters exercise their over-allotment option in full. A $1.00 increase (decrease) in the assumed initial public offering price would increase (decrease) the net proceeds from this offering by approximately $        , assuming the number of shares of our Class A common stock offered by us, as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, remains the same and after deducting the estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us. Similarly, a one million increase (decrease) in the number of shares of our Class A common stock offered by us would increase (decrease) the net proceeds from this offering by approximately $        , assuming the assumed initial public offering price remains the same and after deducting the estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

The principal purposes of this offering are to increase our capitalization and financial flexibility and create a public market for our Class A common stock. We intend to use the net proceeds we receive from this offering for general corporate purposes, including working capital, operating expenses and capital expenditures. While we cannot specify with certainty the particular uses of the net proceeds we receive from this offering, we currently expect to invest at least 50% of the net proceeds in sales and marketing activities, product development, general and administrative matters and capital expenditures to support the growth in our business. We also may use a portion of the net proceeds to acquire complementary businesses, products, services or technologies. However, we do not have agreements or commitments for any specific acquisitions at this time. We will have broad discretion over the uses of the net proceeds from this offering, provided that we comply with the terms and conditions contained in our revolving line of credit facility. Pending the use of proceeds from this offering as described above, we intend to invest the net proceeds from this offering in short-term, investment-grade interest-bearing securities such as money market accounts, certificates of deposit, commercial paper and guaranteed obligations of the U.S. government.

DIVIDEND POLICY

We have never declared or paid cash dividends on our capital stock. We currently intend to retain all available funds and any future earnings for use in the operation of our business and do not anticipate paying any dividends on our capital stock in the foreseeable future. Any future determination to declare dividends will be made at the discretion of our board of directors, subject to applicable laws, and will depend on our financial condition, operating results, capital requirements, general business conditions and other factors that our board of directors may deem relevant.

 

41


Table of Contents

CAPITALIZATION

The following table sets forth our cash and cash equivalents and capitalization as of January 31, 2014 on:

 

    an actual basis;

 

    a pro forma basis, giving effect to the automatic conversion of all outstanding shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock (excluding the Net Exercise Warrant) into 76,238,097 shares of our Class B common stock, the related reclassification of the redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability to additional paid-in capital and the effectiveness of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation, as if such conversion, reclassification and effectiveness had occurred on January 31, 2014; and

 

    a pro forma as adjusted basis, giving effect to the pro forma adjustments and the sale and issuance of             shares of our Class A common stock by us in this offering, based upon the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, after deducting the estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

The pro forma as adjusted information set forth in the table below is illustrative only and will be adjusted based on the actual initial public offering price and other terms of this offering determined at pricing.

You should read this table together with the section titled “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and our consolidated financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus.

 

    January 31, 2014  
    Actual     Pro Forma     Pro Forma
as Adjusted (1)
 
    (in thousands, except share and per share
data)
 

Cash and cash equivalents

  $ 108,851      $ 108,851      $                
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Debt, non-current

    34,000        34,000     

Redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability, non-current

    1,346            

Redeemable convertible preferred stock, par value $0.0001 per share; 77,101,959 shares authorized, 76,238,097 issued and outstanding, actual; no shares authorized, issued and outstanding, pro forma and pro forma as adjusted

    393,217            

Stockholders’ equity (deficit):

     

Preferred Stock, par value $0.0001 per share; no shares authorized, issued and outstanding, actual;             shares authorized, no shares issued and outstanding, pro forma and pro forma as adjusted

               

Existing Class A common stock, par value $0.0001 per share; 120,856,000 shares authorized, 11,024,424 shares issued and outstanding, actual; no shares authorized, issued and outstanding, pro forma and pro forma as adjusted

    1            

Existing Class B common stock, par value $0.0001 per share; 25,000,000 shares authorized, 2,931,018 shares issued and outstanding, actual; no shares authorized, issued and outstanding, pro forma and pro forma as adjusted

               

Class A common stock, par value $0.0001 per share; no shares authorized, issued and outstanding, actual;             shares authorized, no shares issued and outstanding, pro forma;              shares authorized,              shares issued and outstanding, pro forma as adjusted

               

Class B common stock, par value $0.0001 per share; no shares authorized, issued and outstanding, actual;              shares authorized, 90,193,539 shares issued and              outstanding, pro forma;              shares authorized,              shares issued and outstanding, pro forma as adjusted

           9     

Additional paid-in capital

    29,815        424,370     

Treasury stock

    (1,177 )       (1,177  

Accumulated other comprehensive income

    15        15     

Accumulated deficit

    (361,166     (361,166  
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total stockholders’ equity (deficit)

    (332,512   $ 62,051     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total capitalization

  $ 96,051      $ 96,051      $     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

42


Table of Contents

 

(1) Each $1.00 increase (decrease) in the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, would increase (decrease) our pro forma as adjusted cash and cash equivalents, additional paid-in capital, total stockholders’ equity (deficit), and total capitalization by approximately $         million, assuming that the number of shares of our Class A common stock offered by us, as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, remains the same and after deducting the estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

The pro forma and pro forma as adjusted columns in the table above are based on no shares of our Class A common stock and 90,193,539 shares of our Class B common stock (including our redeemable convertible preferred stock on an as-converted basis and excluding the Net Exercise Warrant) outstanding as of January 31, 2014, and excludes:

 

    18,427,075 shares of our Class B common stock issuable upon the exercise of options to purchase shares of our Class B common stock outstanding as of January 31, 2014, with a weighted-average exercise price of $3.65 per share;

 

    225,300 shares of our Class B common stock issuable upon the vesting of RSUs outstanding as of January 31, 2014; and

 

                shares of our Class A common stock reserved for future issuance under our equity compensation plans, consisting of:

 

                shares of our Class A common stock reserved for future issuance under our 2014 Plan, which will become effective prior to the completion of this offering;

 

    41,840 shares of our Class B common stock reserved for future issuance under our 2011 Plan as of January 31, 2014, which number of shares will be added to the shares of our Class A common stock to be reserved under our 2014 Plan upon its effectiveness, at which time we will cease granting awards under our 2011 Plan; and

 

                shares of our Class A common stock reserved for future issuance under our ESPP, which will become effective prior to the completion of this offering.

Our 2014 Plan and ESPP each provide for annual automatic increases in the number of shares reserved thereunder and our 2014 Plan also provides for increases in the number of shares reserved thereunder based on awards under our 2011 Plan that expire, are forfeited or otherwise repurchased by us, as more fully described in the section titled “Executive Compensation—Employee Benefit and Stock Plans.”

 

43


Table of Contents

DILUTION

If you invest in our Class A common stock in this offering, your interest will be diluted to the extent of the difference between the initial public offering price per share of our Class A common stock in this offering and the pro forma as adjusted net tangible book value per share of our common stock immediately after this offering.

As of January 31, 2014, our pro forma net tangible book value was approximately $44.1 million, or $0.49 per share of common stock. Our pro forma net tangible book value per share represents the amount of our total tangible assets reduced by the amount of our total liabilities and divided by the total number of shares of our common stock outstanding as of January 31, 2014, assuming the conversion of all outstanding shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock (excluding the Net Exercise Warrant) into 76,238,097 shares of our Class B common stock, which conversion will occur immediately prior to the completion of the offering, and the related reclassification of the redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability to additional paid-in capital.

After giving effect to the sale of             shares of our Class A common stock in this offering, at the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us, our pro forma as adjusted net tangible book value as of January 31, 2014 would have been approximately $         million, or $         per share. This represents an immediate increase in pro forma as adjusted net tangible book value of $         per share to our existing stockholders and an immediate dilution of $         per share to investors purchasing shares in this offering.

The following table illustrates this dilution:

 

Assumed initial public offering price per share

      $                

Pro forma net tangible book value per share as of January 31, 2014

   $ 0.49      

Increase in pro forma net tangible book value per share attributable to investors purchasing shares in this offering

     
  

 

 

    

Pro forma net tangible book value, as adjusted to give effect to this offering

      $     
     

 

 

 

Dilution in pro forma net tangible book value per share to investors purchasing shares in this offering

      $     
     

 

 

 

A $1.00 increase (decrease) in the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, would increase (decrease) our pro forma as adjusted net tangible book value by approximately $         per share and the dilution per share to new investors in this offering by $         per share, assuming the number of shares of our Class A common stock offered by us, as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, remains the same and after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us. Similarly, a one million increase (decrease) in the number of shares of our Class A common stock offered by us would increase (decrease) our pro forma as adjusted net tangible book value by approximately $         per share and the dilution per share to new investors in this offering by $         per share, assuming the assumed initial public offering price remains the same and after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

If the underwriters exercise their over-allotment option in full, the pro forma as adjusted net tangible book value per share of our common stock would be $         per share, and the dilution in pro forma net tangible book value per share to investors purchasing shares in this offering would be $         per share.

The following table summarizes, on a pro forma as adjusted basis as of January 31, 2014 after giving effect to (i) the automatic conversion of all outstanding shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock (excluding

 

44


Table of Contents

the Net Exercise Warrant) into 76,238,097 shares of our Class B common stock and the effectiveness of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation, and (ii) this offering at the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, the difference between existing stockholders and new investors with respect to the number of shares of our common stock purchased from us, the total consideration paid, and the average price per share paid, before deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us:

 

     Shares Purchased     Total Consideration     Average Price
Per Share
 
     Number      Percent     Amount      Percent    

Existing stockholders

     90,193,539                $                             $                

Investors purchasing shares in this offering

            
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

Total

        100.0   $                      100.0  
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

A $1.00 increase (decrease) in the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, would increase (decrease) total consideration paid by new investors and total consideration paid by all stockholders by approximately $         million, assuming that the number of shares of our Class A common stock offered by us, as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, remains the same and after deducting the estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

To the extent that any outstanding options to purchase shares of our Class B common stock or warrants to purchase shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock are exercised, outstanding RSUs vest, or new awards are granted under our equity compensation plans, there will be further dilution to investors participating in this offering.

Except as otherwise indicated, the above discussion and tables assume no exercise of the underwriters’ over-allotment option. If the underwriters exercise their over-allotment option in full, our existing stockholders would own     % and our new investors would own     % of the total number of shares of our common stock outstanding upon the completion of this offering.

The number of shares of our Class A common stock and Class B common stock that will be outstanding after this offering is based on no shares of our Class A common stock and 90,193,539 shares of our Class B common stock (including our redeemable convertible preferred stock on an as-converted basis and excluding the Net Exercise Warrant) outstanding as of January 31, 2014, and excludes:

 

    18,427,075 shares of our Class B common stock issuable upon the exercise of options to purchase shares of our Class B common stock outstanding as of January 31, 2014, with a weighted-average exercise price of $3.65 per share;

 

    225,300 shares of our Class B common stock issuable upon the vesting of RSUs outstanding as of January 31, 2014; and

 

                shares of our Class A common stock reserved for future issuance under our equity compensation plans, consisting of:

 

                shares of our Class A common stock reserved for future issuance under our 2014 Plan, which will become effective prior to the completion of this offering;

 

    41,840 shares of our Class B common stock reserved for future issuance under our 2011 Plan as of January 31, 2014, which number of shares will be added to the shares of our Class A common stock to be reserved under our 2014 Plan upon its effectiveness, at which time we will cease granting awards under our 2011 Plan; and

 

45


Table of Contents
            shares of our Class A common stock reserved for future issuance under our ESPP, which will become effective prior to the completion of this offering.

Our 2014 Plan and ESPP each provide for annual automatic increases in the number of shares reserved thereunder, and our 2014 Plan also provides for increases in the number of shares reserved thereunder based on awards under our 2011 Plan that expire, are forfeited or otherwise repurchased by us, as more fully described in the section titled “Executive Compensation—Employee Benefit and Stock Plans.”

 

46


Table of Contents

SELECTED CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL DATA

We changed the end of our fiscal year from December 31 to January 31, effective for our fiscal year ended January 31, 2013, and as a result, we also present below certain selected financial data for the one-month transition period ended January 31, 2012. The selected consolidated statements of operations data presented below for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one-month period ended January 31, 2012 and the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014 and the consolidated balance sheet data as of January 31, 2013 and 2014 are derived from our audited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus. The following consolidated financial data should be read together with the section titled “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and our consolidated financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus. The selected consolidated financial data in this section are not intended to replace our consolidated financial statements and the related notes, and are qualified in their entirety by the consolidated financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus.

 

     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
    One Month
Ended
January 31,

2012
    Year Ended
January 31,

2013
    Year Ended
January 31,

2014
 
          
     (in thousands, except per share data)  

Consolidated Statements of Operations Data:

        

Revenue

   $ 21,084      $ 3,376      $ 58,797      $ 124,192   

Cost of revenue (1)

     6,873        850        14,280        25,974   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

     14,211        2,526        44,517        98,218   

Operating expenses:

        

Research and development (1)

     14,396        1,915        28,996        45,967   

Sales and marketing (1)

     36,189        4,246        99,221        171,188   

General and administrative (1)

     13,480        1,125        25,429        39,843   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total operating expenses

     64,065        7,286        153,646        256,998   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss from operations

     (49,854     (4,760     (109,129     (158,780

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

     (356     (371     (1,727     (8,477

Interest income (expense), net

     (109     27        (1,764     (3,705

Other income (expense), net

     49        (8     116        (26
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss before provision (benefit) for income taxes

     (50,270     (5,112     (112,504     (170,988

Provision (benefit) for income taxes

     1        15        59        (2,431
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss

     (50,271     (5,127     (112,563     (168,557

Accretion of redeemable convertible preferred stock

     (80     (9     (226     (341
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss attributable to common stockholders

   $ (50,351   $ (5,136   $ (112,789   $ (168,898
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss per share attributable to common stockholders, basic and diluted

   $ (9.53   $ (0.84   $ (14.68   $ (14.89
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Weighted-average shares used to compute net loss per share attributable to common stockholders, basic and diluted

     5,284        6,099        7,684        11,341   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Pro forma net loss per share attributable to common stockholders, basic and diluted (unaudited)

         $ (1.93
        

 

 

 

Weighted-average shares used to compute pro forma net loss per share attributable to common stockholders, basic and diluted (unaudited)

        

 

82,948

  

        

 

 

 

 

47


Table of Contents

 

(1) Includes stock-based compensation expense as follows:

 

     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
     One Month
Ended
January 31,

2012
     Year Ended
January 31,

2013
     Year Ended
January 31,

2014
 
             
     (in thousands)  

Cost of revenue

   $ 686       $ 6       $ 1,087       $ 450   

Research and development

     899         19         1,211         3,154   

Sales and marketing

     837         24         1,893         5,017   

General and administrative

     3,800         23         3,345         3,128   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total stock-based compensation

   $ 6,222       $ 72       $ 7,536       $ 11,749   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

     January 31,
2013
    January 31,
2014
 
     (in thousands)  

Consolidated Balance Sheet Data:

    

Cash and cash equivalents

   $ 127,625      $ 108,851   

Working capital

     104,799        44,289   

Total assets

     195,792        235,429   

Deferred revenue, current and non-current

     40,099        90,072   

Debt, current and non-current

     31,028        34,000   

Redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability, current and non-current

     2,869        1,346   

Redeemable convertible preferred stock

     281,899        393,217   

Total stockholders’ deficit

     (183,656     (332,512

Key Business Metrics

We monitor the following key metrics to help us measure our performance, identify trends affecting our business, formulate financial projections and make strategic decisions. In addition to our results determined in accordance with GAAP, we believe the following non-GAAP financial and operational measures are useful in evaluating our operating performance.

 

     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
    Year Ended
January 31,

2013
    Year Ended
January 31,

2014
 
        

Billings (in thousands)

   $ 30,391      $ 85,727      $ 174,165   

Billings growth rate

     177     182     103

Retention rate (period end)

     129     144     136

Billings

Billings represent our revenue plus the change in deferred revenue in the period. Billings we record in any particular period reflect sales to new customers plus subscription renewals and upsells to existing customers, and represent amounts invoiced for subscription, premier support and professional services (which we refer to as Box Consulting). We typically invoice our customers at the beginning of the term, in multiyear, annual, quarterly or monthly installments. If the customer elects to pay the full subscription amount at the beginning of the period, the total subscription amount for the entire term will be reflected in billings. If the customer elects to be invoiced annually or more frequently, only the amount billed for such period will be included in billings.

Retention Rate

We calculate our retention rate as of a period end by starting with the annual contract value (ACV) from customers with contract value of $5,000 or more as of 12 months prior to such period end (Prior Period ACV) and a subscription term of at least 12 months. We then calculate ACV from these same customers as of

 

48


Table of Contents

the current period end (Current Period ACV). Finally, we divide the aggregate Current Period ACV for the trailing 12-month period by the aggregate Prior Period ACV for the trailing 12-month period to arrive at our retention rate. We believe our retention rate is an important metric that provides insight into the long-term value of our subscription agreements and our ability to retain and grow revenue from our customer base. We focus on contracts that have a value of $5,000 or more because, over time, these customers give us the best indicator for the growth of our business and the potential for incremental business as they renew and expand their deployments, and contracts with these customers represent a substantial majority of our revenue for the period ended January 31, 2014. Retention rate is an operational metric and there is no comparable GAAP financial measure to which we can reconcile this particular key metric.

Reconciliation of Billings to Revenue

To provide investors with additional information regarding our financial results, we have disclosed in the table above and within this prospectus billings, a non-GAAP financial measure. We have provided a reconciliation below of billings to revenue, the most directly comparable GAAP financial measure. We consider billings a significant performance measure and a leading indicator of future revenue. Billings also help investors better understand our sales activity for a particular period, which is not necessarily reflected in our revenue as a result of the fact that we recognize subscription revenue ratably over the subscription term. We monitor billings to manage our business, make planning decisions, evaluate our performance and allocate resources.

Our use of billings, a non-GAAP financial measure, has the following limitations as an analytical tool and should not be considered in isolation or as a substitute for revenue or an analysis of our results as reported under GAAP. Billings are recognized when invoiced, while the related revenue is recognized ratably over the term of the subscription or premier support services. When we invoice customers more frequently than their subscription period, amounts not yet invoiced will not be reflected in deferred revenue or billings. Also, other companies, including companies in our industry, may not use billings, may calculate billings differently, may have different billing frequencies, or may use other financial measures to evaluate their performance, all of which could reduce the usefulness of billings as a comparative measure.

A reconciliation of billings to revenue, the most directly comparable GAAP financial measure, is presented below:

 

     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
    Year Ended
January 31,

2013
    Year Ended
January 31,

2014
 
        
     (in thousands)  

Revenue

   $ 21,084      $ 58,797      $ 124,192   

Deferred revenue, end of period

     12,921        40,099        90,072   

Less: deferred revenue, beginning of period

     (3,614     (13,169     (40,099
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Billings

   $ 30,391      $ 85,727      $ 174,165   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

49


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

You should read the following discussion and analysis of our financial condition and results of operations together with the section titled “Selected Consolidated Financial Data” and the consolidated financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus. This discussion contains forward-looking statements based upon current expectations that involve risks and uncertainties. Our actual results may differ materially from those anticipated in these forward-looking statements as a result of various factors, including those discussed in the section titled “Risk Factors” and in other parts of this prospectus.

Overview

Box provides a cloud-based, mobile-optimized Enterprise Content Collaboration platform that enables organizations of all sizes to easily and securely manage their content and collaborate internally and externally. Our platform combines powerful, elegant and easy-to-use functionality that is designed for users with the security, scalability and administrative controls required by IT departments. We have built our platform to enable users to get their work done regardless of file format, application environment, operating system, device or location. Our mission is to make organizations more productive, competitive and collaborative by connecting people and their most important information.

We were founded and publicly launched our platform in 2005 with a simple but powerful idea: to make it incredibly easy for people to store, share and access their most important content online. In 2006, we introduced a free version of our product in order to rapidly grow our user base, surpassing one million registered users by July 2007. As users began to bring our solution into the workplace, we learned that businesses were eager for a solution to empower user-friendly content sharing and collaboration in a secure, manageable way. Starting in 2007, we began enhancing our platform to serve businesses and large enterprises, which meant expanding our business functionality with features such as our administrative console, identity integration, activity reporting and full-text search. To further satisfy the requirements of IT departments in large organizations, we began to invest heavily in enhancing the security of our platform. Also in 2007, we began to build an enterprise sales team. The continual evolution of our platform features allowed our sales team to sell into increasingly larger organizations. To empower users to work securely from anywhere, we built native applications for all major mobile platforms. The introduction of our iPad application in 2010 further accelerated enterprise adoption of our platform. In 2012, we introduced our Box OneCloud platform and our Box Embed framework to encourage developers and independent software vendors (ISVs) to build powerful applications that connect to Box, furthering the reach of the Box service. In recent years, we have expanded our global presence, opening our first international office in London in 2012, followed by Munich, Paris and Tokyo in 2013. For the six months ended January 31, 2014, revenue from non-U.S. customers represented 20% of our revenue. We expect our revenue from non-U.S. customers to increase at a higher rate than our revenue from U.S. customers in the future.

We offer our solution to our customers as a subscription-based service, with subscription fees based on the requirements of our customers, including the number of users and functionality deployed. The majority of our customers subscribe to our service through one-year contracts, although we also offer our services for terms ranging between one month to three years or more. We typically invoice our customers at the beginning of the term, in multiyear, annual, quarterly or monthly installments. We recognize revenue ratably over the term of the subscription period.

Our objective is to build an enduring business that creates sustainable revenue and earnings growth over the long term. To best achieve this objective, we focus on growing the number of Box users and paying organizations through direct field sales, direct inside sales, indirect channel sales and through word-of-mouth by individual users, some of whom use our services at no cost. Individual users and organizations can also simply sign up to use our solution on our website. We believe this approach not only helps us build a critical mass of users but also has a viral effect within organizations as more of their employees use our service and encourage their IT professionals to deploy our services to a broader user base.

 

50


Table of Contents

We have achieved significant growth in a short period of time. Our user base includes 25 million registered users across more than 225,000 organizations. We define a registered user as a Box account that has been provisioned to a unique user ID. As of January 31, 2014, approximately 93% of our registered users are non-paying users who have independently registered for accounts and approximately 7% of our registered users are paying users who register as part of a larger enterprise or business account or by using a personal account. We currently have more than 34,000 paying organizations, and our solution is offered in 15 languages. We define paying organizations as separate and distinct buying entities, such as a company, an educational or government institution, or a distinct business unit of a large corporation, that have entered into a subscription agreement with us to utilize our services.

Organizations typically purchase our solution in the following ways: (i) employees in one or more small groups within the organization may individually purchase our service; (ii) organizations may purchase IT-sponsored, enterprise-level agreements with deployments for specific, targeted use cases ranging from tens to thousands of user seats; or (iii) organizations may purchase IT-sponsored, enterprise-level agreements where the number of user seats sold is intended to accommodate and enable nearly all information workers within the organization in whatever use cases they desire to adopt over the term of the subscription.

For the year ended January 31, 2014, 57% of our orders from subscription services were from new enterprise customers and upsells from existing enterprise customers. We consider enterprise customers to be organizations with at least 1,000 employees, as such organizations are the focus of our National Accounts and Major Accounts sales teams.

We intend to continue scaling our organization to meet the increasingly complex needs of our customers. Our sales and customer success teams are organized to efficiently serve organizations ranging from small businesses to the world’s largest global organizations. We have invested and expect to continue to invest heavily in our sales and marketing teams to sell our services around the world, as well as in our development efforts to deliver additional features and capabilities of our cloud services to address customers’ evolving needs. We also expect to continue to make significant investments in both our datacenter infrastructure to meet the needs of our growing user base and our professional services organization to address the strategic needs of our customers in more complex deployments and to drive broader adoption across a wide array of use cases. As a result of our continuing investments to scale our business in each of these areas, we do not expect to be profitable for the foreseeable future.

For the 12 months ended December 31, 2011, January 31, 2013 and 2014, our revenue was $21.1 million, $58.8 million and $124.2 million, respectively, representing year-over-year growth of 179% and 111%, and our net losses were $50.3 million, $112.6 million and $168.6 million, respectively. Box is headquartered in Los Altos, California and operates offices in California, New York, London, Paris, Munich and Tokyo.

Fiscal Year End

We changed our fiscal year end from December 31 to January 31, effective for our fiscal year ended January 31, 2013. For the year-over-year discussions below, the 12 months ended January 31, 2013 is compared to the 12 months ended December 31, 2011.

Our Business Model

Our business model focuses on maximizing the lifetime value of a customer relationship. We make significant investments in acquiring new customers and believe that we will be able to achieve a positive return on these investments by retaining customers and expanding the size of our deployments within our customer base over time. In connection with the acquisition of new customers, we incur and recognize significant upfront costs. These costs include sales and marketing costs associated with acquiring new customers, such as sales commission expenses, a significant portion of which is expensed upfront and the remaining portion of which is expensed over the length of the non-cancellable subscription term, and marketing costs, which are expensed as

 

51


Table of Contents

incurred. Due to our subscription model, we recognize revenue ratably over the term of the subscription period, which commences when all of the revenue recognition criteria have been met. Although our objective is for each customer to be profitable for us over the duration of our relationship, the costs we incur with respect to any customer relationship, whether a new customer or an upsell to an existing customer, may exceed revenue in earlier periods because we recognize those costs faster than we recognize the associated revenue.

To provide an understanding of our customer economics, we are providing an analysis of the customers we acquired in fiscal year 2010, which we will refer to as the 2010 Cohort. The 2010 Cohort includes every customer we acquired in fiscal year 2010, including customers who at one point did not renew their subscriptions but are customers today. We selected the 2010 Cohort as a representative set of customers for this analysis because 2010 was the first year since our inception during which we acquired a material number of customers across a diverse range of industries, and we think the perspective of time is important to help investors understand the long-term value of our customers. In fiscal year 2010, we recognized $2.8 million in revenue and incurred variable costs that resulted in a negative contribution margin for the 2010 Cohort. In fiscal year 2014, we recognized $14.4 million in revenue from the 2010 Cohort, representing a compound annual revenue growth rate of 69.2%, and incurred variable costs that resulted in a positive contribution margin of 34% from the 2010 Cohort.

As of January 31, 2014, the 2010 Cohort had increased its total annual contract value (ACV) by 42% from the prior fiscal year end. A substantial portion of the increase in ACV from the 2010 Cohort was driven by three customers who significantly increased their deployment of our solution in our fiscal fourth quarter ended January 31, 2014. While the upsells to these customers substantially increased the total ACV of the 2010 Cohort, they decreased the contribution margin from the 2010 Cohort because we did not recognize meaningful revenue from these upsells in fiscal year 2014, but we expensed a substantial amount of the associated sales and marketing costs. Specifically, these three upsells contributed $0.2 million in revenue and represented 40% of new ACV booked from the 2010 Cohort in fiscal year 2014. If we were to exclude the fiscal year 2014 revenue and variable costs associated with these three customer upsells, we would have recognized $14.2 million in revenue from the adjusted 2010 Cohort representing a compound annual revenue growth rate of 68.7% and incurred variable costs that would have resulted in a positive contribution margin of 49% from the adjusted 2010 Cohort.

We define contribution margin for a period as the revenue recognized from the customer in excess of the estimated variable costs for the period associated with expanding the size of our deployments within the customer and supporting the customer, expressed as a percentage of associated revenue. The expenses allocated to the customer include estimates for personnel costs associated with the sales teams that support that customer, such as salaries, commissions and allocated management overhead expenses. The expenses allocated to the customer also include the costs associated with use of technology infrastructure and personnel costs associated with the marketing, operations, professional services and customer success teams that support the customer. Personnel costs exclude stock-based compensation for purposes of this calculation. In addition, we exclude all research and development and general and administrative expenses from this analysis because these expenses support the growth of our business and to benefit our users, customers, technology partners and third-party developers.

We cannot assure you that we will experience similar financial outcomes from customers added in other years or in future periods. You should not rely on the allocated expenses or relationship of revenue to sales and marketing or other variable costs as being indicative of our current or future performance. Because we are still in the early stages of our development, we do not yet have enough operating history to measure the lifetime of our customer relationships. Therefore, we cannot predict the average duration of a customer relationship for the 2010 Cohort or for customers acquired in other fiscal years. We also cannot predict whether revenue from the 2010 Cohort will continue to grow at the rate of growth experienced through January 31, 2014, or whether the growth rate of other cohorts will be similar to that of the 2010 Cohort. We may not achieve profitability even if our revenue exceeds costs from our customers over time. We encourage you to read our consolidated financial statements that are included in this prospectus.

 

52


Table of Contents

Key Business Metrics

We monitor the following key metrics to help us measure our performance, identify trends affecting our business, formulate financial projections, assess operational efficiencies and make strategic decisions. In addition to our results determined in accordance with GAAP, we believe the following non-GAAP financial and operational measures are useful in evaluating our operating performance.

 

     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
    Year Ended
January 31,

2013
    Year Ended
January 31,

2014
 
        

Billings (in thousands)

   $ 30,391      $ 85,727      $ 174,165   

Billings growth rate

     177     182     103

Retention rate (period end)

     129     144     136

See the section titled “Selected Consolidated Financial Data—Reconciliation of Billings to Revenue” for a reconciliation of billings to revenue, the most directly comparable GAAP financial measure and explanations of why we track billings and why billings may be a useful measure for investors.

Billings

Billings represent our revenue plus the change in deferred revenue in the period. Billings we record in any particular period reflect sales to new customers plus subscription renewals and upsells to existing customers, and represent amounts invoiced for subscription, premier support and professional services. We typically invoice our customers at the beginning of the term, in multiyear, annual, quarterly or monthly installments. If the customer elects to pay the full subscription amount at the beginning of the period, the total subscription amount for the entire term will be reflected in billings. If the customer elects to be invoiced annually or more frequently, only the amount billed for such period will be included in billings.

We consider billings a significant performance measure and a leading indicator of future revenue. Billings also help investors better understand our sales activity for a particular period, which is not necessarily reflected in our revenue as a result of the fact that we recognize subscription revenue ratably over the subscription term. We monitor billings to manage our business, make planning decisions, evaluate our performance and allocate resources. We believe that billings offers valuable supplemental information regarding the performance of our business and will help investors better understand the sales volumes and performance of our business.

Billings increased 182% in the year ended January 31, 2013 over the year ended December 31, 2011, and 103% in the year ended January 31, 2014 over the year ended January 31, 2013. The increase in billings was primarily driven by the addition of new customers with larger initial deployments and expansion with respect to the number of users within existing customers.

Retention Rate

We calculate our retention rate as of a period end by starting with the annual contract value (ACV) from customers with contract value of $5,000 or more as of 12 months prior to such period end (Prior Period ACV) and a subscription term of at least 12 months. We then calculate ACV from these same customers as of the current period end (Current Period ACV). Finally, we divide the aggregate Current Period ACV for the trailing 12 month period by the aggregate Prior Period ACV for the trailing 12 month period to arrive at our retention rate. We believe our retention rate is an important metric that provides insight into the long-term value of our subscription agreements and our ability to retain and grow revenue from our customer base. We focus on contracts that have a value of $5,000 or more because, over time, these customers give us the best indicator for the growth of our business and the potential for incremental business as they renew and expand their deployments, and contracts with these customers represent a substantial majority of our revenue for the year ended January 31, 2014. Retention rate is an operational metric and there is no comparable GAAP financial measure to which we can reconcile this particular key metric.

 

53


Table of Contents

Our retention rate was approximately 129%, 144% and 136% as of December 31, 2011, January 31, 2013 and January 31, 2014, respectively. The increase in our retention rate from December 31, 2011 to January 31, 2014 was primarily attributable to an increase in user expansion, particularly expansion within larger enterprises, which oftentimes implement a limited initial deployment of our services before renewing their subscription on a broader scale. We believe our investments in product, customer service, and Box Consulting are driving improvements in customer retention. As we penetrate customer accounts, we expect our rate of growth in upsells to trend down over time but our retention rate to remain above 100% for the foreseeable future.

Components of Results of Operations

Revenue

We derive our revenue from three sources: (1) subscription revenue, which is comprised of subscription fees from customers utilizing our cloud-based Enterprise Content Collaboration services that include routine customer support; (2) revenue from customers purchasing our premier support package; and (3) revenue from professional services such as implementing best practice use cases, project management and other implementation services.

To date, practically all of our revenue has been derived from subscription and premier support services. Subscription and premier support revenue is driven primarily by the number of customers, the number of seats sold to each customer and the price of our services.

Subscription and premier support revenue is recognized ratably over the contract term beginning on the later of the date the service is provisioned to the customer and the date all other revenue recognition criteria have been met. Our subscription and support contracts are typically non-cancellable and do not contain refund-type provisions. The majority of our customers subscribe to our service through one-year contracts, although we also offer our services for terms ranging between one month to three years or more. We typically invoice our customers at the beginning of the term, in multiyear, annual, quarterly or monthly installments. Amounts that have been invoiced are initially recorded as deferred revenue and are recognized ratably over the invoice period. Amounts that have not been invoiced are not reflected in deferred revenue. Revenue is recognized ratably over the subscription term.

Professional services revenue is recognized as the services are rendered for time and material contracts, and using the proportional performance method over the period the services are performed for fixed price contracts. Professional services revenue was not material for all periods presented.

Cost of Revenue

Our cost of revenue consists primarily of costs related to providing our cloud-based services to our paying customers, including employee compensation and related expenses for datacenter operations, customer support and professional services personnel, payments to outside infrastructure service providers, depreciation of servers and equipment, security services and other tools, as well as amortization of acquired technology. We allocate overhead such as rent, information technology costs and employee benefit costs to all departments based on headcount. As such, general overhead expenses are reflected in cost of revenue and each of the operating expense categories set forth below. We expect our cost of revenue to increase in dollars and may increase as a percentage of revenue as we continue to invest in our datacenter operations and customer support to support the growth of our business, our customer base, as well as our international expansion.

Operating Expenses

Our operating expenses consist of research and development, sales and marketing, and general and administrative expenses. Personnel costs are the most significant component of each category of operating expenses. Operating expenses also include allocated overhead costs for facilities, information technology costs and employee benefit costs.

 

54


Table of Contents

Research and Development. Research and development expense consists primarily of employee compensation and related expenses, as well as allocated overhead. Our research and development efforts are focused on scaling our platform, adding enterprise grade features, functionality and security, and enhancing the ease of use of our cloud-based services. We expect our research and development expense to increase in dollars but decrease as a percentage of revenue over time, as we continue to invest in our future products and services.

Sales and Marketing.  Sales and marketing expense consists primarily of employee compensation and related expenses, sales commissions, marketing programs, travel related expenses, as well as allocated overhead. Marketing programs include but are not limited to advertising, events, corporate communications, brand building, and product marketing. Sales and marketing expense also consists of datacenter and customer support costs related to providing our cloud-based services to our free users. We market and sell our cloud-based services worldwide through our direct sales organization and through indirect distribution channels such as strategic resellers. We expect our sales and marketing expense to continue to increase in dollars but decrease as a percentage of revenue over time as we increase the size of our sales and marketing organization and expand our international presence.

General and Administrative.  General and administrative expense consists primarily of employee compensation and related expenses for administrative functions including finance, legal, human resources and recruiting, and fees for external professional services as well as allocated overhead. External professional services fees are primarily comprised of outside legal, accounting, temporary services, audit and outsourcing services. We expect our general and administrative expense to increase in dollars but decrease as a percentage of revenue over time as we incur additional costs related to operating as a publicly traded company including increased headcount and audit, legal, regulatory and other related fees.

Remeasurement of Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock Warrant Liability

The remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability includes charges from the change in fair value of our redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability as of each period end. These redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants will remain outstanding until the exercise or expiration of the warrants or the completion of this offering, at which time the warrant liability will be remeasured to fair value and reclassified to additional paid-in capital.

Interest Income (Expense), Net

Interest income consists of interest earned on our cash and cash equivalent and marketable securities balances. We have historically invested our cash in overnight deposits and short-term, investment-grade corporate securities. Interest expense consists of interest charges and the amortization of capitalized debt issuance costs associated with our outstanding borrowings.

Other Income (Expense), Net

Other income (expense), net consists primarily of gains and losses from foreign currency transactions and other income (expense).

Provision (Benefit) for Income Taxes

Provision (benefit) for income taxes consists primarily of state income taxes in the United States and income taxes in certain foreign jurisdictions in which we conduct business. At January 31, 2014, we had federal and state net operating loss carryforwards (NOLs) of $263.7 million and $262.6 million, which expire at various dates beginning in 2025 and 2016, respectively. Federal and state tax laws impose limitations on the utilization of NOLs in the event of an “ownership change” for tax purposes, as defined in Section 382 of the Internal Revenue Code. In the past, we have experienced an ownership change which has impacted our ability to fully realize the benefit of these NOLs. If we experience additional ownership changes as a result of this offering, our ability to utilize our NOLs may be further limited.

 

55


Table of Contents

Results of Operations

The following tables set forth our results of operations for the periods presented in dollars and as a percentage of our revenue:

 

     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
    Year Ended
January 31,

2013
    Year Ended
January 31,

2014
 
        
     (in thousands)  

Consolidated Statements of Operations Data:

      

Revenue

   $ 21,084      $ 58,797      $ 124,192   

Cost of revenue (1)

     6,873        14,280        25,974   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

     14,211        44,517        98,218   

Operating expenses:

      

Research and development (1)

     14,396        28,996        45,967   

Sales and marketing (1)

     36,189        99,221        171,188   

General and administrative (1)

     13,480        25,429        39,843   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total operating expenses

     64,065        153,646        256,998   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss from operations

     (49,854     (109,129     (158,780

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

     (356     (1,727     (8,477

Interest income (expense), net

     (109     (1,764     (3,705

Other income (expense), net

     49        116        (26
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss before provision (benefit) for income taxes

     (50,270     (112,504     (170,988

Provision (benefit) for income taxes

     1        59        (2,431
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss

   $ (50,271   $ (112,563   $ (168,557
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

(1) Includes stock-based compensation expense as follows:

 

     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
     Year Ended
January 31,

2013
     Year Ended
January 31,

2014
 
          
     (in thousands)  

Cost of revenue

   $ 686       $ 1,087       $ 450   

Research and development

     899         1,211         3,154   

Sales and marketing

     837         1,893         5,017   

General and administrative

     3,800         3,345         3,128   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total stock-based compensation

   $ 6,222       $ 7,536       $ 11,749   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

56


Table of Contents
     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
    Year Ended
January 31,

2013
    Year Ended
January 31,
2014
 
        

Percentage of Revenue:

      

Revenue

     100     100     100

Cost of revenue

     33        24        21   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

     67        76        79   

Operating expenses:

      

Research and development

     68        49        37   

Sales and marketing

     172        169        138   

General and administrative

     64        43        32   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total operating expenses

     304        261        207   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss from operations

     (237     (185     (128

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

     (1     (3     (7

Interest income (expense), net

            (3     (3

Other income (expense), net

                     
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss before provision (benefit) for income taxes

     (238     (191     (138

Provision (benefit) for income taxes

                   (2
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss

     (238 )%      (191 )%      (136 )% 
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Comparison of the Years Ended January 31, 2013 and January 31, 2014

Revenue

 

     Year Ended
January 31,
               
     2013      2014      $ Change      % Change  
     (dollars in thousands)  

Revenue

   $ 58,797       $ 124,192       $ 65,395         111

Revenue increased by $65.4 million, or 111%, during the year ended January 31, 2014 compared to the year ended January 31, 2013. The increase in revenue was substantially driven by an increase in subscription services. The increase in subscription services was due to the addition of new customers, as the number of paying organizations increased by 44% from January 31, 2013 to January 31, 2014. Also in this period, we experienced increased renewals from and expansion within existing customers as they broadened their deployment of our product offerings, as reflected in our retention rate of 136% as of January 31, 2014.

Cost of Revenue and Gross Margin

 

     Year Ended
January 31,
              
     2013     2014     $ Change      % Change  
     (dollars in thousands)  

Cost of revenue

   $ 14,280      $ 25,974      $ 11,694         82

Gross margin

     76     79     

Cost of revenue increased by $11.7 million, or 82%, during the year ended January 31, 2014 compared to the year ended January 31, 2013. The increase was primarily due to an increase in employee and related costs resulting from growth in our datacenter operations, customer support and professional services headcount from

 

57


Table of Contents

81 employees as of January 31, 2013 to 116 employees as of January 31, 2014 to support an increased number of paying customers and an increase in depreciation of our server equipment as we brought our Las Vegas datacenter online and increased our capacity to serve a larger number of customers.

Research and Development

 

     Year Ended
January 31,
               
     2013      2014      $ Change      % Change  
     (dollars in thousands)  

Research and development

   $ 28,996       $ 45,967       $ 16,971         59

Research and development increased by $17.0 million, or 59%, during the year ended January 31, 2014 compared to the year ended January 31, 2013. The increase was primarily driven by an increase of $14.3 million in employee and related costs as we increased our headcount from 159 employees as of January 31, 2013 to 234 employees as of January 31, 2014 to support continued investment in our product and service offerings and scalability, and a $2.5 million increase in allocated overhead costs.

Sales and Marketing

 

                                       
     Year Ended
January 31,
               
     2013      2014      $ Change      % Change  
     (dollars in thousands)  

Sales and marketing

   $ 99,221       $ 171,188       $ 71,967         73

Sales and marketing increased by $72.0 million, or 73%, during the year ended January 31, 2014 compared to the year ended January 31, 2013. The increase was primarily due to an increase of $45.5 million in employee and related costs, including higher commission expenses of $16.0 million, driven by headcount growth from 374 employees as of January 31, 2013 to 513 employees as of January 31, 2014, and higher sales, an increase of $12.6 million in datacenter and customer support costs to support free users, an increase of $6.4 million in allocated overhead costs, and an increase of $2.8 million in travel-related costs.

General and Administrative

 

     Year Ended
January 31,
               
     2013      2014      $ Change      % Change  
     (dollars in thousands)  

General and administrative

   $ 25,429       $ 39,843       $ 14,414         57

General and administrative increased by $14.4 million, or 57%, during the year ended January 31, 2014 compared to the year ended January 31, 2013. The increase was primarily due to an increase of $7.9 million in consulting, legal and accounting and audit fees as we expand internationally and prepare to become a public company, as well as an increase of $6.5 million in employee and related costs resulting from headcount growth from 75 employees as of January 31, 2013 to 109 employees as of January 31, 2014.

 

58


Table of Contents

Remeasurement of Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock Warrant Liability

 

     Year Ended
January 31,
             
       2013         2014       $ Change     % Change  
     (dollars in thousands)  

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

   $ (1,727   $ (8,477   $ (6,750     *   

 

* Not meaningful

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability increased by $6.8 million during the year ended January 31, 2014 compared to the year ended January 31, 2013. The increase in the fair value of our outstanding redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants was primarily driven by the increase in the value of our underlying common stock.

Interest Expense, Net and Other Income (Expense), Net

 

     Year Ended
January 31,
             
     2013     2014     $ Change     % Change  
     (dollars in thousands)  

Interest expense, net

   $ (1,764   $ (3,705   $ (1,941     110

Other income (expense), net

     116        (26     (142     *   

 

* Not meaningful

Interest expense, net increased by $1.9 million, or 110%, during the year ended January 31, 2014 compared to the year ended January 31, 2013. The increase was primarily due to the end-of-term and early payment fees in connection with the payoff of prior borrowings which was recorded as interest expense during the year ended January 31, 2014.

Other income (expense), net consisted primarily of foreign currency gains (losses).

Provision (Benefit) for Income Taxes

 

     Year Ended
January 31,
             
         2013              2014         $ Change     % Change  
     (dollars in thousands)  

Provision (benefit) for income taxes

   $ 59       $ (2,431   $ (2,490     *   

 

* Not meaningful

The decrease in provision (benefit) for income taxes during the year ended January 31, 2014 compared to the year ended January 31, 2013 was primarily due to a discrete tax benefit from a partial release of the valuation allowance on our deferred tax assets, primarily in connection with our acquisition of Crocodoc. With the acquisition, a deferred tax liability was established for the book-tax basis difference related to purchased intangibles. The net deferred tax liability provided an additional source of income to support the realizability of pre-existing deferred tax assets.

 

59


Table of Contents

Comparison of the Years Ended December 31, 2011 and January 31, 2013

Revenue

 

     Year Ended                
     December 31,
2011
     January 31,
2013
     $ Change      % Change  
     (dollars in thousands)  

Revenue

   $ 21,084       $ 58,797       $ 37,713         179

Revenue increased by $37.7 million, or 179%, during the year ended January 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011. The increase in revenue was substantially driven by an increase in subscription services. The increase in subscription services was due to a 61% increase in the number of paying organizations from December 31, 2011 to January 31, 2013. Also in this period, we experienced increased renewals from and expansion within existing customers as they broadened their deployment of our services, as reflected by our retention rate of approximately 144% as of January 31, 2013.

Cost of Revenue and Gross Margin

 

     Year Ended               
     December 31,
2011
    January 31,
2013
    $ Change      % Change  
     (dollars in thousands)  

Cost of revenue

   $ 6,873      $ 14,280      $ 7,407         108

Gross margin

     67     76     

Cost of revenue increased by $7.4 million, or 108%, during the year ended January 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011. The increase was primarily due to an increase in employee and related costs resulting from growth in our datacenter operations, customer support and professional services headcount from 36 employees as of December 31, 2011 to 81 employees as of January 31, 2013 to support an increased number of paying customers and an increase in depreciation of our server equipment as we expanded our Box services deployment capacity.

Research and Development

 

     Year Ended                
     December 31,
2011
     January 31,
2013
     $ Change      % Change  
     (dollars in thousands)  

Research and development

   $ 14,396       $ 28,996       $ 14,600         101

Research and development expense increased by $14.6 million, or 101%, during the year ended January 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011. The increase was primarily driven by an increase of $10.4 million in employee and related costs as we increased our headcount from 99 employees as of December 31, 2011 to 159 employees as of January 31, 2013 to support continued investment in our product and service offerings, and a $3.1 million increase in allocated overhead costs.

Sales and Marketing

 

     Year Ended                
     December 31,
2011
     January 31,
2013
     $ Change      % Change  
     (dollars in thousands)  

Sales and marketing

   $ 36,189       $ 99,221       $ 63,032         174

 

60


Table of Contents

Sales and marketing expense increased by $63.0 million, or 174%, during the year ended January 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011. The increase was primarily due to an increase of $31.6 million in employee and related costs, including an increase in commission expenses of $9.2 million driven by headcount growth from 160 employees as of December 31, 2011 to 374 employees as of January 31, 2013, and higher sales, an increase of $11.9 million in lead generation, brand awareness and marketing costs, an increase of $9.1 million in datacenter and customer support costs to support free users, and an increase of $8.6 million in allocated overhead costs.

General and Administrative

 

     Year Ended                
     December 31,
2011
     January 31,
2013
     $ Change      % Change  
     (dollars in thousands)  

General and administrative

   $ 13,480       $ 25,429       $ 11,949         89

General and administrative expense increased by $11.9 million, or 89%, during the year ended January 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011. The increase was primarily due to an increase of $2.8 million in outside placement fees and related costs, a $2.6 million increase in consulting, legal and accounting fees, a $2.3 million increase in miscellaneous taxes, as well as a $1.4 million increase in employee and related costs resulting from headcount growth from 41 employees as of December 31, 2011 to 75 employees as of January 31, 2013.

Remeasurement of Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock Warrant Liability

 

     Year Ended              
     December 31,
2011
    January 31,
2013
    $ Change     % Change  
     (dollars in thousands)  

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

   $ (356   $ (1,727   $ (1,371     *   

 

* Not meaningful

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability increased by $1.4 million during the year ended January 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011. The increase in the fair value of our outstanding redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants during the year ended January 31, 2013 was primarily driven by the underlying increase in the value of our common stock.

Interest Expense, Net and Other Income, Net

 

     Year Ended              
     December 31,
2011
    January 31,
2013
    $ Change     % Change  
     (dollars in thousands)  

Interest expense, net

   $ (109   $ (1,764   $ (1,655     *   

Other income, net

     49        116        67        137

 

* Not meaningful

Interest expense, net increased by $1.7 million during the year ended January 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011. The increase was primarily due to additional borrowings during the year ended January 31, 2013.

 

61


Table of Contents

Provision for Income Taxes

 

     Year Ended                
     December 31,
2011
     January 31,
2013
     $ Change      % Change  
     (dollars in thousands)  

Provision for income taxes

   $ 1       $ 59       $ 58         *   

 

* Not meaningful

The increase in provision for income taxes during the year ended January 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011 was due to an increase in foreign taxes related to our foreign operations.

Quarterly Results of Operations

The following tables set forth selected unaudited quarterly consolidated statements of operations data for each of the eight quarters in the period ended January 31, 2014. The information for each of these quarters has been prepared on the same basis as the audited annual consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus and, in the opinion of management, includes all adjustments, which include only normal recurring adjustments, necessary for the fair presentation of the results of operations for these periods in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States. This data should be read in conjunction with our audited consolidated financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus. These quarterly operating results are not necessarily indicative of our operating results for a full year or any future period.

 

    Three Months Ended  
    Apr. 30,
2012
    Jul. 31,
2012
    Oct. 31,
2012
    Jan. 31,
2013
    Apr. 30,
2013
    Jul. 31,
2013
    Oct. 31,
2013
    Jan. 31,
2014
 
    (in thousands)  

Consolidated Statements of Operations Data:

               

Revenue

  $ 10,013      $ 12,958      $ 16,164      $ 19,662      $ 23,414      $ 28,364      $ 33,585      $ 38,829   

Cost of revenue

    2,355        3,164        4,484        4,277        4,561        5,907        7,172        8,334   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

    7,658        9,794        11,680        15,385        18,853        22,457        26,413        30,495   

Operating expenses:

               

Research and development

    5,994        6,663        7,993        8,346        9,439        10,965        12,090        13,473   

Sales and marketing

    17,971        22,363        27,934        30,953        33,936        41,416        48,822        47,014   

General and administrative

    3,910        5,385        8,447        7,687        8,261        10,010        11,386        10,186   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total operating expenses

    27,875        34,411        44,374        46,986        51,636        62,391        72,298        70,673   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss from operations

    (20,217     (24,617     (32,694     (31,601     (32,783     (39,934     (45,885     (40,178

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

           (1,529     (81     (117     (693     (1,607     (3,583     (2,594

Interest income (expense), net

    (222     (347     (614     (581     (548     (716     (1,979     (462

Other income (expense), net

    9        6               101        (9     (73     111        (55
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss before provision (benefit) for income taxes

    (20,430     (26,487     (33,389     (32,198     (34,033     (42,330     (51,336     (43,289

Provision (benefit) for income taxes

    3               8        48        6        (2,575     55        83   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss

  $ (20,433   $ (26,487   $ (33,397   $ (32,246   $ (34,039   $ (39,755   $ (51,391   $ (43,372
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

62


Table of Contents
     Three Months Ended  
     Apr. 30,
2012
    Jul. 31,
2012
    Oct. 31,
2012
    Jan. 31,
2013
    Apr. 30,
2013
    Jul. 31,
2013
    Oct. 31,
2013
    Jan. 31,
2014
 

Percentage of Revenue:

                

Revenue

     100     100     100     100     100     100     100     100

Cost of revenue

     24        24        28        22        19        21        21        21   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

     76        76        72        78        81        79        79        79   

Operating expenses:

                

Research and development

     60        51        49        42        40        39        36        35   

Sales and marketing

     179        173        173        157        146        146        145        121   

General and administrative

     39        42        52        39        35        35        34        26   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total operating expenses

     278        266        274        238        221        220        215        182   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss from operations

     (202     (190     (202     (160     (140     (141     (136     (103

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

            (12     (1     (1     (3     (6     (11     (7

Interest income (expense), net

     (2     (2     (4     (4     (2     (2     (6     (2

Other income (expense), net

                          1                               
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss before provision (benefit) for income taxes

     (204     (204     (207     (164     (145     (149     (153     (112

Provision (benefit) for income taxes

                                        (9              
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss

     (204 )%      (204 )%      (207 )%      (164 )%      (145 )%      (140 )%      (153 )%      (112 )% 
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Quarterly Revenues Trends

Our quarterly revenues increased sequentially for all periods presented due primarily to increases in the number of new customers as well as increased renewals from and expansion within existing customers as they broadened their deployment of our services. Our fourth quarter has historically been our strongest quarter for contracting activity as a result of large enterprise buying patterns.

Quarterly Costs and Expenses Trends

Total costs and expenses generally increased sequentially for all periods presented, primarily due to the addition of personnel in connection with the expansion of our business. Sales and marketing expenses generally grew sequentially over the periods. General and administrative costs generally increased in recent quarters due to higher professional service fees for preparing to be a public company. During the three months ended October 31, 2012, we recorded a non-recurring stock-based compensation expense of $3.8 million related to secondary sales of shares of our common stock. This $3.8 million compensation expense was distributed among cost of revenue, research and development expenses, sales and marketing expenses and general and administrative expenses in amounts of $825,000, $571,000, $328,000 and $2.1 million, respectively, based upon the classification of the underlying employees involved.

Our quarterly operating results may fluctuate due to various factors affecting our performance. As noted above, we recognize revenue from subscription fees ratably over the term of the contract. Therefore, changes in our contracting activity in the near term may not be apparent as a change to our reported revenue until future periods. Most of our expenses are recorded as period costs, and thus, factors affecting our cost structure may be reflected in our financial results sooner than changes to our contracting activity.

 

63


Table of Contents

Liquidity and Capital Resources

 

     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
    Year Ended
January 31,

2013
    Year Ended
January 31,

2014
 
      
     (in thousands)  

Cash flow used in operating activities

   $ (34,273   $ (81,751   $ (91,769

Cash flow provided by (used in) investing activities

     (38,293     314        (32,185

Cash flow provided by financing activities

     102,849        172,797        105,165   

As of January 31, 2014, we had cash and cash equivalents of $108.9 million. Our cash and cash equivalents are comprised primarily of overnight cash deposits. We have generated significant operating losses and negative cash flows from operations as reflected in our accumulated deficit and consolidated statements of cash flows. We may continue to incur operating losses and negative cash flows from operations in the future and may require additional capital resources to execute strategic initiatives to grow our business.

Since our inception, we have financed our operations primarily through equity and, to a lesser extent, debt financing, as well as cash generated from sales. We believe our existing cash and cash equivalents, our credit facilities, and cash provided by this offering will be sufficient to meet our working capital and capital expenditure needs for at least the next 12 months. Our future capital requirements will depend on many factors including our growth rate, subscription renewal activity, billing frequency, the timing and extent of spending to support development efforts, the expansion of sales and marketing and international operation activities, the introduction of new and enhanced services offerings, and the continuing market acceptance of our services. We may in the future enter into arrangements to acquire or invest in complementary businesses, services and technologies, including intellectual property rights. We may be required to seek additional equity or debt financing. In the event that additional financing is required from outside sources, we may not be able to raise it on terms acceptable to us or at all. If we are unable to raise additional capital when desired, our business, operating results and financial condition would be adversely affected.

In August 2013, we entered into a $100.0 million two-year revolving line of credit facility with Credit Suisse AG, Cayman Islands Branch, JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A., Morgan Stanley Senior Funding, Inc. and BMO Harris Financing, Inc. The credit facility is denominated in U.S. dollars and, depending on certain conditions, each borrowing is subject to a floating interest rate equal to the London Interbank Offer Rate (LIBOR) plus 3.0% or the Alternate Base Rate (ABR) plus 2.0%. Also in August 2013, we drew $34.0 million of the credit facility at 3.4% (six month LIBOR plus 3.0%), which was used to pay down outstanding borrowings and related end-of-term and early payment fees, as well as for other general corporate purposes. As of January 31, 2014, the outstanding borrowings on our revolving line of credit facility were $34.0 million.

The revolving line of credit facility is collateralized by substantially all of our assets. It also contains various covenants, including covenants related to the delivery of financial and other information, the maintenance of quarterly financial covenants, as well as limitations on dispositions, mergers or consolidations and other corporate activities. As of January 31, 2014, we were in compliance with all financial covenants.

Operating Activities

For the year ended January 31, 2014, cash used in operating activities was $91.8 million. The primary factors affecting our operating cash flows during this period were our net loss of $168.6 million, partially offset by non-cash charges of $17.9 million for depreciation and amortization of our property and equipment and intangible assets, $13.5 million for amortization of deferred commissions, $11.7 million for stock-based compensation, and $8.5 million for the remeasurement of our redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability, and net cash inflows of $27.6 million provided by changes in our operating assets and liabilities. The primary drivers of the changes in operating assets and liabilities were a $50.0 million increase in deferred revenue and a $24.1 million increase in accrued expenses and other liabilities, partially offset by a $25.2 million

 

64


Table of Contents

increase in accounts receivable and a $14.0 million increase in deferred commissions. The increase in deferred revenue was primarily due to the growth in the number of paying customers and increased renewals from, and expansion within, our existing customers as they broadened their deployment of our services. The increase in accrued expenses and other liabilities was primarily attributable to increased activities to support the overall growth of our business. The increase in deferred commissions was due to higher sales. The increase in accounts receivable was due to increased sales and the timing of our cash collections during the period.

For the year ended January 31, 2013, cash used in operating activities was $81.8 million. The primary factors affecting our operating cash flows during this period were our net loss of $112.6 million, partially offset by non-cash charges of $8.6 million for depreciation and amortization of our property and equipment, $7.5 million for stock-based compensation, and $7.0 million for the amortization of deferred commissions, and net cash inflows of $5.3 million provided by changes in our operating assets and liabilities. The primary drivers of the changes in operating assets and liabilities were a $26.9 million increase in deferred revenue, partially offset by a $14.0 million increase in deferred commissions and a $11.5 million increase in accounts receivable. The increase in deferred revenue was primarily driven by the growth in the number of paying customers and increased renewals from and expansion within our existing customers as they broadened their deployment of our services. The increase in deferred commissions was due to increased sales. The increase in accounts receivable was due to increased sales and the timing of our cash collections during the period.

For the year ended December 31, 2011, cash used in operating activities was $34.3 million. The primary factors affecting our operating cash flows during this period were our net loss of $50.3 million, partially offset by non-cash charges of $6.2 million for stock-based compensation and $2.8 million for depreciation and amortization of our property and equipment, and net cash inflows of $4.7 million provided by changes in our operating assets and liabilities. The primary drivers of the changes in operating assets and liabilities were a $9.3 million increase in deferred revenue, partially offset by a $4.1 million increase in accounts receivable. The increase in deferred revenue was primarily driven by the growth in the number of paying customers and increased renewals from and expansion within our existing customers as they broadened their deployment of our services. The increase in accounts receivable was due to increased sales and the timing of our cash collections during the period.

Investing Activities

Cash used in investing activities of $32.2 million for the year ended January 31, 2014 was due to $24.4 million in capital expenditures and $7.8 million for the acquisition of Crocodoc and other intangible assets, net of cash acquired.

Cash provided by investing activities of $0.3 million for the year ended January 31, 2013 was primarily due to $20.0 million in proceeds from the maturity of marketable securities, partially offset by $19.5 million in capital expenditures.

Cash used in investing activities of $38.3 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 was primarily due to $23.8 million from net purchases of and proceeds from maturities of marketable securities and $13.5 million in capital expenditures.

Financing Activities

Cash provided by financing activities for the year ended January 31, 2014 of $105.2 million was primarily due to $99.9 million in net proceeds from the issuance of our Series E-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock and $3.0 million of proceeds from the exercise of stock options. During this period, we also drew a net of $32.7 million on our new revolving line of credit facility and repaid $31.0 million in connection with our prior borrowings.

Cash provided by financing activities of $172.8 million for the year ended January 31, 2013 was primarily attributable to $150.8 million in net proceeds from the issuance of our Series D-2 and Series E redeemable convertible preferred stock and $19.8 million in net proceeds from borrowings.

 

65


Table of Contents

Cash provided by financing activities of $102.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 was primarily due to $92.0 million in net proceeds from the issuance of our Series D, D-1 and D-2 redeemable convertible preferred stock and net proceeds of $10.6 million from borrowings.

Contractual Obligations and Commitments

The following summarizes our contractual obligations and commitments as of January 31, 2014:

 

            Payments Due by Period  
     Total      Less Than 1
Year
     1-3 Years      3-5 Years      More Than
5 Years
 
     (in thousands)  

Debt (1)

   $ 36,353       $ 1,486       $ 34,867       $       $   

Operating leases

     27,294         7,517         11,791         7,986           

Purchase obligations (2)

     18,825         14,474         4,351                   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

   $ 82,472       $ 23,477       $ 51,009       $ 7,986       $   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

(1) Includes interest and unused commitment fee on our line of credit.
(2) Purchase obligations relate primarily to datacenter operations and sales activities.

Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements

Through January 31, 2014, we did not have any relationships with unconsolidated organizations or financial partnerships, such as structured finance or special purpose entities that would have been established for the purpose of facilitating off-balance sheet arrangements or other contractually narrow or limited purposes.

Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates

Our consolidated financial statements are prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States. The preparation of these consolidated financial statements requires us to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, revenue, costs and expenses, and related disclosures. On an ongoing basis, we evaluate our estimates and assumptions. Our actual results may differ from these estimates under different assumptions or conditions.

We believe that of our significant accounting policies, which are described in Note 2 to our consolidated financial statements, the following accounting policies involve a greater degree of judgment and complexity. Accordingly, these are the policies we believe are the most critical to aid in fully understanding and evaluating our consolidated financial condition and results of our operations.

Revenue Recognition

We derive our revenue from three sources: (1) subscription revenue, which is comprised of subscription fees from customers utilizing our cloud-based Enterprise Content Collaboration services that include routine customer support; (2) revenue from customers purchasing our premier support package; and (3) revenue from professional services such as implementing best practice use cases, project management and implementation services.

We recognize revenue when all of the following conditions are met:

 

    there is persuasive evidence of an arrangement;

 

    the service has been provided to the customer;

 

    the collection of fees is reasonably assured; and

 

    the amount of fees to be paid by the customer is fixed or determinable.

 

66


Table of Contents

We typically invoice our customers at the beginning of the term, in multiyear, annual, quarterly or monthly installments. Our subscription and support contracts are typically non-cancellable and do not contain refund-type provisions.

In instances where we collect fees in advance of service delivery, revenue under the contract is deferred until we successfully deliver such services.

Subscription revenue is recognized ratably over the period of the subscription beginning once all requirements for revenue recognition have been met, including provisioning the service so that it is available to our customers. Premier support is sold together with the subscription hosting services, and the term of the premier support is generally the same as the related subscription hosting services arrangement. Accordingly, we recognize premier support revenue in the same manner as the associated subscription hosting service. Professional services revenue is recognized as the services are rendered for time and material contracts, and using the proportional performance method over the period the services are performed for fixed price contracts. Professional services and premier support services revenues were not material for all periods presented.

We assess collectability based on a number of factors, such as past collection history and creditworthiness of the customer. If management determines collectability is not reasonably assured, we defer revenue recognition until collectability becomes reasonably assured.

Our arrangements can include multiple elements which may consist of some or all of subscription services, premier support and professional services. When multiple-element arrangements exist, we evaluate whether these individual deliverables should be accounted for as separate units of accounting or one single unit of accounting.

In order to treat deliverables in a multiple-element arrangement as separate units of accounting, the delivered item or items must have standalone value upon delivery. A delivered item has standalone value to the customer when either (1) any vendor sells that item separately or (2) the customer could resell that item on a standalone basis. Our subscription hosting services have standalone value as such services are often sold separately. Our premier support services do not have standalone value because we and other vendors do not sell premier support services separately. Our professional services have stand-alone value because there are other vendors which sell the same professional services separately. Accordingly, we consider the separate units of accounting in our multiple deliverable arrangements to be the professional services, subscription services or a combined deliverable comprised of subscription hosting services and premier support services. When multiple deliverables included in an arrangement are separable into different units of accounting, the arrangement consideration is allocated to the identified separate units of accounting based on their relative selling price. Multiple-element arrangement accounting guidance provides a hierarchy to use when determining the relative selling price for each unit of accounting. Vendor-specific objective evidence (VSOE) of selling price, based on the price at which the item is regularly sold by the vendor on a standalone basis, should be used if it exists. If VSOE of selling price is not available, third-party evidence (TPE) of selling price is used to establish the selling price if it exists. We have not established VSOE for our subscription services, premier support or professional services due to lack of pricing consistency, the introduction of new services and other factors. We have also concluded that third-party evidence of selling price is not a practical alternative due to differences in our service offerings compared to other parties and the availability of relevant third-party pricing information. Accordingly, we use our best estimate of selling price (BESP) to determine the relative selling price for our subscription, premier support and professional services offerings. For arrangements with multiple deliverables which can be separated into different units of accounting, we allocate the arrangement fee to the separate units of accounting based on our BESP. The amount of arrangement fee allocated is limited by contingent revenue, if any.

We determined BESP by considering our overall pricing objectives and market conditions. Significant pricing practices taken into consideration for our subscription hosting services, which may also include premier support, and professional services, include discounting practices, the size and volume of our transactions, the customer demographic, the geographic area where services are sold, price lists, our go-to-market strategy,

 

67


Table of Contents

historical standalone sales and contract prices. The determination of BESP is made through consultation with and approval by our management, taking into consideration our go-to-market strategy. As our go-to-market strategies evolve, we may modify our pricing practices in the future, which could result in changes in relative selling prices.

Deferred Commissions

Deferred commissions consist of direct incremental costs paid to our sales force associated with non-cancellable terms of the related contracts. The deferred commission amounts are recoverable through future revenue streams under the non-cancellable customer contracts. Direct sales commissions are deferred when earned and amortized over the same period that revenue is recognized for the related non-cancellable subscription period. Amortization of deferred commissions is included in sales and marketing expense in the consolidated statements of operations.

Stock-Based Compensation

We measure and recognize compensation expense for all stock-based awards granted to our employees and other service providers, including stock options, restricted stock units and restricted stock, based on the estimated fair value of the award on the grant date. We use the Black-Scholes option pricing model to estimate the fair value of stock option awards. The fair value of restricted stock units and restricted stock is determined based on the fair value of our common stock estimated as part of the capital stock and business enterprise valuation process. The fair value is recognized as an expense, net of estimated forfeitures, on a straight line basis over the requisite service period.

Our option pricing model requires the input of highly subjective assumptions, including the fair value of the underlying common stock, the expected term of the option, the expected volatility of the price of our common stock, risk-free interest rates, and the expected dividend yield of our common stock. The assumptions used in our option-pricing model represent management’s best estimates. These estimates involve inherent uncertainties and the application of management’s judgment. If factors change and different assumptions are used, our stock-based compensation expense could be materially different in the future.

These assumptions are estimated as follows:

 

    Fair Value of Our Common Stock. As our common stock is not publicly traded, we must estimate the fair value of our common stock, as discussed in the section “Common Stock Valuations” below.

 

    Risk-Free Interest Rate. We base the risk-free interest rate used in the Black-Scholes option pricing model on the implied yield available on U.S. Treasury zero-coupon issues with remaining terms similar to the expected term on the options.

 

    Expected Term. The expected term represents the period that our stock-based awards are expected to be outstanding. We determined the expected term assumption based on the vesting terms, exercise terms and contractual terms of the options.

 

    Volatility. We determine the price volatility factor based on the historical volatilities of our comparable companies as we do not have a sufficient trading history for our common stock. To determine our comparable companies, we consider public enterprise cloud-based application providers and select those that are similar to us in size, stage of life cycle, and financial leverage. For valuations prior to June 2013, we used the same group of comparable companies. For valuations beginning June 2013, we updated the group with companies that have recently become publicly traded and are similar to us. We intend to continue to apply this process using the same or similar public companies until a sufficient amount of historical information regarding the volatility of our own common stock share price becomes available, or unless circumstances change such that the identified companies are no longer similar to us, in which case, more suitable companies whose share prices are publicly available would be utilized in the calculation.

 

    Dividend Yield. We have not paid and do not expect to pay dividends.

 

68


Table of Contents

The following table summarizes the assumptions relating to our stock options as follows:

 

     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
    Year Ended
January 31,

2013
    Year Ended
January 31,
2014
 
        

Expected term (in years)

     5.0 – 6.1        5.0 – 7.4        4.9 – 6.3   

Risk-free interest rate

     1.1% – 2.7     0.7% – 1.7     0.8% – 1.9

Volatility

     55% – 57     53% – 55     48% – 57

Expected dividend yield

     0     0     0

In addition, we are required to estimate the expected forfeiture rate and only recognize expense for those shares that are expected to vest. We estimate the expected forfeiture rate based on historical experience and our expectations regarding future pre-vesting termination behavior of employees and other service providers. To the extent our actual forfeiture rate is different from our estimate, stock-based compensation expense is adjusted accordingly.

We will continue to use judgment in evaluating the assumptions related to our stock-based compensation on a prospective basis. As we continue to accumulate additional data related to our common stock, we may have refinements to our estimates, which could materially impact our future stock-based compensation expense.

The following table summarizes, by grant date, all stock options, restricted stock units and restricted stock awards from January 1, 2013 through January 31, 2014:

 

Grant Date

   Number of
Options Granted
     Number of
Shares of
Restricted Stock
Units Granted
     Number of
Shares of
Restricted Stock
Granted
     Exercise Price
Per Share for
Options Granted
     Deemed Fair
Value of
Common Stock
Per Share
 

February 2013

     807,100                       $ 4.28 – 4.63       $ 4.63   

April 2013

     600,000                         4.63         5.48   

May 2013

     943,750                 322,435         4.63         5.85 – 5.96   

June 2013

     49,000                         4.63         6.53   

July 2013

     2,628,380                 20,000         4.63 – 6.13         7.09 – 7.52   

August 2013

     10,000                         4.63         8.58   

October 2013

     1,899,880                 875         4.63 – 6.97         10.10   

November 2013

     956,200                         4.63 - 6.97         10.10   

January 2014

     555,700         225,300         50,000         6.13 – 14.06         14.06   

Based on the assumed initial public offering price per share of $        , which is the midpoint of the estimated offering price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, the aggregate intrinsic value of our outstanding stock awards as of January 31, 2014 was $        , of which $         million related to vested awards and $         million related to unvested awards.

Common Stock Valuations

The fair values of the common stock underlying our stock-based awards were determined by our board of directors, with input from management and contemporaneous third-party valuations. We believe that our board of directors has the relevant experience and expertise to determine the fair value of our common stock. If awards were granted a short period of time preceding the date of a valuation report, we retrospectively assessed the fair value used for financial reporting purposes after considering the fair value reflected in the subsequent valuation report and other facts and circumstances on the date of grant as discussed below. In such instances, the fair value that we used for financial reporting purposes generally exceeded the exercise price for those awards.

Given the absence of a public trading market for our common stock, and in accordance with the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants Practice Guide,  Valuation of Privately-Held-Company Equity Securities

 

69


Table of Contents

Issued as Compensation , our board of directors exercised reasonable judgment and considered numerous objective and subjective factors to determine the best estimate of the fair value of our common stock including:

 

    contemporaneous valuations performed by unrelated third-party specialists;

 

    the prices, rights, preferences, and privileges of our redeemable convertible preferred stock relative to those of our common stock;

 

    lack of marketability of our common stock;

 

    our actual operating and financial performance;

 

    current business conditions and projections;

 

    hiring of key personnel and the experience of our management;

 

    the history of the company and the introduction of new services;

 

    our stage of development;

 

    likelihood of achieving a liquidity event, such as an initial public offering or a merger or acquisition of our company given prevailing market conditions;

 

    illiquidity of stock-based awards involving securities in a private company;

 

    the market performance of comparable publicly traded companies;

 

    recent private stock sale transactions; and

 

    the U.S. and global capital market conditions.

In valuing our common stock, our board of directors determined the equity value of our business generally using the income approach and the market comparable approach valuation methods. When applicable due to a recent redeemable convertible preferred stock offering, the prior sale of company stock approach was also utilized.

The income approach estimates value based on the expectation of future cash flows that a company will generate—such as cash earnings, cost savings, tax deductions, and the proceeds from disposition. These future cash flows are discounted to their present values using a discount rate derived from an analysis of the cost of capital of comparable publicly traded companies in our industry or similar lines of business as of each valuation date and is adjusted to reflect the risks inherent in our cash flows. In addition, we also considered an appropriate discount adjustment to recognize the lack of marketability due to being a private company.

The market comparable approach estimates value based on a comparison of the subject company to comparable public companies in a similar line of business. To determine our peer group of companies, we considered public enterprise cloud-based application providers and selected those that are similar to us in size, stage of life cycle, and financial leverage. From the comparable companies, a representative market value multiple is determined which is applied to the subject company’s operating results to estimate the value of the subject company. The market value multiple was determined based on consideration of revenue multiples and earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation, and amortization (EBITDA) to each of the comparable companies’ last 12-month revenue and the forecasted future 12-month revenue. In addition, the market approach considers merger and acquisition transactions involving companies similar to the subject company’s business being valued. Multiples of revenue or EBITDA are calculated for these transactions and then applied to the business being valued, after reduction by an appropriate discount. Based on the above, the estimated value is then discounted by a non-marketability factor due to the fact that stockholders of private companies do not have access to trading markets similar to those enjoyed by stockholders of public companies, which impacts liquidity.

The prior sale of company stock approach estimates value by considering any prior arm’s length sales of the company’s equity. When considering prior sales of the company’s equity, the valuation considers the size of the equity sale, the relationship of the parties involved in the transaction, the timing of the equity sale, and the financial condition of the company at the time of the sale.

 

70


Table of Contents

Once we determined an equity value, we utilized the option pricing method (OPM), to allocate the equity value to each of our classes of stock. This method is generally preferred when future outcomes are difficult to predict and dissolution or liquidation is not imminent. The OPM values each equity class by creating a series of call options on our equity value, with exercise prices based on the liquidation preferences, participation rights, and strike prices of derivatives. We performed this OPM analysis under two liquidity scenarios, a sale event and an initial public offering event, and applied an appropriate weighting to each scenario to determine the final fair market value of our common stock.

The Probability-Weighted Expected Return Method (PWERM) estimates the value of the common stock based upon an analysis of future values for the enterprise assuming various future outcomes. Share value is based upon the probability-weighted present value of expected future investment returns, considering each of the possible future outcomes available to the enterprise, as well as the rights of each share class.

The Hybrid Method is a hybrid between the PWERM and OPM, estimating the probability weighted value across multiple scenarios but using OPM to estimate the allocation of value within one or more of the scenarios. The Hybrid Method can be a useful alternative to explicitly modeling all PWERM scenarios in situations when the company has transparency into one or more near-terms exits (e.g., IPO) but is unsure about what will occur if the current plans fall through.

For all of the valuations through October 2013, we used the OPM due primarily to our early stage of development, lack of availability and reliability of estimates regarding the nature and timing horizons for exit outcomes, number and materiality of assumptions required, and availability of information. For the January 2014 valuation, we utilized the Hybrid Method in estimating the fair value of the common stock given there was more clarity on our IPO plans.

The following discussion relates primarily to our determination of the fair value per share of our common stock for purposes of calculating stock-based compensation expenses for grants since January 1, 2013. No single event caused the valuation of our common stock to increase or decrease through January 2014. For financial reporting purposes, we considered the amount of time between the valuation date and the grant date to determine whether to use the latest common stock valuation or a straight-line calculation between the two valuation dates. This determination included an evaluation of whether the subsequent valuation indicated that any significant change in valuation had occurred between the previous valuation and the grant date. Notwithstanding the fair value reassessments described below, we believe we applied a reasonable valuation method to determine the deemed fair value of the awards on the respective grant dates.

February 6, 2013 Valuation

The February 6, 2013 independent contemporaneous valuation was prepared on a minority, non-marketable interest basis. Revenue increased 179% in our fiscal year ended January 31, 2013 compared to our fiscal year ended December 31, 2011, and increased 22% from the third quarter of fiscal 2013 to the fourth quarter of fiscal 2013. The valuation took into account that the U.S. and global economies appeared broadly stable albeit with downside potential. The valuation used an equal weighting of the market comparable approach (25% for comparable companies and 25% for comparable merger and acquisition transactions) and the income approach. The discount rate applied to our cash flows was 45% and our enterprise value reflected a non-marketability discount of 23%. We also considered the secondary sales of an aggregate of 496,340 shares of our common stock in September 2012 at a price of $12.00 per share in our valuation and our determination of the fair value of our common stock. However, these transactions were not considered arms-length because the purchasers consisted of existing stockholders. Based on the factors noted above and the valuation, our board of directors determined that the fair value of our common stock was $4.63 per share.

For stock-based awards granted in February 2013, our board of directors determined the related fair value to be $4.63 per share given the close proximity of the February 6, 2013 valuation and the grant date of these awards.

 

71


Table of Contents

June 14, 2013 Valuation

The June 14, 2013 independent contemporaneous valuation was prepared on a minority, non-marketable interest basis. Revenue increased 134% from the first quarter of fiscal 2013 to the first quarter of fiscal 2014, and increased 19% from the fourth quarter of fiscal 2013 to the first quarter of fiscal 2014. In addition, the U.S. economy continued to recover with the prospect of further improvement through 2013 and 2014. We also updated our set of comparable companies utilized in our valuation with companies that we believed were relevant to us at that time. These comparable companies had slightly higher revenue multiples. The valuation used an equal weighting of the market comparable approach (25% for comparable companies and 25% for comparable merger and acquisition transactions) and the income approach. The discount rate applied to our cash flows was 43% and our enterprise value reflected a non-marketability discount of 27%. The higher non-marketability discount than the one used in the previous valuation was primarily a function of using an updated set of comparable companies. Based on the factors noted above and the independent contemporaneous valuation, our board of directors determined that the fair value of our common stock was $6.13 per share.

For financial reporting purposes, we applied a straight-line calculation using the valuations of $4.63 per share as of February 6, 2013 and $6.13 per share as of June 14, 2013 to retrospectively determine, with the benefit of hindsight, the fair value of our common stock for stock-based awards granted in April 2013 and May 2013. There was no single event identified during the interim period between February 2013 and June 2013 that resulted in the increase in fair value but rather a series of events related to our continued growth, including our acquisition of Crocodoc, product enhancements, an increase in the number of paying customers and the hiring of certain key employees.

October 11, 2013 Valuation

An independent contemporaneous valuation of our common stock was performed as of October 11, 2013. The valuation utilized the prior sale of company stock approach to estimate the fair value of our common stock. In October 2013, we established the terms for our Series E-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock financing. By October 31, 2013, we had raised $76 million through the issuance of 4,222,221 shares of our Series E-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock at a price of $18.00 per share, the majority of which was issued to new investors. In performing the valuation of our common stock as of October 11, 2013, we relied upon this transaction price to estimate the fair value of our common stock using the OPM model, given the close proximity of the financing to the valuation date and the fact that the price per share for our Series E-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock was established through sales to new investors on an arm’s length basis. Under the prior sale of company stock method, we considered other securities in relation to our Series E-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock and applied a volatility rate of 50%, an assumed time to liquidity, and a risk-free interest rate of 0.35% to determine our implied business enterprise value. Volatility was estimated based on available information on the volatility of the common stock of comparable, publicly traded companies. A non-marketability discount of 15% was then applied to the valuation. The lower non-marketability discount than the one used in the previous valuation was a function of several factors, including the implied value from our Series E-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock financing and consideration of a quantitative put option based marketability discount model. Based on the factors noted above and the independent contemporaneous valuation, our board of directors determined the fair value of our common stock was $6.97 per share.

We believe the valuation of our common stock as of October 11, 2013 was based upon assumptions that were appropriate for valuing common stock of a private company at that time. However, in light of certain activities that occurred subsequent to October 2013, including the commencement in November 2013 of our initial public offering process, management re-evaluated the valuation as of October 11, 2013 to determine whether there should be a reassessment of the fair value of our common stock solely for purposes of determining our stock-based compensation expense for the period ended October 31, 2013. Specifically, management reassessed the originally determined fair value of our common stock as of October 11, 2013 by giving more weighting to the probability of completing our initial public offering and by shortening the estimate of the time from October 11, 2013 to a potential liquidity event. On this basis, management revised our estimate of the fair value of our common stock to be $10.10 per share.

 

72


Table of Contents

For financial reporting purposes, we applied a straight-line calculation using the valuations of $6.13 per share in June 2013 and the revised fair value determination of $10.10 per share to retrospectively determine, with the benefit of hindsight, the fair value of our common stock for stock-based awards granted in June 2013, July 2013 and August 2013. There was no other single event identified during the interim period between June 2013 and October 2013 that resulted in the increase in fair value but rather a series of events related to our continued growth, product enhancements, an increase in the number of paying customers and the hiring of certain key employees. For stock-based awards granted in October 2013 and November 2013, we determined it was appropriate to use $10.10 per share to calculate the stock-based compensation expense for these awards.

January 13, 2014 Valuation

An independent contemporaneous valuation of our common stock was performed as of January 13, 2014. The valuation utilized the market comparable approach and the prior sale of company stock approach. We also updated the set of comparable companies utilized in our valuation with companies that we believed were relevant to us. These comparable companies had slightly higher revenue multiples than the comparable companies used in previous valuations. The prior sale of company stock approach considered primarily the Series E-1 redeemable preferred stock financing transaction at $18.00 per share as discussed in the aforementioned October 11, 2013 Valuation.

To determine the fair value of our common stock, we utilized the Hybrid Method and then gave consideration to recent secondary sales of our common stock. Under the Hybrid Method, an aggregate weighting of 55% was applied to two IPO scenarios given there was more clarity with respect to our IPO plans and a 45% weighting was applied to a non-IPO scenario. Under an IPO scenario, the value was estimated using the market comparable approach, a discount rate of 35%, an assumed time to liquidity of 0.41 year and a non-marketability discount of 10%. Under a second IPO scenario, the value was estimated using the Series E-1 redeemable preferred stock financing transaction at $18.00 per share and a non-marketability discount of 10%. Under a non-IPO scenario, the value was estimated using the prior sale of company stock approach using a volatility rate of 45%, an assumed time to liquidity of two years, a risk-free interest rate of 0.39% and a non-marketability discount of 20%. The use of the three aforementioned scenarios under the Hybrid Method yielded a per share value of $12.92. We also considered recent secondary sales of 32,626 shares of our common stock at an average sales price of $24.25. We then applied a 90% weighting to the $12.92 per share value determined under the Hybrid Method and a 10% weighting to the $24.25 average sales price of the secondary sales. Due to the relatively small number of shares sold in secondary sale transactions, the recent sale of our Series E-1 redeemable preferred stock to new investors at $18.00 per share, and the lack of financial information available to the purchasers of the secondary sales, we determined a 10% weighting was appropriate. Based on the factors noted above and the independent contemporaneous valuation, our board of directors determined the fair value of our common stock was $14.06 per share. For stock-based awards granted in January 2014, we determined it was appropriate to use $14.06 per share to calculate the stock-based compensation expense for these awards.

Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk

We have operations both within the United States and internationally, and we are exposed to market risks in the ordinary course of our business.

Interest Rate Risk

Our investments are considered cash equivalents and primarily consist of bank deposits or money market funds backed by United States Treasury Bills and certificates of deposit. At January 31, 2014, we had cash and cash equivalents of $108.9 million. The carrying amount of our cash equivalents reasonably approximates fair value, due to the short maturities of these instruments. The primary objectives of our investment activities are the preservation of capital, the fulfillment of liquidity needs and the fiduciary control of cash and investments. We

 

73


Table of Contents

do not enter into investments for trading or speculative purposes. Our investments are exposed to market risk due to a fluctuation in interest rates, which may affect our interest income and the fair market value of our investments. Due to the short-term nature of our investment portfolio, however, we do not believe an immediate 10% increase or decrease in interest rates would have a material effect on the fair market value of our portfolio. We therefore do not expect our operating results or cash flows to be materially affected by a sudden change in market interest rates.

In August 2013, we entered into a $100.0 million two-year revolving line of credit facility. The credit facility is denominated in U.S. dollars, and depending on certain conditions, each borrowing is subject to a floating interest rate equal to the LIBOR plus 3.0% or the ABR plus 2.0%. Also in August 2013, we drew $34.0 million of the credit facility at 3.4% (six month LIBOR plus 3.0%), which was used to pay down outstanding borrowings and related end-of-term and early payment fees, as well as for other general corporate purposes. As of January 31, 2014, the outstanding borrowings on our revolving line of credit facility were $34.0 million.

Interest rate risk also reflects our exposure to movements in interest rates associated with our borrowings. At January 31, 2014, we had total debt outstanding with carrying amount of $34.0 million which approximates fair value. A hypothetical 10% increase or decrease in interest rates after January 31, 2014 would not have a material impact on the fair values of our outstanding debt.

Foreign Currency Risk

Our sales contracts are denominated predominantly in U.S. dollars and, to a lesser extent, the British Pound, Euros and Japanese Yen. Consequently, our customer billings denominated in foreign currency are subject to foreign currency exchange risk. A portion of our operating expenses are incurred outside the United States and are denominated in foreign currencies, which are also subject to fluctuations due to changes in foreign currency exchange rates, particularly changes in the British Pound, Euro and Japanese Yen. Additionally, fluctuations in foreign currency exchange rates may cause us to recognize transaction gains and losses in our statement of operations. To date we have managed our foreign currency risk by netting assets and liabilities and have not entered into derivatives or hedging transactions as our exposure to foreign currency exchange rates has not been material to our historical operating results, but we may do so in the future if our exposure to foreign currency should become more significant. There were no significant foreign exchange gains or losses in the 12 months ended December 31, 2011, January 31, 2013 and January 31, 2014.

Recent Accounting Pronouncements

In July 2013, the FASB issued Accounting Standards Update No. 2013-11, Income Taxes (Topic 740): Presentation of an Unrecognized Tax Benefit When a Net Operating Loss Carryforward, a Similar Tax Loss, or a Tax Credit Carryforward Exists (ASU 2013-11), which provides guidance on the financial statement presentation of unrecognized tax benefits when a net operation loss (NOL) carryforward, a similar tax loss, or a tax credit carryforward exists. ASU 2013-11 provides that a liability related to an unrecognized tax benefit would be presented as a reduction of a deferred tax asset for a NOL carryforward, a similar tax loss or a tax credit carryforward if such settlement is required or expected in the event the uncertain tax position is disallowed. We plan to adopt this standard beginning February 1, 2014, and do not believe that this adoption will have a material impact on our consolidated financial statements.

 

74


Table of Contents

LETTER FROM AARON LEVIE, CO-FOUNDER, CHAIRMAN AND CEO

Powering a New Way to Work

Box’s journey began in 2004 with a simple and, in retrospect, obvious idea: it should be incredibly easy for people to get to their files from anywhere. As college students, Dylan and I were using a number of ineffective tools like email, FTP, thumb drives, and shared drives to accomplish our most basic sharing and collaboration tasks. We knew there had to be a better way. So with some free time and online poker winnings, we set out to change how people could access, share and collaborate on information, thus launching Box in 2005.

We designed a product focused on the end user and created a business model that encouraged individuals within corporations to sign up for free. Whenever legacy systems prevented a marketing manager, sales person, or finance executive from accessing and sharing important information, Box was just a few clicks away. Thanks to the people who brought Box into their organizations, we saw tremendous and unexpected organic growth within businesses of all sizes. To borrow from author and professor Clayton Christensen, Box became the low-end disruptor to traditional enterprise content management software, which was costly, cumbersome, and overly complex. To our surprise and delight, early users and IT administrators at sizable enterprises helped us refine and evolve our product to meet their needs and, by extension, the needs of other large organizations.

It’s been a thrilling ride. But it’s also just beginning.

Over the last several years, Box, and a host of similar, user-centric enterprise services that were initially adopted at the fringes of organizations, have gained a wider foothold in the marketplace. The growth and viability of these technologies have been accelerated by two immensely important trends: the unprecedented adoption of mobile devices globally and the rapid maturation of cloud computing. The result is a rare combination of forces that will transform what people expect from the technology they use at work, how organizations think about the power and potential of IT, and eventually, even the structure of entire industries.

As individuals, we now expect simple, always-on experiences in both our personal and work lives. Instead of being fixed to a local network and office, where data and apps are tightly bound to a physical location, the mobile enterprise is about building flexibility of access into work so that we get the most out of our information anywhere and anytime. It’s also about choice. Whereas five years ago, a few select technology vendors controlled the workplace, the future is exponentially more heterogeneous. Box customers like Schneider Electric and Gap, Inc. are supporting a diverse employee base that works from Android phones, Macs, iPads, Windows PCs, and iPhones, and in turn now expect the same support from their software vendors.

At an organizational level, as people become more mobile and networked, the linear, process-centric ways of working that dominated the mainframe and PC eras of technology are neither tenable nor warranted. Mission critical workflows should be as simple as sharing an update on Facebook, whether it’s Pearson’s editors collaborating on new educational content around the globe; Wasserman Media Group sharing content seamlessly and efficiently with their key client and media partners; or Eli Lilly delivering up-to-date information to its distributed teams.

Finally, as individuals and organizations continue to adopt these new norms, industries will change in response. Engineering and construction powerhouses like Bechtel can connect an array of contractors to their digital information, and workers can pull up content on mobile devices right on the job site. In healthcare, Wake Forest Baptist Health enables doctors to access critical medical information from iPads, allowing physicians to make decisions faster and work more closely with patients. And non-profits like charity: water can connect with global partners in real time, no longer held back by limited IT budgets.

Ultimately, we are moving toward an information economy, where every worker will be an information worker, and every business, regardless of industry, will be in the information business. Companies that don’t find ways for information to enhance their competitive advantage will be outdone by businesses that do. To thrive, companies must arm themselves with a new understanding of the opportunities of information technology to drive their success.

 

75


Table of Contents

And our role at Box is to help enable this transition for every organization in the world.

A New Kind of Enterprise Software Company

To fulfill our mission of helping organizations get the most out of their information, and consequently create a better way of working, we’ve built a different kind of enterprise software company. Admittedly, in some areas starting from a blank slate was the product of inexperience, as neither Dylan nor I had storied careers at IBM or Oracle (though I did use Lotus Notes once in an internship). In other cases, we’ve intentionally ignored conventional wisdom, instead trying to imagine and bring to life the very best ways to build and deliver amazing technology for our customers.

While our focus on serving organizations is singular, how we deliver on that promise is hybrid: balancing the needs of end-users with those of IT and the enterprise. In the past, this has been a contradiction. Personal technology is often simple and elegant, yet goes unmanaged by CIOs and CISOs; corporate software focuses on security and integration into the enterprise but is often too complex and constraining for most users. Our approach uniquely balances the needs of both constituents, with years of perfecting advanced security functionality for enterprises, robust logging and controls, and compliance within regulated industries, all while maintaining a focus on end-user simplicity.

We design our software with the passion and attention to detail that you’d expect from leading consumer companies like Apple. Similar to Facebook, we release updates to our product continuously, which allows us to act on user feedback to improve the Box experience and respond to opportunities with agility. We support our customers with the greatest care and attention, delivering Zappos-like support. And we’ve created an open ecosystem much like salesforce.com, leveraging the talents and skills of tens of thousands of developers outside of our corporation to build value on Box.

To accomplish all this, we’ve built a team of some of the most amazing people in the technology industry hailing from leading consumer internet and enterprise software companies. Each person brings a unique perspective and set of experience to our business. We believe our culture is a critical competitive advantage that helps attract such great talent and is built on a foundation of thinking big, being a little bit irreverent, and getting stuff done.

Importantly, we’ve built a company that moves quickly. Our industry is in a permanent state of change. We’ve seen companies that were once wildly successful become shadows of their former selves. This happens in all sectors but is more pronounced in technology, where Moore’s Law ensures that any leadership position can be toppled as quickly as it was created. For that reason, at Box we are always focused on what comes next. We orient the entire company around how we can be improving, innovating, and moving faster. While you never know for sure what’s around the corner, it’s the speed with which you respond to changes that determines success or failure.

At times, we may get some things wrong, but we respond quickly and “fail fast.” More often, however, our speed affords us an incredible competitive advantage, as when Box was able to deliver the first enterprise content solution available for the iPad, just a few months after the device was announced. In other, less agile organizations, this can take years.

What is most invigorating is that our work is never done. With constant innovation all around us—from all the various devices we use, to the constantly evolving ways we work—Box must always find new opportunities to delight our customers. In the face of this challenge, we will continue to find our inspiration in the belief that we can build powerful yet simple technology that improves how the world collaborates, shares, and works.

Go Cloud!

Aaron

 

76


Table of Contents

BUSINESS

Our Mission and Vision

Our mission is to make organizations more productive, competitive and collaborative by connecting people and their most important information. We believe our platform can become the cloud-based content layer that spans organizations, applications and devices to enable users to get work done more efficiently—when, where and how they want.

Overview

Box provides a cloud-based, mobile-optimized Enterprise Content Collaboration platform that enables organizations of all sizes to easily and securely manage their content and collaborate internally and externally. Our platform combines powerful, elegant and easy-to-use functionality that is designed for users with the security, scalability and administrative controls required by IT departments. We have built our platform to enable users to get their work done regardless of file format, application environment, operating system, device or location. Our paying business customers include more than 40% of Fortune 500 companies and 20% of Global 2000 companies, and our 25 million registered users include employees from 99% of Fortune 500 companies, including companies in highly regulated industries such as healthcare and life sciences, telecommunications, energy and financial services.

There are several fundamental technology trends that are dramatically changing both individual behavior and enterprise IT infrastructure. Information workers increasingly expect to be able to access and work with their business content from any internet-enabled device, and they demand solutions that are as simple to use as their consumer internet applications, such as Facebook, LinkedIn and Twitter. However, legacy on-premise IT architectures were not built for ease of use or mobility. As a result, IT departments are increasingly pressured to find easier to use solutions that address employees’ changing work styles, while also protecting confidential content, including documents, presentations, spreadsheets and multimedia.

At our founding, we recognized that content is more accessible, useful and powerful when it is centrally stored, managed and shared. We have architected our Enterprise Content Collaboration platform from the ground up to be cloud-based and mobile-optimized to meet the evolving demands of today’s information worker. Cloud-based Enterprise Content Collaboration is especially powerful because it enables users to access and collaborate on centralized content from anywhere and allows organizations to access new features and apply policies and controls across all users and content simultaneously. Our solution is especially well-suited to support globally distributed workers with multiple devices.

We are building a rich ecosystem around Box. Our platform integrates with the applications of our technology partners, including salesforce.com, NetSuite and others, giving our users full access to Box without leaving partner applications. In addition, third-party developers can rapidly build, update and provision new applications that leverage and extend the core functionality of our service, increasingly with a focus on specific industries and vertical market use cases. To date, tens of thousands of third-party developers have leveraged our platform as the secure content layer for their applications, including developers that are part of our Box OneCloud ecosystem, which provides users with access to more than 1,000 iOS and Android third-party applications.

Our go-to-market strategy combines user-driven adoption with a direct and indirect sales approach. We offer individuals a free basic version of Box to provide them with a first-hand experience of the simplicity and effectiveness of our service. Our solution often spreads virally within and across organizations, as users adopt Box and invite new users to collaborate. We monetize this network effect through direct and indirect sales strategies to formalize deployments within organizations and further expand our footprint. We also make it easy for users and organizations to visit our website and subscribe to both free and paid versions of our service. Frequently, an organization will purchase Box for one use case and later expand its deployment to other use cases and larger groups of employees.

 

77


Table of Contents

Our solution is highly scalable and can support deployments ranging in size from one user to tens of thousands of users. As of January 31, 2014, we had 25 million registered users and supported over 225,000 organizations that collectively interact with their content over 2.5 billion times every three months. Our customers include more than 34,000 paying organizations globally, and our largest deployment to date is over 60,000 users. We currently offer our solution in 15 languages. Our customer base includes leading organizations across industries, including Ameriprise Financial, Inc., Bechtel, Eli Lilly and Company, Gap, Inc., Schneider Electric and Sunbelt Rentals.

We have experienced significant growth since our incorporation in 2005. For the 12 months ended December 31, 2011, January 31, 2013 and 2014, our revenue was $21.1 million, $58.8 million and $124.2 million, respectively, representing year-over-year growth of 179% and 111%. We have invested and continue to invest heavily in our business to capitalize on our large market opportunity. As a result, we incurred net losses of $50.3 million, $112.6 million and $168.6 million for the 12 months ended December 31, 2011, January 31, 2013 and 2014, respectively.

Industry Trends

Trends such as Cloud, Mobility and the Proliferation of Data are Changing How People Work

Several technology trends have driven down the cost of storage, enabled faster, more powerful applications and increased the number of connected devices, paving the way for cloud and mobile to transform the way that people live and work.

 

    Shift from On-Premise to Cloud-Based Applications . Advances in technology architectures have supported the rise of cloud computing, which enables the delivery of software-as-a-service (SaaS). Today, mission-critical applications can be delivered reliably, securely and cost-effectively to customers over the internet without the need to purchase supporting hardware, software or ongoing maintenance. The lower total cost of ownership, better functionality and flexibility of cloud applications represent a compelling alternative to traditional on-premise solutions. As a result, Gartner, Inc. (Gartner) expects total cloud spending to increase from $132 billion worldwide in 2013 to $244 billion in 2017.

 

    Increased Functionality and Proliferation of Mobile Devices . The rapidly increasing functionality of smartphones, tablets and other mobile devices has resulted in the significant adoption of such devices within organizations. According to International Data Corporation (IDC), there were 1.4 billion mobile internet users worldwide in 2013 and there will be 2.3 billion in 2017. Forrester Research, Inc. (Forrester) estimates that 29% of the global workforce in 2012 used three or more devices, worked from multiple locations and accessed several applications. According to Gartner, the number of tablets sold has grown at a compound annual growth rate of 97% between 2010 and 2014 worldwide, and is expected to surpass personal computers (PCs), by annual number of units sold, in 2016.

 

    Explosion of Content and Data . The volume of data continues to grow significantly as users and organizations increase their usage of data-rich applications and access content from multiple connected devices. According to IDC, from 2005 to 2020, the volume of digital information will grow by a factor of 300, increasing demand for cost-efficient and scalable storage and content management solutions.

These technology advancements have enabled the rapid development of a number of highly intuitive and engaging consumer-oriented internet and mobile applications that have changed the expectations of today’s workforce. The rich functionality and usability of applications such as Facebook, LinkedIn and Twitter have led today’s generation to expect their work applications to be similarly accessible, intuitive, social and collaborative, and their content to be available in the cloud and on any of their mobile devices. In response to the growing desire among workers to access and interact with their business information through their preferred personal devices, many organizations have established “bring your own device” policies. At the same time, workers are increasingly utilizing their favorite applications in the workplace in order to be more productive without seeking approval from their IT departments.

 

78


Table of Contents

IT is Changing to Embrace These Trends while Maintaining Security and Scalability Standards

IT departments are mandated to ensure security for enterprise content in the face of an increasing number of cyber attacks and data leaks, to comply with ever-changing regulatory requirements and to maintain control and visibility over internal and external users while also taking advantage of the benefits of cloud and mobility. While it is clear that embracing cloud and mobility is a competitive imperative, meeting the permissions, security, scalability and administrative requirements typical of IT departments has become increasingly difficult as the proliferation of devices and applications on various architectures has created a more heterogeneous IT environment. Regulatory and compliance requirements for content, collaboration and storage have grown increasingly complex across geographies and industries. At the same time, reliance on technology for critical content and data has made organizations more vulnerable to both sophisticated external cyber attacks and data leaks.

Effective Content Management is Critical to Business Success Today

The technology trends described above are changing where and how work gets done because people can now access information and do their work from anywhere at any time. Employees, clients, vendors and contractors can now be seamlessly connected, creating new opportunities for sharing, collaboration and productivity. Ultimately, these modern approaches to productivity are empowering organizations to increase information velocity and speed up decision making, thereby increasing their competitiveness in the marketplace.

Our Market Opportunity

Our Enterprise Content Collaboration platform provides a combination of intuitive, user-friendly content applications with enterprise-grade features and security to serve as a central content layer across organizations. Our platform addresses several traditional IT categories defined by IDC, including content management, cloud storage, collaboration, and project and portfolio management, which in aggregate represents an estimated $29 billion in global IT spending in 2014. We believe our opportunity includes large segments of existing enterprise IT spending as well as new use cases and users that are not currently captured by traditional market sizing studies. Customers purchase our services both to replace existing storage and content management solutions, as well as to enable entirely new use cases not well served by existing content or collaboration solutions.

The size and importance of the Enterprise Content Collaboration market is driven by the fact that information is central to every organization’s workflow, and organizations regularly invest in new ways to increase workforce productivity. According to Forrester, there were 615 million information workers as of 2013, and there are expected to be 865 million information workers by 2016. We believe our mobile-optimized platform extends our opportunity beyond information workers to anyone who uses information to get his or her job done, including all mobile workers. According to IDC, there were 1.0 billion mobile workers as of 2010, and there will be 1.3 billion mobile workers by 2015.

The Box Solution

Our solution empowers people to share and interact with content within their organization, with external partners and across their other business applications. Our solution offers:

 

    Modern Cloud Architecture. We have built our platform from the ground up on a cloud-based architecture, which enables us to rapidly develop, update and provision our services to users. Our proprietary cloud architecture is particularly well-suited for enterprise content management because it enables our users to use the most up-to-date versions of our solutions at all times and administrators to immediately apply changes in policies and controls across all their organizations’ critical content simultaneously.

 

    Mobility. Our solution enables users to access content securely in real time through nearly any mobile device and operating system, including iOS, Android, Windows and Blackberry.

 

79


Table of Contents
    Elegant, Intuitive and User-Focused Interface. We are dedicated to keeping our solution easy for users to understand with little to no upfront training. We strive to maintain an elegant, intuitive and simple interface with compelling content collaboration features to enable quick and viral user adoption.

 

    Simple and Rapid Deployment. Our cloud-based software allows organizations to easily, quickly and inexpensively deploy our product. IT administrators can quickly add users, set up permissions, create folders, and begin using our product almost immediately without the need to procure and provision hardware or install and configure software.

 

    Enterprise-Grade Security and Administrative Controls. We have invested heavily to build the security and administrative controls demanded by our largest customers. Box gives IT administrators powerful and granular tools to define access rights by user, content type, device and usage. Administrators can set specific content policies such as expiration dates to auto-delete or deactivate file links to time-sensitive materials. They can also manage mobile and sync security settings, including remote disability and installations on device, as well as integrate our service with data loss prevention systems.

 

    Platform Agnostic Content Layer. We have designed our solution to serve as the horizontal content and collaboration layer across an organization and its employees. Users typically store their most important information on our platform, enabling them to interact with almost any type of content, regardless of format or file type, and from any device, location or operating system. We provide varying levels of storage capacity for different customer tiers, ranging from 10GB for free users to unlimited storage for our enterprise customers, and our platform is capable of storing thousands of file types.

 

    Extensible Platform for Custom and Third-Party Application Development. We provide an open platform for independent software vendors (ISVs), companies and third-party developers to build and deploy unique applications with custom interfaces and workflows that leverage Box capabilities for content access, viewing, sharing, collaboration, security and reporting. We have a growing developer ecosystem building applications on the Box platform, including over 1,000 OneCloud mobile applications.

 

    Easy Integration with Other Cloud-Based Applications. Our open platform allows for easy integration with other cloud-based applications. We offer a number of off-the-shelf integrations with critical business applications, including Salesforce, NetSuite and others. Using Box Embed, customers are able to store content generated from other applications in Box and access that content through the Box platform and any integrated business application.

 

    Industry-Specific Compliance Certifications. We have obtained various regulatory and compliance certifications and have built the necessary security and controls to support specific industry vertical needs. For example, in healthcare, we facilitate compliance with the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA) and the Health Information Technology for Economic and Clinical Health (HITECH) Act by our customers.

 

    Customized Plans and Pricing . We offer our solution through multiple plans to meet the varying needs of our diverse customer base. An individual user can create a personal Box account with a set storage capacity for a monthly fee. Organizations can purchase packages with different amounts of storage, levels of functionality and monthly fees per user. Our starter package provides a shared workspace for a team or project and supports one to 10 users. Our business package provides increased storage capacity and user management features and requires a minimum of three users. Our enterprise package provides a full set of features for content management and can be customized for large-scale user deployments and unlimited online storage.

 

    Version for Free Users. We offer users a free version of Box in order to promote additional usage, brand and product awareness, and adoption. Our free offering allows users to invite anyone to collaborate on Box, enabling faster content collaboration across employees, vendors, clients, contractors and other parties while exposing more potential users to our solution and helping our solution grow virally.

 

80


Table of Contents
    Robust Customer Support. Our ability to support our customers is core to maintaining high retention rates. Our Customer Success team works closely with customers to ensure they are obtaining the highest value from our services. Box Consulting, our professional services team, engages with customers to understand their specific use cases and deployment needs. We believe our customer service efforts are one of the reasons why we have been successful in retaining customers and increasing their use of our service within and across their organizations.

Benefits of Our Platform

We provide the following key benefits to users, IT departments, organizations, and technology partners and third-party developers:

Benefits to Users

 

    Increased Productivity. Our solution enables users to achieve higher productivity by connecting people and their most important information to enable users to get work done more efficiently—when, where and how they want.

 

    Real-Time Collaboration. Our real-time collaboration solution enables users to build stronger and more collaborative relationships with their partners and customers and enable teams to work together securely and more productively across functions, organizations and geographies.

 

    Ubiquitous and Secure Access to Files. We provide users with the ability to securely store, access, share and collaborate on content from any location using any operating system and on any device, ranging from PCs to smartphones and tablet devices.

 

    Simplified Technology Experience. Our product is simple to use and powerful, combining the best features of traditional content management with the usability of consumer internet applications. We enable users to store content generated from other applications in Box and access that content through the Box application and any integrated business application.

Benefits to IT Departments

 

    Enterprise-Grade Security. We deliver enterprise-grade security standards to our entire customer base. We address security at many levels, providing robust security settings set by administrators, sophisticated data encryption technologies, secure content delivery networks and an intrusion detection system to monitor network traffic.

 

    Robust Administrative Controls. We offer an administrative console that allows IT administrators to manage their users and content, exercise granular security control, apply permission policies, and maintain visibility on actions taken within corporate accounts.

 

    Compliance. Our solution has been designed and managed in alignment with regulations, standards and best practices including: ISO 27001, SOC-1/SSAE 16 (formerly SAS70), SOC-2 Type II, U.S./EU Safe Harbor, FIPS 140-2 and HIPAA/HITECH. Such adherence to these recognized standards and our continued focus on stringent security and controls further enables the deployment of the Box service by IT departments in healthcare, financial services and other key industries.

 

    Easy Deployment. Our cloud-based service allows organizations to easily, quickly and inexpensively deploy our solution. IT departments can leverage active directory and set permissions on an organizational, group or individual level.

Benefits to Organizations

 

   

Reduced Total Cost of Ownership. Our solution includes applications, storage, security, monitoring, integration services, upgrades, maintenance, customer support and disaster recovery, and our subscription-based solution enables customers to adjust the size of their deployment as necessary to

 

81


Table of Contents
 

scale with demand. Our product often replaces legacy technologies, such as File Transfer Protocol (FTP) servers, Managed File Transfer (MFT) tools and networked file servers, also known as shared drives. According to TechValidate, an independent research firm that surveyed 187 Box customers, companies across industries have saved an average of $8,567 per user from increased productivity and replacement of prior solutions.

 

    Frequent Product Updates. We push out new features and functionality on a weekly basis to all of our customers, improving and configuring our platform so that it is compatible with new devices, operating systems, applications and regulatory environments. By delivering our software as a cloud-based service, our customers always operate with the latest features and functionality.

 

    Enable New Class of Information Workers. Our product is optimized for cloud and mobile, allowing organizations to extend content and collaboration to a broader base of users who work remotely using tablets and smartphones.

Benefits to Technology Partners and Third-Party Developers

 

    Seamless Integration with Business Applications. We have designed Box to integrate with the applications of our technology partners, such as salesforce.com, NetSuite and over 20 others, giving our users full access to Box’s complete functionality without leaving partner applications. ISVs, system integrators and other third-party developers can rapidly build, update and provision new applications that leverage and extend the core functionality of Box.

 

    Ability to Leverage Box Services. Through the use of our platform, developers creating custom web and mobile applications can incorporate nearly all of the functionality of the Box application for integration with their own applications.

 

    Rapid Application Development. Developers who build on the Box platform are able to develop their applications more quickly by leveraging our best-in-class content services.

 

    Reach Extensive User Audience. We give developers access to an audience of 25 million registered users, which we believe allows our ecosystem of technology partners and third-party developers to address a broad set of use cases.

Our Business Model

Our business model focuses on maximizing the lifetime value of a customer relationship. We make significant investments in acquiring new customers and believe that we will be able to achieve a positive return on these investments by retaining customers and expanding the size of our deployments within our customer base over time. In connection with the acquisition of new customers, we incur and recognize significant upfront costs. These costs include sales and marketing costs associated with acquiring new customers, such as sales commission expenses, a significant portion of which is expensed upfront and the remaining portion of which is expensed over the length of the non-cancellable subscription term, and marketing costs which are expensed as incurred. Due to our subscription model, we recognize revenue ratably over the term of the subscription period, which commences when all of the revenue recognition criteria have been met. Although our objective is for each customer to be profitable for us over the duration of our relationship, the costs we incur with respect to any customer relationship, whether a new customer or an upsell to an existing customer, may exceed revenue in earlier periods because we recognize those costs faster than we recognize the associated revenue.

Organizations typically purchase our solution in the following ways: (i) employees in one or more small groups within the organization may individually purchase our service; (ii) organizations may purchase IT sponsored, enterprise-level agreements with deployments for specific, targeted use cases ranging from tens to thousands of user seats; or (iii) organizations may purchase IT-sponsored, enterprise-level agreements where the number of user seats sold is intended to accommodate and enable nearly all information workers within the organization in whatever use cases they desire to adopt over the term of the subscription.

 

82


Table of Contents

A typical customer that uses our Enterprise Content Collaboration solution will initially purchase a Business subscription plan that provides features including sharing, collaboration, syncing across devices, permissioning, basic content management and up to 1,000GB of storage. Larger customers purchase an Enterprise subscription plan that provides features including additional content management and security, integrations with other applications, access to application programming interfaces and potentially unlimited storage. Our customers generally use Box to unlock enhanced productivity through greater accessibility and easier sharing of their most important content. Customers often expand the size of their Box deployment as our solution spreads virally among users within the organization.

To provide an understanding of our customer economics, we analyzed the customers we acquired in fiscal year 2010, which we will refer to as the 2010 Cohort. In fiscal year 2010, we recognized $2.8 million in revenue and incurred variable costs that resulted in a negative contribution margin for the 2010 Cohort. In fiscal year 2014, we recognized $14.4 million in revenue from the 2010 Cohort, representing a compound annual revenue growth rate of 69.2%, and incurred variable costs that resulted in a positive contribution margin of 34% from the 2010 Cohort.

As of January 31, 2014, the 2010 Cohort had increased its total annual contract value (ACV) by 42% from the prior fiscal year end. A substantial portion of the increase in ACV from the 2010 Cohort was driven by three customers who significantly increased their deployment of our solution in our fiscal fourth quarter ended January 31, 2014. While the upsells to these customers substantially increased the total ACV of the 2010 Cohort, they decreased the contribution margin from the 2010 Cohort because we did not recognize meaningful revenue from these upsells in fiscal year 2014, but we expensed a substantial amount of the associated sales and marketing costs. Specifically, these three upsells contributed $0.2 million in revenue and represented 40% of new ACV booked from the 2010 Cohort in fiscal year 2014. If we were to exclude the fiscal year 2014 revenue and variable costs associated with these three customer upsells, we would have recognized $14.2 million in revenue from the adjusted 2010 Cohort representing a compound annual revenue growth rate of 68.7% and incurred variable costs that would have resulted in a positive contribution margin of 49% from the adjusted 2010 Cohort.

As a result of investing heavily in sales and marketing to add customers, we expect that our profitability will be favorably impacted in the future to the extent that a greater portion of our revenue is derived from customer renewals rather than new customers. See the section titled “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Our Business Model” for a description of how we computed contribution margin. We cannot assure you that we will experience similar contribution margins from customers not included in the 2010 Cohort.

Our Growth Strategy

With an increasing number of information workers, industry trends toward cloud and mobility, and the increased need for global collaboration, we believe the market opportunity for Enterprise Content Collaboration is significant and growing. Key elements of our growth strategy include:

 

    Extending Our Technology Leadership. We have made, and will continue to make, significant investments in research and development to strengthen our existing platform, continually enhance usability and develop additional Enterprise Content Collaboration functionality to improve productivity. By extending our technology to support capabilities like metadata and business process automation, we believe that we can address new use cases and offer greater value to users.

 

    Increasing Our Customer Base Globally. We believe the global market for Enterprise Content Collaboration is large and underserved, and we intend to continue to make investments in our business to capture increasingly larger market share, both domestically and internationally. We plan to continue investing in direct and indirect sales and free user marketing to acquire new customers both in the United States and internationally.

 

83


Table of Contents
    Growing Our Presence within Our Existing Customer Base. We estimate that we currently address a small percentage of available users within our existing customer base, especially our customers who are Fortune 500 companies. While we have at least three users in 99% of Fortune 500 companies, we believe that we have only begun to penetrate the total addressable users at these companies, representing a significant expansion opportunity. We will continue to expand deployment of our solution with existing customers by, among other things, growing from departmental deployments to broader implementations and addressing a broader range of use cases.

 

    Target Industry Verticals. We have a three-pronged strategy to target industry verticals such as healthcare and life sciences, financial services, legal services, media and entertainment, education, energy and government. First, we have developed targeted sales and marketing activities for specific industry verticals. Second, we ensure that our service meets specific industry and regulatory requirements. Third, we are building relationships with partners that develop custom applications that can address the unique needs that exist in specific industries.

 

    Extending Our Sales Reach through Channel and Strategic Partners. We are focused on developing partnerships that extend our reach and enable us to enter new markets. We will continue to develop partnerships with leading channel partners, mobile device and hardware manufacturers, telecommunications service providers and system integrators.

 

    Expanding Our Platform Ecosystem. Applications built by third-party developers on our platform provide greater functionality for users, while still enabling critical information to be stored and monitored in one central location. We will continue to expand our platform ecosystem by developing additional relationships with ISVs, our customers’ internal development organizations and other third-party developers. By supporting these strategic relationships, we believe our platform ecosystem will extend to new use cases that deliver more targeted, higher value solutions. We also believe that, as more ISVs and other third-party developers join the ecosystem, we will attract more customers, further strengthening our ecosystem and making it more attractive to new developers. We also believe that customers who are using applications or integrations through our platform ecosystem are more likely to stay with Box.

The Box Platform

We have built an Enterprise Content Collaboration platform that enables users to easily store, share, manage, create and collaborate with content both internally and externally. We have invested to make Box a technology agnostic platform, making our solution usable regardless of content format, application, device, location or operating system. Our Box applications provide functionality for content storage, management, collaboration, editing and creation. We also enable integrations between third-party ISV applications and our content services, and provide customers and system integrators with the ability to develop custom applications leveraging our content services. Our core platform services support these applications and content services. We provide robust security and administrative controls to ensure that content on our platform remains secure and manageable from end-to-end.

 

84


Table of Contents

The diagram below illustrates the major elements of the Box platform:

 

LOGO

Users can access our solution from mobile devices, including tablets and smartphones, and from PCs. Box is accessible using nearly any operating system.

Personal Computers

Our solution can be accessed by a web browser or via the desktop through Box Sync and offers integrations for popular productivity applications such as Microsoft Office and Google Apps. Our product has been designed with simplicity in mind, combining the core features of traditional content management with the usability of consumer internet applications.

Mobile Applications

Box’s mobile applications bring the key functionalities from our solution to users’ mobile devices, allowing users to access and manage their content from anywhere. Box is accessible from any device, regardless of the manufacturer or operating system, and has a dedicated mobile application for iPad, iPhone, Android devices, Windows 8 devices, Windows phone, BlackBerry phone and Playbook. Our mobile applications allow users to access, share and upload their files, view an activity feed and search for content. In 2012, we introduced our Box OneCloud platform and our Box Embed framework to encourage developers and independent software vendors

 

85


Table of Contents

to build applications on Box. Today, we offer over 1,000 OneCloud Mobile applications and have over 30 Box Embed and Box partner application integrations. Of the registered users who accessed Box in the three months ended January 31, 2014, over 2.5 million did so via a mobile device, compared to the more than 1.5 million registered users who did so during the three months ended January 31, 2013, representing year-over-year growth of 73%.

Our recently updated application for iPad and iPhone features our new file preview technology that renders files for more than 100 file types, real-time search, the ability to work with multiple files at once, easier access to the Box OneCloud application gallery and a new navigation layout that meets the high usability expectations that our users have for top iOS applications.

The graphic below shows a screenshot of the Box iPad application:

 

LOGO

 

86


Table of Contents

The graphic below shows a screenshot of the Box Android smartphone application:

 

LOGO

Application Layer

Box Applications

 

    Content Storage and Management. Content stored in Box is encrypted and indexed for full-text search. Other important content management features include unlimited version history, version control, permissions and other granular security controls over users and content.

 

    Content Collaboration. The Box application includes social capabilities to facilitate collaboration in the browser, such as comments, assigning tasks and due dates and receiving real-time updates on collaborator activity. Users have access to a universal stream of events related to their account such as when collaborators upload, download, update, assign tasks or comment on files. Users can choose to receive automatic email alerts on these activities.

 

    Content Editing. Box Edit is an add-on feature that allows users to edit files directly in Box. Designed for nearly all file types, browsers and platforms, Box Edit uses the default application installed on a user’s computer to edit centralized content. For example, DOC files open in Microsoft Word, PPT files open in Microsoft PowerPoint, images open in Photoshop and CAD files open in AutoCAD.

 

    Content Creation. Users can simultaneously create content using Box Notes, our real-time, collaborative word processing application built natively in Box. With Box Notes, users can work together to take notes, share ideas and collaborate in real time with their team without leaving Box. The notes are web-based documents and do not require any other software in order to create, view or edit.

 

87


Table of Contents

The graphic below shows a screenshot of Box Notes:

 

LOGO

 

    Box Sync. Box Sync enables users to edit documents on their desktop and simultaneously sync changes to their Box account so all updates are reflected in the cloud. Updates made and files added while offline are automatically synced after re-connecting to the internet, and files added by collaborators are downloaded once the user is back online. We recently released version 4.0 of Box Sync, which includes significant enhancements to our previous versions. Sync 4.0 is faster than Sync 3.0, can support uploads of up to 100,000 files, requires less computing power and supports sub-folder sync.

Third-Party ISV Applications

We enhance the value of the Box platform for our customers by integrating it with other ISV applications and enabling third-party developers to build, update and provision new applications using our services.

 

    Enterprise SaaS. We enable ISVs to easily integrate and extend Box content storage and collaboration functionality to their applications. We integrate with a number of leading third-party SaaS applications including Salesforce, NetSuite and others to enable users to access their content on Box from partner applications. We also integrate with supplemental security features from other applications such as mobile device management from MobileIron and single sign-on from Okta.

 

    OneCloud Mobile. Box OneCloud is an ecosystem of third-party mobile applications that integrate with and extend Box’s core product offering with functionality that includes annotations, scanning, presentations, editing and online signatures. Since its launch in March 2012, Box OneCloud has grown to over 1,000 applications, including CloudOn, GeniusScan, GoFormz, Notability, Plangrid, Outline+ and Wrike.

Custom Applications

 

    Enterprise IT . We provide an open platform for customers and partners to build and deploy unique applications and create custom interfaces and workflows that leverage Box services. Our platform enables customers to extend the power and functionality of Box into other applications and use cases. Our product can be further customized for industry-specific workflows through third-party applications available on the Box platform. To date, we have granted tens of thousands of application programming interface (API) keys to third-party developers to extend functionality with Box.

 

88


Table of Contents
    System Integrators . We have established agreements with system integrators such as Capgemini and Tech Mahindra to provide broader customer coverage and solution delivery capabilities. These system integrators write custom applications on Box for use cases specific to their customers.

Content Services

To support our applications and third-party applications, we provide APIs and software development kits (SDKs) that enable developers to build applications that leverage Box’s capabilities.

 

    Content API . Our content API is the main API that developers use to build applications on the Box platform or to integrate existing applications with Box. Developers can extend the content management features from the Box web and mobile interfaces into their own applications using our content API. This API allows developers to leverage Box as the horizontal content layer to power their applications.

 

    View API . In May 2013, we acquired Crocodoc, a company that embeds viewable and annotatable documents within websites, and we have since integrated Crocodoc’s technology into our platform, serving as the solution behind our preview experience. We also continue to sell the Crocodoc API, now marketed as the View API, as a core standalone platform offering, providing HTML5 document viewing to third-party applications.

 

    Metadata API . Our metadata offering, announced in September 2013, will enable users to add context to their content. The underlying technology allows users to add key value pairs to files stored in Box via the API, making it easy to add, edit and view additional types of information around a file from within a custom application or on Box. A sample use case for metadata would be a radiologist searching for a patient name and diagnosis that have been assigned to an x-ray image uploaded to Box. A private beta of metadata will be available in the upcoming months.

The graphic below shows a screenshot of the Box metadata tagging functionality:

 

LOGO

 

89


Table of Contents
    SDKs . The Box SDKs include language-specific libraries built on top of the Box API to allow for quicker development compared to working directly with the API. The Box SDKs currently have six libraries built on the Box API: iOS, Android (Java), Windows (C# / XAML), Java, C# and Ruby.

 

    Box Embed. Developers can use our HTML5-based embeddable framework to deliver Box’s entire suite of collaboration and management features including preview, comments, tasks and search into partner and customer third-party enterprise applications. Embed integrates customer relationship management software, social business software, financial management software, customer service applications and custom-built legacy business applications into the Box platform.

The graphic below shows Box integrated within the Salesforce application via Box Embed:

 

LOGO

Core Platform Services

We have invested significantly in building a robust platform to support our solution and ecosystem. Our platform provides many of the core features and functionalities required to optimize content collaboration and management.

 

    Content / Data Storage . To take advantage of our Enterprise Content Collaboration capabilities such as collaboration, accessibility and syncing across devices, content must be stored on our platform. Our platform enables users to store, organize, and access thousands of file types in the cloud. All historical versions of a file are stored in our hosted datacenters, making it easy to track changes over time. We provide varying levels of storage capacity for different customer tiers up to unlimited storage.

 

90


Table of Contents
    Search . We have built search capabilities into our platform to allow users to navigate content more quickly. Users can search all content types, data and people in one place, and search for files by name of owner, date edited and contents of the file.

 

    Event Logging . Box automatically logs all file and user activities on the application and maintains a complete audit trail of all activity within the account. The audit log provides IT administrators with insight into what is being done in the system, facilitates discovery and fulfills certain compliance requirements with relevant industry regulations.

 

    Encryption . We provide a secure content collaboration environment to address the needs of our business and enterprise customers. We use sophisticated data encryption technologies to ensure that the content on our platform remains secure. Content on our platform is encrypted in transit and at rest within Box.

 

    Upload Acceleration . We have invested in Box Accelerator, an enterprise-grade global data transfer network that gives our customers faster upload speeds. In September 2012, Neustar found that Box had the lowest average upload time versus competitors across all locations tested, and was 2.7 times faster than the closest competitor globally.

 

    Convert / View . Our solution is platform agnostic and enables users to preview over 100 file types directly in a web browser. We have developed conversion technology to support this large number of disparate file types. Our proprietary preview technology converts business documents such as Word, PowerPoint and PDF files into HTML5 online documents that are then viewable across devices.

Security and Administration

Box is built with security features that meet the standards of the largest enterprises. We enable IT departments to exercise granular security control, manage their users and content and maintain visibility on actions taken within corporate accounts. We make these security and control features available to our users through our solution and to third-party developers who build on our platform. We provide the following functionalities:

 

    Reporting . Box offers IT administrators the ability to generate reports on storage usage, security, sync history, user browser history, file activity and user activity, including logins, downloads, edits and uploads.

 

    Sharing Controls . Users work in a secure, online workspace and create shared workspaces by inviting internal and external collaborators to work within a folder or on a file. Files are uploaded into the workspace and can be shared by hyperlink, email, comment or direct navigation within the folder. To restrict access, users can set an expiration date, require a password, make files accessible to only users within a certain domain and set download permissions to enable recipients of shared links to view a file but not download it.

 

    Third-Party Application Management . IT administrators can choose to enable or disable certain applications and integrations within their administrator console. For added security, defaults can be set to automatically disable newly published applications.

 

    User / Password Management . IT administrators have the ability to manage tens of thousands of users in a single view; add, modify and manage users; control login settings; and allocate storage quotas.

 

91


Table of Contents

The graphic below shows a screenshot of the management console that enables IT administrators to manage user settings:

 

LOGO

 

    Content Rules . IT administrators can organize and manage all content in a global view. Both users and IT administrators can get visibility into all activity with respect to their content and assign levels of user privileges, which range from “upload only” to full editing rights.

 

    Mobile Device Pinning . Device pinning is a new feature that allows IT administrators to assign users’ Box accounts to a particular mobile device or Box Sync client. IT administrators also have access to a dashboard in the administrator console for managing, enabling and disabling of device pinning, as well as the number of devices the Box application can be pinned to.

 

92


Table of Contents

Customers

Our 25 million registered users represent a diverse customer base from over 225,000 organizations located in over 200 countries and territories. Of these, over 34,000 represent paying organizations. We define a paying organization as a separate and distinct buying entity, such as a company, an educational or government institution or other organization, or a distinct business unit of a large corporation, that has entered into a subscription agreement with us to utilize our services. No customer represented more than 10% of our total revenue in the 12 months ended December 31, 2011, January 31, 2013 and 2014. Below is a list of some of our largest customers by revenue, organized by industry.

 

Advertising

ADS Alliance Data Systems Inc.

Grey Group

Yellow Pages Group

 

Healthcare and Life Sciences

Allergan

Eli Lilly and Company

The University of Texas M. D. Anderson Cancer Center

Business Services

Booz & Company

Creative Artists Agency

Royal HaskoningDHV

 

Industrial

Mondi Group

Schneider Electric

Sunbelt Rentals

Construction

Bechtel

DPR Construction

M. A. Mortenson Company

 

Legal Services

Patterson Belknap Webb & Tyler LLP

Perkins Coie LLP

Sheppard, Mullin, Richter & Hampton LLP

Consumer

Molson Coors Brewing Company

New Balance

Pabst Brewing Company

 

Media & Entertainment

BBC Worldwide

Discovery Communications

TES Connect

Education

Pennsylvania State University

San Jose Unified School District

University of Illinois

 

Non-Profit

Battelle Memorial Institute

The Leukemia & Lymphoma Society

WestEd

Energy

Chevron U.S.A. Inc.

Marathon Petroleum

J-W Energy Company

 

Real Estate

Cushman & Wakefield

Jones Lang LaSalle

The Related Companies

Financial Services

Ameriprise Financial, Inc.

Guaranteed Rate

Nationwide Mutual Insurance

 

Retail

AutoTrader Group

Gap, Inc.

Safeway

Government

Argonne National Laboratory

London Borough of Hounslow

State Government of Victoria, Australia

 

Technology

Dell

DeNA Co.

eBay

Telecom

Bandwidth.com

RingCentral

Telefónica Digital

 

93


Table of Contents

Case Studies

We believe that the following case studies are representative examples of how our customers have benefitted from our solution.

Wake Forest Baptist Health

Situation : With a level 1 trauma center and a busy academic program, Wake Forest Baptist Health (Wake Forest) needed to keep physicians informed of the latest administrative processes, medical protocols, and information on resident education. Because Wake Forest primarily used email and SharePoint to store and share information, physicians frequently missed critical updates—email attachments got buried in inboxes, and because SharePoint was not accessible from mobile devices, physicians would have to leave the exam room to find a desktop computer in order to access information. In addition, the doctors were always on-the-move. Going from patient to patient, doctors needed access to their most important information at all times.

Solution and benefits : Wake Forest first adopted Box on August 31, 2012, with 85 managed users and, as of January 31, 2014, it has continued to maintain these users. Wake Forest chose Box as a single content repository to keep its physicians updated on critical information, giving doctors more time with patients and facilitating collaboration among professors and residents. Having armed their medical staff with iPads, doctors are able to access client information through Box and make real-time decisions. Wake Forest reported the following benefits:

 

    Central repository of latest protocols accessible from iPads in the exam room and anywhere else in the hospital

 

    Better informed doctors have gained time with patients in the exam room

 

    Ability for doctors to make faster decisions because they have all relevant information readily available

Since moving to the Box solution, Wake Forest has saved on storage costs and reduced costs related to upgrading content management solutions.

Live Nation

Situation : Live Nation, the world’s largest live entertainment and event ticketing company, needed a secure, simple way to share files with more than 200 event vendors (e.g., food, security, lighting, sound) for each of their eight annual festivals. In addition, Live Nation’s more than 30 business groups were struggling to collaborate. The company needed a mobile solution that allowed users to access, share and collaborate on content.

Solution and benefits : Live Nation first adopted Box on October 19, 2012, with 320 users. The deployment has grown significantly, and as of January 31, 2014, it is rolling out to more than 2,000 users. Live Nation replaced another online storage provider with Box for the management of media files and artist related assets, internal human resources collaboration, and secure mobile access for their executives and tour management. The company integrated Box with Salesforce within its media and ad sales departments to provide easier access to critical business information. For festival management, Box serves as the central repository for all vendor documents (e.g., maps, stage information, contracts, forms, and policies). Live Nation reported the following benefits:

 

    Executive team uses Box and iPads to share their critical board presentations

 

    Gained security and administrative controls over data; implementation required little to no training; content easily migrated into Box

 

    Over 500 information workers using the platform

 

94


Table of Contents

Nationwide Insurance

Situation : At Nationwide, one of the largest insurance and financial services companies in the world, security is paramount. Strict security parameters significantly limited internal and external collaboration: employees often had to burn and ship CDs and DVDs in order to share information with law enforcement agencies, federal agencies, affiliated insurance companies and external insurance companies. Employees in sales, marketing, legal and other departments required easy access to documents from their mobile devices and needed to be able to securely share content with external collaborators.

Solution and benefits : Nationwide first adopted Box in September 30, 2012, with 100 users. The deployment has grown significantly, and as of January 31, 2014, it had maintained 6,000 users. Nationwide adopted the Box solution in addition to a “bring your own device” policy. As a result, Nationwide employees could easily and securely share and collaborate on content with external parties via Box. After deploying Box, Nationwide discovered other use cases including integration with third-party mobile applications such as Quickoffice, iAnnotate and Good Dynamics. Ultimately, the insurance leader reduced costs by going digital and replacing legacy software with Box and its partner apps. Nationwide reported the following benefits:

 

    The ability to centrally house documents, provide appropriate access to both internal and external parties and maintain security of confidential financial information

 

    Ease of use driving viral adoption of the product that led to the company’s deployment growing from 500 to 3,000 users in one year

 

    The ability to work from anywhere anytime increased productivity for the insurer’s employees

By implementing Box, Nationwide has reduced paper costs and replaced its other paid cloud solutions, saving the company $150,000 on an annual basis.

New Balance

Situation : New Balance, a global apparel company, shipped countless USB drives to sales teams around the world in order to distribute marketing and sales content, including thousands of media files. In addition, New Balance needed an internal collaboration solution to replace existing FTP servers.

Solution and benefits : New Balance first adopted Box on December 28, 2012, with 1,400 users and, as of January 31, 2014, it has continued to maintain these users. New Balance purchased the Box solution to protect their intellectual property, while being able to easily share content with its global workforce. New Balance replaced their information sharing repositories, such as FTP, email attachments, USB drives and other cloud storage providers, with Box, resulting in savings of over $100,000 per year. New Balance reported the following benefits:

 

    The New Balance sales team uses Box Sync and the mobile applications to access sales material, such as product information and order forms on a daily basis

 

    The company recently rolled out a mobile strategy and is using third-party Box OneCloud applications to work in the field

 

    The marketing team uses Box to share content internally and externally with third-party vendors

 

    More than 1,400 users on the platform

By implementing Box, New Balance has experienced savings of over $100,000 per year by consolidating other paid cloud solutions, replacing their FTP servers and eliminating the use of USB drives.

 

95


Table of Contents

Schneider Electric

Situation : Schneider Electric, a global specialist in energy management with operations in more than 100 countries, wanted to address consumerization of IT and offer a mobile-friendly document sharing and storage solution. This solution would combine both the ease of use that is experienced by its employees with consumer software and the control and administration features that are required in an enterprise environment.

Solution and benefits : Schneider Electric first adopted Box on August 31, 2012, with 2,000 users. The deployment has grown significantly, and as of January 31, 2014, it had maintained 66,960 users. To enable collaboration within the organization and enable its knowledge workers to be more efficient, Schneider Electric implemented Box to be a centrally managed, collaborative content store. Box allows Schneider Electric to share content internally across divisions and subsidiaries and externally with over 13,000 partners and customers. Schneider leverages Box’s version-tracking features in order to make the collaboration across multiple teams and locations more efficient, and uses Box on a daily basis, including, for instance, to run a complex RFP (or to allow its management teams to access content such as presentations and speeches from anywhere, including on the way to meet clients). Schneider Electric indicated the following benefits:

 

    Box was successfully adopted by approximately 67,000 employees at a rate of roughly 1,000 new users for every 1.5 weeks

 

    The Schneider Electric IT administration team can now monitor activity (per file or user account) in a centralized and governed way, across over 20.2 terabytes of data stored on Box

By implementing Box, Schneider Electric has facilitated document sharing and collaboration internally and externally. Schneider Electric users have ranked Box among the best rated IT services provided internally in 2013.

Technology and Operations

Our product is a multi-tenant SaaS offering that operates in a cloud-computing environment. Multi-tenancy refers to a principle in software architecture where a single instance of the software runs on a server, serving multiple client organizations. Security, availability, scalability and ease-of-use are core principles in our architecture and design. Our cloud offering allows us to offer global services to our customers in a highly scalable fashion. Co-location allows us to quickly expand capacity geographically using datacenters and networking providers. All computing assets (servers, network devices, data storage) at these co-location datacenters are owned or leased by us and are managed by our employees. We do not own any of these co-location data centers.

Our services are co-located in two separate datacenters in Northern California, and we also operate a disaster recovery datacenter in Las Vegas, Nevada. We license space and services at these facilities pursuant to separate master service agreements, which expire between 2015 and 2016. These facilities currently provide us with an aggregate of 3.6 megawatts of power, which can be increased as necessary. All facilities provide redundant power and cooling systems, fire protection, 24x7 on-site security and biometric authentication. We utilize a third-party solution as additional backup storage for our disaster recovery datacenter.

The Box solution is engineered to provide high reliability and availability. Our uptime service-level agreement (SLA) is 99.90% and in the 12 months ended January 31, 2014, our average monthly uptime was 99.93%. We maintain our service’s reliability by utilizing redundant network infrastructure, server clusters that tolerate failure of individual nodes, servers deployed in high availability pairs and a replica disaster recovery environment. Customer files are backed up to another location that would be out of any disaster zone due to proximity.

With respect to security, we provide IT administrators with a detailed audit log that captures uploads, downloads, preview and deletion with associated metadata such as time modified and the IP address where the content interaction originated from. Box offers Secure Socket Layer (SSL) encryption in transit. Files are encrypted at rest using 256 bit Advanced Encryption Standard (AES).

 

96


Table of Contents

System performance and upload speeds are essential to providing excellent service. Consequently, Box has made significant infrastructure investments in the performance of file transfers. Our Box Accelerator Network consists of accelerator nodes placed strategically around the world and a sophisticated routing mechanism that actively routes file transfers through the fastest path. This network is designed to accelerate traffic without the need for any software installed on the client. Neustar, a neutral third-party, has validated that Box’s average upload speeds across locations are 2.7 times faster on average than the closest competitor.

We have built and deployed accelerator technology nodes across 10 locations and cloud-based points of presence. On top of each node, we deploy patent-pending, intelligent routing technology that determines the fastest path for data to take during the upload process. This combination of proximity and intelligent routing ensures that Box customers everywhere experience the best possible performance as they collaborate with colleagues and partners distributed globally.

Compliance and Certifications

We prioritize the protection of customer and company data. We have developed and implemented an effective framework comprising both technical and operational controls. We ensure that there is both internal and independent external oversight of the security framework to ensure its continued implementation and effectiveness.

We have implemented a formal decentralized management structure for security and compliance that comprises three distinct functions. Each function has an independent reporting structure that ensures appropriate segregation of duties and oversight commensurate with the risk of storing customer data. In addition, we have obtained a number of independent certifications, verifications and approvals for security frameworks and currently maintain accreditation with the following:

 

    ISO/IEC 27001:2005 Information Security Management System Standard . The ISO/IEC 27001:2005 standard is the internationally recognized standard for information security management systems and sets the baseline requirements for the implementation of an effective security management system. This international certification was awarded to Box by the British Standards Institute (BSI).

 

    U.K. Government G-Cloud Approval . The U.K. government has introduced a “G-Cloud” procurement framework to encourage the adoption of cloud services across the whole Public Sector and has the aim of simplifying how Public Sector buys and delivers services by creating a marketplace of cloud commodity services that can be easily scaled up. As of October 2013, Box obtained formal approval for the G-Cloud Framework 4 and is now included on the G-Cloud catalogue for SaaS providers.

 

    Safe Harbor Privacy Principles . Box self certifies under the Safe Harbor Privacy Principles for the EU/EEA and Switzerland. The Safe Harbor scheme is intended for organizations within the European Union or United States that store customer data. The Safe Harbor Principles are designed to prevent accidental information disclosure or loss. As a U.S.-based company, Box has opted into the program and adheres to the seven principles outlined in the Directive on Data Protection.

In addition, at least annually, we engage independent third-party professionals to perform security audits that are conducted in accordance with the Statement on Standards for Attestation Engagements (SSAE) No. 16, Reporting on Controls at a Service Organization, HIPAA and HITECH requirements. The output of these third-party independent audits is as follows:

 

    Service Organization Control (SOC) Reports . SOC reports include Statement on Standards for Attestation Engagements (SSAE) 16 and Attestation Standards (AT) section 101 Reporting on Controls at a Service Organization.

 

    HIPAA and HITECH . Box complies with HIPAA and HITECH requirements regarding Electronic Protected Health Information.

 

97


Table of Contents

Research and Development

Our engineering, operations, product and platform teams operate cross-functionally to enhance our existing cloud services, platform and technology operations. Our product managers on both the product and platform teams regularly engage with customers, partners and industry analysts as well as certain of our stakeholders, in functions such as sales, customer success, marketing and business development to understand customer needs as well as general trends in our industry. Once product improvements are identified, the entire development organization works closely together to design, develop, test and launch a solution.

Research and development expenses were $14.4 million, $29.0 million and $46.0 million for the 12 months ended December 31, 2011, January 31, 2013 and January 31, 2014, respectively.

Sales and Marketing

Our sales and marketing organizations work together closely to drive market awareness, build a strong sales pipeline and cultivate customer relationships to drive revenue growth.

Sales

We sell our solution through direct field sales, direct inside sales and indirect channel sales. We cultivate prospects through a broad range of marketing programs and events and through users who use the free version of our application. Our sales strategy varies based on the size of the company and whom we are specifically targeting as our point-of-entry into an organization—individual users, IT leaders or leaders of other functions in the company.

We use both bottoms-up and top-down sales strategies. Our bottoms-up sales strategy leverages the free version of our product to seed accounts with small groups of users. Once these users bring the product into their organization, it may be adopted by other individuals, groups or departments in the organization. This helps us identify new and different use cases and can result in companies adding additional users. Our top-down strategy targets IT and line of business leaders to sell larger accounts and enterprise-wide accounts. Our enterprise scale, richness of reporting, configuration capabilities and advanced security make Box attractive to IT organizations.

We have built a comprehensive direct and indirect global sales team that focuses on specific use cases. Our sales organization is organized into four groups: Emerging and Small Business Accounts, which refers to organizations with 1-20 employees; Corporate Accounts, which refers to organizations with 21-1,000 employees; Major Accounts, which refers to organizations with 1,001-5,000 employees; and National Accounts, which refers to organizations with over 5,000 employees. We employ quota-carrying field and inside sales representatives who are dedicated to these categories, covering specific geographic regions and selling along specific industry verticals. We also have a team of channel account representatives who lead our indirect sales effort by developing partnerships with distribution vendors, resellers and OEMs. These channels provide additional sales coverage, solution-based selling, services and training throughout the world. Our channel program is led by a dedicated sales team and provides training, certification and sales resources to our partners. We have replicated our sales strategy in Europe and plan to do so in other international markets over time.

Our sales segments are supported by a team of inbound and outbound sales representatives. Inbound and outbound sales representatives focus primarily on telesales, while our sales development representatives focus on qualifying leads generated through marketing activities. Opportunities generated by these activities are then passed onto quota-carrying sales representatives based on the potential customer’s size, industry and geographic location. Upon closing a sale, quota-carrying sales representatives manage contract renewals and upsell processes and engage our customer success team to manage the deployment, integration and support of our services. We also have a team of sales engineers dedicated to supporting our account executives in more technical conversations with customers and prospects. Our sales efforts are supported by our sales operations team which runs analytics to enhance our sales function productivity and overall success.

 

98


Table of Contents

Marketing

Our marketing strategy targets users, IT leaders, buyers and application developers across industries and regions. Additionally, our events, lead generation, customer programs, corporate communications, field marketing and product marketing teams focus on building engagement and demand. In conjunction with obtaining key compliance certifications, we are developing vertical marketing programs. We leverage customer case studies, sponsorship of industry conferences, customized partner applications and vocalizing our traction to support our go-to-market strategy in each vertical.

Building our free user base is important to our sales and marketing strategy as it drives viral adoption and growth of our product. We offer free use of our core services with a limited amount of content storage to attract individual users who often attract other users to our products through collaboration. We also offer web trials of our paid products to attract small groups of users in an organization to adopt our product. This often leads to the users bringing our solution into their organization and can facilitate an initial evaluation with the organization. We have established a number of partnerships with hardware and mobile device partnerships to facilitate growth in our free user base.

We utilize various online and offline channels to establish our brand and build awareness. These channels include traditional media advertising, search engine advertising, online mobile campaigns, social media initiatives, large-scale promotions, content syndication, participation in and sponsorship of conferences, trade shows, executive events and industry events, the Box website, and our annual conference, BoxWorks. BoxWorks 2013 attracted approximately 2,900 attendees, an increase of approximately 60% from BoxWorks 2012.

Partnerships and Strategic Relationships

In 2012, we began to further evolve our ecosystem of partners by creating the Box Partner Network and adding an indirect sales approach through channel partners. This complements our direct sales force by offering customers more ways to subscribe to Box. As part of this evolution, we have also engaged with partners who are integrating the Box platform with existing third-party applications and developers creating new applications.

Our partnerships generally fall within three categories: channel partners, strategic partners and developers. These partners, respectively, resell Box broadly to new customers and markets, integrate the Box service into their products or services and build new applications using Box as the content layer, maintaining a secure and central environment for users’ content. Agreements with strategic partners and developers have not been material to date.

Channel Partners

Partners who resell Box include value-added resellers, solution providers, direct market resellers, system integrators, distributors, and service providers, amongst others. Our channel strategy is centered around accelerating our sales reach globally, and generating long-term, profitable revenue streams by leveraging our partners’ strong customer relationships. Such partners include Ingram Micro, CDW, Insight Direct, SoftChoice, AT&T and SHI International Corp.

Strategic Partners

We have entered into agreements with the intent to either market, resell, integrate with or endorse the Box service, or a combination of these activities, that will directly benefit our customers. Current partners include Deutsche Telekom, DocuSign, Good Technology, MobileIron, NetSuite, Okta and salesforce.com.

Developers

We have built APIs to enable developers to build applications using Box as the content layer, allowing users to store content related to that application centrally and securely within Box.

 

99


Table of Contents

Customer Success

We are passionate about supporting our customers from the moment we first engage with them and throughout the lifetime of our partnership. We have multiple teams within our customer success organization dedicated to maintaining a high level of customer satisfaction: customer success management, professional services and customer support. Our operations are structured with the customer experience in mind, and we strive to create a “least-effort” process for users. Internally, our customer success mantra is to “blow our customers’ minds,” and we take that mission seriously. We believe that providing a premium level of support to our customers is critical to enhancing our brand as a superior enterprise service provider.

Once Box is chosen by the customer, our customer success managers are assigned to the customer for the life of the contract to ensure that the service is meeting users’ needs, that users are utilizing our service for the use cases for which they purchase our service and to identify additional needs or opportunities. We have a data-driven approach to account management and closely monitor engagement. When engagement levels trend lower within an enterprise, we proactively reach out to identify and address adoption issues. Customer success managers work closely with our sales team as contracts come up for renewal. Each of our customer success managers is assigned as the primary point of contact to a specific set of customers, for any issues, questions or needs that these customers may have.

Box Consulting, our professional services team, engages with customers prior to signing a contract and implements our service for customers once a sale is complete. The team’s objectives are to fully understand the customer’s objectives for purchasing Box, configure Box for the identified use cases and educate users on how to use our product for those use cases. Our implementation methodology is light and outcome-focused, resulting in our customers going live in days or weeks rather than months. Box Consulting tracks deployment very closely as a key performance indicator.

Our customer support team works directly with users to understand and solve problems as soon as they arise. This team assists with cases directed to customer success managers and also addresses direct inbound issues. The team has on-site subject matter experts to address specific issues and never uses scripts when interacting with customers. Our customer support team works closely with our product team to pass along requests and suggestions made by users. Within the customer success organization, we have a team dedicated to customer retention that monitors our customer usage data to identify opportunities for enhancing our customer’s engagement with our product. This team employs a very data-driven and systems-based approach to analyzing customer usage and satisfaction.

We focus our efforts on providing users with fast response and resolution, technical expertise and multiple communication channels by which to reach us. Support is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week and users can reach us by phone, email, Twitter and Facebook. All users are provided with a standard support package by which we provide target response times based on the urgency of the issue. We also offer, for an additional fee, a higher-touch premier support package. Customers with premier support have a dedicated team of premier support specialists with limited account assignments. In addition, premier support users benefit from dedicated communication channels, advanced trending and reporting, and the escalation of issues directly to our engineering organization.

Access to support resources is provided through our Customer Success Corner, a portal with self-service training materials, best practice guides and product documentation. The Customer Success Corner serves as a one-stop shop for administrators and end users who prefer to find answers on their own, as well as supporting materials for those working with Box to configure their accounts.

Culture and Employees

Our founders, our leadership team and our employees have collectively been instrumental in helping us create and sustain our culture of empowerment and collaboration, and we use Box technology extensively within

 

100


Table of Contents

our company to create an environment to facilitate this. We are one of the few companies that combine the enterprise software and enterprise execution capabilities with consumer grade instincts, and we believe our hiring strategy is unique in that we hire people who have experience across both enterprise- and consumer-oriented industries that are leading in technology capabilities and user experience. We take best practices from innovating and leading companies, whether it is customer support, product innovation or enterprise selling. Our goal is to take the best of these very different disciplines and build a company that looks and feels different from what anybody has ever seen before.

As of January 31, 2014, we had 972 employees. We also engage temporary employees and consultants. None of our employees are covered by collective bargaining agreements. We believe our employee relations are good, and we have not experienced any work stoppages.

Competition

The Enterprise Content Collaboration market is large, highly competitive and highly fragmented. It is subject to rapidly evolving technology, shifting customer needs and frequent introductions of new products and services. Outside of the Enterprise Content Collaboration market, we compete against several categories of technology providers: vendors whose core competency ranges from simple file sync and share, which can be deployed on premise, hybrid, or via a SaaS delivery model; real-time collaboration vendors whose focus is on real-time voice, video and text communication in the enterprise; social collaboration vendors who focus on the conversations that occur between teams; traditional Enterprise Content Management (ECM) vendors who deploy on premise and offer deep records management, business process workflow, and archival capabilities; and newer mobile enterprise vendors who are beginning to enter the content collaboration market, are adding adjacent content capabilities onto an existing product, or serve a particular business or industry use case. Our current primary competitors include but are not limited to:

 

    Enterprise Content Collaboration: established vendors including EMC, IBM and Microsoft (Office365 and SharePoint); and

 

    File Sync and Share: including Citrix (ShareFile), Dropbox, Google (Drive) and Microsoft (Skydrive Pro).

We may face future competition in our markets from other large, established companies, as well as from smaller specialized companies. In addition, we expect continued consolidation in our industry, which could lead to increased price competition and other forms of competition.

The principal competitive factors in our market include:

 

    enterprise-grade security and compliance;

 

    ease of user experience;

 

    scalable product and infrastructure for large deployments;

 

    speed, availability, and reliability of the service;

 

    low-cost, quick deployment;

 

    integration into office productivity, desktop and mobile tools;

 

    current and forward-thinking product development;

 

    agnostic to device, operating system, and file type;

 

    extensible platform for custom application development;

 

    customer-centric product development;

 

    rich ecosystem of channel partners and applications;

 

101


Table of Contents
    superior customer service and commitment to customer success; and

 

    strength of professional services organization.

We believe that we compete favorably on the basis of these factors. Our ability to remain competitive will depend to a great extent upon our ongoing performance in the areas of product development, core technical innovation, platform and partner ecosystem and customer support. In addition, many of our competitors, particularly the large software companies named above, may have greater name recognition, longer operating histories and significantly greater resources. Some competitors may be able to devote greater resources to the development, promotion and sale of their products than we can to ours, which could allow them to respond more quickly than we can to new technologies and changes in customer needs. We cannot assure you that our competitors will not offer or develop products or services that are superior to ours or achieve greater market acceptance.

Intellectual Property

We rely on a combination of patents, copyrights, trademarks, service marks, trade secrets, confidentiality procedures and contractual restrictions to establish and protect our proprietary rights in our products and services. As of January 31, 2014, we had four issued U.S. patents and one issued Great Britain patent that directly relate to our technology that expire between 2028 and 2032, and we had 80 pending patent applications in the U.S. and 62 pending patent applications internationally. We intend to pursue additional patent protection to the extent that we believe it would be beneficial and cost effective.

We registered “Box,” the Box logo and certain other marks as trademarks in the United States and several other jurisdictions. We also filed trademark applications in the United States and certain other jurisdictions, and will pursue additional trademark registrations to the extent we believe it would be beneficial and cost effective.

We are the registered holder of a variety of domestic and international domain names that include “box.com,” “box.net” and similar variations.

We license software from third parties for integration into our products, including open source software and other software available on commercially reasonable terms.

All of our employees and independent contractors are required to sign agreements acknowledging that all inventions, trade secrets, works of authorship, developments and other processes generated by them on our behalf are our property, and they assign to us any ownership that they may claim in those works. In addition, we generally enter into confidentiality agreements with our employees, consultants, vendors and customers, and generally limit access to and distribution of our proprietary information.

Despite our precautions, it may be possible for unauthorized third parties to copy our products and use information that we regard as proprietary to create products and services that compete with ours.

Some license provisions protecting against unauthorized use, copying, transfer and disclosures of our products may be unenforceable under the laws of certain jurisdictions and foreign countries. In addition, the laws of some countries do not protect proprietary rights to as great of an extent as the laws of the United States, and many foreign countries do not enforce these laws as diligently as government agencies and private parties in the United States. To the extent that we expand our international activities, our exposure to unauthorized copying and use of our products and misappropriation of our proprietary information may increase.

We expect that software and other solutions in our industry may be increasingly subject to third-party infringement claims as the number of competitors grows and the functionality of products in different industry segments overlap. Moreover, many of our competitors and other industry participants have issued patents or filed patent applications, and have asserted claims and related litigation regarding patent and other intellectual property rights. From time to time, third parties have asserted patent, copyright, trademark, trade secret and other intellectual property rights within the industry.

 

102


Table of Contents

Legal Proceedings

From time to time, we are involved in legal proceedings and subject to claims arising in the ordinary course of our business. Although the results of litigation and claims cannot be predicted with certainty, we currently believe that the final outcome of these ordinary course matters will not have a material adverse effect on our business, operating results, financial condition or cash flows. Regardless of the outcome, litigation can have an adverse impact on us because of defense and settlement costs, diversion of management resources and other factors.

Facilities

Our corporate headquarters, which includes research and development, sales, marketing, business operations and executive offices, is located in Los Altos, California. It consists of approximately 97,000 square feet of space under a lease that expires in 2018. In addition to our headquarters, we lease approximately 19,000 square feet in San Francisco, California for a sales office under a lease that expires in 2017. We also lease space for our East coast sales team in New York, New York.

We lease more than 11,000 square feet of space in London for our European headquarters, which includes sales and business operations. We currently maintain space in Germany and France, which we use to deliver sales support and professional services locally. We intend to expand further in Europe as needed to support our growing customer base.

We also have an office in Tokyo to target the Asia Pacific market.

We lease all of our facilities and do not own any real property. We intend to procure additional space as we add employees and expand geographically. We believe that our facilities are adequate to meet our needs for the immediate future, and that, should it be needed, suitable additional space will be available to accommodate expansion of our operations.

 

103


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT

Executive Officers and Directors

The following table provides information regarding our executive officers and directors as of March 24, 2014:

 

Name

  

Age

  

Position(s)

Executive Officers

     

Aaron Levie

   29   

Chairman and Chief Executive Officer

Dan Levin

   50   

President, Chief Operating Officer and Director

Dylan Smith

   28   

Chief Financial Officer and Director

Peter McGoff

   49   

Senior Vice President, General Counsel and Corporate Secretary

Graham Younger

   45   

Executive Vice President, Worldwide Field Operations

Non-Employee Directors

     

Dana Evan (1)(3)

   54   

Director

Steven Krausz (1)

   59   

Director

Rory O’Driscoll (1)(2)

   49   

Director

Gary Reiner (3)

   59   

Director

Josh Stein (2)(3)

   40   

Director

Padmasree Warrior

   53   

Director

 

(1) Member of our audit committee.
(2) Member of our compensation committee.
(3) Member of our nominating and corporate governance committee.

Executive Officers

Aaron Levie co-founded our company and has served as our Chairman since December 2013 and as our Chief Executive Officer and a member of our board of directors since April 2005. Mr. Levie attended the University of Southern California from 2003 to 2005.

Mr. Levie was selected to serve on our board of directors because of the perspective and experience he brings as one of our founders.

Dan Levin has served as our President and Chief Operating Officer since December 2013, as our Chief Operating Officer since July 2010 and as a member of our board of directors since January 2010. From March 2009 to July 2010, Mr. Levin served as an advisor to various technology start-ups, including our company since September 2009. From July 2008 to March 2009, Mr. Levin served as the interim Chief Executive Officer of Picateers Inc., an online photo sales company. Previously, Mr. Levin served in various executive roles at Intuit Inc., a business and financial management solutions company, most recently as Vice President and General Manager, Healthcare. Mr. Levin holds a B.A. in the independent concentration of Applications of Computer Graphics to Statistical Data Analysis from Princeton University.

Mr. Levin was selected to serve on our board of directors because of his extensive experience with technology companies.

Dylan Smith co-founded our company and has served as our Chief Financial Officer and as a member of our board of directors since April 2005. Mr. Smith holds a B.A. in Economics from Duke University.

 

104


Table of Contents

Mr. Smith was selected to serve on our board of directors because of the perspective and experience he brings as one of our founders.

Peter McGoff has served as our Senior Vice President, General Counsel and Corporate Secretary since April 2012. From June 2000 to April 2012, Mr. McGoff served as Senior Vice President and General Counsel of Informatica Corporation, an enterprise data integration software company. Mr. McGoff holds a B.S. in Finance from California State University, Sacramento, a J.D. from the University of the Pacific and an LL.M. in Intellectual Property Law from the London School of Economics.

Graham Younger has served as our Executive Vice President, Worldwide Field Operations since February 2014. From August 2011 to February 2014, Mr. Younger was employed by SuccessFactors, Inc., a software company and subsidiary of SAP America, Inc., most recently serving as Senior Vice President and General Manager, Global Sales. From August 2008 to August 2011, Mr. Younger was employed by Oracle Corporation, a computer technology company, most recently serving as a Global Vice President of Sales. Mr. Younger is a Computer Science graduate from Birmingham City University, England.

Non-Employee Directors

Dana Evan has served as a member of our board of directors since December 2011. Since July 2007, Ms. Evan has invested in and served on the boards of directors of companies in the internet, technology and media sectors. From May 1996 until July 2007, Ms. Evan served as Chief Financial Officer of VeriSign, Inc., a provider of intelligent infrastructure services for the internet and telecommunications networks. Ms. Evan currently serves on the boards of directors of Criteo S.A., a performance display advertising company, Everyday Health, Inc., a provider of digital health and wellness solutions, Fusion-io, Inc., a flash memory technology company, Proofpoint, Inc., a security-as-a-service provider, and a number of privately held companies. Ms. Evan previously served on the board of directors of Omniture, Inc., an online marketing and web analytics company, until it was acquired by Adobe Systems Incorporated in October 2009. Ms. Evan holds a B.S. in Commerce from Santa Clara University and is a certified public accountant (inactive).

Ms. Evan was selected to serve on our board of directors because of her experience in operations, strategy, accounting, financial management and investor relations at both publicly and privately held technology companies.

Steven Krausz has served as a member of our board of directors since August 2013. Since 1985, Mr. Krausz has served in various roles at U.S. Venture Partners, a venture capital firm, where he currently serves as a Managing Member. Mr. Krausz currently serves on the boards of directors of Imperva, Inc., a data security company, and a number of privately held companies. He previously served on the boards of directors of Guidewire Software, Inc., a provider of software for insurance companies, and Occam Networks, Inc., a broadband network equipment company, until it was acquired by Calix, Inc. in February 2011. Mr. Krausz holds a B.S. in Electrical Engineering from Stanford University and an M.B.A. from the Stanford University Graduate School of Business.

Mr. Krausz was selected to serve on our board of directors because of his experience in the venture capital industry and as a director of both publicly and privately held technology companies.

Rory O’Driscoll has served as a member of our board of directors since April 2010. Since 1994, Mr. O’Driscoll has been a Managing Director at Scale Venture Partners, a venture capital firm. Mr. O’Driscoll currently serves on the boards of directors of several privately held companies and previously served on the boards of directors of ExactTarget, Inc., a digital marketing software company, until it was acquired by salesforce.com, inc. in July 2013, and Omniture, Inc. until it was acquired by Adobe Systems Incorporated in October 2009. Mr. O’Driscoll holds a B.Sc. from the London School of Economics.

Mr. O’Driscoll was selected to serve on our board of directors because of his experience in the venture capital industry and as a director of both publicly and privately held technology companies.

 

105


Table of Contents

Gary Reiner has served as a member of our board of directors since August 2012. Since November 2011, Mr. Reiner has been an Operating Partner at General Atlantic LLC, a private equity firm. From September 2010 to November 2011, Mr. Reiner served as Special Advisor to General Atlantic. From 1996 to September 2010, Mr. Reiner served as Senior Vice President and Chief Information Officer at General Electric Company, a multinational conglomerate corporation. Mr. Reiner previously held other executive positions with General Electric Company since joining the company in 1991. Mr. Reiner currently serves on the boards of directors of Citigroup Inc., a financial services firm, Hewlett Packard Company, a computer software, hardware and IT services company. He previously served on the board of directors of Genpact Ltd., a business process management company, and a number of General Atlantic’s privately held portfolio companies. Mr. Reiner holds a B.A. in Economics from Harvard University and an M.B.A. from Harvard Business School.

Mr. Reiner was selected to serve on our board of directors because of his operating and management experience with technology companies.

Josh Stein has served as a member of our board of directors since July 2006. Since December 2006, Mr. Stein has been a Managing Director at Draper Fisher Jurvetson, a venture capital firm he joined in May 2004. Mr. Stein currently serves on the boards of directors of several privately held companies. Mr. Stein holds a B.A. in Psychology from Dartmouth College and an M.B.A. from the Stanford University Graduate School of Business.

Mr. Stein was selected to serve on our board of directors because of his experience in the venture capital industry and his knowledge of technology companies.

Our executive officers are appointed by our board of directors and serve until their successors have been duly elected and qualified. There are no family relationships among any of our directors or executive officers.

Padmasree Warrior has served as a member of our board of directors since March 2014. Ms. Warrior has served as Chief Technology Officer since March 2008 and Chief Strategy Officer since July 2012 at Cisco Systems, Inc., a networking equipment provider. Prior to joining Cisco, Ms. Warrior served in various executive roles at Motorola, Inc., a telecommunications company, from 1998 to November 2007, most recently as Executive Vice President and Chief Technology Officer from January 2003 to November 2007. Ms. Warrior currently serves on the board of directors of The Gap, Inc., a retail apparel company. Ms. Warrior holds a B.S. in Chemical Engineering from the Indian Institute of Technology in New Delhi and an M.S. in Chemical Engineering from Cornell University.

Ms. Warrior was selected to serve on our board of directors because of her extensive experience with technology companies.

Codes of Business Conduct and Ethics

Our board of directors intends to adopt a code of business conduct and ethics that applies to all of our employees, officers and directors, including our Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer and other executive and senior financial officers. The full text of our code of business conduct and ethics will be posted on the investor relations page of our website. We intend to disclose any amendments to our code of business conduct and ethics, or waivers of its requirements, on our website or in filings under the Exchange Act.

Board of Directors

Our business affairs are managed under the direction of our board of directors. Our board of directors consists of nine directors, six of whom qualify as independent under the listing standards of the NYSE. Pursuant to our current certificate of incorporation and amended and restated voting agreement, our current directors were elected as follows:

 

   

Mr. Levie was elected as the designee reserved for the person serving as our Chief Executive Officer;

 

106


Table of Contents
    Mr. Smith was elected as the designee of the holders of our common stock;

 

    Ms. Evan and Mr. Levin were elected as the designees of our board of directors;

 

    Mr. Krausz was elected as the designee of the holders of our Series B convertible preferred stock;

 

    Mr. O’Driscoll was elected as the designee of the holders of our Series C convertible preferred stock;

 

    Mr. Reiner was elected as the designee of the holders of our Series E convertible preferred stock;

 

    Mr. Stein was elected as the designee of the holders of our Series A convertible preferred stock; and

 

    Ms. Warrior was elected by the holders of our voting convertible preferred stock and Existing Class A common stock.

Our amended and restated voting agreement will terminate and the provisions of our current certificate of incorporation by which our directors were elected will be amended and restated in connection with this offering.

After the completion of this offering, the number of directors will be fixed by our board of directors, subject to the terms of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws that will become effective immediately prior to the completion of this offering. Following this offering, the persons nominated for director who receive the highest number of affirmative votes at each annual meeting for the class of directors to be elected at such meeting (as further described below) will be elected to our board of directors.

Classified Board of Directors

Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation that will become effective immediately prior to the completion of this offering will provide that, immediately after the completion of this offering, our board of directors will be divided into three classes with staggered three-year terms. Only one class of directors will be elected at each annual meeting of stockholders, with the other classes continuing for the remainder of their respective three-year terms. Our current directors will be divided among the three classes as follows:

 

    the Class I directors will be Ms. Evan and Messrs. Krausz and Levie, and their terms will expire at the annual meeting of stockholders to be held in 2015;

 

    the Class II directors will be Messrs. Levin, Reiner and Stein, and their terms will expire at the annual meeting of stockholders to be held in 2016; and

 

    the Class III directors will be Messrs. O’Driscoll and Smith and Ms. Warrior, and their terms will expire at the annual meeting of stockholders to be held in 2017.

Each director’s term will continue until the election and qualification of his or her successor, or until his or her earlier death, resignation or removal. Any increase or decrease in the number of directors will be distributed among the three classes so that, as nearly as possible, each class will consist of one-third of the total number of our directors.

This classification of our board of directors may have the effect of delaying or preventing changes in control of our company.

Director Independence

Our board of directors has undertaken a review of the independence of each director. Based on information provided by each director concerning his or her background, employment and affiliations, our board of directors has determined that Mses. Evan and Warrior and Messrs. Krausz, O’Driscoll, Reiner and Stein do not have relationships that would interfere with the exercise of independent judgment in carrying out the responsibilities of a director and that each of these directors is “independent” as that term is defined under the listing standards of the NYSE. In making these determinations, our board of directors considered the current and prior relationships that each non-employee director has with our company and all other facts and circumstances our board of

 

107


Table of Contents

directors deemed relevant in determining their independence, including the beneficial ownership of our capital stock by each non-employee director and the transactions described in the section titled “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions.”

Lead Independent Director

Prior to the completion of this offering, our board of directors will adopt corporate governance guidelines that provide that one of our independent directors should serve as our Lead Independent Director at any time when our Chief Executive Officer serves as the Chairman of our board of directors or if the Chairman is not otherwise independent. Because Mr. Levie is our Chairman and Chief Executive Officer, our board of directors has appointed Mr. O’Driscoll to serve as our Lead Independent Director. As Lead Independent Director, Mr. O’Driscoll will preside over periodic meetings of our independent directors, serve as a liaison between our Chairman and our independent directors and perform such additional duties as our board of directors may otherwise determine and delegate.

Committees of Our Board of Directors

Our board of directors has established an audit committee, a compensation committee and a nominating and corporate governance committee. The composition and responsibilities of each of the committees of our board of directors are described below. Members serve on these committees until their resignation or until otherwise determined by our board of directors.

Audit Committee

Ms. Evan and Messrs. Krausz and O’Driscoll, each of whom is a non-employee director, comprise our audit committee. Ms. Evan is the chair of our audit committee. Our board of directors has determined that each of the members of our audit committee satisfies the requirements for independence and financial literacy under the listing standards of the NYSE and SEC rules and regulations. Our board of directors has also determined that Ms. Evan qualifies as an “audit committee financial expert” as defined in the SEC rules and satisfies the financial sophistication requirements of the NYSE. Our audit committee is responsible for, among other things:

 

    selecting and hiring our independent registered public accounting firm;

 

    evaluating the performance and independence of our independent registered public accounting firm;

 

    approving the audit and pre-approving any non-audit services to be performed by our independent registered public accounting firm;

 

    reviewing our financial statements and related disclosures and reviewing our critical accounting policies and practices;

 

    reviewing the adequacy and effectiveness of our internal control policies and procedures and our disclosure controls and procedures;

 

    overseeing procedures for the treatment of complaints on accounting, internal accounting controls, or audit matters;

 

    reviewing and discussing with management and the independent registered public accounting firm the results of our annual audit and the financial statements included in our publicly filed reports;

 

    reviewing and approving any proposed related person transactions; and

 

    preparing the audit committee report included in our annual proxy statement.

Our audit committee will operate under a written charter that satisfies the applicable rules and regulations of the SEC and the listing standards of the NYSE.

 

108


Table of Contents

Compensation Committee

Messrs. O’Driscoll and Stein, each of whom is a non-employee director, comprise our compensation committee. Mr. Stein is the chair of our compensation committee. Our board of directors has determined that each member of our compensation committee satisfies the requirements for independence under the listing standards of the NYSE and the applicable rules and regulations of the SEC. Each member of our compensation committee is also a non-employee director, as defined pursuant to Rule 16b-3 promulgated under the Exchange Act, and an outside director, as defined pursuant to Section 162(m) of the Internal Revenue Code. Our compensation committee is responsible for, among other things:

 

    reviewing and approving our Chief Executive Officer’s and other executive officers’ annual base salaries, incentive compensation plans, including the specific goals and amounts, equity compensation, employment agreements, severance arrangements and change in control agreements, and any other benefits, compensation or arrangements;

 

    administering our equity compensation plans;

 

    overseeing our overall compensation philosophy, compensation plans and benefits programs; and

 

    preparing the compensation committee report included in our annual proxy statement.

Our compensation committee will operate under a written charter that satisfies the applicable rules and regulations of the SEC and the listing standards of the NYSE.

Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee

Ms. Evan and Messrs. Reiner and Stein, each of whom is a non-employee director, comprise our nominating and corporate governance committee. Mr. Reiner is the chair of our nominating and corporate governance committee. Our board of directors has determined that each member of our nominating and corporate governance committee satisfies the requirements for independence under the listing standards of the NYSE. Our nominating and corporate governance committee is responsible for, among other things:

 

    evaluating and making recommendations regarding the composition, organization and governance of our board of directors and its committees;

 

    evaluating and making recommendations regarding the creation of additional committees or the change in mandate or dissolution of committees;

 

    reviewing and making recommendations with regard to our corporate governance guidelines; and

 

    reviewing and approving conflicts of interest of our directors and corporate officers, other than related person transactions reviewed by our audit committee.

Our nominating and corporate governance committee will operate under a written charter that satisfies the listing standards of the NYSE.

Compensation Committee Interlocks and Insider Participation

None of the members of our compensation committee is or has been an officer or employee of our company. None of our executive officers currently serves, or in the past year has served, as a member of the board of directors or compensation committee (or other board committee performing equivalent functions) of any entity that has one or more executive officers serving on our board of directors or our compensation committee.

Mr. O’Driscoll, a member of our compensation committee, is a Managing Director of Scale Venture Partners. Since January 1, 2010, Scale Venture Partners III, L.P. (SVP III) has purchased shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock in the following transactions: from April 2010 through May 2010, SVP III purchased an aggregate of 6,170,618 shares of our Series C redeemable convertible preferred stock from

 

109


Table of Contents

us at a purchase price of $1.28 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $7,898,392; in February 2011, SVP III purchased an aggregate of 503,056 shares of our Series D redeemable convertible preferred stock from us at a purchase price of $3.1619 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $1,590,613; and in August 2012, SVP III purchased an aggregate of 38,183 shares of our Series E redeemable convertible preferred stock from us at a purchase price of $13.0949 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $500,003.

Mr. Stein, a member of our compensation committee, is a Managing Director of Draper Fisher Jurvetson. Since January 1, 2010, entities affiliated with Draper Fisher Jurvetson (DFJ Entities) have purchased shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock in the following transactions: from April 2010 through May 2010, the DFJ Entities purchased an aggregate of 4,828,400 shares of our Series C redeemable convertible preferred stock from us at a purchase price of $1.28 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $6,180,352; in February 2011, the DFJ Entities purchased an aggregate of 1,715,928 shares of our Series D redeemable convertible preferred stock from us at a purchase price of $3.1619 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $5,425,593; in August 2011, the DFJ Entities purchased an aggregate of 996,090 shares of our Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock from us at a purchase price of $8.0314 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $7,999,998; in August 2012, the DFJ Entities purchased an aggregate of 229,097 shares of our Series E redeemable convertible preferred stock from us at a purchase price of $13.0949 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $3,000,003; and in October 2013, the DFJ Entities purchased an aggregate of 277,778 shares of our Series E-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock from us at a purchase price of $18.00 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $5,000,004. In October 2011, we entered into a stock purchase agreement pursuant to which certain of our stockholders, including the DFJ Entities, sold an aggregate of 350,514 shares of our Series A redeemable convertible preferred stock, 1,345,970 shares of our Series B redeemable convertible preferred stock and 509,633 shares of our Series C redeemable convertible preferred stock to entities affiliated with Bessemer Venture Partners at a purchase price of $9.0657 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $19,999,995.

The sale of our redeemable convertible preferred stock to SVP III and the DFJ Entities was made in connection with our redeemable convertible preferred stock financings and on substantially the same terms and conditions as all other sales of our redeemable convertible preferred stock by us in each such financing. SVP III and the DFJ Entities are also party to our investors’ rights agreement, right of first refusal and co-sale agreement and voting agreement. See the section titled “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions” for further description of these transactions.

Non-Employee Director Compensation

Other than described below, our non-employee directors have not received any compensation for their service on our board of directors or committees of our board of directors.

As of January 31, 2014, Ms. Evan held 160,000 shares of our Class B common stock pursuant to the early exercise of an option to purchase shares of our Class B common stock, of which 76,667 shares were subject to a right of repurchase held by us. The shares began to vest on January 31, 2012 and vest in 48 equal monthly installments; provided, however, that the shares shall become fully vested if Ms. Evan is terminated or resigns from her position as a director in connection with or within 12 months of a change in control.

Our directors who are also our employees receive no additional compensation for their service as directors. During fiscal 2014, Messrs. Levie, Levin and Smith were our employees. See the section titled “Executive Compensation” for additional information about the compensation paid to Messrs. Levie, Levin and Smith.

We do not currently have a policy or plan to make equity award grants or pay cash retainers to our non-employee directors at a particular time, of a particular value or of a particular amount. Following the completion of this offering, we intend to implement a formal policy pursuant to which our non-employee directors would be eligible to receive equity awards and cash retainers as compensation for service on our board of directors and committees of our board of directors.

 

110


Table of Contents

EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION

Fiscal 2014 Summary Compensation Table

The following table presents summary information regarding the total compensation for services rendered in all capacities that was earned by our Chief Executive Officer and our two other most highly compensated executive officers in fiscal 2014. The individuals listed in the table below are our named executive officers for fiscal 2014.

 

Name and Principal
Position

   Fiscal Year      Salary ($)      Bonus ($) (1)      Option
Awards ($) ( 2)
     Non-Equity
Incentive Plan
Compensation
($) (3 )
     All Other
Compensation
($) ( 4)
     Total ($)  

Aaron Levie

     2014         150,833         38,750                         87         189,670   

Chairman and Chief

     2013         140,833                 1,827,185         39,773         53         2,007,844   

Executive Officer

                    

Dan Levin

     2014         240,000         60,000         1,656,552                 388         1,956,940   

President and Chief

                    

Operating Officer

                    

Dylan Smith

     2014         202,500         50,000         311,858                 114         564,472   

Chief Financial Officer

     2013         182,500                 450,236         52,761         80         685,577   

 

(1) The amounts reported represent discretionary bonuses earned in fiscal 2014.
(2) The amounts reported represent the grant date fair value of the stock options granted to the named executive officers during fiscal 2013 and fiscal 2014 as computed in accordance with FASB ASC Topic 718. The assumptions used in calculating the grant date fair value of the stock options reported in this column are set forth in the notes to our audited consolidated financial statements included in this prospectus.
(3) The amounts reported represent amounts earned in fiscal 2013 under our 2012 executive bonus program.
(4) The amounts reported represent amounts paid on behalf of the named executive officers for basic life insurance.

Non-Equity Incentive Plan Compensation

Executive Bonus Program

We sponsored a 2012 executive bonus program (2012 Bonus Program) that covered calendar year 2012. Our named executive officers for fiscal 2013 were eligible to participate in our 2012 Bonus Program. Incentives under our 2012 Bonus Program were payable based on our achievement of certain company financial targets. For calendar year 2012, the performance metric was tied to the acquisition of new and recurring business revenue. Subject to achieving the performance metric, each participant was eligible to receive a target incentive payment as a percentage of the participant’s base salary. For calendar year 2012, the target incentives for each eligible named executive officer were as follows: (i) Aaron Levie, 40% of his base salary; and (ii) Dylan Smith, 40% of his base salary. During calendar year 2012, we achieved the performance metric at a level that triggered the payments described in the Fiscal 2014 Summary Compensation Table.

In addition, as a result of transitioning to a January 31 fiscal year-end, we paid out bonuses to cover the additional one month for the remainder of fiscal 2013. For this one-month period, we paid each executive 1/12 of his target amount for calendar year 2012.

 

111


Table of Contents

Outstanding Equity Awards at Fiscal Year-End

The following table provides information regarding equity awards held by our named executive officers at January 31, 2014.

 

    Option Awards     Stock Awards  
    Grant
Date
    Number of Securities
Underlying Unexercised
Options
    Option
Exercise

Price
($)
    Option
Expiration

Date
    Number of
Shares of
Stock
That Have Not

Vested
(#)
    Market Value
of Shares of

Stock
That Have
Not

Vested
($)
 

Name

    Exercisable
(#)
    Unexercisable
(#)
         

Aaron Levie

    07/15/2010 (1)       515,235        73,606        0.29        07/14/2020                 
    04/07/2011 (2)       25,000               0.59        04/06/2021                 
    04/02/2012 (3)       385,000        385,000        1.16        04/01/2022                 
    04/02/2012 (4)       102,500        307,500        4.00        04/01/2022                 
    04/02/2012 (5)              410,000        4.00        04/01/2022                 
    04/27/2012 (6)              410,000        4.00        04/26/2022                 

Dan Levin

    04/19/2013 (7)       34,375        265,625        4.63        04/18/2023                 
    04/19/2013 (8)       150,000        150,000        4.63        04/18/2023                 

Dylan Smith

    07/15/2010                                    42,973 (9)       604,200 (10)  
    04/07/2011 (2)       17,362               0.59        04/06/2021                 
    04/01/2012 (11)       160,000        80,000        1.16        03/31/2022                 
    04/01/2012 (12)       35,000        105,000        1.16        03/31/2022                 
    02/07/2013 (7)       16,041        123,959        4.63        02/06/2023                 

 

(1) One forty-eighth of the shares subject to the option vested on August 1, 2010 and one forty-eighth of the shares vest monthly thereafter, subject to continued service to us.
(2) One thirty-sixth of the shares subject to the option vested on February 1, 2011 and one thirty-sixth of the shares vest monthly thereafter, subject to continued service to us.
(3) One forty-eighth of the shares subject to the option vested on February 1, 2012 and one forty-eighth of the shares vest monthly thereafter, subject to continued service to us.
(4) One forty-eighth of the shares subject to the option vested on February 1, 2013 and one forty-eighth of the shares vest monthly thereafter, subject to continued service to us.
(5) One forty-eighth of the shares subject to the option vest on February 1, 2014 and one forty-eighth of the shares vest monthly thereafter, subject to continued service to us.
(6) One forty-eighth of the shares subject to the option vest on February 1, 2015 and one forty-eighth of the shares vest monthly thereafter, subject to continued service to us.
(7) One ninety-sixth of the shares subject to the option vest monthly over two years beginning on February 1, 2013 and one thirty-second of the shares vest monthly thereafter, subject to continued service to us.
(8) One-twelfth of the shares subject to the option vested on August 29, 2013 and one-twelfth of the shares vest monthly thereafter, subject to continued service to us.
(9) Shares acquired pursuant to an early exercise provision and subject to a right of repurchase we held as of January 31, 2014. One forty-eighth of the 343,780 shares subject to the underlying option award vested on August 1, 2010 and one forty-eighth of these shares vest monthly thereafter, subject to continued service to us.
(10) This amount reflects the fair market value of our common stock of $14.06 per share as of January 31, 2014 multiplied by the amount shown in the column for the Number of Shares of Stock That Have Not Vested.
(11) One thirty-sixth of the shares subject to the option vested on February 1, 2012 and one thirty-sixth of the shares vest monthly thereafter, subject to continued service to us.
(12) One ninety-sixth of the shares subject to the option vest monthly over two years beginning on January 1, 2012 and one thirty-second of the shares vest monthly thereafter, subject to continued service to us.

Executive Employment Agreements

Aaron Levie

Prior to the completion of this offering, we intend to enter into a confirmatory employment letter with Aaron Levie, our Chairman and Chief Executive Officer. The confirmatory employment letter will have no specific term and will provide that Mr. Levie is an at-will employee. Mr. Levie’s current annual base salary is $155,000, and he is eligible for annual target incentive payments equal to 50% of his base salary.

 

112


Table of Contents

Dan Levin

Prior to the completion of this offering, we intend to enter into a confirmatory employment letter with Dan Levin, our President and Chief Operating Officer. The confirmatory employment letter will have no specific term and will provide that Mr. Levin is an at-will employee. Mr. Levin’s current annual base salary is $240,000, and he is eligible for annual target incentive payments equal to 50% of his base salary.

Dylan Smith

Prior to the completion of this offering, we intend to enter into a confirmatory employment letter with Dylan Smith, our Chief Financial Officer. The confirmatory employment letter will have no specific term and will provide that Mr. Smith is an at-will employee. Mr. Smith’s current annual base salary is $200,000, and he is eligible for annual target incentive payments equal to 50% of his base salary.

Employee Benefit and Stock Plans

2014 Equity Incentive Plan

Prior to the effectiveness of this offering, our board of directors intends to adopt, and we expect our stockholders will approve, our 2014 Equity Incentive Plan (2014 Plan). Our 2014 Plan will be effective on the business day immediately prior to the effective date of the registration statement of which this prospectus forms a part and is not expected to be utilized until after the completion of this offering. Our 2014 Plan will provide for the grant of incentive stock options, within the meaning of Section 422 of the Internal Revenue Code (the Code), to our employees and any of our parent and subsidiary corporations’ employees, and for the grant of nonstatutory stock options, restricted stock, restricted stock units, stock appreciation rights, performance units and performance shares to our employees, directors and consultants, and our parent and subsidiary corporations’ employees and consultants.

Authorized Shares . A total of              shares of our Class A common stock are expected to be reserved for issuance pursuant to our 2014 Plan, of which no awards are issued and outstanding. In addition, the shares reserved for issuance under our 2014 Plan will also include (i) those shares of our Class B common stock reserved but not subject to outstanding awards under our 2011 Plan (as defined below) as of the effective date described above and (ii) shares of our Class B common stock returned to our 2011 Plan as the result of expiration or termination of options (provided that the maximum number of shares that may be added to our 2014 Plan pursuant to (i) and (ii) is              shares). Any such shares under clauses (i) and (ii) above that had covered awards under our 2011 Plan as shares of Class B common stock will, under our 2014 Plan, become issuable instead as Class A common stock on a one-for-one basis. The number of shares of our Class A common stock available for issuance under our 2014 Plan will also include an annual increase on the first day of each fiscal year beginning in fiscal 2016, equal to the least of:

 

                 shares;

 

        % of the outstanding shares of our capital stock as of the last day of our immediately preceding fiscal year; or

 

    such other amount as our board of directors may determine.

Plan Administration . Our compensation committee will administer our 2014 Plan. In case of options intended to qualify as “performance-based compensation” within the meaning of Section 162(m) of the Code, our compensation committee will consist of two or more “outside directors” within the meaning of Section 162(m). Subject to the provisions of our 2014 Plan, the administrator has the power to determine the terms of the awards, including the exercise price, the number of shares subject to each such award, the exercisability of the awards, and the form of consideration, if any, payable upon exercise. The administrator also has the authority to amend existing awards to reduce their exercise price, to allow participants the opportunity to transfer outstanding awards

 

113


Table of Contents

to a financial institution or other person or entity selected by the administrator and to institute an exchange program by which outstanding awards may be surrendered in exchange for awards with a higher or lower exercise price.

Stock Options . The exercise price of options granted under our 2014 Plan must at least be equal to the fair market value of our Class A common stock on the date of grant. The term of an incentive stock option may not exceed 10 years, except that with respect to any participant who owns more than 10% of the voting power of all classes of our outstanding capital stock, the term must not exceed five years and the exercise price must equal at least 110% of the fair market value on the grant date. Subject to the provisions of our 2014 Plan, the administrator determines the term of all other options. After the termination of service of an employee, director, or consultant, he or she may exercise his or her option or stock appreciation right for the period of time stated in his or her award agreement. Generally, if termination is due to death or disability, the option or stock appreciation right will remain exercisable for 12 months. In all other cases, the option or stock appreciation right will generally remain exercisable for three months following the termination of service. However, in no event may an option be exercised later than the expiration of its term.

Stock Appreciation Rights . Stock appreciation rights may be granted under our 2014 Plan. Stock appreciation rights allow the recipient to receive the appreciation in the fair market value of our Class A common stock between the exercise date and the date of grant. Subject to the provisions of our 2014 Plan, the administrator determines the terms of stock appreciation rights, including when such rights become exercisable and whether to pay any increased appreciation in cash or with shares of our Class A common stock, or a combination thereof, except that the per share exercise price for the shares to be issued pursuant to the exercise of a stock appreciation right will be no less than 100% of the fair market value per share of our Class A common stock on the date of grant.

Restricted Stock . Shares of restricted stock may be granted under our 2014 Plan. Restricted stock awards are grants of shares of our Class A common stock that vest in accordance with terms and conditions established by the administrator. The administrator will determine the number of shares of restricted stock granted and may impose whatever conditions to vesting it determines to be appropriate (for example, the administrator may set restrictions based on the achievement of specific performance goals or continued service to us). The administrator, in its sole discretion, may accelerate the time at which any restrictions will lapse or be removed. Shares of restricted stock that do not vest are subject to our right of repurchase or forfeiture.

Restricted Stock Units . Restricted stock units may be granted under our 2014 Plan. Restricted stock units are bookkeeping entries representing an amount equal to the fair market value of one share of our Class A common stock. The administrator determines the terms and conditions of restricted stock units, including the number of units granted, the vesting criteria (which may include achievement of specified performance goals or continued service to us), and the form and timing of payment. The administrator, in its sole discretion, may accelerate the time at which any restrictions will lapse or be removed.

Performance Units and Performance Shares . Performance units and performance shares may be granted under our 2014 Plan. Performance units and performance shares are awards that will result in a payment to a participant only if performance goals established by the administrator are achieved or the awards otherwise vest. The administrator will establish organizational or individual performance goals in its discretion, which, depending on the extent to which they are met, will determine the number and/or the value of performance units and performance shares to be paid out to participants. After the grant of a performance unit or performance share, the administrator, in its sole discretion, may reduce or waive any performance objectives or other vesting provisions for such performance units or performance shares. The administrator, in its sole discretion, may pay earned performance units or performance shares in the form of cash, in shares, or in some combination thereof.

Non-Employee Directors . Our 2014 Plan provides that all non-employee directors will be eligible to receive awards other than incentive stock options under our 2014 Plan. Our 2014 Plan provides that in any given year a non-employee director will not receive (i) cash-settled awards having a grant date fair value greater than $        ,

 

114


Table of Contents

increased to $         in connection with his or her initial service; and (ii) stock-settled awards having a grant date fair value greater than $        , increased to $         in connection with his or her initial service, in each case, as determined under generally accepted accounting principles.

Non-Transferability of Awards . Unless the administrator provides otherwise, our 2014 Plan generally does not allow for the transfer of awards, and only the recipient of an award may exercise an award during his or her lifetime.

Merger or Change in Control . Our 2014 Plan provides that in the event of a merger or change in control, as defined in our 2014 Plan, each outstanding award will be treated as the administrator determines, including that the successor corporation or its parent or subsidiary will assume or substitute an equivalent award for each outstanding award. The administrator is not required to treat all awards similarly. If there is no assumption or substitution of outstanding awards, the awards will fully vest, all restrictions will lapse, all performance goals or other vesting criteria will be deemed achieved at 100% of target levels, and the awards will become fully exercisable.

Amendment; Termination . Our 2014 Plan will automatically terminate in 2024, unless we terminate it sooner. The administrator has the authority to amend, suspend, or terminate our 2014 Plan provided such action does not impair the existing rights of any participant.

2014 Employee Stock Purchase Plan

Prior to the effectiveness of this offering, our board of directors intends to adopt, and we expect our stockholders will approve, our 2014 Employee Stock Purchase Plan (ESPP). Our ESPP will be effective on the effective date of the registration statement of which this prospectus forms a part. We believe that allowing our employees to participate in our ESPP provides them with a further incentive towards ensuring our success and accomplishing our corporate goals.

Authorized Shares . A total of              shares of our Class A common stock will be made available for sale under our ESPP. The number of shares of our Class A common stock available for issuance under our ESPP will be increased on the first day of each fiscal year beginning in fiscal 2016, with such increase equal to the least of:

 

                 shares;

 

        % of the outstanding shares of our capital stock on the first day of such fiscal year; or

 

    such other amount as our board of directors may determine.

Plan Administration . Our compensation committee will administer our ESPP and will have full and exclusive authority to interpret the terms of our ESPP including with respect to eligibility, subject to the conditions of our ESPP as described below.

Eligibility . Generally, all of our employees are eligible to participate if they are employed by us, or any participating subsidiary, for at least 20 hours per week and more than five months in any calendar year. However, an employee may not be granted rights to purchase shares of our Class A common stock under our ESPP if such employee:

 

    immediately after the grant would own capital stock possessing 5% or more of the total combined voting power or value of all classes of our capital stock; or

 

    holds rights to purchase shares of our Class A common stock under all of our employee stock purchase plans that accrue at a rate that exceeds $25,000 worth of shares of our Class A common stock for each calendar year.

Offering Periods . Our ESPP is intended to qualify under Section 423 of the Code. Each offering period includes purchase periods, which will be approximately      months commencing with one exercise date and

 

115


Table of Contents

ending with the next exercise date. The offering periods are scheduled to start on the first trading day on or after                      and                      of each year, except for the first offering period, which will commence on the first trading day on or after the completion of this offering and will end on the first trading day on or after             .

Contributions . Our ESPP permits participants to purchase shares of our Class A common stock through payroll deductions of up to     % of their eligible compensation. A participant may purchase a maximum of              shares of our Class A common stock during a purchase period.

Exercise of Purchase Right . Amounts deducted and accumulated by the participant are used to purchase shares of our Class A common stock at the end of each purchase period. The purchase price of the shares will be     % of the lower of the fair market value of our Class A common stock on the first trading day of each offering period or on the exercise date. If the fair market value of our Class A common stock on the exercise date is less than the fair market value on the first trading day of the offering period, participants will be withdrawn from the current offering period following their purchase of shares of our Class A common stock on the purchase date and will be automatically re-enrolled in a new offering period. Participants may end their participation at any time during an offering period and will be paid their accrued contributions that have not yet been used to purchase shares of our Class A common stock. Participation ends automatically upon termination of employment with us.

Non-Transferability . A participant may not transfer rights granted under our ESPP. If our compensation committee permits the transfer of rights, it may only be done by will, the laws of descent and distribution, or as otherwise provided under our ESPP.

Merger or Change in Control . In the event of a merger or change in control, as defined under our ESPP, a successor corporation may assume or substitute each outstanding purchase right. If the successor corporation refuses to assume or substitute such outstanding purchase right, the offering period then in progress will be shortened, and a new exercise date will be set. The administrator will notify each participant that the exercise date has been changed and that the participant’s option will be exercised automatically on the new exercise date unless prior to such date the participant has withdrawn from the offering period.

Amendment; Termination . Our ESPP will automatically terminate in 2034, unless we terminate it sooner. The administrator has the authority to amend, suspend, or terminate our ESPP, except that, subject to certain exceptions described in our ESPP, no such action may adversely affect any outstanding rights to purchase shares of our Class A common stock under our ESPP.

2011 Equity Incentive Plan

Our board of directors adopted, and our stockholders approved, our 2011 Equity Incentive Plan (2011 Plan), in November 2011. Our 2011 Plan was most recently amended in November 2013. We will not grant any additional awards under our 2011 Plan following this offering and will instead grant awards under our 2014 Plan. However, our 2011 Plan will continue to govern the terms and conditions of the outstanding awards previously granted thereunder.

Authorized Shares . As of January 31, 2014, an aggregate of 16,840,327 shares of our Class B common stock were reserved for issuance under our 2011 Plan. As of January 31, 2014, options to purchase 14,510,574 shares of our Class B common stock and 225,300 shares of our Class B common stock issuable upon the vesting of RSUs remained outstanding under our 2011 Plan.

Plan Administration . Our compensation committee currently administers our 2011 Plan. Subject to the provisions of our 2011 Plan, the administrator has the full power and authority to administer our 2011 Plan.

Stock Options . Options to purchase shares of our Class B common stock may be granted under our 2011 Plan. Generally, the exercise price per share of all options must equal at least 100% of the fair market value per share of our common stock on the date the grants are approved by our board of directors. The term of an incentive stock option may not exceed 10 years. An incentive stock option held by a participant who owns more

 

116


Table of Contents

than 10% of the total combined voting power of all classes of our stock, or any parent or subsidiary corporations, may not have a term in excess of five years and must have an exercise price of at least 110% of the fair market value per share of our common stock on the date of grant. The administrator will determine the methods of payment of the exercise price of an option. After the termination of service of an employee, director or consultant, the participant may generally exercise his or her options, to the extent vested as of such date of termination, for three months after termination. If termination is due to death, disability or retirement, the option will generally remain exercisable, to the extent vested as of such date of termination, until the one-year anniversary of such termination. However, in no event may an option be exercised later than the expiration of its term. If termination is for cause, then an option automatically expires upon first notification to the participant of such termination.

Stock Appreciation Rights . Stock appreciation rights may be granted under our 2011 Plan. Stock appreciation rights allow the recipient to receive the appreciation in the fair market value of shares of our common stock between the exercise date and the date of grant.

Stock Award s. Stock awards may be granted under our 2011 Plan. Stock awards are grants of shares of our common stock that are not subject to vesting.

Restricted Stock . Shares of restricted stock may be granted under our 2011 Plan. Restricted stock awards are grants of shares of our common stock that are subject to various restrictions, including restrictions on transferability and forfeiture provisions. Shares of restricted stock will vest, and the restrictions on such shares will lapse, in accordance with terms and conditions established by the administrator.

Stock Units . Stock units may be granted under our 2011 Plan. Stock units are bookkeeping entries representing an amount equal to the fair market value of one share of our common stock. The administrator determines the terms and conditions of restricted stock units, including the vesting criteria (which may include accomplishing specified performance criteria or continued service to us) and the form and timing of payment. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the administrator, in its sole discretion, may accelerate the time at which any restrictions will lapse or be removed.

Transferability of Awards . Our 2011 Plan generally does not allow for the transfer of awards, and only the recipient of an award may exercise such an award during his or her lifetime.

Certain Adjustment . In the event of certain changes in our capitalization, the number of shares reserved under our 2011 Plan, the exercise prices of and the number of shares subject to outstanding options, and the purchase price of and the numbers of shares subject to outstanding awards, will be proportionately adjusted, subject to any required action by our board of directors.

Change of Control . Our 2011 Plan provides that, in the event of a change of control (as defined in our 2011 Plan), if an outstanding award is not assumed or substituted for, then the award vests with respect to 25% of the unvested shares and then terminates.

Amendment; Termination . Our board of directors may amend our 2011 Plan at any time, provided that such amendment does not materially adversely affect any rights under outstanding awards without the award holder’s consent. Upon the completion of this offering, our 2011 Plan will be terminated and no further awards will be granted thereunder. All outstanding awards will continue to be governed by their existing terms.

2006 Stock Incentive Plan

Our board of directors adopted, and our stockholders approved, our 2006 Stock Incentive Plan (2006 Plan), in June 2006. Our 2006 Plan was terminated in connection with the adoption of our 2011 Plan and we will not grant any additional awards under our 2006 Plan; however, our 2006 Plan will continue to govern the terms and conditions of the outstanding awards previously granted thereunder.

 

117


Table of Contents

Authorized Shares . As of January 31, 2014, an aggregate of 3,916,501 shares of our Class B common stock were reserved for issuance under our 2006 Plan. As of January 31, 2014, options to purchase 3,916,501 shares of our Class B common stock remained outstanding under our 2006 Plan.

Plan Administration . Our compensation committee currently administers our 2006 Plan. Subject to the provisions of our 2006 Plan, the administrator has the full power and authority to administer our 2006 Plan.

Stock Options . Options to purchase shares of our Class B common stock were available for grant under our 2006 Plan. The administrator will determine the methods of payment of the exercise price of an option. After the termination of service of an employee, director, or consultant, the participant may generally exercise his or her options, to the extent vested as of such date of termination, for three months after termination. If termination is due to death, disability or retirement, the option will generally remain exercisable, to the extent vested as of such date of termination, until the one-year anniversary of such termination. However, in no event may an option be exercised later than the expiration of its term. If termination is for cause, then an option automatically expires upon first notification to the participant of such termination.

Stock Appreciation Rights . Stock appreciation rights were available for grant under our 2006 Plan. Stock appreciation rights allow the recipient to receive the appreciation in the fair market value of shares of our common stock between the exercise date and the date of grant.

Stock Awards . Stock awards were available for grant under our 2006 Plan. Stock awards are grants of shares of our common stock that are not subject to vesting.

Restricted Stock . Shares of restricted stock were available for grant under our 2006 Plan. Restricted stock awards are grants of shares of our common stock that are subject to various restrictions, including restrictions on transferability and forfeiture provisions. Shares of restricted stock will vest, and the restrictions on such shares will lapse, in accordance with terms and conditions established by the administrator.

Stock Units . Stock units were available for grant under our 2006 Plan. Stock units are bookkeeping entries representing an amount equal to the fair market value of one share of our common stock. The administrator determines the terms and conditions of restricted stock units, including the vesting criteria (which may include accomplishing specified performance criteria or continued service to us) and the form and timing of payment. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the administrator, in its sole discretion may accelerate the time at which any restrictions will lapse or be removed.

Transferability of Awards . Our 2006 Plan generally does not allow for the transfer of awards, and only the recipient of an award may exercise such an award during his or her lifetime.

Certain Adjustment . In the event of certain changes in our capitalization, the number of shares reserved under our 2006 Plan, the exercise prices of and the number of shares subject to outstanding options, and the purchase price of and the numbers of shares subject to outstanding awards, will be proportionately adjusted, subject to any required action by our board of directors.

Company Transaction . Our 2006 Plan provides that, in the event of a company transaction (as defined in our 2006 Plan) that is not a related party transaction, if an outstanding award is not assumed or substituted for, then the award vests with respect to 25% of the unvested shares and then terminates.

Amendment; Termination . Our board of directors may amend our 2006 Plan at any time, provided that such amendment does not materially adversely affect any rights under outstanding awards without the award holder’s consent. Our 2006 Plan has been terminated, and no further awards will be granted thereunder. All outstanding awards will continue to be governed by their existing terms.

 

118


Table of Contents

Executive Incentive Plan

Prior to the effectiveness of this offering, we intend to adopt an Executive Incentive Plan (Bonus Plan). Our Bonus Plan will allow our compensation committee to provide cash incentive awards to selected employees, including our named executive officers, based upon performance goals established by our compensation committee.

Under our Bonus Plan, our compensation committee will determine the performance goals applicable to any award. The performance goals include                     . Performance goals that include our financial results may be determined in accordance with GAAP or such financial results may consist of non-GAAP financial measures, and any actual results may be adjusted by our compensation committee for one-time items or unbudgeted or unexpected items when determining whether the performance goals have been met. The goals may be on the basis of any factors our compensation committee determines relevant and may be adjusted on an individual, divisional, business unit or company-wide basis. The performance goals may differ from participant to participant and from award to award.

Our compensation committee may, in its sole discretion and at any time, increase, reduce or eliminate a participant’s actual award, and/or increase, reduce or eliminate the amount allocated to the bonus pool for a particular performance period. The actual award may be below, at or above a participant’s target award, in our compensation committee’s discretion. Our compensation committee may determine the amount of any reduction on the basis of such factors as it deems relevant, and it is not required to establish any allocation or weighting with respect to the factors it considers.

Actual awards will be paid in cash only after they are earned, which usually requires continued employment through the date a bonus is paid.

Our compensation committee will have the authority to amend, alter, suspend or terminate our Bonus Plan provided such action does not impair the existing rights of any participant with respect to any earned bonus.

401(k) Plan

We maintain a tax-qualified retirement plan (401(k) Plan) that provides eligible U.S. employees with an opportunity to save for retirement on a tax advantaged basis. Eligible employees are able to defer eligible compensation subject to applicable annual Code limits. We have the ability to make discretionary contributions to our 401(k) Plan but have not done so to date. Employees’ pre-tax contributions are allocated to each participant’s individual account and are then invested in selected investment alternatives according to the participants’ directions. Employees are immediately and fully vested in their contributions. Our 401(k) Plan is intended to be qualified under Section 401(a) of the Code with our 401(k) Plan’s related trust intended to be tax exempt under Section 501(a) of the Code. As a tax-qualified retirement plan, contributions to our 401(k) Plan and earnings on those contributions are not taxable to the employees until distributed from our 401(k) Plan.

 

119


Table of Contents

CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

In addition to the compensation arrangements that are described in the sections titled “Management” and “Executive Compensation,” and the registration rights described in the section titled “Description of Capital Stock—Registration Rights,” we describe below transactions and series of similar transactions since January 1, 2010, and currently proposed transactions, to which we were a party or will be a party, in which:

 

    the amounts involved exceeded or will exceed $120,000; and

 

    any of our directors, executive officers or beneficial holders of more than 5% of any class of our capital stock, or any immediate family member of, or person sharing the household with, any of these individuals or entities (each, a related person), had or will have a direct or indirect material interest.

Other than as described below, since January 1, 2010, there has not been, nor is there currently proposed, any transactions or series of similar transactions in which we were, or currently propose to be, a party where the amount involved exceeds, or will exceed, $120,000, and in which any related person had or will have a direct or indirect material interest. We believe the terms of the transactions described below were comparable to terms we could have obtained in arm’s-length dealings with unrelated third parties.

Equity Financings

Series C Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock Financing

From April 2010 through May 2010, we sold an aggregate of 14,062,501 shares of our Series C redeemable convertible preferred stock at a purchase price of $1.28 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $18,000,002, pursuant to our Series C redeemable convertible preferred stock financing. The following table summarizes purchases of our Series C redeemable convertible preferred stock by related persons:

 

Stockholder

   Shares of
Series C
Redeemable
Convertible
Preferred Stock
     Total
Purchase
Price
 

Scale Venture Partners III, L.P. (1)

     6,170,618       $ 7,898,392   

Entities affiliated with Draper Fisher Jurvetson (2)

     4,828,400         6,180,352   

U.S. Venture Partners IX, L.P. (3)

     2,672,858         3,421,259   

 

(1) Rory O’Driscoll, a member of our board of directors, is a Managing Director of Scale Venture Partners.
(2) Affiliates of Draper Fisher Jurvetson holding our securities whose shares are aggregated for purposes of reporting share ownership information are Draper Associates, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Fund VIII, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Fund IX, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Growth Fund 2006, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners VIII, LLC, Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners IX, LLC and Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners Growth Fund 2006, LLC. Josh Stein, a member of our board of directors, is a Managing Director of Draper Fisher Jurvetson.
(3) Steven Krausz, a member of our board of directors, is a Managing Member at U.S. Venture Partners.

 

120


Table of Contents

Series D Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock Financing

From February 2011 through April 2011, we sold an aggregate of 11,543,699 shares of our Series D redeemable convertible preferred stock at a purchase price of $3.1619 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $36,500,022, pursuant to our Series D redeemable convertible preferred stock financing. Concurrently, we entered into a stock purchase agreement pursuant to which certain holders of our capital stock, including Dylan Smith, our Chief Financial Officer and a member of our board of directors, sold an aggregate of 411,138 shares of our common stock to purchasers, including the Series D Investors (as defined below), at a purchase price of $3.1619 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $1,299,977, and each such purchaser exchanged such shares of our common stock for an equivalent number of shares of our Series D redeemable convertible preferred stock. The following table summarizes purchases of our Series D redeemable convertible preferred stock by related persons (Series D Investors):

 

Stockholder

   Shares of
Series D
Redeemable
Convertible

Preferred Stock
     Total
Purchase
Price
 

Entities affiliated with Meritech Capital Partners (1)

     4,111,452       $ 13,000,001   

Entities affiliated with Draper Fisher Jurvetson (2)

     1,715,928         5,425,593   

U.S. Venture Partners IX, L.P. (3)

     943,672         2,983,797   

Scale Venture Partners III, L.P. (4)

     503,056         1,590,613   

 

(1) Affiliates of Meritech Capital Partners holding our securities whose shares are aggregated for purposes of reporting share ownership information are Meritech Capital Partners IV L.P. and Meritech Capital Affiliates IV L.P.
(2) Affiliates of Draper Fisher Jurvetson holding our securities whose shares are aggregated for purposes of reporting share ownership information are Draper Associates, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Fund VIII, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Fund IX, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Growth Fund 2006, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners VIII, LLC, Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners IX, LLC and Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners Growth Fund 2006, LLC. Josh Stein, a member of our board of directors, is a Managing Director of Draper Fisher Jurvetson.
(3) Steven Krausz, a member of our board of directors, is a Managing Member at U.S. Venture Partners.
(4) Rory O’Driscoll, a member of our board of directors, is a Managing Director of Scale Venture Partners.

Series D-1 Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock Financing

From August 2011 through September 2011, we sold an aggregate of 3,218,033 shares of our Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock at a purchase price of $8.0314 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $25,845,311, pursuant to our Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock financing. Concurrently, we entered into a stock purchase agreement pursuant to which certain holders of our capital stock, including Aaron Levie, Dylan Smith and Dan Levin, each of whom is a member of our board of directors and an executive officer, sold an aggregate of 641,815 shares of our common stock to purchasers, including the Series D-1 Investors (as defined below), at a purchase price of $8.0314 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $5,154,673, and each such purchaser exchanged such shares of our common stock for an equivalent number of shares of our Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock. The following table summarizes purchases of our Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock by related persons (Series D-1 Investors):

 

Stockholder

   Shares of
Series D-1
Redeemable
Convertible

Preferred Stock
     Total
Purchase
Price
 

Entities affiliated with Draper Fisher Jurvetson (1)

     996,090       $ 7,999,998   

Entities affiliated with Meritech Capital Partners (2)

     498,045         3,999,999   

 

(1) Affiliates of Draper Fisher Jurvetson holding our securities whose shares are aggregated for purposes of reporting share ownership information are Draper Associates, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Fund VIII, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Fund IX, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Growth Fund 2006, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners VIII, LLC, Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners IX, LLC and Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners Growth Fund 2006, LLC. Josh Stein, a member of our board of directors, is a Managing Director of Draper Fisher Jurvetson.
(2) Affiliates of Meritech Capital Partners holding our securities whose shares are aggregated for purposes of reporting share ownership information are Meritech Capital Partners IV L.P. and Meritech Capital Affiliates IV L.P.

 

121


Table of Contents

Series D-2 Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock Financing

From October 2011 through March 2012, we sold an aggregate of 3,529,927 shares of our Series D-2 redeemable convertible preferred stock at a purchase price of $9.0657 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $32,001,260, pursuant to our Series D-2 redeemable convertible preferred stock financing. The following table summarizes purchases of our Series D-2 redeemable convertible preferred stock by related persons:

 

Stockholder

   Shares of
Series D-2
Redeemable
Convertible

Preferred Stock
     Total Purchase
Price
 

Entities affiliated with Bessemer Venture Partners (1)

     1,654,588       $ 14,999,999   

 

(1) Affiliates of Bessemer Venture Partners holding our securities whose shares are aggregated for purposes of reporting share ownership information are Bessemer Venture Partners VIII L.P. and Bessemer Venture Partners VIII Institutional L.P.

Concurrently with our Series D-2 redeemable convertible preferred stock financing, we entered into a stock purchase agreement pursuant to which entities affiliated with Draper Fisher Jurvetson and U.S. Venture Partners IX, L.P. sold an aggregate of 350,514 shares of our Series A redeemable convertible preferred stock, 1,345,970 shares of our Series B redeemable convertible preferred stock and 509,633 shares of our Series C redeemable convertible preferred stock to entities affiliated with Bessemer Venture Partners at a purchase price of $9.0657 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $19,999,995.

Series E Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock Financing

From August 2012 through October 2012, we sold an aggregate of 11,454,838 shares of our Series E redeemable convertible preferred stock at a purchase price of $13.0949 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $149,999,959, pursuant to our Series E redeemable convertible preferred stock financing. The following table summarizes purchases of our Series E redeemable convertible preferred stock by related persons:

 

Stockholder

   Shares of
Series E
Redeemable
Convertible

Preferred Stock
     Total Purchase
Price
 

Entities affiliated with General Atlantic (1)

     7,636,560       $ 99,999,990   

Entities affiliated with Bessemer Venture Partners (2)

     916,386         11,999,984   

Entities affiliated with Draper Fisher Jurvetson (3)

     229,097         3,000,003   

Scale Venture Partners III, L.P. (4)

     38,183         500,003   

 

(1) Affiliates of General Atlantic holding our securities whose shares are aggregated for purposes of reporting share ownership information are General Atlantic Partners 90, L.P., GAP Coinvestments III, LLC, GAP Coinvestments IV, LLC, GAP Coinvestments CDA, L.P. and GAPCO GmbH & Co. KG. Gary Reiner, a member of our board of directors, is an Operating Partner of General Atlantic.
(2) Affiliates of Bessemer Venture Partners holding our securities whose shares are aggregated for purposes of reporting share ownership information are Bessemer Venture Partners VIII L.P. and Bessemer Venture Partners VIII Institutional L.P.
(3) Affiliates of Draper Fisher Jurvetson holding our securities whose shares are aggregated for purposes of reporting share ownership information are Draper Associates, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Fund VIII, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Fund IX, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Growth Fund 2006, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners VIII, LLC, Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners IX, LLC and Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners Growth Fund 2006, LLC. Josh Stein, a member of our board of directors, is a Managing Director of Draper Fisher Jurvetson.
(4) Rory O’Driscoll, a member of our board of directors, is a Managing Director of Scale Venture Partners.

In connection with our Series E redeemable convertible preferred stock financing, we entered into a stock purchase agreement pursuant to which certain holders of our capital stock, including Aaron Levie, Dan Levin and Dylan Smith, each of whom is a member of our board of directors and an executive officer, sold an aggregate of 488,340 shares of our common stock at a purchase price of $12.00 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $5,860,080.

 

122


Table of Contents

Series E-1 Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock Financing

From October 2013 through January 2014, we sold an aggregate of 5,554,440 shares of our Series E-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock at a purchase price of $18.00 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $99,979,920, pursuant to our Series E-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock financing. The following table summarizes purchases of our Series E-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock by related persons:

 

Stockholder

   Shares of
Series E-1
Redeemable
Convertible

Preferred Stock
     Total Purchase
Price
 

Entities affiliated with Draper Fisher Jurvetson (1)

     277,778       $ 5,000,004   

Entities affiliated with Bessemer Venture Partners (2)

     260,000         4,680,000   

 

(1) Affiliates of Draper Fisher Jurvetson holding our securities whose shares are aggregated for purposes of reporting share ownership information are Draper Associates, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Fund VIII, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Fund IX, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Growth Fund 2006, L.P., Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners VIII, LLC, Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners IX, LLC and Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners Growth Fund 2006, LLC. Josh Stein, a member of our board of directors, is a Managing Director of Draper Fisher Jurvetson.
(2) Affiliates of Bessemer Venture Partners holding our securities whose shares are aggregated for purposes of reporting share ownership information are Bessemer Venture Partners VIII L.P. and Bessemer Venture Partners VIII Institutional L.P.

Investors’ Rights Agreement

We are party to an investors’ rights agreement which provides, among other things, that certain holders of our capital stock, including entities affiliated with Draper Fisher Jurvetson, U.S. Venture Partners IX, L.P., entities affiliated with General Atlantic, Scale Venture Partners III, L.P., entities affiliated with Bessemer Venture Partners, entities affiliated with Meritech Capital Partners, Aaron Levie, our Chairman and Chief Executive Officer, and Dylan Smith, our Chief Financial Officer, have the right to demand that we file a registration statement or request that their shares of our capital stock be included on a registration statement that we are otherwise filing. See the section titled “Description of Capital Stock—Registration Rights” for additional information regarding these registration rights.

Right of First Refusal

Pursuant to our equity compensation plans and certain agreements with our stockholders, including a right of first refusal and co-sale agreement with certain holders of our capital stock, including entities affiliated with Draper Fisher Jurvetson, U.S. Venture Partners IX, L.P., entities affiliated with General Atlantic, Scale Venture Partners III, L.P., entities affiliated with Bessemer Venture Partners, entities affiliated with Meritech Capital Partners, Aaron Levie, our Chairman and Chief Executive Officer, Dylan Smith, our Chief Financial Officer, and Dan Levin, our President and Chief Operating Officer, we or our assignees have a right to purchase shares of our capital stock which stockholders propose to sell to other parties. This right will terminate upon the completion of this offering. Since January 1, 2010, we have waived our right of first refusal in connection with the sale of certain shares of our capital stock, including sales by certain of our executive officers, resulting in the purchase of such shares by certain of our stockholders, including related persons. See the section titled “Principal Stockholders” for additional information regarding beneficial ownership of our capital stock.

Voting Agreement

We are party to a voting agreement under which certain holders of our capital stock, including entities affiliated with Draper Fisher Jurvetson, U.S. Venture Partners IX, L.P., entities affiliated with General Atlantic, Scale Venture Partners III, L.P., entities affiliated with Bessemer Venture Partners, entities affiliated with Meritech Capital Partners, Aaron Levie, our Chairman and Chief Executive Officer, Dylan Smith, our Chief Financial Officer, and Dan Levin, our President and Chief Operating Officer, have agreed as to the manner in

 

123


Table of Contents

which they will vote their shares of our capital stock on certain matters, including with respect to the election of directors. Upon the completion of this offering, the voting agreement will terminate and none of our stockholders will have any special rights regarding the election or designation of members of our board of directors.

Limitation of Liability and Indemnification of Officers and Directors

Prior to the completion of this offering, we expect to adopt an amended and restated certificate of incorporation, which will become effective immediately prior to the completion of this offering, and which will contain provisions that limit the liability of our directors for monetary damages to the fullest extent permitted by Delaware law. Consequently, our directors will not be personally liable to us or our stockholders for monetary damages for any breach of fiduciary duties as directors, except liability for the following:

 

    any breach of their duty of loyalty to our company or our stockholders;

 

    any act or omission not in good faith or that involves intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law;

 

    unlawful payments of dividends or unlawful stock repurchases or redemptions as provided in Section 174 of the Delaware General Corporation Law; or

 

    any transaction from which they derived an improper personal benefit.

Any amendment to, or repeal of, these provisions will not eliminate or reduce the effect of these provisions in respect of any act, omission or claim that occurred or arose prior to that amendment or repeal. If the Delaware General Corporation Law is amended to provide for further limitations on the personal liability of directors of corporations, then the personal liability of our directors will be further limited to the greatest extent permitted by the Delaware General Corporation Law.

In addition, prior to the completion of this offering, we expect to adopt amended and restated bylaws which will provide that we will indemnify, to the fullest extent permitted by law, any person who is or was a party or is threatened to be made a party to any action, suit or proceeding by reason of the fact that he or she is or was one of our directors or officers or is or was serving at our request as a director or officer of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust, or other enterprise. Our amended and restated bylaws are expected to provide that we may indemnify to the fullest extent permitted by law any person who is or was a party or is threatened to be made a party to any action, suit, or proceeding by reason of the fact that he or she is or was one of our employees or agents or is or was serving at our request as an employee or agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise. Our amended and restated bylaws will also provide that we must advance expenses incurred by or on behalf of a director or officer in advance of the final disposition of any action or proceeding, subject to very limited exceptions.

Further, we have entered into indemnification agreements with each of our directors and executive officers that may be broader than the specific indemnification provisions contained in the Delaware General Corporation Law. These indemnification agreements require us, among other things, to indemnify our directors and executive officers against liabilities that may arise by reason of their status or service. These indemnification agreements also require us to advance all expenses incurred by the directors and executive officers in investigating or defending any such action, suit, or proceeding. We believe that these agreements are necessary to attract and retain qualified individuals to serve as directors and executive officers.

The limitation of liability and indemnification provisions that are expected to be included in our amended and restated certificate of incorporation, amended restated bylaws, and in indemnification agreements that we have entered into with our directors and executive officers may discourage stockholders from bringing a lawsuit against our directors and executive officers for breach of their fiduciary duties. They may also reduce the likelihood of derivative litigation against our directors and executive officers, even though an action, if successful, might benefit us and other stockholders. Further, a stockholder’s investment may be adversely

 

124


Table of Contents

affected to the extent that we pay the costs of settlement and damage awards against directors and executive officers as required by these indemnification provisions. At present, we are not aware of any pending litigation or proceeding involving any person who is or was one of our directors, officers, employees or other agents or is or was serving at our request as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise, for which indemnification is sought, nor are we aware of any threatened litigation that may result in claims for indemnification.

We have obtained insurance policies under which, subject to the limitations of the policies, coverage is provided to our directors and executive officers against loss arising from claims made by reason of breach of fiduciary duty or other wrongful acts as a director or executive officer, including claims relating to public securities matters, and to us with respect to payments that may be made by us to these directors and executive officers pursuant to our indemnification obligations or otherwise as a matter of law.

Certain of our non-employee directors may, through their relationships with their employers, be insured and/or indemnified against certain liabilities incurred in their capacity as members of our board of directors.

Policies and Procedures for Related Person Transactions

Our audit committee will have the primary responsibility for reviewing and approving transactions with related persons. Our audit committee charter provides that our audit committee shall review and approve in advance any related person transactions.

Prior to the completion of this offering, we intend to adopt a formal written policy providing that we are not permitted to enter into any transaction that exceeds $120,000 and in which any related person has a direct or indirect material interest without the consent of our audit committee. In approving or rejecting any such transaction, our audit committee is to consider the relevant facts and circumstances available and deemed relevant to our audit committee, including whether the transaction is on terms no less favorable than terms generally available to an unaffiliated third party under the same or similar circumstances and the extent of the related person’s interest in the transaction.

 

125


Table of Contents

PRINCIPAL STOCKHOLDERS

The following table sets forth certain information with respect to the beneficial ownership of our capital stock as of February 28, 2014, and as adjusted to reflect the sale of our Class A common stock offered by us in this offering, for:

 

    each person or group of affiliated persons known by us to be the beneficial owner of more than 5% of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock;

 

    each of our named executive officers;

 

    each of our directors; and

 

    all of our current executive officers and directors as a group.

We have determined beneficial ownership in accordance with the rules and regulations of the SEC, and the information is not necessarily indicative of beneficial ownership for any other purpose. Except as indicated by the footnotes below, we believe, based on information furnished to us, that the persons and entities named in the table below have sole voting and sole investment power with respect to all shares of our capital stock that they beneficially own, subject to applicable community property laws.

Applicable percentage ownership prior to the offering is based on no shares of our Class A common stock and 90,434,163 shares of our Class B common stock outstanding as of February 28, 2014, assuming the automatic conversion of all outstanding shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock (excluding the Net Exercise Warrant) into shares of our Class B common stock. Applicable percentage ownership after the offering is based on              shares of our Class A common stock and 90,434,163 shares of our Class B common stock outstanding immediately after the completion of this offering, assuming that the underwriters will not exercise their over-allotment option. In computing the number of shares of capital stock beneficially owned by a person and the percentage ownership of such person, we deemed to be outstanding all shares of our capital stock subject to options held by the person that are currently exercisable or exercisable within 60 days of February 28, 2014 and issuable upon the vesting of RSUs held by the person within 60 days of February 28, 2014. However, we did not deem such shares of our capital stock outstanding for the purpose of computing the percentage ownership of any other person.

Unless otherwise indicated, the address of each beneficial owner listed in the table below is c/o Box, Inc., 4440 El Camino Real, Los Altos, California 94022.

 

     Beneficial Ownership
Prior to the Offering
    Beneficial Ownership
After the Offering
   Percent of
Total Voting
Power After
the

Offering

Name of Beneficial Owner

   Number      Percent     Number    Percent   

5% Stockholders:

             

Entities affiliated with Draper Fisher Jurvetson (1)

     23,016,047         25.5        

U.S. Venture Partners IX, L.P. (2)

     11,713,775         13.0           

Entities affiliated with General Atlantic (3)

     7,636,560         8.4           

Scale Venture Partners III, L.P. (4)

     6,711,857         7.4           

Entities affiliated with Bessemer Venture Partners (5)

     5,037,091         5.6           

Entities affiliated with Meritech Capital Partners (6)

     4,609,497         5.1           

Named Executive Officers and Directors:

             

Aaron Levie (7)

     3,764,285         4.1           

Dan Levin (8)

     1,823,372         2.0           

Dylan Smith (9)

     1,667,448         1.8           

Dana Evan (10)

     160,000         *           

Steven Krausz (11)

     11,713,775         13.0           

Rory O’Driscoll (12)

     6,711,857         7.4           

Gary Reiner

                       

Josh Stein (13)

     23,016,047         25.5           

Padmasree Warrior

                       

All current executive officers and directors as a group (11 persons) (14)

     49,069,284         53.2           

 

126


Table of Contents

 

* Represents beneficial ownership of less than one percent (1%).
(1) Consists of (i) 14,904,281 shares held of record by Draper Fisher Jurvetson Fund VIII, L.P. (Fund VIII); (ii) 4,660,560 shares held of record by Draper Fisher Jurvetson Fund IX, L.P. (Fund IX); (iii) 1,490,740 shares held of record by Draper Associates, L.P. (DALP); (iv) 1,390,544 shares held of record by Draper Fisher Jurvetson Growth Fund 2006, L.P. (Growth Fund); (v) 331,206 shares held of record by Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners VIII, LLC (Partners VIII); (vi) 126,295 shares held of record by Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners IX, LLC (Partners IX); and (vii) 112,421 shares held of record by Draper Fisher Jurvetson Partners Growth Fund 2006, LLC (Partners Growth). Timothy C. Draper, John H.N. Fisher, and Stephen T. Jurvetson, as the managing directors of the general partner entities of Fund VIII and Fund IX and managing members of Partners VIII and Partners IX share voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares held by Fund VIII, Fund IX, Partners VIII and Partners IX. Mark W. Bailey, Mr. Fisher and Barry M. Schuler, as the managing directors of the general partner of Growth Fund, share voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares held by Growth Fund. Any three of Messrs. Bailey, Draper, Fisher and Jurvetson and Mr. Schuler, as the managing members of Partners Growth, share voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares held by Partners Growth. Mr. Draper, as the President of Draper Associates, Inc., the general partner of DALP, shares voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares held by DALP. The address for each of these entities is c/o Draper Fisher Jurvetson, 2882 Sand Hill Road, Suite 150, Menlo Park, California 94025.
(2) Consists of 11,713,775 shares held of record by U.S. Venture Partners IX, L.P. (USVP IX). Presidio Management Group IX, L.L.C. (PMG IX), the general partner of USVP IX, has sole voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares held by USVP IX. Irwin Federman, Steven Krausz, David Liddle, Paul Matteucci, Jonathan Root, Casey Tansey and Philip Young, the managing members of PMG IX, share voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares held by USVP IX. The address for each of these entities is c/o U.S. Venture Partners, 2735 Sand Hill Road, Menlo Park, California 94025.
(3) Consists of (i) 7,076,139 shares held of record by General Atlantic Partners 90, L.P. (GAP 90); (ii) 18,627 shares held of record by GAP Coinvestments CDA, L.P. (GAPCO CDA); (iii) 441,949 shares held of record by GAP Coinvestments III, LLC (GAPCO III); (iv) 82,194 shares held of record by GAP Coinvestments IV, LLC (GAPCO IV); and (v) 17,651 shares held of record by GAPCO GmbH & Co. KG (GAPCO KG, together with GAP 90, GAPCO CDA, GAPCO III and GAPCO IV, the GA Funds). The general partner of GAP 90 is General Atlantic GenPar, L.P. (GA GenPar) and the general partner of GA GenPar is General Atlantic LLC (GA LLC). GA LLC is the managing member of GAPCO III and GAPCO IV. GA LLC is also the general partner of GAPCO CDA. The general partner of GAPCO KG is GAPCO Management GmbH (GAPCO Management). The Managing Directors of GA LLC control the voting and dispositive decisions made by GAPCO KG and GAPCO Management. There are 23 Managing Directors of GA LLC and they may be deemed to share voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares held by the GA Funds. The Managing Directors of GA LLC are William E. Ford, Steven A. Denning, John D. Bernstein, J. Frank Brown, Gabriel Caillaux, Mark F. Dzialga, Cory Eaves, Martin Escobari, Patricia L. Hedley, David C. Hodgson, Rene M. Kern, Jonathan Korngold, Christopher G. Lanning, Jeff Leng, Anton J. Levy, Adrianna C. Ma, Thomas J. Murphy, Sandeep Naik, Andrew C. Pearson, Brett B. Rochkind, David A. Rosenstein, Philip P. Trahanas and Robbert Vorhoff. GA LLC, GA GenPar, GAP 90, GAPCO III, GAPCO IV, GAPCO CDA and GAPCO KG and GAPCO Management are a “group” within the meaning of Rule 13d-5 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended. The address of the General Atlantic entities (other than GAPCO KG and GAPCO Management) is c/o General Atlantic Service Company, LLC, 55 East 52nd Street, 32nd Floor, New York, New York 10055. The address of GAPCO KG and GAPCO Management is c/o General Atlantic GmbH, Maximilianstrasse 35b, 5th floor, 80539 Munich, Germany.
(4) Consists of 6,711,857 shares held of record by Scale Venture Partners III, L.P. (SVP III). Scale Venture Management III, LLC (SVM III), the general partner of SVP III, has sole voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares held by SVP III. Stacey Bishop, Kate Mitchell, Rory O’Driscoll and Robert Theis, the managing members of SVM III, share voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares held by SVP III. The address for each of these entities is c/o Scale Venture Partners, 950 Tower Lane, Suite 700, Foster City, California 94404.
(5) Consists of (i) 2,750,252 shares held of record by Bessemer Venture Partners VIII Institutional L.P. and (ii) 2,286,839 shares held of record by Bessemer Venture Partners VIII L.P. (collectively, the BVP Funds). Each of Deer VIII & Co. L.P. (Deer VIII L.P.), the general partner of the BVP Funds, and Deer VIII & Co. Ltd. (Deer VIII Ltd.), the general partner of Deer VIII L.P., may be deemed to have voting and dispositive power over the shares held by the BVP Funds. J. Edmund Colloton, David J. Cowan, Byron B. Deeter, Robert P. Goodman, Jeremy S. Levine and Robert M. Stavis are the directors of Deer VIII Ltd. Investment and voting decisions with respect to the shares held by the BVP Funds are made by the directors of Deer VIII Ltd. acting as an investment committee. No stockholder, partner, director, officer, manager, member or employee of Deer VIII L.P. or Deer VIII Ltd. has beneficial ownership (within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 promulgated under the Exchange Act) of any shares held by the BVP Funds. The address for each of these entities is c/o Bessemer Venture Partners, 1865 Palmer Avenue, Suite 104, Larchmont, New York 10538.
(6) Consists of (i) 4,498,408 shares held of record by Meritech Capital Partners IV L.P. (MCP IV); and (ii) 111,089 shares held of record by Meritech Capital Affiliates IV L.P. (MCA IV). Meritech Capital Associates IV L.L.C. (MCA LLC) is the general partner of MCP IV and MCA IV. George H. Bischof, Michael B. Gordon, Paul S. Madera, Craig D. Sherman and Robert D. Ward are the managing members of MCA LLC and share voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares held by MCP IV and MCA IV. The address for each of these entities is c/o Meritech Capital Partners, 245 Lytton Avenue, Suite 125, Palo Alto, California 94301.
(7) Consists of (i) 2,600,372 shares held of record by Mr. Levie; and (ii) 1,163,913 shares exercisable within 60 days of February 28, 2014, all of which are fully vested as of such date.
(8) Consists of (i) 1,242,122 shares held of record by Daniel J. Levin and Naomi J. Andrews, as Trustees of the Levin/Andrews Family Trust dated 9/18/99; (ii) 156,250 shares held of record by Daniel J. Levin, as Trustee of the Daniel Levin GRAT dated 12/10/13; (iii) 156,250 shares held of record by Naomi J. Andrews, as Trustee of the Naomi J. Andrews GRAT dated 12/10/13; and (iv) 268,750 shares exercisable within 60 days of February 28, 2014, all of which are fully vested as of such date.

 

127


Table of Contents
(9) Consists of (i) 1,401,545 shares held of record by Mr. Smith, of which 21,487 shares may be repurchased by us at the original purchase price of $0.29 within 60 days of February 28, 2014; and (ii) 265,903 shares exercisable within 60 days of February 28, 2014, all of which are fully vested as of such date.
(10) Consists of 160,000 shares held of record by Ms. Evan, of which 70,000 shares may be repurchased by us at the original purchase price of $1.16 within 60 days of February 28, 2014.
(11) Consists of the shares listed in footnote (2) above, which are held by USVP IX. Mr. Krausz is a managing member at U.S. Venture Partners and shares voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares held by USVP IX.
(12) Consists of the shares listed in footnote (4) above, which are held by SVP III. Mr. O’Driscoll is a managing member at SVM III and shares voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares held by SVP III.
(13) Consists of the shares listed in footnote (1) above, which are held by entities affiliated with Draper Fisher Jurvetson. Mr. Stein is a managing director at Draper Fisher Jurvetson and shares voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares held by the entities affiliated with Draper Fisher Jurvetson.
(14) Consists of (i) 47,308,218 shares beneficially owned by our current executive officers and directors, of which 166,487 shares may be repurchased by us at the original purchase price within 60 days of February 28, 2014; and (ii) 1,761,066 shares subject to options exercisable within 60 days of February 28, 2014, all of which are fully vested as of such date.

 

128


Table of Contents

DESCRIPTION OF CAPITAL STOCK

General

The following is a summary of the rights of our common stock and preferred stock and certain provisions of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws as they will be in effect upon the completion of this offering. This summary does not purport to be complete and is qualified in its entirety by the provisions of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws, copies of which will be filed as exhibits to the registration statement of which this prospectus is a part.

Immediately following the completion of this offering, our authorized capital stock will consist of              shares, $0.0001 par value per share, of which:

 

                 shares are designated as Class A common stock;

 

                 shares are designated as Class B common stock;

 

                 shares are designated as common stock; and

 

                 shares are designated as preferred stock.

As of January 31, 2014, there were no outstanding shares of our Class A common stock and 90,193,539 outstanding shares of our Class B common stock, held by approximately 547 stockholders of record, and no outstanding shares of preferred stock, assuming the automatic conversion of all outstanding shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock (excluding the Net Exercise Warrant) into shares of our Class B common stock effective immediately prior to the completion of this offering.

As of January 31, 2014, up to 18,652,375 shares of our Class B common stock will be issuable after this offering upon the exercise or vesting of outstanding stock options or RSUs.

Class A Common Stock and Class B Common Stock

Prior to the completion of this offering, we had two classes of common stock: Class A common stock and Class B common stock. The rights of the holders of our Class A common stock and Class B common stock were identical except with respect to voting. The holders of our Class A common stock were entitled to one vote per share, and holders of our Class B common stock had no voting rights.

Upon the completion of this offering, we will have authorized a new class of Class A common stock and a new class of Class B common stock. All currently outstanding shares of our Existing Class A common stock, Existing Class B common stock and redeemable convertible preferred stock (including shares to be issued upon the exercise of the Net Exercise Warrant immediately prior to the completion of this offering) will convert into shares of our new Class B common stock. In addition, our RSUs and all options to purchase shares of our capital stock outstanding prior to the completion of this offering will become eligible to be settled in or exercisable for shares of our new Class B common stock.

Unless otherwise indicated, other than in our consolidated financial statements, references in this prospectus to our Class A common stock and Class B common stock are to our new Class A common stock and new Class B common stock, respectively. We refer to our Class A common stock prior to the completion of this offering as “Existing Class A common stock” and our Class B common stock prior to the completion of this offering as “Existing Class B common stock.”

Voting Rights

The holders of our Class A common stock are entitled to one vote per share, and holders of our Class B common stock are entitled to 10 votes per share. The holders of our Class A common stock and Class B common

 

129


Table of Contents

stock will generally vote together as a single class on all matters submitted to a vote of our stockholders, unless otherwise required by Delaware law or our amended and restated certificate of incorporation. Delaware law could require either holders of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock to vote separately as a single class in the following circumstances:

 

    if we were to seek to amend our amended and restated certificate of incorporation to increase or decrease the par value of a class of our capital stock, then that class would be required to vote separately to approve the proposed amendment; and

 

    if we were to seek to amend our amended and restated certificate of incorporation in a manner that alters or changes the powers, preferences or special rights of a class of our capital stock in a manner that affected its holders adversely, then that class would be required to vote separately to approve the proposed amendment.

Our stockholders do not have the ability to cumulate votes for the election of directors. Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws provide for a classified board of directors consisting of three classes of approximately equal size, each class serving staggered three-year terms. Only one will be elected at each annual meeting of our stockholders, with the other classes continuing for the remainder of their respective three-year terms.

No Preemptive or Similar Rights

Our common stock is not entitled to preemptive rights and is not subject to conversion, redemption or sinking fund provisions.

Right to Receive Liquidation Distributions

Upon our dissolution, liquidation or winding-up, the assets legally available for distribution to our stockholders are distributable ratably among the holders of our common stock, subject to prior satisfaction of all outstanding debt and liabilities and the preferential rights and payment of liquidation preferences, if any, on any outstanding shares of preferred stock.

Conversion

Each share of our Class B common stock is convertible at any time at the option of the holder into one share of our Class A common stock. In addition, each share of our Class B common stock will convert automatically into one share of our Class A common stock upon any transfer, whether or not for value, except for certain transfers described in our amended and restated certificate of incorporation, including, without limitation, transfers for tax and estate planning purposes, so long as the transferring holder of Class B common stock continues to hold exclusive voting and dispositive power with respect to the shares transferred.

Once transferred and converted into a share of our Class A common stock, the converted share of our Class B common stock will not be reissued. Following the conversion of all outstanding shares of our Class A common stock and Class B common stock into a single class of common stock, no further shares of our Class A common stock or our Class B common stock will be issued.

Preferred Stock

Upon the completion of this offering, no shares of our preferred stock will be outstanding. Pursuant to our amended and restated certificate of incorporation, our board of directors will have the authority, without further action by the stockholders, to issue from time to time up to              shares of preferred stock in one or more series. Our board of directors may designate the rights, preferences, privileges and restrictions of the preferred stock, including dividend rights, conversion rights, voting rights, redemption rights, liquidation preference,

 

130


Table of Contents

sinking fund terms, and the number of shares constituting any series or the designation of any series. The issuance of preferred stock could have the effect of restricting dividends on our common stock, diluting the voting power of our common stock, impairing the liquidation rights of our common stock, or delaying, deterring, or preventing a change in control. Such issuance could have the effect of decreasing the market price of our Class A common stock. We currently have no plans to issue any shares of preferred stock.

Options

As of January 31, 2014, we had outstanding options to purchase an aggregate of 18,427,075 shares of our Class B common stock, with a weighted-average exercise price of approximately $3.65 per share, under our equity compensation plans.

RSUs

As of January 31, 2014, we had outstanding 225,300 shares of our Class B common stock issuable upon the vesting of RSUs under our equity compensation plans.

Registration Rights

After the completion of this offering, certain holders of our Class B common stock will be entitled to rights with respect to the registration of their shares under the Securities Act. These registration rights are contained in our Seventh Amended and Restated Investors’ Rights Agreement (IRA) dated as of October 15, 2013. We and certain holders of our redeemable convertible preferred stock are parties to the IRA. With respect to certain of our stockholders, the registration rights set forth in the IRA will expire five years following the completion of this offering, or, with respect to any particular stockholder, when such stockholder is able to sell all of its shares entitled to registration rights pursuant to Rule 144 of the Securities Act during any 90-day period. With respect to other stockholders, the registration rights set forth in the IRA will expire when, following the completion of this offering, such stockholders cease to be an affiliate (as defined pursuant to Rule 405 of the Exchange Act) of us and hold less than five percent of the outstanding shares of our common stock. We will pay the registration expenses (other than underwriting discounts, commissions and stock transfer taxes) of the holders of the shares registered pursuant to the registrations described below. In an underwritten offering, the underwriters have the right, subject to specified conditions, to limit the number of shares such holders may include. In addition, in connection with this offering, we expect that each stockholder that has registration rights will agree not to sell or otherwise dispose of any securities without the prior written consent of the underwriters for a period of 180 days after the date of this prospectus. See the section titled “Underwriters” for additional information regarding such restrictions.

Demand Registration Rights

After the completion of this offering, the holders of up to 80,944,854 shares of our Class B common stock will be entitled to certain demand registration rights. At any time beginning on the earlier of one year after the effective date of this offering or August 7, 2015, certain of our stockholders or the holders of at least a majority of the shares entitled to registration rights then outstanding can request that we register the offer and sale of their shares. We are obligated to effect only three such registrations. Such request for registration must cover the registration of at least 20% of the initiating stockholders’ shares entitled to registration rights or the registration of shares with an anticipated aggregate public offering price of at least $2,000,000. If we determine that it would be materially detrimental to us and our stockholders to effect such a demand registration, we have the right to defer such registration, not more than once in any 12-month period, for a period of up to 90 days.

Piggyback Registration Rights

After the completion of this offering, if we propose to register any of our securities under the Securities Act, the holders of up to 76,904,437 shares of our Class B common stock will be entitled to certain “piggyback”

 

131


Table of Contents

registration rights allowing the holders to include their shares in such registration, subject to certain marketing and other limitations. As a result, if we propose to file a registration statement under the Securities Act, the holders of these shares are entitled to notice of the registration and have the right, subject to certain limitations, to include their shares in the registration.

S-3 Registration Rights

After the completion of this offering, the holders of up to 80,944,854 shares of our Class B common stock will be entitled to certain Form S-3 registration rights. The holders of these shares then outstanding may make a written request that we register the offer and sale of their shares on a registration statement on Form S-3 if we are eligible to file a registration statement on Form S-3 so long as the request covers securities the anticipated aggregate public offering price of which is at least $500,000. These stockholders may make an unlimited number of requests for registration on Form S-3. However, we will not be required to effect a registration on Form S-3 if we have effected two such registrations within the 12-month period preceding the date of the request. Additionally, if we determine that it would be materially detrimental to us and our stockholders to effect such a registration, we have the right to defer such registration, not more than once in any 12-month period, for a period of up to 60 days.

Anti-Takeover Effects of Delaware Law and Our Certificate of Incorporation and Bylaws

Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws to be effective upon the completion of this offering will contain provisions that could have the effect of delaying, deferring, or discouraging another party from acquiring control of us. These provisions and certain provisions of Delaware law, which are summarized below, could discourage takeovers, coercive or otherwise. These provisions are also designed, in part, to encourage persons seeking to acquire control of us to negotiate first with our board of directors. We believe that the benefits of increased protection of our potential ability to negotiate with an unfriendly or unsolicited acquirer outweigh the disadvantages of discouraging a proposal to acquire us.

Undesignated Preferred Stock . As discussed above under “—Preferred Stock,” our board of directors will have the ability to designate and issue preferred stock with voting or other rights or preferences that could deter hostile takeovers or delay changes in our control or management.

Board of Directors Vacancies . Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws will authorize only our board of directors to fill vacant directorships, including newly created seats. In addition, the number of directors constituting our board of directors will be permitted to be set only by a resolution adopted by a majority vote of our entire board of directors. These provisions would prevent a stockholder from increasing the size of our board of directors and then gaining control of our board of directors by filling the resulting vacancies with its own nominees. This will make it more difficult to change the composition of our board of directors and will promote continuity of management.

Classified Board . Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws will provide that our board of directors is classified into three classes of directors. A third party may be discouraged from making a tender offer or otherwise attempting to obtain control of us as it is more difficult and time consuming for stockholders to replace a majority of the directors on a classified board of directors. See the section titled “Management—Classified Board of Directors.”

Limits on Ability of Stockholders to Act by Written Consent or Call a Special Meeting . Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation will provide that our stockholders may not act by written consent. This limit on the ability of stockholders to act by written consent may lengthen the amount of time required to take stockholder actions. As a result, the holders of a majority of our capital stock would not be able to amend our amended and restated bylaws or remove directors without holding a meeting of stockholders called in accordance with our amended and restated bylaws.

 

132


Table of Contents

In addition, our amended and restated bylaws will provide that special meetings of the stockholders may be called only by the chairperson of our board of directors, the chief executive officer, the president (in the absence of a chief executive officer) or our board of directors. A stockholder may not call a special meeting, which may delay the ability of our stockholders to force consideration of a proposal or for holders controlling a majority of our capital stock to take any action, including the removal of directors.

Requirements for Advance Notification of Stockholder Nominations and Proposals . Our amended and restated bylaws will establish advance notice procedures with respect to stockholder proposals and the nomination of candidates for election as directors, other than nominations made by or at the direction of our board of directors or a committee of our board of directors. These advance notice procedures may have the effect of precluding the conduct of certain business at a meeting if the proper procedures are not followed and may also discourage or deter a potential acquirer from conducting a solicitation of proxies to elect its own slate of directors or otherwise attempt to obtain control of our company.

Delaware Anti-Takeover Statute . We will be subject to the provisions of Section 203 of the Delaware General Corporation Law regulating corporate takeovers. In general, Section 203 prohibits a publicly held Delaware corporation from engaging, under certain circumstances, in a business combination with an interested stockholder for a period of three years following the date the person became an interested stockholder unless:

 

    prior to the date of the transaction, our board of directors approved either the business combination or the transaction that resulted in the stockholder becoming an interested stockholder;

 

    upon completion of the transaction that resulted in the stockholder becoming an interested stockholder, the interested stockholder owned at least 85% of the voting stock of the corporation outstanding at the time the transaction commenced, excluding for purposes of determining the voting stock outstanding, but not the outstanding voting stock owned by the interested stockholder, (i) shares owned by persons who are directors and also officers and (ii) shares owned by employee stock plans in which employee participants do not have the right to determine confidentially whether shares held subject to the plan will be tendered in a tender or exchange offer; or

 

    at or subsequent to the date of the transaction, the business combination is approved by our board of directors and authorized at an annual or special meeting of stockholders, and not by written consent, by the affirmative vote of at least 66  2 3 % of the outstanding voting stock that is not owned by the interested stockholder.

Generally, a business combination includes a merger, asset or stock sale, or other transaction resulting in a financial benefit to the interested stockholder. An interested stockholder is a person who, together with affiliates and associates, owns or, within three years prior to the determination of interested stockholder status, did own 15% or more of a corporation’s outstanding voting stock. We expect the existence of this provision to have an anti-takeover effect with respect to transactions our board of directors does not approve in advance. We also anticipate that Section 203 may discourage attempts that might result in a premium over the market price for the shares of common stock held by stockholders.

The provisions of Delaware law and the provisions of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws could have the effect of discouraging others from attempting hostile takeovers, and as a consequence, they might also inhibit temporary fluctuations in the market price of our Class A common stock that often result from actual or rumored hostile takeover attempts. These provisions might also have the effect of preventing changes in our management. It is also possible that these provisions could make it more difficult to accomplish transactions that stockholders might otherwise deem to be in their best interests.

Transfer Agent and Registrar

Upon the completion of this offering, the transfer agent and registrar for our Class A common stock and Class B common stock will be             . The transfer agent’s address is             , and its telephone number is             .

 

133


Table of Contents

Limitations of Liability and Indemnification

See the section titled “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—Limitation of Liability and Indemnification of Officers and Directors.”

Exchange Listing

We intend to apply to list our Class A common stock on the NYSE under the symbol “BOX.”

 

134


Table of Contents

SHARES ELIGIBLE FOR FUTURE SALE

Prior to the completion of this offering, there has been no public market for shares of our capital stock. Future sales of substantial amounts of shares of our Class A common stock, including shares issued upon the exercise of outstanding options or the vesting of outstanding RSUs, in the public market after this offering, or the possibility of these sales occurring, could adversely affect the prevailing market price for our Class A common stock or impair our ability to raise equity capital.

Based on shares of our capital stock outstanding as of January 31, 2014, upon the completion of this offering, a total of              shares of Class A common stock and              shares of Class B common stock will be outstanding, assuming the automatic conversion of all outstanding shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock into shares of our Class B common stock immediately prior to the completion of this offering. Of these shares, all of the shares of our Class A common stock sold in this offering by us, plus any shares sold upon exercise of the underwriters’ over-allotment option, will be freely tradable in the public market without restriction or further registration under the Securities Act, unless these shares are held by “affiliates,” as that term is defined in Rule 144 under the Securities Act.

The remaining shares of our Class B common stock will be “restricted securities,” as that term is defined in Rule 144 under the Securities Act. These restricted securities are eligible for public sale only if they are registered under the Securities Act or if they qualify for an exemption from registration under Rules 144 or 701 under the Securities Act, which are summarized below.

Subject to the lock-up agreements described below and the provisions of Rule 144 under the Securities Act, as well as our insider trading policy, these restricted securities will be available for sale in the public market at various times beginning more than 180 days after the date of this prospectus.

Rule 144

In general, under Rule 144 as currently in effect, once we have been subject to public company reporting requirements for at least 90 days, a person who is not deemed to have been one of our affiliates for purposes of the Securities Act at any time during the 90 days preceding a sale and who has beneficially owned the shares of our capital stock proposed to be sold for at least six months, including the holding period of any prior owner other than our affiliates, is entitled to sell such shares without complying with the manner of sale, volume limitation, or notice provisions of Rule 144, subject to compliance with the public information requirements of Rule 144. If such a person has beneficially owned the shares of our capital stock proposed to be sold for at least one year, including the holding period of any prior owner other than our affiliates, then such person is entitled to sell such shares without complying with any of the requirements of Rule 144.

In general, under Rule 144, as currently in effect, our affiliates or persons selling shares of our capital stock on behalf of our affiliates are entitled to sell upon expiration of the lock-up agreements described below, within any three-month period beginning 90 days after the date of this prospectus, a number of shares that does not exceed the greater of:

 

    1% of the number of shares of our capital stock then outstanding, which will equal approximately              shares immediately after this offering; or

 

    the average weekly trading volume of our Class A common stock during the four calendar weeks preceding the filing of a notice on Form 144 with respect to such sale.

Sales under Rule 144 by our affiliates or persons selling shares of our capital stock on behalf of our affiliates are also subject to certain manner of sale provisions and notice requirements and to the availability of current public information about us.

 

135


Table of Contents

Rule 701

Rule 701 generally allows a stockholder who purchased shares of our capital stock pursuant to a written compensatory plan or contract and who is not deemed to have been an affiliate of our company during the immediately preceding 90 days to sell these shares in reliance upon Rule 144, but without being required to comply with the public information, holding period, volume limitation, or notice provisions of Rule 144. Rule 701 also permits affiliates of our company to sell their Rule 701 shares under Rule 144 without complying with the holding period requirements of Rule 144. However, all holders of Rule 701 shares are required to wait until 90 days after the date of this prospectus before selling such shares pursuant to Rule 701.

Lock-Up Agreements

We, our directors and executive officers, and other holders of our Class B common stock or securities exercisable for or convertible into our Class B common stock have agreed that, without the prior written consent of Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC and J. P. Morgan Securities LLC, on behalf of the underwriters, we and they will not, during the period ending 180 days after the date of this prospectus:

 

    offer, pledge, sell, contract to sell, sell any option or contract to purchase, purchase any option or contract to sell, grant any option, right or warrant to purchase, lend or otherwise transfer or dispose of, directly or indirectly, any shares of our Class A or Class B common stock or any securities convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for shares of our Class A or Class B common stock;

 

    file any registration statement with the Securities and Exchange Commission relating to the offering of any shares of our Class A or Class B common stock or any securities convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for our Class A or Class B common stock; or

 

    enter into any swap or other arrangement that transfers to another, in whole or in part, any of the economic consequences of ownership of our Class A or Class B common stock;

whether any such transaction described above is to be settled by delivery of shares of our Class A or Class B common stock or such other securities, in cash or otherwise. This agreement is subject to certain exceptions as set forth in the section titled “Underwriters.”

Registration Rights

After the completion of this offering, the holders of up to 80,944,854 shares of our Class B common stock will be entitled to rights with respect to the registration of these shares under the Securities Act. Registration of these shares under the Securities Act would result in these shares becoming fully tradable without restriction under the Securities Act immediately upon the effectiveness of the registration, except for shares purchased by affiliates. See the section titled “Description of Capital Stock—Registration Rights” for additional information.

Registration Statements on Form S-8

Upon the completion of this offering, we intend to file a registration statement on Form S-8 under the Securities Act to register all of the shares of our Class A common stock and Class B common stock issued or reserved for issuance under our equity incentive plans. Shares covered by this registration statement will be eligible for sale in the public market, upon the expiration or release from the terms of the lock-up agreements and subject to vesting of such shares.

 

136


Table of Contents

MATERIAL U.S. FEDERAL INCOME TAX CONSEQUENCES TO

NON-U.S. HOLDERS OF OUR COMMON STOCK

The following is a summary of the material U.S. federal income tax consequences to non-U.S. holders (as defined below) of the ownership and disposition of our Class A common stock, but does not purport to be a complete analysis of all the potential tax considerations relating thereto. This summary is based upon the provisions of the Code, Treasury regulations promulgated thereunder, administrative rulings and judicial decisions, all as of the date hereof. These authorities may be changed, possibly retroactively, so as to result in U.S. federal income tax consequences different from those set forth below. We have not sought any ruling from the Internal Revenue Service (IRS) with respect to the statements made and the conclusions reached in the following summary, and there can be no assurance that the IRS will agree with such statements and conclusions.

This summary also does not address the tax considerations arising under the laws of any non-U.S., state or local jurisdiction or under U.S. federal gift and estate tax laws, except to the limited extent set forth below. In addition, this discussion does not address the potential application of the Medicare contribution tax, the alternative minimum tax or any tax considerations applicable to an investor’s particular circumstances or to investors that may be subject to special tax rules, including, without limitation:

 

    banks, insurance companies or other financial institutions;

 

    tax-exempt organizations;

 

    controlled foreign corporations, passive foreign investment companies and corporations that accumulate earnings to avoid U.S. federal income tax;

 

    dealers in securities or currencies;

 

    traders in securities that elect to use a mark-to-market method of accounting for their securities holdings;

 

    persons that own, or are deemed to own, more than 5% of our capital stock (except to the extent specifically set forth below);

 

    certain former citizens or long-term residents of the United States;

 

    persons who hold our Class A common stock as a position in a hedging transaction, “straddle,” “conversion transaction” or other risk reduction transaction;

 

    persons who do not hold our Class A common stock as a capital asset within the meaning of Section 1221 of the Code; or

 

    persons deemed to sell our Class A common stock under the constructive sale provisions of the Code.

In addition, if a partnership or entity classified as a partnership for U.S. federal income tax purposes holds our Class A common stock, the tax treatment of a partner generally will depend on the status of the partner and upon the activities of the partnership. Accordingly, partnerships that hold our Class A common stock, and partners in such partnerships, should consult their tax advisors.

YOU ARE URGED TO CONSULT YOUR TAX ADVISOR WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATION OF THE U.S. FEDERAL INCOME TAX LAWS TO YOUR PARTICULAR SITUATION, AS WELL AS ANY TAX CONSEQUENCES OF THE PURCHASE, OWNERSHIP AND DISPOSITION OF OUR CLASS A COMMON STOCK ARISING UNDER THE U.S. FEDERAL ESTATE OR GIFT TAX RULES OR UNDER THE LAWS OF ANY STATE, LOCAL, NON-U.S. OR OTHER TAXING JURISDICTION OR UNDER ANY APPLICABLE TAX TREATY.

 

137


Table of Contents

Non-U.S. Holder Defined

For purposes of this discussion, you are a non-U.S. holder if you are any holder other than a partnership or other entity classified as a partnership for U.S. federal income tax purposes, or:

 

    an individual citizen or resident of the United States (for tax purposes);

 

    a corporation or other entity taxable as a corporation created or organized in the United States or under the laws of the United States or any political subdivision thereof;

 

    an estate whose income is subject to U.S. federal income tax regardless of its source; or

 

    a trust (x) whose administration is subject to the primary supervision of a U.S. court and which has one or more U.S. persons who have the authority to control all substantial decisions of the trust or (y) which has made a valid election to be treated as a U.S. person.

Distributions

We have not made any distributions on our Class A common stock. However, if we do make distributions on our Class A common stock, those payments will constitute dividends for U.S. tax purposes to the extent paid from our current or accumulated earnings and profits, as determined under U.S. federal income tax principles. To the extent those distributions exceed both our current and our accumulated earnings and profits, they will constitute a return of capital and will first reduce your basis in our Class A common stock, but not below zero, and then will be treated as gain from the sale of stock.

Any dividend paid to you generally will be subject to U.S. withholding tax either at a rate of 30% of the gross amount of the dividend or such lower rate as may be specified by an applicable income tax treaty. In order to receive a reduced treaty rate, you must provide us with an IRS Form W-8BEN (or successor form) or other appropriate version of IRS Form W-8 (or successor form), including a U.S. taxpayer identification number, certifying qualification for the reduced rate. A non-U.S. holder of shares of our Class A common stock eligible for a reduced rate of U.S. withholding tax pursuant to an income tax treaty may obtain a refund of any excess amounts withheld by filing an appropriate claim for refund with the IRS. If the non-U.S. holder holds the stock through a financial institution or other agent acting on the non-U.S. holder’s behalf, the non-U.S. holder will be required to provide appropriate documentation to the agent, which then will be required to provide certification to us or our paying agent, either directly or through other intermediaries.

Dividends received by you that are effectively connected with your conduct of a U.S. trade or business (and, if an income tax treaty applies, that are attributable to a permanent establishment or a fixed base maintained by you in the United States), are exempt from such withholding tax. In order to obtain this exemption, you must provide us with an IRS Form W-8ECI (or successor form) or other applicable IRS Form W-8 (or successor form) properly certifying such exemption. Such effectively connected dividends, although not subject to withholding tax, generally are taxed at the same graduated rates applicable to U.S. persons, net of certain deductions and credits. In addition, if you are a corporate non-U.S. holder, dividends you receive that are effectively connected with your conduct of a U.S. trade or business may also be subject to a branch profits tax at a rate of 30% or such lower rate as may be specified by an applicable income tax treaty.

Gain on Disposition of Our Class A Common Stock

Subject to the discussion below regarding backup withholding and foreign accounts, you generally will not be required to pay U.S. federal income tax on any gain realized upon the sale or other disposition of our Class A common stock unless:

 

    the gain is effectively connected with your conduct of a U.S. trade or business (and, if an income tax treaty applies, the gain is attributable to a permanent establishment or a fixed base maintained by you in the United States);

 

138


Table of Contents
    you are an individual who is present in the United States for a period or periods aggregating 183 days or more during the calendar year in which the sale or disposition occurs and certain other conditions are met; or

 

    our Class A common stock constitutes a U.S. real property interest by reason of our status as a “United States real property holding corporation” (USRPHC) for U.S. federal income tax purposes at any time within the shorter of the five-year period preceding your disposition of, or your holding period for, our Class A common stock.

We believe that we are not currently and will not become a USRPHC and the remainder of this discussion so assumes. However, because the determination of whether we are a USRPHC depends on the fair market value of our U.S. real property relative to the fair market value of our other business assets, there can be no assurance that we will not become a USRPHC in the future. Even if we become a USRPHC, however, as long as our Class A common stock is regularly traded on an established securities market, such Class A common stock will be treated as U.S. real property interests only if you actually or constructively hold more than 5% of such regularly traded Class A common stock at any time during the shorter of the five-year period preceding your disposition of, or your holding period for, our Class A common stock.

If you are a non-U.S. holder described in the first bullet above, you will be required to pay tax on the net gain derived from the sale under regular graduated U.S. federal income tax rates, and a corporate non-U.S. holder described in the first bullet above also may be subject to the branch profits tax at a 30% rate, or such lower rate as may be specified by an applicable income tax treaty. If you are an individual non-U.S. holder described in the second bullet above, you will be required to pay a flat 30% tax on the gain derived from the sale, which tax may be offset by U.S.-source capital losses for the year. You should consult any applicable income tax or other treaties that may provide for different rules.

Federal Estate Tax

Our Class A common stock beneficially owned by an individual who is not a citizen or resident of the United States (as defined for U.S. federal estate tax purposes) at the time of their death will generally be includable in the decedent’s gross estate for U.S. federal estate tax purposes, unless an applicable estate tax treaty provides otherwise. Such stock, therefore, may be subject to U.S. federal estate tax, unless an applicable estate tax or other treaty provides otherwise.

Backup Withholding and Information Reporting

Generally, we must report annually to the IRS the amount of dividends paid to you, your name and address, and the amount of tax withheld, if any. A similar report will be sent to you. Pursuant to applicable income tax treaties or other agreements, the IRS may make these reports available to tax authorities in your country of residence.

Payments of dividends on or of proceeds from the disposition of our Class A common stock made to you may be subject to additional information reporting and backup withholding at a current rate of 28% unless you establish an exemption, for example, by properly certifying your non-U.S. status on a Form W-8BEN or another appropriate version of IRS Form W-8. Notwithstanding the foregoing, backup withholding and information reporting may apply if either we or our paying agent has actual knowledge, or reason to know, that you are a U.S. person.

Backup withholding is not an additional tax; rather, the U.S. income tax liability of persons subject to backup withholding will be reduced by the amount of tax withheld. If withholding results in an overpayment of taxes, a refund or credit may generally be obtained from the IRS, provided that the required information is furnished to the IRS in a timely manner.

 

139


Table of Contents

Foreign Accounts

The Foreign Account Tax Compliance Act (FATCA) generally imposes a U.S. federal withholding tax of 30% on dividends on and the gross proceeds of a disposition of our Class A common stock, paid to a “foreign financial institution” (as specially defined under these rules), unless such institution enters into an agreement with the U.S. government, among other things, to withhold on certain payments and to collect and provide to the U.S. tax authorities substantial information regarding the U.S. account holders of such institution (which includes certain equity and debt holders of such institution, as well as certain account holders that are foreign entities with U.S. owners) or otherwise establishes an exemption. A U.S. federal withholding tax of 30% also applies to dividends and the gross proceeds of a disposition of our Class A common stock paid to a “non-financial foreign entity” (as specifically defined for purposes of these rules) unless such entity provides the withholding agent with a certification identifying certain substantial direct and indirect U.S. owners of the entity, certifies that there are none or otherwise establishes an exemption. The withholding provisions under FATCA will generally apply to dividends on our Class A common stock paid on or after July 1, 2014 and with respect to the gross proceeds of a sale or other disposition of our Class A common stock on or after January 1, 2017. Under certain circumstances, a non-U.S. holder might be eligible for refunds or credits of such taxes. An intergovernmental agreement between the United States and an applicable foreign country may modify the requirements described in this paragraph. Prospective investors are encouraged to consult with their own tax advisors regarding the possible implications of this legislation on their investment in our Class A common stock.

EACH PROSPECTIVE INVESTOR SHOULD CONSULT ITS OWN TAX ADVISOR REGARDING THE PARTICULAR U.S. FEDERAL, STATE AND LOCAL AND NON-U.S. TAX CONSEQUENCES OF PURCHASING, HOLDING AND DISPOSING OF OUR CLASS A COMMON STOCK, INCLUDING THE CONSEQUENCES OF ANY PROPOSED CHANGE IN APPLICABLE LAWS.

 

140


Table of Contents

UNDERWRITERS

Under the terms and subject to the conditions in an underwriting agreement dated the date of this prospectus, the underwriters named below, for whom Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC and J.P. Morgan Securities LLC are acting as representatives, have severally agreed to purchase, and we have agreed to sell to them, severally, the number of shares indicated below:

 

Underwriters

  

Number of

Shares

Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC

  

Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC

  

J.P. Morgan Securities LLC

  

BMO Capital Markets Corp.

  

Canaccord Genuity Inc.

  

Pacific Crest Securities LLC

  

Raymond James & Associates, Inc.

  

Wells Fargo Securities, LLC

  

Total

  

The underwriters and the representatives are collectively referred to as the “underwriters” and the “representatives,” respectively. The underwriters are offering the shares of our Class A common stock subject to their acceptance of the shares from us and subject to prior sale. The underwriting agreement provides that the obligations of the several underwriters to pay for and accept delivery of the shares of our Class A common stock offered by this prospectus are subject to the approval of certain legal matters by their counsel and to certain other conditions. The underwriters are obligated to take and pay for all of the shares of our Class A common stock offered by this prospectus if any such shares are taken. However, the underwriters are not required to take or pay for the shares covered by the underwriters’ over-allotment option described below.

The underwriters initially propose to offer part of the shares of our Class A common stock directly to the public at the offering price listed on the cover page of this prospectus and part to certain dealers. After the initial offering of the shares of our Class A common stock, the offering price and other selling terms may from time to time be varied by the representatives.

We have granted to the underwriters an option, exercisable for 30 days from the date of this prospectus, to purchase up to             additional shares of our Class A common stock at the public offering price listed on the cover page of this prospectus, less underwriting discounts and commissions. The underwriters may exercise this option solely for the purpose of covering over-allotments, if any, made in connection with the offering of the shares of our Class A common stock offered by this prospectus. To the extent the option is exercised, each underwriter will become obligated, subject to certain conditions, to purchase about the same percentage of the additional shares of our Class A common stock as the number listed next to the underwriter’s name in the preceding table bears to the total number of shares of our Class A common stock listed next to the names of all underwriters in the preceding table.

The following table shows the per share and total public offering price, underwriting discounts and commissions, and proceeds before expenses to us. These amounts are shown assuming both no exercise and full exercise of the underwriters’ option to purchase up to an additional             shares of our Class A common stock.

 

     Total  
     Per Share      No Exercise      Full Exercise  

Public offering price

   $                        $                        $                    

Underwriting discounts and commissions to be paid by:

        

Us

   $         $         $     

Proceeds, before expenses, to us

   $         $         $     

The estimated offering expenses payable by us, exclusive of the underwriting discounts and commissions, are approximately $        . We have agreed to reimburse the underwriters for expenses relating to clearance of this offering with the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority up to $30,000.

 

141


Table of Contents

The underwriters have informed us that they do not intend sales to discretionary accounts to exceed 5% of the total number of shares of our Class A common stock offered by them.

We intend to apply to list our Class A common stock on the NYSE under the trading symbol “BOX.”

We and all of our directors and officers and the holders of substantially all of our outstanding securities have agreed that, without the prior written consent of Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC and J.P. Morgan Securities LLC on behalf of the underwriters, we and they will not, during the period ending 180 days after the date of this prospectus, or the restricted period:

 

    offer, pledge, sell, contract to sell, sell any option or contract to purchase, purchase any option or contract to sell, grant any option, right or warrant to purchase, lend or otherwise transfer or dispose of, directly or indirectly, any shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock or any securities convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock;

 

    file any registration statement with the Securities and Exchange Commission relating to the offering of any shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock or any securities convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for our Class A common stock or Class B common stock; or

 

    enter into any swap or other arrangement that transfers to another, in whole or in part, any of the economic consequences of ownership of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock.

whether any such transaction described above is to be settled by delivery of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock or such other securities, in cash or otherwise. In addition, we and each such person agrees that, without the prior written consent of Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC and J.P. Morgan Securities LLC on behalf of the underwriters, we or such other person will not, during the restricted period, make any demand for, or exercise any right with respect to, the registration of any shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock or any security convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for our Class A common stock or Class B common stock.

The restrictions described in the immediately preceding paragraph do not apply to our directors, officers and other holders of substantially all of our outstanding securities with respect to:

 

    the sale of securities pursuant to the underwriting agreement;

 

    the receipt by the security holder of shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock upon the exercise of stock options; provided that such shares of Class A common stock or Class B common stock are subject to the restrictions described above and that no public reports or filings will be required or voluntarily made within 30 days after the date of this prospectus, and after such 30th day, any such public reports or filings shall clearly indicate in the footnotes thereto that (i) the filing relates to an exercise of a stock option, (ii) the shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock received upon exercise of the stock option are subject to a lock-up agreement and (iii) no securities were sold by the reporting person;

 

    transactions relating to shares of our Class A common stock or other securities acquired in open market transactions after the completion of this offering; provided that no public reports or filings will be required or voluntarily made in connection with subsequent sales of our Class A common stock or other securities acquired in such open market transactions;

 

   

transfers of shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock or any security convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for our Class A common stock or Class B common stock (i) by bona fide gift, will or intestacy; (ii) to an immediate family member of the security holder or to a trust formed for the benefit of the security holder or of an immediate family member; (iii) if the security holder is a corporation, partnership, limited liability company or other business entity (A) to another corporation, partnership, limited liability company or other business entity that controls, is controlled

 

142


Table of Contents
 

by or is under common control with the security holder or (B) as part of a disposition, transfer or distribution without consideration by the security holder to its equity holders; or (iv) if the security holder is a trust, to a trustor or beneficiary of the trust; provided that, in the case of any such transfer or distribution, each transferee, donee or distributee shall sign and deliver a lock-up agreement and no public reports or filings reporting a reduction of beneficial ownership of shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock will be required or voluntarily made during the restricted period;

 

    the transfer of shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock or any security convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for our Class A common stock or Class B common stock to us pursuant to agreements under which we have the option to repurchase such securities or a right of first refusal with respect to transfers of such securities; provided that no public reports or filings will be required or voluntarily made within 30 days after the date of this prospectus, and after such 30th day, any such public reports or filings shall clearly indicate in the footnotes thereto that (i) such transfer of securities was solely to us pursuant to the circumstances described above and (ii) no securities were sold by the reporting person;

 

    the establishment of a trading plan pursuant to Rule 10b5-1 under the Exchange Act for the transfer of shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock, provided that (i) such plan does not provide for the transfer of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock during the restricted period and (ii) to the extent a public announcement or filing under the Exchange Act, if any, is required or voluntarily made regarding the establishment of such plan, such announcement or filing shall include a statement to the effect that no transfer of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock may be made under such plan during the restricted period;

 

    the conversion or reclassification of the outstanding shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock or other classes of our common stock into shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock; provided that such shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock remain subject to the terms of the lock-up agreement;

 

    the transfer of shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock or any security convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for our Class A common stock or Class B common stock that occurs by order of a court of competent jurisdiction; provided that the transferee shall sign a lock-up agreement and no public reports or filings will be required or voluntarily made in connection with such transfer of securities pursuant to an order of a court of competent jurisdiction;

 

    the disposition after the completion of this offering of shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock purchased from us pursuant to any employee stock purchase plan; provided that no public reports or filings will be required or voluntarily made in connection with subsequent sales of shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock received pursuant to such employee stock purchase plan; or

 

    the transfer of shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock or any security convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for our Class A common stock or Class B common stock after the closing of this offering pursuant to a bona fide third party tender offer, merger, consolidation or other similar transaction made to all holders of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock involving a change of control; provided that such transaction must be approved by our board of directors and, in the event that such transaction is not completed, our Class A common stock or Class B common stock owned by the security holder shall remain subject to the restrictions described above.

The lock-up restrictions described in the foregoing do not apply solely to us with respect to:

 

    the shares of our Class A common stock to be sold by us in this offering;

 

    the issuance by us of shares of common stock upon the exercise of an option or warrant or the conversion of a security outstanding on the date hereof of which the underwriters have been advised in writing;

 

143


Table of Contents
    the grant of options or the issuance of shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock by us to our employees, officers, directors, advisors or consultants pursuant to employee benefit plans in effect on the date hereof and described in this prospectus or pursuant to an employee stock purchase plan described in this prospectus;

 

    the filing by us of a registration statement with the SEC on Form S-8 in respect of any shares issued under or the grant of any award pursuant to an employee benefit plan in effect on the date hereof and described in this prospectus; or

 

    the sale or issuance of or entry into an agreement to sell or issue shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock or securities convertible into or exercisable for our Class A common stock or Class B common stock in connection with any (i) mergers, (ii) acquisition or securities, businesses, property or other assets, (iii) joint ventures, (iv) strategic alliances, (v) equipment leasing arrangements or (iv) debt financing; provided, that the aggregate number of shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock or securities convertible into or exercisable for our Class A common stock or Class B common stock (on an as-converted or as-exercised basis, as the case may be) that we may sell or issue or agree to sell or issue pursuant to this exception shall not exceed     % of the total number of shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock issued and outstanding immediately following the completion of this offering, and provided further, that each recipient of shares of our Class A common stock or Class B common stock or securities convertible into or exercisable for our Class A common stock or Class B common stock pursuant to this exception shall execute a lock-up agreement.

Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC and J.P. Morgan Securities LLC, in their sole discretion, may release our Class A common stock or Class B common stock and other securities subject to the lock-up agreements described above in whole or in part at any time with or without notice; provided, however, that, at least two business days before the effective date of a release or waiver that is granted to our directors or officers of any lock-up agreement, we have agreed with the underwriters that we will announce the impending release or waiver in a publicly filed registration statement in connection with a secondary offering or through a major news service if Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC and J.P. Morgan Securities LLC notify us of the impending release or waiver at least three business days before the effective date of such release or waiver, except where the release or waiver is effected solely to permit a transfer of securities that is not for consideration and where the transferee has agreed in writing to be bound by the same lock-up agreement terms in place for the director or officer.

In order to facilitate this offering of our Class A common stock, the underwriters may engage in transactions that stabilize, maintain or otherwise affect the price of our Class A common stock. Specifically, the underwriters may sell more shares than they are obligated to purchase under the underwriting agreement, creating a short position. A short sale is covered if the short position is no greater than the number of shares available for purchase by the underwriters under the over-allotment option. The underwriters can close out a covered short sale by exercising the over-allotment option or purchasing shares in the open market. In determining the source of shares to close out a covered short sale, the underwriters will consider, among other things, the open market price of shares compared to the price available under the over-allotment option. The underwriters may also sell shares in excess of the over-allotment option, creating a naked short position. The underwriters must close out any naked short position by purchasing shares in the open market. A naked short position is more likely to be created if the underwriters are concerned that there may be downward pressure on the price of our Class A common stock in the open market after pricing that could adversely affect investors who purchase in this offering. As an additional means of facilitating this offering, the underwriters may bid for, and purchase, shares of our Class A common stock in the open market to stabilize the price of our Class A common stock. These activities may raise or maintain the market price of our Class A common stock above independent market levels or prevent or retard a decline in the market price of our Class A common stock. The underwriters are not required to engage in these activities and may end any of these activities at any time.

 

144


Table of Contents

We and the underwriters have agreed to indemnify each other against certain liabilities, including liabilities under the Securities Act.

A prospectus in electronic format may be made available on websites maintained by one or more underwriters, or selling group members, if any, participating in this offering. The representatives may agree to allocate a number of shares of our Class A common stock to underwriters for sale to their online brokerage account holders. Internet distributions will be allocated by the representatives to underwriters that may make internet distributions on the same basis as other allocations.

The underwriters and their respective affiliates are full service financial institutions engaged in various activities, which may include securities trading, commercial and investment banking, financial advisory, investment management, investment research, principal investment, hedging, financing and brokerage activities. Certain of the underwriters and their respective affiliates have, from time to time, performed, and may in the future perform, various financial advisory and investment banking services for us, for which they received or will receive customary fees and expenses. One of the underwriters of this offering, Morgan Stanley & Co. LLC, acted as private placement agent for our Series E redeemable convertible preferred stock financing in 2012. In 2013, we entered into a credit facility with several banks, including affiliates of three of the underwriters of this offering (Morgan Stanley & Co LLC, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC and J.P. Morgan Securities LLC).

In addition, in the ordinary course of their various business activities, the underwriters and their respective affiliates may make or hold a broad array of investments and actively trade debt and equity securities (or related derivative securities) and financial instruments (including bank loans) for their own account and for the accounts of their customers and may at any time hold long and short positions in such securities and instruments. Such investment and securities activities may involve our securities and instruments. The underwriters and their respective affiliates may also make investment recommendations or publish or express independent research views in respect of such securities or instruments and may at any time hold, or recommend to clients that they acquire, long or short positions in such securities and instruments.

Pricing of the Offering

Prior to the completion of this offering, there has been no public market for our Class A common stock. The initial public offering price was determined by negotiations between us and the representatives. Among the factors considered in determining the initial public offering price were our future prospects and those of our industry in general, our sales, earnings and certain other financial and operating information in recent periods, and the price-earnings ratios, price-sales ratios, market prices of securities, and certain financial and operating information of companies engaged in activities similar to ours.

Selling Restrictions

European Economic Area

In relation to each Member State of the European Economic Area which has implemented the Prospectus Directive (each, a Relevant Member State) an offer to the public of any shares of our Class A common stock may not be made in that Relevant Member State, except that an offer to the public in that Relevant Member State of any shares of our Class A common stock may be made at any time under the following exemptions under the Prospectus Directive, if they have been implemented in that Relevant Member State:

(a) to any legal entity which is a qualified investor as defined in the Prospectus Directive;

(b) to fewer than 100 or, if the Relevant Member State has implemented the relevant provision of the 2010 PD Amending Directive, 150, natural or legal persons (other than qualified investors as defined in the Prospectus Directive), as permitted under the Prospectus Directive, subject to obtaining the prior consent of the representatives for any such offer; or

 

145


Table of Contents

(c) in any other circumstances falling within Article 3(2) of the Prospectus Directive, provided that no such offer of shares of our Class A common stock shall result in a requirement for the publication by us or any underwriter of a prospectus pursuant to Article 3 of the Prospectus Directive.

For the purposes of this provision, the expression an “offer to the public” in relation to any shares of our Class A common stock in any Relevant Member State means the communication in any form and by any means of sufficient information on the terms of the offer and any shares of our Class A common stock to be offered so as to enable an investor to decide to purchase any shares of our Class A common stock, as the same may be varied in that Member State by any measure implementing the Prospectus Directive in that Member State, the expression “Prospectus Directive” means Directive 2003/71/EC (and amendments thereto, including the 2010 PD Amending Directive, to the extent implemented in the Relevant Member State), and includes any relevant implementing measure in the Relevant Member State, and the expression “2010 PD Amending Directive” means Directive 2010/73/EU.

United Kingdom

Each underwriter has represented and agreed that:

(a) it has only communicated or caused to be communicated and will only communicate or cause to be communicated an invitation or inducement to engage in investment activity (within the meaning of Section 21 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (FSMA) received by it in connection with the issue or sale of the shares of our Class A common stock in circumstances in which Section 21(1) of the FSMA does not apply to us; and

(b) it has complied and will comply with all applicable provisions of the FSMA with respect to anything done by it in relation to the shares of our Class A common stock in, from or otherwise involving the United Kingdom.

Hong Kong

Shares of our Class A common stock may not be offered or sold by means of any document other than (i) in circumstances which do not constitute an offer to the public within the meaning of the Companies Ordinance (Cap.32, Laws of Hong Kong), or (ii) to “professional investors” within the meaning of the Securities and Futures Ordinance (Cap.571, Laws of Hong Kong) and any rules made thereunder, or (iii) in other circumstances which do not result in the document being a “prospectus” within the meaning of the Companies Ordinance (Cap.32, Laws of Hong Kong), and no advertisement, invitation or document relating to shares of our Class A common stock may be issued or may be in the possession of any person for the purpose of issue (in each case whether in Hong Kong or elsewhere), which is directed at, or the contents of which are likely to be accessed or read by, the public in Hong Kong (except if permitted to do so under the laws of Hong Kong) other than with respect to shares of our Class A common stock which are or are intended to be disposed of only to persons outside Hong Kong or only to “professional investors” within the meaning of the Securities and Futures Ordinance (Cap. 571, Laws of Hong Kong) and any rules made thereunder.

Japan

Shares of our Class A common stock have not been and will not be registered under the Financial Instruments and Exchange Law of Japan (the Financial Instruments and Exchange Law) and each underwriter has agreed that it will not offer or sell any shares of our Class A common stock, directly or indirectly, in Japan or to, or for the benefit of, any resident of Japan (which term as used herein means any person resident in Japan, including any corporation or other entity organized under the laws of Japan), or to others for re-offering or resale, directly or indirectly, in Japan or to a resident of Japan, except pursuant to an exemption from the registration requirements of, and otherwise in compliance with, the Financial Instruments and Exchange Law and any other applicable laws, regulations and ministerial guidelines of Japan.

 

146


Table of Contents

Singapore

This prospectus has not been registered as a prospectus with the Monetary Authority of Singapore. Accordingly, this prospectus and any other document or material in connection with the offer or sale, or invitation for subscription or purchase, of shares of our Class A common stock may not be circulated or distributed, nor may the shares of our Class A common stock be offered or sold, or be made the subject of an invitation for subscription or purchase, whether directly or indirectly, to persons in Singapore other than (i) to an institutional investor under Section 274 of the Securities and Futures Act, Chapter 289 of Singapore (the SFA), (ii) to a relevant person, or any person pursuant to Section 275(1A), and in accordance with the conditions, specified in Section 275 of the SFA or (iii) otherwise pursuant to, and in accordance with the conditions of, any other applicable provision of the SFA.

Where shares of our Class A common stock are subscribed or purchased under Section 275 by a relevant person which is: (a) a corporation (which is not an accredited investor) the sole business of which is to hold investments and the entire share capital of which is owned by one or more individuals, each of whom is an accredited investor; or (b) a trust (where the trustee is not an accredited investor) whose sole purpose is to hold investments and each beneficiary is an accredited investor, shares, debentures and units of shares and debentures of that corporation or the beneficiaries’ rights and interest in that trust shall not be transferable for 6 months after that corporation or that trust has acquired shares of our Class A common stock under Section 275 except: (1) to an institutional investor under Section 274 of the SFA or to a relevant person, or any person pursuant to Section 275(1A), and in accordance with the conditions, specified in Section 275 of the SFA; (2) where no consideration is given for the transfer; or (3) by operation of law.

 

147


Table of Contents

LEGAL MATTERS

Wilson Sonsini Goodrich & Rosati, P.C., Palo Alto, California, which has acted as our counsel in connection with this offering, will pass upon the validity of the shares of our Class A common stock being offered by this prospectus. Goodwin Procter LLP, Menlo Park, California, has acted as counsel to the underwriters in connection with this offering.

EXPERTS

The consolidated financial statements of Box, Inc. at January 31, 2013 and 2014, and for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month period ended January 31, 2012, and for each of the two years in the period ended January 31, 2014, appearing in this Prospectus and Registration Statement have been audited by Ernst & Young LLP, independent registered public accounting firm, as set forth in their report thereon appearing elsewhere herein, and are included in reliance upon such report given on the authority of such firm as experts in accounting and auditing.

WHERE YOU CAN FIND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

We have filed with the SEC a registration statement on Form S-1 under the Securities Act with respect to the shares of our Class A common stock offered by this prospectus. This prospectus, which constitutes a part of the registration statement, does not contain all of the information set forth in the registration statement, some of which is contained in exhibits to the registration statement as permitted by the rules and regulations of the SEC. For further information with respect to us and our Class A common stock, we refer you to the registration statement, including the exhibits filed as a part of the registration statement. Statements contained in this prospectus concerning the contents of any contract or any other document are not necessarily complete. If a contract or document has been filed as an exhibit to the registration statement, please see the copy of the contract or document that has been filed. Each statement is this prospectus relating to a contract or document filed as an exhibit is qualified in all respects by the filed exhibit. You may obtain copies of this information by mail from the Public Reference Section of the SEC, 100 F Street, N.E., Room 1580, Washington, D.C. 20549, at prescribed rates. You may obtain information on the operation of the public reference rooms by calling the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330. The SEC also maintains an internet website that contains reports, proxy statements, and other information about issuers, like us, that file electronically with the SEC. The address of that website is www.sec.gov.

As a result of this offering, we will become subject to the information and reporting requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and, in accordance with this law, will file periodic reports, proxy statements and other information with the SEC. These periodic reports, proxy statements and other information will be available for inspection and copying at the SEC’s public reference facilities and the website of the SEC referred to above. We also maintain a website at www.box.com. Upon the completion of this offering, you may access these materials free of charge as soon as reasonably practicable after they are electronically filed with, or furnished to, the SEC. Information contained on our website is not a part of this prospectus and the inclusion of our website address in this prospectus is an inactive textual reference only.

 

148


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

INDEX TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

     F-2   

Consolidated Balance Sheets

     F-3   

Consolidated Statements of Operations

     F-5   

Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Loss

     F-6   

Consolidated Statements of Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock and Stockholders’ Deficit

     F-7   

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows

     F-10   

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

     F-12   

 

F-1


Table of Contents

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

The Board of Directors and Stockholders of Box, Inc.

We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Box, Inc. as of January 31, 2013 and 2014, and the related consolidated statements of operations, comprehensive loss, redeemable convertible preferred stock and stockholders’ deficit, and cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, and for each of the two years in the period ended January 31, 2014. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. We were not engaged to perform an audit of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting. Our audits included consideration of internal control over financial reporting as a basis for designing audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting. Accordingly, we express no such opinion. An audit also includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

In our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of Box, Inc. at January 31, 2013 and 2014, and the consolidated results of its operations and its cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, and for each of the two years in the period ended January 31, 2014, in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles.

/s/ Ernst & Young LLP

San Francisco, California

March 24, 2014

 

F-2


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS

(In thousands, except per share data)

 

     January 31,
2013
     January 31,
2014
     Pro Forma
January 31,
2014
 
                   (unaudited)  

ASSETS

        

Current assets:

        

Cash and cash equivalents

   $ 127,625       $ 108,851       $ 108,851   

Accounts receivable, net of allowance of $2,258 and $3,376

     17,218         42,669         42,669   

Prepaid expenses and other current assets

     8,177         7,776         7,776   

Deferred commissions

     8,959         7,152         7,152   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total current assets

     161,979         166,448         166,448   

Property and equipment, net

     29,949         41,385         41,385   

Intangible assets, net

     830         6,567         6,567   

Goodwill

             8,081         8,081   

Other long-term assets

     3,034         12,948         12,948   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total assets

   $ 195,792       $ 235,429       $ 235,429   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

LIABILITIES, REDEEMABLE CONVERTIBLE PREFERRED STOCK AND STOCKHOLDERS’ (DEFICIT) EQUITY

        

Current liabilities:

        

Accounts payable

   $ 11,906       $ 12,405       $ 12,405   

Accrued compensation and benefits

     3,899         16,098         16,098   

Accrued expenses and other current liabilities

     1,628         14,161         14,161   

Deferred revenue

     38,275         78,282         78,282   

Deferred rent

     504         1,213         1,213   

Debt

     968                   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total current liabilities

     57,180         122,159         122,159   

Debt, non-current

     30,060         34,000         34,000   

Deferred revenue, non-current

     1,824         11,790         11,790   

Redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability, non-current

     2,869         1,346           

Deferred rent, non-current

     5,125         4,086         4,086   

Other long-term liabilities

     491         1,343         1,343   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total liabilities

     97,549         174,724         173,378   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Commitments and contingencies (Note 7)

        

Redeemable convertible preferred stock:

        

Redeemable convertible preferred stock, par value of $0.0001 per share; 71,546 and 77,102 shares authorized as of January 31, 2013 and 2014, 69,999 and 76,238 shares issued and outstanding with aggregate liquidation preference of $283,410 and $384,423 as of January 31, 2013 and 2014; no shares issued and outstanding as of January 31, 2014, pro forma (unaudited)

   $ 281,899       $ 393,217       $   

 

F-3


Table of Contents
     January 31,
2013
    January 31,
2014
    Pro Forma
January 31,
2014
 
                 (unaudited)  

Stockholders’ (deficit) equity:

      

Class A and Class B Common stock, par value of $0.0001 per share; 132,300 (Class A 112,300, Class B 20,000) and 145,856 (Class A 120,856, Class B 25,000) shares authorized as of January 31, 2013 and 2014; 10,429 (Class A 9,672, Class B 757) and 13,955 (Class A 11,024, Class B 2,931) shares issued and outstanding as of January 31, 2013 and 2014 (including common stock subject to repurchase, see Note 12); 90,194 (no Class A or Class B, new Class B 90,194) shares issued and outstanding, pro forma as of January 31, 2014 (see Note 1) (unaudited)

     1        1        9   

Additional paid-in capital

     10,129        29,815        424,370   

Treasury stock (see Note 10)

     (1,177     (1,177     (1,177

Accumulated other comprehensive income

            15        15   

Accumulated deficit

     (192,609     (361,166     (361,166
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total stockholders’ (deficit) equity

     (183,656     (332,512   $ 62,051   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total liabilities, redeemable convertible preferred stock and stockholders’ (deficit) equity

   $ 195,792      $ 235,429      $ 235,429   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

See notes to consolidated financial statements.

 

F-4


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS

(In thousands, except per share data)

 

     Year Ended
December 31,
2011
    One Month
Ended
January 31,
2012
    Year Ended
January 31,
2013
    Year Ended
January 31,
2014
 

Revenue

   $ 21,084      $ 3,376      $ 58,797      $ 124,192   

Cost of revenue

     6,873        850        14,280        25,974   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

     14,211        2,526        44,517        98,218   

Operating expenses:

        

Research and development

     14,396        1,915        28,996        45,967   

Sales and marketing

     36,189        4,246        99,221        171,188   

General and administrative

     13,480        1,125        25,429        39,843   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total operating expenses

     64,065        7,286        153,646        256,998   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss from operations

     (49,854     (4,760     (109,129     (158,780

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

     (356     (371     (1,727     (8,477

Interest income (expense), net

     (109     27        (1,764     (3,705

Other income (expense), net

     49        (8     116        (26
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Loss before provision (benefit) for income taxes

     (50,270     (5,112     (112,504     (170,988

Provision (benefit) for income taxes

     1        15        59        (2,431
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss

     (50,271     (5,127     (112,563     (168,557

Accretion of redeemable convertible preferred stock

     (80     (9     (226     (341
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss attributable to common stockholders

   $ (50,351   $ (5,136   $ (112,789   $ (168,898
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss per share attributable to common stockholders, basic and diluted

   $ (9.53   $ (0.84   $ (14.68   $ (14.89
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Weighted-average shares used to compute net loss per share attributable to common stockholders, basic and diluted

     5,284        6,099        7,684        11,341   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Pro forma net loss per share attributable to common stockholders, basic and diluted (unaudited)

         $ (1.93
        

 

 

 

Weighted-average shares used to compute pro forma net loss per share attributable to common stockholders, basic and diluted (unaudited)

           82,948   
        

 

 

 

See notes to consolidated financial statements .

 

F-5


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE LOSS

(In thousands)

 

     Year Ended
December 31,
2011
    One Month
Ended
January 31,
2012
    Year Ended
January 31,
2013
    Year Ended
January 31,
2014
 
          

Net loss

   $ (50,271   $ (5,127   $ (112,563   $ (168,557

Changes in foreign currency translation adjustment*

                          15   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Other comprehensive income

                          15   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Comprehensive loss

   $ (50,271   $ (5,127   $ (112,563   $ (168,542
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

* Tax effect was not material

See notes to consolidated financial statements .

 

F-6


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF REDEEMABLE CONVERTIBLE PREFERRED STOCK AND STOCKHOLDERS’ DEFICIT

(In thousands)

 

     Redeemable Convertible
Preferred Stock
     Class A and B
Common Stock
     Additional
Paid-In
Capital
    Treasury
Stock
    Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive

Income
     Accumulated
Deficit
    Total
Stockholders’

Deficit
 
     Shares      Amount      Shares     Amount              

Balance as of December 31, 2010

     39,200       $ 32,381         5,554      $ 1       $ 618      $ (280   $       $ (24,648   $ (24,309

Issuance of Series D redeemable convertible preferred stock for cash, net of issuance costs of $117

     11,544         36,383                                                       

Stock-based compensation related to exchange of common stock for Series D redeemable convertible preferred stock

     411         1,300         (411                    (243                    (243

Issuance of Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock for cash, net of issuance costs of $138

     3,218         25,707                                                       

Stock-based compensation related to exchange of common stock for Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock

     642         5,155         (642                    (654                    (654

Issuance of Series D-2 redeemable convertible preferred stock for cash, net of issuance costs of $122

     3,309         29,878                                                       

Issuance of common stock upon exercise of stock options

                     1,664                250                              250   

Issuance of common stock in connection with the purchase of intangible assets

                     10                6                              6   

Stock-based compensation related to stock awards

                     69                664                              664   

Vesting of early exercised stock options

                                    45                              45   

Forgiveness of repurchase rights

                                    3                              3   

Accretion of redeemable convertible preferred stock to redemption value

             80                        (80                           (80

Net loss

                                                          (50,271     (50,271
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-7


Table of Contents
     Redeemable Convertible
Preferred Stock
     Class A and B
Common Stock
     Additional
Paid-In
Capital
    Treasury
Stock
    Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive

Income
     Accumulated
Deficit
    Total
Stockholders’

Deficit
 
     Shares      Amount      Shares      Amount              

Balance as of December 31, 2011

     58,324         130,884         6,244         1         1,506        (1,177             (74,919     (74,589

Issuance of common stock upon exercise of stock options

                     115                 22                              22   

Stock-based compensation related to stock awards

                                     72                              72   

Vesting of early exercised stock options

                                     4                              4   

Accretion of redeemable convertible preferred stock to redemption value

             9                         (9                           (9

Net loss

                                                           (5,127     (5,127
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance as of January 31, 2012

     58,324         130,893         6,359         1         1,595        (1,177             (80,046     (79,627

Issuance of Series D-2 redeemable convertible preferred stock for cash

     220         2,002                                                        

Issuance of Series E redeemable convertible preferred stock for cash, net of issuance costs of $1,222

     11,455         148,778                                                        

Issuance of common stock upon exercise of stock options

                     4,048                 1,022                              1,022   

Stock-based compensation related to stock awards

                     22                 7,536                              7,536   

Vesting of early exercised stock options

                                     202                              202   

Accretion of redeemable convertible preferred stock to redemption value

             226                         (226                           (226

Net loss

                                                           (112,563     (112,563
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance as of January 31, 2013

     69,999         281,899         10,429         1         10,129        (1,177             (192,609     (183,656

Issuance of Series E-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock for cash, net of issuance costs of $36

     5,555         99,944                                                        

Issuance of Series B redeemable convertible preferred stock upon exercise of Series B redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants

     423         6,669                                                        

Issuance of Series C redeemable convertible preferred stock upon exercise of Series C redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants

     199         3,168                                                        

 

F-8


Table of Contents
     Redeemable Convertible
Preferred Stock
     Class A and B
Common Stock
     Additional
Paid-In
Capital
    Treasury
Stock
    Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive

Income
     Accumulated
Deficit
    Total
Stockholders’

Deficit
 
     Shares      Amount      Shares      Amount              

Issuance of Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock upon exercise of Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants

     62         1,196                                                        

Issuance of common stock in connection with Crocodoc acquisition

                     813                 4,742                              4,742   

Issuance of common stock upon stock option
exercises

                     2,268                 2,077                              2,077   

Stock-based compensation related to stock awards

                     395                 11,749                              11,749   

Issuance of common stock in connection with the purchase of intangible assets

                     50                 324                              324   

Vesting of early exercised stock options

                                     1,135                              1,135   

Accretion of redeemable convertible preferred stock to redemption value

             341                         (341                           (341

Other comprehensive
income

                                                   15                15   

Net loss

                                                           (168,557     (168,557
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance as of January 31, 2014

     76,238       $ 393,217         13,955       $ 1       $ 29,815      $ (1,177   $ 15       $ (361,166   $ (332,512
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

See notes to consolidated financial statements .

 

F-9


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS

(In thousands)

 

     Year
Ended
December 31,
2011
    One Month
Ended
January 31,
2012
    Year Ended
January 31,
2013
   

Year Ended

January 31

 
           2014  
                          

CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES:

        

Net loss

   $ (50,271   $ (5,127   $ (112,563   $ (168,557

Adjustments to reconcile net loss to net cash used in operating activities:

        

Depreciation and amortization

     2,838        443        8,616        17,867   

Stock-based compensation expense

     6,222        72        7,536        11,749   

Amortization of deferred commissions

     1,688        262        7,028        13,500   

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

     356        371        1,727        8,477   

Release of deferred tax valuation allowance

                          (2,590

Other

     214        48        628        212   

Changes in operating assets and liabilities, net of effects of acquisitions:

        

Accounts receivable

     (4,102     171        (11,499     (25,157

Deferred commissions

     (3,108     (247     (14,027     (13,999

Prepaid expenses and other assets

     (7,478     (661     (2,028     (3,792

Accounts payable

     3,546        3,779        2,046        (3,177

Accrued expenses and other liabilities

     3,048        (1,355     2,100        24,055   

Deferred rent

     3,467        264        1,755        (330

Deferred revenue

     9,307        248        26,930        49,973   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash used in operating activities

     (34,273     (1,732     (81,751     (91,769

CASH FLOWS FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES:

        

Purchases of marketable securities

     (35,814                     

Proceeds from maturity of marketable securities

     12,000        3,350        20,000          

Purchases of property and equipment

     (13,467     (4,181     (19,499     (24,424

Investments in non-marketable equity securities

                   (125       

Acquisition, net of cash acquired and purchases of intangible assets

     (1,012            (62     (7,761
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash provided by (used in) investing activities

     (38,293     (831     314        (32,185

CASH FLOWS FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES:

        

Proceeds from borrowings, net of borrowing costs

     10,972               20,353        32,744   

Principal payments on borrowings

     (341     (46     (577     (30,971

Proceeds from issuance of redeemable convertible preferred stock, net of issuance costs

     91,968               150,780        99,944   

Proceeds from exercise of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants

                          1,033   

Proceeds from exercise of stock options

     250        22        2,241        3,003   

Payments of deferred offering costs

                          (588
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash provided by (used in) financing activities

     102,849        (24     172,797        105,165   

Effect of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents

                          15   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

     30,283        (2,587     91,360        (18,774

Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of period

     8,569        38,852        36,265        127,625   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash and cash equivalents, end of period

   $ 38,852      $ 36,265      $ 127,625      $ 108,851   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-10


Table of Contents
     Year
Ended
December 31,
2011
    One Month
Ended
January 31,
2012
     Year Ended
January 31,
2013
    

Year Ended

January 31

 
             2014  
                            

SUPPLEMENTAL DISCLOSURE OF CASH FLOW INFORMATION:

          

Cash paid for interest, including end of term fees and early payoff penalty

   $ 216      $ 37       $ 1,973       $ 3,461   

Cash paid for income taxes

     1                60         86   

SUPPLEMENTAL DISCLOSURE OF NONCASH INVESTING AND FINANCING ACTIVITIES:

          

Accrued equipment purchases

   $ 1,007      $ 557       $ 20       $ 2,768   

Issuance of common stock in connection with an acquisition and purchases of intangible assets

     6                        5,066   

Vesting of early exercised stock options and restricted stock

     45        4         202         1,135   

Exchange of common stock with the investors for redeemable convertible preferred stock

     (897                       

Unpaid deferred offering costs

                            1,755   

Issuance of preferred stock upon exercise of warrants

                            10,000   

See notes to consolidated financial statements .

 

F-11


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Note 1. Description of Business and Basis of Presentation

Description of Business

Box, Inc. was incorporated in the state of Washington in April 2005. We were reincorporated in the state of Delaware in March 2008. Further, we officially changed our name from Box.Net, Inc. to Box, Inc. in November 2011. We provide a cloud-based mobile optimized Enterprise Content Collaboration platform that enables organizations of all sizes to easily and securely manage their content and collaborate internally and externally.

Basis of Presentation and Principles of Consolidation

The consolidated financial statements are prepared in accordance with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles (U.S. GAAP) and include the consolidated accounts of Box, Inc. and its wholly-owned subsidiaries. All intercompany accounts and transactions have been eliminated in consolidation.

Change in Fiscal Year

We changed our fiscal year end from December 31 to January 31, commencing with our fiscal year ended January 31, 2013. As a result of the change, a one month transition period beginning January 1, 2012 and ending January 31, 2012 is presented in the consolidated financial statements.

Prior Period Reclassifications

Certain reclassifications of prior period amounts have been made to conform to the current period presentation.

Unaudited Pro Forma Balance Sheet

As of January 31, 2014, we had two classes of common stock: Class A common stock and Class B common stock. The rights of the holders of our Class A and Class B common stock were identical except with respect to voting. The holders of our Class A common stock were entitled to one vote per share, and holders of our Class B common stock had no voting rights. Upon the completion of an initial public offering, all current outstanding shares of our Class A common stock, Class B common stock, and redeemable convertible preferred stock (including shares issuable upon the net exercise of a warrant to purchase up to 87,140 shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock) will convert into shares of our new Class B common stock. In addition, all options to purchase shares of our capital stock outstanding prior to the completion of an initial public offering will become exercisable for shares of our new Class B common stock after the completion of an initial public offering. Therefore, the January 31, 2014, unaudited pro forma consolidated balance sheet has been prepared assuming the conversion of the outstanding redeemable convertible preferred stock (excluding the shares related to the Net Exercise Warrant) into 76,238,097 shares of the new Class B common stock, the reclassification of the redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability to additional paid-in capital related to the net exercise of a warrant to purchase up to 87,140 shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock, and the conversion of all of the outstanding shares of our existing Class A and Class B common stock into our new Class B common stock.

Note 2. Summary of Significant Accounting Policies

Use of Estimates

The preparation of consolidated financial statements in conformity with U.S. GAAP requires management to make, on an ongoing basis, estimates and assumptions that affect the amounts reported and disclosed in the financial statements and the accompanying notes. Actual results could differ from these estimates. Such estimates

 

F-12


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

include, but are not limited to, the determination of the allowance for accounts receivable, the fair value of intangible assets, useful lives of intangible assets and property and equipment, fair values of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants, best estimate of selling price included in multiple-deliverable revenue arrangements, fair values of stock-based awards, and the provision for income taxes, including related reserves, among others. Management bases its estimates on historical experience and on various other assumptions which management believes to be reasonable, the results of which form the basis for making judgments about the carrying values of assets and liabilities.

Revenue Recognition

We derive our revenue from three sources: (1) subscription revenue, which is comprised of subscription fees from customers utilizing our cloud-based Enterprise Content Collaboration services that include routine customer support; (2) revenue from customers purchasing our premier support package; and (3) revenue from professional services such as implementing best practice use cases, project management and implementation services.

We recognize revenue when all of the following conditions are met:

 

    there is persuasive evidence of an arrangement;

 

    the service has been provided to the customer;

 

    the collection of fees is reasonably assured; and

 

    the amount of fees to be paid by the customer is fixed or determinable.

We typically invoice our customers at the beginning of the term, in multiyear, annual, quarterly or monthly installments. Our subscription and support contracts are typically non-cancellable and do not contain refund-type provisions.

In instances where we collect fees in advance of service delivery, revenue under the contract is deferred until we successfully deliver such services.

Subscription revenue is recognized ratably over the period of the subscription beginning once all requirements for revenue recognition have been met, including provisioning the service so that it is available to our customers. Premier support is sold together with the subscription hosting services, and the term of the premier support is generally the same as the related subscription hosting services arrangement. Accordingly, we recognize premier support revenue in the same manner as the associated subscription hosting service. Professional services revenue is recognized as the services are rendered for time and material contracts, and using the proportional performance method over the period the services are performed for fixed price contracts. Professional services and premier support services revenues were not material for all periods presented.

We assess collectability based on a number of factors, such as past collection history and creditworthiness of the customer. If management determines collectability is not reasonably assured, we defer revenue recognition until collectability becomes reasonably assured.

Our arrangements can include multiple elements which may consist of some or all of subscription services, premier support and professional services. When multiple-element arrangements exist, we evaluate whether these individual deliverables should be accounted for as separate units of accounting or one single unit of accounting.

 

F-13


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

In order to treat deliverables in a multiple-element arrangement as separate units of accounting, the delivered item or items must have standalone value upon delivery. A delivered item has standalone value to the customer when either (1) any vendor sells that item separately or (2) the customer could resell that item on a standalone basis. Our subscription hosting services have standalone value as such services are often sold separately. Our premier support services do not have standalone value because we and other vendors do not sell premier support services separately. Our professional services have stand-alone value because there are other vendors which sell the same professional services separately. Accordingly, we consider the separate units of accounting in our multiple deliverable arrangements to be the professional services, subscription services or a combined deliverable comprised of subscription hosting services and premier support services. When multiple deliverables included in an arrangement are separable into different units of accounting, the arrangement consideration is allocated to the identified separate units of accounting based on their relative selling price. Multiple-element arrangement accounting guidance provides a hierarchy to use when determining the relative selling price for each unit of accounting. Vendor-specific objective evidence (VSOE) of selling price, based on the price at which the item is regularly sold by the vendor on a standalone basis, should be used if it exists. If VSOE of selling price is not available, third-party evidence (TPE) of selling price is used to establish the selling price if it exists. We have not established VSOE for our subscription services, premier support or professional services due to lack of pricing consistency, the introduction of new services and other factors. We have also concluded that third-party evidence of selling price is not a practical alternative due to differences in our service offerings compared to other parties and the availability of relevant third-party pricing information. Accordingly, we use our best estimate of selling price (BESP) to determine the relative selling price for our subscription, premier support and professional services offerings. For arrangements with multiple deliverables which can be separated into different units of accounting, we allocate the arrangement fee to the separate units of accounting based on our BESP. The amount of arrangement fee allocated is limited by contingent revenue, if any.

We determined BESP by considering our overall pricing objectives and market conditions. Significant pricing practices taken into consideration for our subscription hosting services, which may also include premier support, and professional services, include discounting practices, the size and volume of our transactions, the customer demographic, the geographic area where services are sold, price lists, our go-to-market strategy, historical standalone sales and contract prices. The determination of BESP is made through consultation with and approval by our management, taking into consideration the go-to-market strategy. As our go-to-market strategies evolve, we may modify our pricing practices in the future, which could result in changes in relative selling prices.

Cost of Revenue

Cost of revenue consists primarily of costs related to providing our subscription services to our paying customers, including employee compensation and related expenses for datacenter operations, customer support and professional services personnel, payments to outside technology service providers, depreciation of servers and equipment, security services and other tools, as well as amortization of acquired technology.

Deferred Commissions

Deferred commissions consist of direct incremental costs paid to our sales force associated with non-cancellable terms of the related contracts. The deferred commission amounts are recoverable through future revenue streams under the non-cancellable customer contracts. Direct sales commissions are deferred when earned and amortized over the same period that revenue is recognized for the related non-cancellable subscription period. Amortization of deferred commissions is included in sales and marketing expense in the consolidated statements of operations.

 

F-14


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

We deferred sales commissions costs of $3.1 million, $247,000, $14.0 million, and $14.0 million during the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012 and the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014, and amortized $1.7 million, $262,000, $7.0 million, and $13.5 million of deferred commissions during the same periods.

Deferred Revenue

Deferred revenue consists of billings and payments received in advance of revenue recognition generated by our subscription services, premier customer support and professional services described above. For these services, we typically invoice our customers at the beginning of the term, in multiyear, annual, quarterly or monthly installments. Accordingly, the deferred revenue balance does not represent the total contract value of annual or multiyear, non-cancellable subscription contracts.

Certain Risks and Concentrations

Our financial instruments that are exposed to concentrations of credit risk consist primarily of cash and cash equivalents, marketable securities and accounts receivable. Although we deposit our cash with multiple financial institutions, our deposits, at times, may exceed federally insured limits.

We sell to a broad range of customers. Our revenue is derived substantially from the U.S. across a multitude of industries. Accounts receivable are derived from the delivery of our services to customers primarily located in the U.S. We accept and settle our accounts receivable using credit cards, electronic payments and checks. A majority of our lower dollar value invoices are settled by credit card on or near the date of the invoice. We do not require collateral from customers to secure accounts receivable. We maintain an allowance for accounts receivable based upon the expected collectability, which takes into consideration specific customer creditworthiness and current economic trends. We believe collections of our accounts receivable are reasonably assured based on the size, industry diversification, financial condition and past transaction history of our customers. We had one customer that individually accounted for 17% of our total accounts receivable balance as of January 31, 2013. As of January 31, 2014, no single customer accounted for more than 10% of total accounts receivable. No single customer represented over 10% of revenue for any of the periods presented in the consolidated statements of operations.

We serve our customers and users from datacenter facilities operated by third parties. In order to reduce the risk of down time of our enterprise cloud content management services, we have established datacenters in various locations in the United States. We have internal procedures to restore services in the event of disaster at one of our current datacenter facilities. Even with these procedures for disaster recovery in place, our cloud services could be significantly interrupted during the implementation of the procedures to restore services.

Foreign Currency Translation and Transactions

The functional currency of our principal foreign subsidiaries is generally the U.S. dollar. Adjustments resulting from translating foreign functional currency financial statements into U.S. dollars for those entities that do not have U.S. dollars as their functional currency are recorded as part of a separate component of the consolidated statements of comprehensive loss. Foreign currency transaction gains and losses are included in the consolidated statements of operations for the period. All assets and liabilities denominated in a foreign currency are translated into U.S. dollars at the exchange rate on the balance sheet date. Revenue and expenses are translated at the average exchange rate during the period. Equity transactions are translated using historical exchange rates. Translation adjustments at the balance sheet dates were not material. Transaction gains and losses recognized were not material for all periods presented.

 

F-15


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

Cash and Cash Equivalents

We consider all highly liquid investments with an initial maturity of 90 days or less at the date of purchase to be cash equivalents. We maintain such funds in overnight cash deposits.

Restricted Cash

Restricted cash is comprised of certificates of deposit related to our credit card processing and leases. These restricted cash balances have been excluded from our cash and cash equivalents balance and are classified as part of prepaid expenses and other current assets and other long-term assets on our consolidated balance sheets. The amount of restricted cash as of January 31, 2013 was $3.9 million, of which $1.5 million was classified as current and $2.4 million was classified as non-current. The amount of restricted cash as of January 31, 2014 was $3.9 million, which was classified as non-current.

Marketable Securities

Our marketable securities consisted of short-term investment-grade corporate securities. We classify our marketable securities as available-for-sale at the time of purchase and reevaluate such classification as of each balance sheet date. All marketable securities are recorded at their estimated fair value. Unrealized gains and losses for available-for-sale securities are recorded in other comprehensive income (loss). We evaluate our investments to assess whether those with unrealized loss positions are other than temporarily impaired. We consider impairments to be other than temporary if they are related to deterioration in credit risk or if it is likely we will sell the securities before the recovery of their cost basis. Realized gains and losses and declines in value deemed to be other than temporary are determined based on the specific identification method and are reported in other income (expense), net in the consolidated statements of operations. Gross realized gains and losses on marketable securities were not material for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, and the year ended January 31, 2013. We held no marketable securities during the year ended January 31, 2014.

Fair Value of Financial Instruments

Our financial assets and financial liabilities which include cash equivalents, marketable securities and redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants are measured and recorded at fair value on a recurring basis. We measure certain other assets including our non-marketable equity securities at fair value on a nonrecurring basis when they are deemed to be other-than-temporarily impaired. Our other current financial assets and our other current financial liabilities have fair values which approximate their carrying value due to their short term maturities.

Accounts Receivable and Related Allowance

Accounts receivable are recorded at the invoiced amounts and do not bear interest. We maintain an allowance for estimated losses inherent in our accounts receivable portfolio. We assess the collectability of the accounts by taking into consideration the aging of our trade receivables, historical experience, and management judgment. We write off trade receivables against the allowance when management determines a balance is uncollectible and no longer actively pursues collection of the receivable.

Property and Equipment

Property and equipment are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and amortization. Depreciation and amortization is computed using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the respective assets, generally two to three years. Leasehold improvements are amortized over the shorter of their estimated useful

 

F-16


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

lives or the remaining lease term, generally three to five years. Depreciation commences once the asset is placed in service. Construction in progress is primarily related to the construction or development of property and equipment which have not yet been placed in service for their intended use.

Impairment of Long-Lived Assets, Intangible Assets, and Goodwill

We review our long-lived assets, including property and equipment, and finite-lived intangible assets for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate the carrying amount of an asset may not be recoverable. We measure the recoverability of these assets by comparing the carrying amounts to the future undiscounted cash flows the assets are expected to generate. If the total of the future undiscounted cash flows is less than the carrying amount of an asset, we record an impairment charge for the amount by which the carrying amount of the asset exceeds its fair market value. There have been no impairment charges recorded in any of the periods presented in the consolidated financial statements.

Intangible assets consist primarily of developed technology and trade names and are carried at cost and amortized on a straight-line basis over their estimated useful lives, which is generally two to seven years.

In addition, we test our goodwill for impairment at least annually or more frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate this asset may be impaired. These tests are based on our single operating segment and reporting unit structure. No indications of impairment of goodwill were noted during the year ended January 31, 2014.

Research and Development Costs

Research and development costs include personnel costs, including stock-based compensation expense, associated with our engineering personnel and consultants responsible for the design, development and testing of the product, depreciation of equipment used in research and development and allocated facilities and information technology costs. Research and development costs are expensed as incurred.

Internal-Use Software Costs

We capitalize costs to develop software for internal use incurred during the application development stage. Costs related to preliminary project activities and post implementation activities are expensed as incurred. Once an application has reached the development stage, management has authorized and committed to the funding of the software project, it is probable the project will be completed and the software will be used to perform the function intended, internal and external costs, if direct and incremental, are capitalized until the application is substantially complete and ready for its intended use. There were no material qualifying costs incurred during the application development stage in any of the periods presented.

Advertising Costs

Advertising costs are expensed as incurred and are included in sales and marketing expense. Advertising costs for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, and the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014, were $8.8 million, $1.2 million, $20.1 million, and $25.0 million, respectively.

Stock-Based Compensation

We determine the fair value of our stock options issued to employees on the date of grant using the Black-Scholes option pricing model, which is impacted by the fair value of our common stock, as well as changes in

 

F-17


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

assumptions regarding a number of highly complex and subjective variables. These variables include, but are not limited to, the expected common stock price volatility over the term of the option awards, the expected term of the awards, risk-free interest rates and the expected dividend yield. The fair value of restricted stock awards and restricted stock units is determined by the estimated fair value of our common stock at the time of grant.

We recognize compensation expense for our stock based awards on a straight-line basis over the period during which an employee is required to provide services in exchange for the award (generally the vesting period of the award). Stock-based compensation expense is recognized only for those awards expected to vest. We estimate future forfeitures at the date of grant and revise the estimates, if necessary, in subsequent periods if actual forfeitures differ from those estimates.

Compensation expense for stock options issued to nonemployees is calculated using the Black-Scholes option pricing model and is recorded over the service performance period. Options subject to vesting are required to be periodically remeasured over their service performance period, which is generally the same as the vesting period.

Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock Warrant Liability

We account for freestanding warrants to purchase shares of our redeemable convertible preferred stock as a liability on the consolidated balance sheets. The redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants are recorded as a liability because the underlying shares of redeemable convertible preferred stock are optionally redeemable and, therefore, may obligate us to transfer assets at some point in the future. The warrants are recorded at fair value upon issuance and are subject to remeasurement to fair value at each balance sheet date, with any change in fair value recognized as a separate line item on the consolidated statements of operations. We recognized remeasurement losses of $356,000, $371,000, $1.7 million, and $8.5 million for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, and the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014, respectively. We will continue to adjust the redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability to its estimated fair value at each reporting period until the earlier of the (i) exercise of the warrants, (ii) expiration of the warrants, or (iii) other triggering events as applicable to the terms of the warrant agreements (see Note 11 for additional information).

Income Taxes

We account for income taxes under the asset and liability method, which requires the recognition of deferred tax assets and liabilities for the temporary differences between the financial statement and tax basis of assets and liabilities using the enacted tax rates in effect for the years in which the differences are expected to reverse. The effect on deferred taxes of a change in income tax rates is recognized in the consolidated statements of operations in the period that includes the enactment date. Valuation allowances are established when necessary to reduce deferred tax assets to the amounts we believe is more likely than not to be realized.

We recognize tax benefits from uncertain tax positions only if we believe that it is more likely than not that the tax position will be sustained on examination by the taxing authorities based on the technical merits of the position. The tax benefits recognized in the financial statements from such positions are then measured based on the largest benefit that has a greater than 50% likelihood of being realized upon settlement.

Recent Accounting Pronouncements

In July 2013, the FASB issued Accounting Standards Update No. 2013-11, Income Taxes (Topic 740): Presentation of an Unrecognized Tax Benefit When a Net Operating Loss Carryforward, a Similar Tax Loss, or a

 

F-18


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

Tax Credit Carryforward Exists (ASU 2013-11), which provides guidance on the financial statement presentation of unrecognized tax benefits when a net operating loss (NOL) carryforward, a similar tax loss, or a tax credit carryforward exists. ASU 2013-11 provides that a liability related to an unrecognized tax benefit would be presented as a reduction of a deferred tax asset for a NOL carryforward, a similar tax loss or a tax credit carryforward if such settlement is required or expected in the event the uncertain tax position is disallowed. We plan to adopt this standard beginning February 1, 2014, and do not believe that this adoption will have a material impact on our consolidated financial statements.

Note 3. Fair Value Measurements

We define fair value as the exchange price that would be received from selling an asset or paid to transfer a liability in the principal or most advantageous market for the asset or liability in an orderly transaction between market participants on the measurement date. We measure our financial assets and liabilities at fair value at each reporting period using a fair value hierarchy which requires us to maximize the use of observable inputs and minimize the use of unobservable inputs when measuring fair value. A financial instrument’s classification within the fair value hierarchy is based upon the lowest level of input that is significant to the fair value measurement. Three levels of inputs may be used to measure fair value:

 

    Level 1—Observable inputs are unadjusted quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities.

 

    Level 2—Observable inputs are quoted prices for similar assets and liabilities in active markets or inputs other than quoted prices which are observable for the assets or liabilities, either directly or indirectly through market corroboration, for substantially the full term of the financial instruments.

 

    Level 3—Unobservable inputs which are supported by little or no market activity and which are significant to the fair value of the assets or liabilities. These inputs are based on our own assumptions used to measure assets and liabilities at fair value and require significant management judgment or estimation.

We measure our marketable securities, restricted cash and redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability at fair value on a recurring basis. We classify our marketable securities and restricted cash within Level 2 because they are valued using inputs other than quoted prices which are directly or indirectly observable in the market, including readily-available pricing sources for the identical underlying security which may not be actively traded. We classify our redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants within Level 3 because they are valued using valuation techniques using certain inputs which are unobservable in the market.

 

F-19


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

The following tables set forth the fair value of our financial assets and liabilities measured at fair value on a recurring basis as of January 31, 2013 and 2014 using the above input categories (in thousands):

     As of January 31, 2013  
     Level 1      Level 2      Level 3     Fair Value  

Assets

          

Restricted cash:

          

Certificate of deposit

   $       $ 3,928       $      $ 3,928   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total assets measured at fair value

   $       $ 3,928       $      $ 3,928   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Liability

          

Redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

   $       $       $ (2,869   $ (2,869
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total liabilities measured at fair value

   $       $       $ (2,869   $ (2,869
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

     As of January 31, 2014  
     Level 1      Level 2      Level 3     Fair Value  

Assets

          

Restricted cash:

          

Certificate of deposit

   $       $ 3,909       $      $ 3,909   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total assets measured at fair value

   $       $ 3,909       $      $ 3,909   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Liability

          

Redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

   $       $       $ (1,346   $ (1,346
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total liabilities measured at fair value

   $         $       $ (1,346   $ (1,346
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Fair Value of Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock Warrant Liability

To determine the fair value of the redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants, we first derive the business enterprise value (BEV) of the Company using the income approach and market comparable approach valuation methods. When applicable due to recent valuation events, such as a redeemable convertible preferred stock financing, the prior sale of company stock method is utilized. Once we determined an estimated BEV, we utilized the option pricing method (OPM) to allocate the BEV to the various classes of the Company’s equity, including the Company’s preferred stock. Once the per share value of preferred stock was determined, we used this concluded per share value as the fair value of the shares input within the Black-Scholes option pricing model that was utilized to determine the fair value of the redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants. In addition to the fair value of the shares input, the Black-Scholes option pricing model includes assumptions related to the exercise price, expected volatility, expected term, risk-free interest rate, and the expected dividend yield. The estimated expected volatility was based on the volatility of common stock of a group of comparable, publicly-traded companies. The estimated expected term was based on the estimated time to liquidity event. The risk-free interest rate was based on the U.S. Treasury yield for a term consistent with the estimated expected term. The significant unobservable inputs used in the fair value measurement of the redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability are the fair value of the underlying stock at the valuation date, the expected volatility, and the estimated term of the warrants. Generally, increases (decreases) in the fair value of the underlying stock, expected volatility and expected term would result in a directionally similar impact to the fair value measurement.

 

F-20


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

The following table provides a roll-forward of the fair value of the redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants categorized as Level 3 (in thousands):

 

Balance at December 31, 2011

   $ 771   

Remeasurement

     371   
  

 

 

 

Balance at January 31, 2012

     1,142   

Remeasurement

     1,727   
  

 

 

 

Balance at January 31, 2013

     2,869   

Remeasurement

     8,477   

Exercise of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants

     (10,000
  

 

 

 

Balance at January 31, 2014

   $ 1,346   
  

 

 

 

At each reporting date, we remeasure the redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liabilities to fair value using the Black-Scholes option pricing model with the following assumptions:

 

     As of
December 31,
2011
    As of
January 31,
2013
    As of
January 31,
2014
 

Series A:

      

Expected term (in years)

     4.8        3.7        2.7   

Risk-free interest rate

     0.8     0.5     0.6-0.7

Expected volatility

     57     44     40

Dividend rate

     0     0     0

Series B(1):

      

Expected term (in years)

     2.6-3.4        1.5-2.3          

Risk-free interest rate

     0.3-0.5     0.0-0.3       

Expected volatility

     45-57     45-47       

Dividend rate

     0     0       

Series C(1):

      

Expected term (in years)

     6.0        4.9          

Risk-free interest rate

     1.1     0.9       

Expected volatility

     56     52       

Dividend rate

     0     0       

Series D-1(1):

      

Expected term (in years)

     6.6        5.6          

Risk-free interest rate

     1.3     1.0       

Expected volatility

     55     53       

Dividend rate

     0     0       

 

(1) In January 2014, all outstanding warrants to purchase Series B, Series C and Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock were exercised. The related preferred stock warrant liability was remeasured to fair value at the exercise date, and the remaining liability along with the proceeds received upon exercise were reclassified to redeemable convertible preferred stock.

 

F-21


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

Note 4. Balance Sheet Components

Prepaid Expenses and Other Current Assets

Prepaid expenses and other current assets consisted of the following (in thousands):

 

     January 31,
2013
     January 31,
2014
 

Prepaid expenses and deposits

   $ 5,094       $ 5,717   

Restricted cash

     1,500           

Other receivables

     1,583         2,059   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total prepaid expenses and other current assets

   $ 8,177       $ 7,776   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Property and Equipment

Property and equipment, net consisted of the following (in thousands):

 

     January 31,
2013
    January 31,
2014
 

Servers

   $ 22,254      $ 49,168   

Computer hardware and software

     3,086        5,792   

Furniture and fixtures

     3,427        4,388   

Leasehold improvements

     7,483        9,486   

Construction in progress

     7,031        1,763   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total property and equipment

     43,281        70,597   

Less: accumulated depreciation

     (13,332     (29,212
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total property and equipment, net

   $ 29,949      $ 41,385   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Depreciation expense related to property and equipment was $2.7 million, $429,000, $8.4 million, and $15.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, and the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014, respectively. Construction in progress primarily consists of servers, networking equipment and storage infrastructure being provisioned in our third party datacenter hosting facilities as well as leasehold improvements. In addition, the amounts of interest capitalized to property and equipment were $107,000, $56,000, $585,000, and $284,000 for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, and the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014, respectively.

Note 5. Acquisition

On May 19, 2013, we acquired all outstanding common stock of Crocodoc, Inc. (Crocodoc), a privately-held company which provides HTML5 document rendering and viewing solutions to enterprise customers, for total purchase consideration of $13.2 million ($8.5 million in cash and $4.7 million in our common stock). The acquisition is expected to enhance our Box service by embedding Crocodoc’s technology into our platform, along with gaining access to Crocodoc’s engineering team. The acquisition has been accounted for as a business combination. Of the $13.2 million total purchase price, $790,000 was cash acquired, $7.0 million was attributed to developed technology, $8.1 million to goodwill, $222,000 to net assets acquired, $311,000 to income taxes payable which was included in other long-term liabilities, and $2.6 million to deferred tax liability. Goodwill is

 

F-22


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

primarily attributable to the enhancement of the Box user experience, expected synergies arising from the acquisition and the value of acquired personnel. Goodwill is not deductible for tax purposes. Developed technology is being amortized on a straight-line basis over an estimated useful life of three years. Transaction costs were approximately $280,000, which were recorded as general and administrative expense as incurred. Also, in connection with the acquisition, we loaned $844,000 to certain selling shareholders in exchange for full recourse notes, which were classified as other long-term assets on the consolidated balance sheet.

Results of operations for this acquisition have been included in our consolidated statements of operations since the acquisition date and were not material. Pro forma results of operations for this acquisition have not been presented because they were also not material to the consolidated results of operations.

Note 6. Intangible Assets

Intangible assets consisted of the following (in thousands):

 

     Weighted
Average Useful
Life (1)
   Gross Value      Accumulated
Amortization
    Net Carrying
Value
 

January 31, 2013

          

Trade names

   6.9 years    $ 1,201       $ (371   $ 830   
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Intangible assets, net

      $ 1,201       $ (371   $ 830   
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

January 31, 2014

          

Developed technology

   3.0 years    $ 7,724       $ (1,813   $ 5,911   

Trade names

   6.9 years      1,201         (545     656   
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Intangible assets, net

      $ 8,925       $ (2,358   $ 6,567   
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

(1) From the date of acquisition

Intangible amortization expense was $165,000, $14,000, $176,000, and $2.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, and the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014, respectively. Amortization of purchased technology is included in cost of revenue and amortization for trade names is included in general and administrative expenses in the consolidated statements of operations. As of January 31, 2014, expected amortization expense for intangible assets for each of the next five years and thereafter was as follows (in thousands):

 

Fiscal years ending January 31:

  

2015

     2,783   

2016

     2,687   

2017

     919   

2018

     154   

2019

     23   

Thereafter

     1   
  

 

 

 
   $ 6,567   
  

 

 

 

 

F-23


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

Note 7. Commitments and Contingencies

Letters of Credit

At January 31, 2014, we had letters of credit in the amount of $2.4 million in connection with our facility leases. These letters of credit renew annually and mature at various dates through December 1, 2018. These letters of credit are collateralized by certain certificates of deposit held by us in the amount of $2.4 million.

Operating Leases

We have entered into various non-cancellable operating lease agreements for certain of our offices and datacenters with lease periods expiring primarily between fiscal 2015 and 2019. Certain of these arrangements have free or escalating rent payment provisions and optional renewal clauses. We are also committed to pay a portion of the actual operating expenses under certain of these lease agreements. These operating expenses are not included in the table below. As of January 31, 2014, future minimum lease payments under non-cancellable operating leases are as follows (in thousands):

 

Years ending January 31:

  

2015

     7,517   

2016

     6,220   

2017

     5,571   

2018

     5,219   

2019

     2,767   
  

 

 

 
   $ 27,294   
  

 

 

 

We recognize rent expense under our operating leases on a straight-line basis. Rent expense totaled $2.4 million, $420,000, $4.1 million, and $5.3 million, net of sublease income of $27,000, $9,000, $1.5 million and $1.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, and the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014, respectively.

We establish assets and liabilities for the present value of estimated future costs to return certain of our leased facilities to their original condition. Such assets are depreciated over the lease period into operating expense, and the recorded liabilities are accreted to the future value of the estimated restoration costs. As of January 31, 2013 and 2014, we had such asset retirement obligations in the amount of $311,000 and $459,000, which is included in other noncurrent liabilities in the consolidated balance sheets.

Purchase Obligations

At January 31, 2014, we had $18.8 million of non-cancellable contractual purchase obligations related primarily to datacenter operations and sales activities.

Legal Matters

From time to time, we have become involved in claims and other legal matters arising in the ordinary course of business. We investigate these claims as they arise. Although claims are inherently unpredictable, we currently are not aware of any matters that may have a material adverse effect on our business, financial position, results of operations or cash flows.

 

F-24


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

We accrue estimates for resolution of legal and other contingencies when losses are probable and estimable. From time to time, we are a party to litigation and subject to claims incident to the ordinary course of business, including intellectual property claims, labor and employment claims, and threatened claims, breach of contract claims, and other matters.

Although the results of litigation and claims are inherently unpredictable, we believe there was not at least a reasonable possibility that we had incurred a material loss with respect to such loss contingencies, as of January 31, 2013 and 2014.

Indemnification

We include service level commitments to our customers warranting certain levels of uptime reliability and performance and permitting those customers to receive credits in the event that we fail to meet those levels. In addition, our customer contracts often include (i) specific obligations that we maintain the availability of the customer’s data through our service and that we secure customer content against unauthorized access or loss, and (ii) indemnity provisions whereby we indemnify our customers for third-party claims asserted against them that result from our failure to maintain the availability of their content or securing the same from unauthorized access or loss. To date, we have not incurred any material costs as a result of such commitments and have not accrued any liabilities related to such obligations in the consolidated financial statements.

Our arrangements generally include certain provisions for indemnifying customers against liabilities if our products or services infringe a third party’s intellectual property rights. It is not possible to determine the maximum potential amount under these indemnification obligations due to the limited history of prior indemnification claims and the unique facts and circumstances involved in each particular agreement. To date, we have not incurred any material costs as a result of such obligations and have not accrued any liabilities related to such obligations in the consolidated financial statements. In addition, we indemnify our officers, directors and certain key employees while they are serving in good faith in their respective capacities. To date, there have been no claims under any indemnification provisions.

Note 8. Debt

In December 2010, as amended in January 2011, we entered into a Loan and Security Agreement with Hercules Technology Growth Capital, Inc. (Hercules) (the Hercules 2010 Agreement) with a maturity date of December 31, 2014. Under this agreement, equipment loans of up to $3.0 million and a growth capital loan of up to $7.0 million were available for draw through October 31, 2011, at an interest rate equal to the greater of (a) the prime rate on the date of the draw as reported by the Wall Street Journal plus 5.25%, and (b) 8.50%. With respect to equipment loans, the Hercules 2010 Agreement has an end of term payment of 5% of the aggregate amount borrowed. In March 2011, we drew equipment loan borrowings of $1.6 million at an interest rate of 8.50%. Principal payments of $577,000 and $968,000 were made during the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014. Also, in connection with the Hercules 2010 Agreement, we granted Hercules a security interest in all equipment financed under the Hercules 2010 Agreement and issued warrants to purchase 199,219 shares of Series C redeemable convertible preferred stock (See Note 11). Separately, in March 2011, Hercules purchased 158,133 shares of our Series D redeemable convertible preferred stock at a purchase price of $3.1619 per share.

In August 2011, as amended in March 2012, we entered into a Loan and Security Agreement with Hercules (the Hercules 2011 Agreement) with a maturity date of March 1, 2016. Under this agreement, equipment loans of up to $10.0 million were available for draw through June 30, 2012, at an interest rate equal to the greater of (a) 7.5% plus the prime rate as reported in The Wall Street Journal minus 3.75%, and (b) 7.5%. In addition, there

 

F-25


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

was an end of term payment of 2.5% of the aggregate amount borrowed. Under the Hercules 2011 Agreement, we drew equipment loan borrowings of $4.8 million, $4.8 million and $353,000 at an interest rate of 7.5% in September 2011, December 2011, and April 2012. No principal payments were made in the year ended January 31, 2013. Principal payments of $10.0 million were made during the year ended January 31, 2014. Also, in connection with the Hercules 2011 Agreement, we granted Hercules a security interest in all equipment financed under the agreement and issued warrants to purchase 62,255 shares of Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock (See Note 11). Separately, in September 2011, Hercules purchased 124,511 shares of our Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock at a purchase price of $8.0314 per share.

In March 2012, as amended in June 2012, we entered into a Loan and Security Agreement with Hercules (the Hercules 2012 Agreement) with a maturity date of July 1, 2016. Under this agreement, growth capital loans of up to $20.0 million were available for draw through June 30, 2012, at an interest rate equal to the greater of (a) 8.875% plus the prime rate as reported in The Wall Street Journal minus 3.75%, and (b) 8.875%. Under the Hercules 2012 Agreement, we had an end of term payment of 4.5% of the aggregate amount borrowed. In March 2012, May 2012, and June 2012, we drew loan borrowings of $5.0 million, $5.0 million and $10.0 million at an interest rate of 8.375%. No principal payments were made in the year ended January 31, 2013. Principal payment of $20.0 million was made during the year ended January 31, 2014. Also, in connection with the Hercules 2012 Agreement, we granted the lender a security interest in all equipment financed under the agreement and all of our patents, patent applications, copyrights, trademarks and trademark applications. Separately, in March 2012, Hercules purchased 220,751 shares of our Series D-2 redeemable convertible preferred stock at a purchase price of $9.0657 per share.

The Hercules Agreements discussed above provided certain financial-related covenants, among others, relating to delivery of audited financial statements to Hercules. We received waivers from Hercules for not complying with the covenants and accordingly did not change the classification of the related Notes Payable to short term at January 31, 2013. We were not otherwise in default on the loan. In conjunction with the Hercules loans, we incurred interest expense of $235,000, $43,000, $1.9 million and $3.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, and the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014. During the respective periods, we capitalized $107,000, $56,000, $585,000 and $200,000 of interest costs. Interest expense consists of offering costs, including the amortization of the initial fair value of the redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants issued in connection with obtaining the loan, and amortization of end of term payments, commitment and legal and facility fees, as appropriate, over the related term of the loan using the effective interest rate method.

In August 2013, we repaid the Hercules loans in conjunction with entering into a line of credit agreement discussed below. Accordingly, the related remaining unamortized debt issuance and end of term fees, along with the early pay off penalty, of $1.4 million was expensed immediately and was included in interest income (expense), net in the consolidated statement of operations.

Line of Credit

In August 2013, we entered into a two-year $100.0 million secured revolving credit facility. The credit facility is denominated in U.S. dollars and, depending on certain conditions, each borrowing is subject to a floating interest rate equal to the London Interbank Offer Rate (LIBOR) plus 3.0% or the Alternate Base Rate (ABR) plus 2.0%. In addition, there is a commitment fee of 0.5% on outstanding unused commitment amount. At closing, we drew $34.0 million at 3.4% (six month Libor plus 3.0%) which we used to repay the outstanding Hercules loans and the related early payoff and end of term fees, as well as for other general corporate purposes. Borrowings under the line of credit are collateralized by substantially all of our assets. The credit facility also

 

F-26


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

contains various covenants, including covenants related to the delivery of financial and other information, the maintenance of quarterly financial covenants, material adverse effects, as well as limitations on dispositions, mergers or consolidations and other corporate activities. As of January 31, 2014, we were in compliance with all financial covenants.

In connection with the line of credit, we incurred interest expense of $946,000 for the year ended January 31, 2014. During the same period, we capitalized $84,000 of interest costs. Interest expense also includes amortization of issuance costs and unused commitment fees which are recognized over the related term of the borrowing.

Note 9. Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock

Our redeemable convertible preferred stock is issuable in series. As of January 31, 2013 and 2014, we had outstanding redeemable convertible preferred stock (individually referred to as Series A, B, C, D, D-1, D-2, E or E-1) as follows (in thousands, except for share data):

 

     As of January 31, 2013  

Series

   Number of
Shares
Authorized
     Number of
Shares Issued
and Outstanding
     Aggregate
Liquidation
Preference
     Carrying Value  

A

     5,315,560         5,228,420       $ 1,500       $ 1,475   

B

     20,331,812         19,908,882         13,110         13,055   

C

     14,261,720         14,062,501         18,000         17,937   

D

     11,954,837         11,954,837         37,800         37,723   

D-1

     3,922,103         3,859,848         31,000         30,899   

D-2

     3,529,927         3,529,927         32,000         31,910   

E

     12,230,000         11,454,838         150,000         148,900   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     71,545,959         69,999,253       $ 283,410       $ 281,899   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

     As of January 31, 2014  

Series

   Number of
Shares
Authorized
     Number of
Shares Issued
and Outstanding
     Aggregate
Liquidation
Preference
     Carrying Value  

A

     5,315,560         5,228,420       $ 1,500       $ 1,481   

B

     20,331,812         20,331,812         13,388         19,738   

C

     14,261,720         14,261,720         18,255         21,121   

D

     11,954,837         11,954,837         37,800         37,740   

D-1

     3,922,103         3,922,103         31,500         32,118   

D-2

     3,529,927         3,529,927         32,000         31,930   

E

     12,230,000         11,454,838         150,000         149,143   

E-1

     5,556,000         5,554,440         99,980         99,946   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     77,101,959         76,238,097       $ 384,423       $ 393,217   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-27


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

Accretion of Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock

Stock issuance costs incurred related to our redeemable convertible preferred stock are being accreted using the effective interest method via a charge to additional paid in capital over the period from issuance date to the date at which the redeemable convertible preferred stock becomes redeemable at the option of the holders.

The holders of our redeemable convertible preferred stock have the following rights, preferences, privileges and restrictions:

Voting Rights

Each holder of Series A, Series B, Series C, Series D, Series D-1, Series D-2, and Series E (collectively, the “Voting Preferred”) will have the same voting rights as the holders of Class A common stock, and the holders of Class A common stock and Voting Preferred will vote together as a single class on all matters except as discussed below. Holders of Series E-1 have no voting rights. Each holder of Voting Preferred has voting rights equal to the number of shares of Class A common stock into which the shares of Voting Preferred held by such holder are then convertible. Until the redeemable convertible preferred stock is converted to Class A common stock, (a) the holders of Series A, Series B, Series C and Series E are each entitled to elect one member to the Board; (b) the holders of Class A common stock are entitled to elect two members to the Board, and (c) the holders of Voting Preferred and Class A common stock, voting together as a single class, are entitled to elect all other members of the Board. Following conversion of the redeemable convertible preferred stock into Class A common stock, the holders of Class A common stock will be entitled to elect all the members of the Board.

Redemption

The holders of not less than sixty-six and two-thirds percent (66  2 3 %) of the outstanding shares of Voting Preferred, voting together as a separate class, may require us to redeem all of the outstanding shares of redeemable convertible preferred stock in three equal annual installments beginning at any time after August 7, 2017; provided that the approval of the holders of at least a majority of the outstanding shares of Series E shall be required to redeem the shares of Series E. We are obligated to pay in cash a sum equal to the original issue price per share of each series of redeemable convertible preferred stock (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, or recapitalizations) plus all accrued or declared and unpaid dividends with respect to such shares.

The number of shares of redeemable convertible preferred stock that we are required to redeem on any one redemption date is equal to the amount determined by dividing (a) the aggregate number of shares of redeemable convertible preferred stock outstanding immediately prior to the redemption date by (b) the number of remaining redemption dates (including the redemption date to which such calculation applies). As a result, we are required to accrete the carrying value of the redeemable convertible preferred stock to its redemption value over the period from issuance through the redemption date. We recorded redeemable convertible preferred stock accretion of $80,000, $9,000, $226,000 and $341,000 during the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, and the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014, respectively. The accretion charges do not impact our net loss but are instead recognized as a charge against additional paid in capital.

If we do not have sufficient funds legally available to redeem all shares to be redeemed at the redemption date, the maximum possible number of shares is redeemed ratably among the holders of such shares based upon their holdings of redeemable convertible preferred stock, and the remaining shares will be redeemed as soon as

 

F-28


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

sufficient funds are legally available. In the event that shares of redeemable convertible preferred stock are not redeemed due to a default in payment by us or because we do not have sufficient legally available funds, such shares of redeemable convertible preferred stock shall remain outstanding and entitled to all the rights and preferences of the redeemable convertible preferred stock until redeemed. No redeemable convertible preferred stock was eligible for redemption as of January 31, 2013 and 2014.

Conversion

Each share of redeemable convertible preferred stock is convertible, at any time at the option of the stockholder, into one share of Class A common stock, subject to certain anti-dilution adjustments. Conversion of the redeemable convertible preferred stock into shares of Class A common stock is automatic at the respective then effective conversion rate for each series: (i) at any time upon the approval of the holders of at least (a) 66  2 3 % of the outstanding Voting Preferred, (b) 66  2 3 % of the outstanding Series C, and (c) 66  2 3 % of the outstanding Series D; provided, however, if such conversion (i) is in conjunction with a liquidation event and if the proceeds of such liquidation event to be received by holders of Series D-1, Series D-2, or Series E is less than their respective original issue price, the conversion ratio of such series will be adjusted such that each series will receive shares of Class A common stock with a value equal to their respective original issue price; and (ii) immediately upon the closing of a firmly underwritten public offering of our Class A common stock in which such shares of our Class A common stock have been listed for trading on a specified stock exchange and that results in gross cash proceeds (before underwriting discounts, commissions, and fees) of at least $100.0 million; provided, however, if the price per share of Class A common stock sold in any public offering of our Class A common stock causes the holders of either Series D-2 or Series E to receive shares of Class A common stock with a value less than their respective original issue price, the conversion ratio of the shares of Series D-2 or Series E, as applicable, shall be adjusted such that the holders of such class of stock receive shares of Class A common stock equal to the value of their respective original purchase price. Any automatic conversion of Series D-2 or Series E that is not effected in connection with a liquidation event or qualified initial public offering will also require the approval of holders of at least 66  2 3 % of the outstanding shares of Series D-2 and the holders of at least 60% of the outstanding shares of Series E, respectively.

Dividends

The holders of Series E-1, Series E, Series D-2, Series D-1, Series D, Series C, Series B and Series A, in preference and priority to the holders of common stock, are entitled to receive, on a pari passu basis, a noncumulative cash dividend at the rate of $1.44, $1.0476, $0.7253, $0.6425, $0.2530, $0.1024, $0.0527, and $0.0230 per share, respectively, per annum, if and when declared by the Board. After payment in full of such amounts as set forth above, any additional dividends declared will be distributed among all holders of redeemable convertible preferred stock and common stock on an as-if-converted basis.

No dividends have been declared for any of the periods presented.

Liquidation

In the event of any liquidation, dissolution, or winding up of Box, Inc., whether voluntary or involuntary, the holders of Series A, Series B, Series C, Series D, Series D-1, Series D-2, Series E and Series E-1 shall be entitled to receive, on a pari passu basis, prior to any distributions to the holders of common stock, the amounts of $0.2869, $0.6585, $1.28, $3.1619, $8.0314, $9.0657, $13.0949 and $18.00 per share, respectively, plus all accrued or declared but unpaid dividends on such shares. After payment in full of such amounts as set forth above, our remaining assets will be distributed ratably among the holders of common stock and Series B, Series C, Series D, Series D-1 and Series D-2 in proportion to the number of shares held by such holders (on an as-if-

 

F-29


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

converted basis); provided that (a) the total amount that may be distributed to holders of Series B may not exceed $1.6463 per share; (b) the total amount that may be distributed to holders of Series C may not exceed $3.20 per share; (c) the total amount that may be distributed to holders of Series D may not exceed $7.9048 per share; (d) the total amount that may be distributed to holders of Series D-1 may not exceed $16.0628 per share; and (e) the total amount that may be distributed to holders of Series D-2 may not exceed $18.1314 per share. After the amounts set forth above have been paid in full, our remaining assets will be distributed ratably among the holders of the common stock.

Note 10. Common Stock and Stockholders’ Deficit

Common Stock

We have two classes of common stock, Class A and Class B. The rights of the holders of Class A and Class B common stock are identical, except with respect to voting. Each share of Class A common stock is entitled to one vote per share. Shares of Class B common stock have no voting rights, including with respect to the election of directors. Shares of Class B common stock convert automatically into shares of Class A common stock on a one-for-one basis at such time as is determined by the Board or, in the event any shares of Class B common stock are acquired by a holder of redeemable convertible preferred stock who is not an employee or an immediate family member or controlled affiliate of an employee of the Company at the time of such acquisition.

During the year ended January 31, 2013, certain employees sold 496,340 shares of common stock to existing investors for amounts in excess of the deemed fair value of our common stock at the time of sales. The amounts paid by the investors in excess of the deemed fair value were recorded as compensation expense, which totaled $3.8 million for the year ended January 31, 2013.

We have reserved the following shares of authorized but unissued Class A and Class B common stock as of the following dates:

 

     As of January 31,
2013
     As of January 31,
2014
 

Conversion of redeemable convertible preferred stock

     69,999,253         76,238,097   

Warrants to purchase redeemable convertible preferred stock

     771,544         87,140   

Issued and outstanding stock options

     13,992,407         18,427,075   

Issued and outstanding restricted stock units

             225,300   

Future grants of equity awards

     903,152         41,840   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     85,666,356         95,019,452   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

In December 2013, our board of directors approved the terms of two new classes of stock, the new Class A common stock and the new Class B common stock. Shares of the new Class A common stock will be entitled to one vote per share and shares of the new Class B common stock will be entitled to 10 votes per share. Upon the completion of an initial public offering, all outstanding shares of our Existing Class A common stock, Existing Class B common stock and redeemable convertible preferred stock (including shares issuable upon the net exercise of a redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant that will otherwise expire upon the completion of this offering) will convert into shares of our new Class B common stock. In addition, all options to purchase shares of our capital stock outstanding prior to the completion of an initial public offering will become exercisable for shares of our new Class B common stock after the completion of an initial public offering.

 

F-30


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

Treasury Stock

In connection with the issuance of Series D redeemable convertible preferred stock in February 2011 and the issuance of Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock in August 2011, certain employees sold 411,138 and 641,815 shares of their holdings in our common stock to investors in the respective redeemable convertible preferred stock financings for amounts in excess of the deemed fair value of our common stock at the time of sale. The amounts paid by the investors in excess of the deemed fair value were recorded as compensation expense, which totaled $5.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2011. We then concurrently exchanged the common stock with the investors for Series D and Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock on a one-for-one basis, as the case may be, and the shares of repurchased common stock were removed from common stock outstanding and recorded as treasury stock.

As of January 31, 2013 and 2014, we held an aggregate of 3,052,953 shares of common stock as treasury stock.

Note 11. Redeemable Convertible Preferred Stock Warrants

The following redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants were outstanding with the related fair values as of January 31, 2013 and 2014 (in thousands, except for share data):

 

            January 31, 2013      January 31, 2014  

Series

   Price Per Share      Warrants
Outstanding
     Fair Value      Warrants
Outstanding
     Fair Value  

A

   $ 0.29         87,140       $ 379         87,140       $ 1,346   

B

   $ 0.66         422,930         1,683                   

C

   $ 1.28         199,219         709                   

D-1

   $ 8.03         62,255         98                   
     

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

        771,544       $ 2,869         87,140       $ 1,346   
     

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

In October 2006, in connection with the receipt of a loan from BlueCrest Capital Finance, L.P. (BlueCrest), we granted BlueCrest a warrant to purchase 87,140 shares of our Series A redeemable convertible preferred stock at an exercise price of $0.2869 per share. The warrants are immediately exercisable and expire on the earlier of October 2016, immediately prior to the consummation of an initial public offering or a liquidity event.

In August 2007, in connection with the issuance of convertible notes to certain of our existing investors, we granted those existing investors warrants which entitled the investors, at any time prior to expiration of such warrants, to subscribe for and purchase shares of Series B redeemable convertible preferred stock for the original Series B offering price of $0.6585 per share. The number of shares covered by the warrants and the price of those shares were contingent upon the occurrence of certain events, including the closing of the Series B equity financing. Upon the closing of the Series B equity financing in January 2008, it was determined that the warrants covered an aggregate of 151,860 shares of Series B redeemable convertible preferred stock at an exercise price of $0.6585 per share. The warrants were exercisable, in whole or in part, from the closing date of the Series B equity financing until the earlier of August 7, 2014, immediately prior to the consummation of a liquidation event or an initial public offering occurring prior to August 7, 2014.

In May 2008, in connection with the receipt of a loan from Hercules pursuant to the terms and conditions of the Loan and Security Agreement (the Hercules Agreement), we granted Hercules a warrant to purchase 271,070 shares of our Series B redeemable convertible preferred stock at an exercise price of $0.6585 per share. The

 

F-31


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

warrants were immediately exercisable and expire on the earliest of May 26, 2015, or three years after our initial public offering, or the closing date of a sale of Box, Inc. for cash or in exchange for freely-tradable securities that are publicly traded on a national securities exchange. In addition, the warrants are automatically converted into warrants to purchase shares of our common stock upon the completion of an initial public offering.

In December 2010, in connection with the Hercules 2010 Agreement, we granted Hercules a warrant to purchase 445,312 shares of our Series C redeemable convertible preferred stock at an exercise price of $1.28. Initially, warrants to purchase 199,219 shares of Series C redeemable convertible preferred stock were immediately exercisable and the remaining warrants to purchase 246,093 shares of Series C redeemable convertible preferred stock were exercisable pro-rata against draws on the loan. No additional draws were made during the draw down period and the 246,093 additional warrants to purchase shares of Series C redeemable convertible preferred stock were cancelled during the year ended December 31, 2011. The warrants expire on the earlier of December 30, 2017, three years after our initial public offering, or a liquidity event. In addition, the warrants are automatically converted into warrants to purchase shares of our common stock upon the completion of an initial public offering.

In August 2011, in connection with the Hercules 2011 Agreement, we granted Hercules a warrant to purchase 62,255 shares of our Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock at an exercise price of $8.0314. The warrants expire on the earlier of August 23, 2018, three years after our initial public offering, or a liquid sale. In addition, the warrants are automatically converted into warrants to purchase shares of our common stock upon the completion of an initial public offering.

We recorded the initial fair value of all of the warrants issued as a liability with the offset as an imputed discount on the respective loan (see Note 3). These warrants will remain outstanding until the exercise or expiration of the warrants or the completion of an initial public offering, at which time the warrant liability will be remeasured to fair value and reclassified to additional paid-in capital. The discount was amortized to interest expense using the effective interest method over the term of the related loan. Interest expense of $49,000, $6,000, $76,000 and $136,000 was recognized for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, and the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014, respectively.

In January 2014, all outstanding warrants to purchase Series B, Series C and Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock were exercised. The related preferred stock warrant liability was remeasured to fair value at the exercise date, and the remaining liability along with the proceeds received upon exercise were reclassified to redeemable convertible preferred stock.

Note 12. Stock-Based Compensation

Equity Incentive

We maintain the 2006 Stock Incentive Plan (the 2006 Plan) and the 2011 Equity Incentive Plan (the 2011 Plan), which are collectively referred to as the “Plan.” Shares issued upon exercise of options under the 2006 Plan are Class A common stock. Shares issued upon exercise of options under the 2011 Plan are Class B common stock. Stock awards granted under the Plan may be (i) incentive stock options (ISOs), (ii) nonqualified stock options (NSOs), (iii) Restricted Stock Units (RSUs), (iv) Restricted Stock Awards (RSAs) or (v) Stock Appreciation Rights (SARs), as determined by the Board at the time of grant. Options generally vest 25% one year from the vesting commencement date and 1/48 th  per month thereafter. The deemed fair value per share is determined by the Board at each grant date, based on input from management and a third party valuation firm. Subject to certain restrictions as defined in the Plan and the option agreement and/or restricted stock award

 

F-32


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

agreement, as applicable, (a) we may (i) with respect to options that are early exercisable, repurchase any or all of the unvested shares acquired by the option holder, and (ii) with respect to restricted stock awards, repurchase any or all of the unvested shares acquired by the recipient; and (b) we have a right of first refusal on any or all of the vested shares acquired by the option holder and/or recipient of a restricted stock award, as applicable.

Upon the adoption of the 2011 Plan, the 2006 Plan was suspended, and the remaining shares available for issuance under the 2006 Plan ceased to be available for issuance. Following the adoption of the 2011 Plan, any shares subject to outstanding awards under the 2006 Plan that were subsequently cancelled were not returned to the pool of shares available for issuance under the 2006 Plan or the 2011 Plan.

Stock Options

The following table summarizes the activity under the equity incentive plans and related information:

 

     Shares Subject to Options Outstanding      Weighted-Average
Remaining
Contractual Life

(Years)
     Aggregate
Intrinsic Value
 
     Shares Subject to
Outstanding
Options
    Weighted-
Average Exercise
Price
       
                         (in thousands)  

Balance as of January 31, 2013

     13,992,407      $ 1.84         8.69       $ 38,954   

Options granted

     7,847,410        6.16         

Options exercised

     (2,267,540     1.32         

Options forfeited/cancelled under 2006 Plan

     (189,936     0.73         

Options forfeited/cancelled under 2011 Plan

     (955,266     3.77         
  

 

 

         

Balance as of January 31, 2014

     18,427,075      $ 3.65         8.45       $ 191,809   
  

 

 

         

Vested and expected to vest as of January 31, 2014

     17,863,613      $ 3.62         8.44       $ 186,436   
  

 

 

         

Exercisable as of January 31, 2014

     5,438,985      $ 1.57         7.49       $ 67,947   
  

 

 

         

The options exercisable as of January 31, 2014 include options that are exercisable prior to vesting. The aggregate intrinsic value of options vested and expected to vest and exercisable as of January 31, 2014 is calculated based on the difference between the exercise price and the fair value of our common stock as of January 31, 2014. The aggregate intrinsic value of exercised options for the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, and the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014 was $1.2 million, $112,000, $11.6 million and $17.8 million, respectively, and is calculated based on the difference between the exercise price and the fair value of our common stock as of the exercise date.

The aggregate estimated fair value of stock options granted to employees that vested during the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, and the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014 was $339,000, $37,000, $2.0 million and $7.4 million, respectively.

The weighted-average grant date fair value of options granted to employees was $0.47, $2.15 and $4.75 per share during the year ended December 31, 2011, and the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014, respectively. No options were granted during the one month ended January 31, 2012.

As of January 31, 2013 and 2014, there was $15.3 million and $39.8 million, respectively, of unrecognized stock-based compensation expense related to outstanding stock options granted to employees net of estimated forfeitures. This amount is expected to be recognized over a remaining weighted-average period of 3.23 years and 3.08 years, respectively. To the extent the actual forfeiture rate is different from what we have estimated, stock-based compensation related to these awards will be different from our expectations.

 

F-33


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

Early Exercises of Stock Options

With the approval of the Board, we allow certain employees and directors to exercise stock options granted under the 2006 Plan and the 2011 Plan prior to vesting. The unvested shares are subject to a repurchase right held by us at the original purchase price. Early exercises of options are not deemed to be substantive exercises for accounting purposes and accordingly, amounts received for early exercises are initially recorded in other current liabilities or other noncurrent liabilities and reclassified to common stock and additional paid-in capital as the underlying shares vest. At January 31, 2013 and 2014, we had $1.1 million and $872,000 recorded in liabilities related to early exercises of stock options, and the related number of unvested shares subject to repurchase was 905,293 and 331,826, respectively.

Restricted Stock Units

A summary of our restricted stock unit activity and related information is as follows:

     Number of
Restricted
Stock Units
Outstanding
     Weighted-
Average
Grant
Date Fair
Value
 

Unvested balance—January 31, 2013

           $   

Granted

     225,300         14.06   

Vested

               
  

 

 

    

Unvested balance—January 31, 2014

     225,300       $ 14.06   
  

 

 

    

As of January 31, 2014, there was $3.0 million of unrecognized stock-based compensation expense related to outstanding restricted stock units net of estimated forfeitures. This amount is expected to be recognized over a remaining weighted-average period of 3.93 years. To the extent the actual forfeiture rate is different from what we have estimated, stock-based compensation related to these awards will be different from our expectations.

Restricted Stock

A summary of our restricted stock activity and related information is as follows:

 

     Number of
Restricted Stock
Outstanding
    Weighted-
Average Grant
Date Fair Value
 

Unvested balance—January 31, 2013

          $   

Granted

     395,810        7.85   

Vested

     (8,375     8.07   
  

 

 

   

Unvested balance—January 31, 2014

     387,435      $ 7.84   
  

 

 

   

As of January 31, 2014, there was $1.6 million of unrecognized stock-based compensation expense related to outstanding restricted stock granted to employees net of estimated forfeitures. This amount is expected to be recognized over a remaining weighted-average period of 2.89 years. To the extent the actual forfeiture rate is different from what we have estimated, stock-based compensation related to these awards will be different from our expectations.

 

F-34


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

Stock-Based Compensation

The following table summarizes the components of stock-based compensation expense recognized in the consolidated statements of operations (in thousands):

 

     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
     One Month Ended
January 31,
2012
     Year Ended
January 31,

2013
     Year Ended
January 31,

2014
 
             

Cost of revenue

   $ 686       $ 6       $ 1,087       $ 450   

Research and development

     899         19         1,211         3,154   

Sales and marketing

     837         24         1,893         5,017   

General and administrative

     3,800         23         3,345         3,128   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

   $ 6,222       $ 72       $ 7,536       $ 11,749   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Determining Fair Value of Stock Options

We estimated the fair value of employee stock options using a Black-Scholes option pricing model with the following assumptions:

 

    Year Ended
December 31,

2011
  One Month Ended
January 31,

2012
    Year Ended
January 31,

2013
  Year Ended
January 31,

2014
         

Expected term (in years)

  5.0 – 6.1          5.0 – 7.4   4.9 – 6.3

Volatility

  55% – 57%          53% – 55%   48% – 57%

Risk-free interest rate

  1.1% – 2.7%          0.7% – 1.7%   0.8% – 1.9%

Dividend yield

  0%          0%   0%

The assumptions used in the Black-Scholes option pricing model were determined as follows:

Fair Value of Common Stock. Given the absence of a public trading market, the Board considered numerous objective and subjective factors to determine the fair value of our common stock at each grant date. These factors included, but were not limited to, (i) contemporaneous valuations of common stock performed by unrelated third-party specialists; (ii) the prices for our Preferred Stock sold to outside investors; (iii) the rights, preferences and privileges of our Preferred Stock relative to our common stock; (iv) the lack of marketability of our common stock; (v) developments in the business; and (vi) the likelihood of achieving a liquidity event, such as an initial public offering or a merger or acquisition of Box, given prevailing market conditions.

Expected Term. The expected term represents the period that our share-based awards are expected to be outstanding. The expected term assumptions were determined based on the vesting terms, exercise terms and contractual lives of the options.

Expected Volatility . Since we do not have a trading history of our common stock, the expected volatility was derived from the historical stock volatilities of several unrelated public companies within the same industry that we consider to be comparable to our business over a period equivalent to the expected term of the stock option grants.

Risk-free Interest Rate. The risk-free rate that we use is based on U.S. Treasury zero-coupon issues with remaining terms similar to the expected term on the options.

Dividend Yield . We have never declared or paid any cash dividends and do not plan to pay cash dividends in the foreseeable future, and, therefore, use an expected dividend yield of zero.

 

F-35


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

Note 13. Net Loss per Share Attributable to Common Stockholders

We calculate our basic and diluted net loss per share attributable to common stockholders in conformity with the two-class method required for companies with participating securities. We consider all series of our redeemable convertible preferred stock to be participating securities. In the event a dividend is declared or paid on our common stock, holders of redeemable convertible preferred stock are entitled to a proportionate share of such dividend in proportion to the holders of common stock on an as-if converted basis. Under the two-class method, basic net loss per share attributable to common stockholders is calculated by dividing the net loss attributable to common stockholders by the weighted-average number of shares of common stock outstanding for the period, less shares subject to repurchase. Net loss attributable to common stockholders is determined by allocating undistributed earnings between common and redeemable convertible preferred stockholders. The diluted net loss per share attributable to common stockholders is computed by giving effect to all potential dilutive common stock equivalents outstanding for the period. For purposes of this calculation, redeemable convertible preferred stock, options to purchase common stock, warrants to purchase redeemable convertible preferred stock, repurchasable shares from early exercised options and unvested restricted stock are considered common stock equivalents but have been excluded from the calculation of diluted net loss per share attributable to common stockholders as their effect is antidilutive. Under the two-class method, the net loss attributable to common stockholders is not allocated to the convertible redeemable preferred stock as the holders of our convertible redeemable preferred stock do not have a contractual obligation to share in our losses.

The rights, including the liquidation and dividend rights, of the holders of our Class A and Class B common stock are identical, except with respect to voting. As the liquidation and dividend rights are identical, the undistributed earnings are allocated on a proportionate basis and the resulting net loss per share attributed to common stockholders will, therefore, be the same for both Class A and Class B common stock on an individual or combined basis. We did not present dilutive net loss per share on an if-converted basis because the impact was not dilutive.

The following table sets forth the computation of basic and diluted net loss per share (in thousands, except per share amounts):

 

     Year Ended
December 31, 2011
    One Month Ended
January 31, 2012
    Year Ended
January 31, 2013
 
     Class A     Class B     Class A     Class B     Class A     Class B  

Numerator:

            

Net loss

   $ (50,252   $ (19   $ (5,110   $ (17   $ (111,274   $ (1,289

Add: accretion of redeemable convertible preferred stock

     (80            (9            (223     (3
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss attributable to common stockholders

   $ (50,332   $ (19   $ (5,119   $ (17   $ (111,497   $ (1,292
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Denominator:

            

Weighted-average number of shares outstanding—basic and diluted

     5,282        2        6,079        20        7,596        88   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss per share attributable to common stockholders—basic and diluted

   $ (9.53   $ (9.53 )*    $ (0.84   $ (0.84 )*    $ (14.68   $ (14.68
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

* Amounts cannot be recalculated due to rounding

 

F-36


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

     Year Ended
January 31, 2014
 
           Class A                 Class B        

Numerator:

    

Net loss

   $ (149,743   $ (18,814

Add: accretion of redeemable convertible preferred stock

     (303     (38
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss attributable to common stockholders

   $ (150,046   $ (18,852
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Denominator:

    

Weighted-average number of shares outstanding—basic and diluted

     10,075        1,266   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net loss per share attributable to common stockholders—basic and diluted

   $ (14.89   $ (14.89
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

The following weighted average outstanding shares of common stock equivalents were excluded from the computation of diluted net loss per share attributable to common stockholders for the periods presented because including them would have been antidilutive (in thousands):

 

     As of
December 31,

2011
     As of
January 31,
2012
     As of
January 31,
2013
     As of
January 31,

2014
 
           

Redeemable convertible preferred stock

     51,826         58,324         63,727         71,465   

Shares subject to options to purchase common stock

     9,137         10,492         13,441         17,036   

Shares subject to restricted stock units to purchase common stock

                             1   

Warrants to purchase redeemable convertible preferred stock

     731         772         772         736   

Repurchasable shares from early-exercised options and unvested restricted stock

     321         238         699         764   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     62,015         69,826         78,639         90,002   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Unaudited Pro Forma Net Loss per Share Attributable to Common Stockholders

As of January 31, 2014, we had two classes of common stock: Class A common stock and Class B common stock. The rights of the holders of our Class A and Class B common stock were identical except with respect to voting. The holders of our Class A common stock were entitled to one vote per share, and holders of our Class B common stock had no voting rights. Upon the completion of an initial public offering, all current outstanding shares of our Class A common stock, Class B common stock, and redeemable convertible preferred stock (including shares issuable upon the exercise of certain redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants) will convert into shares of our new Class B common stock. In addition, certain redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants and all options to purchase shares of our capital stock outstanding prior to the completion of an initial public offering will become exercisable for shares of our new Class B common stock after the completion of an initial public offering.

In contemplation of an initial public offering, pro forma basic and diluted net loss per share have been computed to give effect to the conversion of our Class A and Class B common stock, redeemable convertible preferred stock and certain redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants into our new Class B common stock as though the conversion had occurred as of the later of the beginning of the period or the original date of issuance, and the conversion of certain redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants into warrants to purchase our new Class B common stock.

 

F-37


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

The following table shows our calculation of the unaudited pro forma basic and diluted net loss per share (in thousands, except per share data):

 

                                                               
     Year Ended January 31, 2014  
     Existing
Class A
    Existing
Class B
    New
Class A
     New
Class B
 
     (unaudited)  

Numerator:

         

Net loss attributable to common stockholders

   $ (150,046   $ (18,852   $       $   

Accretion of redeemable convertible preferred stock

     303        38                  

Remeasurement of redeemable convertible preferred stock warrant liability

     7,531        946                  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Pro forma net loss attributable to common stockholders

     (142,212     (17,868               

Reallocation of pro forma net loss attributable to common stockholders as a result of existing Class A and Class B common stock, redeemable convertible preferred stock and certain redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants converting to new Class B common stock

     142,212        17,868                (160,080
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Net loss attributable to common stockholders used to compute pro forma net loss per share attributable to common stockholders—basic and diluted

   $      $      $       $ (160,080
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Denominator:

         

Weighted-average number of shares used to compute net loss per share—basic and diluted

     10,075        1,266                  

Pro forma adjustment to reflect assumed conversion of existing Class A and Class B common stock to new Class B common stock

     (10,075     (1,266             11,341   

Pro forma adjustment to reflect assumed conversion of redeemable convertible preferred stock to new Class B common stock

                           71,465   

Pro forma adjustment to reflect assumed conversion of certain redeemable convertible preferred stock warrants to new Class B common stock

                           142   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Weighted-average number of shares used to compute pro forma net loss per share—basic and diluted

                           82,948   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Pro forma net loss per share attributable to common stockholders—basic and diluted

   $      $      $       $ (1.93
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-38


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

Note 14. Income Taxes

The components of loss before provision (benefit) for income taxes were as follows (in thousands):

 

     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
    One Month Ended
January 31,

2012
    Year Ended
January 31,

2013
    Year Ended
January 31,
2014
 
          

United States

   $ (50,270   $ (5,112   $ (112,691   $ (148,032

Foreign

                   187        (22,956
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

   $ (50,270   $ (5,112   $ (112,504   $ (170,988
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The components of the provision (benefit) for income taxes were as follows (in thousands):

 

     Year Ended
December 31,

2011
     One Month Ended
January 31,

2012
     Year Ended
January 31,

2013
     Year Ended
January 31,
2014
 
             

Current:

           

Federal

   $       $       $       $ 17   

State

     1         15         12         53   

Foreign

                     47         89   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

   $ 1       $ 15       $ 59       $ 159   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Deferred:

           

Federal

   $       $       $       $ (2,360

State

                             (230
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

   $       $       $       $ (2,590
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Provision (benefit) for income taxes

   $ 1       $ 15       $ 59       $ (2,431
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The items accounting for the difference between income taxes computed at the federal statutory income tax rate of 34% and the provision for income taxes consisted of the following (in thousands):

 

     Year Ended
December 31,
2011
    One Month Ended
January 31,

2012
    Year Ended
January 31,

2013
    Year Ended
January 31,
2014
 

Tax benefit at federal statutory rate

   $ (17,119   $ (1,741   $ (38,328   $ (58,136

State taxes, net of federal benefit

     (2,666     (350     (7,097     (5,071

Foreign rate difference

                   (17     3,270   

Nondeductible expenses

     400        125        1,288        3,408   

Research and development credit

     (566            (1,376     (1,934

Stock-based compensation

     2,038        20        2,237        2,644   

Change in reserve for unrecognized tax benefits

     568        (260     663        3,937   

Other

     280        260        25        (421

Change in valuation allowance

     17,066        1,961        42,664        49,872   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Provision for income taxes

   $ 1      $ 15      $ 59      $ (2,431
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-39


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

The significant components of our deferred tax assets and liabilities were as follows (in thousands):

 

     January 31,
2013
    January 31,
2014
 

Deferred tax assets:

    

Net operating loss carryforward

   $ 64,446      $ 104,855   

Accruals and reserves

     5,006        5,377   

Stock-based compensation

     167        908   

Depreciation and amortization

     469        1,738   

Tax credit carryover

     2,068        3,960   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total deferred tax assets

     72,156        116,838   

Valuation allowance

     (72,135     (115,223
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total deferred tax assets, net of valuation allowance

     21        1,615   

Deferred tax liabilities:

    

Purchased intangible assets

            (1,524

Other

     (21     (91
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total deferred tax liabilities

     (21     (1,615
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net deferred tax assets

   $      $   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

In assessing the realizability of deferred tax assets, management considers whether it is more likely than not that some portion or all of the deferred tax assets will not be realized. As a result, we have established a full valuation allowance against our deferred tax assets to the extent they are not offset by liabilities from uncertain tax positions based on our history of losses. The valuation allowance increased by $42.6 million and $43.1 million during the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014. In addition, during the year ended January 31, 2014, we released $2.6 million of our valuation allowance as a result of our acquisition of Crocodoc. With the acquisition, a deferred tax liability was established for the book-tax basis difference related to purchased intangibles. The net deferred tax liability provided an additional source of income to support the realizability of pre-existing deferred tax assets.

We have not provided for U.S. federal and state income taxes on our foreign subsidiary’s undistributed earnings as of January 31, 2014 because such earnings are intended to be indefinitely reinvested. If we were to repatriate these earnings to the U.S., they would be subject to U.S. income taxes based on the U.S. statutory rate of 34% plus an applicable adjustment for foreign tax credits and foreign withholding taxes.

As of January 31, 2014, we had federal and state net operating loss carryforwards of $263.7 million and $262.6 million available to offset future taxable income. The federal net operating loss carryforward will expire at various dates beginning in 2025, if not utilized. The state net operating loss carryforward will expire at various dates beginning in 2016, if not utilized. In addition, as of January 31, 2014, we had federal and state research and development tax credit carryforwards of $4.6 million and $5.0 million. The federal research and development tax credit carryforwards will expire beginning in 2025, if not utilized. The state research and development tax credit carryforward do not expire.

Utilization of the net operating loss carryforwards and credits may be subject to substantial annual limitation due to the ownership change limitations provided by Section 382 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, and similar state provisions. The annual limitation may result in the expiration of net operating losses and credits before utilization.

 

F-40


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

We evaluate tax positions for recognition using a more-likely-than-not recognition threshold, and those tax positions eligible for recognition are measured as the largest amount of tax benefit that is greater than 50% likely of being realized upon the effective settlement with a taxing authority that has full knowledge of all relevant information.

As of December 31, 2011, January 31, 2013 and January 31, 2014, the total unrecognized tax benefits were $1.5 million, $2.5 million and $8.1 million. A reconciliation of the gross unrecognized tax benefits is as follows (in thousands):

 

     Amount  

Balance as of December 31, 2010

   $   

Additions for tax positions related to prior year

     497   

Additions for tax positions related to current year

     960   
  

 

 

 

Balance as of December 31, 2011

     1,457   

Additions for tax positions related to current year

     48   

Reductions for tax positions related to current year

     (348
  

 

 

 

Balance as of January 31, 2012

     1,157   

Additions for tax positions related to prior year

     49   

Additions for tax positions related to current year

     1,342   

Reductions for tax positions related to current year

     (33
  

 

 

 

Balance as of January 31, 2013

     2,515   

Additions for tax positions related to prior year

     547   

Additions for tax positions related to current year

     5,085   

Reductions for tax positions related to current year

       
  

 

 

 

Balance as of January 31, 2014

   $ 8,147   
  

 

 

 

The gross unrecognized tax benefits, if recognized, would not materially affect the effective tax rate as of December 31, 2011, January 31, 2012, 2013 and 2014. We do not expect our gross unrecognized tax benefits to change significantly in the next 12 months.

Our policy is to classify interest and penalties associated with uncertain tax positions, if any, as a component of our income tax provision. Interest and penalties were not significant during the year ended December 31, 2011, the one month ended January 31, 2012, and the years ended January 31, 2013 and 2014.

We file tax returns in the United States for federal, California, and other states. All tax years remain open to examination for both federal and state purposes as a result of the net operating loss and credit carryforwards. We file foreign tax returns in the United Kingdom starting with the year ended January 31, 2013 and with France, Germany and Japan starting with the year ended January 31, 2014. These tax years remain open to examination.

Note 15. Segments

Our chief operating decision maker reviews financial information presented on a consolidated basis for purposes of allocating resources and evaluating financial performance. As such, we have a single reporting segment and operating unit structure. In addition, substantially all of our revenue and long-lived assets are attributable to operations in the U.S. for all the periods presented.

 

F-41


Table of Contents

BOX, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(Continued)

 

Note 16. 401(k) Plan

We have a 401(k) Savings Plan (the 401(k) Plan) which qualifies as a deferred salary arrangement under Section 401(k) of the Internal Revenue Code. Under the 401(k) Plan, participating employees may elect to contribute up to 100% of their eligible compensation, subject to certain limitations. We have not made any matching contributions to date.

Note 17. Subsequent Events

For our consolidated financial statements as of and for the year ended January 31, 2014, we evaluated subsequent events through March 24, 2014, which is the date the financial statements were available to be issued.

 

F-42


Table of Contents

LOGO

Our Mission:
To make organizations more productive, competitive and collaborative by connecting people and their most important information.


Table of Contents

LOGO

box
Without walls™
Morgan Stanley Credit Suisse J.P. Morgan
BMO Capital Markets
Canaccord Genuity Pacific Crest Securities Raymond James Wells Fargo Securities


Table of Contents

PART II

INFORMATION NOT REQUIRED IN PROSPECTUS

ITEM 13. OTHER EXPENSES OF ISSUANCE AND DISTRIBUTION.

The following table sets forth all expenses to be paid by the Registrant, other than underwriting discounts and commissions, upon the completion of this offering. All amounts shown are estimates except for the SEC registration fee, the FINRA filing fee and the exchange listing fee.

 

SEC registration fee

     $32,200   

FINRA filing fee

     38,000   

Exchange listing fee

     *   

Printing and engraving expenses

     *   

Legal fees and expenses

     *   

Accounting fees and expenses

     *   

Transfer agent and registrar fees

     *   

Miscellaneous expenses

     *   
  

 

 

 

Total

     $            *   
  

 

 

 

 

* To be filed by amendment.

ITEM 14. INDEMNIFICATION OF DIRECTORS AND OFFICERS.

Section 145 of the Delaware General Corporation Law authorizes a corporation’s board of directors to grant, and authorizes a court to award, indemnity to officers, directors, and other corporate agents.

On the completion of this offering, as permitted by Section 102(b)(7) of the Delaware General Corporation Law, the Registrant’s amended and restated certificate of incorporation will include provisions that eliminate the personal liability of its directors and officers for monetary damages for breach of their fiduciary duty as directors and officers.

In addition, as permitted by Section 145 of the Delaware General Corporation Law, the amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws of the Registrant will provide that:

 

    The Registrant shall indemnify its directors and officers for serving the Registrant in those capacities or for serving other business enterprises at the Registrant’s request, to the fullest extent permitted by Delaware law. Delaware law provides that a corporation may indemnify such person if such person acted in good faith and in a manner such person reasonably believed to be in or not opposed to the best interests of the Registrant and, with respect to any criminal proceeding, had no reasonable cause to believe such person’s conduct was unlawful.

 

    The Registrant may, in its discretion, indemnify employees and agents in those circumstances where indemnification is permitted by applicable law.

 

    The Registrant is required to advance expenses, as incurred, to its directors and officers in connection with defending a proceeding, except that such director or officer shall undertake to repay such advances if it is ultimately determined that such person is not entitled to indemnification.

 

    The Registrant will not be obligated pursuant to the amended and restated bylaws to indemnify a person with respect to proceedings initiated by that person, except with respect to proceedings authorized by the Registrant’s board of directors or brought to enforce a right to indemnification.

 

    The rights conferred in the amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws are not exclusive, and the Registrant is authorized to enter into indemnification agreements with its directors, officers, employees, and agents and to obtain insurance to indemnify such persons.

 

II-1


Table of Contents
    The Registrant may not retroactively amend the bylaw provisions to reduce its indemnification obligations to directors, officers, employees, and agents.

The Registrant’s policy is to enter into separate indemnification agreements with each of its directors and officers that provide the maximum indemnity allowed to directors and executive officers by Section 145 of the Delaware General Corporation Law and also to provide for certain additional procedural protections. The Registrant also maintains directors and officers insurance to insure such persons against certain liabilities.

These indemnification provisions and the indemnification agreements entered into between the Registrant and its officers and directors may be sufficiently broad to permit indemnification of the Registrant’s officers and directors for liabilities (including reimbursement of expenses incurred) arising under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (Securities Act).

The underwriting agreement to be filed as Exhibit 1.1 to this registration statement will provide for indemnification by the underwriters of the Registrant and its officers and directors for certain liabilities arising under the Securities Act and otherwise.

ITEM 15. RECENT SALES OF UNREGISTERED SECURITIES.

Since January 1, 2011, the Registrant issued the following unregistered securities:

Preferred Stock Issuances

From February 2011 through April 2011, the Registrant sold an aggregate of 11,543,699 shares of its Series D redeemable convertible preferred stock to 14 accredited investors at a purchase price of $3.1619 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $36,500,022, and issued an aggregate of 411,138 shares of its Series D redeemable convertible preferred stock to 12 accredited investors pursuant to a stock purchase agreement by and among the Registrant and certain stockholders of the Registrant. The Registrant believes these transactions were exempt from registration under the Securities Act in reliance upon Section 4(2) of the Securities Act and Regulation D promulgated thereunder as transactions not involving a public offering.

From August 2011 through September 2011, the Registrant sold an aggregate of 3,218,033 shares of its Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock to 10 accredited investors at a purchase price of $8.0314 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $25,845,311, and issued an aggregate of 641,815 shares of its Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock to seven accredited investors pursuant to a stock purchase agreement by and among the Registrant and certain stockholders of the Registrant. The Registrant believes these transactions were exempt from registration under the Securities Act in reliance upon Section 4(2) of the Securities Act and Regulation D promulgated thereunder as transactions not involving a public offering.

From October 2011 through March 2012, the Registrant sold an aggregate of 3,529,927 shares of its Series D-2 redeemable convertible preferred stock to five accredited investors at a purchase price of $9.0657 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $32,001,260. The Registrant believes these transactions were exempt from registration under the Securities Act in reliance upon Section 4(2) of the Securities Act and Regulation D promulgated thereunder as transactions not involving a public offering.

From August 2012 through October 2012, the Registrant sold an aggregate of 11,454,838 shares of its Series E redeemable convertible preferred stock to 17 accredited investors at a purchase price of $13.0949 per share, for an aggregate purchase price of $149,999,959. The Registrant believes these transactions were exempt from registration under the Securities Act in reliance upon Section 4(2) of the Securities Act and Regulation D promulgated thereunder as transactions not involving a public offering.

From October 2013 through January 2014, the Registrant sold an aggregate of 5,554,440 shares of its Series E-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock to 17 accredited investors at a purchase price of $18.00 per share, for

 

II-2


Table of Contents

an aggregate purchase price of $99,979,920. The Registrant believes these transactions were exempt from registration under the Securities Act in reliance upon Section 4(2) of the Securities Act as transactions not involving a public offering.

Warrant Issuances

In August 2011, the Registrant issued a warrant to purchase 62,255 shares of its Series D-1 redeemable convertible preferred stock to one accredited investor in connection with a loan and security agreement at an exercise price of $8.0314 per share.

Option, RSU and Common Stock Issuances

Since January 1, 2011, the Registrant granted to its directors, officers, employees, consultants and other service providers options to purchase an aggregate of 21,714,532 shares of its common stock under its equity compensation plans at exercise prices ranging from $0.59 to $14.06 per share.

Since January 1, 2011, the Registrant issued to its directors, officers, employees, consultants and other service providers an aggregate of 225,300 restricted stock units to be settled in shares of its common stock under its equity compensation plans.

Since January 1, 2011, the Registrant issued to its directors, officers, employees, consultants and other service providers an aggregate of 480,935 shares of its restricted common stock under its equity compensation plans.

Since January 1, 2011, the Registrant issued an aggregate of 5,000 shares of its common stock to a former service provider in consideration for services rendered.

Common Stock Issuances in Connection with Acquisitions

In February 2011, the Registrant issued 10,000 shares of its common stock as consideration to a company in connection with its acquisition of certain assets from the company.

In May 2013, the Registrant issued 813,405 shares of its common stock as consideration to 32 individuals and 13 entities in connection with its acquisition of all of the outstanding shares of a company.

In September 2013, the Registrant issued 50,000 shares of its common stock as consideration to a company in connection with its acquisition of certain assets from the company.

None of the foregoing transactions involved any underwriters, underwriting discounts or commissions, or any public offering. Unless otherwise specified above, the Registrant believes these transactions were exempt from registration under the Securities Act in reliance upon Section 4(2) of the Securities Act (or Regulation S promulgated thereunder), or Rule 701 promulgated under Section 3(b) of the Securities Act as transactions by an issuer not involving any public offering or pursuant to benefit plans and contracts relating to compensation as provided under Rule 701. The recipients of the securities in each of these transactions represented their intentions to acquire the securities for investment only and not with a view to or for sale in connection with any distribution thereof, and appropriate legends were placed upon the stock certificates issued in these transactions. All recipients had adequate access, through their relationships with the Registrant, to information about the Registrant. The sales of these securities were made without any general solicitation or advertising.

 

II-3


Table of Contents

ITEM 16. EXHIBITS AND FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES.

(a) Exhibits.

We have filed the exhibits listed on the accompanying Exhibit Index of this Registration Statement.

(b) Financial Statement Schedules.

All financial statement schedules are omitted because the information called for is not required or is shown either in the consolidated financial statements or in the notes thereto.

ITEM 17. UNDERTAKINGS.

The undersigned Registrant hereby undertakes to provide to the underwriters at the closing specified in the underwriting agreement certificates in such denominations and registered in such names as required by the underwriters to permit prompt delivery to each purchaser.

Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act of 1933 may be permitted to directors, officers, and controlling persons of the Registrant pursuant to the foregoing provisions, or otherwise, the Registrant has been advised that in the opinion of the Securities and Exchange Commission such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Act and is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for indemnification against such liabilities (other than the payment by the Registrant of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer, or controlling person of the Registrant in the successful defense of any action, suit, or proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer, or controlling person in connection with the securities being registered, the Registrant will, unless in the opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled by controlling precedent, submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction the question whether such indemnification by it is against public policy as expressed in the Act and will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.

The undersigned Registrant hereby undertakes that:

(1) For purposes of determining any liability under the Securities Act of 1933, the information omitted from the form of prospectus filed as part of this registration statement in reliance upon Rule 430A and contained in a form of prospectus filed by the Registrant pursuant to Rule 424(b)(1) or (4) or 497(h) under the Securities Act shall be deemed to be part of this registration statement as of the time it was declared effective.

(2) For the purpose of determining any liability under the Securities Act of 1933, each post-effective amendment that contains a form of prospectus shall be deemed to be a new registration statement relating to the securities offered therein, and the offering of such securities at that time shall be deemed to be the initial bona fide offering thereof.

 

II-4


Table of Contents

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, the Registrant has duly caused this registration statement on Form S-1 to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in Los Altos, California, on the 24 th day of March, 2014.

 

BOX, INC.
By:   /s/ Aaron Levie
 

  Aaron Levie

  Chairman and Chief Executive Officer

POWER OF ATTORNEY

KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS , that each person whose signature appears below hereby constitutes and appoints Aaron Levie, Dylan Smith, Dan Levin and Peter McGoff, and each of them, as his or her true and lawful attorney-in-fact and agent with full power of substitution, for him or her in any and all capacities, to sign any and all amendments to this registration statement (including post-effective amendments or any abbreviated registration statement and any amendments thereto filed pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act of 1933 increasing the number of securities for which registration is sought), and to file the same, with all exhibits thereto and other documents in connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange Commission, granting unto said attorney-in-fact, proxy, and agent full power and authority to do and perform each and every act and thing requisite and necessary to be done in connection therewith, as fully for all intents and purposes as he or she might or could do in person, hereby ratifying and confirming all that said attorney-in-fact, proxy and agent, or his substitute, may lawfully do or cause to be done by virtue hereof.

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this registration statement on Form S-1 has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

 

Signature

  

Title

 

Date

/s/ Aaron Levie   

Chairman and Chief Executive Officer

(Principal Executive Officer)

  March 24, 2014

 

Aaron Levie

    
/s/ Dylan Smith   

Chief Financial Officer and Director

(Principal Financial Officer)

  March 24, 2014

 

Dylan Smith

    
/s/ Jeff Mannie   

Vice President, Controller and Chief Accounting Officer

(Principal Accounting Officer)

  March 24, 2014

 

Jeff Mannie

    
/s/ Dana Evan    Director   March 24, 2014

 

Dana Evan

    
/s/ Steven Krausz    Director   March 24, 2014

 

Steven Krausz

    
/s/ Dan Levin    President, Chief Operating Officer and Director   March 24, 2014

 

Dan Levin

    

 

II-5


Table of Contents

Signature

  

Title

 

Date

/s/ Rory O’Driscoll    Director   March 24, 2014

 

Rory O’Driscoll

    
/s/ Gary Reiner    Director   March 24, 2014

 

Gary Reiner

    
/s/ Josh Stein    Director   March 24, 2014

 

Josh Stein

    
/s/ Padmasree Warrior    Director   March 24, 2014

 

Padmasree Warrior

    

 

II-6


Table of Contents

EXHIBIT INDEX

 

Exhibit
Number

  

Description

  1.1*    Form of Underwriting Agreement.
  3.1    Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of the Registrant, as currently in effect.
  3.2*    Form of Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of the Registrant, to be in effect upon the completion of this offering.
  3.3    Bylaws of the Registrant, as currently in effect.
  3.4*    Form of Amended and Restated Bylaws of the Registrant, to be in effect upon the completion of this offering.
  4.1*    Form of common stock certificate of the Registrant.
  4.2*    Seventh Amended and Restated Investors’ Rights Agreement among the Registrant and certain holders of its capital stock, dated as of October 15, 2013.
  5.1*    Opinion of Wilson Sonsini Goodrich & Rosati, P.C.
10.1+*    Form of Indemnification Agreement between the Registrant and each of its directors and executive officers.
10.2+*    Box, Inc. 2014 Equity Incentive Plan and related form agreements.
10.3+*    Box, Inc. 2014 Employee Stock Purchase Plan and related form agreements.
10.4+    Box, Inc. 2011 Equity Incentive Plan and related form agreements.
10.5+    Box, Inc. 2006 Stock Incentive Plan and related form agreements.
10.6+*    Box, Inc. Executive Incentive Compensation Plan.
10.7+    Form of Executive Severance Agreement between the Registrant and each of its executive officers.
10.8+*    Offer Letter between the Registrant and Aaron Levie.
10.9+*    Offer Letter between the Registrant and Dan Levin.
10.10+*    Offer Letter between the Registrant and Dylan Smith.
10.11+*    Offer Letter between the Registrant and Peter McGoff.
10.12+*    Offer Letter between the Registrant and Graham Younger.
10.13    Office Lease between the Registrant and Behringer Harvard El Camino Real LP, dated as of June 16, 2011.
10.14    Credit Agreement among the Registrant, the lenders party thereto and Credit Suisse AG, Cayman Islands Branch, as Administrative Agent and Collateral Agent, dated as of August 27, 2013.
10.15 ¥    Master License and Service Agreement between the Registrant and the other party thereto, dated as of March 17, 2008.
10.16    Master Service Agreement between the Registrant and Equinix Operating Co., Inc., dated as of April 29, 2008.
10.17    Colocation Facilities Agreement between the Registrant and Switch Communications Group, L.L.C., dated as of December 20, 2011.
21.1    List of subsidiaries of the Registrant.


Table of Contents

Exhibit
Number

  

Description

23.1    Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm.
23.2*    Consent of Wilson Sonsini Goodrich & Rosati, P.C. (included in Exhibit 5.1).
24.1    Power of Attorney (see the signature page to this Registration Statement on Form S-1).

 

* To be filed by amendment.
+ Indicates management contract or compensatory plan.
¥ Confidential treatment has been requested as to certain portions of this exhibit, which portions have been omitted and submitted separately to the Securities and Exchange Commission.

Exhibit 3.1

AMENDED AND RESTATED

CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION

OF

BOX, INC . ,

a Delaware Corporation

The undersigned does hereby certify on behalf of Box, Inc. (the “ Corporation ”), a corporation organized and existing under the Delaware General Corporation Law, as follows:

FIRST: That the undersigned is the duly elected and acting Chief Executive Officer of the Corporation.

SECOND: That the Certificate of Incorporation of the Corporation was originally filed with the Secretary of State of the State of Delaware on March 11, 2008, under the name “Box.Net, Inc.”

THIRD: That pursuant to Sections 242 and 245 of the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware, the Certificate of Incorporation of the Corporation, as amended to the date of the filing of this certificate, is hereby amended and restated in its entirety as set forth in Exhibit A hereto.

FOURTH: That the Amendment and Restatement of the Certificate of Incorporation of the Corporation as set forth in Exhibit A hereto has been duly adopted and approved by the board of directors and stockholders of the Corporation in accordance with the applicable provisions of Sections 141, 228, 242 and 245 of the Delaware General Corporation Law.

The undersigned hereby further declares and certifies under penalty of perjury that the facts set forth in the foregoing certificate are true and correct to the knowledge of the undersigned, and that this certificate is the act and deed of the undersigned.

Executed in Palo Alto, California on this 14th day of October, 2013.

By:   /s/ Aaron Levie
  Aaron Levie, Chief Executive Officer


EXHIBIT A

AMENDED AND RESTATED CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION

OF

BOX, INC.

ARTICLE I

The name of this corporation (the “ Corporation ”) is Box, Inc.

ARTICLE II

The address of the registered office of the Corporation in the State of Delaware is 2711 Centerville Road, Suite 400, City of Wilmington, County of New Castle, 19808. The name of its registered agent at that address is Corporation Service Company.

ARTICLE III

The purpose of the Corporation is to engage in any lawful act or activity for which a corporation may be organized under the General Corporation Law of Delaware.

ARTICLE IV

(A) Classes of Capital Stock

This Corporation is authorized to issue 222,957,959 shares of capital stock in the aggregate. The capital stock of this Corporation shall be divided into two classes, designated “Common Stock” and “Preferred Stock.” The number of shares of Common Stock the Corporation is authorized to issue is 145,856,000, 120,856,000 of which shall be designated as Class A Common Stock (“ Class A Common ”) and 25,000,000 of which shall be designated as Class B Common Stock (“ Class B Common ”). The number of shares of Preferred Stock the Corporation is authorized to issue is 77,101,959, 5,315,560 of which shall be designated as Series A Preferred Stock (“ Series A Preferred ”), 20,331,812 of which shall be designated as Series B Preferred Stock (“ Series B Preferred ”), 14,261,720 of which shall be designated as Series C Preferred Stock (“ Series C Preferred ,”), 11,954,837 of which shall be designated as Series D Preferred Stock (“ Series D Preferred ”), 3,922,103 of which shall be designated as Series D-1 Preferred Stock (“ Series D-1 Preferred ”), 3,529,927 of which shall be designated as Series D-2 Preferred Stock (“ Series D-2 Preferred ”), 12,230,000 of which shall be designated as Series E Preferred Stock (“ Series E Preferred ”) and 5,556,000 of which shall be designated as Series E-1 Preferred Stock (“ Series E-1 Preferred ,” and together with the Series A Preferred, Series B Preferred, Series C Preferred, Series D Preferred, Series D-1 Preferred, Series D-2 and Series E Preferred, the “ Series Preferred ”). The Common Stock and Preferred Stock shall each have a par value equal to $0.0001 per share. The Corporation shall from time to time in accordance with the General Corporation Law of Delaware increase the authorized amount of its Common Stock if at any time the number of shares of Common Stock remaining unissued and available for issuance shall not be sufficient to permit conversion of the Preferred Stock.


(B) Rights, Preferences, Privileges and Restrictions of Preferred Stock

The relative rights, preferences, privileges and restrictions granted to or imposed upon the respective series of Preferred Stock or the holders thereof are as follows:

1. Dividends

(a) The holders of Series E-1 Preferred, Series E Preferred, Series D-2 Preferred, Series D-1 Preferred, Series D Preferred, Series C Preferred, Series B Preferred and Series A Preferred shall be entitled to receive, on a pari passu basis, a cash dividend at the rate of $1.44, $1.0476, $0.7253, $0.6425, $0.2530, $0.1024 $0.0527 and $0.0230 per share (in each case, as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like with respect to such shares), respectively, per annum on each outstanding share of Series E-1 Preferred, Series E Preferred, Series D-2 Preferred, Series D-1 Preferred, Series D Preferred, Series C Preferred, Series B Preferred and Series A Preferred, as applicable, payable out of funds legally available therefor. Such dividends shall be payable when, as, and if declared by the Board of Directors of the Corporation, acting in its sole discretion. The right to receive dividends shall not be cumulative, and no right shall accrue to holders of any shares by reason of the fact that dividends on such shares are not declared and paid in any prior year.

(b) No dividend, whether in cash or property, shall be paid or declared and set aside in any period with respect to the Common Stock, unless and until dividends have been paid or declared and set aside for payment in such year with respect to every outstanding series of Preferred Stock in an amount for each such series of Preferred Stock equal to the annual dividend rates stated above. After payment of dividends at the annual rates set forth above, any additional dividends declared shall be distributed among all holders of Preferred Stock and Common Stock in proportion to the number of shares of Common Stock that would be held by each such holder if all shares of Preferred Stock were converted into Class A Common pursuant to Section 4 hereof. This Section 1(b) shall not apply to a dividend solely in Common Stock to which the provisions of Section 4(d)(ii)(B) hereof are applicable.

(c) If at the time any shares of Preferred Stock are converted into Class A Common there are any accrued but unpaid dividends on such shares, then the Corporation at its option shall either pay the unpaid dividends or issue additional shares of Class A Common in the amount of the unpaid dividends at the applicable fair market value for such shares then in effect.

2. Liquidation

(a) In the event of any liquidation, dissolution or winding up of the Corporation, either voluntary or involuntary, the holders of the Series A Preferred, the Series B Preferred, the Series C Preferred, the Series D Preferred, the Series D-1 Preferred, the Series D-2 Preferred, the Series E Preferred and the Series E-1 Preferred shall be entitled to receive on a pari passu basis, prior and in preference to any distribution of any of the assets of the Corporation to the holders of the Common Stock, the amount of $0.2869, $0.6585, $1.28, $3.1619, $8.0314, $9.0657, $13.0949 and $18.00 per share of Series A Preferred, Series B Preferred, Series C

 

2


Preferred, Series D Preferred, Series D-1 Preferred, Series D-2 Preferred, Series E Preferred and Series E-1 Preferred, respectively (in each case, as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like with respect to such shares), plus all accrued or declared but unpaid dividends on such shares. If the assets available for distribution to the holders of Preferred Stock shall be insufficient to pay the stated preferential amounts in full, then the entire assets and funds of the Corporation legally available for distribution shall be distributed ratably to the holders of Preferred Stock in proportion to the preferential amount each such holder is otherwise entitled to receive. After payment in full of the preferential amounts has been made to the holders of Preferred Stock, all remaining assets of the Corporation legally available for distribution shall be distributed ratably among the holders of the Common Stock, Series B Preferred, Series C Preferred, Series D Preferred, Series D-1 Preferred, and Series D-2 Preferred in proportion to the number of shares of Common Stock that would be held by each such holder if all shares of Series B Preferred, Series C Preferred, Series D Preferred, Series D-1 Preferred, and Series D-2 Preferred were converted into Class A Common pursuant to Section 4 hereof; provided , however , that the total amounts that may be distributed to the holders of Series B Preferred pursuant to this Section 2 shall not exceed $1.6463 per share of Series B Preferred (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like with respect to such shares) plus all declared and unpaid dividends; provided further , that the total amounts that may be distributed to the holders of Series C Preferred pursuant to this Section 2 shall not exceed $3.20 per share of Series C Preferred (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like with respect to such shares) plus all declared and unpaid dividends; provided further , that the total amounts that may be distributed to the holders of Series D Preferred pursuant to this Section 2 shall not exceed $7.9048 per share of Series D Preferred (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like with respect to such shares) plus all declared and unpaid dividends; provided further , that the total amounts that may be distributed to the holders of Series D-1 Preferred pursuant to this Section 2 shall not exceed $16.0628 per share of Series D-1 Preferred (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like with respect to such shares) plus all declared and unpaid dividends; provided further , that the total amounts that may be distributed to the holders of Series D-2 Preferred pursuant to this Section 2 shall not exceed $18.1314 per share of Series D-2 Preferred (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like with respect to such shares) plus all declared and unpaid dividends.

(b) After the amounts set forth in Section 2(a) have been paid in full, all remaining assets of the Corporation legally available for distribution shall be distributed ratably among the holders of the Common Stock.

(c) For purposes of this Section 2, a liquidation, dissolution or winding up of the Corporation (a “ Liquidation Event ”) (i) shall be deemed to include (A) the Corporation’s sale, lease, exclusive license or other disposition of all or substantially all of its assets, and (B) the acquisition of the Corporation by another entity by means of any transaction or series of related transactions to which the Corporation is a party (including, without limitation, any stock acquisition, merger or other form of corporate reorganization) other than a transaction or series of related transactions in which the holders of the voting securities of the Corporation outstanding immediately prior to such transaction or series of related transactions retain, immediately after such transaction or series of related transactions, as a result of shares in the Corporation held by such holders prior to such transaction or series of related transactions, at

 

3


least a majority of the total voting power represented by the outstanding voting securities of the Corporation or such other surviving or resulting entity (or, if the Corporation or such other surviving or resulting entity is a wholly owned subsidiary immediately following such acquisition, its parent) (any such event described in Section 2(c)(i)(A) and (B), a “ Deemed Liquidation ”) and (ii) shall entitle the holders of each series of Preferred Stock to receive at the closing of any Liquidation Event and at each date after such closing on which additional amounts (such as earnout payments, escrow amounts and other contingent payments) are paid to stockholders of the Corporation the greater of (x) the amount to which such holder of Preferred Stock is entitled pursuant to Section 2(a) (without giving effect to this Section 2(c)) or (y) the amount such holder of Preferred Stock would be entitled to receive had such holder of Preferred Stock converted its shares of such series of Preferred Stock into Class A Common as provided in Section 4, immediately prior to the closing, evaluating this Section 2(c)(ii) with respect to each series of Preferred Stock taking into account the application of this Section 2(c)(ii) with respect to each other series of Preferred Stock. For the sake of clarification, an equity financing in which the Corporation is the surviving entity and the sole purpose of which is raising capital shall not be considered a Deemed Liquidation hereunder.

(d) Unless otherwise specified in a definitive agreement approved by the stockholders of the Corporation in accordance with the Delaware General Corporation Law, this Certificate of Incorporation and the Corporation’s bylaws, in each case as then in effect, the value of any securities to be delivered to the stockholders pursuant to this Section 2 shall be determined as follows:

(i) If traded on a national securities exchange, the value shall be deemed to be the average of the closing prices of the securities on such exchange over the thirty (30) day period ending three (3) days prior to the closing of such transaction;

(ii) If actively traded over the counter, the value shall be deemed to be the average of the closing bid prices over the thirty (30) day period ending three (3) days prior to the closing; and

(iii) If there is no active public market, the value shall be the fair market value thereof as determined in good faith by the Corporation’s Board of Directors.

Notwithstanding the above, the method of valuation of securities subject to investment letters or other similar restrictions on free marketability shall take into account an appropriate discount (as determined in good faith by the Corporation’s Board of Directors) from the market value as determined pursuant to the preceding clauses (i), (ii) and (iii), so as to reflect the approximate fair market value thereof.

(e) Notwithstanding any other provisions of this Section 2, the Corporation may at any time, out of funds legally available for such purpose, repurchase shares of Common Stock at cost (or the lesser of cost or fair market value) issued to or held by officers, directors, employees or other service providers upon termination of their employment or services pursuant to agreements providing the Corporation with such a right of repurchase, whether or not all declared dividends have been paid or set aside for payment and whether or not all Preferred Stock required to be redeemed by the Corporation has been redeemed or funds have been set aside for such purpose.

 

4


3. Redemption

(a) If requested by the holders of not less than sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66-2/3%) of the outstanding shares of Voting Preferred (as defined below), voting as a single class, at any time after August 7, 2017, the Corporation shall redeem all outstanding shares of Preferred Stock in three equal, annual installments (each a “ Redemption Date ”), from any funds legally available for such purpose; provided, however, that if such a request is made, the prior approval of the holders of at least a majority of the outstanding shares of Series E Preferred shall also be required to redeem the shares of Series E Preferred. The number of shares to be redeemed from each holder on each Redemption Date shall equal the total number of shares of each series of Preferred Stock held by such holder on the date of the applicable Redemption Notice (as defined below), divided by the number of Redemption Dates remaining as of the date of the Redemption Notice, including the Redemption Date to which such calculation applies, minus the number of shares of that series of Preferred Stock that such holder converts into Class A Common after the date of the applicable Redemption Notice and prior to such Redemption Date. The Corporation shall effect redemption by paying cash in an amount equal to $0.2869 per share of Series A Preferred, $0.6585 per share of Series B Preferred, $1.28 per share of Series C Preferred, $3.1619 per share of Series D Preferred, $8.0314 per share of Series D-1 Preferred, $9.0657 per share of Series D-2 Preferred, $13.0949 per share of Series E Preferred and $18.00 per share of Series E-1 Preferred (in each case, as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like with respect to such shares) plus all accrued or declared but unpaid dividends on such shares (the “ Redemption Prices ”).

(b) If the funds of the Corporation legally available for redemption of shares of Preferred Stock on any Redemption Date are insufficient to redeem the total number of shares of Preferred Stock to be redeemed on such date, those funds that are legally available will be used to redeem shares from the holders of Preferred Stock, on a pari passu basis and ratably in proportion to the aggregate Redemption Price that would be payable to each holder of Preferred Stock if all shares of Preferred Stock required to be redeemed were being redeemed. If any holder holds more than one series of Preferred Stock, the same proportion of each series of shares held by such holder will be redeemed. The shares of Preferred Stock not redeemed shall remain outstanding and entitled to all the rights and preferences provided herein, including the rights of conversion set forth herein. If any time thereafter additional funds become legally available for the redemption, such funds will immediately be used to redeem the balance of the shares which the Corporation has become obliged to redeem on any Redemption Date but which it has not redeemed.

(c) At least thirty (30) days prior to each Redemption Date, the Corporation shall mail a redemption notice (the “ Redemption Notice ”), first class postage prepaid, to each holder of record of Preferred Stock as of the close of business two (2) business days preceding the mailing date, at the address last shown on the records of the Corporation for such holder. The Redemption Notice shall specify the number of shares to be redeemed from such holder, the Redemption Date, the Redemption Price and the place at which payment may be obtained, and shall call upon such holder to surrender to the Corporation, in the manner and at the place designated, the certificate or certificates representing the shares to be redeemed. On or after the

 

5


Redemption Date, each holder of Preferred Stock to be redeemed shall surrender to the Corporation the certificate or certificates representing such shares, in the manner and at the place designated in the Redemption Notice. Each surrendered certificate shall be cancelled, and the Redemption Price for such shares shall then be payable to the order of the person whose name appears on such certificate or certificates as the owner thereof. If less than all the shares represented by any such certificate are redeemed, a new certificate shall be issued representing the unredeemed shares. Nothing herein shall be deemed to prevent a holder of Preferred Stock from converting all or part of such holder’s shares into Class A Common in accordance with the terms of Section 4 hereof at any time prior to a Redemption Date covering such shares, and the provisions of this Section 3 shall not apply to any shares so converted.

(d) From and after the applicable Redemption Date, unless there has been a failure for any reason in payment of the Redemption Price or if the Redemption Price has been desposited into escrow by the Corporation, subject only to the receipt of stock certificates by the Corporation from the holder thereof together with valid stock powers attached transferring ownership of such shares to the Corporation, the shares of Preferred Stock designated for redemption in the applicable Redemption Notice with respect to which the Redemption Price has been paid in full or the Redemption Price has been so placed in escrow shall cease to be outstanding and shall no longer be transferred on the books of the Corporation, and all rights of the holders with respect to such shares shall cease.

4. Conversion

(a) Right to Convert . Each share of Preferred Stock shall be convertible, at the option of the holder thereof, at any time after the date of issuance of such share, at the office of the Corporation or any transfer agent for such stock, into such number of fully paid and nonassessable shares of Class A Common as is determined by dividing $0.2869 in the case of Series A Preferred, $0.6585 in the case of Series B Preferred, $1.28 in the case of Series C Preferred, $3.1619 in the case of Series D Preferred, $8.0314 in the case of Series D-1 Preferred, $9.0657 in the case of Series D-2 Preferred, $13.0949 in the case of Series E Preferred and $18.00 in the case of Series E-1 Preferred, in each case as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like with respect to such shares, by the then effective Conversion Price for such series of Preferred Stock (such result, the “ Conversion Rate ”). The initial Series A Conversion Price shall be $0.2869 and is subject to adjustment as provided in this Section 4. The initial Series B Conversion Price shall be $0.6585 and is subject to adjustment as provided in this Section 4. The initial Series C Conversion Price shall be $1.28 and is subject to adjustment as provided in this Section 4. The initial Series D Conversion Price shall be $3.1619 and is subject to adjustment as provided in this Section 4. The initial Series D-1 Conversion Price shall be $8.0314 and is subject to adjustment as provided in this Section 4. The initial Series D-2 Conversion Price shall be $9.0657 and is subject to adjustment as provided in this Section 4. The initial Series E Conversion Price shall be $13.0949 and is subject to adjustment as provided in this Section 4. The initial Series E-1 Conversion Price shall be $18.00 and is subject to adjustment as provided in this Section 4.

 

6


(b) Automatic Conversion . Each share of Preferred Stock shall automatically be converted into shares of Class A Common at the then effective Conversion Rate applicable to such share of Preferred Stock (i) with the approval, by affirmative vote, written consent, or agreement, of the holders of at least (A) sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66-2/3%) of the outstanding shares of Voting Preferred, voting together as one class; (B) sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66-2/3%) of the outstanding shares of Series C Preferred, voting as a separate class; and (C) sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66-2/3%) of the outstanding shares of Series D Preferred, voting as a separate class; provided, however, if such automatic conversion pursuant to this clause (i) is in conjunction with a Liquidation Event and if the proceeds of such Liquidation Event to be received by the holders of Series E Preferred, Series D-2 Preferred or Series D-1 Preferred as holders of Class A Common (i.e., after giving effect to such automatic conversion pursuant to this clause (i)), as applicable, would be less, in the aggregate, than the proceeds of such Liquidation Event to be received by the holders of Series E Preferred, Series D-2 Preferred or Series D-1 Preferred as holders of Series E Preferred, Series D-2 Preferred or Series D-1 Preferred (i.e., assuming that no such automatic conversion pursuant to this clause (i) had occurred with respect to such series), as applicable, then the Series E Conversion Price, the Series D-2 Conversion Price and/or the Series D-1 Conversion Price, as the case may be, otherwise applicable to such automatic conversion pursuant to this clause (i) shall be automatically adjusted to a conversion price per share that would result in the holders of Series E Preferred, Series D-2 Preferred and/or Series D-1 Preferred, as applicable, being automatically converted into that number of shares of Class A Common that would cause such holders to receive, as holders of such Class A Common in the applicable Liquidation Event, an aggregate amount that is equal to the amount that would have been distributed to the holders of Series E Preferred, Series D-2 Preferred and/or Series D-1 Preferred, as applicable, pursuant to Section 2(a) with respect to such Liquidation Event had such automatic conversion to Class A Common pursuant to this clause (i) not occurred, or (ii) upon the closing of a firmly underwritten public offering pursuant to an effective registration statement under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, of Class A Common for the account of the Corporation in an offering to the public of not less than $100,000,000 (before payment of underwriter commissions and offering expenses) in which the Corporation’s shares of Class A Common have been listed for trading on the New York Stock Exchange, NASDAQ Global Select Market or NASDAQ Global Market (a “Qualified IPO”), provided, however, if the price per share of Class A Common sold in any public offering of the Company’s Class A Common (including a Qualified IPO) is less than $9.0657 per share (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like with respect to such shares) and is less than the then-effective Series D-2 Conversion Price, the Series D-2 Conversion Price shall, immediately prior to the closing of such public offering, be automatically adjusted to a conversion price per share equal to the price per share of Class A Common sold in the applicable public offering (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like with respect to such shares); provided, further, if the price per share of stock sold in any public offering of the Company’s Class A Common (including a Qualified IPO) is less than $13.0949 per share (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like with respect to such shares) and is less than the then-effective Series E Conversion Price, the Series E Conversion Price shall, immediately prior to the closing of such public offering, be automatically adjusted to a conversion price per share equal to the price per share of Class A Common sold in the applicable public offering (as adjusted for any stock dividends, combinations, splits, recapitalizations or the like with respect to such shares); provided, further, that notwithstanding clauses (i) and (ii) above, or anything else herein to the contrary, any automatic conversion of the Series D-2 Preferred that is not effected in connection with a Liquidation Event or a Qualified IPO shall also require the approval, by

 

7


affirmative vote or written consent, of the holders of at least sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66-2/3%) of the outstanding shares of Series D-2 Preferred, voting as a separate class; provided, further, that notwithstanding clauses (i) and (ii) above, or anything else herein to the contrary, any automatic conversion of the Series E Preferred that is not effected in connection with a Liquidation Event or a Qualified IPO shall also require the approval, by affirmative vote or written consent, of the holders of at least sixty percent (60%) of the outstanding shares of Series E Preferred, voting as a separate class. Any adjustment to the Conversion Price under this Section 4(b) shall be separate and apart from any adjustment to the Conversion Price provided for under Section 4(d)(i) hereof and, for the avoidance of doubt, the carve-out to the definition of “Additional Shares of Common Stock” set forth in Section 4(d)(i)(B)(4)(VIII) shall not have any impact on any Conversion Price adjustment required under this Section 4(b).

(c) Mechanics of Conversion . No fractional shares of Class A Common shall be issued upon conversion of the Preferred Stock. In lieu of any fractional shares to which the holder would otherwise be entitled, the Corporation shall pay cash equal to such fraction multiplied by the then effective Conversion Price for such series of Preferred Stock. Conversion of shares of Preferred Stock at the option of the holder thereof shall be effected by delivery, to the office of the Corporation or to any transfer agent for such shares, of duly endorsed certificates for the shares being converted and of written notice to the Corporation that the holder elects to convert such shares. Conversion shall be deemed to occur immediately prior to the close of business on the date the shares and notice are delivered. Automatic conversion of the Preferred Stock pursuant to this section shall be effective without any further action on the part of the holders of such shares and shall be effective whether or not the certificates for such shares are surrendered to the Corporation or its transfer agent. Holders entitled to receive Class A Common upon conversion of Preferred Stock shall be treated for all purposes as the record holders of such shares of Class A Common on the date conversion is deemed to occur. The Corporation shall not be obligated to issue certificates evidencing shares of Class A Common issuable upon conversion of Preferred Stock unless either (i) the certificates evidencing such shares being converted are delivered to the Corporation or its transfer agent as provided above, or (ii) the holder (A) notifies the Corporation or its transfer agent that such certificates have been lost, stolen or destroyed and (B) executes an agreement, and at the Corporation’s election provides a surety bond or other security, satisfactory to the Corporation to indemnify the Corporation from any loss incurred by it in connection with such certificates. The Corporation shall, as soon as practicable after the delivery of such certificates, or the agreement to indemnify in the case of a lost certificate, issue and deliver at such office to the holder of the shares of Preferred Stock being converted, a certificate or certificates for the number of shares of Class A Common to which the holder is entitled and a check payable to the holder for (i) any cash due with respect to fractional shares and (ii) any declared and unpaid dividends on the Series Preferred being converted.

(d) Adjustments of Conversion Price for Certain Diluting Issuances, Splits and Combinations. In addition to as provided in 4(b), the applicable Conversion Price for each series of Preferred Stock shall be subject to adjustment from time to time as follows:

(i) Adjustment of Conversion Price Upon Issuance of Additional Shares of Common Stock below the Conversion Price . If the Corporation issues Additional Shares of Common Stock (including Additional Shares of Common Stock deemed to be issued

 

8


pursuant to Section 4(d)(i)(C)) without consideration or for an Effective Price (as defined below) less than the then effective Conversion Price for a series of Preferred Stock in effect immediately prior to such issue (a “ Qualifying Dilutive Issuance ”), then and in such event, the Conversion Price for such series shall be reduced, concurrently with such issue, to a price (calculated to the nearest cent) as set forth herein, unless otherwise provided in this Section 4. The “ Effective Price ” of Additional Shares of Common Stock shall mean the quotient determined by dividing the total number of Additional Shares of Common Stock issued or sold, or deemed to have been issued or sold by the Corporation, into the aggregate consideration received, or deemed to have been received by the Corporation for such issue, for such Additional Shares of Common Stock. In the event that the number of shares of Additional Shares of Common Stock or the Effective Price cannot be ascertained at the time of issuance, such Additional Shares of Common Stock shall be deemed issued immediately upon the occurrence of the first event that makes such number of shares or the Effective Price, as applicable, ascertainable.

(A) Adjustment Formula . Whenever the Conversion Price for a given series of Preferred Stock is adjusted pursuant to this Section 4(d)(i), the new Conversion Price for such series of Preferred Stock shall be determined by multiplying the existing Conversion Price by a fraction, the numerator of which shall be the number of shares of Common Stock outstanding immediately prior to such issue (the “ Common Stock Outstanding ”) plus the number of shares of Common Stock which the aggregate consideration received by the Corporation for the total number of Additional Shares of Common Stock so issued would purchase at the Conversion Price for such series of Preferred Stock in effect immediately prior to such issue, and the denominator of which shall be the number of shares of Common Stock Outstanding immediately prior to such issue plus the number of such Additional Shares of Common Stock so issued. For the purpose of this paragraph and paragraph 4(d)(ii)(B), the number of shares of Common Stock Outstanding shall be deemed to include all Common Stock issued and outstanding, the Common Stock issuable upon exercise and/or conversion of all outstanding Preferred Stock, upon conversion of all other outstanding Convertible Securities and upon exercise of all outstanding Options whether vested or unvested and whether or not immediately exercisable (and assuming conversion of Convertible Securities issuable upon exercise of Options therefor).

(B) Special Definitions . For purposes of this Section 4, the following definitions shall apply:

(1) “ Options ” shall mean rights, options or warrants to subscribe for, purchase or otherwise acquire Common Stock or Convertible Securities.

(2) “ Original Issue Date ” shall mean with respect to a series of Preferred Stock the date on which the first share of such series of Preferred Stock was issued.

(3) “ Convertible Securities ” shall mean instruments of indebtedness or securities convertible into or exchangeable for Common Stock including without limitation, the Preferred Stock.

 

9


(4) “ Additional Shares of Common Stock ” for any series of Preferred Stock shall mean all shares of Common Stock issued (or, pursuant to Section 4(d)(i)(C), deemed to be issued) by the Corporation after the Original Issue Date for such series, other than as follows:

(I) upon conversion of shares of Preferred Stock;

(II) shares of Common Stock, options or warrants to purchase shares of Common Stock issued to officers, directors, employees of and service providers to the Corporation pursuant to plans and arrangements approved by the Board of Directors of the Corporation, including at least two (2) of the Preferred Directors (as defined below);

(III) as a dividend or other distribution on the Preferred Stock or any event for which adjustment is made pursuant to Section 4(d)(ii), 4(e), 4(f) or 4(g);

(IV) upon the exercise or conversion of outstanding options or warrants;

(V) shares of capital stock, or options or warrants to purchase capital stock, issued to financial institutions or lessors in connection with bona fide commercial credit arrangements, equipment financings, real property leases, or similar transactions, the terms of which have been approved by the Board of Directors of the Corporation, including at least two (2) of the Preferred Directors;

(VI) shares of capital stock, or options or warrants to purchase capital stock, issued in connection with strategic collaborations, development agreements or licensing transactions, the terms of which have been approved by the Board of Directors of the Corporation, including at least two (2) of the Preferred Directors;

(VII) shares of capital stock, or warrants or options to purchase capital stock, issued in connection with bona fide acquisitions, mergers or similar transactions, the terms of which are approved by the Board of Directors of the Corporation, including at least two (2) of the Preferred Directors; and

(VIII) shares of Common Stock issued or issuable in a Qualified IPO.

(C) Deemed Issue of Additional Shares of Common Stock . If the Corporation at any time after the Original Issue Date for a series of Preferred Stock shall issue or sell any Options or Convertible Securities or shall fix a record date for the determination of any holders of any class of securities entitled to receive any such Options or Convertible Securities, then the maximum number of shares (as set forth in the instrument relating thereto without regard to any provisions contained therein for a subsequent adjustment of such number) of Common Stock issuable upon the exercise of such Options or, in the case of Convertible Securities and Options for Convertible Securities, the conversion or exchange of such

 

10


Convertible Securities, shall be deemed to be Additional Shares of Common Stock issued as of the time of such issue or, in case such a record date shall have been fixed, as of the close of business on such record date, provided that in any such case in which Additional Shares of Common Stock are deemed to be issued:

(1) no further adjustment in the Conversion Price for any series of Preferred Stock shall be made upon the subsequent actual issuance of shares of Common Stock or Convertible Securities issued upon the exercise of such Options or conversion or exchange of such Convertible Securities;

(2) if such Options or Convertible Securities by their terms provide, with the passage of time or otherwise, for any increase or decrease in the consideration payable to the Corporation, or increase or decrease in the number of shares of Common Stock issuable, upon the exercise, conversion or exchange thereof, the Conversion Price for each affected series of Preferred Stock computed upon the original issue thereof (or upon the occurrence of a record date with respect thereto), and any subsequent adjustments based thereon, shall, upon any such increase or decrease becoming effective, be recomputed to reflect such increase or decrease insofar as it affects such Options or the rights of conversion or exchange under such Convertible Securities;

(3) upon the expiration of any such Options or any rights of conversion or exchange under such Convertible Securities which shall not have been exercised, the Conversion Price for each affected series of Preferred Stock computed upon the original issue thereof (or upon the occurrence of a record date with respect thereto), and any subsequent adjustments based thereon, shall, upon such expiration, be recomputed as if:

(I) in the case of Convertible Securities or Options for Common Stock, the only additional shares of Common Stock issued were shares of Common Stock, if any, actually issued upon the exercise of such Options or the conversion or exchange of such Convertible Securities, and the consideration received therefor was the consideration actually received by the Corporation for the issue of all such Options, whether or not exercised, plus the consideration actually received by the Corporation upon such exercise, or for the issue of all such Convertible Securities which were actually converted or exchanged, plus the additional consideration, if any, actually received by the Corporation upon such conversion or exchange, and

(II) in the case of Options for Convertible Securities, only the Convertible Securities, if any, actually issued upon the exercise thereof were issued at the time of issue of such Options and the consideration received by the Corporation for the Additional Shares of Common Stock deemed to have been then issued was the consideration actually received by the Corporation for the issue of all such Options, whether or not exercised, plus the consideration deemed to have been received by the Corporation upon the issue of the Convertible Securities with respect to which such Options were actually exercised;

(4) no readjustment pursuant to subsections (2) or (3) above shall have the effect of increasing the Conversion Price for any series of Preferred Stock to an amount which exceeds the lower of (x) the Conversion Price for such series of Preferred

 

11


Stock, on the original adjustment date, or (y) the Conversion Price for such series of Preferred Stock that would have resulted from any issuance of Additional Shares of Common Stock between the original adjustment date and such readjustment date, and no readjustment shall affect Class A Common issued on conversion of Preferred Stock prior to such readjustment.

(D) Determination of Consideration . For purposes of this Section 4(d), the consideration received by the Corporation for the issue of any Additional Shares of Common Stock shall be computed as follows:

(1) Cash and Property . Such consideration shall:

(I) insofar as it consists of cash, be computed at the aggregate amount of cash received by the Corporation prior to any commissions or expenses paid by the Corporation;

(II) insofar as it consists of property other than cash, be computed at the fair value thereof at the time of such issue, as determined in good faith by the Corporation’s Board of Directors; and

(III) if Additional Shares of Common Stock are issued together with other shares or securities or other assets of the Corporation for consideration which covers both, be the proportion of such consideration so received for the Additional Shares of Common Stock, computed as provided in subsections (I) and (II) above, as determined in good faith by the Corporation’s Board of Directors.

(2) Options and Convertible Securities . The consideration per share received by the Corporation for Additional Shares of Common Stock deemed to have been issued pursuant to Section 4(d)(i)(C), relating to Options and Convertible Securities, shall be determined by dividing:

(I) the total amount, if any, received or receivable by the Corporation as consideration for the issue of such Options or Convertible Securities, plus the minimum aggregate amount of additional consideration (as set forth in the instruments relating thereto, without regard to any provision contained therein for a subsequent adjustment of such consideration) payable to the Corporation upon the exercise of such Option or the conversion or exchange of such Convertible Securities, or in the case of Options for Convertible Securities, the exercise of such Options for Convertible Securities and the conversion or exchange of such Convertible Securities by

(II) the maximum number of shares of Common Stock (as set forth in the instruments relating thereto, without regard to any provision contained therein for a subsequent adjustment of such number) issuable upon the exercise of such Options or the conversion or exchange of such Convertible Securities.

(E) In the event that the Corporation issues or sells, or is deemed to have issued or sold, Additional Shares of Common Stock in a Qualifying Dilutive Issuance (the “ First Dilutive Issuance ”), then in the event that the Corporation issues or sells, or is deemed to have issued or sold, Additional Shares of Common Stock in a Qualifying Dilutive

 

12


Issuance other than the First Dilutive Issuance as a part of the same transaction or series of related transactions as the First Dilutive Issuance (a “ Subsequent Dilutive Issuance ”), then and in each such case upon a Subsequent Dilutive Issuance the Conversion Price shall be reduced to the Conversion Price that would have been in effect had the First Dilutive Issuance and each Subsequent Dilutive Issuance all occurred on the closing date of the First Dilutive Issuance.

(ii) Adjustments for Stock Dividends, Combinations or Splits .

(A) Combinations or Splits: If the outstanding shares of Common Stock are subdivided, by stock split or otherwise, into a greater number of shares of Common Stock, then the Conversion Price for each series of Preferred Stock in effect prior to such event shall be proportionately decreased upon the occurrence of such event. If the outstanding shares of Common Stock are combined or consolidated, by reclassification, reverse stock split or otherwise, into a lesser number of shares of Common Stock, then the Conversion Price for each series of Preferred Stock in effect prior to such event shall be proportionately increased upon the occurrence of such event. Any adjustment under this paragraph (ii)(A) shall become effective at the close of business on the date the subdivision or combination becomes effective.

(B) Common Stock Dividends and Distributions: If at any time or from time to time on or after the Original Issue Date the Corporation pays to holders of Common Stock a dividend or other distribution in additional shares of Common Stock, the Conversion Price then in effect for any series of Preferred Stock shall be decreased as of the time of such issuance, as provided below:

(i) The Conversion Price shall be adjusted by multiplying the Conversion Price then in effect by a fraction:

(A) the numerator of which is the total number of shares of Common Stock Outstanding immediately prior to the time of such issuance, and

(B) the denominator of which is the total number of shares of Common Stock Outstanding immediately prior to the time of such issuance plus the number of shares of Common Stock issuable in payment of such dividend or distribution;

(ii) If the Corporation fixes a record date to determine which holders of Common Stock are entitled to receive such dividend or other distribution, the Conversion Price shall be fixed as of the close of business on such record date, and the number of shares of Common Stock shall be calculated immediately prior to the close of business on such record date; and

(iii) If such record date is fixed and such dividend is not fully paid or if such distribution is not fully made on the date fixed therefor, the Conversion Price shall be recomputed accordingly as of the close of business on such record date and thereafter the Conversion Price shall be adjusted pursuant to this paragraph (ii)(B) to reflect the actual payment of such dividend or distribution.

 

13


(e) Adjustments for Other Distributions . If the Corporation fixes a record date for the determination of holders of Common Stock entitled to receive any distribution payable in securities of the Corporation other than shares of Common Stock (excluding any distribution in which the Preferred Stock participates on an as-converted basis, and any distribution for which adjustment is otherwise made pursuant to this Section 4), then in each such case provision shall be made so that the holders of Preferred Stock receive upon conversion, in addition to the Class A Common issuable upon conversion of their shares, the property or other securities of the Corporation which they would have received had their shares of Preferred Stock been converted into Class A Common, immediately prior to such event and had they thereafter retained such securities, subject to all other adjustments called for during such period under this Section 4.

(f) Adjustments for Reclassification, Exchange and Substitution . If the Common Stock is changed into the same or a different number of shares of any other class or series of stock, whether by capital reorganization, reclassification or otherwise (other than a Deemed Liquidation under Section 2 and events for which adjustment is made pursuant to Sections 4(d)(ii) or 4(e) above), the Conversion Price for each series of Preferred Stock then in effect shall, concurrently with the effectiveness of such reorganization, reclassification or change, be adjusted such that the Preferred Stock shall be convertible into, in lieu of the Class A Common which the holders thereof would otherwise have been entitled to receive, a number of shares of such other class or series of capital stock equivalent to the number of shares of such other class or series of capital stock that such holders would have been entitled to receive in such reclassification, capital reorganization or change for the number of shares of Class A Common that the holders would have been entitled to receive upon conversion of their Preferred Stock immediately prior to such reclassification, capital reorganization or change.

(g) No Impairment . The Corporation will not, without the approval of the Preferred Stock and applicable series of Preferred Stock, in each case, as provided in Section 6, avoid or seek to avoid by amendment, merger, consolidation or other corporate reorganization, the observance or performance of any of the terms to be observed or performed hereunder by the Corporation but will at all times in good faith assist in the carrying out of all the provisions of this Section 4 and in the taking of all such action as may be necessary or appropriate in order to protect the Conversion Rights of the holders of the Preferred Stock against impairment.

(h) Certificate as to Adjustments . The Corporation shall promptly compute each Conversion Price adjustment and provide each holder of Preferred Stock a certificate describing such adjustment and showing in detail the facts upon which such adjustment is based. If requested in writing by any holder of Preferred Stock, the Corporation shall provide such holder a certificate describing any Conversion Price adjustments, the current Conversion Price and the amount of Class A Common or other property issuable upon conversion of the particular series of Preferred Stock. The certificate shall set forth such adjustment, showing in detail the facts upon which such adjustment or readjustment is based, including a statement of (i) the consideration received or deemed to be received by the Corporation for any Additional Shares of Common Stock issued or sold or deemed to have been issued or sold, (ii) the Conversion Price at the time in effect, (iii) the number of Additional Shares of Common Stock and (iv) the type and amount, if any, of other property which at the time would be received upon conversion of the Series Preferred. Failure to request or provide such notice shall have no effect on any such adjustment.

 

14


(i) Notices of Record Date . If the Corporation shall propose at any time:

(A) to declare any dividend or distribution upon its Common Stock other than a distribution payable solely in Common Stock;

(B) to offer for subscription pro rata to the holders of any class or series of its capital stock any additional shares of stock of any class or series or other rights;

(C) to effect any reclassification or recapitalization of its Common Stock; or

(D) to liquidate, dissolve or wind up or to enter into a Deemed Liquidation;

Then, in connection with each such event, the Corporation shall send to the holders of the Preferred Stock:

(i) at least twenty (20) days’ prior written notice of the date on which a record shall be taken for such dividend, distribution or subscription rights (and specifying the date on which the holders of Common Stock shall be entitled thereto) or for determining rights to vote in respect of the matters referred to in (C) and (D) above; and

(ii) in the case of the matters referred to in (C) and (D) above, at least 20 days’ prior written notice of the date when the same shall take place (and specifying the date on which the holders of Common Stock shall be entitled to exchange their Common Stock for securities or other property deliverable upon the occurrence of such event).

With respect to (i) and (ii) above, a shorter notice period may be approved by the holders of a majority of the outstanding Series Preferred. Any notice required by the provisions of this section shall be in writing and shall be deemed effectively given: (i) upon personal delivery to the party to be notified, (ii) when sent by facsimile if sent during normal business hours of the recipient; if not, then on the next business day, (iii) five (5) days after having been sent by registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, postage prepaid, or (iv) one (1) day after deposit with a nationally recognized overnight courier, specifying next day delivery, with verification of receipt. All notices shall be addressed to each holder of record at the address of such holder appearing on the books of the Corporation.

(j) Reservation of Stock Issuable Upon Conversion . This Corporation shall at all times reserve and keep available out of its authorized but unissued shares of Class A Common, solely for the purpose of effecting the conversion of the shares of the Preferred Stock, such number of its shares of Class A Common as shall from time to time be sufficient to effect the conversion of all outstanding shares of the Preferred Stock; and if at any time the number of authorized but unissued shares of Class A Common shall not be sufficient to effect the conversion of all then outstanding shares of the Preferred Stock, in addition to such other remedies as shall be available to the holder of such Preferred Stock, the Corporation will take

 

15


such corporate action as may, in the opinion of its counsel, be necessary to increase its authorized but unissued shares of Class A Common to such number of shares as shall be sufficient for such purposes, including, without limitation, engaging in best efforts to obtain the requisite stockholder approval of any necessary amendment to this Certificate of Incorporation.

5. Voting

(a) General

Except as expressly provided in this Certificate of Incorporation or as required by law, the holders of Series E-1 Preferred shall have no voting rights on any matter on which the stockholders of the Corporation shall be entitled to vote and the shares of Series E-1 Preferred shall not be included in determining the number of shares voting or entitled to vote on any such matters. Except as expressly provided by this Certificate of Incorporation or as required by law, or as may be set forth in agreements among stockholders, the holders of the Series A Preferred, Series B Preferred, Series C Preferred, Series D Preferred, Series D-1 Preferred, Series D-2 Preferred and Series E Preferred (collectively, the “ Voting Preferred ”) shall have the same voting rights as the holders of the Class A Common, may act by written consent in the same manner as the Class A Common, and shall be entitled to notice of any stockholders’ meeting in accordance with the Bylaws of the Corporation, and the holders of Class A Common and the Voting Preferred shall vote as a single class on all matters. Each holder of Class A Common shall be entitled to one vote for each share of Class A Common held, and each holder of Voting Preferred shall be entitled to the number of votes equal to the number of shares of Class A Common into which such shares of Voting Preferred could then be converted. Fractional votes shall not be permitted. Any fractional voting rights resulting from the above formula (after aggregating all shares into which shares of Voting Preferred held by each holder could be converted) shall be rounded to the nearest whole number (with one half being rounded upward). The number of authorized shares of Common Stock may be increased or decreased (but not below the number of shares of Common Stock then outstanding) by the affirmative vote of the holders of a majority of the stock of this Corporation entitled to vote (voting as a single class on an as-if-converted basis), irrespective of the provisions of section 242(b)(2) of Delaware General Corporate Law.

(b) Election of Directors .

(i) Until the date upon which the Preferred Stock is automatically converted in accordance with Section 4(b) above: At each meeting or pursuant to each consent of the Corporation’s stockholders for the election of directors, (A) the holders of the Series A Preferred, voting as a separate class, shall be entitled to elect one (1) member of the Corporation’s Board of Directors (the “ Series A Director ”) and to remove from office such director and to fill any vacancy caused by the resignation, death or removal of such director, (B) the holders of the Series B Preferred, voting as a separate class, shall be entitled to elect one (1) member of the Corporation’s Board of Directors (the “ Series B Director ”) and to remove from office such director and to fill any vacancy caused by the resignation, death or removal of such director, (C) the holders of the Series C Preferred, voting as a separate class, shall be entitled to elect one (1) member of the Corporation’s Board of Directors (the “ Series C Director ”) and to remove from office such director and to fill any vacancy caused by the resignation, death or

 

16


removal of such director, (D) the holders of the Series E Preferred, voting as a separate class, shall be entitled to elect one (1) member of the Corporation’s Board of Directors (the “ Series E Director ,” and together with the Series A Director, the Series B Director and the Series C Director, the “ Preferred Directors ”) and to remove from office such director and to fill any vacancy caused by the resignation, death or removal of such director, (E) the holders of Class A Common, voting as a separate class (without the vote of shares of outstanding Preferred Stock), shall be entitled to elect two (2) members of the Corporation’s Board of Directors and to remove from office such directors and to fill any vacancy caused by the resignation, death or removal of such directors, and (F) the holders of the Voting Preferred and Class A Common, voting as a single class on an as-converted basis, shall be entitled to elect all other members of the Corporation’s Board of Directors and to remove from office such directors and to fill any vacancy caused by the resignation, death or removal of such director. Following an automatic conversion of the Preferred Stock in accordance with Section 4(b), the holders of the Class A Common shall be entitled to elect all of the members of the Corporation’s Board of Directors.

6. Protective Provisions

(a) The Corporation shall not, without first obtaining the approval of the holders of at least sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66-2/3%) of the outstanding shares of Voting Preferred, voting together as a single class on an as converted basis, take any action, either directly or indirectly by amendment, merger, consolidation or otherwise, that:

(i) amends, alters, or repeals any provision of the Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws of the Corporation (including any filing of a Certificate of Designation), that alters or changes the voting or other powers, preferences, or other special rights, privileges or restrictions of any series of Preferred Stock;

(ii) increases or decreases the number of authorized shares of Common Stock or Preferred Stock;

(iii) reclassifies the Preferred Stock or authorizes any equity securities or any other securities convertible into equity securities of the Corporation having rights, preferences or privileges senior to or on a parity with the Preferred Stock or any increase in the authorized or designated number of any such new class or series;

(iv) amends or waives any provision of the Corporation’s Certificate of Incorporation or Bylaws in a manner that would alter or change the rights, preferences or privileges of the shares of the Preferred Stock;

(v) redeems or repurchases shares, other than repurchases of Common Stock at cost (or the lesser of cost or fair market value) upon termination of an officer, employee, director or consultant pursuant to an option agreement or restricted stock purchase agreement, or other agreement previously approved by the Board of Directors of the Corporation, or pursuant to equity incentive agreements with service providers giving the Corporation the right to repurchase shares upon the termination of services, or pursuant to the redemption provisions set forth herein;

 

17


(vi) authorizes or obligates the Corporation to pay any dividend or make any other distribution in respect of the Corporation’s capital stock;

(vii) changes the authorized number of directors; or

(viii) effects or results in a liquidation, dissolution or winding up of the Corporation, or results in a Deemed Liquidation.

(b) The Corporation shall not, without first obtaining the approval of the holders of at least a majority of the outstanding shares of Series A Preferred, voting as a separate class, take any action that:

(i) waives, amends, alters, or repeals any provision of the Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws of the Corporation (including any filing of a Certificate of Designation), that alters or changes the voting or other powers, preferences, or other special rights, privileges or restrictions of the Series A Preferred;

(ii) increases or decreases the number of authorized shares of Series A Preferred;

(iii) waives, or results in a waiver of, an adjustment of the Series A Conversion Price pursuant to Section 4(d)(i) hereof; or

(iv) waives, amends, alters or repeals this Section 6(b).

(c) The Corporation shall not, without first obtaining the approval of the holders of at least a majority of the outstanding shares of Series B Preferred, voting as a separate class, take any action that:

(i) waives, amends, alters, or repeals any provision of the Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws of the Corporation (including any filing of a Certificate of Designation), that alters or changes the voting or other powers, preferences, or other special rights, privileges or restrictions of the Series B Preferred;

(ii) increases or decreases the number of authorized shares of Series B Preferred;

(iii) waives, or results in a waiver of, an adjustment of the Series B Conversion Price pursuant to Section 4(d)(i) hereof; or

(iv) waives, amends, alters or repeals this Section 6(c).

(d) The Corporation shall not, without first obtaining the approval of the holders of at least a majority of the outstanding shares of Series C Preferred, voting as a separate class, take any action that:

(i) waives, amends, alters, or repeals any provision of the Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws of the Corporation (including any filing of a Certificate of Designation), that alters or changes the voting or other powers, preferences, or other special rights, privileges or restrictions of the Series C Preferred;

 

18


(ii) increases or decreases the number of authorized shares of Series C Preferred;

(iii) waives, or results in a waiver of, an adjustment of the Series C Conversion Price pursuant to Section 4(d)(i) hereof; or

(iv) waives, amends, alters or repeals this Section 6(d).

(e) The Corporation shall not, without first obtaining the approval of the holders of at least sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66 2/3%) of the outstanding shares of Series D Preferred, voting as a separate class, take any action and any such act or transaction entered into without such consent or vote shall be null and void ab initio , and of no force or effect, that:

(i) waives, amends, alters, or repeals any provision of the Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws of the Corporation (including any filing of a Certificate of Designation), that alters or changes the voting or other powers, preferences, or other special rights, privileges or restrictions of the Series D Preferred;

(ii) increases or decreases the number of authorized shares of Series D Preferred;

(iii) waives, or results in a waiver of, an adjustment of the Series D Conversion Price pursuant to Section 4(d)(i) hereof; or

(iv) waives, amends, alters or repeals this Section 6(e).

(f) The Corporation shall not, without first obtaining the approval of the holders of at least sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66 2/3%) of the outstanding shares of Series D-1 Preferred, voting as a separate class, take any action, and any such act or transaction entered into without such consent or vote shall be null and void ab initio , and of no force or effect, that:

(i) waives, amends, alters, or repeals any provision of the Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws of the Corporation (including any filing of a Certificate of Designation), that alters or changes the voting or other powers, preferences, or other special rights, privileges or restrictions of the Series D-1 Preferred;

(ii) increases or decreases the number of authorized shares of Series D-1 Preferred;

(iii) waives, or results in a waiver of, an adjustment of the Series D-1 Conversion Price pursuant to Sections 4(b)(i) or 4(d)(i) hereof; or

(iv) waives, amends, alters or repeals this Section 6(f).

 

19


(g) The Corporation shall not, without first obtaining the approval of the holders of at least sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66 2/3%) of the outstanding shares of Series D-2 Preferred, voting as a separate class, take any action, and any such act or transaction entered into without such consent or vote shall be null and void ab initio , and of no force or effect, that:

(i) waives, amends, alters, or repeals any provision of the Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws of the Corporation (including any filing of a Certificate of Designation), that alters or changes the voting or other powers, preferences, or other special rights, privileges or restrictions of the Series D-2 Preferred;

(ii) increases or decreases the number of authorized shares of Series D-2 Preferred;

(iii) waives, or results in a waiver of, an adjustment of the Series D-2 Conversion Price or any other Series D-2 Preferred conversion rights pursuant to any provision of Section 4 hereof (including Sections 4(b)(i), 4(b)(ii), 4(d)(i), 4(d)(ii), 4(e) or 4(f) hereof) or the required vote of the Series D-2 Preferred under Section 4(b);

(iv) waives the treatment of any event as a Deemed Liquidation, or amends the definition of a Deemed Liquidation in the Certificate of Incorporation solely to exclude a transaction that would otherwise qualify; or

(v) waives, amends, alters or repeals this Section 6(g).

(h) The Corporation shall not, without first obtaining the approval of the holders of at least sixty percent (60%) of the outstanding shares of Series E Preferred, voting as a separate class, take any action, either directly or indirectly by amendment, merger, consolidation, business combination or otherwise, and any such act or transaction entered into without such consent or vote shall be null and void ab initio, and of no force or effect, that:

(i) waives, amends, alters, or repeals any provision of the Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws of the Corporation (including any filing of a Certificate of Designation), that alters or changes the voting, board designation or other powers, preferences, or other special rights, privileges or restrictions of the Series E Preferred;

(ii) increases or decreases the number of authorized shares of Series E Preferred;

(iii) waives, or results in a waiver of, an adjustment of the Series E Conversion Price or any other Series E Preferred conversion rights pursuant to any provision of Section 4 hereof (including Sections 4(b)(i), 4(b)(ii), 4(d)(i), 4(d)(ii), 4(e) or 4(f) hereof) or the required vote of the Series E Preferred under Section 4(b);

(iv) waives the treatment of any event as a Deemed Liquidation, or amends the definition of a Deemed Liquidation in the Certificate of Incorporation to exclude a transaction that would otherwise qualify; or

(v) waives, amends, alters or repeals this Section 6(h).

 

20


(i) The Corporation shall not, without first obtaining the approval of the holders of at least a majority of the outstanding shares of Series E-1 Preferred, voting as a separate class, take any action, either directly or indirectly by amendment, merger, consolidation, business combination or otherwise, and any such act or transaction entered into without such consent or vote shall be null and void ab initio, and of no force or effect, that:

(i) waives, amends, alters, or repeals any provision of the Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws of the Corporation (including any filing of a Certificate of Designation), that alters or changes the powers, preferences, or other special rights, privileges or restrictions of the Series E-1 Preferred unless such alteration or change in power, preferences or other special rights, privileges or restrictions also applies to the other series of Preferred Stock (in which case no separate approval of the holders of Series E-1 Preferred shall be required hereunder); or

(ii) waives, amends, alters, or repeals this Section 6(i), unless such waiver, amendment, alteration or repeal applies equally to the other series of Preferred Stock (in which case no separate approval of the holders of Series E-1 Preferred shall be required hereunder).

7. Status of Converted Shares

In the event any shares of Preferred Stock shall be converted pursuant to Section 4 hereof, the shares so converted shall be canceled and shall not be issuable by the Corporation. This Certificate of Incorporation shall be appropriately amended to effect the corresponding reduction in the Corporation’s authorized capital stock.

(C) Rights, Preferences, Privileges and Restrictions of Common Stock

1. Class A Common . The relative rights, preferences, privileges and restrictions granted to or imposed upon the Class A Common or the holders thereof are as follows:

(a) Dividends . Subject to Section 1 of Division B of this Article IV, the holders of the Class A Common shall be entitled to receive, when and as declared by the Board of Directors of the Corporation, out of any assets of the Corporation legally available therefor, such dividends as may be declared from time to time by the Board of Directors of the Corporation.

(b) Liquidation . Upon the liquidation, dissolution or winding up of the Corporation, the assets of the Corporation shall be distributed as provided in Section 2 of Division B of this Article IV.

(c) Redemption . The Class A Common is not redeemable other than at the sole discretion of the Board of Directors of the Corporation, pursuant to the terms of a written plan, or agreements with individual stockholders that provide for repurchases by the Corporation in connection with the termination of such stockholder’s services to the Corporation.

 

21


(d) Voting . Each holder of Class A Common shall be entitled to one vote for each share of Class A Common held, shall be entitled to notice of any stockholders’ meeting in accordance with the Bylaws of the Corporation, and shall be entitled to vote upon such matters and in such manner as may be provided by law and this Certificate of Incorporation or as may be set forth in agreements among stockholders.

2. Class B Common . The relative rights, preferences, privileges and restrictions granted to or imposed upon the Class B Common or the holders thereof are as follows:

(a) Dividends . Subject to Section 1 of Division B of this Article IV, the holders of the Class B Common shall be entitled to receive, when and as declared by the Board of Directors of the Corporation, out of any assets of the Corporation legally available therefor, such dividends as may be declared from time to time by the Board of Directors of the Corporation.

(b) Liquidation . Upon the liquidation, dissolution or winding up of the Corporation, the assets of the Corporation shall be distributed as provided in Section 2 of Division B of this Article IV.

(c) Redemption . The Class B Common is not redeemable other than at the sole discretion of the Board of Directors of the Corporation, pursuant to the terms of a written plan, or agreements with individual stockholders that provide for repurchases by the Corporation in connection with the termination of such stockholder’s services to the Corporation.

(d) Voting . Except as otherwise required by law, the Class B Common shall have no voting rights on any matter on which the stockholders of the Corporation shall be entitled to vote and the shares of Class B Common shall not be included in determining the number of shares voting or entitled to vote on any such matters; provided , that so long as any shares of Class B Common remain outstanding, the Corporation shall not, without the affirmative vote of the holders of a majority of the outstanding shares of Class B Common at a meeting of the holders of Class B Common duly called for such purpose (or the written consent of a majority of the outstanding shares of Class B Common), amend, alter or repeal (in any manner, including by merger, consolidation, combination, reclassification or otherwise) this Certificate of Incorporation or the Bylaws of the Corporation so as to adversely affect (disproportionately relative to the Class A Common) the preferences, rights or powers of the Class B Common.

(e) Conversion. The holders of Class B Common shall have conversion rights as follows:

(i) Automatic Conversion . Each share of Class B Common shall automatically be converted into one share of Class A Common at such time as is determined by the Board of Directors of the Corporation, in its sole discretion; provided , however , that any shares of Class B Common that are acquired by any holder of Voting Preferred that is not an employee of the Corporation or a member of the immediate family or controlled affiliate of an employee of the Corporation (including by dividend or other distribution by the Corporation) shall automatically be converted into shares of Class A Common (on a one-for-one basis) at the time of such acquisition.

 

22


(ii) Mechanics of Conversion . The outstanding shares of Class B Common shall be converted automatically without any further action by the holders of such shares whether or not the certificates representing such shares are surrendered to the Corporation or its transfer agent, and provided further that the Corporation shall not be obligated to issue certificates evidencing the shares of Class A Common issuable upon such automatic conversion unless the certificates evidencing such shares of Class B Common are either delivered to the Corporation or its transfer agent, or the holder notifies the Corporation or its transfer agent that such certificates have been lost, stolen or destroyed and executes an agreement satisfactory to the Corporation to indemnify the Corporation from any loss incurred by it in connection with such certificates. The Corporation shall, as soon as practicable after such delivery, or such agreement and indemnification in the case of a lost certificate, issue and deliver at such office to such holder of Class B Common, a certificate or certificates for the number of shares of Class A Common to which the holder shall be entitled as aforesaid and a check payable to the holder in the amount of any cash amounts payable as the result of a conversion into fractional shares of Class A Common as set forth in Section (2)(e)(i) of Division C of this Article IV. Such conversion shall be deemed to occur as set forth in Section (2)(e)(i) of Division C of this Article IV, and the person or persons entitled to receive the shares of Class A Common issuable upon such conversion shall be treated for all purposes as the record holder or holders of such shares of Class A Common on such date.

(iii) No Fractional Shares and Certificate as to Adjustments . No fractional shares of Class A Common shall be issued upon conversion of Class B Common. In lieu of any fractional shares to which the holder would otherwise be entitled, the Corporation shall pay cash equal to such fraction multiplied by the then fair market value of a share of Class A Common as determined by the Board of Directors of the Corporation. For such purpose, all shares of Class B Common held by each holder of Class B Common shall be aggregated, and any resulting fractional share of Class A Common shall be paid in cash.

(iv)  Reservation of Common Stock Issuable Upon Conversion . The Corporation shall at all times reserve and keep available out of its authorized but unissued shares of Class A Common solely for the purpose of effecting the conversion of the shares of Class B Common such number of its shares of Class A Common as shall from time to time be sufficient to effect the conversion of all outstanding shares of Class B Common; and if at any time the number of authorized but unissued shares of Class A Common shall not be sufficient to effect the conversion of all then outstanding shares of Class B Common, the Corporation will take such corporate action as may, in the opinion of its counsel, be necessary to increase its authorized but unissued shares of Class A Common to such number of shares as shall be sufficient for such purpose.

(f) Adjustments for Stock Dividends, Combinations or Splits . If the Corporation shall at any time or from time to time effect a stock dividend, combination or subdivision of the outstanding shares of Class A Common, then the Corporation shall effect a comparable stock dividend, combination or subdivision (as applicable) of the outstanding shares of Class B Common. If the Corporation shall at any time or from time to time effect a stock dividend, combination or subdivision of the outstanding shares of Class B Common, then the Corporation shall effect a comparable stock dividend, combination or subdivision (as applicable) of the outstanding shares of Class A Common.

 

23


ARTICLE V

The authorized number of Directors of this Corporation shall be determined in the manner provided herein and by the Bylaws and may be increased or decreased from time to time in the manner provided herein and therein.

ARTICLE VI

The personal liability of the directors to the Corporation or its stockholders for monetary damages for breach of fiduciary duty as a director shall be eliminated to the fullest extent under applicable law. If the General Corporation Law or any other law of the State of Delaware is amended after approval by the stockholders of this Article VI to authorize corporate action further eliminating or limiting the personal liability of directors, then the liability of a director of the Corporation shall be eliminated or limited to the fullest extent permitted by the General Corporation Law as so amended.

Any repeal or modification of the foregoing provisions of this Article VI by the stockholders of the Corporation shall not adversely affect any right or protection of a director of the Corporation existing at the time of, or increase the liability of any director of the Corporation with respect to any acts or omissions of such director occurring prior to, such repeal or modification.

ARTICLE VII

To the fullest extent permitted by applicable law, the Corporation is authorized to provide indemnification of (and advancement of expenses to) directors, officers and agents of the Corporation (and any other persons to which General Corporation Law permits the Corporation to provide indemnification) through Bylaw provisions, agreements with such agents or other persons, vote of stockholders or disinterested directors or otherwise, in excess of the indemnification and advancement otherwise permitted by Section 145 of the General Corporation Law.

Any amendment, repeal or modification of the foregoing provisions of this Article VII shall not adversely affect any right or protection of any director, officer or other agent of the Corporation existing at the time of such amendment, repeal or modification.

ARTICLE VIII

For the management of the business and for the conduct of the affairs of the Corporation, and in further definition, limitation and regulation of the powers of the Corporation, of its directors and of its stockholders or any class thereof, as the case may be, it is further provided that:

A. The management of the business and the conduct of the affairs of the Corporation shall be vested in its Board of Directors. The number of directors which shall constitute the whole Board of Directors of the Corporation shall be fixed by the Board of Directors of the Corporation in the manner provided in the Bylaws of the Corporation, as then in effect, subject to any restrictions which may be set forth in this Certificate of Incorporation.

 

24


B. The Board of Directors of the Corporation is expressly empowered to adopt, amend or repeal the Bylaws of the Corporation. The stockholders shall also have the power to adopt, amend or repeal the Bylaws of the Corporation; provided , however , that, in addition to any vote of the holders of any class or series of stock of the Corporation required by law or by this Certificate of Incorporation, the affirmative vote of the holders of at least a majority of the voting power of all of the then-outstanding shares of the capital stock of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, voting as a single class, shall be required to adopt, amend or repeal any provision of the Bylaws of the Corporation.

C. The directors of the Corporation need not be elected by written ballot unless the Bylaws so provide.

ARTICLE IX

The Corporation renounces any interest or expectancy of the Corporation in, or in being offered an opportunity to participate in, any Excluded Opportunity. An “Excluded Opportunity” is any matter, transaction or interest that is presented to, or acquired, created or developed by, or which otherwise comes into the possession of, (i) any director of the Corporation who is not an employee of the Corporation or any of its subsidiaries, or (ii) any holder of Preferred Stock or any partner, member, director, stockholder, employee or agent of any such holder, if such holder is not an employee of the Corporation or of any of its subsidiaries (collectively, “ Covered Persons ”), unless such matter, transaction or interest is presented to, or acquired, created or developed by, or otherwise comes into the possession of, a Covered Person expressly and solely in such Covered Person’s capacity as a director of the Corporation.

ARTICLE X

Meetings of stockholders may be held within or without the State of Delaware, as the Bylaws of the Corporation may provide. The books of the Corporation may be kept outside the State of Delaware at such place or places as may be designated from time to time by the Board of Directors of the Corporation or in the Bylaws of the Corporation.

 

25

Exhibit 3.3

BYLAWS

OF

BOX, INC.

(Adopted on March 11, 2008; As amended on February 14, 2014)


TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

              Page  

ARTICLE I CORPORATE OFFICES

     1   
 

1.1  

  

REGISTERED OFFICE

     1   
 

1.2  

  

OTHER OFFICES

     1   

ARTICLE II MEETINGS OF STOCKHOLDERS

     1   
 

2.1  

  

PLACE OF MEETINGS

     1   
 

2.2  

  

ANNUAL MEETING

     2   
 

2.3  

  

SPECIAL MEETING

     2   
 

2.4  

  

NOTICE OF STOCKHOLDERS’ MEETINGS

     2   
 

2.5  

  

MANNER OF GIVING NOTICE; AFFIDAVIT OF NOTICE

     2   
 

2.6  

  

QUORUM

     3   
 

2.7  

  

ADJOURNED MEETING; NOTICE

     3   
 

2.8  

  

VOTING

     3   
 

2.9  

  

WAIVER OF NOTICE

     4   
 

2.10

  

STOCKHOLDER ACTION BY WRITTEN CONSENT WITHOUT A MEETING

     4   
 

2.11

  

RECORD DATE FOR STOCKHOLDER NOTICE; VOTING; GIVING CONSENTS

     5   
 

2.12

  

PROXIES

     6   
 

2.13

  

LIST OF STOCKHOLDERS ENTITLED TO VOTE

     6   
 

2.14

  

ANNUAL STATEMENT TO STOCKHOLDERS

     7   

ARTICLE III DIRECTORS

     7   
 

3.1  

  

POWERS

     7   
 

3.2  

  

NUMBER OF DIRECTORS

     7   
 

3.3  

  

ELECTION, QUALIFICATION AND TERM OF OFFICE OF DIRECTORS

     7   
 

3.4  

  

RESIGNATION AND VACANCIES

     8   
 

3.5  

  

PLACE OF MEETINGS; TELEPHONIC MEETINGS

     8   
 

3.6  

  

FIRST MEETINGS

     9   
 

3.7  

  

REGULAR MEETINGS

     9   
 

3.8  

  

SPECIAL MEETINGS; NOTICE

     9   
 

3.9  

  

QUORUM

     9   
 

3.10

  

WAIVER OF NOTICE

     10   
 

3.11

  

ADJOURNED MEETING; NOTICE

     10   
 

3.12

  

BOARD ACTION BY WRITTEN CONSENT WITHOUT A MEETING

     10   
 

3.13

  

FEES AND COMPENSATION OF DIRECTORS

     10   
 

3.14

  

REMOVAL OF DIRECTORS

     11   

ARTICLE IV COMMITTEES

     11   
 

4.1  

  

COMMITTEES OF DIRECTORS

     11   
 

4.2  

  

COMMITTEE MINUTES

     11   


TABLE OF CONTENTS

(Continued)

 

              Page  
 

4.3

  

MEETINGS AND ACTION OF COMMITTEES

     12   

ARTICLE V OFFICERS

     12   
 

5.1

  

OFFICERS

     12   
 

5.2

  

ELECTION OF OFFICERS

     12   
 

5.3

  

SUBORDINATE OFFICERS

     12   
 

5.4

  

REMOVAL AND RESIGNATION OF OFFICERS

     12   
 

5.5

  

VACANCIES IN OFFICES

     13   
 

5.6

  

CHAIRPERSON OF THE BOARD

     13   
 

5.7

  

PRESIDENT

     13   
 

5.8

  

VICE PRESIDENT

     13   
 

5.9

  

SECRETARY

     14   
 

5.10

  

CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER

     14   
 

5.11

  

ASSISTANT SECRETARY

     14   
 

5.12

  

ASSISTANT TREASURER

     15   
 

5.13

  

AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF OFFICERS

     15   
 

5.14

  

SALARIES

     15   
 

5.15

  

LOANS TO OFFICERS AND EMPLOYEES

     15   

ARTICLE VI INDEMNITY

     16   
 

6.1

  

INDEMNIFICATION OF OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS

     16   
 

6.2

  

PREPAYMENT OF EXPENSES; UNDERTAKING TO REPAY

     16   
 

6.3

  

CLAIMS BY INDEMNITEE; PRESUMPTION OF VALIDITY

     16   
 

6.4

  

NON-EXCLUSIVITY OF RIGHTS

     17   
 

6.5

  

SET-OFF AGAINST OTHER INDEMNIFICATION

     17   
 

6.6

  

EFFECT OF AMENDMENT OR REPEAL

     17   
 

6.7

  

INDEMNIFICATION OF EMPLOYEES AND AGENTS

     17   
 

6.8

  

INSURANCE; INDEMNIFICATION AGREEMENTS

     18   
 

6.9

  

RELIANCE UPON BOOKS, REPORTS AND RECORDS

     18   
 

6.10

  

CERTAIN DEFINITIONS

     18   
ARTICLE VII RECORDS AND REPORTS      19   
 

7.1

  

MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF RECORDS

     19   
 

7.2

  

INSPECTION BY DIRECTORS

     19   
ARTICLE VIII STOCK AND STOCK CERTIFICATES      19   
 

8.1

  

STOCK CERTIFICATES; PARTLY PAID SHARES

     19   
 

8.2

  

SPECIAL DESIGNATION ON CERTIFICATES

     20   
 

8.3

  

LOST CERTIFICATES

     21   
 

8.4

  

TRANSFER OF STOCK; RESTRICTIONS ON TRANSFER

     21   
 

8.5

  

STOCK TRANSFER AGREEMENTS

     21   

 

-2-


TABLE OF CONTENTS

(Continued)

 

              Page  
 

8.6  

  

REGISTERED STOCKHOLDERS

     21   
 

8.7  

  

DIVIDENDS

     22   

ARTICLE IX GENERAL MATTERS

     22   
 

9.1  

  

CHECKS

     22   
 

9.2  

  

EXECUTION OF CORPORATE CONTRACTS AND INSTRUMENTS

     22   
 

9.3  

  

FISCAL YEAR

     22   
 

9.4  

  

SEAL

     23   
 

9.5  

  

REPRESENTATION OF SHARES OF OTHER CORPORATIONS

     23   
 

9.6  

  

CONSTRUCTION; DEFINITIONS

     23   

ARTICLE X AMENDMENTS

     23   

 

-3-


BYLAWS

OF

BOX, INC.

ARTICLE I

CORPORATE OFFICES .

1.1 REGISTERED OFFICE .

The address of the registered office of the Corporation in the State of Delaware is 2711 Centerville Road, Suite 400, City of Wilmington, County of New Castle, 19808. The name of its registered agent at that address is Corporation Service Company.

1.2 OTHER OFFICES .

The Corporation may also establish offices at any place or places where the Corporation is qualified to do business.

ARTICLE II

MEETINGS OF STOCKHOLDERS .

2.1 PLACE OF MEETINGS .

Meetings of stockholders, including those held pursuant to a demand of the stockholders, shall be held at the principal office of the Corporation or any other location, within or outside the State of Delaware, designated by the Board of Directors. Alternatively, the Board of Directors may, in its sole discretion, determine that the meeting shall not be held at any place, but shall instead be held solely by means of remote communication provided that (i) the Corporation shall implement reasonable measures to verify that each person deemed present and permitted to vote at the meeting by means of remote communication is a stockholder or proxyholder, (ii) the Corporation shall implement reasonable measures to provide such stockholders and proxyholders a reasonable opportunity to participate in the meeting and to vote on matters submitted to the stockholders, including an opportunity to read or hear the proceedings of the meeting substantially concurrently with such proceedings, and (iii) if any stockholder or proxyholder votes or takes other action at the meeting by means of remote communication, a record of such vote or other action shall be maintained by the Corporation.


2.2 ANNUAL MEETING .

The annual meeting of stockholders shall be held each year on a date and at a time designated by the Board of Directors for the purpose of electing directors and transacting such other business as may properly come before the meeting. In the absence of such designation, the annual meeting of stockholders shall be held each year on the 28th of October at 10:00 a.m. Pacific Central Time. However, if such day is not a business day, then the meeting shall be held at the same time and place on the next succeeding full business day. At the meeting, directors shall be elected and any other proper business may be transacted.

2.3 SPECIAL MEETING .

A special meeting of the stockholders may be called at any time by the Board of Directors, the chairperson of the board, the president, chief executive officer, or by such person or persons as may be authorized by the Certificate of Incorporation. No other person or persons are permitted to call a special meeting. No business may be conducted at a special meeting other than the business brought before the meeting by the Board of Directors, the chairperson of the board, the president, chief executive officer, or by such person or persons as may be authorized by the Certificate of Incorporation.

2.4 NOTICE OF STOCKHOLDERS’ MEETINGS .

All notices of meetings of the stockholders shall be in writing and shall be sent or otherwise given in accordance with Section 2.5 of these Bylaws not fewer than 10 nor more than 60 days before the date of the meeting to each stockholder entitled to vote at such meeting, except for any notice of a meeting to act on a plan of merger or consolidation, or on the sale, lease or exchange of all or substantially all of the Corporation’s property and assets (including its goodwill and corporate franchises) which shall be given not fewer than 20 nor more than 60 days in advance of such meeting. The notice shall specify the place, date, and hour of the meeting, the means of remote communication, if any, by which stockholders and proxyholders may be deemed to be present in person and vote at such meeting and, in the case of a special meeting, the purpose or purposes for which the meeting is called.

2.5 MANNER OF GIVING NOTICE; AFFIDAVIT OF NOTICE .

Written notice of any meeting of stockholders, if mailed, is given when deposited in the United States mail, postage prepaid, directed to the stockholder at the address of such stockholder as it appears on the records of the Corporation. Notice also shall be deemed given (i) if sent by facsimile telecommunication, when directed to a number at which the stockholder has consented to receive notice; (ii) if sent by electronic mail, when directed to an electronic mail address at which the stockholder has consented to receive notice; (iii) if sent by posting on an electronic network together with separate notice to the stockholder of such specific posting upon the later of such posting or the’ giving of such separate notice; and (iv) if sent by any other form of electronic transmission consented to by the stockholder to whom notice is given. Any consent to receive notice by electronic transmission shall be revocable by written notice from such stockholder to the

 

-2-


Corporation. Any such consent shall be deemed revoked if (a) the Corporation is unable to deliver by electronic transmission two consecutive notices given by the Corporation in accordance with such consent and (b) such inability becomes known to the secretary or an assistant secretary of the Corporation or to the transfer agent, or other person responsible for the giving of notice; provided , however , the inadvertent failure to treat such inability as a revocation shall not invalidate any meeting or other action.

An affidavit of the secretary or an assistant secretary or of the transfer agent of the Corporation that the notice has been given shall, in the absence of fraud, be prima facie evidence of the facts stated therein.

2.6 QUORUM .

The holders of a majority of the stock issued and outstanding and entitled to vote thereat, present in person or represented by proxy, shall constitute a quorum at all meetings of the stockholders for the transaction of business, except as otherwise provided by statute or by the Certificate of Incorporation, provided , however , that where a separate vote by a class or series is required, a majority of the outstanding shares of such class or series present in person or represented by proxy shall also be required. If, however, such quorum is not present or represented at any meeting of the stockholders, then the stockholders entitled to vote thereat, present in person or represented by proxy, shall have power to adjourn the meeting from time to time, without notice other than announcement at the meeting, until a quorum is present or represented. At such adjourned meeting at which a quorum is present or represented, any business may be transacted that might have been transacted at the meeting as originally noticed. Once a share is represented for any purpose at a meeting other than solely to object to holding the meeting or transacting business, it shall be deemed present for the remainder of the meeting and any adjournment (unless a new record date is or must be set for the adjourned meeting), notwithstanding the withdrawal of enough stockholders to leave less than a quorum.

2.7 ADJOURNED MEETING; NOTICE .

When a meeting is adjourned to another time or place, unless these Bylaws otherwise require, notice need not be given of the adjourned meeting if the time and place, if any, thereof, and the means of remote communications, if any, by which stockholders and proxyholders may be deemed to be present in person and vote at such adjourned meeting, are announced at the meeting at which the adjournment is taken. At the adjourned meeting the Corporation may transact any business that might have been transacted at the original meeting. If the adjournment is for more than 30 days, or if after the adjournment a new record date is fixed for the adjourned meeting, a notice of the adjourned meeting shall be given to each stockholder of record entitled to vote at the meeting.

2.8 VOTING .

The stockholders entitled to vote at any meeting of stockholders shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of Section 2.11 of these Bylaws, subject to the provisions of Sections 217 and 218 of the General Corporation Law of Delaware (relating to voting rights of

 

-3-


fiduciaries, pledgors and joint owners of stock and to voting trusts and other voting agreements). Except as may be otherwise provided in the Certificate of Incorporation, each stockholder shall be entitled to one vote for each share of capital stock held by such stockholder.

2.9 WAIVER OF NOTICE .

Whenever notice is required to be given under any provision of the General Corporation Law of Delaware or of the Certificate of Incorporation or these Bylaws, a written waiver thereof, signed by the person entitled to notice, or a waiver by electronic transmission by the person entitled to notice, whether before or after the time stated therein, shall be deemed equivalent to notice. Attendance of a person at a meeting shall constitute a waiver of notice of such meeting, except when the person attends a meeting for the express purpose of objecting, at the beginning of the meeting or upon arrival of such person, to the transaction of any business because the meeting is not lawfully called or convened. Neither the business to be transacted at, nor the purpose of, any regular or special meeting of the stockholders need be specified in any written waiver of notice or any waiver by electronic transmission, unless so required by the Certificate of Incorporation or these Bylaws.

2.10 STOCKHOLDER ACTION BY WRITTEN CONSENT WITHOUT A MEETING .

Unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Incorporation, any action required by the General Corporation Law of Delaware to be taken at any annual or special meeting of stockholders of a corporation, or any action that may be taken at any annual or special meeting of such stockholders, may be taken without a meeting, without prior notice, and without a vote if a consent in writing, setting forth the action so taken, is signed by the holders of outstanding stock having not less than the minimum number of votes that would be necessary to authorize or take such action at a meeting at which all shares entitled to vote thereon were present and voted; provided , however , that an action by written consent to elect directors, unless such action is unanimous, may be in lieu of holding an annual meeting only if all the vacant directorships to which directors could be elected at an annual meeting held at the effective time of such action are filled by such action.

A telegram, cablegram or other electronic transmission consenting to an action to be taken and transmitted by a stockholder or proxyholder, or by a person or persons authorized to act for a stockholder or proxyholder, shall be deemed to be written, signed and dated for the purposes of this section, provided that any such telegram, cablegram or other electronic transmission sets forth (or is delivered with information from which the Corporation can determine) (i) that the telegram, cablegram or other electronic transmission was transmitted by the stockholder or proxyholder or by a person or persons authorized to act for the stockholder or proxyholder and (ii) the date on which such stockholder or proxyholder or authorized person or persons transmitted such telegram, cablegram or electronic transmission. The date on which such telegram, cablegram or electronic transmission is transmitted shall be deemed to be the date on which such consent was signed. No consent given by a telegram, cablegram or other electronic transmission shall be deemed to have been delivered until such consent is reproduced in paper form and until such paper form shall be delivered to the Corporation by delivery to its registered office in the State of Delaware, its principal place of business or an officer or agent of the Corporation having custody of the book in which proceedings of meetings of stockholders are recorded. Any copy, facsimile or other reliable

 

-4-


reproduction of a consent in writing may be substituted or used in lieu of the original writing for any and all purposes for which the original writing could be used, provided that such copy, facsimile or other reproduction shall be a complete reproduction of the entire original writing.

Every written consent shall bear the date of signature of each stockholder who signs the consent and no written consent shall be effective to take the corporate action referred to in such consent unless written consents signed by the requisite number of stockholders entitled to vote with respect to the subject matter thereof are delivered to the Corporation, in the manner required by this Section, within 60 days of the earliest dated consent delivered to the Corporation in the manner required by this Section. Any such consent shall be inserted in the minute book as if it were the minutes of a meeting of the stockholders.

Prompt notice of the taking of the corporate action without a meeting by less than unanimous written consent shall be given to those stockholders who have not consented in writing. If the action that is consented to is such as would have required the filing of a certificate under any section of the General Corporation Law of Delaware if such action had been voted on by stockholders at a meeting thereof, then the certificate filed under such section shall state, in lieu of any statement required by such section concerning any vote of stockholders, that written notice and written consent have been given as provided in Section 228 of the General Corporation Law of Delaware.

2.11 RECORD DATE FOR STOCKHOLDER NOTICE; VOTING; GIVING CONSENTS .

In order that the Corporation may determine the stockholders entitled to notice of or to vote at any meeting of stockholders or any adjournment thereof, or entitled to express consent to an action in writing without a meeting, or entitled to receive payment of any dividend or other distribution or allotment of any rights, or entitled to exercise any rights in respect of any change, conversion or exchange of stock or for the purpose of any other lawful action, the Board of Directors may fix a record date. Such record date shall not (i) precede the date upon which the resolution fixing the record date is adopted by the Board of Directors, (ii) be more than 60 nor fewer than 10 days before the date of such meeting, (iii) be more than 10 days after the date upon which the resolution fixing the record date for an action by written consent in lieu of a meeting is adopted by the Board of Directors, or (iv) be more than 60 days prior to any other action.

If the Board of Directors does not so fix a record date:

(i) The record date for determining stockholders entitled to notice of or to vote at a meeting of stockholders shall be at the close of business on the day next preceding the day on which notice is given, or, if notice is waived, at the close of business on the day next preceding the day on which the meeting is held.

(ii) The record date for determining stockholders entitled to express consent to corporate action in writing without a meeting, when no prior action by the Board of Directors is necessary, shall be the day on which the first written consent is expressed.

 

-5-


(iii) The record date for determining stockholders for any other purpose shall be at the close of business on the day on which the Board of Directors adopts the resolution relating thereto.

A determination of stockholders of record entitled to notice of or to vote at a meeting of stockholders shall apply to any adjournment of the meeting; provided , however , that the Board of Directors may fix a new record date for the adjourned meeting.

2.12 PROXIES .

Each stockholder entitled to vote at a meeting of stockholders or to express consent or dissent to corporate action in writing without a meeting may authorize another person or persons to act for such stockholder by a written proxy or by an electronic transmission indicating such proxy, signed by the stockholder and filed with the secretary of the Corporation, but no such proxy shall be voted or acted upon after 3 years from its date, unless the proxy provides for a longer period. A proxy with respect to a specific meeting shall entitle the proxy holder to vote at any reconvened meeting following adjournment of such meeting, but shall not be valid after the final adjournment of such meeting. A proxy shall be deemed signed if the stockholder’s name is placed on the proxy or the electronic transmission indicating such proxy (whether by manual signature, typewriting, telegraphic transmission or otherwise) by the stockholder or the stockholder’s attorney-in-fact. The revocability of a proxy that states on its face that it is irrevocable shall be governed by the provisions of Section 212(e) of the General Corporation Law of Delaware. A stockholder may authorize another person or persons to act for such stockholder as proxy by transmitting or authorizing the transmission of a telegram, cablegram or other means of electronic transmission to the intended holder of the proxy or to a proxy solicitation firm, proxy support service or similar agent duly authorized by the intended proxy holder to receive such transmission; provided , that any such telegram, cablegram or other electronic transmission must either set forth (or be accompanied by information from which it can be determined) that the telegram, cablegram or other electronic transmission was authorized by the stockholder. Any copy, facsimile telecommunication or other reliable reproduction of the writing or transmission by which a stockholder has authorized another person to act as proxy for such stockholder may be substituted or used in lieu of the original writing or transmission for any and all purposes for which the original writing or transmission could be used, provided that such copy, facsimile telecommunication or other reproduction shall be a complete reproduction of the entire original writing or transmission.

2.13 LIST OF STOCKHOLDERS ENTITLED TO VOTE .

The officer who has charge of the stock ledger of a corporation shall prepare and make, at least 10 days before every meeting of stockholders, a complete list of the stockholders entitled to vote at the meeting, arranged in alphabetical order, and showing the address of each stockholder and the number of shares registered in the name of each stockholder. Nothing contained in this Section 2.13 shall require the Corporation to include electronic mail addresses or other electronic contact information on such list. Such list shall be open to the examination of any stockholder, for any purpose germane to the meeting for a period of at least 10 days prior to the meeting: (i) on a reasonably accessible electronic network, provided that the information required to gain access to

 

-6-


such list is provided with the notice of the meeting, or (ii) during ordinary business hours, at the principal place of business of the Corporation. In the event that the Corporation determines to make the list available on an electronic network, the Corporation may take reasonable steps to ensure that such information is available only to stockholders of the Corporation. If the meeting is to be held at a place, then the list shall be produced and kept at the time and place of the meeting during the whole time thereof, and may be inspected by any stockholder who is present. If the meeting is to be held solely by means of remote communication, then the list shall also be open to the examination of any stockholder during the whole time of the meeting on a reasonably accessible electronic network, and the information required to access such list shall be provided with the notice of the meeting.

2.14 ANNUAL STATEMENT TO STOCKHOLDERS .

The Board of Directors shall present at each annual meeting, and at any special meeting of the stockholders when called for by vote of the stockholders, a full and clear statement of the business and condition of the Corporation.

ARTICLE III

DIRECTORS

3.1 POWERS .

Subject to the provisions of the General Corporation Law of Delaware and any limitations in the Certificate of Incorporation or these Bylaws relating to action required to be approved by the stockholders or by the outstanding shares, the business and affairs of the Corporation shall be managed and all corporate powers shall be exercised by or under the direction of the Board of Directors.

3.2 NUMBER OF DIRECTORS .

The Board shall consist of one or more members, each of whom shall be a natural person. Unless the certificate of incorporation fixes the number of directors, the number of directors shall be determined from time to time by resolution of the Board. No reduction of the authorized number of directors shall have the effect of removing any director before that director’s term of office expires.

3.3 ELECTION, QUALIFICATION AND TERM OF OFFICE OF DIRECTORS .

Except as provided in Section 3.4 of these Bylaws, directors shall be elected at each annual meeting of stockholders to hold office until the next annual meeting. Directors need not be stockholders unless so required by the Certificate of Incorporation or these Bylaws, wherein other qualifications for directors may be prescribed. Each director, including a director elected to fill a vacancy, shall hold office until the successor of such director is elected and qualified or until the death, resignation or removal of such director. Elections of directors need not be by written ballot.

 

-7-


3.4 RESIGNATION AND VACANCIES .

Any director may resign at any time upon written notice given in writing or by electronic transmission to the Corporation. Any such resignation shall be effective upon delivery, unless the notice of resignation specifies a future effective date, and unless otherwise specified, the acceptance of such resignation shall not be a precondition to its effectiveness. When one or more directors so resigns and the resignation is effective at a future date, a majority of the directors then in office, including those who have so resigned, shall have the power to fill such vacancy or vacancies, the vote thereon to take effect when such resignation or resignations shall become effective, and each director so chosen shall hold office as provided in Section 3.3.

Unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Incorporation or these Bylaws:

(i) Vacancies and newly created directorships resulting from any increase in the authorized number of directors elected by all of the stockholders having the right to vote as a single class may be filled by a majority of the directors then in office, although less than a quorum, or by a sole remaining director.

(ii) Whenever the holders of any class or series of stock are entitled to elect one or more directors by the provisions of the Certificate of Incorporation, vacancies and newly created directorships of such class or series may, unless otherwise set forth in the Certificate of Incorporation, be filled by a majority of the directors elected by such class or series thereof then in office, or by a sole remaining director so elected.

If at any time, by reason of death or resignation or other cause, the Corporation should have no directors in office, then any officer or any stockholder or an executor, administrator, trustee or guardian of a stockholder, or other fiduciary entrusted with like responsibility for the person or estate of a stockholder, may call a special meeting of stockholders in accordance with the provisions of the Certificate of Incorporation or these Bylaws, or may apply to the Court of Chancery for a decree summarily ordering an election as provided in Section 211 of the General Corporation Law of Delaware.

If, at the time of filling any vacancy or any newly created directorship, the directors then in office constitute less than a majority of the whole Board of Directors (as constituted immediately prior to any such increase), then the Court of Chancery may, upon application of any stockholder or stockholders holding at least 10 percent of the total number of the shares at the time outstanding having the right to vote for such directors, summarily order an election to be held to fill any such vacancies or newly created directorships, or to replace the directors chosen by the directors then in office as aforesaid, which election shall be governed by the provisions of Section 211 of the General Corporation Law of Delaware as far as applicable.

3.5 PLACE OF MEETINGS; TELEPHONIC MEETINGS .

The Board of Directors of the Corporation may hold meetings, both regular and special, either within or outside the State of Delaware. Unless otherwise restricted by the Certificate of

 

-8-


Incorporation or these Bylaws, members of the Board of Directors, or any committee designated by the Board of Directors, may participate in a meeting of the Board of Directors, or any committee, by means of conference telephone or other communications equipment by means of which all persons participating in the meeting can hear each other, and such participation in a meeting shall constitute presence in person at the meeting.

3.6 FIRST MEETINGS .

The first meeting of each newly elected Board of Directors shall be held at such time and place as shall be fixed by the vote of the stockholders at the annual meeting and no notice of such meeting shall be necessary to the newly elected directors in order legally to constitute the meeting, provided a quorum shall be present. In the event of the failure of the stockholders to fix the time or place of such first meeting of the newly elected Board of Directors, or in the event such meeting is not held at the time and place so fixed by the stockholders, the meeting may be held at such time and place as shall be specified in a notice given as hereinafter provided for special meetings of the Board of Directors, or as shall be specified in a written waiver signed by all of the directors.

3.7 REGULAR MEETINGS .

Regular meetings of the Board of Directors shall be held on such dates and at such times and places as the Board of Directors may determine by resolution. Such regularly scheduled meetings may be held without further notice to the directors.

3.8 SPECIAL MEETINGS; NOTICE .

Special meetings of the Board of Directors for any purpose or purposes may be called at any time by the chairperson of the board, the president or any 2 directors. Special meetings of the Board of Directors shall be held upon 4 days’ notice by mail or 48 hours’ notice delivered personally, by telephone (including a voice messaging system or other system or technology designed to record and communicate messages), or by other form of electronic transmission. Any oral notice given personally or by telephone may be communicated either to the director or to a person at the office of the director who the person giving the notice has reason to believe will promptly communicate it to the director. A notice, or waiver of notice, need not specify the purpose of any regular or special meeting of the Board of Directors.

3.9 QUORUM .

At all meetings of the Board of Directors, a majority of the authorized number of directors shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of business and the act of a majority of the directors present at any meeting at which there is a quorum shall be the act of the Board of Directors, except as may otherwise be specifically provided by the General Corporation Law of Delaware or by the Certificate of Incorporation. If a quorum is not present at any meeting of the Board of Directors, then the directors present thereat may adjourn the meeting from time to time, without notice other than announcement at the meeting, until a quorum is present. A director of the Corporation who is present at a board or committee meeting at which any action is taken shall be deemed to have

 

-9-


assented to the action taken unless (i) the director objects at the beginning of the meeting, or promptly upon the director’s arrival, to holding the meeting or transacting any business at such meeting, (ii) the director’s dissent or abstention from the action taken is entered in the minutes of the meeting, or (iii) the director delivers written notice of the director’s dissent or abstention to the presiding officer of the meeting before its adjournment or to the Corporation within a reasonable time after adjournment of the meeting. The right of dissent or abstention is not available to a director who votes in favor of the action taken.

3.10 WAIVER OF NOTICE .

Whenever notice is required to be given to a director under any provision of the General Corporation Law of Delaware or of the Certificate of Incorporation or these Bylaws, a written waiver thereof, signed by the person entitled to notice, whether before or after the time stated therein, shall be deemed equivalent to notice. Such waiver shall be deemed delivered if made by electronic transmission. Attendance of a director at a meeting shall constitute a waiver of notice of such meeting, except when the director attends a meeting for the express purpose of objecting, at the beginning of the meeting or upon the director’s arrival, to the transaction of any business because the meeting is not lawfully called or convened. Neither the business to be transacted at, nor the purpose of, any regular or special meeting of the directors, or members of a committee of directors, need be specified in any written waiver of notice unless so required by the Certificate of Incorporation or these Bylaws.

3.11 ADJOURNED MEETING; NOTICE .

If a quorum is not present at any meeting of the Board of Directors, then the directors present thereat may adjourn the meeting from time to time, without notice other than announcement at the meeting, until a quorum is present.

3.12 BOARD ACTION BY WRITTEN CONSENT WITHOUT A MEETING .

Any action required or permitted to be taken at any meeting of the Board of Directors, or of any committee thereof, may be taken without a meeting if all members of the Board of Directors or committee, as the case may be, consent thereto in writing or by electronic transmission and the writing or writings or electronic transmission or transmissions are filed with the minutes of proceedings of the Board of Directors or committee. Such filing shall be in paper form if the minutes are maintained in paper form and shall be in electronic form if the minutes are maintained in electronic form.

3.13 FEES AND COMPENSATION OF DIRECTORS .

Unless otherwise restricted by the Certificate of Incorporation or these Bylaws, the Board of Directors shall have the authority to fix the compensation of directors. Directors and committee members may be paid their expenses, if any, of attendance at each board or committee meeting, a fixed sum for attendance at each board or committee meeting or a stated salary as director or a committee member, and such other compensation as the Board of Directors may determine. No such

 

-10-


payment shall preclude any director or committee member from serving the Corporation in any other capacity and receiving compensation therefor.

3.14 REMOVAL OF DIRECTORS .

Unless otherwise restricted by statute, by the Certificate of Incorporation or by these Bylaws, any director or the entire Board of Directors may be removed, with or without cause, by the holders of a majority of the shares then entitled to vote at an election of directors. If the Certificate of Incorporation or applicable law provides for cumulative voting in the election of directors and if less than the entire Board of Directors is to be removed, no director may be removed without cause if the votes cast against his or her removal would be sufficient to elect such director if then cumulatively voted at an election of the entire Board of Directors. No reduction of the authorized number of directors shall have the effect of removing any director prior to the expiration of such director’s term of office.

ARTICLE IV

COMMITTEES

4.1 COMMITTEES OF DIRECTORS .

The Board of Directors may designate one or more committees, with each committee to consist of one or more of the directors of the Corporation. The Board of Directors may designate one or more directors as alternate members of any committee, who may replace any absent or disqualified member at any meeting of the committee. In the absence or disqualification of a member of a committee, the member or members thereof present at any meeting and not disqualified from voting, whether or not such member or members constitute a quorum, may unanimously appoint another member of the Board of Directors to act at the meeting in the place of any such absent or disqualified member. Any such committee, to the extent provided in the resolution of the Board of Directors or in the Bylaws of the Corporation, shall have and may exercise all the powers and authority of the Board of Directors in the management of the business and affairs of the Corporation, and may authorize the seal of the Corporation to be affixed to all papers that may require it; but no such committee shall have the power or authority in reference to the following matter: (i) approving or adopting, or recommending to the stockholders, any action or matter required by the General Corporation Law of Delaware to be submitted to stockholders for approval or (ii) adopting, amending or repealing any bylaw of the Corporation.

4.2 COMMITTEE MINUTES .

Each committee shall keep regular minutes of its meetings and report the same to the Board of Directors when requested by the Board of Directors.

 

-11-


4.3 MEETINGS AND ACTION OF COMMITTEES .

Meetings and actions of committees shall be governed by, and held and taken in accordance with, the provisions of Article III of these Bylaws, including without limitation Section 3.5 (place of meetings; telephonic meetings), Section 3.7 (regular meetings), Section 3.8 (special meetings; notice), Section 3.9 (quorum), Section 3.10 (waiver of notice), Section 3.11 (adjourned meeting; notice), and Section 3.12 (board action by written consent without a meeting), with such changes in the context of those Bylaws as are necessary to substitute the committee and its members for the Board of Directors and its members; provided , however , that the time of regular meetings of committees may also be called by resolution of the Board of Directors and that notice of special meetings of committees shall also be given to all alternate members, who shall have the right to attend all meetings of the committee. Unless the Board of Directors adopts rules for the governance of a committee, then each committee may adopt its own governance rules, provided that such rules shall not be inconsistent with the provisions of the General Corporation Law of Delaware, the Certificate of Incorporation or these Bylaws.

ARTICLE V

OFFICERS .

5.1 OFFICERS .

The officers of the Corporation shall be a chief executive officer, a chief technology officer, a secretary, and a chief financial officer. The Corporation may also have, at the discretion of the Board of Directors, a chairperson of the board, one or more vice presidents, assistant vice presidents, assistant secretaries, assistant treasurers, and any such other officers as may be appointed in accordance with the provisions of Section 5.3 of these Bylaws. Any number of offices may be held by the same person.

5.2 ELECTION OF OFFICERS .

The officers of the Corporation, except such officers as may be appointed in accordance with the provisions of Sections 5.3 or 5.5 of these Bylaws, shall be appointed by the Board of Directors.

5.3 SUBORDINATE OFFICERS .

The Board of Directors may appoint, or empower the president to appoint, such other officers and agents as the business of the Corporation may require, each of whom shall hold office for such period, have such authority, and perform such duties as are provided in these Bylaws or as the Board of Directors (or, if so empowered, the president) may from time to time determine.

5.4 REMOVAL AND RESIGNATION OF OFFICERS .

Any officer may be removed, either with or without cause, by an affirmative vote of the majority of the Board of Directors at any regular or special meeting of the Board of Directors or,

 

-12-


except in the case of an officer appointed by the Board of Directors, by any officer upon whom such power of removal may be conferred by the Board of Directors.

Any officer may resign at any time upon written notice given in writing or by electronic transmission to the Corporation. Any resignation shall take effect at the date of the receipt of that notice or at any later time specified in that notice; and, unless otherwise specified in that notice, the acceptance of the resignation shall not be necessary to make it effective. Any resignation is without prejudice to the rights, if any, of the Corporation under any contract to which the officer is a party.

5.5 VACANCIES IN OFFICES .

Any vacancy occurring in any office of the Corporation shall be filled by the Board of Directors.

5.6 CHAIRPERSON OF THE BOARD .

The chairperson of the board, if such an officer be elected, shall, if present, preside at meetings of the Board of Directors and exercise and perform such other powers and duties as may from time to time be assigned to such officer by the Board of Directors or as may be prescribed by these Bylaws. If there is no president, then the chairperson of the board shall also be the chief executive officer of the Corporation and shall have the powers and duties prescribed in Section 5.7 of these Bylaws.

5.7 PRESIDENT .

Subject to such supervisory powers, if any, as may be given by the Board of Directors to the chairperson of the board, if there be such an officer, the president shall be the chief executive officer of the Corporation, unless some other officer is so designated by the Board of Directors, and shall, subject to the control of the Board of Directors, have general supervision, direction, and control of the business and the officers of the Corporation. The president shall preside at all meetings of the stockholders and, in the absence or nonexistence of a chairperson of the board, at all meetings of the Board of Directors. The president shall have the general powers and duties of management usually vested in the office of president of a corporation and shall have such other powers and duties as may be prescribed by the Board of Directors or these Bylaws.

5.8 VICE PRESIDENT .

In the absence or disability of the president, the vice presidents, if any, in order of their rank as fixed by the Board of Directors or, if not ranked, a vice president designated by the Board of Directors, shall perform all the duties of the president and when so acting shall have all the powers of, and be subject to all the restrictions upon, the president. The vice presidents shall have such other powers and perform such other duties as from time to time may be prescribed for them respectively by the Board of Directors, these Bylaws, the president or the chairperson of the board.

 

-13-


5.9 SECRETARY .

The secretary shall keep or cause to be kept, at the principal executive office of the Corporation or such other place as the Board of Directors may direct, a book of minutes of all meetings and actions of directors, committees of directors, and stockholders. The minutes shall show the time and place of each meeting, whether regular or special (and, if special, how authorized and the notice given), the names of those present at directors’ meetings or committee meetings, the number of shares present or represented at stockholders’ meetings, and the proceedings thereof.

The secretary shall keep, or cause to be kept, at the principal executive office of the Corporation or at the office of the Corporation’s transfer agent or registrar, as determined by resolution of the Board of Directors, a share register, or a duplicate share register, showing the names of all stockholders and their addresses, the number and classes of shares held by each stockholder, the number and date of certificates evidencing such shares, and the number and date of cancellation of every certificate surrendered for cancellation.

The secretary shall give, or cause to be given, notice of all meetings of the stockholders and of the Board of Directors required to be given by law or by these Bylaws. The secretary shall keep the seal of the Corporation, if one were adopted, in safe custody and shall have such other powers and perform such other duties as may be prescribed by the Board of Directors or by these Bylaws.

5.10 CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER .

The chief financial officer shall keep and maintain, or cause to be kept and maintained, adequate and correct books and records of accounts of the properties and business transactions of the Corporation, including accounts of its assets, liabilities, receipts, disbursements, gains, losses, capital, retained earnings, and shares. The books of account shall at all reasonable times be open to inspection by any director.

The chief financial officer shall deposit all money and other valuables in the name and to the credit of the Corporation with such depositaries as may be designated by the Board of Directors. Such officer shall disburse the funds of the Corporation as may be ordered by the

Board of Directors, shall render to the president and directors, whenever they request it, an account of all of the transactions of such officer as treasurer and of the financial condition of the Corporation, and shall have such other powers and perform such other duties as may be prescribed by the Board of Directors or these Bylaws.

The chief financial officer shall also be the treasurer of the Corporation unless otherwise designated by the Board of Directors.

5.11 ASSISTANT SECRETARY .

The assistant secretary, or, if there is more than one, the assistant secretaries in the order determined by the Board of Directors (or if there be no such determination, then in the order of their

 

-14-


election) shall, in the absence of the secretary or in the event of the inability or refusal of such officer to act, perform the duties and exercise the powers of the secretary and shall perform such other duties and have such other powers as the Board of Directors may from time to time prescribe.

5.12 ASSISTANT TREASURER .

The assistant treasurer, or, if there is more than one, the assistant treasurers, in the order determined by the Board of Directors (or if there be no such determination, then in the order of their election), shall, in the absence of the treasurer or in the event of the inability or refusal of such officer to act, perform the duties and exercise the powers of the chief financial officer and shall perform such other duties and have such other powers as the Board of Directors may from time to time prescribe.

5.13 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF OFFICERS .

In addition to the foregoing authority and duties, all officers of the Corporation shall respectively have such authority and perform such duties in the management of the business of the Corporation as may be designated from time to time by the Board of Directors.

5.14 SALARIES .

The salaries of the officers shall be fixed from time to time by the Board of Directors, or by any committee or officer to which or whom, as the case may be, the Board of Directors has delegated such authority. No officer shall be disqualified from receiving such salary by reason of the fact that he or she is also a director of the Corporation.

5.15 LOANS TO OFFICERS AND EMPLOYEES .

The Corporation may lend money to, or guarantee any obligation of, or otherwise assist any officer or other employee of the Corporation or any of its subsidiaries, including any officer or employee who is a director of the Corporation or any of its subsidiaries, whenever, in the judgment of the directors, such loan, guaranty or assistance may reasonably be expected to benefit the Corporation. The loan, guaranty or other assistance may be with or without interest and may be unsecured, or secured in such manner as the Board of Directors shall approve, including, without limitation, a pledge of shares of stock of the Corporation. Nothing in this section shall be deemed to deny, limit or restrict the powers of guaranty or warranty of the Corporation at common law or under any statute. Notwithstanding the foregoing, any such loan made, guaranteed, or arranged for by the Corporation shall contain a provision requiring the borrower to repay the obligation in full if the Corporation becomes subject to the restrictions of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, as amended, or if the borrower becomes an officer or director of a parent entity that is subject to the restrictions of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, as amended.

 

-15-


ARTICLE VI

INDEMNITY .

6.1 INDEMNIFICATION OF OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS .

To the fullest extent permitted by applicable law as it presently exists or may hereafter be amended ( provided , that in the case of such an amendment, only to the extent that such amendment permits the Corporation to provide broader indemnification rights than permitted prior thereto), the Corporation shall indemnify and hold harmless each person who was or is made or is threatened to be made a party or is otherwise involved in any action, suit or proceeding, whether civil, criminal, administrative or investigative (a “proceeding”) by reason of the fact that such person is or was a director or officer of the Corporation or is or was serving at the request of the Corporation as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation or of a partnership, joint venture, trust, enterprise or nonprofit entity (including service with respect to an employee benefit plan), against all liability, loss and reasonable expense incurred by such person, including attorneys’ fees, judgments, fines, penalties, ERISA excise taxes and amounts paid in settlement of proceedings. Except as set forth in Section 6.2 below, the Corporation shall be required to indemnify a person in connection with a proceeding (or part thereof) initiated by such person only if the proceeding (or part thereof) was authorized by the Board of Directors. The right to indemnification under this Article VI shall be construed as a contractual right of the indemnitees and shall inure to the benefit of an indemnitees heirs, executors and administrators.

6.2 PREPAYMENT OF EXPENSES; UNDERTAKING TO REPAY .

The Corporation shall pay the expenses (including attorneys’ fees) expected to be incurred in defending any proceeding in advance of its final disposition; provided , however , that if the General Corporation Law of Delaware then so requires, the payment of expenses incurred in advance of the final disposition of the proceeding by a director or officer in such person’s capacity as such (and not in any other capacity in which service is or was rendered by such person, such as service with respect to an employee benefit plan) shall be made only upon receipt of an undertaking by the director or officer to repay all amounts advanced if it is determined by a final judicial determination from which there is no further possibility of appeal that the director or officer is not entitled to be indemnified under this Article VI or otherwise; and provided , further , that the Corporation shall not be required to prepay any expenses to a person against whom the Corporation directly brings a claim alleging that such person has (i) breached such person’s duty of loyalty to the Corporation, or committed an act or omission not in good faith or that involves intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law, or (ii) derived an improper personal benefit from a transaction.

6.3 CLAIMS BY INDEMNITEE; PRESUMPTION OF VALIDITY .

If a claim for indemnification or payment of expenses under this Article VI is not paid in full within 60 days after a written claim therefor has been presented to the Corporation (except in the case of a claim for prepayment of expenses in accordance with Section 6.2 above, in which case the applicable period shall be 20 days) the indemnitee may file suit to recover the unpaid amount of such

 

-16-


claim. If successful in whole or in part in any such suit, the indemnitee shall be entitled to be paid the expense of prosecuting such claim. In any such action, the Corporation shall have the burden of proving that the claimant was not entitled to the requested indemnification or payment of expenses under applicable law. The indemnitee shall be presumed to be entitled to indemnification under this Article VI upon submission of a written claim (and, in an action brought to enforce a claim for prepayment of expenses, where the required undertaking, if any is required, has been tendered to the Corporation), and thereafter the Corporation shall have the burden of proof to overcome the presumption that the indemnitee is not so entitled. Neither the failure of the Corporation (including its Board of Directors, independent legal counsel or its stockholders) to have made a determination prior to the commencement of such suit that indemnification of the indemnitee is proper in the circumstances, nor an actual determination by the Corporation (including its Board of Directors, independent legal counsel or its stockholders) that the indemnitee is not entitled to indemnification shall be a defense to the suit or create a presumption that the indemnitee is not so entitled.

6.4 NON-EXCLUSIVITY OF RIGHTS .

The rights conferred on any person by this Article VI shall not be exclusive of any other rights that such person may have or may hereafter acquire under any statute, provision of the Certificate of Incorporation or these Bylaws, contractual agreement, vote of the stockholders or disinterested directors or otherwise. Additionally, nothing in this Article VI shall limit the ability of the Corporation, in its discretion, to indemnify or advance expenses to persons whom the Corporation is not obligated to indemnify or advance expenses pursuant to this Article VI.

6.5 SET-OFF AGAINST OTHER INDEMNIFICATION .

The Corporation’s obligation, if any, to indemnify any person who was or is serving at its request as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust, enterprise or nonprofit entity shall be reduced by any amount that such person may collect as indemnification from such other corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust, enterprise or nonprofit entity.

6.6 EFFECT OF AMENDMENT OR REPEAL .

No repeal or modification of this Article VI shall adversely affect any right or protection afforded hereunder to any person in respect of an act or omission occurring prior to the time of such repeal or modification.

6.7 INDEMNIFICATION OF EMPLOYEES AND AGENTS .

The Corporation may by action of the Board of Directors, extend the rights described in this Article VI to individual employees or agents, or groups of employees or agents of the Corporation with the same scope and effect as the provisions of this Article VI; provided , however , that an undertaking of the sort described in Section 6.2 shall be required only if specifically requested by the Board of Directors.

 

-17-


6.8 INSURANCE; INDEMNIFICATION AGREEMENTS .

The Corporation may purchase and maintain insurance on behalf of any person who is or was a director, officer, employee or agent of the Corporation, or is or was serving at the request of the Corporation as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise or nonprofit entity against any liability asserted against such person and incurred by such person in any such capacity, or arising out of the status of such person as such, whether or not the Corporation would have the power to indemnify such person against such liability under the provisions of the General Corporation Law of Delaware. The Corporation, without further stockholder approval, may enter into contracts with any person who is or was a director, officer, employee or agent, or is or was serving at the request of the Corporation as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise or nonprofit entity, in furtherance of the provisions of this Article VI. The Corporation may also create a trust fund, grant a security interest or use other means (including, without limitation, a letter of credit) to ensure the payment of such amounts as may be necessary to effect indemnification as provided herein.

6.9 RELIANCE UPON BOOKS, REPORTS AND RECORDS .

Each director, each member of any committee designated by the Board of Directors, and each officer of the Corporation shall, in the performance of his or her duties, be fully protected in relying in good faith upon the books of account or other records of the Corporation and upon such information, opinions, reports or statements presented to the Corporation by any of its officers or employees, or committees of the Board of Directors so designated, or by any other person as to matters which such director or committee member reasonably believes are within such other person’s professional or expert competence and who has been selected with reasonable care by or on behalf of the Corporation.

6.10 CERTAIN DEFINITIONS .

For purposes of this Article VI, references to the “Corporation” shall include, in addition to the resulting corporation, any constituent corporation (including any constituent of a constituent) absorbed in a consolidation or merger which, if its separate existence had continued, would have had power and authority to indemnify its directors, officers, and employees or agents, so that any person who is or was a director, officer, employee or agent of such constituent corporation, or is or was serving at the request of such constituent corporation as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise or nonprofit entity, shall stand in the same position under this Article VI with respect to the resulting or surviving corporation as such person would have with respect to such constituent corporation if its separate existence had continued.

 

-18-


ARTICLE VII

RECORDS AND REPORTS .

7.1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF RECORDS .

The Corporation shall, either at its principal executive office or at such place or places as designated by the Board of Directors, keep a record of its stockholders, listing their names and addresses and the number and class of shares held by each stockholder, a copy of these Bylaws as amended to date, accounting books, and other records.

Any stockholder of record, in person or by attorney or other agent, shall, upon written demand under oath stating the purpose thereof, have the right during the usual hours for business to inspect for any proper purpose the Corporation’s stock ledger, a list of its stockholders, and its other books and records and to make copies or extracts therefrom. A proper purpose shall mean a purpose reasonably related to such person’s interest as a stockholder. In every instance where an attorney or other agent is the person who seeks the right to inspection, the demand under oath shall be accompanied by a power of attorney or such other writing that authorizes the attorney or other agent to so act on behalf of the stockholder. The demand under oath shall be directed to the Corporation at its registered office in Delaware or at its principal place of business.

7.2 INSPECTION BY DIRECTORS .

Any director shall have the right to examine the Corporation’s stock ledger, a list of its stockholders, and its other books and records for a purpose reasonably related to the position of such person as a director. The Court of Chancery is hereby vested with the exclusive jurisdiction to determine whether a director is entitled to the inspection sought. The Court may summarily order the Corporation to permit the director to inspect any and all books and records, the stock ledger, and the stock list and to make copies or extracts therefrom. The Court may, in its discretion, prescribe any limitations or conditions with reference to the inspection, or award such other and further relief as the Court may deem just and proper.

ARTICLE VIII

STOCK AND STOCK CERTIFICATES .

8.1 STOCK CERTIFICATES; PARTLY PAID SHARES .

No shares of the Corporation shall be issued unless authorized by the Board of Directors, which authorization shall include the maximum number of shares to be issued and the consideration to be received for each share.

The shares of a Corporation shall be represented by certificates, which shall include on their face or back written notice of any restrictions that may be imposed on the transferability of such shares and shall be consecutively numbered or otherwise identified. Notwithstanding the foregoing,

 

-19-


the Board of Directors of the Corporation may provide by resolution or resolutions that some or all of any or all classes or series of its stock shall be uncertificated shares. Any such resolution shall not apply to shares represented by a certificate until such certificate is surrendered to the Corporation. Notwithstanding the adoption of such a resolution by the Board of Directors, every holder of stock represented by certificates and upon request every holder of uncertificated shares shall be entitled to have a certificate signed by, or in the name of the Corporation by the chairperson or vice-chairperson of the Board of Directors, or the president or vice-president, and by the treasurer or an assistant treasurer, or the secretary or an assistant secretary of the Corporation representing the number of shares registered in certificate form. The Board of Directors may in its discretion appoint responsible banks or trust companies from time to time to act as transfer agents and registrars of the stock of the Corporation; and, when such appointments shall have been made, no stock certificate thereafter issued shall be valid until countersigned by one of such transfer agents and registered by one of such registrars. Any or all of the signatures on the certificate may be a facsimile. In case any officer, transfer agent or registrar who has signed or whose facsimile signature has been placed upon a certificate has ceased to be such officer, transfer agent or registrar before such certificate is issued, it may be issued by the Corporation with the same effect as if such person were such officer, transfer agent or registrar at the date of issue.

The Corporation may issue the whole or any part of its shares as partly paid and subject to call for the remainder of the consideration to be paid therefor. Upon the face or back of each stock certificate issued to represent any such partly paid shares (or upon the books and records of the Corporation in the case of uncertificated partly paid shares), the total amount of the consideration to be paid therefor and the amount paid thereon shall be stated. Upon the declaration of any dividend on fully paid shares, the Corporation shall declare a dividend upon partly paid shares of the same class, but only upon the basis of the percentage of the consideration actually paid thereon.

8.2 SPECIAL DESIGNATION ON CERTIFICATES .

If the Corporation is authorized to issue more than one class of stock or more than one series of any class, then the powers, the designations, the preferences, and the relative, participating, optional or other rights of each class of stock or series thereof and the qualifications, limitations or restrictions of such powers, preferences and/or rights shall be set forth in full or summarized on the face or back of the certificate that the Corporation shall issue to represent such class or series of stock; provided , however , that, except as otherwise provided in Section 202 of the General Corporation Law of Delaware, in lieu of the foregoing requirements there may be set forth on the face or back of the certificate that the Corporation shall issue to represent such class or series of stock a statement that the Corporation will furnish without charge to each stockholder who so requests the powers, the designations, the preferences, and the relative, participating, optional or other rights of each class of stock or series thereof and the qualifications, limitations or restrictions of such powers, preferences and/or rights.

 

-20-


8.3 LOST CERTIFICATES .

Except as provided in this Section 8.3, no new certificates for shares shall be issued to replace a previously issued certificate unless the latter is surrendered to the Corporation and cancelled at the same time. The Corporation may issue a new certificate of stock or uncertificated shares in the place of any certificate theretofore issued by it that is alleged to have been lost, stolen or destroyed, and the Corporation may require the owner of the lost, stolen or destroyed certificate, or the legal representative of such owner, to give the Corporation a bond or an indemnity sufficient to protect it against any claim that may be made against it on account of the alleged loss, theft or destruction of any such certificate or the issuance of such new certificate or uncertificated shares.

8.4 TRANSFER OF STOCK; RESTRICTIONS ON TRANSFER .

Upon surrender to the Corporation or the transfer agent of the Corporation of a certificate for shares duly endorsed or accompanied by proper evidence of succession, assignment or authority to transfer, it shall be the duty of the Corporation to issue a new certificate to the person entitled thereto, cancel the old certificate, and record the transaction in its books.

Except to the extent that the Corporation has obtained an opinion of counsel acceptable to the Corporation that transfer restrictions are not required under applicable securities laws, or has otherwise satisfied itself that such transfer restrictions are not required, all certificates representing shares of the Corporation shall bear on the face of the certificate, or on the reverse of the certificate if a reference to the legend is contained on the face, such legends as may be required by applicable law, including without limitation a legend that reads substantially as follows:

“THE SHARES REPRESENTED HEREBY HAVE NOT BEEN REGISTERED UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933, AS AMENDED, OR ANY APPLICABLE STATE SECURITIES LAW AND MAY NOT BE SOLD, PLEDGED, OR OTHERWISE TRANSFERRED WITHOUT EFFECTIVE REGISTRATIONS THEREUNDER OR AN OPINION OF COUNSEL, SATISFACTORY TO THE COMPANY AND ITS COUNSEL, THAT SUCH REGISTRATION ARE NOT REQUIRED.”

8.5 STOCK TRANSFER AGREEMENTS .

The Corporation shall have power to enter into and perform any agreement with any number of stockholders of any one or more classes of stock of the Corporation to restrict the transfer of shares of stock of the Corporation of any one or more classes or series owned by such stockholders in any manner not prohibited by the General Corporation Law of Delaware.

8.6 REGISTERED STOCKHOLDERS .

The Corporation shall be entitled to recognize the exclusive right of a person registered on its books as the owner of shares to receive dividends and to vote as such owner, shall be entitled to hold liable for calls and assessments the person registered on its books as the owner of shares, and shall

 

-21-


not be bound to recognize any equitable or other claim to or interest in such share or shares on the part of another person, whether or not it shall have express or other notice thereof, except as otherwise provided by the laws of Delaware.

8.7 DIVIDENDS .

The directors of the Corporation, subject to any restrictions contained in the Certificate of Incorporation, may declare and pay dividends upon the shares of its capital stock pursuant to the General Corporation Law of Delaware. Dividends may be paid in cash, in property, or in shares of the Corporation’s capital stock.

The directors of the Corporation may set apart out of any of the funds of the Corporation available for dividends a reserve or reserves for any proper purpose and may abolish any such reserve. Such purposes shall include, but not be limited to, equalizing dividends, repairing or maintaining any property of the Corporation, and meeting contingencies.

ARTICLE IX

GENERAL MATTERS .

9.1 CHECKS .

From time to time, the Board of Directors shall determine by resolution which person or persons may sign or endorse all checks, drafts, other orders for payment of money, notes or other evidences of indebtedness that are issued in the name of or payable to the Corporation, and only the persons so authorized shall sign or endorse those instruments.

9.2 EXECUTION OF CORPORATE CONTRACTS AND INSTRUMENTS .

The Board of Directors, except as otherwise provided in these Bylaws, may authorize any officer or officers, or agent or agents, to enter into any contract or execute any instrument in the name of and on behalf of the Corporation; such authority may be general or confined to specific instances. Unless so authorized or ratified by the Board of Directors or within the agency power of an officer, no officer, agent or employee shall have any power or authority to bind the Corporation by any contract or engagement or to pledge its credit or to render it liable for any purpose or for any amount.

9.3 FISCAL YEAR .

The fiscal year of the Corporation shall be the same as the calendar year unless otherwise fixed by resolution of the Board of Directors.

 

-22-


9.4 SEAL .

The Corporation may adopt a corporate seal, which shall be adopted and which may be altered by the Board of Directors, and may use the same by causing it or a facsimile thereof to be impressed or affixed or in any other manner reproduced.

9.5 REPRESENTATION OF SHARES OF OTHER CORPORATIONS .

The chairperson of the board, the president, any vice president, the treasurer, the secretary or assistant secretary of the Corporation, or any other person authorized by the Board of Directors or the president or a vice president, is authorized to vote, represent, and exercise on behalf of the Corporation all rights incident to any and all shares of any other corporation or corporations standing in the name of the Corporation. The authority granted herein may be exercised either by such person directly or by any other person authorized to do so by proxy or power of attorney duly executed by such person having the authority.

9.6 CONSTRUCTION; DEFINITIONS .

Unless the context requires otherwise, the general provisions, rules of construction, and definitions in the General Corporation Law of Delaware shall govern the construction of these Bylaws. Without limiting the generality of this provision, the singular number includes the plural, the plural number includes the singular, and the term “person” includes both a corporation and a natural person.

ARTICLE X

AMENDMENTS .

Subject to any voting requirements set forth in the Corporation’s Certificate of Incorporation, the original or other Bylaws of the Corporation may be adopted, amended or repealed by the stockholders entitled to vote; provided , however , that the Corporation may, in its Certificate of Incorporation, confer the power to adopt, amend or repeal Bylaws upon the Board of Directors. The fact that such power has been so conferred upon the Board of Directors shall not divest the stockholders of the power, nor limit their power to adopt, amend or repeal Bylaws.

**********

 

-23-

Exhibit 10.4

BOX, INC.

2011 EQUITY INCENTIVE PLAN

SECTION 1. PURPOSE

The purpose of the Box, Inc. 2011 Equity Incentive Plan is to attract, retain and motivate employees, officers, directors, consultants, agents, advisors and independent contractors of the Company and its Related Companies by providing them the opportunity to acquire a proprietary interest in the Company and to align their interests and efforts to the long-term interests of the Company’s stockholders.

SECTION 2. DEFINITIONS

Certain capitalized terms used in the Plan have the meanings set forth in Appendix A.

SECTION 3. ADMINISTRATION

3.1 Administration of the Plan

The Plan shall be administered by the Board. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Board may delegate concurrent responsibility for administering the Plan, including with respect to designated classes of Eligible Persons, to a committee or committees (which term includes subcommittees) consisting of one or more members of the Board, subject to such limitations as the Board deems appropriate. If and so long as the Common Stock is registered under Section 12(b) or 12(g) of the Exchange Act, the Board shall consider in selecting the members of any committee acting as Plan Administrator, with respect to any persons subject to Section 16 of the Exchange Act, the provisions regarding “non-employee directors” as contemplated by Rule 16b-3(b)(3) under the Exchange Act, or any successor provision thereto. Members of any committee shall serve for such term as the Board may determine, subject to removal by the Board at any time. All references in the Plan to the “ Plan Administrator ” shall be, as applicable, to the Board or any committee to whom the Board has delegated authority to administer the Plan.

3.2 Administration and Interpretation by Plan Administrator

(a) Except for the terms and conditions explicitly set forth in the Plan, and to the extent permitted by applicable law, the Plan Administrator shall have full power and exclusive authority, subject to such orders or resolutions not inconsistent with the provisions of the Plan as may from time to time be adopted by the Board or a committee composed of members of the Board, to (i) select the Eligible Persons to whom Awards may from time to time be granted under the Plan; (ii) determine the type or types of Award to be granted to each Participant under the Plan; (iii) determine the number of shares of Common Stock to be covered by each Award granted under the Plan; (iv) determine the terms and conditions of any Award granted under the Plan; (v) approve the forms of notice or agreement for use under the Plan; (vi) determine whether, to what extent and under what circumstances Awards


may be settled in cash, shares of Common Stock or other property or canceled or suspended; (vii) interpret and administer the Plan and any instrument evidencing an Award, notice or agreement executed or entered into under the Plan; (viii) establish such rules and regulations as it shall deem appropriate for the proper administration of the Plan; (ix) delegate ministerial duties to such of the Company’s employees as it so determines; and (x) make any other determination and take any other action that the Plan Administrator deems necessary or desirable for administration of the Plan.

(b) The effect on the vesting of an Award of a Company-approved leave of absence or a Participant’s reduction in hours of employment or service shall be determined by the Company’s chief human resources officer or other person performing that function or, with respect to directors or executive officers, by the Board, whose determination shall be final.

(c) Decisions of the Plan Administrator shall be final, conclusive and binding on all persons, including the Company, any Participant, any stockholder and any Eligible Person. A majority of the members of the Plan Administrator may determine its actions.

SECTION 4. SHARES SUBJECT TO THE PLAN

4.1 Authorized Number of Shares

Subject to adjustment from time to time as provided in Section 14.1, a maximum of 16,840,327 shares of Common Stock shall be available for issuance under the Plan. Shares issued under the Plan shall be drawn from authorized and unissued shares or shares now held or subsequently acquired by the Company as treasury shares.

4.2 Share Usage

(a) Shares of Common Stock covered by an Award shall not be counted as used unless and until they are actually issued and delivered to a Participant. If any Award lapses, expires, terminates or is canceled prior to the issuance of shares thereunder or if shares of Common Stock are issued under the Plan to a Participant and thereafter are forfeited to or otherwise reacquired by the Company, the shares subject to such Awards and the forfeited or reacquired shares shall again be available for issuance under the Plan. Any shares of Common Stock (i) tendered by a Participant or retained by the Company as full or partial payment to the Company for the purchase price of an Award or to satisfy tax withholding obligations in connection with an Award, or (ii) covered by an Award that is settled in cash or in a manner such that some or all of the shares covered by the Award are not issued, shall be available for Awards under the Plan. The number of shares of Common Stock available for issuance under the Plan shall not be reduced to reflect any dividends or dividend equivalents that are reinvested into additional shares of Common Stock or credited as additional shares of Common Stock subject or paid with respect to an Award.

(b) The Plan Administrator shall also, without limitation, have the authority to grant Awards as an alternative to or as the form of payment for grants or rights earned or due under other compensation plans or arrangements of the Company.

 

2


(c) Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan to the contrary, the Plan Administrator may grant Substitute Awards under the Plan. In the event that a written agreement between the Company and an Acquired Entity pursuant to which merger or consolidation is completed is approved by the Board and that agreement sets forth the terms and conditions of the substitution for or assumption of outstanding awards of the Acquired Entity, those terms and conditions shall be deemed to be the action of the Plan Administrator without any further action by the Plan Administrator, and the persons holding such awards shall be deemed to be Participants.

(d) Notwithstanding any other provisions in this Section 4.2 to the contrary, the maximum number of shares that may be issued upon the exercise of Incentive Stock Options shall equal the aggregate share number stated in Section 4.1, subject to adjustment as provided in Section 14.1.

SECTION 5. ELIGIBILITY

An Award may be granted to any employee, officer or director of the Company or a Related Company whom the Plan Administrator from time to time selects. An Award may also be granted to any consultant, agent, advisor or independent contractor for bona fide services rendered to the Company or any Related Company that (a) are not in connection with the offer and sale of the Company’s securities in a capital-raising transaction and (b) do not directly or indirectly promote or maintain a market for the Company’s securities.

SECTION 6. AWARDS

6.1 Form, Grant and Settlement of Awards

The Plan Administrator shall have the authority, in its sole discretion, to determine the type or types of Awards to be granted under the Plan. Such Awards may be granted either alone or in addition to or in tandem with any other type of Award. Any Award settlement may be subject to such conditions, restrictions and contingencies as the Plan Administrator shall determine.

6.2 Evidence of Awards

Awards granted under the Plan shall be evidenced by a written, including an electronic, instrument that shall contain such terms, conditions, limitations and restrictions as the Plan Administrator shall deem advisable and that are not inconsistent with the Plan.

6.3 Dividends and Distributions

Participants may, if the Plan Administrator so determines, be credited with dividends or dividend equivalents paid with respect to shares of Common Stock underlying an Award in a manner determined by the Plan Administrator in its sole discretion. The Plan Administrator may apply any restrictions to the dividends or dividend equivalents that the Plan Administrator deems appropriate. The Plan Administrator, in its sole discretion, may

 

3


determine the form of payment of dividends or dividend equivalents, including cash, shares of Common Stock, Restricted Stock or Stock Units. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the right to any dividends or dividend equivalents declared and paid on the number of shares underlying an Option or Stock Appreciation Right may not be contingent, directly or indirectly, on the exercise of the Option or Stock Appreciation Right, and must comply with or qualify for an exemption under Section 409A. Also notwithstanding the foregoing, the right to any dividends or dividend equivalents declared and paid on Restricted Stock must (a) be paid at the same time they are paid to other stockholders and (b) comply with or qualify for an exemption under Section 409A.

SECTION 7. OPTIONS

7.1 Grant of Options

The Plan Administrator may grant Options designated as Incentive Stock Options or Nonqualified Stock Options.

7.2 Option Exercise Price

Options shall be granted with an exercise price per share not less than 100% of the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock on the Grant Date (and not less than the minimum exercise price required by Section 422 of the Code with respect to Incentive Stock Options), except in the case of Substitute Awards. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Plan Administrator may grant Nonqualified Stock Options with an exercise price per share of less than the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock on the Grant Date if the Option meets all the requirements for Awards that are considered “deferred compensation” within the meaning of Section 409A.

7.3 Term of Options

Subject to earlier termination in accordance with the terms of the Plan and the instrument evidencing the Option, the maximum term of an Option (the “ Option Term ”) shall be ten years from the Grant Date. For Incentive Stock Options, the Option Term shall be as specified in Section 8.4.

7.4 Exercise of Options

The Plan Administrator shall establish and set forth in each instrument that evidences an Option the time at which, or the installments in which, the Option shall vest and become exercisable, any of which provisions may be waived or modified by the Plan Administrator at any time. If not so established in the instrument evidencing the Option, the Option shall vest and become exercisable according to the following schedule, which may be waived or modified by the Plan Administrator at any time:

 

4


Period of Participant’s Continuous

Employment or Service With the

Company or Its Related Companies

From the Vesting Commencement Date

   Portion of Total Option That
Is Vested and Exercisable

After 1 year

   1/4 th

After each additional one-month period of continuous service completed thereafter

   An additional 1/48 th

After 4 years

   100%

To the extent an Option has vested and become exercisable, the Option may be exercised in whole or from time to time in part by delivery to or as directed or approved by the Company of a properly executed stock option exercise agreement or notice, in a form and in accordance with procedures established by the Plan Administrator, setting forth the number of shares with respect to which the Option is being exercised, the restrictions imposed on the shares purchased under such exercise agreement or notice, if any, and such representations and agreements as may be required by the Plan Administrator, accompanied by payment in full as described in Section 7.5. An Option may be exercised only for whole shares and may not be exercised for less than a reasonable number of shares at any one time, as determined by the Plan Administrator.

7.5 Payment of Exercise Price

The exercise price for shares purchased under an Option shall be paid in full to the Company by delivery of consideration equal to the product of the Option exercise price and the number of shares purchased. Such consideration must be paid before the Company will issue the shares being purchased and must be in a form or a combination of forms acceptable to the Plan Administrator for that purchase, which forms may include:

(a) cash;

(b) check or wire transfer;

(c) having the Company withhold shares of Common Stock that would otherwise be issued on exercise of the Option that have an aggregate Fair Market Value equal to the aggregate exercise price of the shares being purchased under the Option;

(d) tendering (either actually or, if and so long as the Common Stock is registered under Section 12(b) or 12(g) of the Exchange Act, by attestation) shares of Common Stock owned by the Participant that have an aggregate Fair Market Value equal to the aggregate exercise price of the shares being purchased under the Option;

 

5


(e) if and so long as the Common Stock is registered under Section 12(b) or 12(g) of the Exchange Act, and to the extent permitted by law, delivery of a properly executed exercise agreement or notice, together with irrevocable instructions to a brokerage firm designated or approved by the Company to deliver promptly to the Company the aggregate amount of proceeds to pay the Option exercise price and any tax withholding obligations that may arise in connection with the exercise, all in accordance with the regulations of the Federal Reserve Board; or

(f) such other consideration as the Plan Administrator may permit.

In addition, to assist a Participant (including directors and executive officers) in acquiring shares of Common Stock pursuant to an Option granted under the Plan, the Plan Administrator, in its sole discretion and to the extent permitted by applicable law, may authorize, either at the Grant Date or at any time before the acquisition of Common Stock pursuant to the Option, (i) the payment by a Participant of the purchase price of the Common Stock by a promissory note or (ii) the guarantee by the Company of a loan obtained by the Participant from a third party. At the discretion of the Plan Administrator, such notes or loans may be full or partial recourse. Subject to the foregoing, the Plan Administrator shall in its sole discretion specify the terms of any loans or loan guarantees, including the interest rate and terms of and security for repayment.

7.6 Effect of Termination of Service

The Plan Administrator shall establish and set forth in each instrument that evidences an Option whether the Option shall continue to be exercisable, and the terms and conditions of such exercise, after a Termination of Service, any of which provisions may be waived or modified by the Plan Administrator at any time. If not so established in the instrument evidencing the Option, the Option shall be exercisable according to the following terms and conditions, which may be waived or modified by the Plan Administrator at any time:

(a) Any portion of an Option that is not vested and exercisable on the date of a Participant’s Termination of Service shall expire on such date.

(b) Any portion of an Option that is vested and exercisable on the date of a Participant’s Termination of Service shall expire on the earliest to occur of:

(i) if the Participant’s Termination of Service occurs for reasons other than Cause, Retirement, Disability or death, the date that is three months after such Termination of Service;

(ii) if the Participant’s Termination of Service occurs by reason of Retirement, Disability or death, the one-year anniversary of such Termination of Service; and

(iii) the Option Expiration Date.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, if a Participant dies after the Participant’s Termination of Service but while an Option is otherwise exercisable, the portion of the Option that is vested and exercisable on the date of such Termination of Service shall expire upon the earlier to occur of (y) the Option Expiration Date and (z) the one-year anniversary of the date of death, unless the Plan Administrator determines otherwise.

 

6


Notwithstanding the foregoing, to the extent required by applicable law, unless employment or services are terminated for Cause, the right to exercise an Option in the event of Termination of Service, to the extent that the Participant is otherwise entitled to exercise an Option on the date of Termination of Service, shall be

a. at least six months from the date of a Participant’s Termination of Service if termination was caused by death or Disability; and

b. at least 30 days from the date of a Participant’s Termination of Service if termination was caused by other than death or Disability;

c. but in no event later than the Option Expiration Date.

Also notwithstanding the foregoing, in case a Participant’s Termination of Service occurs for Cause, all Options granted to the Participant shall automatically expire upon first notification to the Participant of such termination, unless the Plan Administrator determines otherwise. If a Participant’s employment or service relationship with the Company is suspended pending an investigation of whether the Participant shall be terminated for Cause, all the Participant’s rights under any Option shall likewise be suspended during the period of investigation. If any facts that would constitute termination for Cause are discovered after a Participant’s Termination of Service, any Option then held by the Participant may be immediately terminated by the Plan Administrator, in its sole discretion.

SECTION 8. INCENTIVE STOCK OPTION LIMITATIONS

Notwithstanding any other provisions of the Plan to the contrary, the terms and conditions of any Incentive Stock Options shall in addition comply in all respects with Section 422 of the Code or any successor provision, and any applicable regulations thereunder, including, to the extent required thereunder, the following:

8.1 Dollar Limitation

To the extent the aggregate Fair Market Value (determined as of the Grant Date) of Common Stock with respect to which a Participant’s Incentive Stock Options become exercisable for the first time during any calendar year (under the Plan and all other stock option plans of the Company and its parent and subsidiary corporations) exceeds $100,000, such portion in excess of $100,000 shall be treated as a Nonqualified Stock Option. In the event the Participant holds two or more such Options that become exercisable for the first time in the same calendar year, such limitation shall be applied on the basis of the order in which such Options are granted.

 

7


8.2 Eligible Employees

Individuals who are not employees of the Company or one of its parent or subsidiary corporations may not be granted Incentive Stock Options.

8.3 Exercise Price

Incentive Stock Options shall be granted with an exercise price per share not less than 100% of the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock on the Grant Date and, in the case of an Incentive Stock Option granted to a Participant who owns more than 10% of the total combined voting power of all classes of the stock of the Company or of its parent or subsidiary corporations (a “ Ten Percent Stockholder ”), shall be granted with an exercise price per share not less than 110% of the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock on the Grant Date. The determination of more than 10% ownership shall be made in accordance with Section 422 of the Code.

8.4 Option Term

Subject to earlier termination in accordance with the terms of the Plan and the instrument evidencing the Option, the maximum term of an Incentive Stock Option shall not exceed ten years, and in the case of an Incentive Stock Option granted to a Ten Percent Stockholder, shall not exceed five years.

8.5 Exercisability

An Option designated as an Incentive Stock Option shall cease to qualify for favorable tax treatment as an Incentive Stock Option to the extent it is exercised (if permitted by the terms of the Option) (a) more than three months after the date of a Participant’s termination of employment if termination was for reasons other than death or disability, (b) more than one year after the date of a Participant’s termination of employment if termination was by reason of disability, or (c) more than six months following the first day of a Participant’s leave of absence that exceeds three months, unless the Participant’s reemployment rights are guaranteed by statute or contract.

8.6 Taxation of Incentive Stock Options

In order to obtain certain tax benefits afforded to Incentive Stock Options under Section 422 of the Code, the Participant must hold the shares acquired upon the exercise of an Incentive Stock Option for two years after the Grant Date and one year after the date of exercise. A Participant may be subject to the alternative minimum tax at the time of exercise of an Incentive Stock Option. The Participant shall give the Company prompt notice of any disposition of shares acquired on the exercise of an Incentive Stock Option prior to the expiration of such holding periods.

 

8


8.7 Code Definitions

For the purposes of this Section 8, “disability,” “parent corporation” and “subsidiary corporation” shall have the meanings attributed to those terms for purposes of Section 422 of the Code.

8.8 Promissory Notes

The amount of any promissory note delivered pursuant to Section 7.5 in connection with an Incentive Stock Option shall bear interest at a rate specified by the Plan Administrator, but in no case less than the rate required to avoid imputation of interest (taking into account any exceptions to the imputed interest rules) for federal income tax purposes.

SECTION 9. STOCK APPRECIATION RIGHTS

9.1 Grant of Stock Appreciation Rights

The Plan Administrator may grant Stock Appreciation Rights to Participants at any time on such terms and conditions as the Plan Administrator shall determine in its sole discretion. An SAR may be granted in tandem with an Option or alone (“ freestanding ”). The grant price of a tandem SAR shall be equal to the exercise price of the related Option. The grant price of a freestanding SAR shall be established in accordance with procedures for Options set forth in Section 7.2. An SAR may be exercised upon such terms and conditions and for the term as the Plan Administrator determines in its sole discretion; provided, however, that, subject to earlier termination in accordance with the terms of the Plan and the instrument evidencing the SAR, the maximum term of a freestanding SAR shall be ten years, and in the case of a tandem SAR, (a) the term shall not exceed the term of the related Option and (b) the tandem SAR may be exercised for all or part of the shares subject to the related Option upon the surrender of the right to exercise the equivalent portion of the related Option, except that the tandem SAR may be exercised only with respect to the shares for which its related Option is then exercisable.

9.2 Payment of SAR Amount

Upon the exercise of an SAR, a Participant shall be entitled to receive payment in an amount determined by multiplying: (a) the difference between the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock on the date of exercise over the grant price of the SAR by (b) the number of shares with respect to which the SAR is exercised. At the discretion of the Plan Administrator as set forth in the instrument evidencing the Award, the payment upon exercise of an SAR may be in cash, in shares, in some combination thereof or in any other manner approved by the Plan Administrator in its sole discretion.

 

9


9.3 Waiver of Restrictions

The Plan Administrator, in its sole discretion, may waive any other terms, conditions or restrictions on any SAR under such circumstances and subject to such terms and conditions as the Plan Administrator shall deem appropriate.

SECTION 10. STOCK AWARDS, RESTRICTED STOCK AND STOCK UNITS

10.1 Grant of Stock Awards, Restricted Stock and Stock Units

The Plan Administrator may grant Stock Awards, Restricted Stock and Stock Units on such terms and conditions and subject to such repurchase or forfeiture restrictions, if any, which may be based on continuous service with the Company or a Related Company or the achievement of any performance goals, as the Plan Administrator shall determine in its sole discretion, which terms, conditions and restrictions shall be set forth in the instrument evidencing the Award.

10.2 Vesting of Restricted Stock and Stock Units

Upon the satisfaction of any terms, conditions and restrictions prescribed with respect to Restricted Stock or Stock Units, or upon a Participant’s release from any terms, conditions and restrictions of Restricted Stock or Stock Units, as determined by the Plan Administrator (a) the shares of Restricted Stock covered by each Award of Restricted Stock shall become freely transferable by the Participant subject to the terms and conditions of the Plan, the instrument evidencing the Award, and applicable securities laws, and (b) Stock Units shall be paid in shares of Common Stock or, if set forth in the instrument evidencing the Awards, in cash or a combination of cash and shares of Common Stock. Any fractional shares subject to such Awards shall be paid to the Participant in cash.

10.3 Waiver of Restrictions

The Plan Administrator, in its sole discretion, may waive the repurchase or forfeiture period and any other terms, conditions or restrictions on any Restricted Stock or Stock Unit under such circumstances and subject to such terms and conditions as the Plan Administrator shall deem appropriate.

SECTION 11. OTHER STOCK OR CASH-BASED AWARDS

Subject to the terms of the Plan and such other terms and conditions as the Plan Administrator deems appropriate, the Plan Administrator may grant other incentives payable in cash or in shares of Common Stock under the Plan.

SECTION 12. WITHHOLDING

The Company may require the Participant to pay to the Company the amount of (a) any taxes that the Company is required by applicable federal, state, local or foreign law to withhold with respect to the grant, vesting or exercise of an Award (“ tax withholding obligations ”) and (b) any amounts due from the Participant to the Company or to any Related Company

 

10


(“ other obligations ”). Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan to the contrary, the Company shall not be required to issue any shares of Common Stock or otherwise settle an Award under the Plan until such tax withholding obligations and other obligations are satisfied.

The Plan Administrator may permit or require a Participant to satisfy all or part of the Participant’s tax withholding obligations and other obligations by (a) paying cash to the Company, (b) having the Company withhold an amount from any cash amounts otherwise due or to become due from the Company to the Participant, (c) having the Company withhold a number of shares of Common Stock that would otherwise be issued to the Participant (or become vested, in the case of Restricted Stock) having a Fair Market Value equal to the tax withholding obligations and other obligations, or (d) surrendering a number of shares of Common Stock the Participant already owns having a value equal to the tax withholding obligations and other obligations. The value of the shares so withheld or tendered may not exceed the employer’s minimum required tax withholding rate.

SECTION 13. ASSIGNABILITY

No Award or interest in an Award may be sold, assigned, pledged (as collateral for a loan or as security for the performance of an obligation or for any other purpose) or transferred by a Participant or made subject to attachment or similar proceedings otherwise than by will or by the applicable laws of descent and distribution, except to the extent the Participant designates one or more beneficiaries on a Company-approved form who may exercise the Award or receive payment under the Award after the Participant’s death. During a Participant’s lifetime, an Award may be exercised only by the Participant. Notwithstanding the foregoing and to the extent permitted by Section 422 of the Code, the Plan Administrator, in its sole discretion, may permit a Participant to assign or transfer an Award, subject to such terms and conditions as the Plan Administrator shall specify.

SECTION 14. ADJUSTMENTS

14.1 Adjustment of Shares

In the event, at any time or from time to time, a stock dividend, stock split, spin-off, combination or exchange of shares, recapitalization, merger, consolidation, distribution to stockholders other than a normal cash dividend, or other change in the Company’s corporate or capital structure results in (a) the outstanding shares of Common Stock, or any securities exchanged therefor or received in their place, being exchanged for a different number or kind of securities of the Company or any other company or (b) new, different or additional securities of the Company or any other company being received by the holders of shares of Common Stock, then the Plan Administrator shall make proportional adjustments in (i) the maximum number and kind of securities available for issuance under the Plan; (ii) the maximum number and kind of securities issuable as Incentive Stock Options as set forth in Section 4.2(d); and (iii) the number and kind of securities that are subject to any outstanding Award and the per share price of such securities, without any change in the aggregate price to be paid therefor. The determination by the Plan Administrator as to the terms of any of the foregoing adjustments shall be conclusive and binding.

 

11


Notwithstanding the foregoing, the issuance by the Company of shares of stock of any class, or securities convertible into shares of stock of any class, for cash or property, or for labor or services rendered, either upon direct sale or upon the exercise of rights or warrants to subscribe therefor, or upon conversion of shares or obligations of the Company convertible into such shares or other securities, shall not affect, and no adjustment by reason thereof shall be made with respect to, outstanding Awards. Also notwithstanding the foregoing, a dissolution or liquidation of the Company or a Change of Control shall not be governed by this Section 14.1 but shall be governed by Sections 14.2 and 14.3, respectively.

14.2 Dissolution or Liquidation

To the extent not previously exercised or settled, and unless otherwise determined by the Plan Administrator in its sole discretion, Awards shall terminate immediately prior to the dissolution or liquidation of the Company. To the extent a vesting condition, forfeiture provision or repurchase right applicable to an Award has not been waived by the Plan Administrator, the Award shall be forfeited immediately prior to the consummation of the dissolution or liquidation.

14.3 Change of Control

(a) Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan to the contrary, unless the Plan Administrator determines otherwise with respect to a particular Award in the instrument evidencing the Award or in a written employment, services or other agreement between the Participant and the Company or a Related Company, in the event of a Change of Control, if and to the extent an outstanding Award is not converted, assumed, substituted for or replaced by the Successor Company, then effective immediately prior to the Change of Control, such Award shall become vested and exercisable or payable, and applicable restrictions or forfeiture provisions shall lapse, with respect to 25% of shares subject to the then-unvested or restricted portion of such Award, and then such Award shall terminate upon effectiveness of the Change of Control. If and to the extent the Successor Company converts, assumes, substitutes for or replaces an outstanding Award, the vesting and/or exercisability restrictions and/or forfeiture and/or repurchase provisions applicable to such Award shall not be accelerated or lapse, and all such vesting and/or exercisability restrictions and/or forfeiture and/or repurchase provisions shall continue with respect to any shares of the Successor Company or other consideration that may be received with respect to such Award.

(b) For the purposes of Section 14.3(a), an Award shall be considered converted, assumed, substituted for or replaced by the Successor Company if following the Change of Control the Award confers the right to purchase or receive, for each share of Common Stock subject to the Award immediately prior to the Change of Control, the consideration (whether stock, cash, or other securities or property) received in the Change of Control by holders of Common Stock for each share held on the effective date of the transaction (and if holders were offered a choice of consideration, the type of consideration chosen by the holders of a

 

12


majority of the outstanding shares); provided, however, that if such consideration received in the Change of Control is not solely common stock of the Successor Company, the Plan Administrator may, with the consent of the Successor Company, provide for the consideration to be received pursuant to the Award, for each share of Common Stock subject thereto, to be solely common stock of the Successor Company substantially equal in fair market value to the per share consideration received by holders of Common Stock in the Change of Control. The determination of such substantial equality of value of consideration shall be made by the Plan Administrator, and its determination shall be conclusive and binding.

(c) Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Plan Administrator, in its sole discretion, may instead provide in the event of a Change of Control that a Participant’s outstanding Awards shall terminate upon or immediately prior to such Change of Control and that each such Participant shall receive, in exchange therefor, a cash payment equal to the amount (if any) by which (i) the Acquisition Price multiplied by the number of shares of Common Stock subject to such outstanding Awards (either to the extent then vested and exercisable, or subject to restrictions and/or forfeiture provisions, or whether or not then vested and exercisable, or subject to restrictions and/or forfeiture provisions, as determined by the Plan Administrator in its sole discretion) exceeds (ii) if applicable, the respective aggregate exercise, grant or purchase price payable with respect to shares of Common Stock subject to such Awards.

(d) For the avoidance of doubt, nothing in this Section 14.3 requires all Awards to be treated similarly.

14.4 Further Adjustment of Awards

Subject to Sections 14.2 and 14.3, the Plan Administrator shall have the discretion, exercisable at any time before a sale, merger, consolidation, reorganization, liquidation, dissolution or change of control of the Company, as defined by the Plan Administrator, to take such further action as it determines to be necessary or advisable with respect to Awards. Such authorized action may include (but shall not be limited to) establishing, amending or waiving the type, terms, conditions or duration of, or restrictions on, Awards so as to provide for earlier, later, extended or additional time for exercise, lifting restrictions and other modifications, and the Plan Administrator may take such actions with respect to all Participants, to certain categories of Participants or only to individual Participants. The Plan Administrator may take such action before or after granting Awards to which the action relates and before or after any public announcement with respect to such sale, merger, consolidation, reorganization, liquidation, dissolution or change of control that is the reason for such action.

14.5 No Limitations

The grant of Awards shall in no way affect the Company’s right to adjust, reclassify, reorganize or otherwise change its capital or business structure or to merge, consolidate, dissolve, liquidate or sell or transfer all or any part of its business or assets.

 

13


14.6 Fractional Shares

In the event of any adjustment in the number of shares covered by any Award, each such Award shall cover only the number of full shares resulting from such adjustment.

14.7 Section 409A

Subject to Section 18.5, but notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan to the contrary, (a) any adjustments made pursuant to this Section 14 to Awards that are considered “deferred compensation” within the meaning of Section 409A shall be made in compliance with the requirements of Section 409A and (b) any adjustments made pursuant to this Section 14 to Awards that are not considered “deferred compensation” subject to Section 409A shall be made in such a manner as to ensure that after such adjustment the Awards either (i) continue not to be subject to Section 409A or (ii) comply with the requirements of Section 409A.

SECTION 15. FIRST REFUSAL AND OTHER RIGHTS; TRANSFER

RESTRICTIONS

15.1 First Refusal Rights

Until the date on which the initial registration of the Common Stock under Section 12(b) or

12(g) of the Exchange Act first becomes effective, the Company shall have the right of first refusal with respect to any proposed sale or other disposition by a Participant of any shares of Common Stock issued pursuant to an Award. Such right of first refusal shall be exercisable in accordance with the terms and conditions established by the Plan Administrator and set forth in the agreement evidencing the Participant’s receipt of the shares or, if applicable, in a shareholders agreement or other similar agreement.

15.2 Other Rights and Transfer Restrictions

Until the date on which the initial registration of the Common Stock under Section 12(b) or 12(g) of the Exchange Act first becomes effective, the Plan Administrator may require a Participant, as a condition to receiving shares under the Plan, to become a party to a stock purchase agreement and/or a shareholders agreement or other similar agreement, in the form designated by the Plan Administrator, pursuant to which Participant grants to the Company and/or its other shareholders certain rights, including but not limited to co-sale rights, and agrees to certain other transfer restrictions with respect to the Shares acquired by Participant under the Plan.

15.3 General

The Company’s rights under this Section 15 are assignable by the Company at any time.

 

14


SECTION 16. MARKET STANDOFF

In the event of an underwritten public offering by the Company of its equity securities pursuant to an effective registration statement filed under the Securities Act, including the Company’s initial public offering, no person may sell, make any short sale of, loan, hypothecate, pledge, grant any option for the purchase of, or otherwise dispose of or transfer for value or otherwise agree to engage in any of the foregoing transactions with respect to any shares issued pursuant to an Award granted under the Plan without the prior written consent of the Company or its underwriters. Such limitations shall be in effect for such period of time as may be requested by the Company or such underwriters; provided, however, that in no event shall such period exceed (a) 180 days after the effective date of the registration statement for such public offering or (b) such longer period requested by the underwriters as is necessary to comply with regulatory restrictions on the publication of research reports (including, but not limited to, NYSE Rule 472 or NASD Conduct Rule 2711, or any successor rules). The limitations of this Section 16 shall in all events terminate two years after the effective date of the Company’s initial public offering.

In the event of any stock split, stock dividend, recapitalization, combination of shares, exchange of shares or other change affecting the Company’s outstanding Common Stock effected as a class without the Company’s receipt of consideration, any new, substituted or additional securities distributed with respect to the shares issued under the Plan shall be immediately subject to the provisions of this Section 16, to the same extent the shares issued under the Plan are at such time covered by such provisions.

In order to enforce the limitations of this Section 16, the Company may impose stop-transfer instructions with respect to the shares until the end of the applicable standoff period.

SECTION 17. AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION

17.1 Amendment, Suspension or Termination

The Board may amend, suspend or terminate the Plan or any portion of the Plan at any time and in such respects as it shall deem advisable; provided, however, that, to the extent required by applicable law, regulation or stock exchange rule, stockholder approval shall be required for any amendment to the Plan. Subject to Section 17.3, the Board may amend the terms of any outstanding Award, prospectively or retroactively.

17.2 Term of the Plan

The Plan shall terminate upon the earlier of ten years after (a) the adoption of the Plan by the Board and (b) the approval of the Plan by the stockholders. After the Plan is terminated, no future Awards may be granted, but Awards previously granted shall remain outstanding in accordance with their applicable terms and conditions and the Plan’s terms and conditions.

 

15


17.3 Consent of Participant

The amendment, suspension or termination of the Plan or a portion thereof or the amendment of an outstanding Award shall not, without the Participant’s consent, materially adversely affect any rights under any Award theretofore granted to the Participant under the Plan. Any change or adjustment to an outstanding Incentive Stock Option shall not, without the consent of the Participant, be made in a manner so as to constitute a “modification” that would cause such Incentive Stock Option to fail to continue to qualify as an Incentive Stock Option. Notwithstanding the foregoing, any adjustments made pursuant to Section 14 shall not be subject to these restrictions.

Subject to Section 18.5, but notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan to the contrary, the Board shall have broad authority to amend the Plan or any outstanding Award without the consent of the Participant to the extent the Board deems necessary or advisable to comply with, or take into account, changes in applicable tax laws, securities laws, accounting rules or other applicable law, rule or regulation.

SECTION 18. GENERAL

18.1 No Individual Rights

No individual or Participant shall have any claim to be granted any Award under the Plan, and the Company has no obligation for uniformity of treatment of Participants under the Plan.

Furthermore, nothing in the Plan or any Award granted under the Plan shall be deemed to constitute an employment contract or confer or be deemed to confer on any Participant any right to continue in the employ of, or to continue any other relationship with, the Company or any Related Company or limit in any way the right of the Company or any Related Company to terminate a Participant’s employment or other relationship at any time, with or without cause.

18.2 Issuance of Shares

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan to the contrary, the Company shall have no obligation to issue or deliver any shares of Common Stock under the Plan or make any other distribution of benefits under the Plan unless, in the opinion of the Company’s counsel, such issuance, delivery or distribution would comply with all applicable laws (including, without limitation, the requirements of the Securities Act or the laws of any state or foreign jurisdiction) and the applicable requirements of any securities exchange or similar entity.

The Company shall be under no obligation to any Participant to register for offering or resale or to qualify for exemption under the Securities Act, or to register or qualify under the laws of any state or foreign jurisdiction, any shares of Common Stock, security or interest in a security paid or issued under, or created by, the Plan, or to continue in effect any such registrations or qualifications if made.

 

16


As a condition to the exercise of an Option or any other receipt of Common Stock pursuant to an Award under the Plan, the Company may require (a) the Participant to represent and warrant at the time of any such exercise or receipt that such shares are being purchased or received only for the Participant’s own account and without any present intention to sell or distribute such shares and (b) such other action or agreement by the Participant as may from time to time be necessary to comply with the federal, state and foreign securities laws. At the option of the Company, a stop-transfer order against any such shares may be placed on the official stock books and records of the Company, and a legend indicating that such shares may not be pledged, sold or otherwise transferred, unless an opinion of counsel is provided (concurred in by counsel for the Company) stating that such transfer is not in violation of any applicable law or regulation, may be stamped on stock certificates to ensure exemption from registration. The Plan Administrator may also require the Participant to execute and deliver to the Company a purchase agreement or such other agreement as may be in use by the Company at such time that describes certain terms and conditions applicable to the shares.

To the extent the Plan or any instrument evidencing an Award provides for issuance of stock certificates to reflect the issuance of shares of Common Stock, the issuance may be effected on a noncertificated basis, to the extent not prohibited by applicable law or the applicable rules of any stock exchange.

18.3 Indemnification

Each person who is or shall have been a member of the Board, or a committee appointed by the Board in accordance with Section 3.1 shall be indemnified and held harmless by the Company against and from any loss, cost, liability or expense that may be imposed upon or reasonably incurred by such person in connection with or resulting from any claim, action, suit or proceeding to which such person may be a party or in which such person may be involved by reason of any action taken or failure to act under the Plan and against and from any and all amounts paid by such person in settlement thereof, with the Company’s approval, or paid by such person in satisfaction of any judgment in any such claim, action, suit or proceeding against such person, unless such loss, cost, liability or expense is a result of such person’s own willful misconduct or except as expressly provided by statute; provided, however, that such person shall give the Company an opportunity, at its own expense, to handle and defend the same before such person undertakes to handle and defend it on such person’s own behalf.

The foregoing right of indemnification shall not be exclusive of any other rights of indemnification to which such person may be entitled under the Company’s certificate of incorporation or bylaws, as a matter of law, or otherwise, or of any power that the Company may have to indemnify or hold harmless.

18.4 No Rights as a Stockholder

Unless otherwise provided by the Plan Administrator or in the instrument evidencing the Award or in a written employment, services or other agreement, no Award, other than a Stock Award, shall entitle the Participant to any cash dividend, voting or other right of a stockholder unless and until the date of issuance under the Plan of the shares that are the subject of such Award.

 

17


18.5 Compliance with Laws and Regulations

In interpreting and applying the provisions of the Plan, any Option granted as an Incentive Stock Option pursuant to the Plan shall, to the extent permitted by law, be construed as an “incentive stock option” within the meaning of Section 422 of the Code.

The Plan and Awards granted under the Plan are intended to be exempt from the requirements of Section 409A to the maximum extent possible, whether pursuant to the short-term deferral exception described in Treasury Regulation Section 1.409A-1(b)(4), the exclusion applicable to stock options, stock appreciation rights and certain other equity-based compensation under Treasury Regulation Section 1.409A-1(b)(5), or otherwise. To the extent Section 409A is applicable to the Plan or any Award granted under the Plan, it is intended that the Plan and any Awards granted under the Plan comply with the deferral, payout, plan termination and other limitations and restrictions imposed under Section 409A. Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan or any Award granted under the Plan to the contrary, the Plan and any Award granted under the Plan shall be interpreted, operated and administered in a manner consistent with such intentions; provided, however, that the Plan Administrator makes no representations that Awards granted under the Plan shall be exempt from or comply with Section 409A and makes no undertaking to preclude Section 409A from applying to Awards granted under the Plan. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, and notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan or any Award granted under the Plan to the contrary, with respect to any payments and benefits under the Plan or any Award granted under the Plan to which Section 409A applies, all references in the Plan or any Award granted under the Plan to the termination of the Participant’s employment or service are intended to mean the Participant’s “separation from service,” within the meaning of Section 409A(a)(2)(A)(i) to the extent necessary to avoid subjecting the Participant to the imposition of any additional tax under Section 409A. In addition, if the Participant is a “specified employee,” within the meaning of Section 409A, then to the extent necessary to avoid subjecting the Participant to the imposition of any additional tax under Section 409A, amounts that would otherwise be payable under the Plan or any Award granted under the Plan during the six-month period immediately following the Participant’s “separation from service,” within the meaning of Section 409A(a)(2)(A)(i), shall not be paid to the Participant during such period, but shall instead be accumulated and paid to the Participant (or, in the event of the Participant’s death, the Participant’s estate) in a lump sum on the first business day after the earlier of the date that is six months following the Participant’s separation from service or the Participant’s death. Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan to the contrary, the Plan Administrator, to the extent it deems necessary or advisable in its sole discretion, reserves the right, but shall not be required, to unilaterally amend or modify the Plan and any Award granted under the Plan so that the Award qualifies for exemption from or complies with Section 409A.

 

18


18.6 Participants in Other Countries or Jurisdictions

Without amending the Plan, the Plan Administrator may grant Awards to Eligible Persons who are foreign nationals on such terms and conditions different from those specified in the Plan, as may, in the judgment of the Plan Administrator, be necessary or desirable to foster and promote achievement of the purposes of the Plan and shall have the authority to adopt such modifications, procedures, subplans and the like as may be necessary or desirable to comply with provisions of the laws or regulations of other countries or jurisdictions in which the Company or any Related Company may operate or have employees to ensure the viability of the benefits from Awards granted to Participants employed in such countries or jurisdictions, meet the requirements that permit the Plan to operate in a qualified or tax efficient manner, comply with applicable foreign laws or regulations and meet the objectives of the Plan.

18.7 No Trust or Fund

The Plan is intended to constitute an “unfunded” plan. Nothing contained herein shall require the Company to segregate any monies or other property, or shares of Common Stock, or to create any trusts, or to make any special deposits for any immediate or deferred amounts payable to any Participant, and no Participant shall have any rights that are greater than those of a general unsecured creditor of the Company.

18.8 Successors

All obligations of the Company under the Plan with respect to Awards shall be binding on any successor to the Company, whether the existence of such successor is the result of a direct or indirect purchase, merger, consolidation, or otherwise, of all or substantially all the business and/or assets of the Company.

18.9 Severability

If any provision of the Plan or any Award is determined to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable in any jurisdiction, or as to any person, or would disqualify the Plan or any Award under any law deemed applicable by the Plan Administrator, such provision shall be construed or deemed amended to conform to applicable laws, or, if it cannot be so construed or deemed amended without, in the Plan Administrator’s determination, materially altering the intent of the Plan or the Award, such provision shall be stricken as to such jurisdiction, person or Award, and the remainder of the Plan and any such Award shall remain in full force and effect.

18.10 Choice of Law and Venue

The Plan, all Awards granted thereunder and all determinations made and actions taken pursuant hereto, to the extent not otherwise governed by the laws of the United States, shall be governed by the laws of the State of California without giving effect to principles of conflicts of law. Participants irrevocably consent to the nonexclusive jurisdiction and venue of the state and federal courts located in the State of California.

 

19


18.11 Financial Reports

To the extent required by applicable law, the Company shall provide annual financial statements of the Company to each Participant. Such financial statements need not be audited and need not be issued to key persons whose duties within the Company assure them access to equivalent information.

18.12 Legal Requirements

The granting of Awards and the issuance of shares of Common Stock under the Plan is subject to all applicable laws, rules and regulations, and to such approvals by any governmental agencies or national securities exchanges as may be required.

SECTION 19. EFFECTIVE DATE

The effective date (the “ Effective Date ”) is the date on which the Plan is adopted by the Board. If the stockholders of the Company do not approve the Plan within 12 months after the Board’s adoption of the Plan, any Incentive Stock Options granted under the Plan will be treated as Nonqualified Stock Options. To the extent required under applicable law, any Award exercised before the stockholders of the Company approve the Plan shall be rescinded if the stockholders of the Company do not approve the Plan by the later of (a) within 12 months before or after the date on which the Board adopts the Plan and (b) prior to or within

12 months of the date on which any Award under the Plan is granted in California.

 

20


APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS

As used in the Plan:

Acquired Entity ” means any entity acquired by the Company or a Related Company or with which the Company or a Related Company merges or combines.

Acquisition Price ” means the fair market value of the securities, cash or other property, or any combination thereof, receivable or deemed receivable upon a Change of Control in respect of a share of Common Stock, as determined by the Plan Administrator in its sole discretion.

Award ” means any Option, Stock Appreciation Right, Stock Award, Restricted Stock, Stock

Unit or cash-based award or other incentive payable in cash or in shares of Common Stock, as may be designated by the Plan Administrator from time to time.

Board ” means the Board of Directors of the Company.

Cause ,” unless otherwise defined in the instrument evidencing an Award or in a written employment, services or other agreement between the Participant and the Company or a Related Company, means dishonesty, fraud, serious or willful misconduct, unauthorized use or disclosure of confidential information or trade secrets, violation of a noncompetition agreement or conduct prohibited by law (except minor violations), in each case as determined by the Company’s chief human resources officer or other person performing that function or, in the case of directors and executive officers, the Board, whose determination shall be conclusive and binding.

Change of Control ,” unless the Plan Administrator determines otherwise with respect to an Award at the time the Award is granted or unless otherwise defined for purposes of an Award in a written employment, services or other agreement between the Participant and the Company or a Related Company, means consummation of:

(a) a merger or consolidation of the Company with or into any other company or other entity;

(b) a sale, in one transaction or a series of transactions undertaken with a common purpose, of at least a majority of the Company’s outstanding voting securities; or

(c) a sale, lease, exchange or other transfer, in one transaction or a series of related transactions, undertaken with a common purpose of all or substantially all of the Company’s assets.


Notwithstanding the foregoing, a Change of Control shall not include (i) a merger or consolidation of the Company in which the holders of the outstanding voting securities of the Company immediately prior to the merger or consolidation hold at least a majority of the outstanding voting securities of the Successor Company immediately after the merger or consolidation; (ii) a sale, lease, exchange or other transfer of all or substantially all of the Company’s assets to a majority-owned subsidiary company; (iii) a transaction undertaken for the principal purpose of restructuring the capital of the Company, including, but not limited to, reincorporating the Company in a different jurisdiction, converting the Company to a limited liability company or creating a holding company; or (iv) any transaction that the Board determines is not a Change in Control for purposes of the Plan.

Where a series of transactions undertaken with a common purpose is deemed to be a Change of Control, the date of such Change of Control shall be the date on which the last of such transactions is consummated.

Code ” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended from time to time.

Common Stock ” means the Class B Common Stock, par value $0.0001 per share, of the Company.

Company ” means Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation.

Disability ,” unless otherwise defined by the Plan Administrator for purposes of the Plan or in the instrument evidencing an Award or in a written employment, services or other agreement between the Participant and the Company or a Related Company, means a mental or physical impairment of the Participant that is expected to result in death or that has lasted or is expected to last for a continuous period of 12 months or more and that causes the Participant to be unable to perform his or her material duties for the Company or a Related Company and to be engaged in any substantial gainful activity, in each case as determined by the Company’s chief human resources officer or other person performing that function or, in the case of directors and executive officers, the Board, each of whose determination shall be conclusive and binding.

Effective Date ” has the meaning set forth in Section 19.

Eligible Person ” means any person eligible to receive an Award as set forth in Section 5. “ Exchange Act ” means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended from time to time.

Fair Market Value ” means the per share fair market value of the Common Stock as established in good faith by the Plan Administrator or, if the Common Stock is publicly traded, the closing price for the Common Stock on any given date during regular trading, or if not trading on that date, such price on the last preceding date on which the Common Stock was traded, unless determined otherwise by the Plan Administrator using such methods or procedures as it may establish.


Grant Date ” means the later of (a) the date on which the Plan Administrator completes the corporate action authorizing the grant of an Award or such later date specified by the Plan Administrator and (b) the date on which all conditions precedent to an Award have been satisfied, provided that conditions to the exercisability or vesting of Awards shall not defer the Grant Date.

Incentive Stock Option ” means an Option granted with the intention that it qualify as an “incentive stock option” as that term is defined for purposes of Section 422 of the Code or any successor provision.

Nonqualified Stock Option ” means an Option other than an Incentive Stock Option.

Option ” means a right to purchase Common Stock granted under Section 7.

Option Expiration Date ” means the last day of the maximum term of an Option.

Option Term ” means the maximum term of an Option as set forth in Section 7.3.

Participant ” means any Eligible Person to whom an Award is granted.

Plan ” means the Box, Inc. 2011 Equity Incentive Plan.

Plan Administrator ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.1.

Related Company ” means any entity that, directly or indirectly, is in control of, is controlled by or is under common control with the Company.

Restricted Stock ” means an Award of shares of Common Stock granted under Section 10, the rights of ownership of which are subject to restrictions prescribed by the Plan Administrator.

Retirement ,” unless otherwise defined in the instrument evidencing the Award or in a written employment, services or other agreement between the Participant and the Company or a Related Company, means “Retirement” as defined for purposes of the Plan by the Plan Administrator or the Company’s chief human resources officer or other person performing that function or, if not so defined, means Termination of Service on or after the date the Participant reaches “normal retirement age,” as that term is defined in Section 411(a)(8) of the Code.

Section 409A ” means Section 409A of the Code.

Securities Act ” means the Securities Act of 1933, as amended from time to time.

Stock Appreciation Right ” or “ SAR ” means a right granted under Section 9.1 to receive the excess of the Fair Market Value of a specified number of shares of Common Stock over the grant price.


Stock Award ” means an Award of shares of Common Stock granted under Section 10, the rights of ownership of which are not subject to restrictions prescribed by the Plan Administrator.

Stock Unit ” means an Award denominated in units of Common Stock granted under Section 10.

Substitute Awards ” means Awards granted or shares of Common Stock issued by the Company in substitution or exchange for awards previously granted by an Acquired Entity.

Successor Company ” means the surviving company, the successor company, the acquiring company or its parent, as applicable, in connection with a Change of Control.

Termination of Service ” means a termination of employment or service relationship with the Company or a Related Company for any reason, whether voluntary or involuntary, including by reason of death, Disability or Retirement. Any question as to whether and when there has been a Termination of Service for the purposes of an Award and the cause of such Termination of Service shall be determined by the Company’s chief human resources officer or other person performing that function or, with respect to directors and executive officers, by the Board, whose determination shall be conclusive and binding. Transfer of a Participant’s employment or service relationship between the Company and any Related Company shall not be considered a Termination of Service for purposes of an Award. Unless the Board determines otherwise, a Termination of Service shall be deemed to occur if the Participant’s employment or service relationship is with an entity that has ceased to be a Related Company. A Participant’s change in status from an employee of the Company or a Related Company to a nonemployee director, consultant, advisor or independent contractor of the Company or a Related Company, or a change in status from a nonemployee director, consultant, advisor or independent contractor of the Company or a Related Company to an employee of the Company or a Related Company, shall not be considered a Termination of Service.

Vesting Commencement Date ” means the Grant Date or such other date selected by the Plan Administrator as the date from which an Award begins to vest.


BOX, INC.

2011 EQUITY INCENTIVE PLAN

STOCK OPTION GRANT NOTICE

Box, Inc. (the “ Company ”) hereby grants to you an Option (the “ Option ”) to purchase shares of the Company’s Class B Common Stock under the Company’s 2011 Equity Incentive Plan (the “ Plan ”). The Option is subject to all the terms and conditions set forth in this Stock Option Grant Notice (this “ Grant Notice ”), in the Stock Option Agreement and in the Plan, which are attached to and incorporated into this Grant Notice in their entirety.

 

Participant :   

 

  
Grant Date :   

 

  
Vesting Commencement Date :   

 

  
Number of Shares Subject to Option :   

 

  
Exercise Price (per Share) :   

 

  
Option Expiration Date :   

 

   (subject to earlier termination in
   accordance with the terms of the Plan and the Stock Option Agreement)
Type of Option :    ¨   Incentive Stock Option *    ¨   Nonqualified Stock Option
Vesting and Exercisability Schedule :    [insert vesting schedule]   

Additional Terms/Acknowledgement : You acknowledge receipt of, and understand and agree to, this Grant Notice, the Stock Option Agreement and the Plan. You further acknowledge that as of the Grant Date, this Grant Notice, the Stock Option Agreement and the Plan set forth the entire understanding between you and the Company regarding the Option and supersede all prior oral and written agreements on the subject [with the exception of the following agreements:                     ] .

 

BOX, INC.     PARTICIPANT
     

 

By:  

 

                                   Signature
Its:  

 

     
      Date:  

 

Attachments :     Address:  

 

1.      Stock Option Agreement

     

 

2.      2011 Equity Incentive Plan

    Taxpayer ID:  

 

 

* See Sections 3 and 4 of the Stock Option Agreement.


BOX, INC.

2011 EQUITY INCENTIVE PLAN

STOCK OPTION AGREEMENT

Pursuant to your Stock Option Grant Notice (the “ Grant Notice ”) and this Stock Option Agreement (this “ Agreement ”), Box, Inc. (the “ Company ”) has granted you an Option under its 2011 Equity Incentive Plan (the “ Plan ”) to purchase the number of shares of the Company’s Class B Common Stock indicated in your Grant Notice (the “ Shares ”) at the exercise price indicated in your Grant Notice. Capitalized terms not defined in this Agreement but defined in the Plan have the same definitions as in the Plan.

The details of the Option are as follows:

1. Vesting and Exercisability . Subject to the limitations contained herein, the Option will vest and become exercisable as provided in your Grant Notice, provided that vesting will cease upon your Termination of Service and the unvested portion of the Option will terminate.

2. Securities Law Compliance . Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, you may not exercise the Option unless the Shares issuable upon exercise are registered under the Securities Act or, if such Shares are not then so registered, the Company has determined that such exercise and issuance would be exempt from the registration requirements of the Securities Act. The exercise of the Option must also comply with other applicable laws and regulations governing the Option, and you may not exercise the Option if the Company determines that such exercise would not be in material compliance with such laws and regulations.

3. Incentive Stock Option Qualification . If so designated in your Grant Notice, all or a portion of the Option is intended to qualify as an Incentive Stock Option under federal income tax law, but the Company does not represent or guarantee that the Option qualifies as such.

If the Option has been designated as an Incentive Stock Option and the aggregate Fair Market Value (determined as of the grant date) of the shares of Common Stock subject to the portions of the Option and all other Incentive Stock Options you hold that first become exercisable during any calendar year exceeds $100,000, any excess portion will be treated as a Nonqualified Stock Option, unless the Internal Revenue Service changes the rules and regulations governing the $100,000 limit for Incentive Stock Options. A portion of the Option may be treated as a Nonqualified Stock Option if certain events cause exercisability of the Option to accelerate.

4. Notice of Disqualifying Disposition . To the extent the Option has been designated as an Incentive Stock Option, to obtain certain tax benefits afforded to Incentive Stock Options, you must hold the Shares issued upon the exercise of the Option for two years after the Grant Date and one year after the date of exercise. By accepting the Option,


you agree to promptly notify the Company if you dispose of any of the Shares within one year from the date you exercise all or part of the Option or within two years from the Grant Date.

5. Alternative Minimum Tax . You may be subject to the alternative minimum tax at the time of exercise of an Incentive Stock Option.

6. Independent Tax Advice . You should obtain tax advice when exercising the Option and prior to the disposition of the Shares.

7. Method of Exercise . You may exercise the Option by giving written notice to the Company, in form and substance satisfactory to the Company, which will state your election to exercise the Option and the number of Shares for which you are exercising the Option. The written notice must be accompanied by full payment of the exercise price for the number of Shares you are purchasing. You may make this payment in any combination of the following: (a) by cash; (b) by check acceptable to the Company; (c) if permitted by the Plan Administrator for Nonqualified Stock Options, by having the Company withhold shares of Common Stock that would otherwise be issued on exercise of the Option that have a Fair Market Value on the date of exercise of the Option equal to the exercise price of the Option; (d) if permitted by the Plan Administrator, by using shares of Common Stock you already own; (e) if the Common Stock is registered under the Exchange Act and to the extent permitted by law, by instructing a broker to deliver to the Company the total payment required, all in accordance with the regulations of the Federal Reserve Board; or (f) by any other method permitted by the Plan Administrator.

8. First Refusal Rights; Other Transfer Restrictions . So long as the Common Stock is not registered under the Exchange Act, the Plan Administrator may, in its sole discretion at the time of exercise, require you to sign a stock purchase agreement and/or a shareholders agreement or other similar agreement, in the form designated by the Plan Administrator, pursuant to which you will grant to the Company and/or its stockholders certain rights, including, but not limited to, co-sale and/or first refusal rights, and agree to certain other transfer restrictions, with respect to the Shares acquired by you upon exercise of the Option. Upon request to the Company, you may review a current form of any such agreement(s) prior to exercise of the Option.

9. Market Standoff . You agree that any Shares received upon exercise of the Option will be subject to the market standoff restrictions on transfer set forth in the Plan.

10. Treatment Upon Termination of Employment or Service Relationship . The unvested portion of the Option will terminate automatically and without further notice immediately upon your Termination of Service. You may exercise the vested portion of the Option as follows:

(a) General Rule . You must exercise the vested portion of the Option on or before the earlier of (i) three months after your Termination of Service and (ii) the Option Expiration Date.

 

-2-


(b) Retirement or Disability . In the event of your Termination of Service due to Retirement or disability, you must exercise the vested portion of the Option on or before the earlier of (i) one year after your Termination of Service and (ii) the Option Expiration Date.

(c) Death . In the event of your Termination of Service due to your death, the vested portion of the Option must be exercised on or before the earlier of (i) one year after your Termination of Service and (ii) the Option Expiration Date. If you die after your Termination of Service but while the Option is still exercisable, the vested portion of the Option may be exercised until the earlier of (x) one year after the date of death and (y) the Option Expiration Date.

(d) Cause . The vested portion of the Option will automatically expire at the time the Company first notifies you of your Termination of Service for Cause, unless the Plan Administrator determines otherwise. If your employment or service relationship is suspended pending an investigation of whether you will be terminated for Cause, all your rights under the Option likewise will be suspended during the period of investigation. If any facts that would constitute termination for Cause are discovered after your Termination of Service, any Option you then hold may be immediately terminated by the Plan Administrator.

The Option must be exercised within three months after termination of employment for reasons other than death or disability and one year after termination of employment due to disability to qualify for the beneficial tax treatment afforded Incentive Stock Options. For purposes of the preceding, “disability” has the meaning attributed to that term for purposes of Section 422 of the Code.

It is your responsibility to be aware of the date the Option terminates.

11. Limited Transferability . During your lifetime only you can exercise the Option. The Option is not transferable except by will or by the applicable laws of descent and distribution. The Plan provides for exercise of the Option by a beneficiary designated on a Company-approved form or the personal representative of your estate. Notwithstanding the foregoing and to the extent permitted by the Plan and Section 422 of the Code, the Plan Administrator, in its sole discretion, may permit you to assign or transfer the Option, subject to such terms and conditions as specified by the Plan Administrator.

12. Withholding Taxes . As a condition to the exercise of any portion of the Option, you must make such arrangements as the Company may require for the satisfaction of any federal, state, local or foreign tax withholding obligations that may arise in connection with such exercise.

13. Option Not an Employment or Service Contract . Nothing in the Plan or this Agreement will be deemed to constitute an employment contract or confer or be deemed to confer any right for you to continue in the employ of, or to continue any other relationship with, the Company or any Related Company or limit in any way the right of the Company or any Related Company to terminate your employment or other relationship at any time, with or without Cause.

 

-3-


14. No Right to Damages. You will have no right to bring a claim or to receive damages if you are required to exercise the vested portion of the Option within three months (one year in the case of Retirement, Disability or death) of your Termination of Service or if any portion of the Option is cancelled or expires unexercised. The loss of existing or potential profit in the Option will not constitute an element of damages in the event of your Termination of Service for any reason even if the termination is in violation of an obligation of the Company or a Related Company to you.

15. Binding Effect. This Agreement will inure to the benefit of the successors and assigns of the Company and be binding upon you and your heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns.

16. Section 409A Compliance. Notwithstanding any provision in the Plan or this Agreement to the contrary, the Plan Administrator may, at any time and without your consent, modify the terms of the Option as it determines appropriate to avoid the imposition of interest or penalties under Section 409A of the Code; provided, however, that the Plan Administrator makes no representations that the Option shall be exempt from or comply with Section 409A of the Code and makes no undertaking to preclude Section 409A of the Code from applying to the Option.

[Non-US Residents only: 17. Limitation on Rights; No Right to Future Grants; Extraordinary Item of Compensation . By entering into this Agreement and accepting the grant of the Option evidenced hereby, you acknowledge that: (a) the Plan is discretionary in nature and may be amended, suspended or terminated by the Company at any time; (b) the grant of the Option is a one-time benefit which does not create any contractual or other right to receive future grants of options, or benefits in lieu of options; (c) all determinations with respect to any such future grants, including, but not limited to, the times when options will be granted, the number of shares subject to each option, the option price, and the time or times when each option will be exercisable, will be at the sole discretion of the Company; (d) your participation in the Plan is voluntary; (e) the value of the Option is an extraordinary item of compensation which is outside the scope of your employment contract, if any; (f) the Option is not part of normal or expected compensation for purposes of calculating any benefits, severance, resignation, termination, redundancy, end of service payments, bonuses, long-service awards, pension or retirement benefits or similar payments, and you will have no entitlement to compensation or damages as a consequence of your forfeiture of any unvested portion of the Option as a result of your Termination of Service for any reason; (g) the vesting of the Option ceases upon your Termination of Service for any reason except as may otherwise be explicitly provided in the Plan or this Agreement or otherwise permitted by the Plan Administrator; (h) the future value of the Shares underlying the Option is unknown and cannot be predicted with certainty; (i) if the Shares underlying the Option do not increase in value, the Option will have no value; and (j) in the event that you are not a direct employee of the Company, the grant of the Option will not be interpreted to form an employment or other relationship with the Company.

 

-4-


18. Employee Data Privacy . By entering into this Agreement and accepting the Option, you (a) explicitly and unambiguously consent to the collection, use and transfer, in electronic or other form, of any of your personal data that is necessary to facilitate the implementation, administration and management of the Option and the Plan; (b) understand that the Company and your employer may, for the purpose of implementing, administering and managing the Plan, hold certain personal information about you, including, but not limited to, your name, home address and telephone number, date of birth, social insurance number or other identification number, salary, nationality, job title and details of all awards or entitlement to the Common Stock granted to you under the Plan or otherwise (“ Data ”); (c) understand that Data may be transferred to any third parties assisting in the implementation, administration and management of the Plan, including any broker with whom the Shares issued upon vesting of the Option may be deposited, and that these recipients may be located in your country or elsewhere, and that the recipient’s country may have different data privacy laws and protections than your country; (d) waive any data privacy rights you may have with respect to the Data; and (e) authorize the Company, its Related Companies and its agents to store and transmit such information in electronic form.]

 

-5-


BOX, INC.

EARLY EXERCISE NOTICE AND STOCK PURCHASE AGREEMENT

2011 EQUITY INCENTIVE PLAN

By your signature and the signature of the representative of Box, Inc. (the  “Company” ) below, you ( “Purchaser” ) and the Company agree that you are purchasing shares of the Company’s Class B Common Stock subject to the terms and conditions of this Early Exercise Notice and Stock Purchase Agreement (the “ Agreement ”), the agreement(s) evidencing the applicable Option(s) (the “ Option Agreement(s) ”) and the Company’s 2011 Equity Incentive Plan (the “ Plan ”), which is attached to and incorporated into this Exercise Notice in its entirety.

 

Purchaser:   

 

Address:   

 

  

 

Taxpayer I.D. number:   

 

Total number of shares for which Option is being exercised now (these shares are referred to below as “Shares”):   

 

Total exercise price for Shares:   

$

  
Type of Option:    [ISO or NSO]
Exercise price per share:   

$

Total number of shares subject to Option:   

 

 

1. Early Exercise for Unvested Shares                      (Purchaser must initial here if this Section 1 applies.)

By initialing this Section 1, Purchaser hereby acknowledges that all or a portion of the Shares being purchased under this Agreement are not vested as of the date of exercise according to the vesting schedule contained in the Option Agreement. Any Shares purchased hereunder pursuant to the exercise of any portion of the Option that is unvested as of the date of exercise will be considered unvested shares (the “ Unvested Shares ”). The Unvested Shares will vest (and to the extent so vested cease to be Unvested Shares) in accordance with the vesting schedule contained in the Option Agreement. Purchaser hereby grants to the Company a right to repurchase the Unvested Shares (the “ Repurchase Right for Unvested Shares ”) for so long as they remain Unvested Shares, subject to the terms and conditions set forth below.

Purchaser understands that the Company will not accept this Early Exercise Notice unless Purchaser properly completes, executes and returns to the Company an election under Section 83(b) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “ Code ”), in connection with Purchaser’s exercise of the Option for Unvested Shares, as discussed further in Section 7.


2. Payment of Exercise Price

Prior to or concurrently with the delivery of this Agreement to the Company, Purchaser has delivered the exercise price for the Shares in accordance with the terms of the Plan and the Option Agreement.

 

3. Securities Law Compliance

3.1 Purchaser represents and warrants that Purchaser (a) has been furnished with a copy of the Plan and all information which Purchaser deems necessary to evaluate the merits and risks of the purchase of the Shares, (b) has had the opportunity to ask questions and receive answers concerning the information received about the Shares and the Company, and (c) has been given the opportunity to obtain any additional information Purchaser deems necessary to verify the accuracy of any information obtained concerning the Shares and the Company.

3.2 Purchaser hereby confirms that Purchaser has been informed that the Shares have not been registered under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “Securities Act”), or any state securities laws pursuant to exemptions from registration. Purchaser further confirms that Purchaser understands that the reliance by the Company on such exemptions is predicated in part on the truth and accuracy of the statements by Purchaser in this Agreement.

3.3 Purchaser hereby represents and warrants that Purchaser is purchasing the Shares for Purchaser’s own account, for investment purposes only, and not with a view towards the distribution or public offering of all or any part of the Shares.

3.4 Purchaser hereby confirms that Purchaser understands that because the Shares have not been registered under the Securities Act, Purchaser must continue to bear the economic risk of the investment for an indefinite period of time and the Shares cannot be sold unless the Shares are subsequently registered or an exemption from registration is available.

3.5 Purchaser hereby agrees that Purchaser will in no event sell or distribute all or any part of the Shares only pursuant to the terms of this Agreement and if (a) there is an effective registration statement under the Securities Act and applicable state securities laws covering any such transaction involving the Shares or (b) the Company receives an opinion of Purchaser’s legal counsel (concurred in by legal counsel for the Company) stating that such transaction is exempt from registration or, in the Company’s sole discretion, the Company otherwise satisfies itself that such transaction is exempt from registration.


3.6 Purchaser hereby consents to the placing of a legend on Purchaser’s certificate(s) as set forth in Section 8 and to the placing of a stop-transfer order on the books of the Company and with any transfer agents against the Shares until the Shares may be legally resold or distributed.

3.7 Purchaser hereby confirms that Purchaser understands that at the present time Rule 144 of the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “ SEC ”) may not be relied on for the resale or distribution of the Shares by Purchaser. Purchaser understands that the Company has no obligation to Purchaser to register the Shares with the SEC and has not represented to Purchaser that it will so register the Shares.

3.8 Purchaser confirms that Purchaser has been advised, prior to Purchaser’s purchase of the Shares, that neither the offering of the Shares nor any offering materials have been reviewed by any administrator under the Securities Act or any other applicable securities act (the “Acts”) and that the Shares have not been registered under any of the Acts and therefore cannot be resold unless they are registered under the Acts or unless an exemption from such registration is available.

3.9 Purchaser hereby agrees to indemnify the Company and hold it harmless from and against any loss, claim or liability, including attorneys’ fees or legal expenses, incurred by the Company as a result of any breach by Purchaser of, or any inaccuracy in, any representation, warranty or statement made by Purchaser in this Agreement or the breach by Purchaser of any terms or conditions of this Agreement.

 

4. Transfer Restrictions

4.1 Restrictions on Transfer. Shares will not be sold, transferred, assigned, pledged, encumbered or otherwise disposed of in contravention of the provisions of this Agreement. Except as otherwise provided in this Agreement, the Shares may not be sold, transferred, assigned, pledged, encumbered or otherwise disposed of without the Company’s prior written consent, which consent will not be unreasonably withheld. If the Company consents to such sale, transfer, assignment, pledge, encumbrance or other disposal of the Shares, Purchaser agrees to (a) pay the Company a transfer processing fee of $3,500 per transaction (whereby transfers to separate transferees shall be deemed to be separate transactions); and (b) provide an opinion of Purchaser’s legal counsel and the counsel of the transferee (concurred in by legal counsel for the Company) stating that such transaction is exempt from registration under applicable securities laws or, in the Company’s sole discretion, the Company otherwise satisfies itself that such transaction is exempt from registration under applicable securities laws. Such restrictions on transfer, however, will not apply to a transfer to the Company in pledge as security for any purchase-money indebtedness incurred by Purchaser in connection with the acquisition of the Shares.

4.2 Transferee Obligations. Each person (other than the Company) to whom the Shares are transferred must, as a condition precedent to the validity of such transfer, acknowledge in writing to the Company that such person is bound by the provisions of this Agreement, to the same extent the Shares would be so subject if retained by Purchaser.


4.3 Market Standoff. In connection with any underwritten public offering by the Company of its equity securities pursuant to an effective registration statement filed under the Securities Act, including the Company’s initial public offering, Purchaser or any transferee (either being referred to herein as “Purchaser”) agrees not to sell, make any short sale of, loan, hypothecate, pledge, assign, grant any option for the purchase of, or otherwise dispose or transfer for value or agree to engage in any of the foregoing transactions with respect to, any Shares without the prior written consent of the Company or its underwriters. Such limitations shall be in effect for such period of time as may be requested by the Company or such underwriters; provided, however, that in no event shall such period exceed (a) 180 days after the effective date of the registration statement for such public offering or (b) such longer period requested by the underwriters as is necessary to comply with regulatory restrictions on the publication of research reports (including, but not limited to, NYSE Rule 472 or NASD Conduct Rule 2711). This market standoff provision will be in effect no longer than two years after the effective date of the Company’s initial public offering.

In the event of any stock split, stock dividend, recapitalization, combination of shares, exchange of shares or other change affecting the Company’s outstanding Common Stock effected as a class without the Company’s receipt of consideration, any new, substituted or additional securities distributed with respect to the Shares shall be immediately subject to the provisions of this Section 4.3, to the same extent the Shares are at such time covered by such provisions.

In order to enforce the limitations of this Section 4.3, the Company may impose stop-transfer instructions with respect to the Shares until the end of the applicable standoff period.

4.4 Additional Condition for Significant Shareholders. If upon the purchase of Shares pursuant to this Agreement Purchaser will hold 1% of more of the Company’s outstanding shares of Common Stock, Purchaser must become a party to the Company’s Fifth Amended and Restated Right of First Refusal and Co-Sale Agreement dated as of October 5, 2011, or the current version of such agreement (the “ Co-Sale Agreement ”), as a “Founder” for purposes of the Co-Sale Agreement; provided however, that (a) the 120-day time period for the Right of First Refusal for the Shares pursuant to Section 5 of this Agreement will run concurrently with any right of first refusal under the Co-Sale Agreement; and (b) the Right of First Refusal for the Shares pursuant to Section 5 of this Agreement shall only apply to the Shares that are not purchased by the Company and/or the investors in the Company pursuant to the terms of the Co-Sale Agreement.


5. Company’s Right of First Refusal

Before any Shares held by Purchaser may be sold or otherwise transferred (including any assignment, pledge, encumbrance or other disposition of the Shares, but not a transfer to the Company in pledge as security for any purchase-money indebtedness incurred by Purchaser in connection with the acquisition of the Shares), the Company will have a right of first refusal to purchase the Shares on the terms and conditions set forth in this Section 5 (the “ Right of First Refusal ”). The Company shall have the right to assign all or any portion of its Right of First Refusal to any current stockholder of the Company, any other third party or any combination of any of the foregoing, in its sole discretion. Such Right of First Refusal will terminate on the initial registration of the Common Stock under Section 12(b) or 12(g) of the Exchange Act.

5.1 In the event Purchaser desires to accept a bona fide third-party offer for the sale or transfer of any or all of the Shares, Purchaser will promptly deliver to the Company a written notice (the “ Notice ”) stating the terms and conditions of any proposed sale or transfer, including (a) Purchaser’s bona fide intention to sell or otherwise transfer such Shares, (b) the name of each proposed purchaser or other transferee (the “ Proposed Transferee ”), (c) the number of Shares to be transferred to each Proposed Transferee, and (d) the bona fide cash price or other consideration for which Purchaser proposes to transfer the Shares (the “ Offered Price ”). Purchaser will provide satisfactory proof that the disposition of such shares to such Proposed Transferee would not be in contravention of the provisions of Section 4 and Purchaser will offer to sell the Shares at the Offered Price to the Company or its assignee(s), as the case may be.

5.2 At any time within 120 days after receipt of the Notice, the Company or one or more of its assignees or both may, by giving written notice to Purchaser, elect to purchase all or any portion of the Shares proposed to be transferred to any one or more of the Proposed Transferees, at the purchase price determined in accordance with Section 5.3.

5.3 The purchase price for the Shares purchased under this Section 5 will be the Offered Price. If the Offered Price includes consideration other than cash, the cash equivalent value of the noncash consideration will be determined by the Board of Directors of the Company in good faith.

5.4 Payment of the purchase price will be made, in the discretion of the Plan Administrator, either (a) in cash (by check), by cancellation of all or a portion of any outstanding indebtedness of Purchaser to the Company or such assignee, or by any combination thereof, within 120 days after receipt of the Notice or (b) in the manner and at the time(s) set forth in the Notice.

5.5 If any of the Shares proposed in the Notice to be transferred to a given Proposed Transferee are not purchased by the Company and/or one or more of its assignee as provided in this Section 5, then, subject to the terms and conditions of Section 4, Purchaser may sell or otherwise transfer such Shares to that Proposed Transferee at the Offered Price or at a higher price; provided that such sale or other transfer is consummated


within 150 days after the date of the Notice; and provided, further, that any such sale or other transfer is effected in accordance with any applicable securities laws and the Proposed Transferee agrees in writing that the provisions of this Agreement, including without limitation, this Section 5 will continue to apply to the Shares in the hands of such Proposed Transferee. If the Shares described in the Notice are not transferred to the Proposed Transferee within such period, or if Purchaser proposes to change the price or other terms to make them more favorable to the Proposed Transferee, a new Notice will be given to the Company, and the Company or its assignee will again be offered the Right of First Refusal before any Shares held by Purchaser may be sold or otherwise transferred.

 

6. Company’s Repurchase Right for Unvested Shares

6.1 By executing this Agreement, Purchaser grants to the Company a Repurchase Right for Unvested Shares that the Company may exercise on the earlier of (a) the date Purchaser ceases to be employed by or provide services to the Company or a Related Company for any reason whatsoever, including, without limitation, termination with or without Cause, or by reason of Retirement, Disability or death and (b) the date Purchaser or Purchaser’s legal representative attempts to sell, exchange, transfer, pledge or otherwise dispose of any Unvested Shares.

6.2 The Company may exercise the Repurchase Right for Unvested Shares by giving Purchaser written notice within 60 days after (a) the date of such termination of employment with or services to the Company or a Related Company (or exercise of the Option, if later) or (b) the date the Company has received notice of an attempted disposition. If the Company fails to give notice within such 60-day period, the Repurchase Right for Unvested Shares will terminate, unless, to the extent permitted by applicable law, Purchaser and the Company have extended the time for the exercise of the Repurchase Right for Unvested Shares.

6.3 Payment to Purchaser by the Company will be made in cash (by check), by cancellation of all or any portion of outstanding indebtedness of Purchaser to the Company, or by any combination thereof, within 30 days after the date the Company mails the written notice of exercise of the Repurchase Right for Unvested Shares. No interest will be paid on such amount. The purchase price for each share being repurchased by the Company will be an amount equal to Purchaser’s original cost per share, as adjusted as provided in the Plan. Purchaser will deliver the properly endorsed Shares of stock being repurchased to the Company at the same time the Company delivers the purchase price to Purchaser.

6.4 Purchaser hereby authorizes and directs the Company’s Secretary (or other authorized officer) or transfer agent to transfer to the Company or its assignee any Unvested Shares as to which the Repurchase Right for Unvested Shares is exercised.

6.5 The Repurchase Right for Unvested Shares will remain in full force and effect in the event of a Change of Control, except that the Repurchase Right for Unvested Shares will automatically lapse if and to the same extent that the vesting of outstanding Options accelerates in connection with the Change of Control.


6.6 The Company may at any time require Purchaser to deposit any certificate or certificates evidencing the Unvested Shares with an agent designated by the Company under the terms and conditions of escrow and security agreements approved by the Company.

 

7. Section 83(b) Election

If the Option is exercised for Unvested Shares, Purchaser understands that under Section 83(a) of the Code, the excess of the Fair Market Value of the Unvested Shares on the date the forfeiture restrictions lapse over the exercise price paid for such Shares will be taxed, on the date such forfeiture restrictions lapse, as alternative minimum taxable income for an Incentive Stock Option or as ordinary income for a Nonqualified Stock Option, subject to payroll and withholding tax and tax reporting, as applicable. For this purpose, the term “ forfeiture restrictions ” means the right of the Company to buy back the Unvested Shares pursuant to the Repurchase Right for Unvested Shares set forth in Section 6. Purchaser understands that he or she may elect under Section 83(b) of the Code to be taxed at the time the Unvested Shares are acquired upon exercise of the Option, rather than when and as the Unvested Shares cease to be subject to the forfeiture restrictions. Such election (an “83(b) Election ”) must be filed with the Internal Revenue Service within 30 days from the date the Option is exercised, even if the Fair Market Value of the Unvested Shares on the date the Option is exercised equals the exercise price (and thus no tax is payable). Purchaser understands that making an 83(b) Election is a condition of the Early Exercise and that Purchaser must return the original of the 83(b) election to the Company and the Company will file the 83(b) Election with the Internal Revenue Service. Purchaser understands that, for an Incentive Stock Option, if Purchaser disposes of the Shares within one year of the date of exercise of the Option or two years of the date of grant of the Option, Purchaser may recognize additional compensation income for regular tax purposes. The 83(b) Election does not have any effect for regular tax purposes, and therefore the amount of any such compensation income is determined by reference to the Fair Market Value of the Unvested Shares as of each vesting date.

Purchaser understands that there is a risk the Internal Revenue Service might challenge the Plan Administrator’s determination of the Fair Market Value of the Shares. Purchaser also understands that (a) he or she will not be entitled to a deduction for any ordinary income previously recognized as a result of the 83(b) Election if the Unvested Shares are subsequently forfeited to the Company, and (b) the 83(b) Election may cause Purchaser to recognize more compensation income than he or she would have otherwise recognized if the Internal Revenue Service determines that the value of the Unvested Shares on the date the Option is exercised is higher than the Fair Market Value of the Shares on that date as determined by the Plan Administrator and/or the value of the Unvested Shares subsequently declines.


THE FORM FOR MAKING AN 83(B) ELECTION IS ATTACHED TO THIS AGREEMENT AS AN EXHIBIT. PURCHASER UNDERSTANDS THAT FAILURE TO RETURN THE ORIGINAL 83(B) ELECTION TO THE COMPANY WITH THE EARLY EXERCISE NOTICE WILL CAUSE THE EARLY EXERCISE NOTICE TO BE INVALID AND NO EARLY EXERCISE WILL OCCUR. Purchaser further understands that an additional copy of the 83(b) Election form must be filed with Purchaser’s federal income tax return for the calendar year in which the date of this Agreement falls. Purchaser acknowledges that the foregoing is only a summary of the federal income tax laws that apply to the purchase of the Unvested Shares under this Agreement and does not purport to be complete. PURCHASER FURTHER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE COMPANY HAS DIRECTED PURCHASER TO SEEK INDEPENDENT ADVICE REGARDING THE APPLICABLE PROVISIONS OF THE CODE, THE INCOME TAX LAWS OF ANY MUNICIPALITY, STATE OR FOREIGN COUNTRY IN WHICH PURCHASER MAY RESIDE, AND THE TAX CONSEQUENCES OF PURCHASER’S DEATH.

Purchaser agrees to execute and deliver to the Company with this Agreement the original 83(b) Election attached hereto as Exhibit A-1 (for alternative minimum taxable income purposes in connection with the early exercise of an Incentive Stock Option) or Exhibit A-2 (for income tax purposes in connection with the early exercise of a Nonqualified Stock Option).

 

8. Legends

Purchaser understands and agrees that the Shares are subject to certain restrictions on transfer and first refusal and/or repurchase rights, as set forth in this Agreement. Purchaser understands that the certificate(s) representing the Shares will bear legends in substantially the following forms:

“The securities represented by this certificate are subject to certain restrictions on public resale and transfer and first refusal and/or repurchase rights held by the issuer and/or its assignee(s) and may not be sold, assigned, transferred, encumbered or in any way disposed of except as set forth in a stock purchase agreement between the issuer and the original purchaser of these shares, a copy of which may be obtained at the principal office of the issuer. Such transfer restrictions and first refusal and/or repurchase rights are binding on transferees of these shares.”

“The securities represented by this certificate have not been registered under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “Act”), or under applicable state securities laws. These securities are subject to restrictions on transferability and resale and may not be transferred or resold except as permitted under the Act and applicable state securities laws, pursuant to registration or exemption therefrom. Investors should be aware that they may be required to bear the financial risks of this investment for an indefinite period of time. The issuer of these securities may require an opinion of counsel in form and substance satisfactory to the issuer to the effect that the proposed transfer or resale is in compliance with the Act and any applicable state securities laws.”


9. Stop-Transfer Notices

Purchaser understands and agrees that, in order to ensure compliance with the restrictions referred to in this Agreement, the Company may issue appropriate “stop-transfer” instructions to its transfer agent, if any, and that, if the Company transfers its own securities, it may make appropriate notations to the same effect in its own records. The Company will not be required to (a) transfer on its books any Shares that have been sold or transferred in violation of the provisions of this Agreement or (b) treat as the owner of the Shares, or otherwise accord voting, dividend or liquidation rights to, any transferee to whom the Shares have been transferred in contravention of this Agreement.

 

10. Independent Tax Advice

Purchaser acknowledges that determining the actual tax consequences to each particular Purchaser of exercising the Option or disposing of the Shares may be complicated. These tax consequences will depend, in part, on Purchaser’s specific situation and may also depend on the resolution of currently uncertain tax law, and other variables not within the control of the Company. Purchaser is aware that Purchaser should consult a competent and independent tax advisor for a full understanding of the specific tax consequences to Purchaser prior to exercising the Option or disposing of the Shares. Prior to exercising the Option, Purchaser either has consulted with a competent tax advisor independent of the Company to obtain tax advice concerning the exercise of the Option in light of Purchaser’s specific situation or has had the opportunity to consult with such a tax advisor but chose not to do so.

 

11. Withholding and Disposition of Shares

As described in the Option Agreement, Purchaser will make arrangements satisfactory to the Company for the payment of any federal, state, local or foreign withholding tax obligations that arise upon purchase of the Shares. Purchaser agrees to notify the Company if any Shares are disposed of within one year hereof or two years of the Grant Date.

 

12. Assignment Separate From Certificate; Book Entry Registration of the Shares

12.1 As security for the faithful performance of this Agreement, Purchaser agrees, upon execution of this Agreement, to deliver a stock power in the form attached to this Agreement as Exhibit B , executed by Purchaser and by Purchaser’s spouse, if any (with the transferee, certificate number, date and number of Shares left blank), along with any certificate(s) evidencing shares issued to Purchaser, to the Secretary of the Company or its designee (“ Escrow Holder ”), who is hereby appointed to hold such stock power and any such certificate(s) in escrow and to take all such actions and to effectuate all such transfers


and/or releases of such Shares as are in accordance with the terms of this Agreement. Purchaser and the Company agree that Escrow Holder shall not be liable to any party to this Agreement (or to any other party) for any actions or omissions unless Escrow Holder is grossly negligent relative thereto. Escrow Holder may rely on any letter, notice or other document executed by any signature purported to be genuine and may rely on advice of counsel and obey any order of any court with respect to the transactions contemplated in this Agreement. The Shares shall be released from escrow upon termination of the Repurchase Right for Unvested Shares; provided, however, that such release shall not affect the rights of the Company with respect to any pledge of Shares to the Company.

12.2 At the Company’s election, the Company may issue the Shares by registering the Shares in book entry form with the Company’s transfer agent in Purchaser’s name and noting the applicable restrictions will be noted in the records of the Company’s transfer agent in the book entry system.

 

13. General Provisions

13.1 Assignment. The Company may assign its Right of First Refusal and/or repurchase rights at any time, in whole or in part, whether or not such rights are then exercisable, to any person or entity selected by the Company’s Board of Directors, including, without limitation, one or more stockholders of the Company.

13.2 Notices . Any notice required in connection with (a) the Company’s Right of First Refusal and/or repurchase rights or (b) the disposition of any Shares covered thereby will be given in writing and will be deemed effective upon personal delivery or upon deposit in the U.S. mail, registered or certified, postage prepaid and addressed to the party entitled to such notice at the address indicated in this Agreement or at such other address as such party may designate by 10 days’ advance written notice under this Section 13.2 to all other parties to this Agreement.

13.3 No Waiver. No waiver of any provision of this Agreement will be valid unless in writing and signed by the person against whom such waiver is sought to be enforced, nor will failure to enforce any right hereunder constitute a continuing waiver of the same or a waiver of any other right hereunder.

13.4 Cancellation of Shares. If the Company or its assignees will make available, at the time and place and in the amount and form provided in this Agreement, the consideration for the Shares to be purchased by the Company pursuant to the exercise of the Company’s Right of First Refusal and/or repurchase rights in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement, then, from and after such time, the person from whom such Shares are to be repurchased will no longer have any rights as a Purchaser of such Shares (other than the right to receive payment of such consideration in accordance with this Agreement). Such Shares will be deemed purchased in accordance with the applicable provisions of this Agreement and the Company or its assignees will be deemed the owner and Purchaser of such Shares, whether or not the certificates therefor have been delivered as required by this Agreement.


13.5 Undertaking. Purchaser hereby agrees to take whatever additional action and execute whatever additional documents the Company may deem necessary or advisable in order to carry out or effect one or more of the obligations or restrictions imposed on either Purchaser or the Shares pursuant to the express provisions of this Agreement.

13.6 Agreement Is Entire Contract. This Agreement constitutes the entire contract between the parties hereto with regard to the subject matter hereof. This Agreement is made pursuant to the provisions of the Plan and will in all respects be construed in conformity with the express terms and provisions of the Plan.

13.7 Successors and Assigns. The provisions of this Agreement will inure to the benefit of, and be binding on, the Company and its successors and assigns and Purchaser and Purchaser’s legal representatives, heirs, legatees, distributees, assigns and transferees by operation of law, whether or not any such person will have become a party to this Agreement and agreed in writing to join herein and be bound by the terms and conditions hereof.

13.8 No Employment or Service Contract. Nothing in this Agreement will affect in any manner whatsoever the right or power of the Company, or a Related Company, to terminate Purchaser’s employment or services on behalf of the Company, for any reason, with or without cause.

13.9 Stockholder of Record. Purchaser will be recorded as a stockholder of the Company and will have, subject to the provisions of this Agreement and the Plan, all the rights of a stockholder with respect to the Shares.

13.10 Counterparts. This Agreement may be executed in two or more counterparts, each of which will be deemed an original, but which, upon execution, will constitute one and the same instrument.

13.11 Governing Law. This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California.

[Signature pages follow]


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement on the date indicated below.

 

BOX, INC.

a Delaware corporation

By:                                                                                                   
Title:                                                                                               

Address:                                                                                         

 

Date:                                                                                               

 

Purchaser

 

Printed Name

By his or her signature below, the spouse of Purchaser, if such Purchaser is legally married as of the date of his or her execution of this Agreement, acknowledges that he or she has read this Agreement and the Plan and is familiar with the terms and provisions of this Agreement and of the Plan, and agrees to be bound by all the terms and conditions of this Agreement and the Plan.

 

Dated:                                                                                             

 

 

Spouse’s Signature

 

Printed Name

By his or her signature below, Purchaser represents that he or she is not legally married as of the date of executing this Agreement.

 

Dated:                                                                                             

 

Purchaser’s Signature


RECEIPT

                     hereby acknowledges receipt from [Purchaser Name] in payment for                      shares of Class B Common Stock of Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, of $                     in the form of

 

  ¨    Cash
  ¨    Check (personal, cashier’s or bank certified)
  ¨                             shares of the Company’s Common Stock, fair market value $             per share, held by the Purchaser for a period of at least six months
  ¨    Copy of irrevocable instructions to broker
  ¨    Other:                                

 

Exercise Date:                                             By:                                                                   
FMV on such date: $                                             For: Box, Inc.


EXHIBIT A-1

ELECTION UNDER SECTION 83(b)

OF THE INTERNAL REVENUE CODE OF 1986

(For Incentive Stock Options)

The undersigned taxpayer hereby elects, pursuant to Section 83(b) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, to include in taxpayer’s alternative minimum taxable income for the current taxable year the amount of any compensation taxable to taxpayer in connection with taxpayer’s receipt of the property described below:

 

1. The name, address, taxpayer identification number and taxable year of the undersigned are as follows:

NAME OF TAXPAYER:                                                                                    

NAME OF SPOUSE:                                                                                          

ADDRESS:                                                                                                          

 

                                                                                                                           

IDENTIFICATION NO. OF TAXPAYER:                                                       

IDENTIFICATION NO. OF SPOUSE:                                                             

TAXABLE YEAR: 2013                                                                                  

 

2. The property with respect to which the election is made is described as follows: the unvested portion of                     shares of Class A Common Stock, par value $0.0001 per share, of Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation (the “ Company ”).

 

3. The date on which the property was transferred is: [DATE]

 

4. The property is subject to the following restrictions:

The property is subject to a repurchase right pursuant to which the Company has the right to acquire the property at the original purchase price if for any reason taxpayer’s service with the Company is terminated. The Company’s repurchase right lapses in a series of installments over a -4-year period ending on [DATE].

 

5. The aggregate fair market value at the time of transfer, determined without regard to any restriction other than a restriction which by its terms will never lapse, of such property is: $                     

 

6. The amount (if any) paid for such property is: $                     

The undersigned has submitted a copy of this statement to the person for whom the services were performed in connection with the undersigned’s receipt of the above-described property. The undersigned is the person performing the services in connection with the transfer of said property.

The undersigned understands that the foregoing election may not be revoked except with the consent of the Commissioner.

 

Dated:                                  

 

Purchaser

  

Dated:                               

  

 

Spouse of Purchaser

  


EXHIBIT A-2

ELECTION UNDER SECTION 83(b)

OF THE INTERNAL REVENUE CODE OF 1986

(For Nonqualified Stock Options)

The undersigned taxpayer hereby elects, pursuant to Section 83(b) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, to include in taxpayer’s gross income for the current taxable year the amount of any compensation taxable to taxpayer in connection with taxpayer’s receipt of the property described below:

 

1. The name, address, taxpayer identification number and taxable year of the undersigned are as follows:

 

NAME OF TAXPAYER:                                                                                    
NAME OF SPOUSE:                                                                                             
ADDRESS:                                                                                                               
                                                                                                                                    
IDENTIFICATION NO. OF TAXPAYER:                                                   
IDENTIFICATION NO. OF SPOUSE:                                                           
TAXABLE YEAR: [YEAR]   

 

2. The property with respect to which the election is made is described as follows: the unvested portion of                      shares of Class B Common Stock, par value $0.0001 per share, of Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation (the “ Company ”).

 

3. The date on which the property was transferred is: [DATE]

 

4. The property is subject to the following restrictions:

 

     The property is subject to a repurchase right pursuant to which the Company has the right to acquire the property at the original purchase price if for any reason taxpayer’s service with the Company is terminated. The Company’s repurchase right lapses in a series of installments over a four-year period ending on [DATE].

 

5. The aggregate fair market value at the time of transfer, determined without regard to any restriction other than a restriction which by its terms will never lapse, of such property is: $                     

 

6. The amount (if any) paid for such property is: $                     

The undersigned has submitted a copy of this statement to the person for whom the services were performed in connection with the undersigned’s receipt of the above-described property. The undersigned is the person performing the services in connection with the transfer of said property.

The undersigned understands that the foregoing election may not be revoked except with the consent of the Commissioner.

 

Dated:                           

 

Purchaser

     

 

Dated:                            Spouse of Purchaser


Distribution of Copies

 

1. Return the original to the Company with your properly executed Early Exercise Notice. The Company will file the original with the Internal Revenue Service Center where your taxpayer’s income tax return is filed and retain a copy for itself. Filing will be made by no later than 30 days after the date the property was transferred.

 

2. Attach one copy to your income tax return for the taxable year in which the property was transferred.


EXHIBIT B

STOCK POWER AND ASSIGNMENT

SEPARATE FROM CERTIFICATE

FOR VALUE RECEIVED and pursuant to that certain Early Exercise Notice and Stock Purchase Agreement dated as of                     ,         , the undersigned hereby sells, assigns and transfers unto                      shares of the Class B Common Stock of Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, standing in the undersigned’s name on the books of said corporation represented by Certificate No.              delivered herewith, and does hereby irrevocably constitute the Secretary of said corporation as attorney-in-fact, with full power of substitution, to transfer said stock on the books of said corporation.

 

Dated:                                                                                                                          
Signature:                                                                                                                   
Please print name:                                                                                                   
Spouse’s signature, if any:                                                                                   
Please print name:                                                                                                   

Please see Section 12 of the Early Exercise Notice and Stock Purchase Agreement for information on completing this form.

 

-2-


BOX, INC.

2011 EQUITY INCENTIVE PLAN

STOCK OPTION EXERCISE NOTICE

By your signature and the signature of the representative of Box, Inc. (the “ Company ”) below, you and the Company agree that you are purchasing shares of the Company’s Class B Common Stock subject to the terms and conditions of this Stock Option Exercise Notice (the “ Exercise Notice ”), the agreement(s) evidencing the applicable Option(s) (the “ Option Agreement(s) ”) and the Company’s 2011 Equity Incentive Plan (the “ Plan ”), as well as the terms and conditions of the Stock Purchase Agreement (this “ Agreement ”), which is attached to and incorporated into this Exercise Notice in its entirety.

 

Purchaser :  

 

Address :  

 

Taxpayer I.D. number :  

 

Total number of shares for which Option is being exercised now (these shares are referred to below as “Shares”) :  

 

Total exercise price for Shares :   $  

 

(Note: If you are exercising more than one stock option under this Agreement, please complete Attachment A instead of completing the following four items) :
Option Grant Date :  

 

Type of Option :     ¨ Incentive Stock Option
    ¨ Nonqualified Stock Option
Exercise price per share :   $  

 

Total number of shares subject to Option :  

 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Exercise Notice on the date indicated below.

 

BOX, INC .     PARTICIPANT
By:  

 

   

 

Its:  

 

    Signature
Date:  

 

    Date:                                                                                                       
      ¨ Check Box if Not Legally Married
Attachment :     PARTICIPANT’S SPOUSE
1. Stock Purchase Agreement    
     

 

      Signature
      Print Name:                                                                                             


BOX, INC.

2011 EQUITY INCENTIVE PLAN

STOCK PURCHASE AGREEMENT

Pursuant to your Stock Option Exercise Notice (the “ Exercise Notice ”) and this Stock Purchase Agreement (this “ Agreement ”), you and Box, Inc. (the “ Company ”) agree that you are purchasing the number of shares of the Company’s Common Stock set forth on the Exercise Notice and subject to the terms and conditions of the agreement(s) evidencing the applicable Option(s) (the “ Option Agreement(s) ”), the Exercise Notice, the Company’s 2011 Equity Incentive Plan (the “ Plan ”) and this Agreement as set forth below. Capitalized terms not defined in this Agreement but defined in the Plan have the same definitions as in the Plan.

The details of this Agreement are as follows:

 

1. Payment of Exercise Price

Prior to or concurrently with the delivery of this Agreement to the Company, you have delivered the exercise price for the Shares in accordance with the terms of the Plan and the Option Agreement.

 

2. Securities Law Compliance

2.1 You represent and warrant that you (a) have been furnished with a copy of the Plan and all information which you deem necessary to evaluate the merits and risks of the purchase of the Shares, (b) have had the opportunity to ask questions and receive answers concerning the information received about the Shares and the Company, and (c) have been given the opportunity to obtain any additional information you deem necessary to verify the accuracy of any information obtained concerning the Shares and the Company.

2.2 You hereby confirm that you have been informed that the Shares have not been registered under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “ Securities Act ”), or any state securities laws pursuant to exemptions from registration. You further confirm that you understand that the reliance by the Company on such exemptions is predicated in part on the truth and accuracy of the statements by you in this Agreement.

2.3 You hereby represent and warrant that you are purchasing the Shares for your own account, for investment purposes only, and not with a view towards the distribution or public offering of all or any part of the Shares.

2.4 You hereby confirm that you understand that because the Shares have not been registered under the Securities Act, you must continue to bear the economic risk of the investment for an indefinite period of time and the Shares cannot be sold unless the Shares are subsequently registered or an exemption from registration is available.

2.5 You hereby agree that you will in no event sell or distribute all or any part of the Shares only pursuant to the terms of this Agreement and if (a) there is an effective registration


statement under the Securities Act and applicable state securities laws covering any such transaction involving the Shares or (b) the Company receives an opinion of your legal counsel (concurred in by legal counsel for the Company) stating that such transaction is exempt from registration or, in the Company’s sole discretion, the Company otherwise satisfies itself that such transaction is exempt from registration.

2.6 You hereby consent to the placing of a legend on your certificate(s) as set forth in Section 5 and to the placing of a stop-transfer order on the books of the Company and with any transfer agents against the Shares until the Shares may be legally resold or distributed.

2.7 You hereby confirm that you understand that at the present time Rule 144 of the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “ SEC ”) may not be relied on for the resale or distribution of the Shares by you. You understand that the Company has no obligation to you to register the Shares with the SEC and has not represented to you that it will so register the Shares.

2.8 You confirm that you have been advised, prior to your purchase of the Shares, that neither the offering of the Shares nor any offering materials have been reviewed by any administrator under the Securities Act or any other applicable securities act (the “ Acts ”) and that the Shares have not been registered under any of the Acts and therefore cannot be resold unless they are registered under the Acts or unless an exemption from such registration is available.

2.9 You hereby agree to indemnify the Company and hold it harmless from and against any loss, claim or liability, including attorneys’ fees or legal expenses, incurred by the Company as a result of any breach by you of, or any inaccuracy in, any representation, warranty or statement made by you in this Agreement or the breach by you of any terms or conditions of this Agreement.

 

3. Transfer Restrictions

3.1 Restrictions on Transfer . Shares will not be sold, transferred, assigned, pledged, encumbered or otherwise disposed of in contravention of the provisions of this Agreement. Except as otherwise provided in this Agreement, the Shares may not be sold, transferred, assigned, pledged, encumbered or otherwise disposed of without the Company’s prior written consent, which consent will not be unreasonably withheld. If the Company consents to such sale, transfer, assignment, pledge, encumbrance or other disposal of the Shares, you agree to (a) pay the Company a transfer processing fee of $3,500 per transaction (whereby transfers to separate transferees shall be deemed to be separate transactions); and (b) provide an opinion of your legal counsel and the counsel of the transferee (concurred in by legal counsel for the Company) stating that such transaction is exempt from registration under applicable securities laws or, in the Company’s sole discretion, the Company otherwise satisfies itself that such transaction is exempt from registration under applicable securities laws. Such restrictions on transfer, however, will not apply to a transfer to the Company in pledge as security for any purchase-money indebtedness incurred by you in connection with the acquisition of the Shares.

3.2 Transferee Obligations . Each person (other than the Company) to whom the Shares are transferred must, as a condition precedent to the validity of such transfer, acknowledge in writing to the Company that such person is bound by the provisions of this Agreement, to the same extent the Shares would be so subject if retained by you.

 

-2-


3.3 Market Standoff . In connection with any underwritten public offering by the Company of its equity securities pursuant to an effective registration statement filed under the Securities Act, including the Company’s initial public offering, you or any transferee (either being referred to herein as “you”) agree not to sell, make any short sale of, loan, hypothecate, pledge, assign, grant any option for the purchase of, or otherwise dispose or transfer for value or agree to engage in any of the foregoing transactions with respect to, any Shares without the prior written consent of the Company or its underwriters. Such limitations shall be in effect for such period of time as may be requested by the Company or such underwriters; provided, however, that in no event shall such period exceed (a) 180 days after the effective date of the registration statement for such public offering or (b) such longer period requested by the underwriters as is necessary to comply with regulatory restrictions on the publication of research reports (including, but not limited to, NYSE Rule 472 or NASD Conduct Rule 2711). This market standoff provision will be in effect no longer than two years after the effective date of the Company’s initial public offering.

In the event of any stock split, stock dividend, recapitalization, combination of shares, exchange of shares or other change affecting the Company’s outstanding Common Stock effected as a class without the Company’s receipt of consideration, any new, substituted or additional securities distributed with respect to the Shares shall be immediately subject to the provisions of this Section 3.3, to the same extent the Shares are at such time covered by such provisions.

In order to enforce the limitations of this Section 3.3, the Company may impose stop-transfer instructions with respect to the Shares until the end of the applicable standoff period.

3.4 Additional Condition for Significant Shareholders . If upon the purchase of Shares pursuant to this Agreement you will hold 1% of more of the Company’s outstanding shares of Common Stock, you must become a party to the Company’s Fifth Amended and Restated Right of First Refusal and Co-Sale Agreement dated as of October 5, 2011, or the current version of such agreement (the “ Co-Sale Agreement ”), as a “Founder” for purposes of the Co-Sale Agreement; provided however, that (a) the 120-day time period for the Right of First Refusal for the Shares pursuant to Section 4 of this Agreement will run concurrently with any right of first refusal under the Co-Sale Agreement; and (b) the Right of First Refusal for the Shares pursuant to Section 4 of this Agreement shall only apply to the Shares that are not purchased by the Company and/or the investors in the Company pursuant to the terms of the Co-Sale Agreement.

 

4. Company’s Right of First Refusal

Before any Shares held by you may be sold or otherwise transferred (including any assignment, pledge, encumbrance or other disposition of the Shares, but not a transfer to the Company in pledge as security for any purchase-money indebtedness incurred by you in connection with the acquisition of the Shares), the Company will have a right of first refusal to purchase the Shares on the terms and conditions set forth in this Section 4 (the “ Right of First Refusal ”). The Company shall have the right to assign all or any portion of its Right of First

 

-3-


Refusal to any current stockholder of the Company, any other third party or any combination of any of the foregoing, in its sole discretion. Such Right of First Refusal will terminate on the initial registration of the Common Stock under Section 12(b) or 12(g) of the Exchange Act.

4.1 In the event you desire to accept a bona fide third-party offer for the sale or transfer of any or all of the Shares, you will promptly deliver to the Company a written notice (the Notice ) stating the terms and conditions of any proposed sale or transfer, including (a) your bona fide intention to sell or otherwise transfer such Shares, (b) the name of each proposed purchaser or other transferee (the Proposed Transferee ), (c) the number of Shares to be transferred to each Proposed Transferee, and (d) the bona fide cash price or other consideration for which you propose to transfer the Shares (the Offered Price ). You will provide satisfactory proof that the disposition of such shares to such Proposed Transferee would not be in contravention of the provisions of Section 3 and you will offer to sell the Shares at the Offered Price to the Company or its assignee(s), as the case may be.

4.2 At any time within 120 days after receipt of the Notice, the Company or one or more of its assignees or both may, by giving written notice to you, elect to purchase all or any portion of the Shares proposed to be transferred to any one or more of the Proposed Transferees, at the purchase price determined in accordance with Section 4.3.

4.3 The purchase price for the Shares purchased under this Section 4 will be the Offered Price. If the Offered Price includes consideration other than cash, the cash equivalent value of the noncash consideration will be determined by the Board in good faith.

4.4 Payment of the purchase price will be made, in the discretion of the Plan Administrator, either (a) in cash (by check), by cancellation of all or a portion of any of your outstanding indebtedness to the Company or such assignee(s), or by any combination thereof, within 120 days after receipt of the Notice or (b) in the manner and at the time(s) set forth in the Notice.

4.5 If any of the Shares proposed in the Notice to be transferred to a given Proposed Transferee are not purchased by the Company and/or one or more of its assignees as provided in this Section 4, then, subject to the terms and conditions of Section 3, you may sell or otherwise transfer such Shares to that Proposed Transferee at the Offered Price or at a higher price; provided that such sale or other transfer is consummated within 150 days after the date of the Notice; and provided, further, that any such sale or other transfer is effected in accordance with any applicable securities laws and the Proposed Transferee agrees in writing that the provisions of this Agreement, including without limitation, this Section 4 will continue to apply to the Shares in the hands of such Proposed Transferee. If the Shares described in the Notice are not transferred to the Proposed Transferee within such period, or if you propose to change the price or other terms to make them more favorable to the Proposed Transferee, a new Notice will be given to the Company, and the Company or its assignee will again be offered the Right of First Refusal before any Shares held by you may be sold or otherwise transferred.

 

-4-


5. Legends

You understand and agree that the Shares are subject to first refusal rights and other transfer restrictions, as set forth in this Agreement. You understand that the certificate(s) representing the Shares will bear legends in substantially the following forms:

“The securities represented by this certificate are subject to certain restrictions on public resale and transfer and first refusal rights held by the issuer and/or its assignee(s) and may not be sold, assigned, transferred, encumbered or in any way disposed of except as set forth in a stock purchase agreement between the issuer and the original purchaser of these shares, a copy of which may be obtained at the principal office of the issuer. Such transfer restrictions and first refusal rights are binding on transferees of these shares.”

“The securities represented by this certificate have not been registered under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “ Act ”), or under applicable state securities laws. These securities are subject to restrictions on transferability and resale and may not be transferred or resold except as permitted under the Act and applicable state securities laws, pursuant to registration or exemption therefrom. Investors should be aware that they may be required to bear the financial risks of this investment for an indefinite period of time. The issuer of these securities may require an opinion of counsel in form and substance satisfactory to the issuer to the effect that the proposed transfer or resale is in compliance with the Act and any applicable state securities laws.”

 

6. Stop-Transfer Notices

You understand and agree that, in order to ensure compliance with the restrictions referred to in this Agreement, the Company may issue appropriate “stop-transfer” instructions to its transfer agent, if any, and that, if the Company transfers its own securities, it may make appropriate notations to the same effect in its own records. The Company will not be required to (a) transfer on its books any Shares that have been sold or transferred in violation of the provisions of this Agreement or (b) treat as the owner of the Shares, or otherwise accord voting, dividend or liquidation rights to, any transferee to whom the Shares have been transferred in contravention of this Agreement.

 

7. Independent Tax Advice

You acknowledge that determining the actual tax consequences to you of exercising the Option or disposing of the Shares may be complicated. These tax consequences will depend, in part, on your specific situation and may also depend on the resolution of currently uncertain tax law, and other variables not within the control of the Company. You are aware that you should consult a competent and independent tax advisor for a full understanding of the specific tax consequences to you prior to exercising the Option or disposing of the Shares. Prior to exercising the Option, you either have consulted with a competent tax advisor independent of the Company to obtain tax advice concerning the exercise of the Option in light of your specific situation or have had the opportunity to consult with such a tax advisor but chose not to do so.

 

-5-


8. Withholding and Disposition of Shares

As described in the Option Agreement, you will make arrangements satisfactory to the Company for the payment of any federal, state, local or foreign withholding tax obligations that arise upon purchase of the Shares. If you are exercising an Incentive Stock Option, you agree to notify the Company if any Shares are disposed of within one year from the date hereof or two years from the Grant Date.

 

9. General Provisions

9.1 Assignment . The Company may assign its Right of First Refusal at any time, in whole or in part, whether or not such rights are then exercisable, to any person or entity selected by the Board, including, without limitation, one or more stockholders of the Company.

9.2 Notices . Any notice required in connection with (a) the Company’s Right of First Refusal or (b) the disposition of any Shares covered thereby will be given in writing and will be deemed effective upon personal delivery or upon deposit in the U.S. mail, registered or certified, postage prepaid and addressed to the party entitled to such notice at the address indicated in this Agreement or at such other address as such party may designate by 10 days’ advance written notice under this Section 9.2 to all other parties to this Agreement.

9.3 No Waiver . No waiver of any provision of this Agreement will be valid unless in writing and signed by the person against whom such waiver is sought to be enforced, nor will failure to enforce any right hereunder constitute a continuing waiver of the same or a waiver of any other right hereunder.

9.4 Cancellation of Shares . If the Company or its assignees will make available, at the time and place and in the amount and form provided in this Agreement, the consideration for the Shares to be purchased by the Company pursuant to the exercise of the Company’s Right of First Refusal in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement, then, from and after such time, you will no longer have any rights as a purchaser of such Shares (other than the right to receive payment of such consideration in accordance with this Agreement). Such Shares will be deemed purchased in accordance with the applicable provisions of this Agreement and the Company or its assignees will be deemed the owner and purchaser of such Shares, whether or not the certificates therefor have been delivered as required by this Agreement.

9.5 Undertaking . You hereby agree to take whatever additional action and execute whatever additional documents the Company may deem necessary or advisable in order to carry out or effect one or more of the obligations or restrictions imposed on either you or the Shares pursuant to the express provisions of this Agreement.

9.6 Agreement Is Entire Contract . This Agreement constitutes the entire contract between the parties hereto with regard to the subject matter hereof. This Agreement is made pursuant to the provisions of the Plan and will in all respects be construed in conformity with the express terms and provisions of the Plan.

9.7 Successors and Assigns . The provisions of this Agreement will inure to the benefit of, and be binding on, the Company and its successors and assigns and you and your

 

-6-


legal representatives, heirs, legatees, distributees, assigns and transferees by operation of law, whether or not any such person will have become a party to this Agreement and agreed in writing to join herein and be bound by the terms and conditions hereof.

9.8 No Employment or Service Contract . Nothing in this Agreement will affect in any manner whatsoever the right or power of the Company, or a Related Company, to terminate your employment or services on behalf of the Company, for any reason, with or without cause.

9.9 Stockholder of Record . You will be recorded as a stockholder of the Company and will have, subject to the provisions of this Agreement and the Plan, all the rights of a stockholder with respect to the Shares.

9.10 Counterparts . This Agreement may be executed in two or more counterparts, each of which will be deemed an original, but which, upon execution, will constitute one and the same instrument.

9.11 Governing Law . This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California.

 

-7-


ATTACHMENT A

(To be completed only if you are exercising more than one Option)

Please complete for each Option you are exercising.

 

Option Grant Date

  

Type of Option:

Incentive Stock Option  ( ISO )

Nonqualified Stock Option

( NSO )

(please circle one)

  

Exercise Price

Per Share

  

Number of Shares

to be Exercised

   ISO/NSO    $   
   ISO/NSO    $   
   ISO/NSO    $   
   ISO/NSO    $   
   ISO/NSO    $   


RECEIPT FOR ISO EXERCISE

                    hereby acknowledges receipt from                     (“ Purchaser ”) in payment for                 shares of Common Stock of Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, of $        in the form of

 

  ¨ Cash

 

  ¨ Check (personal, cashier’s or bank certified)

 

  ¨                 shares of the Company’s Common Stock, fair market value $        per share, held by the Purchaser

 

  ¨ Copy of irrevocable instructions to broker

 

  ¨ Other:                    

 

Exercise Date:                    

    By:  

 

(Date Company receives both the executed      
Exercise Notice and payment)      
Per share FMV on such date:     For: Box, Inc.
$                  


RECEIPT FOR NSO EXERCISE

                    hereby acknowledges receipt from                     (“ Purchaser ”) in payment for                 shares of Common Stock of Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, and applicable tax withholding, of $        in the form of

 

  ¨ Cash

 

  ¨ Check (personal, cashier’s or bank certified)

 

  ¨                 shares of the Company’s Common Stock, fair market value $        per share, withheld by the Company but otherwise issuable on exercise of an option

 

  ¨                 shares of the Company’s Common Stock, fair market value $        per share, held by the Purchaser

 

  ¨ Copy of irrevocable instructions to broker

 

  ¨ Other:                    

 

Exercise Date:                           By:  

 

(Date Company receives both the executed      
Exercise Notice and payment)      
Per share FMV on such date:     For: Box, Inc.
$                  


BOX, INC.

2011 EQUITY INCENTIVE PLAN

GLOBAL STOCK OPTION AGREEMENT

Pursuant to your Stock Option Grant Notice (the “ Grant Notice ”) and this stock option agreement, including the addendum (attached hereto as Exhibit A ) (the “ Country Addendum ”) containing country-specific terms and conditions (collectively, this “ Agreement ”), Box, Inc. (the “ Company ”) has granted you an Option under its 2011 Equity Incentive Plan (the “ Plan ”) to purchase the number of shares of the Company’s Common Stock indicated in your Grant Notice (the “ Shares ”) at the exercise price indicated in your Grant Notice. Capitalized terms not defined in this Agreement but defined in the Plan have the same definitions as in the Plan.

The details of the Option are as follows:

1. Vesting and Exercisability . Subject to the limitations contained herein, the Option will vest and become exercisable as provided in your Grant Notice, provided that vesting will cease upon your Termination of Service (as defined in the Plan and further described in Section 9 of this Agreement) and the unvested portion of the Option will terminate.

2. Securities Law Compliance . Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, you may not exercise the Option unless the Shares issuable upon exercise are registered under the Securities Act or, if such Shares are not then so registered, the Company has determined that such exercise and issuance would be exempt from the registration requirements of the Securities Act. The exercise of the Option must also comply with other applicable laws and regulations governing the Option, and you may not exercise the Option if the Company determines that such exercise would not be in material compliance with such laws and regulations. You understand that the Company is under no obligation to register or qualify the Shares with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission or any state or foreign securities commission or to seek approval or clearance from any governmental authority for the issuance or sale of the Shares. Finally, you agree that the Company shall have unilateral authority to amend this Agreement without your consent to the extent necessary to comply with securities or other laws applicable to the offer of the Option or the issuance of Shares.

3. Incentive Stock Option Qualification . If you are a U.S. taxpayer and if so designated in your Grant Notice, all or a portion of the Option is intended to qualify as an Incentive Stock Option under U.S. federal income tax law, but the Company does not represent or guarantee that the Option qualifies as such.

If the Option has been designated as an Incentive Stock Option and the aggregate Fair Market Value (determined as of the Grant Date) of the shares of Common Stock subject to the portions of the Option and all other Incentive Stock Options you hold that first become exercisable during any calendar year exceeds $100,000, any excess portion will be treated as a Nonqualified Stock Option, unless the Internal Revenue Service changes the rules and regulations governing the $100,000 limit for Incentive Stock Options. A portion of the Option may be treated as a Nonqualified Stock Option if certain events cause exercisability of the Option to accelerate.


4. Notice of Disqualifying Disposition . To the extent the Option has been designated as an Incentive Stock Option, assuming you are a U.S. taxpayer, to obtain certain tax benefits afforded to Incentive Stock Options, you must hold the Shares issued upon the exercise of the Option for two years after the Grant Date and one year after the date of exercise. If you are a U.S. taxpayer and the Option has been designated as an Incentive Stock Option, by accepting the Option, you agree to promptly notify the Company if you dispose of any of the Shares within one year from the date you exercise all or part of the Option or within two years from the Grant Date.

5. Independent Advice Regarding Grant . The Company is not providing any tax, legal or financial advice, nor is the Company making any recommendations regarding your participation in the Plan, or your acquisition or sale of Shares. You should obtain your own personal tax, legal and financial advice when exercising the Option and prior to the disposition of the Shares.

6. Method of Exercise . You may exercise the Option by giving written notice to the Company, in form and substance satisfactory to the Company, which will state your election to exercise the Option and the number of Shares for which you are exercising the Option. The written notice must be accompanied by full payment of the exercise price for the number of Shares you are purchasing. You may make this payment in any combination of the following: (a) by cash; (b) by check acceptable to the Company; (c) if permitted by the Plan Administrator for Nonqualified Stock Options, by having the Company withhold shares of Common Stock that would otherwise be issued on exercise of the Option that have a Fair Market Value on the date of exercise of the Option equal to the exercise price of the Option; (d) if permitted by the Plan Administrator, by using shares of Common Stock you already own; (e) if the Common Stock is registered under the Exchange Act and to the extent permitted by law, by instructing a broker to deliver to the Company the total payment required, all in accordance with the regulations of the Federal Reserve Board; or (f) by any other method permitted by the Plan Administrator.

7. First Refusal Rights; Other Transfer Restrictions . So long as the Common Stock is not registered under the Exchange Act, the Plan Administrator may, in its sole discretion at the time of exercise, require you to sign a stock purchase agreement and/or a shareholders agreement or other similar agreement, in the form designated by the Plan Administrator, pursuant to which you will grant to the Company and/or its stockholders certain rights, including, but not limited to, co-sale and/or first refusal rights, and agree to certain other transfer restrictions, with respect to the Shares acquired by you upon exercise of the Option. Upon request to the Company, you may review a current form of any such agreement(s) prior to exercise of the Option.

8. Market Standoff . You agree that any Shares received upon exercise of the Option will be subject to the market standoff restrictions on transfer set forth in the Plan.

9. Treatment Upon Termination of Employment or Service Relationship . The unvested portion of the Option will terminate automatically and without further notice immediately upon your Termination of Service. For purposes of the Option, the effective date of

 

2


your Termination of Service will be the date you are no longer actively providing services to the Company or one of its Related Companies, regardless of the reason for such termination or whether or not such termination is later found to be invalid or in breach of employment laws in the jurisdiction where you are employed or the terms of your employment agreement, if any. Further, unless otherwise expressly provided in this Agreement or determined by the authorized parties at the Company (as identified below and in the Plan), (a) your right to vest in the Option under the Plan, if any, will terminate as of such effective date of Termination of Service; and (b) the period (if any) during which you may exercise your Option after your Termination of Service will commence on such effective date, such that your right to vest in or exercise your Option, as applicable, will not be extended by any notice period during which you are not actively providing services ( e.g ., your period of service would not include any contractual notice period or any period of “garden leave” or similar period mandated under employment laws in the jurisdiction where you are employed or the terms of your employment agreement, if any). The Company’s chief human resources officer or other person performing that function or, with respect to directors and executive officers, the Board, shall have the exclusive discretion to determine when you are no longer actively providing services for purposes of your Option grant. In the event of your Termination of Service, you may exercise the vested portion of the Option as follows:

(a) General Rule . You must exercise the vested portion of the Option on or before the earlier of (i) three months after your Termination of Service and (ii) the Option Expiration Date.

(b) Retirement or Disability . In the event of your Termination of Service due to Retirement or disability, you must exercise the vested portion of the Option on or before the earlier of (i) one year after your Termination of Service and (ii) the Option Expiration Date.

(c) Death . In the event of your Termination of Service due to your death, the vested portion of the Option must be exercised on or before the earlier of (i) one year after your Termination of Service and (ii) the Option Expiration Date. If you die after your Termination of Service but while the Option is still exercisable, the vested portion of the Option may be exercised until the earlier of (x) one year after the date of death and (y) the Option Expiration Date.

(d) Cause . The vested portion of the Option will automatically expire at the time the Company first notifies you of your Termination of Service for Cause, unless the Plan Administrator determines otherwise. If your employment or service relationship is suspended pending an investigation of whether you will be terminated for Cause, all your rights under the Option likewise will be suspended during the period of investigation. If any facts that would constitute termination for Cause are discovered after your Termination of Service, any Option you then hold may be immediately terminated by the Plan Administrator.

The Option must be exercised within three months after termination of employment for reasons other than death or disability and one year after termination of employment due to disability to qualify for the beneficial tax treatment afforded Incentive Stock Options. For purposes of the preceding, “disability” has the meaning attributed to that term for purposes of Section 422 of the Code.

 

3


It is your responsibility to be aware of the date the Option terminates.

10. Limited Transferability . During your lifetime only you can exercise the Option. The Option is not transferable except by will or by the applicable laws of descent and distribution. The Plan provides for exercise of the Option by a beneficiary designated on a Company-approved form or the personal representative of your estate; however, if you are employed outside the United States, you are not permitted to designate a beneficiary under this Agreement. Notwithstanding the foregoing and to the extent permitted by the Plan and Section 422 of the Code, the Plan Administrator, in its sole discretion, may permit you to assign or transfer the Option, subject to such terms and conditions as specified by the Plan Administrator.

11. Responsibility for Tax-Related Items .

(a) Prior to any relevant taxable or tax withholding event that arises in connection with your Option, you agree to make adequate arrangements satisfactory to the Company and/or the entity to which you are providing services, if different, (the “ Employer ”) to satisfy all applicable income tax, social insurance, payroll tax, fringe benefits tax, payment on account or other tax-related items related to your participation in the Plan and legally applicable to you or deemed by the Company or the Employer in their discretion to be an appropriate charge to you even if legally applicable to the Company or the Employer (“ Tax-Related Items ”). In this regard, you authorize the Company and/or the Employer, or their respective agents, at their discretion, to satisfy the obligations with regard to all Tax-Related Items by (i) withholding from your payroll and any other amounts payable to you by the Company or the Employer, (ii) requiring you to pay cash to the Company or to the Employer; (iii) having the Company withhold a number of Shares that would otherwise be issued to you having a Fair Market Value equal to the obligation for Tax-Related Items; (iv) your surrendering of a number of Shares you already own having a value equal to the obligation for Tax-Related Items; (v) if the Common Stock is registered under the Exchange Act, withholding from the proceeds of a “cashless exercise” pursuant to a program developed under Regulation T as promulgated by the Federal Reserve Board (either through a voluntary sale or through a mandatory sale arranged by the Company on your behalf pursuant to this authorization); or (vi) any other withholding method that may be approved by the Plan Administrator. Depending on the withholding method, the Company may withhold or account for Tax-Related Items by considering applicable minimum statutory withholding amounts or other applicable withholding rates, including maximum applicable rates, in which case you will receive a refund of any over-withheld amount in cash and will have no entitlement to the Common Stock equivalent. If the obligation for Tax-Related Items is satisfied by withholding in Shares, for tax purposes, you are deemed to have been issued the full number of Shares subject to the exercised Option, notwithstanding that a number of the Shares are held back solely for the purpose of paying the Tax-Related Items. Finally, you agree that the Company may refuse to issue or deliver Shares to you if you fail to comply with your obligations in connection with the Tax-Related Items.

 

4


(b) You hereby agree that the Company does not have a duty to design or administer the Plan or your Option in a manner that minimizes your liabilities for Tax-Related Items and that the Company and/or the Employer make no representations or undertakings regarding the treatment of any Tax-Related Items in connection with any aspect of your Option, including, but not limited to, the grant, vesting or exercise of your Option, the subsequent sale of Shares acquired pursuant to such exercise or the receipt of any dividends. You acknowledge that, regardless of any action taken by the Company or the Employer, the ultimate liability for Tax-Related Items is and remains your responsibility and may exceed any amount withheld by the Company or the Employer. Further, if you are subject to Tax-Related Items in more than one jurisdiction between the Grant Date and the date of any relevant taxable or tax withholding event, as applicable, you acknowledge that the Company and/or the Employer (or former employer, as applicable) may be required to withhold or account for Tax-Related Items in more than one jurisdiction. Further, if you are a U.S. taxpayer, you acknowledge that this Option is exempt from Section 409A of the Code only if the exercise price per share specified in the Grant Notice is at least equal to the “fair market value” per share of the Common Stock on the Grant Date and there is no other impermissible deferral of compensation associated with the Option. Because the Common Stock is not traded on an established securities market, the Fair Market Value is determined by the Board, perhaps in consultation with an independent valuation firm retained by the Company. You acknowledge that there is no guarantee that the Internal Revenue Service will agree with the valuation as determined by the Board, and you (or any other parties having rights under the Option) shall not make any claim against the Company, the Employer or any of their officers, directors, employees or Related Companies in the event that the Internal Revenue Service asserts that the valuation determined by the Board is less than the “fair market value” as subsequently determined by the Internal Revenue Service.

12. Option Not an Employment or Service Contract . Nothing in the Plan or this Agreement will be deemed to constitute an employment contract or confer or be deemed to confer any right for you to continue in the employ of, or to continue any other relationship with, the Company or any Related Company or limit in any way the right of the Company or any Related Company to terminate your employment or other relationship at any time, with or without Cause.

13. Nature of Grant . In accepting your Option, you acknowledge, understand and agree that:

(a) the Plan is established voluntarily by the Company, is discretionary in nature, and may be amended, suspended or terminated by the Company at any time, to the extent permitted by the Plan;

(b) the grant of your Option is voluntary and occasional and does not create any contractual or other right to receive future grants of options, or benefits in lieu of options, even if options have been granted in the past;

(c) all decisions with respect to future option or other grants, if any, will be at the sole discretion of the Company;

 

5


(d) you are voluntarily participating in the Plan;

(e) your Option and the Shares subject to your Option are not intended to replace any pension rights or compensation;

(f) your Option and the Shares subject to your Option, and the income and value of same, are not part of normal or expected compensation for purposes of calculating any severance, resignation, termination, redundancy, dismissal, end-of-service payments, bonuses, long-service awards, pension or retirement or welfare benefits or similar payments;

(g) the future value of the Shares underlying your Option is unknown, indeterminable, and cannot be predicted;

(h) if the underlying Shares do not increase in value, your Option will have no value;

(i) if you exercise your Option and acquire Shares, the value of such Shares may increase or decrease in value, even below the exercise price;

(j) no claim or entitlement to compensation or damages shall arise from forfeiture of your Option resulting from your Termination of Service (for any reason whatsoever, whether or not later found to be invalid or in breach of employment laws in the jurisdiction where you are employed or the terms of your employment agreement, if any), and, in consideration of the grant of your Option to which you are otherwise not entitled, you irrevocably agree never to institute any claim against the Company or any Related Companies, waive your ability, if any, to bring any such claim, and release the Company and any Related Companies from any such claim; if, notwithstanding the foregoing, any such claim is allowed by a court of competent jurisdiction, then, by participating in the Plan, you shall be deemed irrevocably to have agreed not to pursue such claim and agree to execute any and all documents necessary to request dismissal or withdrawal of such claim;

(k) unless otherwise provided in the Plan or by the Company in its discretion, your Option and the benefits evidenced by this Agreement do not create any entitlement to have your Option or any such benefits transferred to, or assumed by, another company nor to be exchanged, cashed out or substituted for, in connection with any corporate transaction affecting the Shares; and

(l) the following provisions apply only if you are providing services outside the United States:

 

  (i) notwithstanding Section 13(f) above, your Option and the Shares subject to your Option, and the income and value of same, are not part of normal or expected compensation or salary for any purpose; and

 

  (ii) you acknowledge and agree that neither the Company, the Employer nor any Related Companies shall be liable for any foreign exchange rate fluctuation between your local currency and the United States Dollar that may affect the value of your Option or of any amounts due to you pursuant to the exercise of your Option or the subsequent sale of any Shares acquired upon exercise.

 

6


14. Data Privacy. You hereby explicitly and unambiguously consent to the collection, use and transfer, in electronic or other form, of your personal data as described in this Agreement and any other Option grant materials (“Data”) by and among, as applicable, the Company any Related Companies for the exclusive purpose of implementing, administering and managing your participation in the Plan.

You understand that the Company and the Employer may hold certain personal information about you, including, but not limited to, your name, home address and telephone number, date of birth, social insurance number or other identification number, salary, nationality, job title, any Shares or directorships held in the Company, details of all Options or any other entitlement to shares of Common Stock awarded, canceled, exercised, vested, unvested or outstanding in your favor, for the exclusive purpose of implementing, administering and managing the Plan.

You understand that Data will be transferred to such broker and/or stock plan service provider as may be designated by the Company presently or in the future, which is assisting the Company with the implementation, administration and management of the Plan. You understand that the recipients of the Data may be located in the United States or elsewhere, and that the recipient’s country (e.g., the United States) may have different data privacy laws and protections than your country. You understand that if you reside outside the United States, you may request a list with the names and addresses of any potential recipients of the Data by contacting your local human resources representative. You authorize the Company, the designated stock plan service provider and any other possible recipients which may assist the Company (presently or in the future) with implementing, administering and managing the Plan to receive, possess, use, retain and transfer the Data, in electronic or other form, for the sole purposes of implementing, administering and managing your participation in the Plan. You understand that Data will be held only as long as is necessary to implement, administer and manage your participation in the Plan. You understand that if you reside outside the United States, you may, at any time, view Data, request additional information about the storage and processing of Data, require any necessary amendments to Data or refuse or withdraw the consents herein, in any case without cost, by contacting in writing your local human resources representative. Further, you understand that you are providing the consents herein on a purely voluntary basis. If you do not consent, or if you later seek to revoke your consent, your employment status or service and career with the Employer will not be adversely affected; the only adverse consequence of refusing or withdrawing your consent is that the Company would not be able to grant you the Option or other equity awards or administer or maintain such awards. Therefore, you understand that refusing or withdrawing your consent may affect your ability to participate in the Plan. For more information on the consequences of your refusal to consent or withdrawal of consent, you understand that you may contact your local human resources representative.

15. Governing Law and Venue . The Option grant and the provisions of this Agreement are governed by, and subject to, the laws of the State of California, without regard to the conflict of law provisions, as provided in the Plan. For purposes of any action, lawsuit or

 

7


other proceedings brought to enforce this Agreement, relating to it, or arising from it, the parties hereby submit to and consent to the nonexclusive jurisdiction and venue of the state and federal courts located in the State of California.

16. Notices; Electronic Delivery and Acceptance . Any notices provided for in your Option or the Plan shall be given in writing (including electronically) and shall be deemed effectively given upon receipt or, in the case of notices delivered by the Company to you, fourteen (14) days after deposit in the United States mail, postage prepaid, addressed to you at the last address you provided to the Company. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Company may, in its sole discretion, decide to deliver any documents related to participation in the Plan and this Option by electronic means or to request your consent to participate in the Plan by electronic means. By accepting the Option you consent to receive such documents by electronic delivery and, if requested, to agree to participate in the Plan through an on-line or electronic system established and maintained by the Company or a third party designated by the Company.

17. Language . If you have received this Agreement, or any other document related to your Option and/or the Plan translated into a language other than English and if the meaning of the translated version is different than the English version, the English version will control.

18. Severability . The provisions of this Agreement are severable and if any one or more provisions are determined to be illegal or otherwise unenforceable, in whole or in part, the remaining provisions shall nevertheless be binding and enforceable.

19. Country Addendum . Notwithstanding any provisions in this Agreement, your Option shall be subject to any special terms and conditions set forth in any Country Addendum to this Agreement for your country. Moreover, if you relocate to one of the countries included in the Country Addendum, the special terms and conditions for such country will apply to you, to the extent the Company determines that the application of such terms and conditions is necessary or advisable for legal or administrative reasons. The Country Addendum constitutes part of this Agreement.

20. Waiver . You acknowledge that a waiver by the Company of breach of any provision of this Agreement shall not operate or be construed as a waiver of any other provision of this Agreement, or of any subsequent breach by you or any other Participant.

21. Imposition of Other Requirements . The Company reserves the right to impose other requirements on your participation in the Plan, on your Option and on any Shares purchased upon exercise of your Option, to the extent the Company determines it is necessary or advisable for legal or administrative reasons, and to require you to sign any additional agreements or undertakings that may be necessary to accomplish the foregoing.

22. No Right to Damages . You will have no right to bring a claim or to receive damages if you are required to exercise the vested portion of the Option within three months (one year in the case of Retirement, disability or death) of your Termination of Service or if any portion of the Option is cancelled or expires unexercised. The loss of existing or potential profit in the Option will not constitute an element of damages in the event of your Termination of Service for any reason even if the termination is in violation of an obligation of the Company or a Related Company to you.

 

8


23. Binding Effect . This Agreement will inure to the benefit of the successors and assigns of the Company and be binding upon you and your heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns.

24. Section 409A Compliance . Notwithstanding any provision in the Plan or this Agreement to the contrary, the Plan Administrator may, at any time and without your consent, modify the terms of the Option as it determines appropriate to avoid the imposition of interest or penalties under Section 409A of the Code; provided, however, that the Plan Administrator makes no representations that the Option shall be exempt from or comply with Section 409A of the Code and makes no undertaking to preclude Section 409A of the Code from applying to the Option.

 

9


Exhibit A

ADDENDUM

COUNTRY-SPECIFIC TERMS AND CONDITIONS TO

BOX, INC. 2011 EQUITY INCENTIVE PLAN

GLOBAL STOCK OPTION AGREEMENT

Terms and Conditions

This Country Addendum includes special terms and conditions that govern your Option if you work in one of the countries listed below. If you are a citizen or resident of a country other than the country in which you are currently working (or are considered as such for local law purposes), or if you transfer to another country after the grant of the Option, the Company shall, in its discretion, determine to what extent the terms and conditions contained herein shall be applicable to you.

Notifications

This Country Addendum also includes information regarding securities laws, exchange controls, tax and certain other issues of which you should be aware with respect to your participation in the Plan. The information is based on the securities, exchange control, tax and other laws in effect in the respective countries as of August 2013. Such laws are often complex and change frequently. The Company strongly recommends that you not rely on the information contained herein as the only source of information relating to the consequences of your participation in the Plan because the information may be out of date at the time you exercise the Option or at the time you sell any Shares acquired under the Plan. In addition, the information is general in nature and may not apply to your particular situation, and the Company is not in a position to assure you of any particular result; therefore, you are advised to seek appropriate professional advice as to how the relevant laws in your country may apply to your individual situation.

If you are a citizen or resident of a country other than the country in which you are currently working (or are considered as such for local law purposes), or if you transfer to another country after the grant of the Option, the notifications contained herein may not be applicable to you.

Capitalized terms, unless explicitly defined in this Country Addendum, shall have the meanings given to them in the Agreement or in the Plan.

AUSTRALIA

Terms and Conditions

Limitations on Exercise . This provision supplements Section 1 of the Agreement:

Your Option shall vest in accordance with the vesting schedule set forth in the Grant Notice provided, however, in no event shall you vest in or exercise the Option unless and until a date which is the earlier of the date (the “ Liquidity Date ”) on which: (a) the Company’s Shares are

 

10


publicly traded, quoted or listed on a recognized exchange or national securities market and are no longer subject to a market standoff restricting the sale or disposal of the Shares; (b) the Company undergoes a Change of Control as described in Section 14.3 of the Plan; or (c) your Termination of Service for any reason. You must continue to provide services to the Company or one of its Related Companies through each of the vesting dates and the Liquidity Date established in the preceding sentence to vest and be entitled to exercise the Option. Should the Liquidity Date occur after any of the vesting dates set forth in the vesting schedule in the Grant Notice, you shall receive credit for any vesting that would have occurred under the vesting schedule once the Liquidity Date occurs and shall continue to vest in accordance with the vesting schedule thereafter, unless your Termination of Service (in which case you shall have the post-termination period as provided in Section 9 of the Agreement to exercise any vested Option).

Furthermore, if the Options vest and become exercisable when the Fair Market Value per Share is equal to or less than the exercise price for the Option, you shall not be permitted to exercise the vested Options. In such event, the vested Options may be exercised starting on the U.S. business day following the first period of [thirty (30)] consecutive days on which the Fair Market Value per Share has exceeded the exercise price for the Options.

Finally, notwithstanding the Expiration Date, the Options shall automatically expire in the event that the Options have not become exercisable pursuant to the preceding paragraphs within [six years and 11 months] following the Grant Date.

For the avoidance of doubt, this entire provision applies equally to any unvested Options held by you if you transfer to Australia after the grant of the Option, unless otherwise determined by the Company in its sole discretion.

Notifications

Securities Law Notification . If you acquire Shares under the Plan and subsequently offer the Shares for sale to a person or entity resident in Australia, such an offer may be subject to disclosure requirements under Australian law, and you should obtain legal advice regarding any applicable disclosure requirements prior to making any such offer.

BRAZIL

Terms and Conditions

Compliance with Law and Nature of Award Acknowledgment . By accepting the Option, you agree that you will comply with all applicable Brazilian laws, including, without limitation, that you will pay any and all applicable Tax-Related Items associated with the exercise of the Option and/or the sale of any Shares obtained as a result of such exercise. You further agree that, for all legal purposes, (a) the benefits provided to you under the Plan are the result of commercial transactions unrelated to your employment; (b) the Plan is not a part of the terms and conditions of your employment; and (c) the income from the Option, if any, is not part of your remuneration from employment.

 

11


Notifications

Exchange Control Notification . If you are resident or domiciled in Brazil, you will be required to submit an annual declaration of assets and rights held outside of Brazil to the Central Bank of Brazil if the aggregate value of such assets and rights is US$100,000 or more. Assets and rights that must be reported include Shares acquired under the Plan.

FRANCE

Terms and Conditions

French-qualified Option under the French Option Plan . The Option is granted under and is subject to the terms of the French Option Plan and is intended to qualify for specific tax and social security treatment under Section L. 225-177 to L. 225-186-1 of the French Commercial Code, as amended. The Company does not undertake to maintain the qualified status of the Option and you will not be entitled to damages of any nature whatsoever if the Option becomes disqualified. References to the “Plan” used in this Agreement shall include the French Option Plan. Capitalized terms that are not defined in this Agreement have the meanings given to them in the Plan or, as applicable, in the French Option Plan.

Option Term . The term of each Option shall be as stated in this Agreement provided, however, that the Option term shall be no longer than [nine and one half (9 1/2) years]. The Option term will be extended only in the event of your death, but in no event will any Option be exercisable beyond six (6) months following the date of death.

Termination by Reason of Death . This provision replaces Section 9(c) of the Agreement and supersedes any other terms of Section 9 that are inconsistent with it:

In the event of your Termination of Service due to your death, any unexpired Options that are not fully vested at the time of death will become fully vested and exercisable for a period of six (6) months following the date of death. If you die after your Termination of Service but while the Option is still exercisable, the vested portion of the Option may be exercised for a period of six (6) months following the date of death.

Non-transferability . Notwithstanding Section 10 of the Agreement, Options may not be transferred or assigned except in the event of your death.

Language Consent . By accepting the Option, you confirm having read and understood the documents relating to the grant (the Plan, French Option Plan and the Agreement, including this Country Addendum on Exhibit A) which were provided in the English language. You accept the terms of these documents accordingly.

En acceptant cette Option, vous confirmez avoir lu et compris les documents relatifs à cette attribution (le Plan, the Plan pour la France et ce Contrat, incluant l’annexe A) qui vous ont été remis en langue anglaise. Vous en acceptez les termes en connaissance de cause.

 

12


Notifications

Exchange Control Alert . You may hold Shares or cash acquired as a result of your participation in the Plan outside of France provided that you annually declare all foreign bank and stock accounts, whether open, current, or closed, together with your personal income tax returns. Failure to report triggers significant penalties. You must also declare to the customs and excise authorities any cash or securities you import to or export from France without the use of a financial institution when the value of the cash or securities is equal to or exceeds €10,000 (2013). Please note that this alert is accurate as of August 13, 2013 and the exchange controls applicable to your participation in the Plan may change in the future. It is your obligation to comply with the exchange controls applicable to you, not the Company’s nor the Employer’s.

GERMANY

Notifications

Exchange Control Information . Cross-border payments, including any payments you may make in connection with the exercise of your Option or the repatriation of sale proceeds into Germany, in excess of €12,500 must be reported monthly to the German Federal Bank. You are responsible for satisfying the reporting obligation and should be able to obtain a copy of the form used for this purpose from the German bank you use to carry out the fund transfer.

JAPAN

Notifications

Foreign Asset Reporting Information . You are required to report details of any assets held outside of Japan as of December 31st (including Shares acquired under the Plan), to the extent such assets have a total net fair market value exceeding ¥50 million. Such report will be due by March 15th each year. You should consult with your personal tax advisor to determine if the reporting obligation applies to your personal situation.

SINGAPORE

Notifications

Securities Law Information . The grant of the Option under the Plan is being made pursuant to the “Qualifying Person” exemption” under section 273(1)(f) of the Securities and Futures Act (Chapter 289, 2006 Ed.) (“ SFA ”) and is not made with a view to the Shares being subsequently offered for sale to any other party. The Plan has not been lodged or registered as a prospectus with the Monetary Authority of Singapore. You should note that the Option is subject to section 257 of the SFA and that you will not be able to make (a) any subsequent sale of the Shares in Singapore or (b) any offer of such subsequent sale of the Shares subject to the Option in Singapore, unless such sale or offer is made pursuant to the exemptions under Part XIII Division (1) Subdivision (4) (other than section 280) of the SFA (Chapter 289, 2006 Ed.).

 

13


Director Notification Information . If you are a director, associate director or shadow director of a Related Company in Singapore, you are subject to certain notification requirements under the Singapore Companies Act. Among these requirements is an obligation to notify the Related Company in Singapore in writing when you receive an interest ( e.g. , Options, Shares) in the Company or any Related Companies (including when you sell Shares acquired through exercise of the Option). In addition, you must notify the Related Company in Singapore when you sell or receive Shares of the Company or any Related Company (including when you sell or receive Shares acquired under the Plan). These notifications must be made within two (2) business days of acquiring or disposing of any interest in the Company or any Related Company. In addition, a notification must be made of your interests in the Company or any Related Company within two business days of becoming a director.

UNITED KINGDOM

Terms and Conditions

Tax-Related Items . The following provision supplements Section 11 of the Agreement:

You agree that if the Employer or the Company does not withhold or otherwise collect the full amount of income tax that you owe due to the exercise of the Option or release, assignment or cancellation of the Option (the “ Chargeable Event ”) from you within ninety (90) days after the Chargeable Event or such other period specified in Section 222(1)(c) of the United Kingdom Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003 (the “ Due Date ”), the amount of any uncollected income tax will constitute a loan owed by you to the Employer, effective on the Due Date. You agree that the loan will bear interest at the then-current official rate of Her Majesty’s Revenue and Customs (“ HMRC ”), it will be immediately due and repayable, and the Company or the Employer may recover it at any time thereafter by any of the means referred to in Section 11 of the Agreement. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if you are a director or executive officer of the Company (within the meaning of Section 13(k) of the Exchange Act), you will not be eligible for such a loan to cover the income tax due. In the event that you are such a director or executive officer and the income tax is not collected from or paid by you by the Due Date, the amount of any uncollected income tax may constitute a benefit to you on which additional income tax and NICs may be payable. You will be responsible for reporting and paying any income tax due on this additional benefit directly to HMRC under the self-assessment regime and for reimbursing the Company or the Employer, as applicable, for the amount of any employee NICs due on this additional benefit which may be recovered from you by the Company or the Employer at any time thereafter by any of the means referred to in Section 11 of the Agreement.

If you fail to comply with your obligations in connection with the income tax as described in this section, the Company may refuse to deliver the Shares subject to the Option.

Section 431 Election . You agree that you are required, as a condition of the exercise of the Option, to enter into a joint election with the Company or the Employer pursuant to section 431 of the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003 (or such other election as the Company may direct for the same purpose) electing that the market value of the Shares to be acquired on exercise of the Option be calculated as if they were not “restricted securities.” You must enter into the form of election attached to this Country Addendum, concurrent with the execution of the Agreement or at such subsequent time as may be designated by the Company.

 

14


Joint Election for Transfer of Liability for Employer National Insurance Contributions . If you are a tax resident in the United Kingdom, the grant of the Option is conditional upon your agreement to accept liability for any secondary Class 1 national insurance contributions (“ NICs ”) which may be payable by the Employer in connection with any event giving rise to tax liability in relation to the option (“ Employer NICs ”). The Employer NICs may be collected by the Company or the Employer using any of the methods described in Section 11 of the Agreement. Without prejudice to the foregoing, you agree to execute a joint election with the Company or the Employer (a “ Joint Election ”), the form of such Joint Election being formally approved by HMRC, and any other consent or elections required to accomplish the transfer of the Employer NICs to you. You further agree to execute such other elections as may be required by any successor to the Company and/or the Employer for the purpose of continuing the effectiveness of your Joint Election. If you do not complete the Joint Election prior to exercise of your Option, or if approval of the Joint Election is withdrawn by HMRC and a new Joint Election is not entered into, your Option shall become null and void and may not be exercised, without any liability to the Company or its Affiliates. You must enter into the Joint Election attached to this Country Addendum, concurrent with the execution of the Agreement, or at such subsequent time as may be designated by the Company.

UNITED STATES

Notifications

Alternative Minimum Tax . To the extent the Option has been designated as an Incentive Stock Option, assuming you are a U.S. taxpayer, you may be subject to the alternative minimum tax at the time of exercise of such Incentive Stock Option.

 

15


B OX , I NC .

2011 E QUITY I NCENTIVE P LAN

G LOBAL O PTION A GREEMENT

Joint Election under s431 ITEPA 2003 for full or partial disapplication of Chapter 2 Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003

One Part Election

 

1. Between

 

the Participant:

 

 

 

whose National Insurance Number is

 

 

 

and

   

the Company (who is the Participant’s employer):

 

 

 

of Company Registration Number

 

 

 

 

2. Purpose of Election

This joint election is made pursuant to section 431(1) or 431(2) Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003 ( ITEPA ) and applies where employment-related securities, which are restricted securities by reason of section 423 ITEPA, are acquired.

The effect of an election under section 431(1) is that, for the relevant Income Tax and National Insurance Contributions (“ NICs ”) purposes, the employment-related securities and their market value will be treated as if they were not restricted securities and that sections 425 to 430 ITEPA do not apply. An election under section 431(2) will ignore one or more of the restrictions in computing the charge on acquisition. Additional Income Tax will be payable (with PAYE and NICs where the securities are Readily Convertible Assets).

 

Should the value of the securities fall following the acquisition, it is possible that Income Tax/NICs that would have arisen because of any future chargeable event (in the absence of an election) would have been less than the Income Tax/NICs due by reason of this election. Should this be the case, there is no Income Tax/NICs relief available under Part 7 of ITEPA 2003; nor is it available if the securities acquired are subsequently transferred, forfeited or revert to the original owner.


3. Application

This joint election is made not later than fourteen (14) days after the date of acquisition of the securities by the Participant and applies to:

 

Number of securities:    All securities to be acquired by Participant pursuant to the Option granted on [insert grant date] under the terms of the Box, Inc. 2011 Equity Incentive Plan.
Description of securities:    Shares of Common Stock
Name of issuer of securities:    Box, Inc.

to be acquired by the Participant after [date] under the terms of the Box, Inc. 2011 Equity Incentive Plan.

 

4. Extent of Application

This election disapplies to

S.431(1) ITEPA: All restrictions attaching to the securities

 

5. Declaration

This election will become irrevocable upon the later of its signing or the acquisition (and each subsequent acquisition) of employment-related securities to which this election applies.

In signing this joint election, we agree to be bound by its terms as stated above.

 

 

  

    /    /            

  
Signature (Participant)   

Date

  

 

  

    /    /            

  
Signature (for and on behalf of the Company)   

Date

  

 

     
Position in company      

Note : Where the election is in respect of multiple acquisitions, prior to the date of any subsequent acquisition of a security it may be revoked by agreement between the participant and employer in respect of that and any later acquisition.

 

- 2-


DATED      201  

 

BOX, INC.

- and -

BOX.COM(UK) LTD

- and -

[PARTICIPANT]

 

 

JOINT ELECTION

 

 


JOINT ELECTION

 

THIS JOINT ELECTION is made on   201 [ ]

BETWEEN

 

(1) BOX, INC. whose registered office is at 4440 El Camino Real, Los Altos, CA 94022 (the “Company”); and

 

(2) BOX.COM(UK) LTD registered in England and Wales with company number 08097316 whose registered office is at 5 New Street Square, London EC4A 3TW (the “Employer”); and

 

(3) [INSERT NAME OF PARTICIPANT] of [ insert address of Participant ] whose National Insurance number is [ insert National Insurance number ] (the “Participant” which shall include his executors or administrators in the case of his death).

INTRODUCTION

 

(A) The Participant may be granted options from time to time (each one an “Option”) to acquire shares of common stock in the Company (the “Shares”) on terms to be set out in stock option agreements to be issued to the Participant and which will be subject to Box, Inc. UK Sub-Plan to the 2011 Equity Incentive Plan (the “Plan”).

 

(B) The grant of the Option may take place before or after the Participant has executed this joint election (the “Joint Election”). The Joint Election is in an approved format. The exercise, cancellation, release, assignment or other disposal of an Option is subject to the Participant entering into this Joint Election.

 

(C) The Participant is currently an employee of the Employer.

 

(D) The exercise, release, cancellation, assignment or other disposal of an Option (a “Trigger Event”) (whether in whole or in part), may result in the Employer or, if and to the extent that there is a change in law, any other company or person who becomes the secondary contributor for National Insurance contributions (“NIC”) purposes at the time of such Trigger Event having a liability to pay employer’s (secondary) Class I NICs (or any tax or social security premiums which may be introduced in substitution or in addition thereto) in respect of such Trigger Event.

 

(E) Where the context so admits, any reference in this Joint Election:

 

  (i) to the singular number shall be construed as if it referred also to the plural number and vice versa;

 

  (ii) to the masculine gender shall be construed as though it referred also to the feminine gender;

 

  (iii) to a statute or statutory provision shall be construed as if it referred also to that statute or provision as for the time being amended or re-enacted; and

 

  (iv) Shares means shares of Class B common stock of the Company.


AGREED TERMS

 

1. Joint Election

 

1.1 It is a condition of the exercise, cancellation, release, assignment or other disposal of an Option that the Participant has entered into this Joint Election with the Employer.

 

1.2 The Participant, the Company and the Employer elect to transfer the liability (the “Liability”) for all of the employer’s (Secondary) Class I NICs, referred to in (D) above and charged on payments or other benefits arising on a Trigger Event and treated as remuneration and earnings pursuant to section 4(4)(a) of the Social Security Contributions and Benefit Act 1992 (“SSCBA”) to the Participant. This Joint Election is made pursuant to an arrangement authorised by paragraph 3B, Schedule 1 of the SSCBA.

 

1.3 This Joint Election does not apply in relation to any liability, or any part of any liability, arising as a result of regulations being given retrospective effect by virtue of section 4B(2) of the Social Security Contributions and Benefits Act 1992 or the Social Security Contributions and Benefits (Northern Ireland) Act 1992.

 

1.4 This Joint Election will not apply to the extent that it relates to relevant employment income which is employment income of the earner by virtue of Chapter 3A of Part 7 of Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003 (“ITEPA”) ( employment income: securities with artificially depressed market value ).

 

2. Restriction on registration until liability paid by Participant

The Participant hereby agrees that no Shares shall be registered in his name until he has met the Liability as a result of a Trigger Event in accordance with this Joint Election.

 

3. Payment

 

3.1 Where, in relation to an Option, the Participant is liable, or is in accordance with current practice at the date of the Trigger Event believed by the Employer to be liable (where it is believed that the shares under option are readily convertible assets), to account to HM Revenue & Customs for the Liability, the Participant and the Employer agree that, upon receipt of the funds to meet the Liability from the Participant, that such funds to meet the Liability shall be paid to the Collector of Taxes or other relevant taxation authority by the Employer on the Participant’s behalf within 14 days of the end of the income tax month in which the gain on the Option was made (“the 14 day period”) and for the purposes of securing payment of the Liability the Participant will on the occurrence of a Trigger Event:

 

  (a) pay to the Employer a cash amount equal to the Liability; and/or

 

  (b) suffer a deduction from salary or other remuneration due to the Participant such deduction being in an amount not exceeding the Liability; and/or

 

  (c) at the request of the Company enter into such arrangement or arrangements necessary or expedient with such person or persons (including the appointment of a nominee on behalf of the Participant) to effect the sale of Shares acquired through the exercise of the Option to cover all or any part of the Liability and use the proceeds to pay the Employer a cash amount equal to the Liability.


3.2 The Employer shall pass all monies it has collected from the Participant in respect of the Liability to the Collector of Taxes by no later than 14 days after the end of the income tax month in which the Trigger Event occurred.

 

4. Termination of Joint Election

 

4.1 This Joint Election shall cease to have effect on the occurrence of any of the following:

 

  (a) if the terms of this Joint Election are satisfied in the reasonable opinion of the Company, the Employer and the Participant;

 

  (b) if the Company, the Employer and the Participant jointly agree in writing to revoke this Joint Election;

 

  (c) if HM Revenue & Customs withdraws approval of this Joint Election so far as it relates to share options covered by the Joint Election but not yet granted;

 

  (d) if the Options lapse or no Option is otherwise capable of being exercised pursuant to the Plan; and/or

 

  (e) if the Company and/or the Employer serve notice on the Participant that the Joint Election is to cease to have effect.

 

5. Further assurance

 

5.1 The Company, Employer and the Participant shall do all such things and execute all such documents as may be necessary or desirable to ensure that this Joint Election complies with all relevant legislation and/or HM Revenue & Customs requirements.

 

5.2 The Participant shall notify the Employer in writing of any Trigger Event which occurs in relation to an Option within three days of such Trigger Event.

 

5.3 The Company intends, as soon as practicable, to notify the Employer of the Participant’s intention of exercising an Option and shall provide the Employer with such information available to the Company to enable the Employer to calculate the Liability arising on the Trigger Event.

 

6. Secondary Contributor

The Employer enters into this Joint Election on its own behalf and on behalf of the Company, or, if and to the extent that there is a change in law, any other company or person who is or becomes a secondary contributor for NIC purposes in respect of this Option. It is agreed that the Employer can enforce the terms of this Joint Election against the Participant on behalf of any such company.

 

7. Binding Effect

 

7.1 The Participant agrees to be bound by the terms of this Joint Election and for the avoidance of doubt the Participant shall continue to be bound by the terms of this Joint Election regardless of which country the Participant is working in when the Liability arises and regardless of whether the Participant is an employee of the Employer when the Liability arises.

 

7.2 The Employer and the Company agree to be bound by the terms of this Joint Election and for the avoidance of doubt the Employer and Company shall continue to be bound by the terms of this Joint Election regardless of which country the Participant is working in when the Liability arises and regardless of whether the Participant is an employee of the Employer when the Liability arises.


8. Governing Law

 

8.1 This Joint Election shall be governed by and construed in accordance with English law and the parties irrevocably submit to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the English Courts to settle any claims, disputes or issues which may arise out of this deed.


This Joint Election has been executed and delivered as a deed on the date written above.

 

SIGNED as a DEED

     )      

by BOX, INC.

     )      

acting by the under-mentioned

     )      

person(s) acting on the authority

     )      

of the Company in accordance

     )      

with the laws of the territory of

     )      

its incorporation:

     )      

Authorised signatory

 

Signed as a DEED

     )      

by BOX.COM(UK) LTD

     )      

acting by:

     )      

Director

In the presence of:

Witness Signature:

Name:

Address:

Occupation:

 

SIGNED as a DEED

     )      

by [insert name of Participant]

     )      

in the presence of:

Witness signature:

Name:

Address:

Occupation:


Neither this document, nor any stock option agreement connected with it, is an approved prospectus for the purposes of section 85(1) of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (“FSMA”) and no offer of transferable securities to the public (for the purposes of section 102B of FSMA) is being made in connection with the UK Sub-Plan to the Box, Inc. 2011 Equity Incentive Plan (the “Sub-Plan”). The Sub-Plan is exclusively available to bona fide employees and former employees of Box, Inc; Box.com(UK) Ltd and any other UK Subsidiary.

UK SUB-PLAN TO THE

BOX, INC.

2011 EQUITY INCENTIVE PLAN

Additional Terms and Conditions for Options received by Participants resident in the UK

 

1. The purpose of this Sub-Plan is to provide incentives for present and future UK tax resident employees of Box, Inc., Box.com (UK) Ltd and any other UK Subsidiary through the grant of options over shares of Class B Common Stock of Box, Inc. (the “Company”).

 

2. Capitalized terms are defined in the Company’s 2011 Equity Incentive Plan (the “Plan”), subject to the provisions of this Sub-Plan.

 

3. References to Incentive Stock Options and Nonqualified Stock Options shall not apply to Options granted under the Sub-Plan.

 

4. The Options granted under this Sub-Plan shall be Unapproved Options.

 

5. This Sub-Plan is governed by the Plan and all its provisions shall be identical to those of the Plan SAVE THAT (i) “Sub-Plan” shall be substituted for “Plan” where applicable and (ii) the following provisions shall be as stated in this Sub-Plan in order to accommodate the specific requirements of the laws of England and Wales:

 

6. SECTION 1. Purpose

 

  The words “officers, directors, consultants, agents, advisors and independent contractors” shall be deleted and replaced with the words “officers and full-time directors”.

 

7. SECTION 4. Shares Subject to the Plan

 

  Section 4.2(d) shall be deleted in its entirety.

 

8. SECTION 5. Eligibility

 

  The words “officer or director” in the first sentence of this section shall be deleted and replaced with the words “officer or director”.

 

  The second sentence (starting with the words “An award may also be granted to any consultant” and ending at the end of the subsection) shall be deleted in its entirety.

 

9. SECTION 6. Awards

 

  The words “shares of Common Stock, Restricted Stock or Stock Units” and the words “or Stock Appreciation Right” shall be deleted from subsection 6.3 (Dividends and Distributions) and the final sentence (beginning “Also notwithstanding”) shall also be deleted.


10. SECTION 7. Options

In section 7.1 (Grant of Options), the words “Incentive Stock Options or Nonqualified Stock” shall be deleted and replaced with the word “Unapproved”.

In section 7.2 (Option Exercise Price), the words “(and not less than the minimum exercise price required by Section 422 of the Code with respect to Incentive Stock Options)” and the words “Nonqualified Stock” shall be deleted.

In section 7.3 (Term of Options), the second sentence beginning with “For Incentive Stock Options” shall be deleted in its entirety.

In section 7.4 (Exercise of Options), the words “and delivery of the signed Joint Election and signed Section 431 Election” shall be inserted following the words “executed stock option exercise agreement or notice”.

The word “check” shall be replaced with the word “cheque” in subsection 7.5(b) (Payment of Exercise Price).

Subsections 7.5(c) and 7.5(d) shall be deleted in their entirety.

In subsection 7.5(e), the words “the regulations of the Federal Reserve Board; or” shall be deleted and replaced with the words “any applicable laws”.

The final paragraph of section 7.5 (beginning “In addition, to assist”) shall be deleted.

In section 7.6 (Effect of Termination of Service) the words “or service” in the final paragraph shall be deleted.

 

11. SECTION 8. Incentive Stock Option Limitations

This section shall be deleted in its entirety.

 

12. SECTION 9. Stock Appreciation Rights

This section shall be deleted in its entirety.

 

13. SECTION 10. Stock Awards, Restricted Stock and Stock Units

This section shall be deleted in its entirety.

 

14. SECTION 11. Other Stock or Cash-Based Awards

This section shall be deleted in its entirety.

 

15. SECTION 12. Withholding

This section shall be deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following:

“In the event that the Company or any Related Company determines that it is required to account to HM Revenue & Customs for any Option Tax Liability or Secondary NIC Liability (under the Stock Option Agreement) arising from the grant, exercise, assignment, release, cancellation or any other disposal of an Option or arising out of the acquisition, retention and disposal of the shares acquired pursuant to the Option, the Participant, as a condition to the issue of Common Stock in connection with the exercise of an Option, or on the grant, assignment, release or cancellation of an Option, shall make such arrangements satisfactory to the Company to enable it or any Related Company to satisfy any requirement to account for any Option Tax Liability


(and, if applicable, any Secondary NIC Liability) that may arise in connection with the Option or the award of Common Stock pursuant to it including, but not limited to, arrangements satisfactory to the Company for withholding Common Stock that would otherwise be issued pursuant to the Stock Option Agreement to the Participant.”

 

16. SECTION 13. Assignability

This section shall be replaced with the following: “No Award or interest in an Award may be transferred otherwise than to the Participant’s Personal Representatives on the Participant’s death. During a Participant’s lifetime, an Award may be exercised only by the Participant.”

 

17. SECTION 14. Adjustments

The words “the maximum number and kind of securities issuable as Incentive Stock Options as set forth in Section 4.2(d); and” shall be deleted from subsection 14.1 (Adjustment of Shares).

 

18. SECTION 17. Amendment and Termination

The first sentence shall be deleted and replaced with the following: “The Plan shall terminate upon the termination of the Box, Inc. 2011 Equity Incentive Plan.”

In subsection 17.3 (Consent of Participant), the second sentence beginning with the words “Any change or adjustment” shall be deleted in its entirety.

 

19. SECTION 18. General

The words “at any time, with or without cause” shall be deleted from subsection 18.1 (No Individual Rights).

The first sentence of subsection 18.5 (Compliance with Laws and Regulations) beginning with the words “In interpreting and applying” and ending at the end of the paragraph shall be deleted in its entirety.

 

20. SECTION 19. Effective Date

The second and third sentence, beginning with the words “If the stockholders of the Company do not approve” and ending at the end of the paragraph, shall be deleted in their entirety.

 

21. APPENDIX A. Definitions

The following definitions shall be deleted:

“Incentive Stock Option”; “Nonqualified Stock Option”; “Restricted Stock”; “Stock Appreciation Right”; “Stock Award”; and “Stock Unit”.

The following definitions shall be added:

Data ” means certain personal information about the Participant, including but not limited to, name, home address and telephone number, date of birth, social insurance number, salary, nationality, job title, any stock, units or directorships held in the Company or any Related Company, details of all options or other entitlement to shares awarded, cancelled, exercised, vested, unvested, or outstanding in the Participant’s favour.


Data Recipients ” means third parties assisting the Company in the implementation, administration, and management of the Plan.

ITEPA ” means the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003.

Joint Election ” means an election (in such terms and such form as provided in paragraphs 3A and 3B of Schedule 1 to the Social Security Contributions and Benefits Act 1992), which has been approved by HM Revenue & Customs for the transfer of the whole of or any liability of the Secondary Contributor for any Secondary NIC Liability.

Option Tax Liability ” means any liability or obligation of the Company and/or any Related Company to account (or pay) for income tax (under the UK withholding system of PAYE (pay as you earn)) or any other taxation provisions and primary class 1 National Insurance Contributions in the United Kingdom to the extent arising from the grant, exercise, assignment, release, cancellation or any other disposal of an Option or arising out of the acquisition, retention and disposal of the Common Stock acquired under this Plan.

Personal Representative ” means the personal representative(s) of a Participant (being either the executors of his will or if he dies intestate the duly appointed administrator(s) of his estate) who have provided to the Board evidence of their appointment as such.

Secondary Contributor ” means a person or company who has a liability to account (or pay) the Secondary NIC Liability to HM Revenue and Customs.

Secondary NIC Liability ” means any liability to employer’s Class 1 National Insurance Contributions to the extent arising from the grant, exercise, release or cancellation of an Option or arising out of the acquisition, retention and disposal of the Common Stock acquired pursuant to an Option.

Section 431 Election ” means an election made under section 431 of ITEPA.

Taxable Event ” means any occasion on which an Option Tax Liability or Secondary NIC Liability arises in connection with an Option or any award of Common Stock under it.

UK Subsidiary ” means a Related Company of the Company which is incorporated in the UK.

Unapproved Option ” means an option over shares in the Company that is neither an HM Revenue & Customs approved company share option (under Schedule 4 ITEPA) nor an enterprise management incentive (EMI) option which meets the requirements of Schedule 5 ITEPA.

The following definitions shall be amended to read as follows:

Award ” means any Option as may be awarded by the Plan Administrator from time to time.

Plan ” means the UK Sub-Plan to the Box, Inc. 2011 Equity Incentive Plan.

Termination of Service ” means a termination of employment relationship with the Company or a Related Company for any reason, whether voluntary or involuntary, including by reason of death, Disability or Retirement. Any question as to whether and when there has been a Termination of Service for the purposes of an Award and the cause of such Termination of Service shall be determined by the Company’s chief human resources officer or other person performing that function or, with respect to


directors and executive officers, by the Board, whose determination shall be conclusive and binding. Transfer of a Participant’s employment relationship between the Company and any Related Company shall not be considered a Termination of Service for purposes of an Award. Unless the Board determines otherwise, a Termination of Service shall be deemed to occur if the Participant’s employment relationship is with an entity that has ceased to be a Related Company.


French Option Sub-Plan to the Box, Inc.

2011 Equity Incentive Plan

 

1. Introduction .

The Board of Directors (the “Board” ) of Box, Inc. (the “Company”) has established the Box, Inc. 2011 Equity Incentive Plan (the “U.S. Plan” ), for the benefit of certain persons, including employees, officers, directors, consultants, agents, advisors, and independent contractors of the Company and its Related Companies (as defined in the U.S. Plan), including its French Related Companies of which the Company holds directly or indirectly at least 10% of the share capital (each a “French Entity” and collectively the “French Entities” ).

Sections 3.2 and 18.6 of the U.S. Plan specifically authorize the Board or a committee composed of members of the Board appointed by the Board to administer the U.S. Plan (the “Plan Administrator” ) to establish sub-plans to the U.S. Plan to meet requirements that permit the Plan to operate in a qualified or tax efficient manner. The Plan Administrator has determined that it is advisable to establish a French sub-plan to the U.S. Plan for the purpose of permitting stock options granted to employees of French Entities to qualify for certain qualified tax and social security treatment available for such grants in France. The Plan Administrator, therefore, hereby establishes rules under the U.S. Plan for the purpose of granting stock options which qualify for the specific tax and social security treatment in France applicable to stock options granted under Sections L. 225-177 to L. 225-186-1 of the French Commercial Code, as amended (“ French-qualified Options ”), to qualifying persons who are resident in France for French tax purposes and/or subject to the French social security regime (the “ French Participants ”).

The terms of the U.S. Plan, as set out in Appendix 1 hereto, shall, subject to the modifications in the following rules, constitute the Rules of the Box, Inc. 2011 Equity Incentive Plan, for the Grant of Options to Participants in France (the “French Option Plan” ).

Under the French Option Plan, qualifying employees will be granted French-qualified Options only as defined in Section 2 hereunder. The provisions of the U.S. Plan permitting the grant of Stock Appreciation Rights, Restricted Stock, Restricted Stock Units or dividend equivalent rights are not applicable to grants made under the French Option Plan.


2. Definitions .

Capitalized terms used in this French Option Plan without definition shall have the meanings ascribed to such terms in the U.S. Plan. The terms set forth below shall have the following meanings:

(a) The term “ Closed Period ” shall mean a closed period as set forth in Section L. 225-177 of the French Commercial Code, as amended, which includes:

 

  (i) the 20-trading day period following the issuance of a dividend ( i.e ., the ex-dividend date) or a general right to subscribe to shares ( i.e ., a rights offering);

 

  (ii) the 10-trading day period before and after the disclosure to the public of the consolidated financial statements or the annual statements of the Company; and

 

  (iii) the period as from the date the corporate management of the Company becomes aware of information that could, if it were disclosed to the public, have a material effect on the trading price of the Common Stock, until 10 trading days after the day such information is disclosed to the public.

If, after adoption of the French Option Plan, the French Commercial Code is amended to modify the definition and/or applicability of the Closed Periods to French-qualified Options, such amendments shall become applicable to any French-qualified Options granted under this French Option Plan to the extent required under French law.

(b) The term “ Exercise Price ” shall mean the price to acquire a Share pursuant to the exercise of a French-qualified Option.

(c) The term “ Grant Date ” shall mean the date on which the Plan Administrator both:

 

  (i) designates the French Participant; and

 

  (ii) specifies the terms and conditions of the French-qualified Option, including the number of Shares, the method for determining the Exercise Price, the vesting conditions and any restrictions on the transferability of the Shares subject to the French-qualified Option.

(d) The term “ Option ” shall include both:

 

  (i) purchase stock options (rights to acquire Shares repurchased by the Company prior to the date on which the Option becomes exercisable); and

 

  (ii) subscription stock options (rights to subscribe for newly issued Shares).

 

2


3. Eligibility .

(a) Notwithstanding any other term of this French Option Plan, French-qualified Options may be granted only to employees or corporate officers of the French Entities who hold less than ten percent (10%) of the share capital of the Company.

(b) Subject to Section 3(c) below, the following persons shall be eligible to receive, at the discretion of the Plan Administrator, French-qualified Options under this French Option Plan, provided they also satisfy the eligibility conditions of Section 5 of the U.S. Plan:

 

  (i) any French Participant who, on the Grant Date and to the extent required under French law, is (A) employed under the terms and conditions of an employment contract (“ contrat de travail ”) by a French Entity, or and only after an Initial Public Offering (“ IPO ”) of the Company ( i.e ., when the Shares are publicly traded on a recognized exchange) (B) a managing corporate officer (as described in 3(c) below) of a French Entity, and

 

  (ii) to the extent permissible under French tax and social security laws, including guidelines and specific tax or social security rulings issued by French tax and social security authorities, any individual who is otherwise employed by the Company or a Related Company even if the individual is not a French tax resident and/or subject to the French social security contribution regime on the Grant Date but who may be considered (as determined by the Plan Administrator in its sole discretion) as a French Participant for purposes of this French Option Plan.

(c) After an IPO of the company, French-qualified Options may not be issued to corporate officers of a French Entity other than the managing corporate officers ( i.e. , Président du Conseil d’Administration , Directeur Général , Directeur Général Délégué , Membre du Directoire , Gérant de Sociétés par actions ), unless the corporate officer is employed under the terms of an employment contract ( “contrat de travail” ) by a French Entity, as defined by French law and in accordance with applicable French rules.

 

4. Grant of Option .

After an IPO, French-qualified Options may not be granted during a Closed Period to the extent such Closed Periods are applicable to French-qualified Options granted by the Company.

 

5. Modifications to Terms and Conditions of Option.

Notwithstanding any provision in the U.S. Plan, the terms and conditions of the French-qualified Options (Exercise Price, number of underlying Shares and vesting conditions) may not be modified after the Grant Date, except as provided under Sections 7, 8 and 9 of the French Option Plan, or as otherwise in keeping with French law applicable to French-qualified Options. Any other modification permitted under the U.S. Plan may result in the Options no longer constituting French-qualified Options.

 

3


6. Exercise Price of Option .

(a) The method for determining the Exercise Price shall be fixed by the Plan Administrator on the Grant Date. The Exercise Price shall be stated in the Stock Option Agreement or other grant materials distributed to Participants.

(b) Prior to the Shares being publicly traded on a recognized exchange, the Exercise Price shall be no less than the Fair Market Value of the Shares on the Grant Date.

(c) After the Shares become publicly traded on a recognized exchange, in no event shall the Exercise Price be less than the greatest of:

 

  (i) with respect to purchase stock options: the higher of either 80% of the average of the prices of the Shares during the 20 trading days immediately preceding the Grant Date or 80% of the average of the purchase price paid for such Shares by the Company;

 

  (ii) with respect to subscription stock options: 80% of the average of the prices of the Shares during the 20 trading days immediately preceding the Grant Date; or

 

  (iii) 100% of the Fair Market Value per Share, as determined on the Grant Date.

(d) Upon exercise of an Option, payment of the full Exercise Price and any required withholding tax or social security contributions shall be paid by any of the methods set forth in the Stock Option Agreement, except that the Exercise Price may not be paid by delivery, surrender or attestation to the ownership of previously owned Shares.

 

7. Exercise of Option .

(a) The French-qualified Option shall vest and be exercisable pursuant to the terms and conditions set forth in the U.S. Plan, the French Option Plan and the Stock Option Agreement delivered to each French Participant.

To the extent necessary to obtain the specific tax and social security treatment applicable to French-qualified Options, the Plan Administrator may, in its discretion, restrict the vesting and/or exercisability of the Option and/or the sale of Shares until the expiration of any applicable holding period. Any such restriction shall be set forth in the Stock Option Agreement to be delivered to each French Participant.

(b) Unless otherwise required or permitted under French law applicable to French-qualified Options, in the event a French Participant dies while he or she is actively employed by the Company or any Related Company, his or her French-qualified Options may thereafter be exercised in full (whether such Options were vested or unvested at the time of death) by his or her heirs only during the six-month period following death.

 

4


(c) Unless otherwise required or permitted under French law applicable to French-qualified Options, in the event a French Participant dies following Termination of Service, his or her outstanding vested French-qualified Options may be exercised by his or her heirs only during the six-month period following death.

The six-month exercise period described in Sections 7(b) and (c) above will apply without regard to the term of the French-qualified Option. Any French-qualified Option which remains unexercised shall expire six months following the date of the French Participant’s death.

(d) The Shares acquired upon exercise of the French-qualified Option shall be recorded in an account in the name of the French Participant with a broker or in such other manner as the Company may otherwise determine in order to ensure compliance with applicable law and any applicable holding periods.

(e) After an IPO and to the extent applicable to French-qualified Options granted by the Company, a specific holding period for the Shares underlying the Option or a restriction on exercise of the French-qualified Option may be imposed upon any French Participant who qualifies as a managing corporate officer of the Company as defined under French law (comparable functions to the French “ mandataires sociaux, i.e., Président du Conseil d’Administration , Directeur Général , Directeur Général Délégué , Membre du Directoire , Gérant de Sociétés par actions ).

 

8. Adjustments Upon Changes in Capital Structure and Change of Control .

Adjustments to the French-qualified Options and/or the underlying Shares shall be made to preclude the dilution or enlargement of benefits under the French-qualified Options in the event of certain transactions by the Company, as set forth in Section L. 225-181 of the French Commercial Code, as amended, as well as in the event of a repurchase of Shares by the Company at a price higher than the stock trading price on the open market pursuant to the provisions of Section L. 228-99 of the French Commercial Code, as amended and specific decrees.

In the event of a change in capital structure or Change of Control as set forth in Section 14 of the U.S. Plan, adjustments to the terms and conditions of the French-qualified Options and/or the underlying Shares may be made only in accordance with the U.S. Plan and pursuant to applicable French legal and tax rules.

Nevertheless, the Plan Administrator may, in its sole discretion, determine to make adjustments in the case of a transaction for which adjustments are not expressly authorized under French law, in which case the Options may no longer qualify as French-qualified Options.

Assumption or substitution of Options in the case of a Change of Control, as well as an acceleration of the vesting and exercisability of the French-qualified Options or any other mechanism implemented upon such Change of Control, or in any other event, may result in the Options no longer constituting French-qualified Options.

 

5


9. Disqualification of the Option .

If the Options or underlying Shares are modified, adjusted or administered in a manner in keeping with the terms of the U.S. Plan or as mandated as a matter of law or by decision of the Company’s stockholders or the Board or the Plan Administrator, and the modification, adjustment or administration is contrary to the terms and conditions of this French Option Plan, the Options may no longer qualify for specific tax and social security treatment in France. If the Option no longer qualifies for specific tax and social security treatment in France, the French Participants must pay the French Participants’ portion of social security contributions resulting from the Option.

If the Options no longer qualify as French-qualified Options, the Plan Administrator may, provided it is authorized to do so under the U.S. Plan, and in its sole discretion, determine to lift, shorten or terminate certain restrictions applicable to the Options or to the sale of the Shares underlying the Options, which may have been imposed under this French Option Plan or in the Stock Option Agreement.

 

10. Interpretation .

It is intended that Options granted under the French Option Plan shall qualify for the specific tax and social security treatment applicable to stock options granted under Sections L. 225-177 to L. 225-186-1 of the French Commercial Code, as amended, and in accordance with the relevant provisions set forth by French tax law and the French tax administration, but no undertaking is made by the Company to maintain such status.

The terms of the French Option Plan shall be interpreted in accordance with the relevant provisions set forth by French tax and social security laws and relevant guidelines published by the French tax and social security administrations and subject to the fulfillment of any applicable legal, tax and reporting obligations.

In the event of any conflict between the provisions of the French Option Plan and the U.S. Plan, the provisions of this French Option Plan shall control for any grants of Options made thereunder to French Participants.

 

11. Employment Rights .

The adoption of this French Option Plan shall not confer upon the French Participants or any employees of a French Entity, any employment rights and shall not be construed as a part of any employment contracts that a French Entity has with its employees.

 

6


12. Non-Transferability .

Notwithstanding any provision in the U.S. Plan to the contrary and, except in the case of death and in accordance with applicable laws, the French-qualified Options shall not be transferred to any third party. In addition, the French-qualified Options are exercisable only by the French Participant during the lifetime of the French Participant.

 

13. Stockholder Authorization .

The stockholders of the Company have approved the Plan in accordance with applicable U.S. laws but, for purposes of the French Option grants, such approval must be renewed at least every seventy-six (76) months, until there is an IPO.

 

14. Amendments .

Subject to the terms of the U.S. Plan, the Board or Plan Administrator reserves the right to amend or terminate the French Option Plan at any time in accordance with applicable French law.

 

15. Effective Date .

The French Option Plan is effective as of [date] 2013.

 

7


Appendix 1

[U.S. Plan]

 

8

Exhibit 10.5

BOX, INC.

2006 STOCK INCENTIVE PLAN

SECTION 1. PURPOSE

The purpose of the Box, Inc. 2006 Stock Incentive Plan is to attract, retain and motivate employees, officers, directors, consultants, agents, advisors and independent contractors of the Company and its Related Companies by providing them the opportunity to acquire a proprietary interest in the Company and to link their interests and efforts to the long-term interests of the Company’s stockholders.

SECTION 2. DEFINITIONS

Certain terms used in the Plan have the meanings set forth in Appendix A.

SECTION 3. ADMINISTRATION

3.1 Administration of the Plan

The Plan shall be administered by the established compensation committee of the Company, consisting of one or more members of the board of directors of the Company (the “ Board ”), subject to such authority and limitations as the Board deems appropriate (together with any subcommittees, the “ Compensation Committee ”). If and so long as the Common Stock is registered under Section 12(b) or 12(g) of the Exchange Act, the Board shall consider in selecting the members of the Compensation Committee acting as Plan Administrator, with respect to any persons subject to Section 16 of the Exchange Act, the provisions regarding “non-employee directors” as contemplated by Rule 16b-3(b)(3) under the Exchange Act, or any successor provision thereto. Members of the Compensation Committee shall serve for such term as the Board may determine, subject to removal by the Board at any time. All references in the Plan to the “ Plan Administrator ” shall be, as applicable, to the Compensation Committee of the Company as appointed by the Board.

3.2 Administration and Interpretation by Plan Administrator

(a) Except for the terms and conditions explicitly set forth in the Plan, the Plan Administrator shall have full power and exclusive authority, to the extent permitted by applicable law and subject to such orders or resolutions not inconsistent with the provisions of the Plan as may from time to time be adopted by the Board or a committee comprised of members of the Board, to (i) select the Eligible Persons to whom Awards may from time to time be granted under the Plan; (ii) determine the type or types of Award to be granted to each Participant under the Plan; (iii) determine the number of shares of Common Stock to be covered by each Award granted under the Plan; (iv) determine the terms and conditions of any Award granted under the Plan; (v) approve the forms of notice or agreement for use under the Plan; (vi) determine whether, to what extent and under what circumstances Awards may be settled in cash, shares of Common Stock or other property or canceled or suspended; (vii) determine whether, to what extent and under what circumstances cash, shares of Common Stock, other property and other amounts payable with respect to an Award shall be deferred either automatically or at the election of the Participant; (viii) interpret and administer the Plan and any instrument evidencing an Award or notice or agreement entered into under the Plan; (ix) establish such rules and regulations as it shall deem appropriate for the proper administration of the Plan; (x) delegate ministerial duties to such of the Company’s employees as it so determines; and (xi) make any other determination and take any other action that the Plan Administrator deems necessary or desirable for administration of the Plan.


(b) The effect on the vesting of an Award of a Company-approved leave of absence or a Participant’s working less than full-time shall be determined by the Company’s chief human resources officer or other person performing that function or, with respect to directors or executive officers, by the Board, whose determination shall be final.

(c) Decisions of the Plan Administrator shall be final, conclusive and binding on all persons, including the Company, any Participant, any stockholder and any Eligible Person. A majority of the members of the Plan Administrator may determine its actions.

SECTION 4. SHARES SUBJECT TO THE PLAN

4.1 Authorized Number of Shares

Subject to adjustment from time to time as provided in Section 14.1, a maximum of 12,037,605 shares of Common Stock shall be available for issuance under the Plan. Shares issued under the Plan shall be drawn from authorized and unissued shares or shares now held or subsequently acquired by the Company as treasury shares.

4.2 Share Usage

(a) Shares of Common Stock covered by an Award shall not be counted as used unless and until they are actually issued and delivered to a Participant. If any Award lapses, expires, terminates or is canceled prior to the issuance of shares thereunder or if shares of Common Stock are issued under the Plan to a Participant and thereafter are forfeited to or otherwise reacquired by the Company, the shares subject to such Awards and the forfeited or reacquired shares shall again be available for issuance under the Plan. Any shares of Common Stock (i) tendered by a Participant or retained by the Company as full or partial payment to the Company for the purchase price of an Award or to satisfy tax withholding obligations in connection with an Award or (ii) covered by an Award that is settled in cash or in a manner such that some or all of the shares covered by the Award are not issued, shall be available for Awards under the Plan. The number of shares of Common Stock available for issuance under the Plan shall not be reduced to reflect any dividends or dividend equivalents that are reinvested into additional shares of Common Stock or credited as additional shares of Common Stock subject or paid with respect to an Award.

(b) The Plan Administrator shall also, without limitation, have the authority to grant Awards as an alternative to or as the form of payment for grants or rights earned or due under other compensation plans or arrangements of the Company.

(c) Notwithstanding anything in the Plan to the contrary, the Plan Administrator may grant Substitute Awards under the Plan. In the event that a written agreement between the Company and an Acquired Entity pursuant to which a merger or consolidation is completed is approved by the Board and said agreement sets forth the terms and conditions of the substitution for or assumption of outstanding awards of the Acquired Entity, said terms and conditions shall be deemed to be the action of the Plan Administrator without any further action by the Plan Administrator, except as may be required for compliance with Rule 16b-3 under the Exchange Act, and the persons holding such awards shall be deemed to be Participants.

 

2


(d) Notwithstanding the foregoing, the maximum number of shares that may be issued upon the exercise of Incentive Stock Options shall equal the aggregate share number stated in Section 4.1, subject to adjustment as provided in Section 14.1.

SECTION 5. ELIGIBILITY

An Award may be granted to any employee, officer or director of the Company or a Related Company whom the Plan Administrator from time to time selects. An Award may also be granted to any consultant, agent, advisor or independent contractor for bona fide services rendered to the Company or any Related Company that (a) are not in connection with the offer and sale of the Company’s securities in a capital-raising transaction and (b) do not directly or indirectly promote or maintain a market for the Company’s securities.

SECTION 6. AWARDS

6.1 Form, Grant and Settlement of Awards

The Plan Administrator shall have the authority, in its sole discretion, to determine the type or types of Awards to be granted under the Plan. Such Awards may be granted either alone, in addition to, or in tandem with, any other type of Award. Any Award settlement may be subject to such conditions, restrictions and contingencies as the Plan Administrator shall determine.

6.2 Evidence of Awards

Awards granted under the Plan shall be evidenced by a written, including an electronic, agreement that shall contain such terms, conditions, limitations and restrictions as the Plan Administrator shall deem advisable and that are not inconsistent with the Plan.

6.3 Deferrals

The Plan Administrator may permit or require a Participant to defer receipt of the payment of any Award. If any such deferral election is permitted or required, the Plan Administrator, in its sole discretion, shall establish rules and procedures for such payment deferrals, which may include the grant of additional Awards or provisions for the payment or crediting of interest or dividend equivalents, including converting such credits to deferred stock unit equivalents.

6.4 Dividends and Distributions

Participants may, if the Plan Administrator so determines, be credited with dividends paid with respect to shares underlying an Award in a manner determined by the Plan Administrator in its sole discretion. The Plan Administrator may apply any restrictions to the

 

3


dividends or dividend equivalents that the Plan Administrator deems appropriate. The Plan Administrator, in its sole discretion, may determine the form of payment of dividends or dividend equivalents, including cash, shares of Common Stock, Restricted Stock or Stock Units.

SECTION 7. OPTIONS

7.1 Grant of Options

The Plan Administrator may grant Options designated as Incentive Stock Options or Nonqualified Stock Options.

7.2 Option Exercise Price

The exercise price for shares purchased under an Option shall be as determined by the Plan Administrator, but shall not be less than the minimum exercise price required by Section 8.3 with respect to Incentive Stock Options except in the case of Substitute Awards.

7.3 Term of Options

Subject to earlier termination in accordance with the terms of the Plan and the instrument evidencing the Option, the maximum term of an Option (the “ Option Term ”) shall be as established for that Option by the Plan Administrator or, if not so established, shall be ten years from the Grant Date. For Incentive Stock Options, the Option Term shall be as specified in Section 8.4.

7.4 Exercise of Options

The Plan Administrator shall establish and set forth in each instrument that evidences an Option the time at which, or the installments in which, the Option shall vest and become exercisable, any of which provisions may be waived or modified by the Plan Administrator at any time. If not so established in the instrument evidencing the Option, the Option shall vest and become exercisable according to the following schedule, which may be waived or modified by the Plan Administrator at any time:

 

Period of Participant’s Continuous

Employment or Service With the

Company or Its Related Companies

From the Vesting Commencement Date

   Portion of Total Option That
Is Vested and Exercisable

After 1 year

   1/4

Each additional one-month period of continuous service completed thereafter

   An additional 1/48

After 4 years

   100%

 

4


To the extent an Option has vested and become exercisable, the Option may be exercised in whole or from time to time in part by delivery to the Company of a properly executed stock option exercise agreement or notice, in a form and in accordance with procedures established by the Plan Administrator, setting forth the number of shares with respect to which the Option is being exercised, the restrictions imposed on the shares purchased under such exercise agreement or notice, if any, and such representations and agreements as may be required by the Plan Administrator, accompanied by payment in full as described in Sections 7.5 and 12. An Option may be exercised only for whole shares and may not be exercised for less than a reasonable number of shares at any one time, as determined by the Plan Administrator.

7.5 Payment of Exercise Price

The exercise price for shares purchased under an Option shall be paid in full to the Company by delivery of consideration equal to the product of the Option exercise price and the number of shares purchased. Such consideration must be paid before the Company will issue the shares being purchased and must be in a form or a combination of forms acceptable to the Plan Administrator for that purchase, which forms may include:

(a) cash;

(b) check or wire transfer;

(c) tendering (either actually or, if and as so long as the Common Stock is registered under Section 12(b) or 12(g) of the Exchange Act, by attestation) shares of Common Stock already owned by the Participant, which on the day prior to the exercise date have a Fair Market Value equal to the aggregate exercise price of the shares being purchased under the Option (such shares must have been owned by the Participant for at least six months or any shorter period necessary to avoid a charge to the Company’s earnings for financial reporting purposes);

(d) if and so long as the Common Stock is registered under Section 12(b) or 12(g) of the Exchange Act, and to the extent permitted by law, delivery of a properly executed exercise agreement or notice, together with irrevocable instructions to a brokerage firm designated or approved by the Company to deliver promptly to the Company the aggregate amount of proceeds to pay the Option exercise price and any withholding tax obligations that may arise in connection with the exercise, all in accordance with the regulations of the Federal Reserve Board; or

(e) such other consideration as the Plan Administrator may permit.

In addition, to assist a Participant (including directors and executive officers) in acquiring shares of Common Stock pursuant to an Award granted under the Plan, the Plan Administrator, in its sole discretion, may authorize, either at the Grant Date or at any time before the acquisition of Common Stock pursuant to the Award, (i) the payment by a Participant of the purchase price of the Common Stock by a promissory note or (ii) the

 

5


guarantee by the Company of a loan obtained by the Participant from a third party. Such notes or loans must be full recourse to the extent necessary to avoid charges to the Company’s earnings for financial reporting purposes. Subject to the foregoing, the Plan Administrator shall in its sole discretion specify the terms of any loans or loan guarantees, including the interest rate and terms of and security for repayment.

7.6 Effect of Termination of Service

The Plan Administrator shall establish and set forth in each instrument that evidences an Option whether the Option shall continue to be exercisable, and the terms and conditions of such exercise, after a Termination of Service, any of which provisions may be waived or modified by the Plan Administrator at any time. If not so established in the instrument evidencing the Option, the Option shall be exercisable according to the following terms and conditions, which may be waived or modified by the Plan Administrator at any time:

(a) Any portion of an Option that is not vested and exercisable on the date of a Participant’s Termination of Service shall expire on such date.

(b) Any portion of an Option that is vested and exercisable on the date of a Participant’s Termination of Service shall expire on the earliest to occur of

(i) if the Participant’s Termination of Service occurs for reasons other than Cause, Retirement, Disability or death, the date that is three months after such Termination of Service;

(ii) if the Participant’s Termination of Service occurs by reason of Retirement, Disability or death, the one-year anniversary of such Termination of Service; and

(iii) the last day of the Option Term (the “ Option Expiration Date ”).

Notwithstanding the foregoing, if a Participant dies after the Participant’s Termination of Service but while an Option is otherwise exercisable, the portion of the Option that is vested and exercisable on the date of such Termination of Service shall expire upon the earlier to occur of (y) the Option Expiration Date and (z) the one-year anniversary of the date of death, unless the Plan Administrator determines otherwise.

Also notwithstanding the foregoing, in case a Participant’s Termination of Service occurs for Cause, all Options granted to the Participant shall automatically expire upon first notification to the Participant of such termination, unless the Plan Administrator determines otherwise. If a Participant’s employment or service relationship with the Company is suspended pending an investigation of whether the Participant shall be terminated for Cause, all the Participant’s rights under any Option shall likewise be suspended during the period of investigation. If any facts that would constitute termination for Cause are discovered after a Participant’s Termination of Service, any Option then held by the Participant may be immediately terminated by the Plan Administrator, in its sole discretion.

 

6


(c) A Participant’s change in status from an employee to a nonemployee director, consultant, advisor or independent contractor or a change in status from a nonemployee director, consultant, advisor or independent contractor to an employee, shall not be considered a Termination of Service for purposes of this Section 7.6.

SECTION 8. INCENTIVE STOCK OPTION LIMITATIONS

Notwithstanding any other provisions of the Plan, the terms and conditions of any Incentive Stock Options shall in addition comply in all respects with Section 422 of the Code, or any successor provision, and any applicable regulations thereunder, including, to the extent required thereunder, the following:

8.1 Dollar Limitation

To the extent the aggregate Fair Market Value (determined as of the Grant Date) of Common Stock with respect to which a Participant’s Incentive Stock Options become exercisable for the first time during any calendar year (under the Plan and all other stock option plans of the Company and its parent and subsidiary corporations) exceeds $100,000, such portion in excess of $100,000 shall be treated as a Nonqualified Stock Option. In the event the Participant holds two or more such Options that become exercisable for the first time in the same calendar year, such limitation shall be applied on the basis of the order in which such Options are granted.

8.2 Eligible Employees

Individuals who are not employees of the Company or one of its parent or subsidiary corporations may not be granted Incentive Stock Options.

8.3 Exercise Price

The exercise price of an Incentive Stock Option shall be at least 100% of the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock on the Grant Date, and in the case of an Incentive Stock Option granted to a Participant who owns more than 10% of the total combined voting power of all classes of the stock of the Company or of its parent or subsidiary corporations (a “ Ten Percent Stockholder ”), shall not be less than 110% of the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock on the Grant Date. The determination of more than 10% ownership shall be made in accordance with Section 422 of the Code.

8.4 Option Term

Subject to earlier termination in accordance with the terms of the Plan and the instrument evidencing the Option, the Option Term of an Incentive Stock Option shall not exceed ten years, and in the case of an Incentive Stock Option granted to a Ten Percent Stockholder, shall not exceed five years.

 

7


8.5 Exercisability

An Option designated as an Incentive Stock Option shall cease to qualify for favorable tax treatment as an Incentive Stock Option to the extent it is exercised (if permitted by the terms of the Option) (a) more than three months after the date of a Participant’s Termination of Service if termination was for reasons other than death or Disability, (b) more than one year after the date of a Participant’s Termination of Service if termination was by reason of Disability, or (c) after the Participant has been on leave of absence for more than 90 days, unless the Participant’s reemployment rights are guaranteed by statute or contract.

8.6 Taxation of Incentive Stock Options

In order to obtain certain tax benefits afforded to Incentive Stock Options under Section 422 of the Code, the Participant must hold the shares acquired upon the exercise of an Incentive Stock Option for two years after the Grant Date and one year after the date of exercise.

A Participant may be subject to the alternative minimum tax at the time of exercise of an Incentive Stock Option. The Participant shall give the Company prompt notice of any disposition of shares acquired on the exercise of an Incentive Stock Option prior to the expiration of such holding periods.

8.7 Code Definitions

For the purposes of this Section 8, “disability,” “parent corporation” and “subsidiary corporation” shall have the meanings attributed to those terms for purposes of Section 422 of the Code.

8.8 Promissory Notes

The amount of any promissory note delivered pursuant to Section 7.5 in connection with an Incentive Stock Option shall bear interest at a rate specified by the Plan Administrator, but in no case less than the rate required to avoid imputation of interest (taking into account any exceptions to the imputed interest rules) for federal income tax purposes.

SECTION 9. STOCK APPRECIATION RIGHTS

9.1 Grant of Stock Appreciation Rights

The Plan Administrator may grant Stock Appreciation Rights to Participants at any time on such terms and conditions as the Plan Administrator shall determine in its sole discretion. An SAR may be granted in tandem with an Option or alone (“ freestanding ”). The grant price of a tandem SAR shall be equal to the exercise price of the related Option. The grant price of a freestanding SAR shall be established in accordance with procedures for Options set forth in Section 7.2. An SAR may be exercised upon such terms and conditions and for the term as the Plan Administrator determines in its sole discretion; provided, however, that, subject to earlier termination in accordance with the terms of the Plan and the instrument evidencing

 

8


the SAR, the term of a freestanding SAR shall be as established for that SAR by the Plan Administrator or, if not so established, shall be ten years, and in the case of a tandem SAR, (a) the term shall not exceed the term of the related Option and (b) the tandem SAR may be exercised for all or part of the shares subject to the related Option upon the surrender of the right to exercise the equivalent portion of the related Option, except that the tandem SAR may be exercised only with respect to the shares for which its related Option is then exercisable.

9.2 Payment of SAR Amount

Upon the exercise of an SAR, a Participant shall be entitled to receive payment in an amount determined by multiplying: (a) the difference between the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock for the date of exercise over the grant price of the SAR by (b) the number of shares with respect to which the SAR is exercised. At the discretion of the Plan Administrator as set forth in the instrument evidencing the Award, the payment upon exercise of an SAR may be in cash, in shares, in some combination thereof or in any other manner approved by the Plan Administrator in its sole discretion.

SECTION 10. STOCK AWARDS, RESTRICTED STOCK AND STOCK UNITS

10.1 Grant of Stock Awards, Restricted Stock and Stock Units

The Plan Administrator may grant Stock Awards, Restricted Stock and Stock Units on such terms and conditions and subject to such repurchase or forfeiture restrictions, if any, which may be based on continuous service with the Company or a Related Company or the achievement of any performance goals, as the Plan Administrator shall determine in its sole discretion, which terms, conditions and restrictions shall be set forth in the instrument evidencing the Award.

10.2 Vesting of Restricted Stock and Stock Units

Upon the satisfaction of any terms, conditions and restrictions prescribed with respect to Restricted Stock or Stock Units, or upon a Participant’s release from any terms, conditions and restrictions of Restricted Stock or Stock Units, as determined by the Plan Administrator, and subject to the provisions of Section 13, (a) the shares of Restricted Stock covered by each Award of Restricted Stock shall become freely transferable by the Participant, and (b) Stock Units shall be paid in shares of Common Stock or, if set forth in the instrument evidencing the Awards, in cash or a combination of cash and shares of Common Stock. Any fractional shares subject to such Awards shall be paid to the Participant in cash.

10.3 Waiver of Restrictions

Notwithstanding any other provisions of the Plan, the Plan Administrator, in its sole discretion, may waive the repurchase or forfeiture period and any other terms, conditions or restrictions on any Restricted Stock or Stock Unit under such circumstances and subject to such terms and conditions as the Plan Administrator shall deem appropriate.

 

9


SECTION 11. OTHER STOCK OR CASH-BASED AWARDS

Subject to the terms of the Plan and such other terms and conditions as the Plan Administrator deems appropriate, the Plan Administrator may grant other incentives payable in cash or in shares of Common Stock under the Plan as it determines.

SECTION 12. WITHHOLDING

The Company may require the Participant to pay to the Company the amount of (a) any taxes that the Company is required by applicable federal, state, local or foreign law to withhold with respect to the grant, vesting or exercise of an Award (“ tax withholding obligations ”) and (b) any amounts due from the Participant to the Company or to any Related Company (“ other obligations ”). The Company shall not be required to issue any shares of Common Stock or otherwise settle an Award under the Plan until such tax withholding obligations and other obligations are satisfied.

The Plan Administrator may permit or require a Participant to satisfy all or part of the Participant’s tax withholding obligations and other obligations by (a) paying cash to the Company, (b) having the Company withhold an amount from any cash amounts otherwise due or to become due from the Company to the Participant, (c) having the Company withhold a number of shares of Common Stock that would otherwise be issued to the Participant (or become vested in the case of Restricted Stock) having a Fair Market Value equal to the tax withholding obligations and other obligations, or (d) surrendering a number of shares of Common Stock the Participant already owns having a value equal to the tax withholding obligations and other obligations. The value of the shares so withheld may not exceed the employer’s minimum required tax withholding rate, and the value of the shares so tendered may not exceed such rate to the extent the Participant has owned the tendered shares for less than six months if such limitation is necessary to avoid a charge to the Company for financial reporting purposes.

SECTION 13. ASSIGNABILITY

No Award or interest in an Award may be sold, assigned, pledged (as collateral for a loan or as security for the performance of an obligation or for any other purpose) or transferred by a Participant or made subject to attachment or similar proceedings otherwise than by will or by the applicable laws of descent and distribution, except to the extent the Participant designates one or more beneficiaries on a Company-approved form who may exercise the Award or receive payment under the Award after the Participant’s death. During a Participant’s lifetime, an Award may be exercised only by the Participant. Notwithstanding the foregoing and to the extent permitted by Section 422 of the Code, the Plan Administrator, in its sole discretion, may permit a Participant to assign or transfer an Award, subject to such terms and conditions as the Plan Administrator shall specify.

 

10


SECTION 14. ADJUSTMENTS

14.1 Adjustment of Shares

In the event, at any time or from time to time, a stock dividend, stock split, spin-off, combination or exchange of shares, recapitalization, merger, consolidation, distribution to stockholders other than a normal cash dividend, or other change in the Company’s corporate or capital structure results in (a) the outstanding shares of Common Stock, or any securities exchanged therefor or received in their place, being exchanged for a different number or kind of securities of the Company or any other company or (b) new, different or additional securities of the Company or any other company being received by the holders of shares of Common Stock, then the Plan Administrator shall make proportional adjustments in: (i) the maximum number and kind of securities available for issuance under the Plan; (ii) the maximum number and kind of securities issuable as Incentive Stock Options as set forth in Section 4.2(d); and (iii) the number and kind of securities that are subject to any outstanding Award and the per share price of such securities, without any change in the aggregate price to be paid therefor. The determination by the Plan Administrator as to the terms of any of the foregoing adjustments shall be conclusive and binding.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, the issuance by the Company of shares of stock of any class, or securities convertible into shares of stock of any class, for cash or property, or for labor or services rendered, either upon direct sale or upon the exercise of rights or warrants to subscribe therefor, or upon conversion of shares or obligations of the Company convertible into such shares or other securities, shall not affect, and no adjustment by reason thereof shall be made with respect to, outstanding Awards. Also notwithstanding the foregoing, a dissolution or liquidation of the Company or a Company Transaction shall not be governed by this Section 14.1 but shall be governed by Sections 14.2 and 14.3, respectively.

14.2 Dissolution or Liquidation

To the extent not previously exercised or settled, and unless otherwise determined by the Plan Administrator in its sole discretion, Options, Stock Appreciation Rights and Stock Units shall terminate immediately prior to the dissolution or liquidation of the Company. To the extent a vesting condition, forfeiture provision or repurchase right applicable to an Award has not been waived by the Plan Administrator, the Award shall be forfeited immediately prior to the consummation of the dissolution or liquidation.

14.3 Company Transaction

14.3.1 Effect of a Company Transaction

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan to the contrary, unless the Plan Administrator shall determine otherwise at the time of grant with respect to a particular Award, in the event of a Company Transaction that is not a Related Party Transaction, 25% of the unvested portion of the outstanding Awards shall become fully and immediately exercisable or payable, and all applicable deferral and restriction limitations or forfeiture

 

11


provisions shall lapse, immediately prior to the Company Transaction, unless such Awards are assumed or substituted for by the Successor Company. Notwithstanding the foregoing, with respect to outstanding Options or Stock Appreciation Rights, the Plan Administrator, in its sole discretion, may instead provide that such Awards shall terminate upon consummation of such Company Transaction and that each such Participant shall receive, in exchange therefor, a cash payment equal to the amount (if any) by which (a) the Acquisition Price multiplied by the number of shares of Common Stock subject to such outstanding Options or SARs (either to the extent then vested and exercisable or whether or not then vested and exercisable, as determined by the Plan Administrator in its sole discretion) exceeds (b) the respective aggregate exercise price for such Options or grant price for such SARs. If and to the extent the Successor Company assumes or substitutes outstanding Awards, the forfeiture provisions applicable to such Awards shall not lapse, and all such restrictions shall continue with respect to any shares of the Successor Company or other consideration that may be issued in exchange or in substitution for such Awards.

14.3.2 Assumption or Substitution

For the purposes of this Section 14.3, an Award shall be considered assumed or substituted for if following the Company Transaction an option or right confers the right to purchase or receive, for each Common Share subject to the Award immediately prior to the Company Transaction, the consideration (whether stock, cash, or other securities or property) received in the Company Transaction by holders of Common Stock for each share held on the effective date of the transaction (and if holders were offered a choice of consideration, the type of consideration chosen by the holders of a majority of the outstanding shares); provided, however, that if such consideration received in the Company Transaction is not solely common stock of the Successor Company, the Plan Administrator may, with the consent of the Successor Company, provide for the consideration to be received upon the exercise of the Option, for each share of Common Stock subject thereto, to be solely common stock of the Successor Company substantially equal in fair market value to the per share consideration received by holders of Common Stock in the Company Transaction. The determination of such substantial equality of value of consideration shall be made by the Plan Administrator and its determination shall be conclusive and binding.

14.4 Further Adjustment of Awards

Subject to Sections 14.2 and 14.3, the Plan Administrator shall have the discretion, exercisable at any time before a sale, merger, consolidation, reorganization, liquidation, dissolution or change in control of the Company, as defined by the Plan Administrator, to take such further action as it determines to be necessary or advisable with respect to Awards. Such authorized action may include (but shall not be limited to) establishing, amending or waiving the type, terms, conditions or duration of, or restrictions on, Awards so as to provide for earlier, later, extended or additional time for exercise, lifting restrictions and other modifications, and the Plan Administrator may take such actions with respect to all Participants, to certain categories of Participants or only to individual Participants. The Plan Administrator may take such action before or after granting Awards to which the action relates and before or after any public announcement with respect to such sale, merger, consolidation, reorganization, liquidation, dissolution or change in control that is the reason for such action.

 

12


14.5 No Limitations

The grant of Awards shall in no way affect the Company’s right to adjust, reclassify, reorganize or otherwise change its capital or business structure or to merge, consolidate, dissolve, liquidate or sell or transfer all or any part of its business or assets.

14.6 Fractional Shares

In the event of any adjustment in the number of shares covered by any Award, each such Award shall cover only the number of full shares resulting from such adjustment.

SECTION 15. FIRST REFUSAL RIGHTS

15.1 First Refusal Rights

Until the date on which the initial registration of the Common Stock under Section 12(b) or 12(g) of the Exchange Act first becomes effective, the Company shall have the right of first refusal with respect to any proposed sale or other disposition by a Participant of any shares of Common Stock issued pursuant to an Award. Such right of first refusal shall be exercisable in accordance with the terms and conditions established by the Plan Administrator and set forth in the stock purchase agreement evidencing the purchase of the shares.

15.2 General

The Company may not exercise its first refusal rights under Section 15.1 earlier than six months and one day following the date the shares were purchased by a Participant (or any shorter period determined by the Company to be sufficient to avoid a charge to the Company’s earnings for financial reporting purposes or required by applicable law).

The Company’s first refusal rights under this Section 15 are assignable by the Company at any time.

SECTION 16. MARKET STANDOFF

In the event of an underwritten public offering by the Company of its equity securities pursuant to an effective registration statement filed under the Securities Act, including the Company’s initial public offering, no person may sell, make any short sale of, loan, hypothecate, pledge, grant any option for the purchase of, or otherwise dispose of or transfer for value or otherwise agree to engage in any of the foregoing transactions with respect to any shares issued pursuant to an Award granted under the Plan without the prior written consent of the Company or its underwriters. Such limitations shall be in effect for such period of time as may be requested by the Company or such underwriters; provided,

 

13


however, that in no event shall such period exceed 180 days after the effective date of the registration statement, plus, if requested by the Company, an extension of up to an additional 37 days to enable compliance with NYSE Rule 472 or NASD Conduct Rule 2711. The limitations of this Section 16 shall in all events terminate two years after the effective date of the Company’s initial public offering.

In the event of any stock split, stock dividend, recapitalization, combination of shares, exchange of shares or other change affecting the Company’s outstanding Common Stock effected as a class without the Company’s receipt of consideration, any new, substituted or additional securities distributed with respect to the purchased shares shall be immediately subject to the provisions of this Section 16, to the same extent the purchased shares are at such time covered by such provisions.

In order to enforce the limitations of this Section 16, the Company may impose stop-transfer instructions with respect to the purchased shares until the end of the applicable standoff period.

SECTION 17. AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION

17.1 Amendment, Suspension or Termination

The Board may amend, suspend or terminate the Plan or any portion of the Plan at any time and in such respects as it shall deem advisable; provided, however, that, to the extent required by applicable law, regulation or stock exchange rule, stockholder approval shall be required for any amendment to the Plan. Subject to Section 17.3, the Board may amend the terms of any outstanding Award, prospectively or retroactively.

17.2 Term of the Plan

The Plan shall have no fixed expiration date. After the Plan is terminated, no future Awards may be granted, but Awards previously granted shall remain outstanding in accordance with their applicable terms and conditions and the Plan’s terms and conditions. Notwithstanding the foregoing, no Incentive Stock Options may be granted more than ten years after the later of (a) the adoption of the Plan by the Board and (b) the adoption by the Board of any amendment to the Plan that constitutes the adoption of a new plan for purposes of Section 422 of the Code.

17.3 Consent of Participant

The amendment, suspension or termination of the Plan or a portion thereof or the amendment of an outstanding Award shall not, without the Participant’s consent, materially adversely affect any rights under any Award theretofore granted to the Participant under the Plan. Any change or adjustment to an outstanding Incentive Stock Option shall not, without the consent of the Participant, be made in a manner so as to constitute a “modification” that would cause such Incentive Stock Option to fail to continue to qualify as an Incentive Stock Option. Notwithstanding the foregoing, any adjustments made pursuant to Section 14 shall not be subject to these restrictions.

 

14


SECTION 18. GENERAL

18.1 No Individual Rights

No individual or Participant shall have any claim to be granted any Award under the Plan, and the Company has no obligation for uniformity of treatment of Participants under the Plan.

Furthermore, nothing in the Plan or any Award granted under the Plan shall be deemed to constitute an employment contract or confer or be deemed to confer on any Participant any right to continue in the employ of, or to continue any other relationship with, the Company or any Related Company or limit in any way the right of the Company or any Related Company to terminate a Participant’s employment or other relationship at any time, with or without cause.

18.2 Issuance of Shares

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, the Company shall have no obligation to issue or deliver any shares of Common Stock under the Plan or make any other distribution of benefits under the Plan unless, in the opinion of the Company’s counsel, such issuance, delivery or distribution would comply with all applicable laws (including, without limitation, the requirements of the Securities Act or the laws of any state or foreign jurisdiction) and the applicable requirements of any securities exchange or similar entity.

The Company shall be under no obligation to any Participant to register for offering or resale or to qualify for exemption under the Securities Act, or to register or qualify under the laws of any state or foreign jurisdiction, any shares of Common Stock, security or interest in a security paid or issued under, or created by, the Plan, or to continue in effect any such registrations or qualifications if made.

As a condition to the exercise of an Option or any other receipt of Common Stock pursuant to an Award under the Plan, the Company may require (a) the Participant to represent and warrant at the time of any such exercise or receipt that such shares are being purchased or received only for the Participant’s own account and without any present intention to sell or distribute such shares and (b) such other action or agreement by the Participant as may from time to time be necessary to comply with the federal, state and foreign securities laws. At the option of the Company, a stop-transfer order against any such shares may be placed on the official stock books and records of the Company, and a legend indicating that such shares may not be pledged, sold or otherwise transferred, unless an opinion of counsel is provided (concurred in by counsel for the Company) stating that such transfer is not in violation of any applicable law or regulation, may be stamped on stock certificates to ensure exemption from registration. The Plan Administrator may also require the Participant to execute and deliver to the Company a purchase agreement or such other agreement as may be in use by the Company at such time that describes certain terms and conditions applicable to the shares.

 

15


To the extent the Plan or any instrument evidencing an Award provides for issuance of stock certificates to reflect the issuance of shares of Common Stock, the issuance may be effected on a noncertificated basis, to the extent not prohibited by applicable law or the applicable rules of any stock exchange.

18.3 Indemnification

Each person who is or shall have been a member of the Board shall be indemnified and held harmless by the Company against and from any loss, cost, liability or expense that may be imposed upon or reasonably incurred by such person in connection with or resulting from any claim, action, suit or proceeding to which such person may be a party or in which such person may be involved by reason of any action taken or failure to act under the Plan and against and from any and all amounts paid by such person in settlement thereof, with the Company’s approval, or paid by such person in satisfaction of any judgment in any such claim, action, suit or proceeding against such person; provided, however, that such person shall give the Company an opportunity, at its own expense, to handle and defend the same before such person undertakes to handle and defend it on such person’s own behalf. Notwithstanding the prior sentence, the indemnification provisions of this Section 18.3 shall not apply if such loss, cost, liability or expense is a result of such person’s own willful misconduct.

The foregoing right of indemnification shall not be exclusive of any other rights of indemnification to which such person may be entitled under the Company’s certificate of incorporation or bylaws, as a matter of law, or otherwise, or of any power that the Company may have to indemnify or hold harmless.

18.4 No Rights as a Stockholder

Unless otherwise provided by the Plan Administrator or in the instrument evidencing the Award or in a written employment, services or other agreement, no Option, Stock Appreciation Right or Stock Unit shall entitle the Participant to any cash dividend, voting or other right of a stockholder unless and until the date of issuance under the Plan of the shares that are the subject of such Award.

18.5 Compliance With Laws and Regulations

In interpreting and applying the provisions of the Plan, any Option granted as an Incentive Stock Option pursuant to the Plan shall, to the extent permitted by law, be construed as an “incentive stock option” within the meaning of Section 422 of the Code.

 

16


18.6 Participants in Other Countries or Jurisdictions

Without amending the Plan, the Plan Administrator may grant Awards to eligible persons who are foreign nationals on such terms and conditions different from those specified in the Plan, which may, in the judgment of the Plan Administrator, be necessary or desirable to foster and promote achievement of the purposes of the Plan and shall have the authority to adopt such modifications, procedures, subplans and the like as may be necessary or desirable to comply with provisions of the laws or regulations of other countries or jurisdictions in which the Company or any Related Company may operate or have employees to ensure the viability of the benefits from Awards granted to Participants employed in such countries or jurisdictions, meet the requirements that permit the Plan to operate in a qualified or tax efficient manner, comply with applicable foreign laws or regulations and meet the objectives of the Plan.

18.7 No Trust or Fund

The Plan is intended to constitute an “unfunded” plan. Nothing contained herein shall require the Company to segregate any monies or other property, or shares of Common Stock, or to create any trusts, or to make any special deposits for any immediate or deferred amounts payable to any Participant, and no Participant shall have any rights that are greater than those of a general unsecured creditor of the Company.

18.8 Successors

All obligations of the Company under the Plan with respect to Awards shall be binding on any successor to the Company, whether the existence of such successor is the result of a direct or indirect purchase, merger, consolidation, or otherwise, of all or substantially all the business and/or assets of the Company.

18.9 Severability

If any provision of the Plan or any Award is determined to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable in any jurisdiction, or as to any person, or would disqualify the Plan or any Award under any law deemed applicable by the Plan Administrator, such provision shall be construed or deemed amended to conform to applicable laws, or, if it cannot be so construed or deemed amended without, in the Plan Administrator’s determination, materially altering the intent of the Plan or the Award, such provision shall be stricken as to such jurisdiction, person or Award, and the remainder of the Plan and any such Award shall remain in full force and effect.

18.10 Choice of Law and Venue

The Plan, all Awards granted thereunder and all determinations made and actions taken pursuant hereto, to the extent not otherwise governed by the laws of the United States, shall be governed by the laws of the State of Washington without giving effect to principles of conflicts of law. Participants irrevocably consent to the nonexclusive jurisdiction and venue of the state and federal courts located in the State of Washington.

 

17


18.11 Legal Requirements

The granting of Awards and the issuance of shares of Common Stock under the Plan is subject to all applicable laws, rules and regulations, and to such approvals by any governmental agencies or national securities exchanges as may be required.

18.12 Appendix Provisions

Participants who are residents of the State of California shall be subject to the additional terms and conditions set forth in Appendix B to the Plan until such time as the Common Stock becomes a “listed” security under the Securities Act.

SECTION 19. EFFECTIVE DATE

The effective date (the “ Effective Date ”) is the date on which the Plan is adopted by the Board. If the stockholders of the Company do not approve the Plan within 12 months after the Board’s adoption of the Plan, any Incentive Stock Options granted under the Plan will be treated as Nonqualified Stock Options.

 

18


APPENDIX A

Acquired Entity ” means any entity acquired by the Company or a Related Company or with which the Company or a Related Company merges or combines.

Acquisition Price ” means the fair market value of the securities, cash or other property, or any combination thereof, receivable upon consummation of a Company Transaction in respect of a share of Common Stock.

Award ” means any Option, Stock Appreciation Right, Stock Award, Restricted Stock, Stock Unit or cash-based award or other incentive payable in cash or in shares of Common Stock, as may be designated by the Plan Administrator from time to time.

Board ” means the Board of Directors of the Company, including any committees formed and approved by the members of the Board of the Company in accordance with its Bylaws.

Cause ,” unless otherwise defined in the instrument evidencing an Award or in a written employment, services or other agreement between the Participant and the Company or a Related Company, means dishonesty, fraud, serious or willful misconduct, unauthorized use or disclosure of confidential information or trade secrets, violation of a noncompetition agreement, or conduct prohibited by law (except minor violations), in each case as determined by the Company’s chief human resources officer or other person performing that function or, in the case of directors and executive officers, the Board, whose determination shall be conclusive and binding.

Code ” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended from time to time.

Common Stock ” means the common stock, no par value, of the Company.

Company ” means Box, Inc., a Washington corporation.

Company Transaction ,” unless otherwise defined in the instrument evidencing the Award or in a written employment, services or other agreement between the Participant and the Company or a Related Company, means consummation of:

(a) a merger or consolidation of the Company with or into any other company or other entity;

(b) a sale in one transaction or a series of transactions undertaken with a common purpose of at least a majority in voting power of the Company’s outstanding voting securities; or

(c) a sale, lease, exchange or other transfer in one transaction or a series of related transactions undertaken with a common purpose of all or substantially all of the Company’s assets.

 

A-1


Where a series of transactions undertaken with a common purpose is deemed to be a Company Transaction, the date of such Company Transaction shall be the date on which the last of such transactions is consummated.

Disability ,” unless otherwise defined by the Plan Administrator or in the instrument evidencing the Award or in a written employment, services or other agreement between the Participant and the Company or a Related Company, means a mental or physical impairment of the Participant that is expected to result in death or that has lasted or is expected to last for a continuous period of 12 months or more and that causes the Participant to be unable to perform his or her material duties for the Company or a Related Company and to be engaged in any substantial gainful activity, in each case as determined by the Company’s chief human resources officer or other person performing that function or, in the case of directors and executive officers, the Board, each of whose determination shall be conclusive and binding.

Effective Date ” has the meaning set forth in Section 19.

Eligible Person ” means any person eligible to receive an Award as set forth in Section 5.

Exchange Act ” means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended from time to time.

Fair Market Value ” means the per share fair market value of the Common Stock as established in good faith by the Plan Administrator or, if the Common Stock is publicly traded, the average of the high and low trading prices for the Common Stock on any given date during regular trading, or if not trading on that date, such price on the last preceding date on which the Common Stock was traded, unless determined otherwise by the Plan Administrator using such methods or procedures as it may establish.

Grant Date ” means the later of (a) the date on which the Plan Administrator completes the corporate action authorizing the grant of an Award or such later date specified by the Plan Administrator or (b) the date on which all conditions precedent to an Award have been satisfied, provided that conditions to the exercisability or vesting of Awards shall not defer the Grant Date.

Incentive Stock Option ” means an Option granted with the intention that it qualify as an “incentive stock option” as that term is defined for purposes of Section 422 of the Code or any successor provision.

Nonqualified Stock Option ” means an Option other than an Incentive Stock Option.

Option ” means a right to purchase Common Stock granted under Section 7.

Option Expiration Date ” has the meaning set forth in Section 7.6.

Option Term ” means the maximum term of an Option as set forth in Section 7.3.

Participant ” means any Eligible Person to whom an Award is granted.

 

A-2


Plan ” means the Box, Inc. 2006 Stock Incentive Plan.

Plan Administrator ” means the Board.

Related Company ” means any entity that, directly or indirectly, is in control of, is controlled by or is under common control with the Company.

Related Party Transaction ” means (a) a merger or consolidation of the Company in which the holders of the outstanding voting securities of the Company immediately prior to the merger or consolidation hold at least a majority of the outstanding voting securities of the Successor Company immediately after the merger or consolidation; (b) a sale, lease, exchange or other transfer of all or substantially all of the Company’s assets to a majority-owned subsidiary company; or (c) a transaction undertaken for the principal purpose of restructuring the capital of the Company, including, but not limited to, reincorporating the Company in a different jurisdiction, converting the Company to a limited liability company or creating a holding company.

Restricted Stock ” means an Award of shares of Common Stock granted under Section 10, the rights of ownership of which are subject to restrictions prescribed by the Plan Administrator.

Retirement ,” unless otherwise defined in the instrument evidencing the Award or in a written employment, services or other agreement between the Participant and the Company or a Related Company, means “retirement” as defined for purposes of the Plan by the Plan Administrator or the Company’s chief human resources officer or other person performing that function or, if not so defined, means Termination of Service on or after the date the Participant reaches “normal retirement age,” as that term is defined in Section 411(a)(8) of the Code.

Securities Act ” means the Securities Act of 1933, as amended from time to time.

Stock Appreciation Right ” or “ SAR ” means a right granted under Section 9.1 to receive the excess of the Fair Market Value of a specified number of shares of Common Stock over the grant price.

Stock Award ” means an Award of shares of Common Stock granted under Section 10, the rights of ownership of which are not subject to restrictions prescribed by the Plan Administrator.

Stock Unit ” means an Award denominated in units of Common Stock granted under Section 10.

Substitute Awards ” means Awards granted or shares of Common Stock issued by the Company in substitution or exchange for awards previously granted by an Acquired Entity.

 

A-3


“Successor Company” means the surviving company, the successor company, the acquiring company or its parent, as applicable, in connection with a Company Transaction.

Termination of Service ” means a termination of employment or service relationship with the Company or a Related Company for any reason, whether voluntary or involuntary, including by reason of death, Disability or Retirement. Any question as to whether and when there has been a Termination of Service for the purposes of an Award and the cause of such Termination of Service shall be determined by the Company’s chief human resources officer or other person performing that function or, with respect to directors and executive officers, by the Board, whose determination shall be conclusive and binding. Transfer of a Participant’s employment or service relationship between the Company and any Related Company shall not be considered a Termination of Service for purposes of an Award. Unless the Board determines otherwise, a Termination of Service shall be deemed to occur if the Participant’s employment or service relationship is with an entity that has ceased to be a Related Company.

Vesting Commencement Date ” means the Grant Date or such other date selected by the Plan Administrator as the date from which an Award begins to vest.

 

A-4


APPENDIX B

TO THE BOX, INC.

2006 STOCK INCENTIVE PLAN

(For California Residents Only)

This Appendix to the Box, Inc. 2006 Stock Incentive Plan (the “ Plan ”) shall have application only to Participants who are residents of the State of California. Capitalized terms contained herein shall have the same meanings given to them in the Plan, unless otherwise provided in this Appendix. Notwithstanding any provision contained in the Plan to the contrary and to the extent required by applicable law, the following terms and conditions shall apply to all Awards granted to residents of the State of California, until such time as the Common Stock becomes a “listed security” under the Securities Act:

1. Nonqualified Stock Options shall have an exercise price that is not less than 85% of the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock at the Grant Date, except that the exercise price shall be at least 110% of the Fair Market Value in the case of any person who owns stock possessing more than 10% of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company or its parent or subsidiary companies.

2. The purchase price for any shares of Common Stock that may be purchased under the Plan (“ Stock Purchase Rights ”) shall be at least 85% of the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock at the time the Participant is granted the Stock Purchase Right or at the time the purchase is consummated. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the purchase price shall be at least 100% of the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock at the time the Participant is granted the Stock Purchase Right or at the time the purchase is consummated in the case of any person who owns stock possessing more than 10% of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company or its parent or subsidiary companies.

3. Options shall have a term of not more than ten years from the Grant Date.

4. Awards shall be nontransferable other than by will or the laws of descent and distribution. Notwithstanding the foregoing, and to the extent permitted by Section 422 of the Code, the Plan Administrator, in its discretion, may permit distribution of an Option to an inter vivos or testamentary trust in which the Option is to be passed to beneficiaries upon the death of the trustor (settlor), or by gift to “immediate family” as that term is defined in Rule 16a-1(e) under the Exchange Act.

5. Options shall become exercisable at the rate of at least 20% per year over five years from the date the Option is granted, subject to reasonable conditions such as continued employment. However, in the case of an Option granted to officers, directors or consultants of the Company or a Related Company, the Option may become fully exercisable, subject to reasonable conditions such as continued employment, at any time or during any period established by the Company or a Related Company.

 

B-1


6. Unless employment or services are terminated for Cause, the right to exercise an Option in the event of Termination of Service, to the extent that the Participant is otherwise entitled to exercise an Option on the date of Termination of Service, shall be

a. at least six months from the date of a Participant’s Termination of Service if termination was caused by death or Disability; and

b. at least 30 days from the date of a Participant’s Termination of Service if termination of employment was caused by other than death or Disability;

c. but in no event later than the Option Expiration Date.

7. No Award may be granted to a resident of California more than ten years after the earlier of the date of adoption of the Plan and the date the Plan is approved by the stockholders.

8. Any Award exercised before stockholder approval is obtained shall be rescinded if stockholder approval is not obtained within 12 months before or after the Plan is adopted. Such shares shall not be counted in determining whether such approval is obtained.

9. The Company shall provide annual financial statements of the Company to each California resident holding an outstanding Award under the Plan. Such financial statements need not be audited and need not be issued to key employees whose duties at the Company assure them access to equivalent information.

10. Any right of repurchase on behalf of the Company in the event of a Participant’s Termination of Service shall be (a) at a purchase price that is not less than the Fair Market Value of the securities upon Termination of Service, and the right to repurchase shall be exercised for cash or cancellation of purchase money indebtedness for the shares within 90 days of Termination of Service (or in the case of securities issued upon exercise of Options after the date of Termination of Service, within 90 days after the date of the exercise), and the right shall terminate when the Company’s securities become publicly traded; or (b) at the original purchase price, provided that the right to repurchase at the original purchase price lapses at the rate of at least 20% of the shares per year over five years from the date the Option or Stock Purchase Right is granted (without respect to the date the Option or Stock Purchase Right was exercised or became exercisable) and the right to repurchase shall be exercised for cash or cancellation of purchase money indebtedness for the shares within 90 days of Termination of Service (or in the case of securities issued upon exercise of Options after the date of Termination of Service, within 90 days after the date of the exercise). In addition to the restrictions set forth in clauses (a) and (b), the securities held by an officer, director or consultant of the Company or a Related Company may be subject to additional or greater restrictions.

 

B-2


BOX, INC.

2006 STOCK INCENTIVE PLAN

STOCK OPTION GRANT NOTICE

Box, Inc. (the “ Company ”) hereby grants to Participant an Option (the “ Option ”) to purchase shares of the Company’s Common Stock. The Option is subject to all the terms and conditions set forth in this Stock Option Grant Notice (this “ Grant Notice ”) and in the Stock Option Agreement and the Company’s 2006 Stock Incentive Plan (the “ Plan ”), which are attached to and incorporated into this Grant Notice in their entirety.

 

Participant:    <<Optionee>>
Grant Date:    <<Grant_Date>>
Vesting Commencement Date:    <<VestDate>>
Number of Shares Subject to Option:    <<NoShares>>
Exercise Price (per Share):    <<Price>>
Option Expiration Date:    <<Expiration>> (subject to earlier termination in accordance with the terms of the Plan and the Stock Option Agreement)
Type of Option:    ¨ Incentive Stock Option *    ¨ Nonqualified Stock Option
Vesting and Exercisability Schedule:    <<Vesting_Schedule>>   

Additional Terms/Acknowledgement : The undersigned Participant acknowledges receipt of, and understands and agrees to, this Grant Notice, the Stock Option Agreement and the Plan. Participant further acknowledges that as of the Grant Date, this Grant Notice, the Stock Option Agreement and the Plan set forth the entire understanding between Participant and the Company regarding the Option and supersede all prior oral and written agreements on the subject [, with the exception of the following agreements:                     ] .

 

BOX, INC.:     PARTICIPANT:
By:  

 

   

 

Its:  

 

    Signature  
      Date:  

 

Attachments:     Address:  

 

1.      Stock Option Agreement

   

 

2.      2006 Stock Incentive Plan

    Taxpayer ID:                                                                                       

 

 

*   See Sections 3 and 4 of the Stock Option Agreement.


BOX, INC.

2006 STOCK INCENTIVE PLAN

STOCK OPTION AGREEMENT

Pursuant to your Stock Option Grant Notice (the “ Grant Notice ”) and this Stock Option Agreement, Box, Inc. has granted you an Option under its 2006 Stock Incentive Plan (the “ Plan ”) to purchase the number of shares of the Company’s Common Stock indicated in your Grant Notice (the “ Shares ”) at the exercise price indicated in your Grant Notice. Capitalized terms not explicitly defined in this Stock Option Agreement but defined in the Plan have the same definitions as in the Plan.

The details of the Option are as follows:

1. Vesting and Exercisability . Subject to the limitations contained herein, the Option will vest and become exercisable as provided in your Grant Notice, provided that vesting will cease upon your Termination of Service and the unvested portion of the Option will terminate.

2. Securities Law Compliance . Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, you may not exercise the Option unless the Shares issuable upon exercise are registered under the Securities Act or, if such Shares are not then so registered, the Company has determined that such exercise and issuance would be exempt from the registration requirements of the Securities Act. The exercise of the Option must also comply with other applicable laws and regulations governing the Option, and you may not exercise the Option if the Company determines that such exercise would not be in material compliance with such laws and regulations.

3. Incentive Stock Option Qualification . If so designated in your Grant Notice, all or a portion of the Option is intended to qualify as an Incentive Stock Option under federal income tax law, but the Company does not represent or guarantee that the Option qualifies as such.

If the Option has been designated as an Incentive Stock Option and the aggregate Fair Market Value (determined as of the grant date) of the shares of Common Stock subject to the portions of the Option and all other Incentive Stock Options you hold that first become exercisable during any calendar year exceeds $100,000, any excess portion will be treated as a Nonqualified Stock Option, unless the Internal Revenue Service changes the rules and regulations governing the $100,000 limit for Incentive Stock Options. A portion of the Option may be treated as a Nonqualified Stock Option if certain events cause exercisability of the Option to accelerate.

4. Notice of Disqualifying Disposition . To the extent the Option has been designated as an Incentive Stock Option, to obtain certain tax benefits afforded to Incentive Stock Options, you must hold the Shares issued upon the exercise of the Option for two years after the Grant Date and one year after the date of exercise. You may be subject to the alternative minimum tax at the time of exercise. You should obtain tax advice when exercising the Option and prior to the disposition of the Shares. By accepting the Option, you agree to promptly notify the Company if you dispose of any of the Shares within one year from the date you exercise all or part of the Option or within two years from the Grant Date.


5. Method of Exercise . You may exercise the Option by giving written notice to the Company, in form and substance satisfactory to the Company, which will state your election to exercise the Option and the number of Shares for which you are exercising the Option. The written notice must be accompanied by full payment of the exercise price for the number of Shares you are purchasing. You may make this payment in any combination of the following: (a) by cash; (b) by check acceptable to the Company; (c) if permitted by the Plan Administrator, by having shares of Common Stock that would otherwise be issued to you upon exercise of the Option withheld to pay the exercise price; (d) if permitted by the Plan Administrator, by using shares of Common Stock you have owned for at least six months; (e) if the Common Stock is registered under the Exchange Act and to the extent permitted by law, by instructing a broker to deliver to the Company the total payment required, all in accordance with the regulations of the Federal Reserve Board; or (f) by any other method permitted by the Plan Administrator.

6. Repurchase and First Refusal Rights . So long as the Common Stock is not registered under the Exchange Act, the Company may, in its sole discretion at the time of exercise, require you to sign a stock purchase agreement, in the form to be provided, pursuant to which you will grant to the Company certain repurchase and/or first refusal rights to purchase the Shares acquired by you upon exercise of the Option. Upon request to the Company, you may review a current form of this agreement prior to exercise of the Option.

7. Market Standoff . By exercising the Option you agree that the Shares will be subject to the market standoff restrictions on transfer set forth in the Plan.

8. Treatment Upon Termination of Employment or Service Relationship . The unvested portion of the Option will terminate automatically and without further notice immediately upon termination of your employment or service relationship with the Company or a Related Company for any reason (“ Termination of Service ”). You may exercise the vested portion of the Option as follows:

(a) General Rule . You must exercise the vested portion of the Option on or before the earlier of (i) three months after your Termination of Service and (ii) the Option Expiration Date;

(b) Retirement or Disability . If your employment or service relationship terminates due to Retirement or Disability, you must exercise the vested portion of the Option on or before the earlier of (i) one year after your Termination of Service and (ii) the Option Expiration Date.

(c) Death . If your employment or service relationship terminates due to your death, the vested portion of the Option must be exercised on or before the earlier of (i) one year after your Termination of Service and (ii) the Option Expiration Date. If you die after your Termination of Service but while the Option is still exercisable, the vested portion of the Option may be exercised until the earlier of (x) one year after the date of death and (y) the Option Expiration Date; and

(d) Cause . The vested portion of the Option will automatically expire at the time the Company first notifies you of your Termination of Service for Cause, unless the Plan

 

-2-


Administrator determines otherwise. If your employment or service relationship is suspended pending an investigation of whether you will be terminated for Cause, all your rights under the Option likewise will be suspended during the period of investigation. If any facts that would constitute termination for Cause are discovered after your Termination of Service, any Option you then hold may be immediately terminated by the Plan Administrator.

The Option must be exercised within three months after termination of employment for reasons other than death or Disability and one year after termination of employment due to Disability to qualify for the beneficial tax treatment afforded Incentive Stock Options.

It is your responsibility to be aware of the date the Option terminates.

9. Limited Transferability . During your lifetime only you can exercise the Option. The Option is not transferable except by will or by the applicable laws of descent and distribution. The Plan provides for exercise of the Option by a beneficiary designated on a Company-approved form or the personal representative of your estate. Notwithstanding the foregoing and to the extent permitted by Section 422 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, the Plan Administrator, in its sole discretion, may permit you to assign or transfer the Option, subject to such terms and conditions as specified by the Plan Administrator.

10. Withholding Taxes . As a condition to the exercise of any portion of an Option, you must make such arrangements as the Company may require for the satisfaction of any federal, state, local or foreign withholding tax obligations that may arise in connection with such exercise.

11. Option Not an Employment or Service Contract . Nothing in the Plan or any Award granted under the Plan will be deemed to constitute an employment contract or confer or be deemed to confer any right for you to continue in the employ of, or to continue any other relationship with, the Company or any Related Company or limit in any way the right of the Company or any Related Company to terminate your employment or other relationship at any time, with or without Cause.

12. No Right to Damages . You will have no right to bring a claim or to receive damages if you are required to exercise the vested portion of the Option within three months (one year in the case of Retirement, Disability or death) of your Termination of Service or if any portion of the Option is cancelled or expires unexercised. The loss of existing or potential profit in Awards will not constitute an element of damages in the event of your Termination of Service for any reason even if the termination is in violation of an obligation of the Company or a Related Company to you.

13. Binding Effect . This Agreement will inure to the benefit of the successors and assigns of the Company and be binding upon you and your heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns.

14. Section 409A Compliance . Notwithstanding any provision in the Plan to the contrary, the Plan Administrator may, at any time and without your consent, modify the terms of the Option as it determines appropriate to avoid the imposition of additional taxes under Section 409A of the Code.

 

-3-


[For non-US Residents only]:

15. Limitation on Rights; No Right to Future Grants; Extraordinary Item of Compensation . By entering into this Agreement and accepting the grant of the Option evidenced hereby, you acknowledge: (a) that the Plan is discretionary in nature and may be suspended or terminated by the Company at any time; (b) that the grant of the Option is a one-time benefit which does not create any contractual or other right to receive future grants of options, or benefits in lieu of options; (c) that all determinations with respect to any such future grants, including, but not limited to, the times when options will be granted, the number of shares subject to each option, the option price, and the time or times when each option will be exercisable, will be at the sole discretion of the Company; (d) that your participation in the Plan is voluntary; (e) that the value of the Option is an extraordinary item of compensation which is outside the scope of your employment contract, if any; (f) that the Option is not part of normal or expected compensation for purposes of calculating any severance, resignation, redundancy, end of service payments, bonuses, long-service awards, pension or retirement benefits or similar payments; (g) that the vesting of the Option ceases upon your Termination of Service for any reason except as may otherwise be explicitly provided in the Plan or this Agreement or otherwise permitted by the Plan Administrator; (h) that the future value of the Shares underlying the Option is unknown and cannot be predicted with certainty; and (i) that if the Shares underlying the Option do not increase in value, the Option will have no value.

16. Employee Data Privacy . By entering this Agreement, you (a) authorize the Company and your employer, if different, and any agent of the Company administering the Plan or providing Plan recordkeeping services, to disclose to the Company or any of its affiliates any information and data the Company requests in order to facilitate the grant of the Option and the administration of the Plan; (b) waive any data privacy rights you may have with respect to such information; and (c) authorize the Company and its agents to store and transmit such information in electronic form.

 

-4-


BOX, INC.

2006 STOCK INCENTIVE PLAN

EXERCISE NOTICE AND STOCK PURCHASE AGREEMENT

By your signature and the signature of the representative of Box, Inc. (the “ Company ”) below, you and the Company agree that you are purchasing shares of the Company’s Class A Common Stock subject to the terms and conditions of the Company’s 2006 Stock Incentive Plan (the “ Plan ”), the agreement evidencing the applicable Option (the “ Option Agreement ”) and this Exercise Notice and Stock Purchase Agreement (this “ Agreement ”). Capitalized terms that are not defined in this Agreement have the meanings given to them in the Plan.

 

Purchaser:      Employee Name
Address:     

Address

 

Address

Taxpayer I.D. number:       
Total number of shares for which Option is being exercised now (these shares are referred to below as “Shares”):       
Total exercise price for Shares:      Amount
(Note: If you are exercising more than one stock option under this Agreement, please complete Attachment A instead of completing the following four items):     
Option Grant Number:      Number
Option Grant Date      Date
Vesting Start Date      Date
Type of Option:     

¨   Incentive Stock Option

¨   Nonqualified Stock Option

Exercise price per share:      $                     
Total number of shares subject to Option:      Shares

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement on the date indicated below.

 

BOX, INC.         PARTICIPANT

By:

         

 

Its:

             Signature

Date:

          Date:      

 

  

 

     ¨ Check Box if Not Legally Married   

 

        PARTICIPANT’S SPOUSE
       

 

 

  

 

    

 

   Signature
        Print Name:   

 


BOX, INC.

2006 EQUITY INCENTIVE PLAN

STOCK PURCHASE AGREEMENT

1. Payment of Exercise Price

Prior to or concurrently with the delivery of this Agreement to the Company, you have delivered the exercise price for the Shares in accordance with the terms of the Plan and the Option Agreement.

2. Securities Law Compliance

2.1 You represent and warrant that you (a) have been furnished with a copy of the Plan and all information which you deem necessary to evaluate the merits and risks of the purchase of the Shares, (b) have had the opportunity to ask questions and receive answers concerning the information received about the Shares and the Company, and (c) have been given the opportunity to obtain any additional information you deem necessary to verify the accuracy of any information obtained concerning the Shares and the Company.

2.2 You hereby confirm that you have been informed that the Shares have not been registered under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “ Securities Act ”), or any state securities laws pursuant to exemptions from registration. You further confirm that you understand that the reliance by the Company on such exemptions is predicated in part on the truth and accuracy of the statements by you in this Agreement.

2.3 You hereby represent and warrant that you are purchasing the Shares for your own account, for investment purposes only, and not with a view towards the distribution or public offering of all or any part of the Shares.

2.4 You hereby confirm that you understand that because the Shares have not been registered under the Securities Act, you must continue to bear the economic risk of the investment for an indefinite period of time and the Shares cannot be sold unless the Shares are subsequently registered or an exemption from registration is available.

2.5 You hereby agree that you will in no event sell or distribute all or any part of the Shares only pursuant to the terms of this Agreement and if (a) there is an effective registration statement under the Securities Act and applicable state securities laws covering any such transaction involving the Shares or (b) the Company receives an opinion of your legal counsel (concurred in by legal counsel for the Company) stating that such transaction is exempt from registration or, in the Company’s sole discretion, the Company otherwise satisfies itself that such transaction is exempt from registration.

2.6 You hereby consent to the placing of a legend on your certificate(s) as set forth in Section 5 and to the placing of a stop-transfer order on the books of the Company and with any transfer agents against the Shares until the Shares may be legally resold or distributed.

2.7 You hereby confirm that you understand that at the present time Rule 144 of the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “ SEC ”) may not be relied on for the resale or distribution of the Shares by you. You understand that the Company has no obligation to you to register the Shares with the SEC and has not represented to you that it will so register the Shares.


2.8 You confirm that you have been advised, prior to your purchase of the Shares, that neither the offering of the Shares nor any offering materials have been reviewed by any administrator under the Securities Act or any other applicable securities act (the “ Acts ”) and that the Shares have not been registered under any of the Acts and therefore cannot be resold unless they are registered under the Acts or unless an exemption from such registration is available.

2.9 You hereby agree to indemnify the Company and hold it harmless from and against any loss, claim or liability, including attorneys’ fees or legal expenses, incurred by the Company as a result of any breach by you of, or any inaccuracy in, any representation, warranty or statement made by you in this Agreement or the breach by you of any terms or conditions of this Agreement.

3. Transfer Restrictions

3.1 Restrictions on Transfer . Shares will not be sold, transferred, assigned, pledged, encumbered or otherwise disposed of in contravention of the provisions of this Agreement. Except as otherwise provided in this Agreement, the Shares may not be sold, transferred, assigned, pledged, encumbered or otherwise disposed of without the Company’s prior written consent, which consent will not be unreasonably withheld. If the Company’ consents to such sale, transfer, assignment, pledge, encumbrance or other disposal of the Shares, you agree to (a) pay the Company a transfer processing fee of $3,500 per transaction (whereby transfers to separate transferees shall be deemed to be separate transactions); and (b) provide an opinion of your legal counsel and the counsel of the transferee (concurred in by legal counsel for the Company) stating that such transaction is exempt from registration under applicable securities laws or, in the Company’s sole discretion, the Company otherwise satisfies itself that such transaction is exempt from registration under applicable securities laws. Such restrictions on transfer, however, will not apply to a transfer to the Company in pledge as security for any purchase-money indebtedness incurred by you in connection with the acquisition of the Shares.

3.2 Transferee Obligations. Each person (other than the Company) to whom the Shares are transferred must, as a condition precedent to the validity of such transfer, acknowledge in writing to the Company that such person is bound by the provisions of this Agreement, to the same extent the Shares would be so subject if retained by you.

3.3 Market Standoff . In connection with any underwritten public offering by the Company of its equity securities pursuant to an effective registration statement filed under the Securities Act, including the Company’s initial public offering, you or any transferee (either being referred to herein as “you”) agree not to sell, make any short sale of, loan, hypothecate, pledge, assign, grant any option for the purchase of, or otherwise dispose or transfer for value or agree to engage in any of the foregoing transactions with respect to, any Shares without the prior written consent of the Company or its underwriters. Such limitations shall be in effect for such period of time as may be requested by the Company or its underwriters; provided, however, that in no event shall such period exceed (a) 180 days after the effective date of the registration statement for such public offering or (b) such longer period requested by the underwriter as is necessary to comply with regulatory restrictions on the publication of research reports (including, but not limited to, NYSE Rule 472 or NASD Conduct Rule 2711). This market standoff provision will be in effect no longer than two years after the effective date of the Company’s initial public offering.


In the event of any stock split, stock dividend, recapitalization, combination of shares, exchange of shares or other change affecting the Company’s outstanding Common Stock effected as a class without the Company’s receipt of consideration, any new, substituted or additional securities distributed with respect to the Shares shall be immediately subject to the provisions of this Section 3.3, to the same extent the Shares are at such time covered by such provisions.

In order to enforce the limitations of this Section 3.3, the Company may impose stop-transfer instructions with respect to the Shares until the end of the applicable standoff period.

3.4 Additional Condition for Significant Shareholders . If upon the purchase of Shares pursuant to this Agreement you will hold 1% of more of the Company’s outstanding shares of Common Stock, you must become a party to the Company’s Fifth Amended and Restated Right of First Refusal and Co-Sale Agreement dated as of October 5, 2011, or the current version of such agreement (the “ Co-Sale Agreement ”), as a “Founder” for purposes of the Co-Sale Agreement; provided however, that (a) the 120-day time period for the Right of First Refusal for the Shares pursuant to Section 4 of this Agreement will run concurrently with any right of first refusal under the Co-Sale Agreement; and (b) the Right of First Refusal for the Shares pursuant to Section 4 of this Agreement shall only apply to the Shares that are not purchased by the Company and/or the investors in the Company pursuant to the terms of the Co-Sale Agreement.

4. Company’s Right of First Refusal

Before any Shares held by you may be sold or otherwise transferred (including any assignment, pledge, encumbrance or other disposition of the Shares, but not a transfer to the Company in pledge as security for any purchase-money indebtedness incurred by you in connection with the acquisition of the Shares), the Company will have a right of first refusal to purchase the Shares on the terms and conditions set forth in this Section 4 (the “ Right of First Refusal ”). The Company shall have the right to assign all or any portion of its Right of First Refusal to any current stockholder of the Company, any other third party or any combination of any of the foregoing, in its sole discretion. Such Right of First Refusal will terminate on the initial registration of the Common Stock under Section 12(b) or 12(g) of the Exchange Act.

4.1 In the event you desire to accept a bona fide third-party offer for the sale or transfer of any or all of the Shares, you will promptly deliver to the Company a written notice (the “ Notice ”) stating the terms and conditions of any proposed sale or transfer, including (a) your bona fide intention to sell or otherwise transfer such Shares, (b) the name of each proposed purchaser or other transferee (the “ Proposed Transferee ”), (c) the number of Shares to be transferred to each Proposed Transferee, and (d) the bona fide cash price or other consideration for which you propose to transfer the Shares (the “ Offered Price ”). You will provide satisfactory proof that the disposition of such shares to such Proposed Transferee would not be in contravention of the provisions of Section 3 and you will offer to sell the Shares at the Offered Price to the Company or its assignee(s), as the case may be.

4.2 At any time within 120 days after receipt of the Notice, the Company or one or more of its assignees or both may, by giving written notice to you, elect to purchase all or any portion of the Shares proposed to be transferred to any one or more of the Proposed Transferees, at the purchase price determined in accordance with Section 4.3.

4.3 The purchase price for the Shares purchased under this Section 4 will be the Offered Price. If the Offered Price includes consideration other than cash, the cash equivalent value of the noncash consideration will be determined by the Board in good faith.


4.4 Payment of the purchase price will be made, in the discretion of the Plan Administrator, either (a) in cash (by check), by cancellation of all or a portion of any of your outstanding indebtedness to the Company or such assignee(s), or by any combination thereof, within 120 days after receipt of the Notice or (b) in the manner and at the time(s) set forth in the Notice.

4.5 If any of the Shares proposed in the Notice to be transferred to a given Proposed Transferee are not purchased by the Company and/or one or more of its assignees as provided in this Section 4, subject to the terms and conditions of Section 3, then you may sell or otherwise transfer such Shares to that Proposed Transferee at the Offered Price or at a higher price; provided that such sale or other transfer is consummated within 150 days after the date of the Notice; and provided, further, that any such sale or other transfer is effected in accordance with any applicable securities laws and the Proposed Transferee agrees in writing that the provisions of this Agreement, including without limitation, this Section 4 will continue to apply to the Shares in the hands of such Proposed Transferee. If the Shares described in the Notice are not transferred to the Proposed Transferee within such period, or if you propose to change the price or other terms to make them more favorable to the Proposed Transferee, a new Notice will be given to the Company, and the Company or its assignee will again be offered the Right of First Refusal before any Shares held by you may be sold or otherwise transferred.

5. Legends

You understand and agree that the Shares are subject to first refusal rights and other transfer restrictions, as set forth in this Agreement. You understand that the certificate(s) representing the Shares will bear legends in substantially the following forms:

“The securities represented by this certificate are subject to certain restrictions on public resale and transfer and first refusal rights held by the issuer and/or its assignee(s) and may not be sold, assigned, transferred, encumbered or in any way disposed of except as set forth in a stock purchase agreement between the issuer and the original purchaser of these shares, a copy of which may be obtained at the principal office of the issuer. Such transfer restrictions and first refusal rights are binding on transferees of these shares.”

“The securities represented by this certificate have not been registered under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “Act”), or under applicable state securities laws. These securities are subject to restrictions on transferability and resale and may not be transferred or resold except as permitted under the Act and applicable state securities laws, pursuant to registration or exemption therefrom. Investors should be aware that they may be required to bear the financial risks of this investment for an indefinite period of time. The issuer of these securities may require an opinion of counsel in form and substance satisfactory to the issuer to the effect that the proposed transfer or resale is in compliance with the Act and any applicable state securities laws.”

6. Stop-Transfer Notices; Book Entry Registration of Shares

6.1 You understand and agree that, in order to ensure compliance with the restrictions referred to in this Agreement, the Company may issue appropriate “stop-transfer” instructions to its transfer agent, if any, and that, if the Company transfers its own securities, it may make appropriate notations to the same effect in its own records. The Company will not be required to (a) transfer on its books any Shares that have been sold or transferred in violation of the provisions of this Agreement or (b) treat as the owner of the Shares, or otherwise accord voting, dividend or liquidation rights to, any transferee to whom the Shares have been transferred in contravention of this Agreement.


6.2 The Company may issue the Shares by registering the Shares in book entry form with the Company’s transfer agent in your name in which case the applicable restrictions will be noted in the records of the Company’s transfer agent in the book entry system.

7. Independent Tax Advice

You acknowledge that determining the actual tax consequences to you of exercising the Option or disposing of the Shares may be complicated. These tax consequences will depend, in part, on your specific situation and may also depend on the resolution of currently uncertain tax law, and other variables not within the control of the Company. You are aware that you should consult a competent and independent tax advisor for a full understanding of the specific tax consequences to you prior to exercising the Option or disposing of the Shares. Prior to exercising the Option, you either have consulted with a competent tax advisor independent of the Company to obtain tax advice concerning the exercise of the Option in light of your specific situation or have had the opportunity to consult with such a tax advisor but chose not to do so.

8. Withholding and Disposition of Shares

As described in the Option Agreement, you will make arrangements satisfactory to the Company for the payment of any federal, state, local or foreign withholding tax obligations that arise upon purchase of the Shares. If you are exercising an Incentive Stock Option, you agree to notify the Company if any Shares are disposed of within one year from the date hereof or two years from the Grant Date.

9. General Provisions

9.1 Assignment. The Company may assign its Right of First Refusal at any time, in whole or in part, whether or not such rights are then exercisable, to any person or entity selected by the Board, including, without limitation, one or more stockholders of the Company.

9.2 Notices . Any notice required in connection with (a) the Company’s first refusal rights or (b) the disposition of any Shares covered thereby will be given in writing and will be deemed effective upon personal delivery or upon deposit in the U.S. mail, registered or certified, postage prepaid and addressed to the party entitled to such notice at the address indicated in this Agreement or at such other address as such party may designate by 10 days’ advance written notice under this Section 9.2 to all other parties to this Agreement.

9.3 No Waiver . No waiver of any provision of this Agreement will be valid unless in writing and signed by the person against whom such waiver is sought to be enforced, nor will failure to enforce any right hereunder constitute a continuing waiver of the same or a waiver of any other right hereunder.

9.4 Cancellation of Shares . If the Company or its assignees will make available, at the time and place and in the amount and form provided in this Agreement, the consideration for the Shares to be purchased by the Company pursuant to the exercise of the Company’s first refusal rights in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement, then, from and after such time, you will no longer have any rights as a purchaser of such Shares (other than the right to receive payment of such consideration in accordance with this Agreement). Such Shares will be deemed purchased in accordance with the applicable provisions of this Agreement and the Company or its assignees will be deemed the owner and purchaser of such Shares, whether or not the certificates therefor have been delivered as required by this Agreement.


9.5 Purchaser Undertaking. You hereby agree to take whatever additional action and execute whatever additional documents the Company may deem necessary or advisable in order to carry out or effect one or more of the obligations or restrictions imposed on either you or the Shares pursuant to the express provisions of this Agreement.

9.6 Agreement Is Entire Contract . This Agreement constitutes the entire contract between the parties hereto with regard to the subject matter hereof. This Agreement is made pursuant to the provisions of the Plan and will in all respects be construed in conformity with the express terms and provisions of the Plan.

9.7 Successors and Assigns . The provisions of this Agreement will inure to the benefit of, and be binding on, the Company and its successors and assigns and you and your legal representatives, heirs, legatees, distributees, assigns and transferees by operation of law, whether or not any such person will have become a party to this Agreement and agreed in writing to join herein and be bound by the terms and conditions hereof.

9.8 No Employment or Service Contract . Nothing in this Agreement will affect in any manner whatsoever the right or power of the Company, or a Related Company, to terminate your employment or services on behalf of the Company, for any reason, with or without cause.

9.9 Stockholder of Record . You will be recorded as a stockholder of the Company and will have, subject to the provisions of this Agreement and the Plan, all the rights of a stockholder with respect to the Shares.

9.10 Counterparts . This Agreement may be executed in two or more counterparts, each of which will be deemed an original, but which, upon execution, will constitute one and the same instrument.

9.11 Governing Law . This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California.

[Signature pages follow]


BOX, INC.
By:                                                                                                  
Title:                                                                                              
Address:                                                                                         
                                                                                                         
Date:                                                                                                
                                                                                                         
Purchaser
                                                                                                         
Printed Name

By his or her signature below, your spouse, if you are legally married as of the date of your execution of this Agreement, acknowledges that he or she has read this Agreement and the Plan and is familiar with the terms and provisions of this Agreement and of the Plan, and agrees to be bound by all the terms and conditions of this Agreement and the Plan.

 

Dated:                                                                                             
                                                                                                         
Spouse’s Signature
                                                                                                         
Printed Name

By his or her signature below, you represent that you are not legally married as of the date of executing this Agreement.

 

Dated:                                                                                            
                                                                                                         
Purchaser’s Signature


ATTACHMENT A

(To be completed only if you are exercising more than one Option)

Please complete for each Option you are exercising.

 

Option Grant Date

  

Type of Option:

Incentive Stock Option (“ ISO ”)

Nonqualified Stock Option (“ NSO ”)
(please circle one)

  

Exercise Price

Per Share

  

Number of Shares

to be Exercised

   ISO/NSO    $   
   ISO/NSO    $   
   ISO/NSO    $   
   ISO/NSO    $   
   ISO/NSO    $   


RECEIPT FOR ISO EXERCISE

                                              hereby acknowledges receipt from                                                   (“ Purchaser ”) in payment for                      shares of Class A Common Stock of Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, of $                                  in the form of

 

  ¨ Cash

 

  ¨ Check (personal, cashier’s or bank certified)

 

  ¨                      shares of the Company’s Common Stock, fair market value $                      per share, held by the Purchaser

 

  ¨ Copy of irrevocable instructions to broker

 

  ¨ Other:                                                              

 

Exercise Date: 

      By:       

(Date Company receives both the executed Exercise Notice and payment)

     

Per share FMV on such date: $                                 

      For: Box, Inc.  


LOGO

RECEIPT FOR NSO EXERCISE

                                                  hereby acknowledges receipt from                                                   (“ Purchaser ”) in payment for                      shares of Class A Common Stock of Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, and applicable tax withholding, of $                          in the form of

 

  ¨ Cash

 

  ¨ Check (personal, cashier’s or bank certified)

 

  ¨                      shares of the Company’s Common Stock, fair market value $                      per share, withheld by the Company but otherwise issuable on exercise of an option

 

  ¨                      shares of the Company’s Common Stock, fair market value $                      per share, held by the Purchaser

 

  ¨ Copy of irrevocable instructions to broker

 

  ¨ Other:                                                                  

 

Exercise Date: 

      By:       

(Date Company receives both the executed Exercise Notice and payment)

     

Per share FMV on such date: $                                 

      For: Box, Inc.  


BOX, INC.

2006 STOCK INCENTIVE PLAN

STOCK AWARD NOTICE

Box, Inc. (the “ Company ”) hereby grants to you a Stock Award (the “ Award ”) for shares of the Company’s common stock under the Company’s 2006 Stock Incentive Plan (the “ Plan ”). The Award is subject to all the terms and conditions set forth in this Stock Award Notice (the “ Award Notice ”) and in the Stock Award Agreement and the Plan, which are attached to and incorporated into the Award Notice in their entirety.

 

Participant:  

 

 
Grant Date:  

 

 
Number of Shares Subject to the Award (the “ Shares ”):  

 

 
Fair Market Value Per Share on Grant Date:   $  
Purchase Price (per Share)   $  
Vesting Schedule:   [insert vesting schedule]  

Additional Terms/Acknowledgement : You acknowledge receipt of, and understand and agree to, the Award Notice, the Stock Award Agreement and the Plan. You further acknowledge that as of the Grant Date, the Award Notice, the Stock Award Agreement and the Plan set forth the entire understanding between you and the Company regarding the Award and supersede all prior oral and written agreements on the subject[, with the exception of the following agreements:                     ].

 

BOX, INC.     PARTICIPANT

 

   

 

By:  

 

    [Name]  

 

Title:  

 

    Taxpayer ID:                                                                                     
      Address:  

 

       

 

      ¨ Check Box if Not Legally Married
Attachments:     PARTICIPANT’S SPOUSE

1.      Stock Award Agreement

     

2.      2006 Stock Incentive Plan

   

 

      Signature
      Print Name:                                                                                  


BOX, INC.

2006 STOCK INCENTIVE PLAN

STOCK AWARD AGREEMENT

Pursuant to your Stock Award Notice (the “ Award Notice ”) and this Award Agreement (this “ Agreement ”), Box, Inc. (the “ Company ”) has granted you a Stock Award (the “ Award ”) under its 2006 Stock Incentive Plan (the “ Plan ”) for the number of shares of the Company’s Common Stock (the “ Shares ”) indicated in your Award Notice. Capitalized terms not defined in this Agreement but defined in the Plan have the same definitions as in the Plan.

The details of the Award are as follows:

 

  1. Vesting

[insert vesting schedule]

 

  2. Consideration for Award

[insert consideration amount]

 

  3. Securities Law Compliance

3.1 You represent and warrant that you (a) have been furnished with a copy of the Plan and all information which you deem necessary to evaluate the merits and risks of receipt of the Shares, (b) have had the opportunity to ask questions and receive answers concerning the information received about the Shares and the Company, and (c) have been given the opportunity to obtain any additional information you deem necessary to verify the accuracy of any information obtained concerning the Shares and the Company.

3.2 You hereby confirm that you have been informed that the Shares have not been registered under the Securities Act, or any state securities laws pursuant to exemptions from registration. You further confirm that you understand that the reliance by the Company on such exemptions is predicated in part on the truth and accuracy of the statements by you in this Agreement.

3.3 You hereby represent and warrant that you are receiving the Shares for your own account, for investment purposes only, and not with a view towards the distribution or public offering of all or any part of the Shares.

3.4 You hereby confirm that you understand that because the Shares have not been registered under the Securities Act, you must continue to bear the economic risk of the investment for an indefinite period of time and the Shares cannot be sold unless the Shares are subsequently registered or an exemption from registration is available.


3.5 You hereby agree that you will in no event sell or distribute all or any part of the Shares unless (a) there is an effective registration statement under the Securities Act and applicable state securities laws covering any such transaction involving the Shares or (b) the Company receives an opinion of your legal counsel (concurred in by legal counsel for the Company) stating that such transaction is exempt from registration or the Company otherwise satisfies itself that such transaction is exempt from registration. You understand that the Company has no obligation to you to register the Shares with the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “ SEC ”) and has not represented to you that it will so register the Shares.

3.6 You hereby consent to the placing of a legend on your certificate(s) as set forth in Section 6 and to the placing of a stop-transfer order on the books of the Company and with any transfer agents against the Shares until the Shares may be legally resold or distributed.

3.7 You hereby confirm that you understand that at the present time Rule 144 of the SEC may not be relied on for the resale or distribution of the Shares by you. You understand that the Company has no obligation to you to register the Shares with the SEC and has not represented to you that it will so register the Shares.

3.8 You hereby confirm that you have been advised, prior to your receipt of the Shares, that neither the offering of the Shares nor any offering materials have been reviewed by any administrator under the Securities Act or any other applicable securities act (the “ Acts ”) and that the Shares have not been registered under any of the Acts and therefore cannot be resold unless they are registered under the Acts or unless an exemption from such registration is available.

3.9 You hereby agree to indemnify the Company and hold it harmless from and against any loss, claim or liability, including attorneys’ fees or legal expenses, incurred by the Company as a result of any breach by you of, or any inaccuracy in, any representation, warranty or statement made by you in this Agreement or the breach by you of any terms or conditions of this Agreement.

 

  4. Transfer Restrictions

4.1 Restrictions on Transfer of Shares . The Shares may not be sold, transferred, assigned, pledged, encumbered or otherwise disposed of in contravention of the provisions of this Agreement. Except as otherwise provided in this Agreement, such restrictions on transfer, however, will not apply to (a) a gratuitous transfer of the Shares, provided, and only if, you obtain the Company’s prior written consent to such transfer, (b) a transfer of title to the Shares effected pursuant to your will or laws of intestate succession, or (c) a transfer to the Company in pledge as a security for any purchase-money indebtedness incurred by you in connection with the acquisition of the Shares.

4.2 Transferee Obligations . Each person (other than the Company) to whom the Shares are transferred by means of one of the permitted transfers specified in Section 4.1 must, as a condition precedent to the validity of such transfer, acknowledge in writing to the Company that such person is bound by the provisions of this Agreement, to the same extent the Shares would be so subject if retained by you.

 

-2-


4.3 Market Standoff . In connection with any underwritten public offering by the Company of its equity securities pursuant to an effective registration statement filed under the Securities Act, including the Company’s initial public offering, you, or any transferee, agree not to sell, make any short sale of, loan, hypothecate, pledge, grant any option for the purchase of, or otherwise dispose of or transfer for value or otherwise agree to engage in any of the foregoing transactions with respect to any Shares without the prior written consent of the Company or its underwriters. Such limitations will be in effect for such period of time as may be requested by the Company or such underwriters; provided, however, that in no event will such period exceed (a) 180 days after the effective date of the registration statement for such public offering or (b) such longer period requested by the underwriters as is necessary to comply with regulatory restrictions on the publication of research reports (including, but not limited to, NYSE Rule 472 or NASD Conduct Rule 2711). The limitations of this Section 4.3 will in all events terminate two years after the effective date of the Company’s initial public offering.

In the event of any stock split, stock dividend, recapitalization, combination of shares, exchange of shares or other change affecting the Company’s outstanding Common Stock effected as a class without the Company’s receipt of consideration, any new, substituted or additional securities distributed with respect to the Shares will be immediately subject to the provisions of this Section 4.3, to the same extent the Shares are at such time covered by such provisions.

In order to enforce the limitations of this Section 4.3, the Company may impose stop-transfer instructions with respect to the Shares until the end of the applicable standoff period.

 

  5. Right of First Refusal

5.1 Right of First Refusal . Before you may sell or otherwise transfer any of the Shares (including any assignment, pledge, encumbrance or other disposition of the Shares), the Company or its assignee will have an assignable right of first refusal to purchase the Shares on the terms and conditions set forth in this Section 5 (the “ Right of First Refusal ”). Such Right of First Refusal will terminate on the initial registration of the Company’s common stock under Section 12(b) or 12(g) of the Exchange Act.

5.2 Notice to the Company . In the event you desire to accept a bona fide third-party offer for the sale or transfer of any or all of the Shares, you will promptly deliver to the Company a written notice (the “ Notice ”) stating the terms and conditions of any proposed sale or transfer, including (a) your bona fide intention to sell or otherwise transfer such Shares, (b) the name of each proposed purchaser or other transferee (the “ Proposed Transferee ”), (c) the number of Shares to be transferred to each Proposed Transferee, and (d) the bona fide cash price or other consideration for which you propose to transfer the Shares (the “ Offered Price ”). You will provide satisfactory proof that the disposition of such shares to such Proposed Transferee would not be in contravention of the provisions of Section 4 and you will offer to sell the Shares at the Offered Price to the Company.

5.3 Exercise of Right of First Refusal . At any time within 30 days after receipt of the Notice, the Company or its assignee may, by giving written notice to you, elect to purchase all or any portion of the Shares proposed to be transferred to any one or more of the Proposed Transferees, at the purchase price determined in accordance with Section 5.4.

 

-3-


5.4 Purchase Price . The purchase price for the Shares purchased under this Section 5 will be the Offered Price. If the Offered Price includes consideration other than cash, the cash equivalent value of the noncash consideration will be determined by the Board of Directors of the Company in good faith.

5.5 Payment of Purchase Price . Payment of the purchase price will be made, in the discretion of the Plan Administrator, either (a) in cash (by check), by cancellation of all or a portion of any of your outstanding indebtedness to the Company or such assignee, or by any combination thereof, within 30 days after receipt of the Notice or (b) in the manner and at the time(s) set forth in the Notice.

5.6 Effect of Transfer; Right of First Refusal Continues . If any of the Shares proposed in the Notice to be transferred to a given Proposed Transferee are not purchased by the Company and/or its assignee as provided in this Section 5, then you may sell or otherwise transfer such Shares to that Proposed Transferee at the Offered Price or at a higher price; provided, that such sale or other transfer is consummated within 60 days after the date of the Notice, and provided further that any such sale or other transfer is effected in accordance with any applicable securities laws and the Proposed Transferee agrees in writing that the provisions of this Section 5 will continue to apply to the Shares in the hands of such Proposed Transferee. If the Shares described in the Notice are not transferred to the Proposed Transferee within such period, or if you propose to change the price or other terms to make them more favorable to the Proposed Transferee, a new Notice will be given to the Company, and the Company or its assignee will again be offered the Right of First Refusal before any Shares held by you may be sold or otherwise transferred.

 

  6. Legends

You understand and agree that the Shares are subject to first refusal rights as set forth in this Agreement. You understand that any certificate(s) representing the Shares will bear legends in substantially the following form:

“The securities represented by this certificate are subject to certain restrictions on public resale and transfer and first refusal rights held by the issuer and/or its assignee(s) and may not be sold, assigned, transferred, encumbered or in any way disposed of except as set forth in a stock award agreement between the issuer and the original purchaser of these shares, a copy of which may be obtained at the principal office of the issuer. Such transfer restrictions and first refusal rights are binding on transferees of these shares.”

“The securities represented by this certificate have not been registered under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “ Act ”), or under applicable state securities laws. These securities are subject to restrictions on transferability and resale and may not be transferred or resold except as permitted under the Act and applicable state securities laws, pursuant to registration or exemption therefrom. Investors should be aware that they may be required to bear the financial risks of this investment for an indefinite period of time. The issuer of these securities may require an opinion of counsel in form and substance satisfactory to the issuer to the effect that the proposed transfer or resale is in compliance with the Act and any applicable state securities laws.”

 

-4-


  7. Stop-Transfer Notices

You understand and agree that, in order to ensure compliance with the restrictions referred to in this Agreement, the Company may issue appropriate “stop-transfer” instructions to its transfer agent, if any, and that, if the Company transfers its own securities, it may make appropriate notations to the same effect in its own records. The Company will not be required to (a) transfer on its books any Shares that have been sold or transferred in violation of the provisions of this Agreement or (b) treat as the owner of the Shares, or otherwise accord voting, dividend or liquidation rights to, any transferee to whom the Shares have been transferred in contravention of this Agreement.

 

  8. Independent Tax Advice

You acknowledge that determining the actual tax consequences to you of receiving or disposing of the Shares may be complicated. These tax consequences will depend, in part, on your specific situation and may also depend on other variables not within the control of the Company. You are aware that you should consult a competent and independent tax advisor for a full understanding of the specific tax consequences to you of receiving or disposing of the Shares. Prior to executing the Award Notice, you either have consulted with a competent tax advisor independent of the Company to obtain tax advice concerning the receipt or disposition of the Shares in light of your specific situation or you have had the opportunity to consult with such a tax advisor but chose not to do so.

 

  9. General Provisions

9.1 Assignment . The Company may assign its first refusal rights at any time, whether or not such rights are then exercisable, to any person or entity selected by the Company’s Board of Directors, including, without limitation, one or more of the Company’s stockholders.

9.2 No Waiver . No waiver of any provision of this Agreement will be valid unless in writing and signed by the person against whom such waiver is sought to be enforced, nor will failure to enforce any right hereunder constitute a continuing waiver of the same or a waiver of any other right hereunder.

9.3 Cancellation of Shares . If the Company or its assignees exercises the Company’s first refusal rights in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement, then, from and after such time, the person from whom such Shares are to be sold will no longer have any rights as a recipient of such Shares, such Shares will be deemed purchased in accordance with the applicable provisions of this Agreement, and the Company or its assignees will be deemed the owner and recipient of such Shares, whether or not any certificates therefor have been delivered as required by this Agreement.

9.4 Undertaking . You hereby agree to take whatever additional action and execute whatever additional documents the Company may deem necessary or advisable in order to carry out or effect one or more of the obligations or restrictions imposed on either you or the Shares pursuant to the express provisions of this Agreement.

 

-5-


9.5 Agreement Is Entire Contract . This Agreement and the Award Notice constitute the entire contract between the parties hereto with regard to the subject matter hereof and supersede all prior oral and written agreements on the subject. This Agreement and the Award Notice are made pursuant to the provisions of the Plan and will in all respects be construed in conformity with the express terms and provisions of the Plan.

9.6 Successors and Assigns . The provisions of this Agreement will inure to the benefit of, and be binding on, the Company and its successors and assigns and you and your legal representatives, heirs, legatees, distributees, assigns and transferees by operation of law, whether or not any such person will have become a party to this Agreement and agreed in writing to join herein and be bound by the terms and conditions hereof.

9.7 No Employment or Service Contract . Nothing in this Agreement will affect in any manner whatsoever the right or power of the Company, or a Related Company, to terminate your employment or services on behalf of the Company, for any reason, with or without Cause.

9.8 Stockholder of Record . You will be recorded as a stockholder of the Company and will have, subject to the provisions of this Agreement and the Plan, all the rights of a stockholder with respect to the Shares.

9.9 Counterparts . The Award Notice may be executed in two or more counterparts, each of which will be deemed an original, but which, upon execution, will constitute one and the same instrument.

9.10 Governing Law . To the extent not otherwise governed by the laws of the United States, this Agreement will be construed and administered in accordance with and governed by the laws of the State of California without giving effect to principles of conflicts of law.

 

-6-

Exhibit 10.7

BOX, INC.

EXECUTIVE SEVERANCE AGREEMENT

This Executive Severance Agreement (“ Severance Agreement ”) is entered into as of the last date signed below (the “ Effective Date ”) by and between Box, Inc. (the “ Company ”) and [EXECUTIVE] (the “ Executive ”) (collectively, the “ Parties ”).

NOW, THEREFORE , for good and valuable consideration, the Parties agree as follows:

1. At-Will Employment . Executive and the Company agree that Executive’s employment with the Company constitutes “at-will” employment. Executive and the Company acknowledge that this employment relationship may be terminated at any time, upon written notice to the other party, with or without good cause or for any or no cause, at the option of either the Company or Executive. However, as described in this Severance Agreement, Executive may be entitled to severance benefits depending upon the circumstances of Executive’s termination of employment. Upon the termination of Executive’s employment with the Company for any reason, Executive will be entitled to payment of all accrued but unpaid vacation, expense reimbursements, and other benefits due to Executive through his termination date under any Company-provided or paid plans, policies, and arrangements. Executive agrees to resign from all positions that he holds with the Company immediately following the termination of his employment if the Board so requests.

2. Term of Agreement . This Severance Agreement will have an initial term of two years commencing on the Effective Date. On the second anniversary of the Effective Date, and on each annual anniversary of the Effective Date thereafter, this Severance Agreement automatically will renew for an additional one-year term unless the Company provides Executive with notice of non-renewal at least 90 days prior to the date of automatic renewal.

3. Severance .

(a) Termination Without Cause or Resignation for Good Reason in Connection with a Change of Control . If Executive’s employment is terminated by the Company without Cause or by Executive for Good Reason, and the termination is “in connection with a Change of Control”, then, subject to Section 4, Executive will receive: (i) continued payment of his or her base salary for a period of six (6) months from the date of termination (the “ Continuance Period ” if Executive is entitled to receive payments under this Section 3(a)), (ii) reimbursement for or payment of any applicable premiums to continue coverage for Executive and Executive’s eligible dependents under the Company’s Benefit Plans during the Continuance Period, and (iii) immediate vesting with respect to 50% of all of Executive’s unvested equity awards that were held by Executive immediately prior to his termination of employment.

(b) All Other Terminations . If Executive’s employment with the Company terminates for any other reason, then (i) all further vesting of Executive’s outstanding equity awards will terminate immediately, (ii) all payments of compensation by the Company to Executive hereunder will terminate immediately (except as to amounts already earned),


(iii) Executive will be paid all accrued but unpaid vacation, expense reimbursements and other benefits due to Executive through his termination date under any Company-provided or paid plans, policies, and arrangements, and (iv) Executive will be eligible for severance benefits only in accordance with the Company’s then established policies and practices.

(c) Sole Right to Severance . This Severance Agreement is intended to represent Executive’s sole entitlement to severance payments and benefits in connection with the termination of his employment. To the extent Executive is entitled to receive severance or similar payments and/or benefits under any other Company plan, program, agreement, policy, practice, or the like, severance payments and benefits due to Executive under this Severance Agreement will be so reduced.

4. Conditions to Receipt of Severance; No Duty to Mitigate .

(a) Separation Agreement and Release of Claims . The receipt of any severance pursuant to Section 3 will be subject to Executive signing and not revoking a separation agreement and release of claims in a form reasonably acceptable to the Company, and provided further that separation agreement and release of claims becomes effective no later than sixty (60) days following the termination date. No severance will be paid or provided until the separation agreement and release agreement becomes effective.

(b) Timing of Payments . Any severance payments or benefits under this Severance Agreement that would be considered Deferred Compensation Separation Benefits (as defined in Section 5) shall be paid on, or, in the case of installments, shall not commence until, the sixtieth (60 th ) day following Executive’s separation from service, or, if later, such time as required by Section 5. Any installment payments that would have been made to Executive during the sixty (60) day period immediately following the Executive’s separation from service but for the preceding sentence shall be paid to Executive on the sixtieth (60 th ) day following the Executive’s separation from service and the remaining payments shall be made as provided in this Severance Agreement.

(c) Non-Competition . In the event of a termination of Executive’s employment that otherwise would entitle Executive to the receipt of severance pursuant to Section 3, Executive agrees not to engage in Competition during the Continuance Period. If Executive engages in Competition within such period, all continuing payments and benefits to which Executive otherwise may be entitled pursuant to Section 3 will cease immediately.

(d) Nonsolicitation . In the event of a termination of Executive’s employment that otherwise would entitle Executive to the receipt of severance pursuant to Section 3, Executive agrees that, during the Continuance Period, Executive, directly or indirectly, whether as employee, owner, sole proprietor, partner, director, member, consultant, agent, founder, co-venturer or otherwise, will (i) not solicit, induce, or influence any person to modify his or her employment or consulting relationship with the Company (the “No-Inducement”), and (ii) not solicit business from any of the Company’s substantial customers and users (the “ No-Solicit ”). If Executive breaches the No-Inducement or the No-Solicit, all continuing payments and benefits to which Executive otherwise may be entitled pursuant to Section 3 will cease immediately.

 

2


(e) Nondisparagement . In the event of a termination of Executive’s employment that otherwise would entitle Executive to the receipt of severance pursuant to Section 3, Executive agrees to refrain from any disparagement, criticism, defamation, slander of the Company, its directors, or its employees, or tortious interference with the contracts and relationships of the Company. The foregoing restrictions will not apply to any statements that are made truthfully in response to a subpoena or other compulsory legal process. If Executive breaches the Nondisparagement provisions contained herein, all continuing payments and benefits to which Executive otherwise may be entitled pursuant to Section 3 will cease immediately.

(f) No Duty to Mitigate . Executive will not be required to mitigate the amount of any payment contemplated by this Severance Agreement, nor will any earnings that Executive may receive from any other source reduce any such payment.

5. Section 409A .

(a) Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Severance Agreement, no severance payable to Executive, if any, pursuant to this Severance Agreement, when considered together with any other severance payments or separation benefits that are considered deferred compensation under Section 409A of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “ Code ”) and the final regulations and any guidance promulgated thereunder (“ Section 409A ”) (together, the “ Deferred Compensation Separation Benefits ”) shall be payable until Executive has a “separation from service” within the meaning of Section 409A.

(b) Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Severance Agreement, if Executive is a “specified employee” within the meaning of Section 409A at the time of Executive’s termination (other than due to death), then the Deferred Compensation Separation Benefits that are payable within the first six (6) months following Executive’s separation from service shall become payable on the first payroll date that occurs on or after the date six (6) months and one (1) day following the date of Executive’s separation from service. All subsequent Deferred Compensation Separation Benefits, if any, shall be payable in accordance with the payment schedule applicable to each payment or benefit. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if Executive dies following Executive’s separation from service but prior to the six (6) month anniversary of the separation, then any payments delayed in accordance with this paragraph shall be payable in a lump sum as soon as administratively practicable after the date of Executive’s death and all other Deferred Compensation Separation Benefits shall be payable in accordance with the payment schedule applicable to each payment or benefit. Each payment and benefit payable under this Severance Agreement is intended to constitute separate payments for purposes of Section 1.409A-2(b)(2) of the Treasury Regulations.

(c) Any amount paid under this Severance Agreement that satisfies the requirements of the “short-term deferral” rule set forth in Section 1.409A-1(b)(4) of the Treasury Regulations shall not constitute Deferred Compensation Separation Benefits for purposes of clause (b) above.

(d) Any amount paid under this Severance Agreement that qualifies as a payment made as a result of an involuntary separation from service pursuant to Section 1.409A-1(b)(9)(iii) of the Treasury Regulations that does not exceed the Section 409A Limit (as defined below) shall not constitute Deferred Compensation Separation Benefits for purposes of clause (b) above.

 

3


(e) The foregoing provisions are intended to comply with the requirements of Section 409A so that none of the severance payments and benefits to be provided hereunder shall be subject to the additional tax imposed under Section 409A, and any ambiguities herein shall be interpreted to so comply. The Company and Executive agree to work together in good faith to consider amendments to this Severance Agreement and to take such reasonable actions which are necessary, appropriate or desirable to avoid imposition of any additional tax or income recognition prior to actual payment to Executive under Section 409A.

6. Definitions .

(a) Benefit Plans . For purposes of this Severance Agreement, “ Benefit Plans ” means plans, policies, or arrangements that the Company sponsors (or participates in) and that immediately prior to Executive’s termination of employment provide Executive and Executive’s eligible dependents with medical, dental, or vision benefits. Benefit Plans do not include any other type of benefit (including, but not by way of limitation, financial counseling, disability, life insurance, or retirement benefits). A requirement that the Company provide Executive and Executive’s eligible dependents with coverage under the Benefit Plans will not be satisfied unless the coverage is no less favorable than that provided to Executive and Executive’s eligible dependents immediately prior to Executive’s termination of employment. Subject to the immediately preceding sentence, the Company may, at its option, satisfy any requirement that the Company provide coverage under any Benefit Plan by instead providing coverage under a separate plan or plans providing coverage that is no less favorable or by paying Executive a lump-sum payment which is, on an after-tax basis, sufficient to provide Executive and Executive’s eligible dependents with equivalent coverage under a third party plan that is reasonably available to Executive and Executive’s eligible dependents.

(b) Cause . For purposes of this Severance Agreement, “ Cause ” means (i) Executive’s act of dishonesty or fraud in connection with the performance of his responsibilities to the Company with the intention that such act result in Executive’s substantial personal enrichment, (ii) Executive’s conviction of, or plea of nolo contendere to, a felony, (iii) Executive’s willful failure to perform his duties or responsibilities, or (iv) Executive’s violation or breach of Executive’s Employee Proprietary Information and Inventions Agreement; provided that if any of the foregoing events is capable of being cured, the Company will provide notice to Executive describing the nature of such event and Executive will thereafter have 30 days to cure such event.

(c) Change of Control . For purposes of this Severance Agreement, “ Change of Control ” means (i) a sale of all or substantially all of the Company’s assets, (ii) any merger, consolidation, or other business combination transaction of the Company with or into another corporation, entity, or person, other than a transaction in which the holders of at least a majority of the shares of voting capital stock of the Company outstanding immediately prior to such transaction continue to hold (either by such shares remaining outstanding or by their being converted into shares of voting capital stock of the surviving entity) a majority of the total voting power represented by the shares of voting capital stock of the Company (or the surviving entity)

 

4


outstanding immediately after such transaction, (iii) the direct or indirect acquisition (including by way of a tender or exchange offer) by any person, or persons acting as a group, of beneficial ownership or a right to acquire beneficial ownership of shares representing a majority of the voting power of the then outstanding shares of capital stock of the Company, (iv) the individuals who, at the beginning of any period of two consecutive years, constitute the Board (the “ Incumbent Directors ”) cease for any reason during such period to constitute at least a majority of the Board, unless the election or the nomination for election by the Company’s stockholders of a director first elected during such period was approved by the vote of at least a majority of the Incumbent Directors, whereupon such director also shall be classified as an Incumbent Director, or (v) a dissolution or liquidation of the Company; provided that, a transaction entered into primarily for financing purposes shall not constitute a Change of Control.

(d) Competition . For purposes of this Severance Agreement, Executive will be deemed to have engaged in “ Competition ” if Executive, without the consent of the Board, directly or indirectly provides services to (whether as an employee, consultant, agent, proprietor, principal, partner, stockholder, corporate officer, director, or otherwise), or has or obtains any ownership interest in or participates in the financing, operation, management, or control of, any person, firm, corporation, or business that competes with the Company. Executive having solely an ownership interest of less than 1% of any corporation shall not be Competition.

(e) Disability . For purposes of this Severance Agreement, Disability shall have the same defined meaning as in the Company’s long-term disability plan.

(f) Good Reason . For purposes of this Severance Agreement, with respect to a termination that occurs on or following the date three months preceding a Change of Control, “ Good Reason ” means the occurrence of any of the following without Executive’s express written consent: (i) a material reduction in Executive’s position or duties other than a reduction where Executive assumes similarly functional duties on a divisional basis following a Change of Control due to the Company becoming part of a larger entity, (ii) a material reduction in Executive’s Base Salary other than a one-time reduction of not more than 10% that also is applied to substantially all of the Company’s other executive officers, (iii) a material reduction in the aggregate level of benefits made available to Executive other than a reduction that also is applied to substantially all of the Company’s other executive officers, or (iv) relocation of Executive’s primary place of business for the performance of his duties to the Company to a location that is more than 35 miles from its prior location. In order for a resignation to qualify as for “Good Reason,” the Executive must provide the Company with written notice within sixty (60) days of the event that Executive believes constitutes “Good Reason” specifically identifying the acts or omissions constituting the grounds for Good Reason and the Company must have failed to cure such Good Reason condition within thirty (30) days following the date of such notice.

(g) In Connection with a Change of Control . For purposes of this Severance Agreement, a termination of Executive’s employment with the Company is “ in Connection with a Change of Control ” if Executive’s employment is terminated during the period beginning three months prior to a Change of Control (and where such termination is related to the impending change of Change of Control) and ending twelve months following a Change of Control (the “ Change of Control Period ”). Notwithstanding the foregoing, a resignation by Executive for Good Reason shall be in Connection with a Change of Control only if the event that constitutes Good Reason occurs during the Change of Control Period.

 

5


(h) Section 409A Limit . For purposes of this Severance Agreement, “ Section 409A Limit ” means the lesser of two (2) times: (i) Executive’s annualized compensation based upon the annual rate of pay paid to Executive during Executive’s taxable year preceding the taxable year of Executive’s termination of employment as determined under Treasury Regulation 1.409A-1(b)(9)(iii)(A)(1) and any Internal Revenue Service guidance issued with respect thereto; or (ii) the maximum amount that may be taken into account under a qualified plan pursuant to Section 401(a)(17) of the Internal Revenue Code for the year in which Executive’s employment is terminated.

7. Assignment . This Severance Agreement will be binding upon and inure to the benefit of (a) the heirs, executors, and legal representatives of Executive upon Executive’s death, and (b) any successor of the Company. Any such successor of the Company will be deemed substituted for the Company under the terms of this Severance Agreement for all purposes. For this purpose, “successor” means any person, firm, corporation, or other business entity which at any time, whether by purchase, merger, or otherwise, directly or indirectly acquires all or substantially all of the assets or business of the Company. None of the rights of Executive to receive any form of compensation payable pursuant to this Severance Agreement may be assigned or transferred except by will or the laws of descent and distribution. Any other attempted assignment, transfer, conveyance, or other disposition of Executive’s right to compensation or other benefits will be null and void.

8. Notices . All notices, requests, demands, and other communications called for hereunder will be in writing and will be deemed given (a) on the date of delivery if delivered personally, (b) one day after being sent by a well established commercial overnight service, or (c) four days after being mailed by registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, prepaid and addressed to the parties or their successors at the following addresses, or at such other addresses as the parties may later designate in writing:

If to the Company:

Box, Inc.

Attn: Chief Financial Officer

4440 El Camino Real

Los Altos, CA 94022

If to Executive:

at the last residential address known by the Company.

9. Severability . If any provision hereof becomes or is declared by a court of competent jurisdiction to be illegal, unenforceable, or void, this Severance Agreement will continue in full force and effect without said provision.

 

6


10. Arbitration . The Parties agree that any and all disputes arising out of the terms of this Severance Agreement, their interpretation, and any of the matters herein released, shall be subject to binding arbitration in San Mateo County before the American Arbitration Association under its National Rules for the Resolution of Employment Disputes, supplemented by the California Code of Civil Procedure. The Parties agree that the prevailing party in any arbitration shall be entitled to injunctive relief in any court of competent jurisdiction to enforce the arbitration award. The Parties hereby agree to waive their right to have any dispute between them resolved in a court of law by a judge or jury. This paragraph will not prevent either party from seeking injunctive relief (or any other provisional remedy) from any court having jurisdiction over the Parties and the subject matter of their dispute relating to Executive’s obligations under this Severance Agreement and the Confidentiality Agreement.

11. Integration . This Severance Agreement, together with the Employee Proprietary Information and Inventions Agreement between Executive and the Company (the “ Confidential Information Agreement ”) and Executive’s Company stock option and other equity agreements and Executive’s employment offer letter, represents the entire agreement and understanding between the parties as to the subject matter herein and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous agreements whether written or oral. No waiver, alteration, or modification of any of the provisions of this Severance Agreement will be binding unless in a writing that specifically references this Section and is signed by duly authorized representatives of the parties hereto.

12. Waiver of Breach . The waiver of a breach of any term or provision of this Severance Agreement, which must be in writing, will not operate as or be construed to be a waiver of any other previous or subsequent breach of this Severance Agreement.

13. Survival . The Confidential Information Agreement and Sections 4 and 9 will survive the termination of this Severance Agreement.

14. Headings . All captions and Section headings used in this Severance Agreement are for convenient reference only and do not form a part of this Severance Agreement.

15. Tax Withholding . All payments made pursuant to this Severance Agreement will be subject to withholding of applicable taxes.

16. Governing Law . This Severance Agreement will be governed by the laws of the State of California (with the exception of its conflict of laws provisions).

17. Acknowledgment . Executive acknowledges that he has had the opportunity to discuss this matter with and obtain advice from his private attorney, has had sufficient time to, and has carefully read and fully understands all the provisions of this Severance Agreement, and is knowingly and voluntarily entering into this Severance Agreement.

18. Counterparts . This Severance Agreement may be executed in counterparts, and each counterpart will have the same force and effect as an original and will constitute an effective, binding agreement on the part of each of the undersigned.

 

7


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, each of the parties has executed this Severance Agreement, in the case of the Company by a duly authorized officer, as of the day and year written below.

 

COMPANY:         
BOX, INC.         
By:  

     

      Date:   

 

  Aaron Levie, CEO         
EXECUTIVE:         

 

      Date:   

 

[Executive]         

 

8

Exhibit 10.13

OFFICE LEASE

BY AND BETWEEN

BEHRINGER HARVARD EL CAMINO REAL LP,

AS “Landlord”

AND

BOX.NET, INC.,

AS “Tenant”

4440 EL CAMINO BUILDING

LOS ALTOS, CALIFORNIA

THE DELIVERY OR NEGOTIATION OF THIS DOCUMENT BY LANDLORD OR ITS AGENTS OR ATTORNEYS SHALL NOT BE DEEMED AN OFFER BY LANDLORD TO ENTER INTO ANY TRANSACTION OR RELATIONSHIP WITH ANY PERSON OR PARTY. THIS DOCUMENT SHALL NOT BE BINDING UPON LANDLORD OR ANY AFFILIATE OF LANDLORD OR ITS OR THEIR AGENTS OR ATTORNEYS IN ANY RESPECT, NOR SHALL LANDLORD HAVE ANY OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES TO TENANT UNLESS AND UNTIL BOTH LANDLORD AND TENANT HAVE EXECUTED AND DELIVERED THIS DOCUMENT. UNTIL ANY SUCH FULL EXECUTION AND DELIVERY OF THIS DOCUMENT, EITHER LANDLORD OR TENANT MAY TERMINATE ALL NEGOTIATIONS WITH THE OTHER RELATING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER HEREOF, WITHOUT CAUSE AND FOR ANY REASON, WITHOUT RECOURSE OR LIABILITY.


TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

1.

  BASIC LEASE PROVISIONS      1   

2.

  PROJECT      3   

3.

  TERM      6   

4.

  RENT      9   

5.

  USE & OCCUPANCY      17   

6.

  SERVICES & UTILITIES      20   

7.

  REPAIRS      24   

8.

  ALTERATIONS      25   

9.

  INSURANCE      27   

10.

  DAMAGE OR DESTRUCTION      30   

11.

  INDEMNITY      31   

12.

  CONDEMNATION      33   

13.

  TENANT TRANSFERS      34   

14.

  LANDLORD TRANSFERS      38   

15.

  DEFAULT AND REMEDIES      40   

16.

  INTENTIONALLY OMITTED.      44   

17.

  HAZARDOUS MATERIALS      44   

18.

  EXTERIOR SIGNAGE.      48   

19.

  CONDOMINIUM REGIME.      49   

20.

  MISCELLANEOUS      50   


LIST OF EXHIBITS

 

EXHIBIT A – ILLUSTRATION OF PROJECT

EXHIBIT B – CONDOMINIUM DECLARATION

EXHIBIT C – RULES AND REGULATIONS

EXHIBIT D – PARKING

EXHIBIT E – NOTICE OF LEASE TERM

EXHIBIT F – WORK LETTER

EXHIBIT G – ROOF TOP RIGHTS

EXHIBIT H – LETTER OF CREDIT PROVISIONS

 

ii


INDEX OF DEFINED TERMS

 

Additional Insured

     27   

Additional Rent

     10   

Additional Services

     21   

Affiliates

     33   

Alterations

     25   

Amortization Rate

     15   

Base Building

     4   

Base Rent

     1   

Billing Addresses

     2   

Brokers

     3   

Building

     1   

Building Standard

     5   

Building Structure

     4   

Claims

     31   

Code

     34   

Commencement Date

     6   

Condominium

     3   

Condominium Common Areas

     4   

Condominium Declaration

     10   

Condominium Plan

     3   

Construction Allowance

     3   

control

     21   

Cost-Saving Expenses

     12   

Design Problem

     25   

Draft

     G-5   

Draw Event

     G-7   

Encumbrance

     38   

Estimated Additional Rent

     15   

Execution Date

     1   

Executive Order

     19   

Expenses

     11   

Expiration Date

     6   

Force Majeure

     44   

Generator Equipment

     23   

Government Mandated Expenses

     12   

Holdover

     9   

HVAC

     20   

Interruption Estimate

     30   

Landlord

     38   

Landlord Default

     27   

Landlord’s Broker

     3   

Late Charge

     17   

Lease

     1   

Leasehold Improvements

     4   

Letter of Credit

     G-5   

LOC Amount

     G-5   

Mechanical Systems

     4   

Month

     6   

NLT

     6   

Notice Addresses

     2   

OFAC

     19   

Outside Areas

     4   

Parking

     3   

Parking Garage

     3   

Patio/Courtyard Area

     4   

Permitted Transferee

     35   

Premises

     1   

Project

     3   

Reconciliation Statement

     15   

Rent

     17   

Repair Estimate

     30   

RSF

     1   

Security Deposit

     1   

Standard Services

     20   

Successor Landlord

     39   

Taking

     33   

Taxes

     10   

Telecommunication Services

     22   

Tenant

     1   

Tenant Affiliates

     23   

Tenant Default

     25   

Tenant’s Broker

     3   

Tenant’s Personal Property

     5   

Tenant’s Share

     2   

Tenant’s Wiring

     22   

Term

     6   

Transfer

     34   

Use

     1   

Well-Being Expenses

     12   
 

 

iii


OFFICE LEASE

Landlord and Tenant enter into this Office Lease (“Lease”) as of the Execution Date on the following terms, covenants, conditions and provisions:

 

1. BASIC LEASE PROVISIONS

1.1 Basic Lease Definitions. In this Lease, the following defined terms have the meanings indicated.

 

(a)    Execution Date:    June 16, 2011.
(b)    Landlord:    BEHRINGER HARVARD EL CAMINO REAL LP , a Delaware limited partnership.
(c)    Tenant:    BOX.NET, INC. , a Delaware corporation.
(d)    Premises:    All of the interior area (except as set forth in Section 2.6(b), below) of the building known as the 4440 El Camino Building located on the Land and having an address of 4440 El Camino Real, Los Altos, California. The Building is depicted on EXHIBIT A attached hereto.
(e)    RSF of Premises    For purposes of this Lease, the Premises are deemed to contain 96,562 rentable square feet (“RSF”). There is no right to remeasure.
(f)    Use:    General administrative non-governmental office use and any other legally permitted use consistent therewith including, but not limited to, computer and development and computer laboratory use.
(g)    Term:    Seven (7) years (See §3.2 below).
(h)    Commencement Date:    See §3.2 below.
(i)    Base Rent:    The following amounts payable in accordance with Article 4:

 

Months    Monthly Base Rent Rate per RSF    Monthly Base Rent

1 through 12

   $3.00    $289,686.00

13 through 24

   $3.09    $298,376.58

25 through 36

   $3.18    $307,327.88

37 through 48

   $3.28    $316,547.71

49 through 60

   $3.38    $326,044.15

61 through 72

   $3.48    $335,825.47

73 through 84

   $3.58    $345,900.23


(j)    Tenant’s Share:    100%.
(k)    Target Delivery Date    June 30, 2011
(l)    Credit Enhancement:    Letter of Credit in the amount of $1,800,000.00, which amount is subject to periodic reduction as set forth in EXHIBIT H .
(m)    Notice Address:    For each party, the following address(es):
     To Landlord    To Tenant     
  

Behringer Harvard El Camino Real LP

15601 Dallas Parkway, Suite 600

Addison, Texas 75001

Attn: Lease Administration

 

with a copy to:

 

Behringer Harvard El Camino Real LP

c/o Property Manager

950 W. Maude Ave.

Sunnyvale, California 94085

 

with a copy of notices of default to:

 

Behringer Harvard REIT I, Inc.

15601 Dallas Parkway, Suite 600

Addison, Texas 75001

Attn: Chief Legal Officer

  

Before the Commencement Date:

 

Box.Net, Inc.

220 Portage Ave.

Palo Alto, California 94306

Attn: Dylan Smith, CFO

 

With a separate copy at the same address to:

Greg Strickland, VP Business Operations

 

After the Commencement Date:

 

Box.Net, Inc.

4440 El Camino Real

Los Altos, California 94022

Attn: Dylan Smith, CFO

 

With a separate copy at the same address to:

Greg Strickland, VP Business Operations

(n)    Billing Address:    For each party, the following address:

 

2


     For Landlord    For Tenant     
  

Behringer Harvard El Camino Real LP

c/o JP Morgan Chase

PO Box 974865

Dallas, Texas 75397-4865

  

Before the Commencement Date:

 

Box.Net, Inc.

220 Portage Ave.

Palo Alto, California 94306

Attn: Greg Strickland, VP Business Operations

 

After the Commencement Date:

 

Box.Net, Inc.

4440 El Camino Real

Los Altos, California 94022

Attn: Greg Strickland, VP Business Operations

(o)    Brokers:    CBRE (“Landlord’s Broker”), whose right to a commission to be paid by Landlord is subject to a separate written agreement with Landlord; and Cornish & Carey Newmark Knight Frank (“Tenant’s Broker”), whose right to a commission to be paid by Landlord is subject to a separate written agreement with Landlord.
(p)    Parking :    See EXHIBIT D .
(q)   

Construction

Allowance:

   $20.00 per RSF of the Premises. See EXHIBIT F .

 

2. PROJECT

2.1 Project . The “Project” means and includes, collectively, the parcel of land described as “Unit 1” in that certain “Condominium Plan” (herein so called), Parcel 1 of Parcel Map 734, at Pages 26 and 27, Los Altos-El Camino Commercial Condominium, Los Altos, California, filed in the City of Los Altos, County of Santa Clara, State of California, which condominium plan was recorded on November 29, 2000 under instrument number 15475773 in the office of the county recorder of Santa Clara County, California (the condominium regime established by the Condominium Plan and the Condominium Declaration (hereinafter defined) being herein referred to as the “Condominium”), together with (i) the Building and all other improvements located thereon, (iii) the multilevel underground parking garage included in Unit 1 (including the extension thereof into and below the surface of Unit 2 of the Condominium, as described in the Condominium Plan) (the “Parking Garage”), (iii) the Outside Areas (as defined below), (iv) the Condominium Common Areas (as defined below) and all easements benefitting Unit 1, and (v) the Patio/Courtyard Area (as defined below). The Project (including an elevation illustration detailing the Parking Garage) is attached hereto as EXHIBIT A .

 

3


2.2 Base Building . “Base Building” means the Building Structure and Mechanical Systems, collectively, defined as follows:

 

  (a) Building Structure . “Building Structure” means the foundations, floor/ceiling slabs, roofs, exterior walls, exterior glass and mullions, columns, beams, shafts (including elevator shafts), stairs, stairwells, elevators, Building mechanical, electrical and telephone closets, Outside Areas, public areas, and any other structural components in the Building. The Building Structure excludes the Leasehold Improvements (and similar improvements to other premises) and the Mechanical Systems.

 

  (b) Mechanical Systems . “Mechanical Systems” means, without limitation, the mechanical, electronic, physical or informational systems generally serving the Building or Outside Areas, including the sprinkler, plumbing, heating, ventilating, air conditioning, lighting, communications, drainage, sewage, waste disposal, vertical transportation, fire/life safety and security systems, if any.

2.3 Outside Areas . “Outside Areas” means and includes the portion of the surface area of Unit 1 not covered by the Building (including, without limitation, surface parking, driveways, ramps, walkways and landscaped areas, plus the Patio/Courtyard Area.

2.4 Condominium Common Areas . “Condominium Common Areas” means the area of the Condominium depicted as the “common area” under the Condominium Plan and as shown on EXHIBIT B .

2.5 Patio/Courtyard Area . The “Patio/Courtyard Area” is the area immediately to the rear of the Building and depicted as such on EXHIBIT A hereto and located on Unit 2 of the Condominium.

2.6 Leasehold Improvements . The Premises includes the Leasehold Improvements and excludes certain areas, facilities and systems, as follows:

 

  (a)

Leasehold Improvements . “Leasehold Improvements” means all non-structural improvements in the Premises or exclusively serving the Premises, and any structural improvements to the Building made to accommodate Tenant’s particular use of the Premises. The Leasehold Improvements may exist in the Premises as of the Execution Date, or be installed by Landlord or Tenant under this Lease at the cost of either party. The Leasehold Improvements include: (1) interior walls and partitions (including those surrounding structural columns entirely or partly within the Premises); (2) the interior one-half of walls that separate the Premises from adjacent areas designated for leasing; (3) the interior drywall on exterior structural walls, and walls that separate the Premises from the Outside Areas; (4) stairways and stairwells

 

4


  connecting parts of the Premises on different floors, except those required for emergency exiting; (5) the frames, casements, doors, windows and openings installed in or on the improvements described in (1-4), or that provide entry/exit to/from the Premises; (6) all hardware, fixtures, cabinetry, railings, paneling, woodwork and finishes in the Premises or that are installed in or on the improvements described in (1-5); (7) if any part of the Premises is on the ground floor, the ground floor exterior windows (including mullions, frames and glass); (8) integrated ceiling systems (including grid, panels and lighting); (9) carpeting and other floor finishes; (10) kitchen, rest room, lavatory or other similar facilities that exclusively serve the Premises (including plumbing fixtures, toilets, sinks and built-in appliances); (11), the elevator lobby, corridors and restrooms located in the Building; and (12) the sprinkler, plumbing, heating, ventilating, air conditioning, lighting, communications, security, drainage, sewage, waste disposal, vertical transportation, fire/life safety, and other mechanical, electronic, physical or informational systems that exclusively serve the Premises.

 

  (b) Exclusions from the Premises . The Premises does not include: (1) the roof of the Building and any areas above the finished ceiling or integrated ceiling systems, or below the finished floor coverings that are not part of the Leasehold Improvements, (2) rooms for Mechanical Systems or connection of telecommunications equipment, (3) vertical transportation shafts, (4) vertical or horizontal shafts, risers, chases, flues or ducts, (5) elevator banks; provided, however, except with respect to the roof which shall be governed by the terms of EXHIBIT G , Tenant shall have reasonable access to the areas described in subsections (1)-(5) above for purposes of installing and maintaining Tenant’s Wiring, the Tenant Improvements and Alterations, as well as for purposes of performing any maintenance and repair required of Tenant hereunder.

2.7 Building Standard . “Building Standard” means the minimum or exclusive type, brand, quality or quantity of materials Landlord designates for use in the Building from time to time.

2.8 Tenant’s Personal Property . “Tenant’s Personal Property” means any FF&E (as defined in Section 8(f) of EXHIBIT F ) and those trade fixtures, furnishings, equipment, work product, inventory, stock-in-trade and other personal property of Tenant that are not permanently affixed to the Project in a way that they become a part of the Project and will not, if removed, impair the value of the Leasehold Improvements that Tenant is required to deliver to Landlord at the end of the Term under §3.3.

2.9 FF&E . Tenant shall maintain any FF&E in good condition and repair. Tenant shall not remove any FF&E from the Premises without the prior written consent of Landlord. Upon the expiration or termination of this Lease, the FF&E will belong to Landlord and Tenant shall leave the FF&E in place in the Premises.

 

5


3. TERM

3.1 Demise . Landlord hereby leases to Tenant, and Tenant hereby leases from Landlord, the Premises for the Term and subject to the terms of this Lease

3.2 Term . The “Term” means the period that begins on the Commencement Date and ends on the Expiration Date, subject to renewal, extension or earlier termination as may be further provided in this Lease or otherwise agreed to by Landlord and Tenant in writing. “Month” means a full calendar month of the Term.

 

  (a) Commencement Date . “Commencement Date” means the date that is ninety (90) days after the Delivery Date. The “Delivery Date” means the date that is the later of the date upon which Landlord delivers the Premises to Tenant in the Delivery Condition or the Target Delivery Date. “Delivery Condition” means broom clean and with the Leasehold Improvements existing as of the Delivery Date, the Building Structure and all Mechanical Systems and the Generator (hereinafter defined) in good working order and condition. Landlord shall endeavor to deliver the Premises to Tenant by the Target Delivery Date. If Landlord fails to deliver possession of the Premises to Tenant by the Target Delivery Date, such failure will not constitute a default of this Lease or grounds for termination of this Lease, and Tenant agrees to accept possession of the Premises when same are delivered by Landlord in the Delivery Condition. During the period commencing upon the mutual execution and delivery of this Lease and ending on the Delivery Date, Tenant may occupy the Premises solely for space planning. During the period beginning on the Delivery Date and ending on the Commencement Date, Tenant may occupy the Premises not only for space planning but also for planning for and performing the Tenant Improvements, moving into the Premises, and at Tenant’s option, conducting its customary business activities. Occupancy of the Premises during such periods shall be subject to compliance by Tenant with all terms and provisions of this Lease, other than those terms and provisions requiring the payment of Base Rent and (except as set forth in Section 3.2(d), below) those terms and provisions requiring the payment of Additional Rent.

 

  (b) Expiration Date . “Expiration Date” means the last day of the Month in which the seventh (7 th ) anniversary of the Commencement Date occurs; provided, however, that if the Commencement Date is the first (1 st ) day of a Month, then the Expiration Date will be the day immediately preceding the seventh (7 th ) anniversary of the Commencement Date.

 

  (c) Confirmation of Term . Landlord shall notify Tenant of the Commencement Date using a Notice of Lease Term (“NLT”) in the form attached to this Lease as EXHIBIT E . Tenant shall execute and deliver to Landlord the NLT within ten (10) business days after its receipt, but Tenant’s failure to do so will not reduce Tenant’s obligations or Landlord’s rights under this Lease.

 

6


  (d) Conduct of Business Prior to Commencement Date . At Tenant’s sole option but with three (3) Business Days prior written notice to Landlord, Tenant may conduct its customary business activities in all or any part of the Premises during the period prior to the Commencement Date (“Early Occupancy Period”), provided that occupancy of the Premises during any Early Occupancy Period shall be subject to compliance by Tenant during such period with all terms and provisions of this Lease, including without limitation those provisions requiring the payment of Additional Rent, but excluding those provisions requiring payment of Base Rent. Tenant’s obligation to pay Additional Rent prior to the Commencement Date arising from this Section 3.2(d) shall be determined on a floor by floor basis (i.e. if Tenant operates its business prior to the Commencement Date on only one floor, then the Additional Rent payable by Tenant shall be 33.33% of the Additional Rent allocable to the Building).

 

  (e) Payoff of Loan ; Option .

(i) Landlord hereby represents and warrants to Tenant that there are no deeds of trust, mortgages, or other voluntary financing liens affecting the Project other than a deed of trust in favor of Credit Suisse First Boston Capital LLC (“Lender”).

(ii) Landlord has informed Tenant that Landlord intends to pay, in full, the loan evidenced by the above-referenced deed of trust (the “Loan”). On or before July 11, 2011, or such later date upon which the parties may agree in writing (the “Deadline”), Landlord shall deliver to Tenant (1) a written certification to Tenant executed by Landlord which references this Section 3.2(e) of the Lease and certifies that Landlord has wired to the Lender sufficient funds to pay off the Loan (the “Payoff Certification”), and (2) a copy of the payoff quote/letter which Landlord receives from the Lender as well as a copy of the wire confirmation (with fed reference number) confirming the wire of the payoff funds to Lender (the “Payoff Documentation”) (the provision of the Payoff Certification and the Payoff Documentation to Tenant being referred to herein collectively as the “Payoff Requirements”). Landlord agrees to use commercially reasonable efforts to pay off the Loan and satisfy the Payoff Requirements on or before the Deadline. If Landlord fails to satisfy the Payoff Requirements on or before the Deadline, said failure shall not constitute a default under the Lease, but Tenant in its sole and absolute discretion may terminate and cancel this Lease. The option to terminate this Lease set forth in this Section 3.2(e) shall be Tenant’s sole and exclusive recourse for Landlord’s failure to satisfy the Payoff Requirements. This option to terminate the Lease shall be exercisable by Tenant only by delivery of written notice of such termination to Landlord on or before the date which is five (5) business days after the Deadline (but in any event prior to the satisfaction of the Payoff Requirements), whereupon this Lease shall be deemed cancelled and terminated effective as of the day of delivery of the termination notice.

 

7


(iii) If this Lease is terminated pursuant to the provisions of this Section 3.2(e), then Landlord shall reimburse Tenant for Tenant’s Transaction Costs in connection with this Lease. “Transaction Costs” means the following costs to the extent actually incurred by Tenant in connection with the negotiation of this Lease and preparing the Premises for Tenant’s initial occupancy: reasonable legal fees, space planning and design fees, architectural and engineering fees, hard and soft construction costs and permitting fees. Such payment shall be made on or before ten (10) business days following the later of (i) the termination of this Lease, or (ii) Tenant’s delivery to Landlord of an invoice for such amounts (with a detailed calculation of such amounts and reasonable back-up documentation). Landlord’s failure to make such payment when required shall constitute a default under the Lease entitling Tenant to exercise the remedies therefor set forth in the Lease. This Section 3.2(e)(iii) shall survive any termination of this Lease.

3.3 Acceptance of Premises . Subject to the Delivery Condition, Tenant will accept possession of the Premises on the Delivery Date in its “ AS IS ” condition and “ WITH ALL FAULTS ”. Notwithstanding, Landlord warrants the good working order and condition of the Leasehold Improvements existing as of the Delivery Date, the Building Structure, the Mechanical Systems and the Generator until 120 days after Tenant first occupies all or any portion of the Premises for purposes of conducting business, (provided that in any event the 120 day warranty period commences no later than the ninetieth (90 th ) day following the Commencement Date) subject to maintenance, repairs or replacement required by the negligence, misuse or misconduct of Tenant. In the event Tenant notifies Landlord of any noncompliance with said warranty during the 120 day warranty period, then as Tenant’s sole and exclusive remedy for such noncompliance, Landlord shall promptly undertake to complete any required repairs or replacements identified in Tenant’s notice and such repairs or replacements shall be expeditiously completed at Landlord’s sole cost and expense, without reimbursement by Tenant. Otherwise, Landlord does not make and Tenant does not rely upon any representation or warranty of any kind, express or implied, with respect to the condition of the Premises (including habitability or fitness for any particular purpose of the Premises). TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, LANDLORD HEREBY DISCLAIMS, AND TENANT WAIVES THE BENEFIT OF, ANY AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF HABITABILITY AND FITNESS OR SUITABILITY FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE .

Landlord represents that to Landlord’s actual knowledge, it has delivered to Tenant true, correct and complete copies of the most current survey and the title policy in its possession relating to the status of title to the Project and that certain Phase I prepared by AEI Consultants, and to Landlord’s actual knowledge without investigation, there has been no change to the condition of title or the existence of any hazardous or toxic materials at or under the Project from and after the dates referenced in such documents. For purposes of this paragraph, the term “Landlord’s actual knowledge” shall be deemed to mean and be limited to the current actual knowledge of the Designated Knowledge Person (as defined below) and the current property manager, at the time of execution of this Lease and not any implied, imputed, or constructive knowledge of said individuals or of Landlord or any

 

8


parties related to or comprising Landlord and without any independent investigation or inquiry having been made or any implied duty to investigate or make any inquiries; it being understood and agreed that such individuals shall have no personal liability in any manner whatsoever hereunder or otherwise related to the transactions contemplated hereby. “Designated Knowledge Person” means Rob Thomas.

3.4 Holdover . If Tenant keeps possession of the Premises after the end of the Term (a “Holdover”) without Landlord’s prior written consent (which may be withheld in its sole and absolute discretion), then in addition to the remedies available elsewhere under this Lease or by applicable law, Tenant will be a tenant at sufferance and must comply with all of Tenant’s obligations under this Lease, except that during the Holdover Tenant will pay all Additional Rent plus one hundred fifty percent (150%) of the monthly Base Rent last payable under this Lease. Tenant shall indemnify and defend Landlord from and against all claims and damages, both consequential and direct, that Landlord suffers due to Tenant’s failure to return possession of the Premises to Landlord at the end of the Term. Except as provided herein, Landlord’s deposit of Tenant’s Holdover payment will not constitute Landlord’s consent to a Holdover, or create or renew any tenancy.

3.5 Condition on Expiration . By the end of the Term, Tenant will return possession of the Premises to Landlord vacant, free of Tenant’s Personal Property (except for any FF&E, which Tenant shall leave in the Premises), in broom-clean condition, and with all Leasehold Improvements in the same condition received (excepting ordinary wear and tear) or in such better condition as Tenant may have put the same (excepting ordinary wear and tear), except that Tenant will remove Tenant’s Wiring and those Leasehold Improvements and Alterations (as such terms are defined herein) that, when approved by Landlord, were required to be removed at the end of the Term. If Tenant fails to return possession of the Premises to Landlord in this condition, Tenant shall reimburse Landlord for the costs, including Landlord’s standard administration fee of seven percent (7%) (“Standard Administration Fee”), incurred to put the Premises in the condition required under this §3.5. Tenant’s Personal Property left behind in the Premises after the end of the Term will be considered abandoned and Landlord may move, store, retain or dispose of these items at Tenant’s cost, including Landlord’s Standard Administration Fee. Notwithstanding, Tenant shall in no event be required to (i) remove any alterations or improvements existing in the Premises on the Delivery Date or any of the Tenant Improvements except for non-Building Standard Tenant Improvements designated in writing for removal by Landlord at the time it approved the Final CDs noting such Tenant Improvements or (ii) any improvements for which Landlord’s consent has been secured and which comprise any usual office improvements for a general, standard office use such as standard gypsum board, partitions, typical office ceiling grids and tiles, typical office lighting panels, typical office doors and carpeting, standard break rooms and lunchrooms.

 

4. RENT

4.1 Base Rent . Tenant shall prepay one (1) Month’s installment of Base Rent upon the mutual execution and delivery of this Lease, to be applied against Base Rent first due under this Lease. During the Term, Tenant shall pay all other Base Rent in advance, in monthly installments, on the first (1 st ) day of each Month. Base Rent for any partial Month will be prorated.

 

9


The Base Rent payments shall be abated for the first six (6) months of the Term (the “Abatement Period”). To illustrate, if the Commencement Date is September 28, 2011, then the Abatement Period will commence on the Commencement Date and end on March 27, 2012. If the Abatement Period does not end on the last day of a Month, then on the day following the end of the Abatement Period, Tenant shall make a prorated Base Rent payment for the remainder of such Month. If a monetary Default under the Lease by Tenant occurs after the Delivery Date, then (i) if the Abatement Period has not expired or terminated, the Abatement Period shall immediately terminate and Tenant shall pay full Base Rent commencing on the Commencement Date, if the Commencement Date has not occurred, or immediately commence payment of full Base Rent if the Commencement Date has already occurred, and (ii) if Landlord terminates the Lease or Tenant’s possession of the Premises due to such Default, Tenant shall pay to Landlord upon demand, for loss of the bargain and not as a penalty, the then unamortized portion of the total of all abated Base Rent, which shall be computed over the period beginning with month seven (7) of the initial Term and ending on the original Expiration Date and with interest at ten percent (10%) per annum.

4.2 Additional Rent . Tenant’s obligation to pay Taxes and Expenses under this §4.2 is referred to in this Lease as “Additional Rent.”

 

  (a) Taxes . For each calendar year during the Term (which for purposes of this Section 4.2 may be deemed to include a portion of the Early Occupancy Period as provided in Section 3.2(d) above), Tenant shall pay Landlord in the manner described herein the Tenant’s Share of Taxes paid or payable by Landlord for that calendar year. “Taxes” means all taxes and assessments of every kind and nature that Landlord shall pay or become obligated to pay in respect of a calendar year or portion thereof during the Term which shall include, without limitation, the following: (1) real and personal property taxes and assessments (including ad valorem and special assessments) levied on the Project and Landlord’s personal property used in connection with the Project; (2) taxes on rents or other income derived from the Project; (3) capital and place-of-business taxes; (4) taxes, assessments or fees in lieu of the taxes described in (1-3); (5) Any assessments or impositions charged or imposed against Landlord or Unit 1 under the declaration of covenants, restrictions and easements for the Los Alto-El Camino office/hotel commercial condominium recorded under as instrument 15475774 on November 29, 2000 in the office of the recorder of Santa Clara County, California (as such may be amended, the “Condominium Declaration” [Unit 1 of the Condominium being the “Office Unit” as defined in the Condominium Declaration]), provided however any such assessments or impositions which are specifically allocated to any repair, replacement or improvement which would ordinarily be treated as a capital expenses shall be amortized, and (6) the reasonable costs incurred to reduce the taxes described in (1-5). Notwithstanding the foregoing, taxes excludes (A) net income taxes and taxes paid under §4.3 and (B) fines, costs or penalties incurred as a result and to the extent of a violation by Landlord of applicable laws or the Condominium Declaration or Landlord’s failure to timely pay any taxes or assessments on the Project.

 

10


Tenant, at Tenant’s sole cost, will have the right to seek a reduction in the assessed valuation of the Premises as reflected in the Project’s real property taxes. Landlord will not be required to join in any proceeding or contest brought by Tenant, unless the provisions of any applicable laws require that the proceeding or contest be brought by or in the name of Landlord as owner of the Premises. If required by law, Landlord will join in the proceeding or contest as long as Landlord is not required to bear any cost or incur any liability therefor (unless Tenant agrees in writing to reimburse Landlord or indemnify and hold harmless Landlord for such liability, as the case may be, in which event any such reimbursable costs shall be paid to Landlord within thirty (30) days following Landlord’s written demand together with an itemized statement of costs incurred by Landlord therefor). Any proceeding or contest will be conducted at Tenant’s sole cost and expense unless Landlord receives a reduction in assessed value. If Landlord receives a rebate of sums paid as real property taxes applicable to the Property, Landlord will reimburse Tenant its reasonable cost incurred up to the amount of the payment or benefit received by Landlord (but subtracting from such reimbursement the amount of Tenant’s Share of any unreimbursed costs and expenses actually incurred by Landlord in such appeal). After the effective date of any reduction in value (and during the period that such reduction shall apply (which may include periods before a reduction in assessed value is received)), Tenant shall be liable for Tenant’s Share of such real property taxes based on such reduced valuation.

 

  (b) Expenses . For each calendar year during the Term, Tenant shall pay Landlord in the manner described herein the Tenant’s Share of the Expenses paid or incurred by Landlord for that calendar year. “Expenses” means the total costs incurred by Landlord to operate, manage, administer, equip, secure, protect, repair, replace, refurbish, clean, maintain, decorate and inspect the Project, including a market fee to manage the Project of not less than three percent (3%) of the gross revenue of the Project.

 

  (1) Expenses include, without limitation:

 

  (A) Standard Services provided under §6.1;

 

  (B) Repairs and maintenance performed under §7.2;

 

  (C) Insurance maintained under §9.2 (including deductibles paid);

 

  (D) Wages, salaries and benefits of personnel at or below the level of the Building’s manager, to the extent they render services to the Project;

 

11


  (E) Costs of operating the Project management office (including reasonable rent);

 

  (F) Cost operating, maintaining and repairing the Parking Garage and other parking facilities at the Project;

 

  (G) Amortization installments of costs required to be capitalized and incurred to:

 

  (i) Comply with Laws, but only to the extent such compliance relates to Laws which are amended, become effective, or are interpreted or enforced differently after the Execution Date (“Government Mandated Expenses”);

 

  (ii) Reduce other Expenses or the rate of increase in other Expenses ( “Cost-Saving Expenses”); or

 

  (iii) Improve or maintain the safety, structural or mechanical integrity of the Building, health or access of Project occupants, and otherwise maintain the quality, appearance, or integrity of the Project (“Well-Being Expenses”); and.

 

  (H) Expenses Landlord incurs under the Condominium Declaration as the owner of the Office Unit thereunder except to the extent included in Taxes.

 

  (2) Expenses exclude:

 

  (A) Taxes;

 

  (B) Mortgage payments (principal and interest), ground lease rent, and costs of financing or refinancing the Building;

 

  (C) Commissions, advertising costs, attorney’s fees and costs of improvements in connection with leasing space in the Building;

 

  (D) Costs reimbursed by insurance proceeds, warranties or guarantees, or by tenants of the Building (other than as Additional Rent) or any other third party;

 

  (E) Depreciation;

 

  (F) Except for the costs identified in §4.2(b)(1)(G), costs customarily capitalized under sound real estate accounting and management principles, consistently applied;

 

12


  (G) Collection costs and legal fees paid in disputes with tenants;

 

  (H) Intentionally omitted;

 

  (I) Installments of costs amortized under subsection (c) of this §4.2;

 

  (J) Costs of performing additional services to or for tenants to any extent that such services exceed those provided by Landlord to Tenant without charge hereunder;

 

  (K) Amounts payable by Landlord for damages or which constitute a fine, interest, or penalty, including interest or penalties for any late payments of operating costs;

 

  (L) Costs representing an amount paid for services or materials to an affiliate of Landlord to any extent such amount exceeds the amount that would be paid for such services or materials at the then existing market rates to a person or entity that is not an affiliate of Landlord;

 

  (M) Bad debt loss, rent loss, or reserves for bad debts or rent loss;

 

  (N) Fines, costs or penalties incurred as a result and to the extent of a violation by Landlord of any applicable laws or the Condominium Declaration;

 

  (O) Any fines, penalties or interest resulting from the gross negligence or willful misconduct of Landlord or its agents, employees or contractors;

 

  (P) Costs incurred by Landlord for the repair of damage to the Building, to the extent that Landlord is reimbursed for such costs by insurance proceeds, contractor warranties, guarantees, judgments or other third party sources;

 

  (Q) Reserves not spent by Landlord by the end of the calendar year for which Expenses are paid;

 

  (R) Costs incurred by Landlord in connection with the correction of latent defects in the original construction of the Project or with performing any warranty obligations of Landlord under Section 3.3 above;

 

  (S) Any cost or expense incurred to remove, clean, abate or remediate Hazardous Materials existing as of the Execution Date in or about the Project which were installed or deposited in violation of laws applicable on the Execution Date, except to the extent such removal, cleaning, abatement or remediation is related to the general repair and maintenance of the Project, such as cleaning up automotive oil that leaked onto the paved parking area;

 

13


  (T) The cost of alterations, improvements or replacements installed in or on the Project for the purpose of complying with any laws in effect (and as interpreted and enforced) on the Execution Date, provided that if any portion of the Project that was in compliance with all applicable laws on the Execution Date of this Lease becomes out of compliance due to normal wear and tear, the cost of bringing such portion of the Project into compliance shall be included in Expenses unless otherwise excluded pursuant to the terms hereof; and

 

  (U) Costs to operate the business of the partnership or entity which constitutes the Landlord, as the same are distinguished from the costs of operation of the Project. Costs to operate the business of the partnership or entity which constitutes the Landlord include costs of partnership accounting and legal matters related to the operation of the partnership business (as opposed to the ownership and management of the Project), costs of defending any lawsuits with any mortgagee (except as the actions of the Tenant may be in issue), costs, including, without limitation, points, commissions and legal fees, of selling, syndicating, financing, mortgaging or hypothecating any of the Landlord’s interest in the Project, costs incurred in connection with any disputes between Landlord and its employees or between Landlord and Project management, Landlord’s general overhead and administrative expenses not related to the Project, and wages, salaries benefits, and compensation paid or given to executives, shareholders, directors or partners of Landlord or any principal or partner of the entity from time to time comprising Landlord (provided, however, the foregoing shall in no event apply to salaries of persons engaged as part of the property management staff for the Project).

 

  (c) Amortization and Accounting Principles.

 

  (1) Each item of Government Mandated Expenses and Well-Being Expenses will be fully amortized in equal annual installments, with interest on the principal balance at the Amortization Rate, over the number of years that Landlord reasonably projects the item of Expenses will be productive for its intended use, without replacement, but properly repaired and maintained.

 

  (2) Each item of Cost-Saving Expenses will be fully amortized in equal annual installments, with interest on the principal balance at the Amortization Rate, over the number of years that Landlord reasonably estimates for the present value of the projected savings in Expenses (discounted at the Amortization Rate) to equal the cost.

 

14


  (3) Any item of Expenses of significant cost that is not required to be capitalized but is unexpected or does not typically recur may, in Landlord’s discretion, be amortized in equal annual installments, with interest on the principal balance at the Amortization Rate, over a number of years determined by Landlord.

 

  (4) “Amortization Rate” means the prime rate of Citibank, N.A. (or a comparable financial institution selected by Landlord), plus three percent (3%).

 

  (5) Landlord will otherwise use sound real estate accounting and management principles, consistently applied, to determine Additional Rent.

 

  (d) Estimates and Payments . Each calendar year, Landlord will reasonably estimate and advise Tenant in writing of Additional Rent that may be payable with respect to such calendar year. Tenant will pay the estimated Additional Rent in advance, in monthly installments, on the first day of each month, until the estimate is revised by Landlord. Landlord may reasonably revise its estimate during a calendar year and the monthly installments after the revision will be paid based on the revised estimate. The aggregate estimates of Additional Rent paid by Tenant in a calendar year is the “Estimated Additional Rent.” Without limiting Landlord’s other rights hereunder and at law, Additional Rent not paid by the due date shall be subject to the Late Charge provisions set forth in §4.5 below.

 

  (e) Settlement . Within one hundred eighty (180) days following the end of each calendar year that Additional Rent is payable, Landlord will give Tenant a statement of the actual Additional Rent for the calendar year (“Reconciliation Statement”). If the actual Additional Rent exceeds the Estimated Additional Rent for the calendar year, then Tenant shall pay the underpayment to Landlord in a lump sum as Rent within thirty (30) days after receipt of the Reconciliation Statement. If the Estimated Additional Rent paid by Tenant exceeds the actual Additional Rent for the calendar year, then Landlord shall credit the overpayment against Additional Rent or, to the extent no other Rent is due, returned to Tenant. Landlord’s and Tenant’s obligations under this §4.2(e) survive the end of the Term. Landlord may correct any statement within twelve (12) months after it is initially issued, but may not further correct it thereafter (and Tenant’s right to audit as set forth below shall arise at such time for the corrected item only).

 

  (f)

Dispute of Additional Rent . The Reconciliation Statement is conclusive, binds Tenant, and Tenant waives all rights to contest the statement, except for items of Additional Rent to which Tenant objects by written notice to Landlord given within ninety (90) days after Tenant’s receipt of the Reconciliation Statement; however, Tenant’s objection will not relieve Tenant from its obligation to pay Additional Rent

 

15


  pending resolution of any objection. If Tenant timely objects to the Reconciliation Statement in any respect, Tenant and Landlord shall have thirty (30) days after Landlord’s receipt of Tenant’s questions to amicably resolve them. If Tenant timely objects to Landlord’s Reconciliation Statement and such objections are not amicably settled between Landlord and Tenant within such thirty (30) period, Tenant, at its expense, shall have sixty (60) days from the end of such thirty (30) day period to audit Landlord’s books and records relating to Additional Rent for all or any part of the immediately preceding calendar year. Any audit by Tenant must be performed within such period by a reputable independent certified public accountant experienced in auditing office building operating expenses and engaged by Tenant on a non-contingency fee basis. Tenant shall provide Landlord with a copy of such audit upon completion. Landlord shall cooperate with the Tenant in connection with such audit and shall make available its books and records relating to Additional Rent for the previous calendar year upon not less than ten (10) business days notice, during regular business hours, and at the location where Landlord regularly keeps its books and records for the Project. Under no circumstances will Tenant be permitted to review or audit income tax records of Landlord or similar financial records of Landlord as a business entity. Tenant recognizes that Landlord’s books and records are confidential records and Tenant agrees not to disclose same or the results of its audit to any third party (other than Landlord) except to its directors, officers, employees, affiliates, subsidiaries, partners, lenders, insurers, auditors, agents, accountants, attorneys, financial advisors, or to any parties required in response to summonses or subpoenas, or to any regulator, organization of regulators or self-regulatory organization, or as required by applicable law or in connection with any proceeding between Landlord and Tenant pertaining to same. Neither Tenant nor its auditor shall be permitted to take from Landlord’s office any of Landlord’s books and records without Landlord’s consent. In the event Tenant’s audit reflects that Landlord has overcharged Tenant for Additional Rent for the preceding calendar year, and Landlord does not in good faith dispute such audit, Landlord shall credit the amount of such overcharge to future payments of Additional Rent to the extent of such overcharge or, if no such payments will be due, promptly reimburse Tenant for such overcharge. If such audit reveals that Landlord has undercharged Tenant for Additional Rent, Tenant shall promptly pay Landlord the amount of such undercharge within thirty (30) days after written demand by Landlord. The expense of Tenant’s audit shall be borne by Tenant unless the agreed results of such audit determine that Additional Rent charged to Tenant by Landlord for the period in question was more than five percent (5%) in excess of the actual Additional Rent chargeable to Tenant as determined by the audit, in which case the actual and reasonable expense of the audit shall be reimbursed by Landlord up to the lesser of (i) $2,500.00, or (ii) the actual amount of the overcharge. Landlord will not under any circumstances be required to retain or preserve records of Expenses and Additional Rent payable by Tenant for more than twenty-four (24) months after the end of the calendar year to which they relate. Any disputes by Landlord of the results or conclusion of Tenant’s audit will not be conclusive without agreement of Tenant and each party shall have all rights and remedies available under law with respect to such disputed audit.

 

16


4.3 Other Taxes . Subject to the other terms of this Lease, upon demand, Tenant will reimburse Landlord for taxes paid by Landlord on (a) Tenant’s Personal Property, (b) Rent, (c) Tenant’s occupancy of the Premises, or (d) this Lease. If Tenant cannot lawfully reimburse Landlord for these taxes, then to the extent not prohibited by applicable law, the Base Rent will be increased to yield to Landlord the same amount after these taxes were imposed as Landlord would have received before these taxes were imposed.

4.4 Terms of Payment . “Rent” means all amounts payable by Tenant under this Lease and the Exhibits, including, without limitation, Base Rent, Additional Rent, and charges for any Additional Services (as defined in §6.2). If a time for payment of an item of Rent is not specified in this Lease, then Tenant will pay such item of Rent within thirty (30) days after receipt of Landlord’s statement or invoice. Unless otherwise provided in this Lease, Tenant shall pay Rent without notice, demand, deduction, abatement or setoff, in lawful U.S. currency, at Landlord’s Billing Address. Neither Landlord’s failure to send an invoice nor Tenant’s failure to receive an invoice for Base Rent (and installments of Estimated Additional Rent) will relieve Tenant of its obligation to timely pay Base Rent (and installments of Estimated Additional Rent). Each partial payment by Tenant shall be deemed a payment on account; and, no endorsement or statement on any check or any accompanying letter shall constitute an accord and satisfaction, or affect Landlord’s right to collect the full amount due. No payment by Tenant to Landlord will be deemed to extend the Term or render any notice, pending suit or judgment ineffective. By notice to the other, each party may change its Billing Address.

4.5 Late Payment . If Landlord does not receive any item of Rent when due, including, without limitation, Base Rent, Additional Rent, and charges for any Additional Services, then Tenant shall pay Landlord a “Late Charge” of five percent (5%) of the overdue amount. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary set forth above, any such Late Charge shall not be payable with respect to the first such delinquent item of Rent during each calendar year during the Term (provided that such delinquent item of Rent is actually received by Landlord no later than ten (10) days after its due date), it being understood that said Late Charge shall apply to the second and any subsequent delinquent payment of Rent during each calendar year during the Term. Tenant agrees that the Late Charge is not a penalty, and will compensate Landlord for costs not contemplated under this Lease that are impracticable or extremely difficult to fix. Landlord’s acceptance of a Late Charge does not waive any Tenant default arising from such late payment.

 

5. USE & OCCUPANCY

5.1 Use . Tenant shall use and occupy the Premises only for the Use. Landlord does not represent or warrant that the Project is suitable for the conduct of Tenant’s particular business or that the Use is permitted under Laws (hereinafter defined). In no event shall Tenant use the Premises or permit the Premises to be used for any use which would require any increase to the number of parking spaces within Unit 1. Tenant shall procure at its sole expense any certificates of occupancy and permits and licenses required for the transaction of business in the Premises for the Use; provided that the failure to obtain same shall not delay the occurrence of the Commencement Date or any obligations of Tenant hereunder.

 

17


5.2 Compliance with Laws and Directives .

 

  (a) Tenant’s Compliance . Subject to the remaining terms of this Lease, Tenant shall comply at Tenant’s expense with all directives of Landlord’s insurers and all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, regulations and permits and restrictions and easements of record including, without limitation, the Condominium Declaration (collectively “Laws”) concerning or pertaining to:

 

  (1) The Leasehold Improvements and any Alterations,

 

  (2) Tenant’s use or occupancy of the Premises, the Outside Areas, the Condominium Common Areas and the Parking Garage,

 

  (3) Tenant’s employer/employee obligations,

 

  (4) A condition created by Tenant,

 

  (5) Tenant’s or its invitees’ failure to comply with this Lease, or

 

  (6) The negligence of Tenant, its agents, contractors, employees, servants, invitees, vendors, licensees or Tenant’s Affiliates.

Notwithstanding the foregoing or anything else in this Lease to the contrary, in no event shall Tenant have any liability or responsibility for any alteration, change or addition to the Premises or the Project which was or will be installed or constructed for the primary purpose of complying with any law, regulation, ordinance or order of any public agency, unless such alteration, change or addition is (i) required because of Tenant’s particular manner of use of the Premises (as opposed to general office use) or any alterations made by Tenant, or (ii) is a permitted Expense as set forth in Section 4.2(b).

 

  (b) Landlord’s Compliance . Subject to the remaining terms of this Lease, Landlord shall comply at Landlord’s cost with all directives of Landlord’s insurers or Laws concerning the Project other than those that are Tenant’s obligation under §5.2(a). The costs of compliance under this §5.2(b) will be included in Expenses to the extent allowed under §4.2.

5.3 Occupancy . Tenant shall not interfere with Building services. Tenant shall not make or continue any nuisance, including any objectionable odor, noise, fire hazard, vibration, or wireless or electromagnetic transmission. Tenant will not maintain any Leasehold Improvements or use the Premises or the Outside Areas in a way that increases the cost of insurance required under §9.2, or requires insurance in addition to the coverage required under §9.2 or under the Condominium Declaration.

 

18


5.4 Use of Outside Areas . The Outside Areas are not a part of the Premises. However, during the Term, and subject to the provisions of this Lease, Tenant shall have the exclusive right to use all portions of the Outside Areas subject to easements and restrictions of record, including as set forth in the Condominium Declaration. Tenant shall be entitled to place chairs and tables in the Patio/Courtyard Area which are of first class quality subject to Landlord’s advance approval thereof which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed. Subject to the restrictions hereinafter set forth, Tenant and its employees shall be entitled to use the Patio/Courtyard Area solely for purposes of eating food from the cafeteria or other food service provider situated in the Building and immediately adjacent to the Patio/Courtyard Area and for social gatherings. Tenant agrees not to create or generate in or from the Patio/Courtyard Area unreasonably loud noises at any time taking into consideration the hotel use of Unit 2 of the Condominium, or any significant noise whatsoever prior to 10:00 A.M. or after 8:00 P.M. Monday through Sunday. Tenant shall keep the Patio/Courtyard Area in a clean and trash free sanitary condition, with all garbage removed therefrom and all chairs and tables therein kept in good and safe condition and repair.

5.5 Use of Condominium Common Areas . Tenant shall have the non-exclusive right to use the Condominium Common Areas in common with the owner of Unit 2 and its tenants, subtenants, guests and other occupants of improvements from time to time existing on or being part of Unit 2 and their respective employees, agents, and other invitees and, further, subject to the Condominium Declaration.

5.6 Parking . During the Term, and notwithstanding that such are not part of the Premises, Tenant shall have the exclusive right to use all surface level parking areas within the Outside Areas and the Parking Garage subject, however, to EXHIBIT D hereto.

5.7 Prohibited Persons and Transactions . Tenant represents and warrants to Landlord that (a) Tenant is currently in compliance with and shall at all times during the Term (including any extension thereof) remain in compliance with the regulations of the Office of Foreign Asset Control (the “OFAC”) of the Department of the Treasury (including those named on the OFAC’s Specially Designated and Blocked Persons List) and any statute, executive order (including the September 24, 2001, Executive Order No. 13224 Blocking Property and Prohibiting Transactions with Persons Who Commit, Threaten to Commit or Support Terrorism (the “Executive Order”)), or other governmental action relating thereto; and (b) Tenant is not, and will not be, a person with whom Landlord is restricted from doing business under the Uniting and Strengthening America by Providing Appropriate Tools Required to Intercept and Obstruct Terrorism Act of 2001 (USA Patriot Act), H.R. 3152, Public Law 107-56 and the Executive Order and regulations promulgated thereunder and including persons and entities named on the OFAC Specially Designated Nations and Blocked Persons List.

 

19


6. SERVICES & UTILITIES

6.1 Landlord’s Standard Services .

 

  (a) Standard Services Defined . “Standard Services” means:

 

  (1) Heating, ventilation and air-conditioning (“HVAC”) from 8:00 am to 8:00 pm, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays recognized by financial institutions in California (“Business Hours”) as reasonably required to comfortably use and occupy the Premises;

 

  (2) Maintenance and repair/replacement of the Base Building;

 

  (3) Subject to Building rules and regulations, Landlord’s security procedures (if any), events of emergency, fire or other casualties and other events beyond Landlord’s control, access to the Premises (by at least 1 passenger elevator if not on the ground floor) 24 hours per day, 7 days per week, 52 weeks per year. Subject to the foregoing, Tenant’s access to the Premises may be more limited during other than Business Hours due to more restrictive security procedures;

 

  (4) Building standard bulbs are provided to Tenant (specialty bulbs will be billed to Tenant as set forth in §6.2 below);

 

  (5) Labor to replace fluorescent tubes and ballasts in Building Standard light fixtures in the Premises;

 

  (6) Exterior window washing;;

 

  (7) Exterior pest control;

 

  (8) Landscaping (including irrigation) in the Outside Areas; and

 

  (9) Maintenance and repair of the Parking Garage and surface parking areas.

 

  (b) Standard Services Provided . During the Term, and subject to Tenant’s rights under §6.1(c) below, Landlord shall provide, or cause to be provided, the Standard Services to Tenant and the Project to be professionally managed, repaired and maintained (to the extent of Landlord’s maintenance and repair obligations hereunder), all consistent with management practices for similar first class office buildings in the Silicon Valley submarket. The cost of providing the Standard Services shall be included in Expenses. Landlord is not responsible for any inability to provide Standard Services due to the concentration of personnel or equipment in the Premises, Tenant’s use of equipment in the Premises that is not customary office equipment, has special cooling requirements, or generates heat or any discontinuance of or interruption of utilities to the Premises or the Outside Areas.

 

20


6.2 Additional Services . “Additional Services” means utilities or services in excess of the Standard Services set forth in §6.1. Tenant shall not use any Additional Services without Landlord’s prior written consent. If Landlord so consents, any such Additional Services shall be subject to the terms and conditions of this §6.2. Tenant agrees to pay for any Additional Services upon receipt of an invoice or statement from Landlord. If Tenant fails to timely pay for any Additional Services, in addition to Landlord’s other remedies under the Lease including application of the Late Charge set forth in §4.5, Landlord may discontinue the Additional Services.

 

  (a) Lighting . Landlord will furnish non-Building Standard lamps, bulbs, ballasts and starters that are part of the Leasehold Improvements for purchase by Tenant at Landlord’s cost, plus Landlord’s Standard Administration Fee. Landlord will install non-Building Standard lighting items at Landlord’s scheduled rate for this service.

 

  (b) Other Services . Tenant will pay as Rent the actual cost of services (other than lighting services addressed in §6.2(a)) either used by Tenant or provided at Tenant’s request in excess of that provided as part of the Standard Services, plus Landlord’s Standard Administration Fee.

 

  (c) Scheduled Rates . Landlord reserves the right, in its sole and absolute discretion and with or without notice, to periodically reasonably increase or otherwise reasonably adjust the rates charged for Additional Services.

6.3 Utilities . Landlord’s Standard Services do not include the provision of utilities. Tenant shall separately contract directly with the subject utility provider for, and pay such provider directly, for water, gas, electricity, telephone, internet, cable and all other utilities supplied or furnished to the Building, Outside Areas, Patio/Courtyard Area and the Parking Garage from and after the Delivery Date, together with any taxes thereon. In no event shall Landlord be liable to Tenant for failure or interruption of any such utilities, unless caused by the willful misconduct of Landlord, and no such failure or interruption shall entitle Tenant to terminate this Lease or to withhold Rent or other sums due hereunder. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the Premises, or a material portion of the Premises, are made untenantable for a period in excess of ten (10) consecutive business days solely as a result of an interruption, diminishment or termination of services due to Landlord’s negligence or willful misconduct of Landlord, or if such interruption, diminishment or termination of services is otherwise reasonably within the control of Landlord to correct (a “Service Failure”), then Tenant, as its sole remedy, shall be entitled to receive an abatement of the Base Rent and Tenant’s Share of Expenses payable hereunder during the period beginning on the 11 th consecutive business day of the Service Failure and ending on the day the interrupted service has been restored. If the entire Premises have not been rendered untenantable by the Service Failure, the amount of abatement shall be equitably prorated.

 

21


6.4 Sanitation and Janitorial . Landlord’s Standard Services do not include janitorial services and interior extermination/pest control to the Premises. Tenant, at its sole cost and expense, shall be solely responsible for all cleaning and sanitation of and janitorial services to the Premises and the Patio/Courtyard Area and interior extermination/pest control, all at Tenant’s sole cost and expense and through a reputable third party janitorial and pest control company approved by Landlord and to standards consistent with those provided to similar first class office buildings in the Silicon Valley submarket.

6.5 Security . Landlord’s Standard Services do not include security services. Tenant may, at its sole cost and expense, install security and access systems to limit and/or monitor access to the Premises provided that such systems comply with all Laws, Landlord has first approved of such system and the manner of installation, such approval to not be unreasonably withheld, and further provided that Landlord is provided with access codes, card keys, fobs or other applicable access device so that Landlord can exercise its entry rights. Landlord shall have no obligation to modify the Building’s security/access or lifesaving systems to accommodate Tenant’s desired security/access system. Notwithstanding the above, Landlord will in no event have any responsibility for monitoring access to, or the security of, the Premises and shall have no liability to Tenant or its employees or any other person for claims due to theft or burglary or otherwise arising from any entry by any unauthorized persons into the Premises. Any security/access system installed by Tenant shall become the property of Landlord upon expiration or earlier termination of the Lease.

6.6 Telecommunications Services . Tenant will contract directly with third party providers and will be solely responsible for paying for all telephone, data transmission, video and other telecommunication services (“Telecommunication Services”) subject to the following:

 

  (a) Providers . Each Telecommunications Services provider that does not already provide service to the Building shall be subject to Landlord’s reasonable approval. Without liability to Tenant, the license of any Telecommunications Services provider servicing the Building may be terminated by Landlord under the terms of the license, or not renewed upon the expiration of the license.

 

  (b) Tenant’s Wiring . Landlord may, in its reasonable discretion, designate the location of all wires, cables, fibers, equipment, and connections (“Tenant’s Wiring”) for Tenant’s Telecommunications Services, and reasonably restrict and control access to telephone cabinets and rooms. Tenant may not use or access the Base Building, Outside Areas or roof for Tenant’s Wiring without Landlord’s prior written consent, which shall not be unreasonably withheld, conditioned or delayed or for which Landlord may charge a fee determined by Landlord.

 

  (c) Tenant Sole Beneficiary . This §6.6 is solely for Tenant’s benefit (and any Permitted Transferee), and no one else shall be considered a third party beneficiary of these provisions.

 

22


  (d) Removal of Equipment . Any and all telecommunications equipment and other facilities for telecommunications transmission (including, without limitation, Tenant’s Wiring) installed in the Premises or elsewhere in the Project by or on behalf of Tenant shall be removed prior to the expiration or earlier termination of the Term by Tenant at its sole cost or, at Landlord’s election, by Landlord at Tenant’s sole cost, with the actual and reasonable cost thereof to be paid as Additional Rent. Landlord shall have the right, however, upon written notice to Tenant given no later than thirty (30) days prior to the expiration or earlier termination of the Term, to require Tenant to abandon and leave in place, without additional payment to Tenant or credit against Rent, any or all of Tenant’s Wiring and, provided same are in place as of the Execution Date, related infrastructure, or select components thereof, whether located in the Premises or elsewhere in the Project.

6.7 Generator Operation . Tenant shall be permitted to maintain and place and use/operate the existing Generator (“Generator”) located in the Parking Garage and all related equipment including, without limitation, the above-ground fuel storage tank and the underground fuel storage tank serving the Generator (such Generator, fuel tanks and any other related equipment, including connections to the Premises, the “Generator Equipment”) provided that: (a) the Generator Equipment may not be relocated without Landlord’s consent, (b) Tenant shall be solely responsible for the cost of operation and maintenance of the Generator Equipment and the obtaining and maintaining of any necessary permits and licenses therefor, (c) all maintenance and repair, and if necessary, relocation or replacement removal work, shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, in compliance with all applicable Laws, and otherwise in compliance with this Lease as it applies to Alterations, (d) Tenant shall maintain and repair the Generator Equipment in good condition and repair at Tenant’s sole expense and in compliance with all Laws, and (e) upon expiration of this Lease, the Generator Equipment shall be surrendered in place and in same condition and repair received (reasonable wear and tear excepted) and in compliance with all Laws.

6.8 Food Service/Fitness Center . Subject to the other terms and conditions of this Lease, Tenant shall be permitted to operate within the Premises a cafeteria and fitness center at its sole cost and expense. Landlord will have no obligations with respect thereto.

6.9 Recycling . Tenant covenants and agrees, at its sole cost and expense, to comply with all present and future Laws, orders, and regulations of the jurisdiction in which the Building is located and of the federal, municipal, and local governments, departments, commissions, agencies and boards having jurisdiction over the Building to the extent that they or this Lease impose on Tenant duties and responsibilities regarding the collection, sorting, separation, and recycling of trash. Tenant shall pay all costs, expenses, fines, penalties, or damages that may be imposed on Landlord or Tenant by reason of Tenant’s failure to comply with the provisions of this §6.9, and, at Tenant’s sole cost and expense, shall indemnify, defend and hold Landlord harmless (including legal fees and expenses) from and against any actions, claims, and suits arising from such noncompliance, using counsel reasonably satisfactory to Landlord.

 

23


7. REPAIRS

7.1 Tenant’s Repairs. Except as provided in Articles 10 and 12 hereof, during the Term Tenant shall, at Tenant’s cost, repair and maintain (and replace, as necessary) the Leasehold Improvements and keep the Premises in good order and condition. Tenant shall be responsible for the costs to repair (and replace, as necessary) any portion of the Project damaged by Tenant or Tenant’s agents, contractors, or invitees. Tenant’s work under this §7.1 (a) is subject to the prior approval and supervision of Landlord, including, without limitation, Landlord’s approval of all contractors and subcontractors performing the work (which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld, conditioned or delayed) (b) must be performed in compliance with Laws and Building rules and regulations, and (c) must be performed in a first-class, lien free and workmanlike manner, using materials not less than Building Standard.

7.2 Landlord’s Repairs. Except as provided in Articles 10 and 12 hereof, during the Term Landlord shall, at Landlord’s cost (but included as Expenses to the extent provided in §4.2) repair and maintain (and replace, as necessary) all parts of the Project that are not Tenant’s responsibility to repair and maintain under §7.1 (or any other tenant’s responsibility under their respective lease) and keep the Project in good order and condition according to the standards prevailing for comparable office buildings in the area in which the Building is located. Tenant may not repair or maintain the Project on Landlord’s behalf or offset any Rent for any repair or maintenance of the Project that is undertaken by Tenant. If Tenant believes that Landlord has failed to perform any maintenance or repair for which Landlord is obligated under §7.2, Tenant will promptly provide written notice to Landlord specifying in detail the nature and extent of any condition requiring maintenance or repair. Landlord will not be deemed to have failed to perform its obligations under §7.2 with respect to any maintenance or repair unless Tenant has provided such written notice and Landlord has had a commercially reasonable time within which to respond to such notice and effect the needed maintenance or repair. Tenant waives the right to terminate this Lease, vacate the Premises, and make repairs at Landlord’s expense (pursuant to California Civil Code Section 1932, Subsection 1, California Civil Code Sections 1941 and Section 1942, or any similar or successor Laws).

7.3 Tenant’s Limited Right to Perform Certain Repairs at Landlord’s Cost. If Landlord fails to perform a material repair obligation of Landlord under this Lease or fails to provide any Standard Service, which failure materially and adversely affects Tenant’s customary business activities at the Project, within fifteen (15) days after written notice from Tenant to Landlord of the need for such repair or service (or such longer, reasonable period of time if more than fifteen (15) days is reasonably required to perform such obligation and Landlord commences performance within the first ten (10) day period and thereafter diligently pursues completion thereof), and provided that any such written notice shall recite in full the provisions of this sentence, then Tenant shall have the right, but not the obligation, to perform the repair or service at Landlord’s expense, subject to the provisions below. If Tenant elects to perform any such repair or service, Tenant shall use only qualified contractors which regularly perform similar work in comparable office buildings. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in no event may Tenant exercise the above rights if (i) at the time, a

 

24


Tenant Default has occurred and is continuing, (ii) Landlord’s failure to perform the repair or service was caused by a fire, casualty or condemnation (in which case the provisions of Section 10 or Section 12 will control, as applicable), or (iii) Landlord’s failure to perform the repair or service was caused by a public utilities’ failure to provide electricity, gas, water of other utility service to the Premises or Project. Landlord shall reimburse Tenant for Tenant’s actual and reasonable costs thereof within thirty (30) days after receipt of a statement of costs, together with such backup documentation as is reasonably requested by Landlord and lien waivers from all contractors and subcontractors supplying services or materials for such repairs or services.

 

8. ALTERATIONS

8.1 Alterations by Tenant. “Alterations” means any modifications, additions or improvements to the Premises or Leasehold Improvements made by Tenant during the Term, including modifications to the Base Building or Outside Areas required by Laws as a condition of performing the work. Alterations do not include tenant improvements made under any Work Letter attached to this Lease. Alterations are made at Tenant’s sole cost and expense, subject to the following:

 

  (a) Consent Required . All Alterations require Landlord’s prior written consent. If a Design Problem (as such term is defined below) exists, Landlord may withhold its consent in Landlord’s sole and absolute discretion; otherwise, Landlord will not unreasonably withhold its consent. In either case, Landlord may condition its consent to any item of Alterations on the requirement that Tenant remove this item of Alterations upon termination of this Lease. “Design Problem” means a condition that results, or will result, from Alterations that are proposed, being performed or have been completed that either:

 

  (1) Does not comply with Laws;

 

  (2) Does not meet or exceed the Building Standard;

 

  (3) In Landlord’s reasonable judgment, exceeds the capacity, adversely affects, is incompatible with, or impairs Landlord’s ability to, or increases the cost to Landlord to, maintain, operate, alter, modify or improve the Base Building;

 

  (4) Affects the exterior appearance of the Building or Outside Areas;

 

  (5) Violates any agreement affecting the Project;

 

  (6) Costs materially more to demolish than Building Standard improvements;

 

  (7) Violates any insurance regulations or standards for a fire-resistive office building; or

 

25


  (8) Locates any equipment, Tenant’s Wiring or Tenant’s Personal Property on the roof of the Building, in Outside Areas or in telecommunications or electrical closets.

 

  (b) No Consent Required . Notwithstanding the foregoing, Tenant may make Alterations without obtaining Landlord’s prior written consent and without payment of an Alterations Fee, provided that Tenant gives Landlord reasonable prior written notice of same and further provided that such Alterations (1) are purely cosmetic in nature (including painting, carpeting and the installation of floor covering or wall covering), (2) will not constitute or give rise to a Design Problem, (3) cost less than One Hundred Thousand Dollars ($100,000) in any one instance, and (4) do not require a governmental permit of any kind.

 

  (c) Performance of Alterations . Alterations shall be performed by Tenant in a good and workman-like manner according to plans and specifications approved by Landlord. Approval by Landlord of any such plans and specifications shall not be a representation or warranty of Landlord that such plans and specifications are adequate for any use, purpose, or condition, or that such plans and specifications comply with any applicable law or code. All Alterations shall comply with law and insurance requirements, including, without limitation, the Americans with Disabilities Act and any other applicable state, federal and local Laws addressing accessibility standards and any regulations issued thereunder (collectively, and as such may be amended, the “Disabilities Laws”). Landlord’s designated contractors must perform Alterations affecting the Base Building or Mechanical Systems; and, all other work will be performed by qualified contractors that meet Landlord’s insurance requirements and are otherwise approved by Landlord (which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld, conditioned or delayed). Promptly after completing any Alterations, Tenant will deliver to Landlord “as-built” CADD plans, proof of payment, a copy of the recorded notice of completion, and all unconditional lien releases.

 

  (d) Bonding . If requested by Landlord, before commencing Alterations in excess of $250,000 for any single project, Tenant shall, at Tenant’s cost, obtain bonds, or deposit with Landlord other security acceptable to Landlord for the payment and completion of the Alterations. These bonds or other security shall be in form and amount reasonably acceptable to Landlord.

 

  (e) Alterations Fee . Except with respect to the Tenant improvement work performed in accordance with EXHIBIT F , below, Tenant shall pay Landlord as Rent three percent (3 %) of the total construction costs of the Alterations to cover review of Tenant’s plans and construction coordination by its own employees. In addition, Tenant shall reimburse Landlord for the actual cost that Landlord reasonably incurs to have engineers, architects or other professional consultants review Tenant’s plans and work in progress, or inspect the completed Alterations.

 

26


  (f) Tenant Improvements . The construction of the Tenant Improvements (as defined in the Work Letter attached as EXHIBIT F ) shall be governed solely by such Work Letter and not this Article 8. However, the Tenant Improvements shall be Alterations, and thus Leasehold Improvements, for all other purposes under the Lease.

 

  (g) Condominium Declaration . All Alterations and the Tenant Improvements are subject to compliance with the Condominium Declaration.

8.2 Alterations by Landlord. Landlord may make any modifications, additions, renovations or improvements to the Project that Landlord deems appropriate, provided Landlord uses commercially reasonable efforts to avoid disrupting Tenant’s business.

8.3 Liens and Disputes. Tenant will keep title to the Land and Building free of any liens concerning the Leasehold Improvements, Alterations, or Tenant’s Personal Property, and will take whatever action is required to have any of such liens released and removed of record within thirty (30) days after the filing thereof (including, as necessary, posting a bond or other deposit). To the extent legally permitted, each contract and subcontract for Alterations will provide that no lien attaches to or may be claimed against the Project other than Tenant’s leasehold interest in the Premises.

 

9. INSURANCE

9.1 Tenant’s Insurance .

 

  (a) Tenant’s Coverage . Before taking possession of the Premises for any purpose (including construction of tenant improvements, if any) and during the Term, Tenant will provide and keep in force the following coverage:

 

  (1) Commercial general liability insurance insuring Tenant’s use and occupancy of the Premises and use of the Project, and covering personal and bodily injury, death, and damage to others’ property of not less than Three Million Dollars ($3,000,000) per occurrence and Five Million Dollars ($5,000,000) general aggregate. Each of these policies shall include cross liability and severability of interests clauses, and be written on an occurrence, and not claims-made, basis. Each of these policies shall name Landlord, the Building property manager, each secured lender, the owner of Unit 2 and any mortgagee thereof, and any other party reasonably designated by Landlord as an additional insured (“Additional Insured”). Tenant shall comply with any and all reasonable requirements of any mortgagee or insurer of Unit 2 of the Condominium regarding Tenant’s use of the Patio/Courtyard Area, including without limitation insurance naming the owner of Unit 2 and such lender as additional insureds with respect to use of the Patio/Courtyard Area.

 

27


  (2) Causes of loss – special form commercial property insurance (including standard extended coverage endorsement perils and leakage from fire protective devices and other water damage) covering the full replacement cost of the Leasehold Improvements and Tenant’s Personal Property. Each of these policies shall name Landlord and each Additional Insured as loss payee to the extent of their interest in the Leasehold Improvements. Each of these policies shall include a provision or endorsement in which the insurer waives its right of subrogation against Landlord, Landlord’s Affiliates, and each Additional Insured.

 

  (3) Business interruption insurance including leasehold interest coverage for Tenant’s loss of income or insurable gross profits and covering continuation of rents during any time the Premises is untenantable, with a limit not less than Tenant’s annual Rent. Such coverage may be included in insurance covering the perils described in §9.1(a)(2). Each of these policies shall include a provision or endorsement in which the insurer waives its right of subrogation against Landlord, Landlord’s Affiliates, and each Additional Insured.

 

  (4) If applicable, Tenant shall maintain boiler and machinery or equipment breakdown insurance covering property damage to the Premises and to the major components of any central heating, air conditioning or ventilation systems, and such other equipment as Landlord may require. The policy shall include coverage for business interruption due to mechanical equipment malfunctions, including expediting and extra expense, in an amount usual and customary for similar risks, or as determined by Landlord. Unless the insurance required in §9.1(a)(2), (3) and (8) is provided on a single policy, a Joint Loss Agreement between separate policies must be provided on each policy.

 

  (5) Insurance required by law, including workers’ compensation insurance.

 

  (6) Employers liability insurance with limits not less than One Million Dollars ($1,000,000).

 

  (7) Commercial automobile liability insurance covering all owned (if applicable), hired, and non-owned vehicles with a combined single limit of not less than One Million Dollars ($1,000,000) for each accident or person.

 

  (8) Insurance covering the Leasehold Improvements and Tenant’s Personal Property against loss or damage due to earthquake, flood and difference in conditions. Tenant may elect to self-insure this coverage. If Tenant does not elect to self-insure this coverage, then each of these policies shall name Landlord and each Additional Insured as loss payee to the extent of their interest in the Leasehold Improvements.

 

28


  (b) Insurers and Terms . Each policy required under §9.1(a) shall be written with insurance companies licensed to do business in the state in which the Building is located, with A.M. Best’s rating of A VIII or better, and be on terms that are acceptable to Landlord.

 

  (c) Proof of Insurance . Tenant shall provide Landlord with certificates of insurance or other reasonable proof that the coverage required under §9.1(a) is in effect. Tenant will provide reasonable proof within thirty (30) days of any expiring policy.

 

  (d) Tenant Party Insurance . Tenant shall (i) carry and maintain on behalf of any Tenant Party (as defined in §13.7) occupying the Premises under a Tenant Party Use, or (ii) cause any Tenant Party occupying the Premises under a Tenant Party Use to carry and maintain, policies of insurance described in §§9.1(a)(1) and 9.1(a)(5), above, which insurance shall be subject to the provisions of this §9.1.

9.2 Landlord’s Insurance .

(a) Landlord’s Coverage . During the Term, Landlord will keep in force the following coverage:

 

  (1) Commercial general liability insurance.

 

  (2) Causes of loss – special form commercial property insurance (including standard extended coverage endorsement perils, leakage from fire protective devices and other water damage) covering the full replacement cost of the Project improvements (excepting the Leasehold Improvements to be insured by Tenant). Each of these policies shall include a provision or endorsement in which the insurer waives its right of subrogation against Tenant.

 

  (3) Boiler and machinery or equipment breakdown insurance.

 

  (4) Earthquake insurance, to any extent Landlord elects in its sole discretion to maintain same.

 

  (5) Other insurance that Landlord is required to maintain under the Condominium Declaration, or elects to maintain to the extent same is generally consistent with insurance maintained by other landlords of similar properties in the Silicon Valley submarket.

 

  (b) Terms . Each of the policies required under §9.2(a) will have those limits, deductibles, retentions and other terms that Landlord prudently determines.

 

29


10. DAMAGE OR DESTRUCTION

10.1 Damage and Repair. If the Leasehold Improvements, Premises or Building is damaged by fire or other casualty, not including (a) any waste or excessive or unreasonable wear and tear, or (b) any loss, destruction or damage arising or resulting from the placement, disposal or release of Hazardous Materials in, on, under, about or from the Building by either Landlord or Tenant, then the parties will proceed as follows:

 

  (a) Landlord’s Estimates . As soon as reasonably practicable under the circumstances including the scope of the casualty, Landlord will assess any damage to the Premises and Building (but not the Leasehold Improvements) and notify Tenant of Landlord’s reasonable estimate of the time required to substantially complete repairs and restoration of the Premises and Building (“Repair Estimate”). Landlord will also reasonably estimate the time that the Premises will be untenantable (“Interruption Estimate”). Within thirty (30) days after the later of the issuance of the Repair Estimate, issuance of the Interruption Estimate, or receipt of any denial of coverage or reservation of rights from Landlord’s insurer, each party may terminate the Lease by written notice to the other on the following conditions:

 

  (1) Landlord may elect to terminate this Lease if either:

 

  (A) The damage occurs during the last year of the Term, or

 

  (B) The Repair Estimate exceeds one hundred eighty (180) days, or

 

  (C) The repair and restoration is not fully covered by insurance maintained or required to be maintained by Landlord (subject only to those deductibles or retentions Landlord elected to maintain) or Landlord’s insurer denies coverage or reserves its rights on coverage or any mortgagee of the Building requires that insurance proceeds be applied to the indebtedness secured by its mortgage, provided Tenant may, in its sole and absolute discretion, elect to fund repair of any damage which is not otherwise covered as described in this Section 10.1(a)(1)(C).

 

  (2) Tenant may elect to terminate this Lease if the Interruption Estimate exceeds one hundred eighty (180) days, or if the damage occurs during the last year of the Term (or any extended Term which Tenant may have elected) and renders the Premises or a material part thereof untenantable.

 

  (b) Repair and Restoration . If neither party terminates the Lease under §10.1(a), then the Lease shall remain in full force and effect and the parties will proceed as follows:

 

30


  (1) Landlord will repair and restore the Premises and/or the Building, as applicable (but not the Leasehold Improvements) to substantially the same condition existing prior to such damage, except for modifications required by law. Landlord will perform such work reasonably promptly, subject to delay for loss adjustment, Tenant Delay and Force Majeure.

 

  (2) Tenant will repair and restore the Leasehold Improvements reasonably promptly to the condition existing prior to such damage, but not less than then current Building Standard, except for modifications required by law.

 

  (3) Tenant may not terminate this Lease if the actual time to perform the repairs and restoration exceeds the Repair Estimate, or the actual interruption exceeds the Interruption Estimate.

10.2 Rent Abatement. If as a result of the damage or destruction, the Premises are rendered untenantable for more than five (5) consecutive days, then from the first day of such untenantability, Tenant’s Base Rent and Additional Rent shall be abated to the extent that the Premises are untenantable. Such abatement shall terminate upon Tenant’s occupancy of the restored Premises, but in any event not later than the fifteenth (15 th ) day after completion of Landlord’s required repairs and restoration of the Premises and that portion of the Building necessary for Tenant’s occupancy of the Premises. Tenant’s sole remedy will be the abatement of Base Rent and Additional Rent provided under this §10.2, and Landlord will not be liable to Tenant for any other amount or remedy, including damages to Tenant’s Personal Property, consequential damages, actual or constructive eviction, termination of this Lease, or abatement of any other item of Rent.

10.3 Exclusive Casualty Remedy. The provisions of this Article 10 are Tenant’s sole and exclusive rights and remedies in the event of a damage or casualty described in §10.1. To the fullest extent allowable under the law, Tenant waives the benefits of any Laws (including, without limitation, California Civil Code Sections 1932, Subsection 2 and 1933, Subsection 4, and any successor statutes or Laws) that provide Tenant any abatement or termination rights (by virtue of a casualty) not specifically described in §10.1 or §10.2.

 

11. INDEMNITY

11.1 Claims. “Claims” means any and all liabilities, losses, claims, demands, damages or expenses that are suffered or incurred by a party, including attorneys’ fees reasonably incurred by that party in the defense or enforcement of the rights of that party.

11.2 Tenant’s Indemnity .

 

  (a)

Landlord’s Waivers . LANDLORD WAIVES ANY CLAIMS AGAINST TENANT AND ITS AFFILIATES FOR PERILS INSURED OR REQUIRED TO BE INSURED BY LANDLORD UNDER SUBSECTIONS (2) AND (3) OF §9.2(a), WHICH WAIVER WILL APPLY EVEN IF A CLAIM IS CAUSED IN

 

31


  WHOLE OR IN PART BY THE SOLE NEGLIGENCE, ORDINARY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY OF TENANT OR ITS AFFILIATES (IT BEING THE EXPRESS INTENT OF LANDLORD AND TENANT TO SHIFT THE RISK OF LIABILITY FOR SUCH CLAIMS TO THE INSURER), EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT CAUSED BY THE WILLFUL INJURY TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY CAUSED BY TENANT OR ITS AFFILIATES.

 

  (b) Claims Against Landlord . Unless waived by Landlord under §11.2(a) above, Tenant will indemnify and defend (with counsel reasonably approved by Landlord) Landlord and its Affiliates and hold each of them harmless from and against Claims arising from:

 

  (1) Any accident or occurrence on or about the Premises, except to the extent caused by the negligence or willful misconduct of Landlord or its Affiliates;

 

  (2) Tenant’s or any of its Affiliates’ negligence or willful misconduct or that of their agents, contractors, employees or invitees;

 

  (3) Tenant’s failure to comply with this Lease; or

 

  (4) Any claim for commission or other compensation by any person other than Landlord’s Broker and Tenant’s Broker, if any, for services rendered to Tenant in procuring this Lease.

11.3 Landlord’s Indemnity .

 

  (a) Tenant’s Waivers . TENANT WAIVES ANY CLAIMS AGAINST LANDLORD AND ITS AFFILIATES FOR:

 

  (1) PERIL INSURED OR REQUIRED TO BE INSURED BY TENANT UNDER SUBSECTIONS (2), (3) AND (8) OF §9.1(a), WHICH WAIVER WILL APPLY EVEN IF A CLAIM IS CAUSED IN WHOLE OR IN PART BY THE SOLE NEGLIGENCE, ORDINARY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY OF LANDLORD OR ITS AFFILIATES (IT BEING THE EXPRESS INTENT OF LANDLORD AND TENANT TO SHIFT THE RISK OF LIABILITY FOR SUCH CLAIMS TO THE INSURER), EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT CAUSED BY THE WILLFUL INJURY TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY CAUSED BY LANDLORD OR ITS AFFILIATES, AND

 

  (2) DAMAGE CAUSED BY ANY PUBLIC UTILITY, PUBLIC WORK, OTHER TENANTS OR OCCUPANTS OF THE PROJECT, OR PERSONS OTHER THAN LANDLORD OR ITS AGENTS, EMPLOYEES OR CONTRACTORS.

 

32


  (b) Claims against Tenant . Unless waived by Tenant under §11.3(a) above, Landlord will indemnify and defend Tenant (with counsel reasonably approved by Tenant) and its Affiliates and hold each of them harmless from and against Claims arising from:

 

  (1) Landlord’s or any of its Affiliates’ negligence or willful misconduct;

 

  (2) Landlord’s default of this Lease; or

 

  (3) Any claim for commission or other compensation by any person other than Tenant’s Broker, if any, for services rendered to Landlord in procuring this Lease.

11.4 Affiliates Defined. “Affiliates” means with respect to a party (a) that party’s partners, members, shareholders and joint venturers, (b) each corporation or other entity that is a parent or subsidiary of that party, (c) each corporation or other entity that is controlled by or under common control of a parent of such party, and (d) the directors, officers, managers, employees and agents of that party and each person or entity described in this §11.4(a) through (c).

11.5 Survival of Waivers and Indemnities. Landlord’s and Tenant’s waivers and indemnities under §§11.2 and 11.3 will survive the expiration or early termination of this Lease.

 

12. CONDEMNATION

12.1 Taking. “Taking” means the acquiring of all or part of the Project for any public or quasi-public use by exercise of a right of eminent domain or under any other law, or any sale in lieu thereof. If a Taking occurs:

 

  (a) The Lease will terminate as of the date of a Taking if substantially all of the Premises becomes untenantable for substantially all of the remaining Term because of the Taking.

 

  (b) If the Lease is not terminated under §12.1(a), Landlord shall restore or alter the Premises after the Taking to be tenantable, unless Landlord reasonably determines that it will be uneconomical to do so, in which case Landlord may terminate the Lease upon sixty (60) days prior written notice to Tenant.

 

  (c) If the Lease is not terminated under §12.1(a), more than twenty percent (20%) of the Premises is untenantable because of the Taking, Tenant cannot operate Tenant’s business for the Use in the Premises after such Taking, and Landlord is unable to provide Tenant with comparable premises in the Project, then Tenant may terminate the Lease upon sixty (60) days prior written notice to Landlord.

 

33


  (d) If the Lease is not terminated under §12.1(a), (b) or (c), the Rent payable by Tenant will be reduced for the term of the Taking based upon the rentable area of the Premises made untenantable by the Taking.

12.2 Awards. Landlord is entitled to the entire award for any claim for a Taking of any interest in this Lease or the Project, without deduction or offset for Tenant’s estate or interest; however, Tenant may make a claim for relocation expenses and damages to Tenant’s Personal Property and business to the extent that Tenant’s claim does not reduce Landlord’s award.

12.3 Exclusive Taking Remedy. The provisions of this Article 12 are Tenant’s sole and exclusive rights and remedies in the event of a Taking. To the fullest extent allowable under the law, Tenant waives the benefits of any law (including, without limitation, California Code of Civil Procedure Section 1265.130 and any successor statutes or Laws) that provide Tenant any abatement or termination rights or any right to receive any payment or award (by virtue of a Taking) not specifically described in this Article 12.

 

13. TENANT TRANSFERS

13.1 Terms Defined .

 

  (a) Transfer Defined . “Transfer” means any:

 

  (1) Sublease of all or part of the Premises, or assignment, mortgage, hypothecation or other conveyance of an interest in this Lease;

 

  (2) Use of the Premises or the Outside Areas by anyone other than Tenant and its employees and business invitees with Tenant’s consent;

 

  (3) Change in Tenant’s form of organization, but only if such change materially and adversely affects any right Landlord then had to seek recovery from the principals of Tenant immediately prior to the change ( e.g. , a change from a partnership to limited liability company);

 

  (4) Transfer of fifty-one percent (51%) or more of Tenant’s assets, shares (excepting shares transferred in the normal course of public trading), membership interests, partnership interests or other ownership interests; or

 

  (5) Transfer of effective control of Tenant.

13.2 Prohibited Transfers. Tenant may not enter into any Transfer if such Transfer will result in any portion of the Rent not constituting “rents from real property” with respect to Landlord, within the meaning of Section 856(d) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”). In particular, Tenant may not enter into a Transfer (a) that provides for rent or other compensation based in whole or in part on the net income or profits from the business operated in the Premises, or (b) if the proposed transferee is directly or indirectly related to the Landlord under Section 856, et seq. of the Code. Any such Transfers shall be considered null, void and of no force or effect.

 

34


13.3 Consent Not Required. If Tenant is not in Default of this Lease, Tenant may effect a Transfer to a Permitted Transferee without Landlord’s prior consent, but with notice to Landlord prior to the Permitted Transferee’s occupancy (subject to any legally binding confidentiality obligations. “Permitted Transferee” means (i) Tenant following any sale or transfer of the stock of Tenant in connection with any merger, financing, public offering or acquisition and (ii) any person or entity that:

 

  (a) Either (1) controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with Tenant (for purposes hereof, “control” shall mean ownership of not less than fifty percent (50%) of all of the voting stock or legal and equitable interest in the entity in question), (2) results from the merger or consolidation of Tenant, or (3) acquires all or substantially all of the stock and/or assets of Tenant as a going concern;

 

  (b) Has a tangible net worth immediately following the Transfer not less than the greater of (1) Tenant’s tangible net worth immediately before the Transfer, or (2) Tenant’s tangible net worth as of the execution of this Lease; and

 

  (c) Will not, by occupying the Premises, cause Landlord to breach any provisions of the Condominium Declaration, the Condominium Plan, or any easements, restrictions, liens, or other instruments filed of record against the Project as of the Execution Date.

13.4 Consent Required. Each proposed Transfer other than those prohibited under §13.2 or permitted under §13.3 requires Landlord’s prior written consent, in which case the parties will proceed as follows:

 

  (a) Tenant’s Notice . Tenant shall notify Landlord at least thirty (30) days prior to the proposed Transfer of the name and address of the proposed transferee and the proposed use of the Premises, and include with the notice copies of the proposed Transfer documents, including, without limitation, the proposed assignment of lease or proposed sublease document, as applicable, and copies of the proposed transferee’s balance sheets and income statements (both current and for the past two (2) years), as well as such other information as may be reasonably required by Landlord. LANDLORD WILL HAVE NO OBLIGATION TO REVIEW A PROPOSED TRANSFER OR TO CONSENT OR DENY CONSENT TO A PROPOSED TRANSFER UNTIL ALL ITEMS AND INFORMATION SET FORTH ABOVE IN THIS §13.4(a) HAVE BEEN PROVIDED TO LANDLORD.

 

  (b) Landlord’s Rights . Within thirty (30) days after receipt of Tenant’s complete notice and all items required under §13.4(a), Landlord may either:

 

35


  (1) If the proposed Transfer is either an assignment of this Lease or sublease of substantially all of the Premises, terminate this Lease as of the proposed Transfer date; or

 

  (2) Provide written consent, or deny consent, to the proposed Transfer, consent not to be unreasonably withheld, conditioned or delayed if:

 

  (A) The proposed transferee, in Landlord’s reasonable opinion, has the financial capacity to meet its obligations under the proposed Transfer;

 

  (B) The proposed use is consistent with the Use and will not cause Landlord to be in breach of any provisions of the Condominium Declaration, the Condominium Plan, or any easements, restrictions, liens, or other instruments filed of record against the Project as of the Execution Date;

 

  (C) The proposed transferee is typical of tenants that directly lease premises in first-class office buildings;

 

  (D) The proposed transferee is not an existing tenant or an Affiliate of an existing tenant, or a party with which Landlord is actively negotiating to lease space in the Building (or has, in the last six (6) months, been actively negotiating to lease space in the Building); and

 

  (E) Tenant is not in Default under this Lease.

 

  (c) Compelling Consent; Limitation of Remedies .

 

  (1) If Landlord does not consent to a Transfer in violation of this Section 13.4, then as Tenant’s sole and exclusive remedy against Landlord, Tenant may elect to either (i) bring suit against Landlord for specific performance or declaratory relief, or (ii) bring suit against Landlord for Tenant’s actual, monetary damages as further set forth below in this §13.4(c), AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES MAY TENANT TERMINATE THIS LEASE OR SEEK OR BE ENTITLED TO RECOVER ANY DAMAGES OF ANY OTHER KIND, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY GENERAL, COMPENSATORY, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, SPECULATIVE, INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE PRINCIPAL, ALL OF WHICH TENANT SPECIFICALLY WAIVES.

 

36


  (2) If Tenant elects the remedy of bringing suit against Landlord for actual, monetary damages as set forth in Section 13.4 (c) (1), above, then said remedy shall be subject to Section 15.6 and Section 15.7 of this Lease, and in addition any liability of Landlord for such monetary damages shall not exceed an amount of money equal to the sum of (a) ONE MILLION DOLLARS ($1,000,000), plus (b) an amount equal to all reasonable attorneys’ fees, expenses and court costs incurred by Tenant in connection with Tenant’s use of legal counsel to present, enforce or demand Tenant’s remedy of filing suit for actual, monetary damages as set forth above, provided that Tenant prevails in any such action.

13.5 Payments to Landlord. Tenant shall pay Landlord fifty percent (50%) of Transfer receipts that exceed Tenant’s Rent (on a per square foot basis); after Tenant is reimbursed for Tenant’s reasonable and customary out-of-pocket costs incurred in the Transfer, including attorneys’ fees, abated rent, Alterations, and broker commissions. Except with regard to any Transfer to a Permitted Transferee as set forth in Section 13.3, Tenant shall pay Landlord a One Thousand Dollar ($1,000) review fee, and Landlord’s reasonable attorneys’ fees, for each proposed Transfer, excepting those in which Landlord exercises its rights under subsection (1) or (2) of §13.4(b).

13.6 Effect of Transfers. No Transfer will release Tenant or any guarantor of this Lease from any Lease obligation. Landlord’s acceptance of a payment from any person or entity other than Tenant that occupies the Premises does not waive Tenant’s obligations under this Article 13. If Tenant is in Default of this Lease, Landlord may proceed against Tenant without exhausting any remedies against any transferee and may require (by written notice to any transferee) any transferee to pay Transfer rent owed Tenant directly to Landlord (which Landlord will apply against Tenant’s Lease obligations). Termination of this Lease for any reason will not result in a merger. Each sublease will be deemed terminated upon termination of this Lease unless Landlord notifies the subtenant in writing of Landlord’s election to assume any sublease, in which case the subtenant shall attorn to Landlord under the executory terms of the sublease. Any Transfer or attempted Transfer in violation of the provisions of this Article 13 shall be void and of no force and effect.

13.7 Occupancy and Use by Tenant Parties. Notwithstanding anything in this Lease to the contrary, but subject to the terms of this §13.7, Landlord agrees that one or more subsidiaries of Tenant or entities affiliated with Tenant, and the employees and/or agents thereof (“Tenant Parties”) may, contemporaneously with Tenant, occupy and use the Premises only for the Use and otherwise in accordance with this Lease (and any such occupancy and use by a Tenant Party shall be referred to herein as a “Tenant Party Use”). Landlord agrees that any such Tenant Party Use shall not, in itself, constitute a Transfer, subject to the following conditions and requirements: The acts and omissions of any Tenant Party with respect to the Premises, the Building, and the Project are hereby and will be deemed to be the acts and omissions of Tenant itself for the purposes of determining Tenant’s compliance or failure to comply with the terms of this Lease. A Tenant Party Use shall never be deemed to create a landlord/tenant relationship or any other relationship between Landlord and the applicable Tenant Party, and, in all such instances, Tenant shall be considered the sole tenant under this Lease. Landlord shall never be bound or estopped by, and shall never be deemed to have consented to or ratified, any provisions of any agreements between Tenant and any Tenant Party.

 

37


Any Tenant Party Use shall be subject and subordinate to all provisions of this Lease. Tenant shall cause the Tenant Party under any Tenant Party Use to comply with all provisions of this Lease that are obligations of Tenant and that relate to the use or occupancy of the Premises or the use of the Project, and any failure by a Tenant Party to so comply shall be a default by Tenant under this Lease. “Tenant Parties” shall not include any party to whom Tenant assigns Tenant’s right, title and interest in this Lease or to whom Tenant subleases or licenses all of any portion of the Premises.

 

14. LANDLORD TRANSFERS

14.1 Landlord’s Transfer. Landlord’s right to transfer any interest in the Project or this Lease is not limited by this Lease. Upon any such transfer, Tenant will attorn to Landlord’s transferee and Landlord will be released from liability under this Lease, except for any Lease obligations accruing before the transfer that are not assumed by the transferee. Such transferee shall be deemed to assume the obligations of “Landlord” under this Lease accruing from and after the effective date of such transfer (including, without limitation, any remaining obligation to pay any unfunded portion of the Construction Allowance in accordance with the Work Letter). Any funds held by Landlord in which Tenant has an interest shall be turned over or credited, subject to that interest, to the transferee.

14.2 Subordination. This Lease is, and will at all times be, subject and subordinate to each ground lease, mortgage, deed to secure debt or deed of trust now or later encumbering the Project or any portion thereof, including each renewal, modification, supplement, amendment, consolidation or replacement thereof (each, an “Encumbrance”). Within ten (10) business days of Landlord’s request, Tenant will, without charge, execute, acknowledge and deliver to Landlord (or, at Landlord’s request, the Encumbrance holder) any instrument reasonably necessary to evidence this subordination. If Tenant fails to execute and deliver such instrument within said ten-business-day period, Tenant hereby authorizes Landlord to execute the same as Tenant’s attorney in fact. Notwithstanding the foregoing, each Encumbrance holder may unilaterally elect to subordinate its Encumbrance to this Lease. As a condition precedent to the subordination of this Lease to any ground lease, mortgage, deed to secure debt or deed of trust hereafter placed against the Project or any portion thereof, Landlord shall be required to provide Tenant with a commercially reasonable SNDA (as defined below) from the holder of such instrument. “SNDA” means the applicable encumbrance holder’s standard form of subordination, non-disturbance and attornment agreement with such commercially reasonable revisions or modifications as may be agreed upon by Tenant and the encumbrance holder, or, lacking a form from such encumbrance holder, on another commercially reasonable form of subordination, non-disturbance and attornment agreement.

In connection with any effort by Landlord to obtain an SNDA as set forth in the preceding paragraph, if Landlord and/or Tenant enter into negotiations with the Lender concerning substantive provisions of the SNDA which are proposed by Tenant but are not included in the Lender’s standard form of SNDA (“SNDA Negotiations”), then (a) within thirty (30) days after written demand by Landlord, Tenant shall reimburse Landlord for all of Landlord’s third-party costs and expenses incurred by Landlord in connection with the SNDA Negotiations, including, without limitation, Lender’s legal fees, review fees or similar amounts charged by Lender to Landlord (“Lender Fees”),

 

38


and (b) if Lender requires, as a condition of the SNDA transaction, that Landlord place a deposit with Lender to cover the Lender Fees, then if Landlord so elects by prompt written notice to Tenant, Landlord will have no obligation to proceed with efforts to obtain the SNDA until Tenant forwards the amount of the required deposit to Landlord.

14.3 Attornment. Upon written request of a Successor Landlord (as such term is defined below), Tenant will attorn to any transferee of Landlord’s interest in the Project that succeeds Landlord by reason of a termination, foreclosure or enforcement proceeding of an Encumbrance, or by delivery of a deed in lieu of any foreclosure or proceeding (a “Successor Landlord”). In this event, the Lease will continue in full force and effect as a direct lease between the Successor Landlord and Tenant on all of the terms of this Lease, except that the Successor Landlord shall not be:

 

  (a) Liable for any obligation of Landlord under this Lease, or be subject to any counterclaim, defense or offset accruing before Successor Landlord succeeds to Landlord’s interest except to the extent continuing after such succession;

 

  (b) Bound by any modification or amendment of this Lease made without Successor Landlord’s written consent, except for any amendment or modification of this Lease pursuant to Tenant’s strict exercise of an express right or option granted to Tenant under this Lease;

 

  (c) Bound by any prepayment of more than one month’s Rent;

 

  (d) Obligated to perform any improvements to the Premises (or provide an allowance therefor). Upon Successor Landlord’s request, Tenant will, without charge, promptly execute, acknowledge and deliver to Successor Landlord any instrument reasonably necessary required to evidence such attornment.

14.4 Estoppel Certificate. Within ten (10) business days after receipt of Landlord’s written request, Tenant (and each guarantor of the Lease) will execute, acknowledge and deliver to Landlord a certificate upon which Landlord and each existing or prospective Encumbrance holder or prospective purchaser may rely confirming the following (or any exceptions to the following):

 

  (a) The Commencement Date and Expiration Date;

 

  (b) The documents that constitute the Lease, and that the Lease is unmodified and in full force and effect;

 

  (c) The date through which Base Rent, Additional Rent, and other Rent has been paid;

 

  (d) That neither Landlord nor Tenant is in Default;

 

39


  (e) That Landlord has satisfied all Lease obligations to improve the Premises (or provide Tenant an allowance therefor) and Tenant has accepted the Premises;

 

  (f) That Tenant solely occupies the Premises; and

 

  (g) Such other matters concerning this Lease or Tenant’s occupancy that Landlord may reasonably require.

 

15. DEFAULT AND REMEDIES

15.1 Tenant’s Default .

 

  (a) Tenant will be in “Default” of this Lease if Tenant either:

 

  (1) Fails to pay Rent when due, and the failure continues for five (5) days after Landlord notifies Tenant of this failure (Tenant waiving any other notice that may be required by law);

 

  (2) Fails to perform or comply with a non-monetary Lease obligation of Tenant (other than those obligations described in §15.1(a)(3) through (5), below), and the failure continues for thirty (30) days after Landlord notifies Tenant of this failure, but:

 

  (A) In an emergency Landlord may require Tenant to perform this obligation in a reasonable time of less than thirty (30) days, or

 

  (B) If it will reasonably take more than thirty (30) days to perform this obligation, then Tenant will have a reasonable time not exceeding ninety (90) additional days to perform this obligation, but only if Tenant commences performing this obligation within ten (10) days after Landlord notifies Tenant of this failure;

 

  (3) Consummates a Transfer that materially violates Article 13;

 

  (4) Fails, within thirty (30) days after Tenant has notice, to discharge any attachment or levy on Tenant’s interest in this Lease; or

 

  (5) Fails, within sixty (60) days after it occurs, to have vacated or dismissed any appointment of a receiver or trustee of Tenant’s assets (or any Lease guarantor’s assets), or any voluntary or involuntary bankruptcy or assignment for the benefit of Tenant’s creditors (or any Lease guarantor’s creditors).

15.2 Landlord’s Remedies. If Tenant is in Default, Landlord may, without prejudice to the exercise of any other remedy, exercise any remedy available under law, including those described below:

 

40


  (a) of Tenant’s Possession . Terminate Tenant’s right to possession of the Premises at any time by any lawful means, in which case this Lease shall terminate and Tenant must immediately surrender possession of the Premises to Landlord. In such event, Landlord will be entitled to recover from Tenant all damages incurred by Landlord by reason of Tenant’s default, including, without limitation, (a) the worth at the time of the award of the unpaid Rent which had been earned at the time of the termination; (b) the worth at the time of the award of the amount by which the unpaid Rent which would have been earned after termination until the time of the award exceeds the amount of such rental loss that Tenant proves could have been reasonably avoided; (c) the worth at the time of the award of the amount by which the unpaid Rent for the balance of the Term after the time of award exceeds the amount of such rental loss that Tenant proves could be reasonably avoided; and (d) any other amount necessary to compensate Landlord for all the detriment proximately caused by Tenant’s failure to perform its obligations under this Lease or which in the ordinary course of things would be likely to result therefrom, including, but not limited to, court costs, any costs or expenses Landlord incurs in maintaining or preserving the Premises after such default, the cost of recovering possession of the Premises, expenses of reletting, including renovation or alteration of the Premises, Landlord’s reasonable attorneys’ fees incurred in connection therewith, and any real estate commission paid or payable. As used in subparts (a) and (b) above, the “worth at the time of the award” is computed by allowing interest at the Maximum Rate. As used in subpart (c) above, the “worth at the time of the award” is computed by discounting such amount at the discount rate of the Federal Reserve Bank of San Francisco at the time of the award plus one percent (1%).

 

  (b) Maintain Right to Possession . Maintain Tenant’s right to possession, in which case Landlord will be entitled to enforce all of Landlord’s rights and remedies under this Lease, including the right to recover Rent as it becomes due. Landlord has the remedy described in California Civil Code Section 1951.4 (lessor may continue lease in effect after lessee’s breach and abandonment and recover rent as it becomes due, if lessee has right to sublet or assign, subject only to reasonable limitations).

 

  (c)

Reletting . After Tenant’s default (and for so long as Landlord does not terminate Tenant’s right to possession of the Premises), Landlord may, to the extent allowable under the Laws, and in Landlord’s sole and absolute discretion (but without obligation) elect to enter into the Premises and relet them, or any part of them, to third parties for Tenant’s account. Tenant shall be immediately liable to Landlord for all costs Landlord incurs in reletting the Premises, including brokers’ commissions, expenses of remodeling the Premises, and like costs. Reletting can be for a period shorter or longer than the remaining Term of this Lease. Tenant will pay to Landlord the Rent due under this Lease on the dates the Rent is due, less the Rent Landlord receives from reletting. If Landlord elects to relet the Premises pursuant to this §15.2(c), Rent that Landlord receives from reletting will be applied to the payment of:

 

41


  (a) first, any indebtedness from Tenant to Landlord other than Rent due from Tenant; (b) second, all costs, including costs incurred by Landlord in reletting; and (c) third, Rent due and unpaid under this Lease. After deducting the payments referred to above in this §15.2(c), any sum remaining from the Rent Landlord receives from reletting will be held by Landlord and applied in payment of future Rent as Rent becomes due under this Lease. If, on the date Rent is due under this Lease, the Rent received from the reletting is less than the Rent due on that date, Tenant will pay to Landlord, in addition to the remaining Rent due, all costs, including costs for maintenance, Landlord incurred in reletting which remain after applying the Rent received from the reletting. No act by Landlord allowed by this §15.2(c) will terminate this Lease unless Landlord notifies Tenant in writing that Landlord elects to terminate this Lease.

 

  (d) Right of Landlord to Re-Enter . In the event of any termination of this Lease, Landlord shall have the immediate right to enter upon and repossess the Premises, and any personal property of Tenant may be removed from the Premises and stored in any public warehouse at the risk and expense of Tenant.

 

  (e) Other Remedies . Pursue any other remedy now or hereafter available to Landlord under the Laws or judicial decisions of the state in which the Property is located. All rights and remedies of Landlord under this Lease are cumulative and the exercise of one or more remedies at any time or from time to time does not limit or preclude the further exercise by Landlord of the same or any other rights or remedies at any time or from time to time.

 

  (f) Limitation of Damages . Any liability of Tenant to Landlord (or any person or entity claiming by, through or under Landlord) for money damages arising from any default by Tenant under this Lease or any matter relating to the occupancy or use of the Premises and/or the Project shall be limited to Landlord’s actual direct, but not consequential, damages unless the liability arises from Tenant’s default of the provisions of Section 3.4 or Article 17 of this Lease.

15.3 Costs. Tenant will reimburse and compensate Landlord on demand and as Additional Rent for any actual loss Landlord incurs in connection with, resulting from or related to any Default of Tenant under this Lease, regardless of whether suit is commenced or judgment is entered. Such loss includes all reasonable legal fees, costs and expenses (including paralegal fees, expert fees, and other professional fees and expenses) Landlord incurs investigating, negotiating, settling or enforcing any of Landlord’s rights or remedies or otherwise protecting Landlord’s interests under this Lease. In addition to the foregoing, Landlord is entitled to reimbursement of all of Landlord’s fees, expenses and damages, including, but not limited to, reasonable attorneys’ fees and paralegal and other professional fees and expenses, Landlord incurs in connection with any bankruptcy or insolvency proceeding involving Tenant including, without limitation, any proceeding under any chapter of the Bankruptcy Code; by exercising and advocating rights under Section 365 of the Bankruptcy Code; by proposing a plan of reorganization and objecting to competing plans; and by filing motions for relief from stay. Such fees and expenses are payable on demand, or, in any event, upon assumption or rejection of this Lease in bankruptcy.

 

42


15.4 Waiver of Re-entry Claims. Tenant waives and releases all Claims Tenant may have resulting from Landlord’s re-entry and taking possession of the Premises pursuant to this Article 15 by any lawful means and removing, storing or disposing of Tenant’s property as permitted under this Lease, regardless of whether this Lease is terminated and, to the fullest extent allowable under the law, Tenant releases and will indemnify, protect, defend (with counsel reasonably acceptable to Landlord) and hold harmless the Landlord Parties from and against any and all Claims arising therefrom. No such re-entry is to be considered or construed as a forcible entry by Landlord.

15.5 Waiver of Redemption. Tenant waives any right of redemption from forfeiture under any law including, without limitation, California Code of Civil Procedure Sections 1174 and 1179.

15.6 Landlord’s Default and Remedies .

 

  (a) Landlord will be in “Default” of this Lease if Landlord fails to perform any Lease obligation of Landlord and this failure continues for thirty (30) days after Tenant notifies Landlord of such failure, or such longer period of time as is reasonable if more than thirty (30) days is reasonably required to perform this obligation, if performance commences within said thirty-day period and is diligently prosecuted to completion.

 

  (b) If Landlord is in Default, then Tenant may exercise any remedy available under law that is not waived or limited under this Lease, subject to the following:

 

  (1) Tenant may not terminate this Lease due to any Landlord Default until Tenant notifies each Encumbrance holder and each Encumbrance holder is provided a reasonable opportunity to gain legal possession of the Project and, after gaining possession, cure the Default.

 

  (2) Landlord’s liability under this Lease or for any matter relating to the occupancy or use of the Premises and/or the Project is limited to Landlord’s interest in the Building, and if Landlord is comprised of more than one entity, the liability of each entity comprising Landlord shall be several only (not joint) based upon such entity’s proportionate share of ownership in the Building.

 

  (3) No liability under this Lease is assumed by Landlord’s Affiliates.

 

  (4) Any liability of Landlord to Tenant (or any person or entity claiming by, through or under Tenant) for any default by Landlord under this Lease or any matter relating to the occupancy or use of the Premises and/or the Project shall be limited to Tenant’s actual direct, but not consequential, damages therefor.

 

43


15.7 Arbitration and Mediation; Waiver of Jury Trial . Except as provided in this §15.7, if any dispute ensues between Landlord and Tenant arising out of or concerning this Lease, and if said dispute cannot be settled through direct discussions between the parties, the parties shall first attempt to settle the dispute through mediation before a mutually acceptable mediator. The cost of mediation shall be divided equally between the parties. Thereafter, any remaining, unresolved disputes or claims shall be resolved by binding arbitration in accordance with the rules of the American Arbitration Association, and judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator may be entered in any court of competent jurisdiction. The prevailing party in any such arbitration shall be entitled to recover reasonable costs and attorneys’ fees and costs as determined by the arbitrator; provided, however, that the foregoing provisions regarding mediation and arbitration shall not apply to (a) any issue or claim that might properly be adjudicated in an unlawful detainer proceeding, or (b) to any issue or claim that Landlord or Tenant elects not to have resolved through arbitration and with respect to which Landlord or Tenant commences an action in law or equity to determine the same. Without limiting the foregoing, to the extent permitted by law, Landlord and Tenant hereby waive trial by jury in any action, proceeding or counterclaim (including any claim of injury or damage and any emergency and other statutory remedy in respect thereof) brought by either against the other on any matter arising out of or in any way connected with this Lease, the relationship of Landlord and Tenant, or Tenant’s use or occupancy of the Premises.

15.8 Enforcement Costs . If Landlord or Tenant brings any action against the other to enforce or interpret any provision of this Lease (including any claim in a bankruptcy or an assignment for the benefit of creditors), the prevailing party shall recover from the other reasonable costs and attorneys’ fees incurred in such action.

15.9 Force Majeure . If either party shall be delayed in, or prevented from, the performance of any act or service required under this Lease, by reason of strikes, inability to procure materials, failure of power, restrictive governmental Laws or regulations, riot, insurrection war, terrorism, or any act of God, or other reasons of a similar or dissimilar nature which are beyond the reasonable control of the party (“Force Majeure”), then the performance of any such act or service shall be excused for the period of the resulting delay. Notwithstanding the foregoing, this paragraph shall not be applied so as to excuse or delay (a) payment of any monies from one party to the other, including Rent, or (b) performance of obligations which can be cured by the payment of monies.

 

16. INTENTIONALLY OMITTED.

 

17. HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

 

  (a)

As used herein, “Hazardous Materials” means any hazardous, toxic, environmentally damaging or radioactive materials, substances or wastes, including, but not limited to, those materials, substances or wastes: (1) defined or listed as hazardous or extremely hazardous materials or wastes pursuant to Title 22, Division 4.5, Chapter 10 et seq.,

 

44


  of the California Code of Regulations, as may be amended; (2) defined or listed as hazardous substances pursuant to the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, 42 USC § 9601, et seq. and regulations promulgated thereunder, as may be amended; (3) defined or listed as hazardous or acutely hazardous wastes pursuant to the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, 42 USC § 6901, et seq. and regulations promulgated thereunder, as may be amended; and/or (4) which consists in whole or part of petroleum, petroleum fractions, petroleum products or petroleum distillates or asbestos or asbestos containing materials.

 

  (b) Tenant shall not cause or permit to be discharged from or about the Project or the Condominium any Hazardous Materials. Without limiting the foregoing, Tenant shall not cause or permit to be discharged any Hazardous Materials into the groundwater or soils underlying or adjacent to the Project. Tenant shall provide Landlord with at least five (5) days prior written notice before bringing, using, or storing any Hazardous Materials on the Premises except for minor amounts thereof commonly used for office purposes (for example: white-out for correcting typing mistakes, toner in printers, and office cleaning supplies). Tenant shall not use, store, handle, or generate in, on, or about the Premises any Hazardous Materials except for minor amounts thereof commonly used for office purposes (for example: white-out for correcting typing mistakes, toner in printers, and office cleaning supplies), and except as necessary for the use and operation of the Generator and then only to the extent such usage strictly complies with applicable Laws. Upon Landlord’s written request, Tenant will promptly deliver to Landlord documentation acceptable to Landlord disclosing the nature and quantity of any Hazardous Materials Tenant has located at the Project and evidencing the legal and proper handling, storage and disposal of all Hazardous Materials kept at or removed or to be removed from the Project by Tenant. All such documentation will list Tenant or its agent as the responsible party (including with respect to all existing underground or above-ground fuel storage tanks serving the Generator) and will not attribute responsibility for any such Hazardous Materials to Landlord or the property manager, if any. Tenant will comply with and is solely responsible for all reporting and warning obligations required under Laws pertaining to Hazardous Materials arising from Tenant’s use or occupancy of the Premises and Project. Such reporting and warning obligations are the sole responsibility of Tenant regardless of whether Laws pertaining to Hazardous Materials permit or require Landlord to report or warn, and include, without limitation, all notices and other requirements under California Health & Safety Code Section 25249.5 et seq. and Title 22 of the California Code of Regulations, Sections 12000 et seq.

 

  (c)

Tenant, at its sale expense shall comply with all applicable Laws respecting Hazardous Materials in connection with Tenant’s activities and the activities of its agents, employees, contractors and invitees on or about the Project. Tenant, at its sale cost, shall perform all investigations, clean-up and other response actions which may

 

45


  be required by any governmental authority respecting Hazardous Materials in, on, or about the Project or the soils or groundwater underlying any one or more of the same resulting from or caused to exist by Tenant’s activities and/or the activities of its agents, employees, contractors and invitees. Except as provided in the preceding sentence, Landlord, at its sale cost (and not as a cost passed through to Tenant as an Expense), shall perform all investigations, clean-up and other response actions which may be required by any governmental authority in, on, or about the Premises respecting Hazardous Materials migrating from offsite onto the Land or into the soils or groundwater underlying the same or underlying the Parking Garage whether or not caused to exist by the activities of Landlord and/or the activities of Landlord’s agents, employees, contractors and invitees.

 

  (d) Tenant shall indemnify, protect, defend (by legal counsel subject to Landlord’s approval, which shall not unreasonably be withheld) and hold harmless Landlord from and against all costs (including, but not limited to, environmental response costs), expenses, claims, judgments, losses, demands, liabilities, causes of action, governmental directives, proceedings or hearings, including Landlord’s attorneys’ and experts’ fees and costs, relating to the use, handling, generation, storage, transportation, release or disposal of Hazardous Materials by Tenant, its employees, agents, invitees or contractors on, in, beneath, about or from, the Project, or in the groundwater or land underlying the Project, or, in, on, or about any groundwater or land adjacent to, on, in the vicinity of the Project, and/or relating to the breach of any of Tenant’s obligations under this §17. The foregoing indemnity shall include an obligation for Tenant to indemnify, protect, defend, and hold harmless Landlord from and against the cost of environmental consultants, attorneys, and other consultants as Landlord determines are appropriate to assist Landlord in (1) investigating the source, extent, and composition of such Hazardous Materials, (2) cleaning up or otherwise remediating the same, (3) dealing with any potential or actual liability of Landlord and/or Tenant respecting such Hazardous Materials, and (4) otherwise dealing with such Hazardous Materials. Tenant shall reimburse Landlord for (i) losses in or reductions to rental income resulting from Tenant’s use, handling, generation, storage, transportation, release or disposal of Hazardous Materials; (ii) all costs of clean-up or other alterations to the Project or other areas necessitated by Tenant’s use, handling, generation, storage, transportation, release or disposal of Hazardous Materials; and (iii) any diminution in the fair market value of the Project or other property within the Condominium or any improvements thereon caused by Tenant’s use, handling, generation, storage, transportation, release or disposal of Hazardous Materials.

 

  (e)

Tenant shall notify Landlord in writing, immediately upon becoming aware of: (1) any environmental investigation, clean-up or other environmental response action requested, demanded, instituted or to be instituted by any person, including but not limited to a governmental entity, relating to any release or migration of Hazardous

 

46


  Materials on, in, beneath, to or adjacent to the Project; (2) any environmental investigation, cleanup or other environmental response action requested, demanded, instituted or to be instituted by any person, including a governmental entity, relating to the use, handling, generation, storage, transportation, release or disposal of Hazardous Materials on, in, beneath, about or from the Project; (3) any claim or demand made or threatened by any person, including but not limited to a governmental entity, against Landlord or Tenant, or the Project relating to damages, contribution, cost recovery, compensation, loss or injury relating to or claimed to result from any Hazardous Materials that have come to be located on or about the Project; or (4) any data, workplans, proposals or reports submitted to any governmental entity arising out of or in connection with any Hazardous Materials on or about the Project, including but not limited to any complaints, notices, warnings or asserted violations in connection therewith.

 

  (f) Landlord shall have the right, but not the obligation, in its sole discretion, to conduct from time to time an inspection of the Building and other portions of the Project regarding Hazardous Materials on, in, beneath or about same. Landlord shall give Tenant forty-eight (48) hours advance notice of any such inspection within the Premises, except in the event of an emergency situation in which event no notice shall be required. When conducting any such inspections, Landlord shall avoid unreasonably disrupting Tenant’s activities. Tenant shall provide Landlord with reasonable cooperation to facilitate any such inspection by Landlord, its agents or representatives.

 

  (g) Under no circumstances shall Tenant install, temporarily or permanently, any underground or below-floor tanks relating to the use, storage or disposal of Hazardous Materials. Such prohibition shall not apply to the existing above and below ground fuel storage tanks serving the Generator. However, Tenant shall not modify or replace such tanks without Landlord’s prior written consent.

 

  (h) Prior to the expiration or termination of the Term, Tenant shall decontaminate, remove or close any equipment, improvements or facilities installed by Tenant at the Project in connection with Hazardous Materials, in full compliance with applicable Laws.

 

  (i)

Landlord represents that, to Landlord’s actual knowledge, no Hazardous Materials exist in the soils or groundwater under the surface of the Land or within the Premises or elsewhere in the Project in violation of Laws other than as may be set forth in any environmental report provided by Landlord to Tenant for review. Landlord shall indemnify, protect, defend and hold harmless Tenant from and against all costs (including, but not limited to, environmental response costs), expenses, claims, judgments, losses, demands, liabilities, causes of action, governmental directives, proceedings or hearings (including, but not limited to, environmental response costs), incurred to investigate and/or remediate any Hazardous Materials contamination in

 

47


  the soils or groundwater under the surface of the Project which investigation or remediation is required by written mandate of lawful governmental authority having jurisdiction over such Hazardous Materials contamination, and only to the extent of Hazardous Materials situated in the soils or groundwater underlying the Project (i) as of the Execution Date, or (ii) caused to exist by the actions of Landlord or its employees, agents, or contractors. In satisfying its defense obligation pursuant to this paragraph, Landlord shall have the right in its sole discretion to select and control defense counsel. Landlord’s indemnification and defense obligations under this paragraph shall not apply to the extent any of the foregoing claims or costs are based on Hazardous Materials contamination on or about the Premises or the Project caused by Tenant or any agent, contractor, or invitee of Tenant or any release on or after the Delivery Date of Hazardous Materials from the fuel storage tanks serving the Generator. The phrase “to Landlord’s actual knowledge” means the actual, not constructive or imputed, knowledge of the individual serving as asset manager of the Project as of Execution Date (“Designated Knowledge Person”), without any obligation on such Designated Knowledge Person’s part to make any independent investigation of the matters being represented and warranted, or to make any inquiry of any other persons, or to search or examine any files, records, books, correspondence and the like. The Designated Knowledge Person acts under this Lease solely in his or her capacity as asset manager for the Project and not individually and does not make any personal representations and shall have no personal liability to Tenant hereunder or otherwise.

 

  (j) Notwithstanding any other provision of this Lease, Tenant shall protect, defend, indemnify and hold harmless Landlord from and against claims, damages, liabilities, costs and expenses of every kind and nature, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, incurred by or asserted against Landlord arising out of Tenant’s maintenance, operation, replacement, use or relocation of the Generator Equipment including, without limitation (i) any release of fuel on, in, beneath, about or from, the Project, or in the groundwater or land underlying the Project, or, in, on, or about any groundwater or land adjacent to, on, in the vicinity of the Project from any Generator Equipment. Further, upon any release or spill of any fuel from the Generator Equipment, Tenant shall, at its sole cost and expense clean up and remove all spilled fuel to Landlord’s satisfaction and whether or not such is required by Laws.

 

  (k) The obligations of Tenant and Landlord under this §17 shall survive the expiration of the Term.

 

18. EXTERIOR SIGNAGE.

Tenant shall have the exclusive right, at its sole cost and expense, to place (a) on the existing monument sign in the Outside Areas facing El Camino Real, and (b) on the arch located at the entry way to the Building, signage displaying Tenant’s tradename and corporate logo (collectively, the “Signage”) subject to the following terms and conditions:

 

48


(i) The graphics, materials, color, design, lettering, lighting, size, specifications and manner of affixing/installing the Signage, and their specific location, shall be subject to Landlord’s prior approval, not to be unreasonably withheld, delayed or conditioned, and further subject to compliance with all Laws affecting same (collectively, “Sign Laws”). Landlord’s approval of any Signage shall not constitute a representation by Landlord that any such signage complies with any applicable Sign Laws;

(ii) Tenant shall maintain all Signage in good condition and repair. Tenant will be responsible for all costs and expenses related to the installation, maintenance and removal or replacement of all Signage including, without limitation, design costs;

(iii) Tenant’s Signage rights shall terminate (1) if the RSF of the Premises is reduced to less than fifty percent (50%) of the original RSF of the Premises, or (2) in any event, upon termination of this Lease or Tenant’s right to possession of the Premises. Upon the occurrence of any such events, and unless otherwise directed by Landlord, Tenant shall remove all of its Signage and repair any damage caused thereby at its sole cost and expense;

(iv) Tenant’s Signage rights are personal to the Tenant, are not transferable by Tenant and may not be exercised by any assignee or sublessee or other successor of Tenant. Notwithstanding, Tenant’s Signage rights shall inure to the benefit and may be exercised by a successor in interest to Tenant by merger or consolidation and an assignee of Tenant provided that such merger, consolidation or assignment is otherwise a Permitted Transfer under the Lease and further provided that any change of the name of Tenant on its Signage (i) will not cause Landlord to be in breach of any other lease or agreement affecting the Building, and (ii) is not otherwise reasonably objectionable by Landlord; and

(v) Except as permitted under this §18, Tenant shall not display, inscribe, print, paint, maintain or affix any sign, notice, legend, direction, figure or advertisement that is visible from the exterior of the Building.

 

19. CONDOMINIUM REGIME.

Tenant confirms that it has been provided with copies of the current Condominium Declaration affecting the Building, such being attached hereto as EXHIBIT B . Subject to the terms of this §19, Tenant shall observe and comply with the Condominium Declaration and any amendments or restatements thereto (upon receipt thereof from Landlord) provided that such do not impose material obligations or costs upon Tenant not already included in this Lease. This Lease, at Landlord’s option, shall be subordinate to the Condominium Declaration regarding maintenance and use of any areas contained in any portion of the Project. Tenant agrees that no documentation other than this Lease shall be required to evidence such subordination. Landlord shall have absolute and complete discretion to provide for such condominium regime on such terms and conditions as it shall determine in its sole discretion; provided in no event shall Landlord take any action with respect to such condominium regime which may reasonably impose material obligations or costs upon Tenant not already included in this Lease or otherwise materially and adversely affect Tenant’s rights under

 

49


this Lease. Further, Tenant recognizes that under the Condominium Declaration, certain obligations or requirements of performance that might otherwise be the obligation or requirement of the “ Landlord ” hereunder may, in fact, be the obligation of or are performable by an association created under the Condominium to operate and manage the condominium regime (the “ Association ”). Without limitation, such obligations might include certain maintenance and repair obligations of the Condominium Common Areas and the obligation to carry insurance and certain restoration obligations in the event of a casualty or condemnation. The existence of the Condominium and/or the delegation of any obligations otherwise performable hereunder by Landlord to any such Association shall not release Landlord, as between Tenant and Landlord, for such obligations, but Tenant agrees that the performance by the Association of such obligations shall satisfy any obligations of Landlord with respect thereto. Tenant confirms that it has been provided with copies of the current Condominium Declaration affecting the Building. Landlord represents and warrants that the Condominium Declaration attached hereto as EXHIBIT B is true, correct and complete and has not been modified.

 

20. MISCELLANEOUS

20.1 Rules and Regulations Tenant shall comply with and conform to the rules and regulations currently in effect for the Building, which are set forth on EXHIBIT C attached hereto and incorporated herein by reference the “Rules and Regulations”). Landlord shall have the right to amend the Rules and Regulations or to make new Rules and Regulations from time to time in any reasonable manner. Any such amendments or additions to the Rules and Regulations shall be set forth in writing and shall be given to Tenant, who shall thereafter comply with and conform to the same. Landlord shall not enforce any of the Rules and Regulations in such a manner as to discriminate against Tenant or anyone claiming under or through Tenant. Tenant shall not be bound by any Rule or Regulation adopted by Landlord that is not consistently applied and enforced. Landlord will not enact any Rule or Regulation that materially interferes with Tenant’s use and enjoyment of the Premises as provided under this Lease. If the Rules and Regulations conflict with this Lease, the Lease shall govern. Rules and regulations governing the use and occupancy of the Premises, the Outside Areas and all other leased space in the Building have been adopted by Landlord for the mutual benefit and protection of all the tenants in the Building (as existing and modified from time to time, the “ Rules and Regulations ”).

20.2 Notice. Notice to Landlord must be given to each notice recipient identified in Landlord’s Notice Addresses. Notice to Tenant must be given to each notice recipient identified in Tenant’s Notice Addresses. By notice to the other, either party may change its Notice Address. Each notice must be in writing and must be hand delivered by local courier or national overnight delivery service (e.g., Federal Express). Notice shall be effective on the date of receipted delivery or refusal to accept delivery.

20.3 Reserved .

 

50


20.4 Building Name . Tenant shall not use the Building’s name or image for any purpose, other than Tenant’s address. Landlord may change the name of the Building without any obligation or liability to Tenant.

20.5 Entire Agreement . This Lease is deemed integrated and contains all of each party’s representations, waivers and obligations. The parties may only modify or amend this Lease in a writing that is fully executed and delivered by both parties.

20.6 Counterparts . This Lease may be executed in any number of counterparts, each of which when taken together shall be deemed to be one and the same instrument. Facsimile signatures and scanned copies of signatures sent by electronic mail shall be effective as original signatures and shall have the same effect as original signatures.

20.7 Successors . Unless provided to the contrary elsewhere in this Lease, this Lease binds and inures to the benefit of each party’s heirs, successors and permissible assignees.

20.8 No Waiver . A party’s waiver of a breach of this Lease will not be considered a waiver of any other breach. No custom or practice that develops between the parties will prevent either party from requiring strict performance of the terms of this Lease. No Lease provision or act of a party creates any relationship between the parties other than that of landlord and tenant.

20.9 Independent Covenants . The covenants of this Lease are independent. A court’s declaration that any part of this Lease is invalid, void or illegal will not impair or invalidate the remaining parts of this Lease, which will remain in full force and effect.

20.10 Captions . The use of captions, headings, boldface, italics or underlining is for convenience only, and will not affect the interpretation of this Lease.

20.11 Authority . Each of Landlord and Tenant represent and warrant that the execution hereof has been duly authorized and each is authorized to bind its respective interests under this Lease.

20.12 Applicable Law . This Lease is governed by the Laws of the state in which the Building is located, regardless of that state’s conflicts provision or choice of law rules. In any action brought under this Lease, Tenant submits to the jurisdiction of the courts of the State of California, and to venue in Santa Clara County, California.

20.13 No Recording; Confidentiality. Tenant will not record this Lease or a memorandum of this Lease without Landlord’s prior written consent. Tenant will keep the financial terms of this Lease confidential and, unless required by Law, may not disclose the terms of this Lease to anyone other than Tenant’s Affiliates to the extent necessary to Tenant’s business; notwithstanding the foregoing, however: (i) Tenant may disclose such terms to its agents, consultants, attorneys, accountants, prospective investors, lenders, successors or acquirers, and others who need to know the information for the purpose of assisting Tenant in connection with this Lease; (ii) the foregoing

 

51


covenant of confidentiality shall not be applicable to any information published by Landlord as public knowledge or otherwise available in the public domain; and (iii) Tenant shall be permitted to disclose such information as may be recommended by Tenant’s legal counsel in order to comply with all financial reporting, securities Laws and other legal requirements applicable to Tenant, including any required disclosures to the Securities and Exchange Commission. Landlord will keep the terms of this Lease (which terms, for purposes of this Section 20.13 only, shall be deemed to include any financial statements provided to Landlord pursuant to Section 20.20, below) confidential and, unless required by Law, may not disclose the terms of this Lease to anyone other than Landlord’s Affiliates to the extent necessary to Landlord’s business; notwithstanding the foregoing, however: (i) Landlord may disclose such information to its consultants, attorneys, accountants, prospective investors, lenders, successors or acquirers, and others who need to know the information for the purpose of assisting Landlord in connection with the transaction that is the subject of this Lease provided that such receiving parties agree as a condition to engagement to the confidentiality requirements set forth in this Section 20.13; (ii) the foregoing covenant of confidentiality shall not be applicable to any information published by Tenant as public knowledge or otherwise available in the public domain; and (iii) Landlord shall be permitted to disclose such information as may be reasonably recommended by Landlord’s legal counsel in order to comply with all financial reporting, securities Laws and other legal requirements applicable to Landlord, including any required disclosures to the Securities and Exchange Commission.

20.14 Reasonableness . Tenant’s sole remedy for any claim against Landlord that Landlord has unreasonably withheld or unreasonably delayed any consent or approval shall be an action for injunctive or declaratory relief, except as expressly set forth to the contrary in Section 13.4(c), above.

20.15 Time. Time is of the essence as to all provisions in this Lease in which time is a factor.

20.16 Quiet Enjoyment . So long as Tenant is not in Default, Tenant shall have the right to peacefully and quietly enjoy the Premises for the Term, subject to the terms of this Lease, matters of record, and rights of other tenants of the Project.

20.17 Right to Enter Premises. Landlord, its employees and agents and any mortgagee of the Land or Building shall have the right to enter any part of the Project at all reasonable times with reasonable notice (but at any time and without notice in the event of an emergency) for the purpose of examining or inspecting the same, showing the same to prospective purchasers, mortgagees or tenants and for making such repairs, alterations or improvements to the Project as Landlord may deem necessary or desirable or to secure the Building or prevent further damage thereto in the event of emergency, provided that Landlord uses reasonable efforts to minimize any disruption of Tenant’s business during such entry (excluding any entry in connection with a Default). Such right of entry shall also include, but not be limited to, access to the Premises for purposes of environmental inspections and sampling during regular business hours (provided that Landlord uses reasonable efforts to minimize any disruption of Tenant’s business during such entry), or during other hours either by agreement of the parties or in the event of any environmental emergency. If

 

52


representatives of Tenant shall not be present to open and permit such entry into the Premises at any time when such entry is necessary or permitted hereunder, Landlord and its employees and agents may enter the Premises by means of a master key or otherwise. Landlord shall incur no liability to Tenant for such entry nor shall such entry constitute an eviction of Tenant or a termination of this Lease or entitle Tenant to any abatement of rent therefor.

20.18 Intentionally omitted .

20.19 Exhibits . The exhibits attached to this Lease are incorporated herein. If any exhibit is inconsistent with the terms of this Lease, the provisions of this Lease will govern.

20.20 Financial Statements . At any time during the Term of this Lease, Tenant shall, upon ten (10) days prior written notice from Landlord, provide Landlord with a current financial statement and financial statements for the two (2) years prior to the current financial statement year. Such statements shall be prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles and, if such is the normal practice of Tenant, shall be audited by an independent certified public accountant. Tenant consents to the delivery of such financial statements by Landlord to lenders or prospective lenders or purchasers of the Building.

20.21 No Light, Air or View Easement . This lease does not create, nor shall Tenant have, any easement, express or implied, or any other right for light, air or view to or from the Premises. Any reduction or blockage of light, air or view by any structure which may be erected after the Execution Date shall in no way effect this Lease, the obligations of Tenant hereunder or impose any additional liability on Landlord.

[SIGNATURES TO IMMEDIATELY FOLLOW]

 

53


HAVING READ AND INTENDING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND PROVISIONS THEREOF,

LANDLORD AND TENANT HAVE EXECUTED THIS LEASE AS OF THE EXECUTION DATE.

 

TENANT       LANDLORD
BOX.NET, INC., A DELAWARE CORPORATION       BEHRINGER HARVARD EL CAMINO
         REAL LP, A DELAWARE LIMITED PARTNERSHIP
         By:    Behringer Harvard El Camino Real GP, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company,
         its general partner
By:   

/s/ Greg Strickland

      By:   

/s/ Robert H. Thomas, Jr.

Name:    Greg Strickland       Name:    Robert H. Thomas, Jr.
Title:    VP Ops and Corporate Secretary       Title:    Vice President


EXHIBIT A – ILLUSTRATION OF PROJECT

El Camino Real Building • 4440 El Camino Real • Los Altos, California

SEE ATTACHED

 

A-1


 

LOGO

 

A-2


 

LOGO

 

A-3


EXHIBIT B – CONDOMINIUM DECLARATION

4440 El Camino Building • 4440 El Camino Real • Los Altos, California

SEE ATTACHED

 

B-1


 

LOGO

 

B-2


6/20/00

THE LOS ALTOS-EL CAMINO OFFICE / HOTEL COMMERCIAL CONDOMINIUM

DECLARATION OF COVENANTS, RESTRICTIONS AND EASEMENTS

This Commercial Condominium Declaration of Covenants, Restrictions and Easements (“Declaration”) is made on this             day of             , 2000, by Los Altos—El Camino Associates, LLC, a California limited liability company, hereinafter referred to as “Declarant,” with reference to the following facts:

A. Location of Property . Declarant is the owner of certain real property located in the City of Los Altos, County of Santa Clara, State of California, more particularly described as Parcel 1 on the Parcel Map filed for record in the office of the County of Santa Clara, State of California, on the             day of             , 2000, in Book             of Parcel Maps, page(s)             (the “Parcel Map”).

B. Description of Project . Declarant has completed, or will complete, construction of a project of two commercial buildings, one being an office building and the other being a hotel, on Parcel 1 of the Parcel Map (the “Project”).

C. Description of Condominium Project . Declarant has recorded the condominium plan entitled “Condominium Plan for the Los Altos—El Camino Commercial Condominium”, which was filed for record in the Office of the Recorder of the County of Santa Clara, California, on             , 2000, under Series No.             (the “Condominium Plan”). The purpose of the Condominium Plan is to divide the Project into two condominium units, with one condominium unit encompassing the Office Building and related improvements, and the other condominium units encompassing the Hotel Building and related improvements.

D. Office Unit . The Condominium Unit shown on the Condominium Plan as “Unit 1” is a unit of airspace that includes the office building, the garage for that office building, the landscaped areas, parking areas and grounds for the office building, and other office building facilities located within the area described and referenced in this Declaration as the “Office Unit”.

E. Hotel Unit . The Condominium Unit shown on the Condominium Plan as “Unit 2” is a unit of airspace that includes the hotel building, the garage for that hotel building, the landscaped areas, parking areas, hotel facilities and grounds for the hotel, and other hotel facilities located within the area which is described and referenced in this Declaration as the “Hotel Unit”. The hotel operated within the Hotel Unit will be operated in conjunction with certain other land and improvements outside of the condominium project, located adjacent to the Hotel Unit, consisting of the Hetch Hetchy Area, as defined in this Declaration, and Lot 2 of the Parcel Map, defined as the Adjoining Hotel Parcel in this Declaration.

F. Establishment of Commercial Condominium Project . By this Declaration and the Condominium Plan, Declarant intends to establish the Project as a commercial condominium project pursuant to the provisions of the California Common Interest Development Act. Declarant intends to

 

B-3


provide for separate ownership and use of the two (2) Condominium Units located within the Project and undivided Common Interests appurtenant to those Condominium Units in those portions of the Project designated in this Declaration and the Condominium Plan as the Common Area. Declarant further intends by this Declaration to impose upon the Project mutually beneficial restrictions under a general plan of improvement for the benefit of all of the said Condominiums and the Owners thereof and easements for the use of the Project by the Owners.

NOW, THEREFORE , Declarant hereby declares that each Condominium Unit in the Project shall be held, conveyed, mortgaged, encumbered, leased, rented, used, occupied, sold, and improved, subject to the following declarations, limitations, covenants, conditions, restrictions and easements, all of which are for the purpose of enhancing and protecting the value and attractiveness of the Project, and every part thereof, in accordance with the plan for the improvements of the Project and the division thereof into the Condominiums. All of the limitations, covenants, conditions, restrictions and easements stated in this Declaration shall constitute covenants which shall run with the land and shall be binding upon Declarant and its successors and assigns, and all parties having or acquiring any right, title or interest in or to any part of the Project.

ARTICLE I

DEFINITIONS

1.1. “Adjoining Hotel Parcel” shall mean and refer to that certain parcel of real estate owned by the Owner of the Hotel Unit which is described as Parcel 2 of that certain Parcel Map which was filed for record in Book             of Maps at pages             . The Adjoining Hotel Parcel shall be used [is to be used] as part of the operation of the Hotel in conjunction with the Hotel Unit. However, the Adjoining Hotel Parcel is separate from and not a part of the Project.

1.2. “Assessment” shall mean that portion of the cost of maintaining, improving, repairing, operating and managing the Project which is to be paid by each Unit Owner as determined by the Association, and shall include Regular Assessments, Special Assessments and Reimbursement Assessments.

1.3. “Association” shall mean and refer to The Los Altos – El Camino Commercial Condominium Association, an unincorporated association, the Members of which shall be the Owners of the Condominiums in the Project.

1.4. “BMR Units” shall mean and refer to the residential units that are part of the Hotel Unit, subject to the provisions set forth in Section 9.15 of this Declaration.

1.5. “Building” shall mean and refer to each of the two buildings in the Project, being the Office Building within the Office Unit and the Hotel Building within the Hotel Unit, including the garages that are part of each of the respective Units.

1.6. “City” shall mean the City of Los Altos, California.

 

B-4


1.7. “Common Area” shall mean and refer to all of the Project excepting the individual Units. Title to the Common Area shall be held by both of the Owners of the Condominiums in common as set forth in Section 2.2B.

1.8. “Common Expenses” means and includes the actual and estimated expenses of the Association and any reasonable reserve for such purposes as found and determined by the Members and all sums designated Common Expenses by or pursuant to the Condominium Documents.

1.9. “Common Interest” means the proportionate undivided interest in the Common Area which is appurtenant to each Unit as set forth in this Declaration.

1.10. “Condominium” shall mean an estate in real property as defined in California Civil Code §§ 783 and 1351(f), consisting of an undivided interest in common in a portion of the Project and a separate interest in space called a Unit.

1.11. “Condominium Plan” shall mean and refer to the recorded subdivision map for condominium purposes, containing three dimensional plans of the Condominiums built or to be built on the Project which identifies the Common Area, and each separate interest pursuant to California Civil Code § 1351, entitled “Condominium Plan for the Los Altos – El Camino Commercial Condominium”, which was filed for record in the Office of the Recorder of the County of Santa Clara, California, on             , 2000, under Series No.             .

1.12. “Condominium Unit” as used in this Declaration shall mean and refer to a Unit.

1.13. “Declarant” shall mean and refer to Los Altos – El Camino Associates, LLC, a California limited liability company, and any successor or assign that expressly assumes the rights and duties of the Declarant hereunder in a recorded written document.

1.14. “Declaration” shall mean and refer to this declaration of covenants, conditions and restrictions which establishes the Project.

1.15. “Eligible Holder Mortgages” shall mean mortgages held by “Eligible Mortgage Holders.”

1.16. “Eligible Mortgage Holder” shall mean a First Lender who has requested notice of certain matters from the Association in accordance with Section 9.6C.

1.17. “Eligible Insurer or Guarantor” shall mean an insurer or governmental guarantor of a First Mortgage who has requested notice of certain matters from the Association in accordance with Section 9.6C.

1.18. “First Lender” shall mean any bank, savings and loan association, insurance company, or other financial institution holding a recorded First Mortgage on any Condominium.

 

B-5


1.19. “First Mortgage” shall mean and refer to any recorded mortgage on a Condominium with first priority over other mortgages thereon.

1.20. “Foreclosure” shall mean and refer to the legal process by which the mortgaged property of a borrower in default under a mortgage is sold, and the borrower’s interest in such property is sold, pursuant to California Civil Code § 2924a et seq . or sale by the Court pursuant to California Code of Civil Procedure § 725a et seq . and any other applicable law.

1.21. “Hetch Hetchy Area” shall mean and refer to that certain parcel of land situated between the Hotel Unit and the Adjoining Hotel Parcel [owned by the City and County of San Francisco and] leased to the Owner of the Hotel Unit. The Hetch Hetchy Area is to be used as part of the operation of the hotel in conjunction with the Hotel Unit, but is separate from, and not part of, the Project.

1.22. “Hotel Building” shall mean and refer to the building and improvements within the Hotel Unit, including the garage located within the boundaries of the Hotel Unit.

1.23. “Hotel Unit” shall mean and refer to the Hotel Unit as further described in Section 2.2.A.(2).

1.24. “Member” shall mean and refer to a person entitled to membership in the Association as provided herein.

1.25. “Mortgage” shall include a deed of trust as well as a mortgage.

1.26. “Mortgagee” shall include a beneficiary or a holder of a deed of trust as well as a mortgagee.

1.27. “Mortgagor” shall include the trustor of a deed of trust as well as a mortgagor.

1.28. “Office Building” shall mean the building and improvements within the Office Unit, including the garage located within the boundaries of the Office Unit.

1.29. “Office Unit” shall mean and refer to the Office Unit as further described in Section 2.2.A.(1).

1.30. “Owner” or “Owners” shall mean and refer to the record holder or holders of title to a Condominium in the Project. This shall include any person having fee simple title to any Unit, but shall exclude persons or entities having any interest merely as security for the performance of an obligation. If a Condominium is sold under a contract of sale and the contract is recorded, the purchaser rather than the fee owner, shall be considered the “Owner” from and after the date the Association receives written notice of the recorded contract.

1.31. “Person” means a natural person, a corporation, a partnership, a limited liability company, a trustee, or other legal entity.

 

B-6


1.32. “Project” shall mean and refer to the condominium project established for, and situated within Parcel 1 of the Parcel Map, pursuant to this Declaration.

1.33. “Regular Assessments” shall mean and refer to a Regular Assessment determined and levied pursuant to Section 4.3A of this Declaration.

1.34. “Reimbursement Assessments” shall mean and refer to a Reimbursement Assessment levied pursuant to Section 4.3C of this Declaration.

1.35. “Rules” shall mean and refer to the rules adopted from time to time by the Association.

1.36. “Special Assessments” shall mean and refer to a Special Assessment determined and levied pursuant to Section 4.3B of this Declaration.

1.37. “Unit(s)” shall mean and refer to the elements of a Condominium in the Project, as defined in Section 2.2B, as a separate interest in space pursuant to Civil Code Section 1351(f), which is an element of the Project that is not owned in common with the other Owners. Each Unit is identified by separate number on the Condominium Plan, preceded by the word “UNIT”.

ARTICLE 2

DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT, DIVISION OF PROPERTY,

AND CREATION OP PROPERTY RIGHTS

2.1. Description of Property : The Project includes the Common Area, the Units, and all other improvements located thereon. Reference is made to the Condominium Plan for further details.

2.2. Division of Property : The Project is divided as follows:

A. Units : There are two (2) Units in the Project, which are designated and further shown and described on the Condominium Plan. Each Unit consists of the airspace, land, building[s] and other improvements located and included within the boundaries of the Unit as shown on the Condominium Plan. Included within each Unit are all of the following.

(1) Office Unit: The Office Building within the Office Unit and the airspace and land surrounding the Office Building, including the parking garage within the boundaries of the Office Unit. The boundaries of the Office Unit shall be as shown on the Condominium Plan, with the dimensions of the garage portion of the Office Unit, where adjacent to the garage portion of the Hotel Unit being to the interior unfinished surfaces of the garage located within the Office Unit. The Office Unit shall include all utility lines and utility facilities which serve the garage portion of the Office Unit, located exterior of the boundaries of the Office Unit and within the Hotel Unit. The Owner of the Office Unit shall have an easement for access to such utility lines and utility facilities which serve the garage of the Office Unit.

 

B-7


(2) Hotel Unit: The Hotel Building within the Hotel Unit and the airspace and land surrounding the Hotel Building and the parking garage located within the boundaries of the Hotel Unit. The boundaries of the Hotel Unit shall be as shown on the Condominium Plan, with the dimensions of the garage portion of the Hotel Unit, where adjacent to the garage portion of the Office Unit being to the interior unfinished surfaces of the Office Building parking garage, with all structural portion and components of the garage, such as slabs, footing and other structural components being within the Hotel Unit.

(3) Each Unit includes all improvements and utility installations located within its boundaries of which the Owner of that Unit has exclusive use.

(4) The Units do not include those areas and those things which are defined as “Common Area” in Section 1.7.

B. Common Area : That portion of the Project constituting the Common Area, shall include, without limitation, all elements described in Section 1.7. Each Unit Owner shall have, as appurtenant to his, her or its Unit, a fifty per cent percent (50%) undivided interest in the Common Area as described in Section 2.4. Each Unit shall have appurtenant to it nonexclusive rights for ingress, egress and support through the Common Area.

2.3. Exclusion, Encroachments : Each Unit is subject to such encroachments as are contained in the Building, whether the same now exist or may be later caused or created in any manner referred to in Section 9.5. In interpreting deeds and plans, the then existing physical boundaries of a Unit, whether in its original state or reconstructed in substantial accordance with the original plans thereof shall be conclusively presumed to be its boundaries rather than the boundaries expressed in the deed or plan, regardless of settling or lateral movement of the Building and regardless of minor variance between boundaries shown on the Condominium Plan or deed, and those of the Building.

2.4. Undivided Interests : The ownership of each Condominium in the Project shall include a Unit and a fifty percent (50%) undivided interest in the Common Area. The Common Interest appurtenant to each Unit is declared to be permanent in character and cannot be altered without the consent of the Owners of both of the Units. Such Common Interest cannot be separated from the Unit to which it is appurtenant. Each Owner of a Unit may use the Common Area in accordance with the purposes for which it is intended, in accordance with this Declaration and the Rules, without hindering the exercise of or encroaching upon the rights of the other Owner.

2.5. No Separate Conveyance of Undivided Interests or Easements : The undivided Common Interests and easements described in this Declaration which are established and are to be conveyed with the respective Units as indicated above, cannot be changed, except as set forth in this Declaration. Declarant, its successors, assigns and grantees covenant and agree that the undivided Common Interests and easements in the Common Area and the fee title to the respective Units conveyed therewith, shall not be separated or separately conveyed, and each such undivided Common Interest and easement shall be deemed to be conveyed or encumbered with its respective Unit even though the description in the instrument of conveyance or encumbrance may refer only to the fee title to the Unit.

 

B-8


2.6. Rights of Entry and Use : The Common Area shall be subject to the following rights of entry and use:

A. The access rights of the Association to maintain, repair or replace improvements or property located in the Common Area as described in Section 1.7.

B. The rights of the Owners, the Association, and the Declarant to install, maintain, repair or replace utilities as described in Article 6.

C. The encroachment easements described in Section 9.5.

D. The rights of Declarant during the construction period as described in Section 9.8.

2.7. Structural and Support Easements : There shall be reserved and established for the use and benefit of the Owners of each the Office Unit and the Hotel Unit, their successors and assigns, non-exclusive easements over and across the respective Units through those portions of the Project, including but not limited to, structural members, columns, beams and other supporting components within the Project, necessary for structural support of the improvements located within each of the Units and in the Common Area.

A. No Condominium Owner nor the Association shall take any action which would adversely affect the structural integrity or safety of the improvements situated within the Project, including those improvements situated within any Condominium Unit.

B. If additional structural support is required for a Condominium Unit then the Owner of the Condominium Unit which is affected thereby shall petition the other Unit Owner to establish the rights to undertake construction of such additional support as may be deemed required for such Condominium Unit, the approval and consent to which shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed, provided however, that any such additional support shall not materially interfere with the use and benefit of the other Unit. The costs of any such additional structural support shall be borne by the Unit Owner who requests such additional structural support.

C. In the event of damage or destruction of the improvements within the Project causing diminishment of structural support to a Unit in the Project, then the Association shall be responsible for undertaking, as a Common Expense, the repair or reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed improvements, as set forth in Section 8.3 hereof, and for furnishing, as a Common Expense, such structural support to the Project, and each of the Condominium Units, pursuant and subject to the provisions of Article 8 of this Declaration.

 

B-9


2.8. Partition Prohibited : The Common Area shall remain undivided as set forth in Section 2.5. Except as provided by California Civil Code § 1359, or authorized under Sections 8.3 or 8.4, no Owner shall bring any action for partition, it being agreed that this restriction is necessary in order to preserve the rights of the Owners with respect to the operation and management of the Project. Judicial partition by sale of a single Unit owned by two (2) or more persons and division of the sale proceeds is not prohibited hereby but partition of title of any Common Interests in and to a single Unit is prohibited.

2.9. Easement – Trash Compactor Area : There shall be reserved and established for the use and benefit of the Owner of the Office Unit, its tenants, agents, employees, successors and assigns, a non-exclusive easement for the use and enjoyment of the Trash Compactor located within the Hotel Unit, appurtenant to and for the benefit of the Office Unit, including the rights of access over any portion of the driveways and pathways on or within the Hotel Unit land area as reasonable and necessary for access to Trash Compactor within the Hotel Unit by the Owner of the Office Unit.

2.10. Easement – Office Courtyard Patio and Area : There shall be established for the use and benefit of the Owner of Office Unit, its tenants, guests, agents, employees, successors and assigns, an exclusive easement for the use and enjoyment of the Courtyard located within the Hotel Unit, as described on Condominium Plan as the Office Courtyard Patio Easement Area. Maintenance and repair of the Office Courtyard Patio shall be undertaken by the Owner of the Office Unit. Such maintenance and repair of the Office Courtyard Patio by the Owner of the Office Unit shall include all landscaping in the Courtyard area and repair of any water leaks from the Courtyard into the Hotel Unit.

2.11. Easement – Access to Office Loading Dock : There is reserved and established for the use and benefit of the Owner of the Office Unit, its tenants, occupants, agents, employees, successors and assigns, a non-exclusive easement for the vehicular and pedestrian access over and across the Hotel Unit and the Hetch Hetchy Area for the purpose of access to the loading dock of the Office Unit by the Owner of the Office Unit, its successors, assigns, tenants and occupants. Maintenance and repair of the areas used for such access shall be undertaken by the Owner of the Hotel Unit.

2.12. Easement – 20 Feet Hotel Ingress/Egress : There is reserved and established for the benefit and use of the Owner of the Hotel Unit, its tenants, occupants, agents, employees, successors and assigns, a non-exclusive 20 ft. wide easement over and across that portion of the Office Unit, exterior of the Office Building along the western boundary of land within the Office Unit for emergency vehicular and pedestrian access.

2.13. Easement – 20 Feet Office Ingress/Egress : There is reserved and established for the benefit and use of the Owner of the Office Unit, its tenants, occupants, agents, employees, successors and assigns, a non-exclusive 20 ft. wide easement over and across that portion of the Hotel Unit, exterior of the Hotel Building along the western boundary of land within the Hotel Unit for emergency vehicular and pedestrian access.

 

B-10


2.12. Access over Stairways : There is hereby reserved and established for the benefit of the Owner of the Office Unit, its tenants, guests, agents, employees, successors and assigns, for the benefit of the Office Unit a non-exclusive easement over and across the stairways of the garage portion of the Hotel Unit from the stairways within the garage portion of the Office Unit for pedestrian ingress and egress by the Owner of the Office Unit, its tenants, guests, agents, employees, successors and assigns.

2.13. Maintenance and Construction Easements : Easements over each Condominium Unit and the Common Area are reserved by Declarant, and hereby granted to the Association and each Unit Owner, for the purpose of performing such maintenance, repair and restoration, if any, as the Association or the Unit Owner may undertake in accordance with the provisions of this Declaration, and for the purpose of maintaining Utility Facilities lying within the Project.

2.14. Easement – 7 Feet Utility : There is reserved and established for the benefit and use of the Owner of the Hotel Unit, its tenants, occupants, agents, employees, successors and assigns, a non-exclusive utility easement that widens from 7 ft. to 45 ft. along El Camino Real, over and across that portion of the Office Unit, exterior of the Office Building along the western boundary of land within the Office Unit for the purpose of providing access for utility lines that supply the Hotel Unit.

2.17. Easement – 10 Feet Ingress/Egress : There is reserved and established for the benefit and use of the Owner of the Hotel Unit, its tenants, occupants, guests, agents, employees, successors and assigns, a non-exclusive 10 ft. wide ingress/egress easement over and across that portion of the Office Unit, exterior of the Office Building along the northwestern boundary of the Common Area for pedestrian and vehicular ingress and egress.

2.18. All Easements Part of Common Plan : Whenever any easements are reserved or created or are to be reserved or created herein, such easements shall constitute equitable servitudes for the mutual benefit of all property in the Project, even if only certain Units are specifically mentioned as subject to or benefiting from a particular easement, and when easements referred to herein are subsequently created by grant deeds, such easements are part of the common plan created by this Declaration for the benefit of all property Owners within the Project.

ARTICLE 3

ASSOCIATION

ADMINISTRATION, MEMBERSHIP AND VOTING RIGHTS

3.1. Association to Management : The management of the Project shall be vested in the Association to the extent stated in this Declaration. The Owners covenant and agree that the administration of the Project shall be in accordance with the provisions of this Declaration.

3.2. Membership : The Owner of a Unit shall automatically, upon becoming the Owner of the Unit, be a Member of the Association, and shall remain a Member thereof until such time as his ownership in the Unit ceases for any reason, at which time his membership in the Association shall automatically cease.

 

B-11


3.3. Transferred Membership : Membership in the Association shall not be transferred, encumbered, pledged, or alienated in any way, except upon the sale or encumbrance of the Condominium to which it is appurtenant, and then only to the purchaser, in the case of a sale, or mortgagee, in the case of any encumbrance of such Condominium. On any transfer of title to an Owner’s Condominium, including a transfer on the death of an Owner, membership passes automatically with title to the transferee. A mortgagee does not have membership rights until it obtains title to the Condominium by Foreclosure or deed in lieu thereof. Any attempt to make a prohibited transfer is void. No Member may resign his membership. On notice of a transfer, the Association shall record the transfer on its books.

3.4. Voting Rights : The Owner of each Condominium shall have one (1) vote as a Member of the Association.

ARTICLE 4

ASSESSMENTS AND LIENS

4.1. Creation of the Lien and Personal Obligation of Assessments : The Declarant, for each Condominium within the Project, hereby covenants, and each Owner of any Condominium, by acceptance of a deed for that Condominium, whether or not it shall be so expressed in such deed, covenants and agrees:

 

  (a) to pay to the Association all Regular Assessments, Special Assessments and Reimbursement Assessments, with such Assessments to be established and collected as subsequently provided in this Declaration, and

 

  (b) to allow the Association to enforce any assessment lien established under this Declaration by nonjudicial proceedings under a power of sale or by any other means authorized by law.

The Regular Assessments, Special Assessments and Reimbursement Assessments, together with interest, late charges, collection costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees, shall be a charge on the Condominium and shall be a continuing lien upon the Condominium against which each such Assessment is made, the lien to become effective upon recordation of a notice of delinquent Assessment. Each such Assessment, together with interest, late charges, collection costs, and reasonable attorneys’ fees, shall also be the personal obligation of the person who was the Owner of such Condominium at the time when the Assessment fell due. The personal obligation for delinquent Assessments shall not pass to his successors in title unless expressly assumed by them. No Owner shall be exempt from liability for payment of Assessments by waiver of the use or enjoyment of any of the Common Area, by the abandonment of the Owner’s Condominium, or for any other reason.

The interest of any Owner in the amounts paid pursuant to any Assessment upon the transfer of ownership shall pass to the new Owner. Upon the termination of these covenants for any reason, any amounts remaining from the collection of such Assessments after paying all amounts properly charged against such Assessments shall be distributed to the then Owners in the Project on the same pro rata basis on which the Assessments were collected.

 

B-12


4.2. Purpose of Assessments : The Assessments levied by the Association shall be used exclusively to promote the economic interests, safety, and welfare of all of the Owners of Units in the Project, and the tenants and other occupants of such Units, and to enable the Association to perform its obligations hereunder.

4.3. Assessments :

A. Regular Assessments : The Members shall annually, by mutual agreement, establish and levy Regular Assessments on an annual basis in an amount that the Members estimate will be sufficient to raise the funds needed to perform the duties of the Association during each fiscal year. The Regular Assessment shall include a portion for reserves in such amounts as the Members consider appropriate to meet the costs of the future repair, replacement or additions to the major improvements and fixtures that the Association is obligated to maintain and repair. Reserve funds shall be deposited in a separate account and the signatures of at least two (2) persons, [who shall be representatives of each of the Members], shall be required to withdraw monies from the reserve account.

B. Special Assessments : The Members, at any time, may levy a Special Assessment, by mutually consent, in order to raise funds for unexpected operating or other costs, insufficient operating or reserve funds, to reimburse the Association for costs incurred, or such other purposes as the Members consider appropriate. Special Assessments shall be allocated among the Units in the same manner as Regular Assessments.

C. Reimbursement Assessment : If one Member asserts that the other Member is obligated to reimburse the Member for costs incurred by the Association in the repair of damage to the Common Areas and facilities for which the Member or the Member’s guests or tenants were responsible and in bringing the Member and his Unit into compliance with the provisions of the Project Documents in the amount required to reimburse the Association for the actual costs incurred and the amounts incurred to enforce the Associations rights under this Declaration as are then permitted by law, the Member who so asserts may levy a Reimbursement Assessment against the other Member to reimburse the Association.

4.4. Division of Assessments : Both Regular Assessments and Special Assessment shall be levied equally between the Condominiums. [Notwithstanding the foregoing, Allocation of Common Expense for the use of the trash compactor as a portion of the Regular Assessment to the Unit Owners shall be based on a reasonable approximation of the volume of use by each Unit Owner of the trash compactor.]

4.5. Restrictions on Increases in Regular or Special Assessments : All votes for levying Regular Assessments on any Condominium or for levying a Special Assessment [except for Reimbursement Assessments] shall require the vote or written assent of both Members of the Association.

 

B-13


4.6. Collection of Assessments : Regular Assessments shall be determined on an annual basis as set forth in Section 4.3A of this Declaration, and shall be collected on a quarterly basis unless the Members agree otherwise. Special Assessments and Reimbursement Assessments may be collected in one (1) payment or periodically as the Members agree.

4.7. Date of Commencement of Regular Assessment; Due Dates : The Regular Assessments provided for in this Declaration shall commence as to all Condominiums in the Project on the first day of the month following the first conveyance of a Condominium to an Owner other than the Declarant. The first Regular Assessment shall be adjusted according to the number of months remaining in the calendar year. Regular Assessments may be reduced or abated pursuant to a management agreement entered into between Declarant and Association.

Subject to the provisions of Section 4.3 hereof, the Members shall fix the amount of the Regular Assessment against each Condominium and send written notice thereof to every Owner at least forty-five (45) days in advance of each Regular Assessment period, provided that failure to comply with the foregoing shall not affect the validity of any Assessment levied by the Members. The due dates shall be established by the Members.

4.8. Effect of Nonpayment of Assessments : Any Assessment not paid within fifteen (15) days after the due date shall be delinquent, shall bear interest at the rate of twelve percent (12%) per annum commencing thirty (30) days after the due date until paid, and shall incur a late payment penalty in an amount to be set by the Members from time to time, not to exceed the maximum permitted by applicable law.

4.9. Transfer of Condominium by Sale or Foreclosure : Except as provided herein, the sale or transfer of any Condominium shall not affect the lien for the Assessment established pursuant to Section 4.10 hereof as to such sold or transferred Condominium. However, the sale of any Condominium pursuant to Foreclosure of a First Mortgage shall extinguish the lien of any Assessments on that Condominium (including attorneys’ fees, late charges, or interest levied in connection therewith) as to payments which became due prior to such sale or transfer (except for assessment liens as to which a notice of delinquent assessments has been recorded prior to the date of recordation of the First Mortgage). No amendment of the preceding sentence may be made without the consent of both of the Owners of Condominiums and the consent of the Eligible Mortgage Holders holding First Mortgages on Condominiums comprising fifty-one percent (51%) of the Condominiums subject to First Mortgages. No sale or transfer shall relieve such Condominium from liability for any Assessments thereafter becoming due or from the lien thereof. The unpaid share of such Assessments shall be deemed to be Common Expenses collectible from all of the Condominium Owners including such acquirer, his successors or assigns.

 

B-14


If a Condominium is transferred, the grantor shall remain liable to the Association for all unpaid Assessments against the Condominium through and including the date of the transfer. The grantee shall be entitled to a statement from the Association, dated as of the date of transfer, setting forth the amount of the unpaid Assessments against the Condominium to be transferred and the Condominium shall not be subject to a lien for unpaid Assessments in excess of the amount set forth in the statement, provided, however, the grantee shall be liable for any Assessments that become due after the date of the transfer.

4.10. Priorities; Enforcement; Remedies : If an Owner fails to pay an Assessment when due, the Association, acting through the Member who is not delinquent in its Assessments, has the right, and option, to bring legal action against the Owner to enforce collection of the unpaid and past due Assessment, or may impose a lien on the Condominium owned by Owner pursuant to the provisions of Civil Code § 1367, or both. Suit to recover a money judgment for unpaid Assessments and attorneys’ fees, shall be maintainable without foreclosing or waiving the lien securing the same. Before the Association may place a lien upon a Condominium, pursuant to Civil Code § 1367(a), the Association shall notify the Owner in writing by Certified Mail of the fee and penalty procedures of the Association, provide an itemized statement of the charges owed by the Owner, including the principal owed, any late charges, and the method of collection, any attorney’s fees, and the collection practices used by the Association, including the right of the Association to the reasonable costs of collection. After compliance with the provisions of the Civil Code § 1367(a), the Association may record a notice of delinquent Assessment and establish a lien against the Condominium of the delinquent Owner prior and superior to all other liens except (1) all taxes, bonds, assessments and other levies which, by law, would be superior thereto, and (2) the lien or charge of any First Mortgage of record (meaning any recorded mortgage or deeds of trust with first priority over other mortgages or deeds of trust) made in good faith and for value. The notice of delinquent Assessment shall state the amount of the Assessment, collection costs, attorneys’ fees, late charges and interest, a description of the Condominium against which the Assessment and other sums are levied, the name of the record Owner, and the name and address of the trustee authorized by the Association to enforce the lien by sale. The notice shall be signed by any Member or officer of the Association or any management agent retained by the Association and shall be mailed in the manner set forth in Civil Code § 2924b to all record owners of the Condominium no later than ten (10) days after recordation.

Thirty (30) days following the recordation of the assessment lien, it may be enforced in any manner permitted by law, including sale by the court, sale by the trustee designated in the notice of delinquent Assessment, or sale by a trustee substituted pursuant to California Civil Code § 2934(a). Any sale by the trustee shall be conducted in accordance with the provisions of §§ 2924, 2924b, 2924c, 2924f, 2924g, 2924h and 2924j of the California Civil Code applicable to the exercise of powers of sale in mortgages and deeds of trust, including any successor statutes thereto, or in any other manner permitted by law. Nothing in this Declaration shall preclude the Association from bringing an action directly against an Owner for breach of the personal obligation to pay Assessments.

In the event that the provisions of the Civil Code sections referenced in this Section 4.11 are amended or modified to change the requirements or procedures for imposing, enforcing or foreclosing upon an assessment lien, then the provisions of this Section 4.11 shall be deemed amended and modified as required to conform to any such amendments or modifications of the provisions of the Civil Code.

 

B-15


The Association, acting on behalf of the Condominium Owners, shall have the power to bid for the Condominium at foreclosure sale, and to acquire and hold, lease, mortgage and convey the Condominium.

After acquiring title to the Condominium at foreclosure sale following notice and publication, the Association may execute, acknowledge and record a deed conveying title to the Condominium which deed shall be binding upon the Owners, successors, and all other parties.

4.11. Unallocated Taxes : In the event that any taxes are assessed against the Common Area, or the personal property of the Association, rather than against the Units, said taxes shall be included in the Assessments made under the provisions of Section 4.1 and, if necessary, a special Assessment may be levied against the Units in an amount equal to said taxes, to be paid in two (2) installments, thirty (30) days prior to the due date of each tax installment (or in more than two installments if any such tax is payable in more than two installments).

ARTICLE 5

DUTIES AND POWERS OF THE ASSOCIATION

5.1. Duties : In addition to the duties which may be enumerated elsewhere in this Declaration, and without limiting the generality thereof, the Association shall perform the following duties:

A. Maintenance : The Association shall maintain, repair, replace, restore, operate and manage, as a Common Expense, all of the Common Area, and all facilities (including Utility Facilities to the extent described in Section 6.3), improvements, furnishings, and equipment thereon, and all property that may be acquired by the Association, excluding any facilities improvements, furnishings, and equipment which are to be maintained, repaired, replaced, restored, operated or managed by a Unit Owner pursuant to this Declaration. The Unit Owners may elect to have one of the Unit Owners undertake the maintenance or repair of any portion of the Common Area instead of the Association, by unanimous vote or written ballot or written agreement between the Owners, the costs of which will be shared equally by the Unit Owners, unless they agree otherwise.

(1) The responsibility of the Association for payment for maintenance and repair shall not extend to repairs or replacements arising out of or caused by the willful or negligent act or omission of an Owner, or his guests, tenants or invitees. The Owner who is responsible for causing the need for such repair or replacement shall reimburse the Association for the costs thereof as herein set forth. If the Owner fails to make such payment within thirty (30) days, then the Association may make such payment and shall charge the responsible Owner therefore as a Reimbursement Assessment, which charge shall bear interest at the rate of twelve percent (12%) per

 

B-16


annum (but no greater than the maximum rate allowed by law) until paid in full. Any repairs arising out of, or caused by, the willful or negligent act of an Owner, or his guests, tenants or invitees, shall be made by the Association, unless the other Member requires the same to be made by the responsible Owner.

(2) The planter located within the Common Area Driveway shall be maintained by the Owner of the Office Unit, at the cost and expense of the Owner of the Office Unit Owner, unless the Unit Owners agree otherwise.

B. Insurance : The Association shall maintain such policy or policies of insurance as are required by Section 8.1 of this Declaration.

C. Discharge of Liens : The Association shall discharge by payment, if necessary, any lien against the Common Area, and charge the cost thereof to the Owner(s) responsible for the existence of the lien (after notice and a hearing, as provided in any Bylaws).

D. Assessments : The Association shall fix, levy, collect and enforce Assessments as set forth in Article IV hereof.

E. Payment of Expenses and Taxes : The Association shall pay all expenses and obligations incurred by the Association in the conduct of its business including, without limitation, all licenses, taxes or governmental charges levied or imposed against the property of the Association.

F. Enforcement : The Association shall be responsible for the enforcement of this Declaration.

The Association shall operate the Common Area of the Project in accordance with all applicable municipal, state, and federal laws, statutes and ordinances, as the case may be. The Association shall also, as a separate and distinct responsibility, insure that third parties (including Owners and their guests) utilize the Common Area in accordance with the aforementioned regulations. The Association shall, when it becomes aware of any violation of the aforementioned regulations, expeditiously correct such violations.

5.2. Powers : The Association shall have the following powers:

A. Utility Service : Subject to the affirmative vote or written consent of both of the Unit Owners, the Association shall have the authority (but not the obligation) to obtain and provide services for the benefit of all [or some] of the Condominiums, and assess the Owners who are provided each service for reimbursement of the costs of such services charge on the basis of the benefit of the services so rendered.

 

B-17


B. Easements : The Association shall have authority, by document signed or approved by both of the Members to grant easements (in addition to those shown on the Map) or Condominium Plan, and/or referred to in Article VI, where necessary for utilities, cable television, drainage, venting, sewer facilities and other such facilities over the Common Area to serve the Condominiums, and/or where necessary to satisfy or achieve appropriate governmental purpose or request.

C. Manager : The Association may employ a manager or other persons and contract with independent contractors or managing agents to perform all or any part of the duties and responsibilities of the Association, except for the responsibility to levy fines, impose discipline, hold hearings, file suit, record or foreclose liens, or make capital expenditures.

D. Access : For the purpose of performing construction, maintenance or emergency repair for the benefit of the Common Area, or the Owners in common, the Association’s agents or employees shall have the right, after reasonable notice (not less than twenty-four (24) hours except in emergencies) to the Owner thereof, to enter any Unit or to enter any portion of the Common Area at reasonable hours. Such entry shall be made with as little inconvenience to the Owner as practicable and any damage caused thereby shall be repaired by the Association at the expense of the Association.

E. Assessments, Liens, Penalties and Fines : The Association shall have the power to levy and collect Assessments in accordance with the provisions of Article IV hereof.

F. Enforcement : The Association shall have the authority to enforce this Declaration as set forth in Article IX hereof.

G. Contracts : The Association shall have the power to contract for goods and/or services for the discharge of its responsibilities.

H. Delegation : The Association shall have the power to delegate its authority and powers to committees, officers or employees of the Association, or to a manager employed by the Association.

I. Appointment of Trustee : The Association has the power to appoint or designate a trustee to enforce assessment liens by sale as provided in Section 4.11 and California Civil Code § 1367(b).

ARTICLE 6

UTILITIES

6.1 Owners’ Rights and Duties : The rights and duties of the Owners of Condominiums with respect to sanitary sewer, water, drainage, electric, gas, television receiving, telephone equipment, cables and lines, exhaust flues and heating and air-conditioning facilities (hereinafter referred to, collectively, as “Utility Facilities”) shall be as follows:

 

B-18


A. Whenever Utility Facilities are installed within the Project, which Utility Facilities or any portion thereof lie in or upon any portion of the Project owned by other than or in addition to the Owner of the portion of the Project served by said Utility Facilities, the Owners of (or their agents or employees, or agents or employees of the Association) any portion of the Project served by said Utility Facilities shall have the right, and are hereby granted an easement to the full extent necessary therefor, (after reasonable notice, not less than twenty-four (24) hours except in emergencies) to enter upon any portion of the Project or to have the utility companies enter upon any portion of the Project in or upon which said Utility Facilities, or any portion thereof, lie, to construct, reconstruct, repair, replace and generally maintain said Utility Facilities as and when necessary. The exact location of said easements shall be determined by reference to the final as-built plans for the Project.

B. Whenever Utility Facilities are installed with the Project which Utility Facilities serve more than one (1) Condominium in the Project, the Owner of each Condominium served by said Utility Facilities shall be entitled to the full use and enjoyment of such portions of said Utility Facilities as service his, her or its Condominium.

6.2. Easements for Utilities and Maintenance : Reciprocal non-exclusive easements are reserved, and are hereby established, over and through the Project and all areas thereof, between the Owners, for the installation, repair, and maintenance of electric, telephone, water, gas, and sanitary sewer lines and facilities, exhaust, heating and air conditioning facilities, plumbing vent pipes, communications, cable or master television antenna lines, drainage facilities, stairs, elevators, elevator shafts, service and utility room, as shown on the Map, as built, and as may be hereafter required or needed to service the Units or the Common Area.

6.3. Maintenance Obligations : The maintenance of a Utility Facility shall be undertaken by the Owner of the Unit which is served by such Utility Facility, or by the provider of such Utility Facility.

6.4. Hold Harmless : Each of the Owners shall hold the other Owner and the Association harmless from all liability, damage, cost or expense, including without limitation, reasonable attorneys fees incurred by the Owner, arising out of the negligent acts or omissions of the Owner in the course of their use of any of the easements in the Project which are created or reserved for the benefit of the Owner.

ARTICLE 7

USE RESTRICTIONS

In addition to all of the covenants contained herein, and the restrictions stated in the Center Declaration, the use of the Project and each Condominium therein is subject to the following:

7.1. Condominium Use : No Condominium shall be occupied and used except for the commercial uses permitted and allowed under this Declaration.

 

B-19


A. Office Unit . Unless both of the Owners agree otherwise, the Office Unit shall be used for the purposes of a commercial office building in accordance with, and in compliance with, the requirements of the City for operation of a commercial office building.

B. Hotel Unit . Unless the Owners agree otherwise, the Hotel Unit shall be used for the purposes of a commercial hotel in accordance with, and in compliance with, the requirements of the City for operation of commercial hotel. The Hotel Unit shall be operated in conjunction with the Hetch Hetchy Area and the Adjoining Hotel Parcel. The Hotel Unit shall also be used for the BMR Units in accordance with the requirements of the City. At such time as the BMR Units are no longer subject to the BMR Lease, as set forth in Section 9.15, the BMR Units may be used by the Hotel Unit Owner as additional hotel rooms, or as rental residences.

7.2. Rate of Insurance . Nothing shall be done in any Unit which will materially increase the rate of insurance for the Project, or any part of the Project, without the prior written consent of both of the Owners. Any such increase in the rate of insurance may be assessed against the Unit Owner causing such increase. No Owner of a Unit shall permit anything to be done or kept in the Unit which will result in the cancellation of insurance on the Project or any part thereof, or which would be in violation of any law, regulation or administrative ruling.

7.3. No Waste . No waste shall be committed in any Unit or in the Common Area.

7.4. No Nuisance . No nuisances shall be committed in any Unit or in the Common Area.

7.5. No Improper or Unlawful Use . No improper or unlawful use shall be made of the Project, or any part thereof, and all valid laws, zoning ordinances, and regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction over the Project and the Units shall be observed, in all material respects. All laws, orders, rules regulations or requirements of any governmental agency having jurisdiction over the Project shall be complied with by the Owners of the Units, in all material respects, at the sole expense of the Owner or the Association, whichever shall have the obligation to maintain or repair such portion of the Project, and if the latter, then the costs of such compliance shall be a Common Expense of the Association.

7.6. No Obstructions . No Unit Owner shall obstruct any of the Common Area, nor shall any Owner or occupant of a Unit place, or cause or permit anything to be placed, on or in any of the Common Area of the Project without the approval of the other Unit Owner.

7.7. No Residential Use . No Unit shall be used for residential purposes; provided however, that the Hotel Unit may be used for non-permanent residential occupancy by hotel guests consistent with the laws and regulations of the City for hotel uses. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the BMR Units may be used for residential use in accordance with the BMR Lease as described in Section 9.15, or as may be permitted by the City.

 

B-20


7.8. Animals : No animals of any kind shall be raised or bred in any Unit, and no animals shall be kept in any Unit, or on any portion of the Project with the exception of trained dogs used for assistance by visually impaired, hearing impaired or physically handicapped persons.

7.9. Noise and Vibration : The permitted uses described in Section 7.1 shall be conducted under the following conditions:

A. Noise : No facility shall produce noise at such levels as will be unreasonably offensive to Owners or occupants of any portion of the Center, or which shall violate any noise control requirements or regulations of the City.

B. Vibration : Any equipment creating vibrations shall be so located and mounted within the improvements on or within a Unit as to eliminate vibration hazard or nuisance beyond the boundary lines of the Unit in which such equipment is situated.

7.10. Architectural Control : No construction or alteration of any improvements within a Unit which affects the exterior appearance of a Building or the structure or mechanical components of the Building within a Unit in a manner that will materially impact the structural properties of the other Unit shall occur, until the same has been submitted in writing to the other Unit Owner, and approved by the other Unit Owner, which approval shall not be unreasonably refused or delayed.

A. Notwithstanding the foregoing, no permission or approval shall be required to decorate, paint or repaint the interiors of a Building within a Unit. No such permission or approval shall be required to repaint or rebuild a Unit in accordance with Declarant’s original plans and specifications.

B. Before commencement of any alteration or improvements, the Owner shall comply with all appropriate governmental laws and regulations.

7.11. Liability of Owners for Damage to Common Area : The Owner of each Unit shall be liable to the Association for all damages to the Common Area or improvements to the extent described in Section 5.1A.

7.12. Common Area Use : Nothing shall be stored, grown, or displayed in the Common Area that is not approved in advance by the Members.

7.13. Trash Disposal and Trash Compactor : All rubbish, trash and garbage shall be regularly removed from the Units and from the Common Area, and shall not be allowed to accumulate in an unreasonable or unhealthy manner. Trash, garbage and other waste shall only be kept in sanitary containers. All equipment for the storage or disposal of such materials shall be kept in a clean and sanitary condition in accordance with the Rules. The Association shall be responsible for removal of garbage, trash and recycling from the trash compactor located in the Hotel Unit, as a Common Expense. [Allocation to the Unit Owners of the Common Expense for removal of garbage, trash and recycling from the trash compactor as a portion of the Regular Assessment shall be based

 

B-21


on a reasonable approximation of the volume of use by each Unit Owner of the trash compactor.] No toxic or hazardous materials shall be discarded within the Project or the Center by dumping in the garbage chutes or containers, down the drains, or otherwise. No refuse collection may occur before 6:00 A.M.

7.14. Parking : Parking by tenants, guests, occupants and other users of the Hotel Building or the Office Building shall be limited to the parking spaces and garage areas within the Unit in which the respective Building is located. The parking spaces within the area which is designated as the Common Area Driveway Area shall be used by the Owner of the Hotel Unit.

7.15. Deliveries : No deliveries shall be permitted within the Project earlier than 7:00 A.M.

ARTICLE 8

INSURANCE; DAMAGE OR DESTRUCTION; CONDEMNATION

8.1. Association Insurance : The Association shall obtain and maintain the following insurance:

A. A policy of casualty insurance insuring for repair and replacement of improvements within the Common Area in such amounts and types of coverage as the Owners mutually agree as being prudent based upon the nature of the improvements within the Common Area.

B. An occurrence version comprehensive general liability policy insuring the Association, its agents, and the Owners against liability incident to the ownership or use of the Common Area or any other Association owned or maintained real or personal property; the amount of general liability insurance which the Association shall carry at all times shall be not less than Two Million Dollars ($2,000,000) and in no event less than the minimum amounts required by California Civil Code §§ 1365.7 and 1365.9;

C. Workers’ compensation insurance to the extent required by law (or such greater amount as the Members deem necessary); the Association shall obtain a Certificate of Insurance naming it as an additional insured in regard to workers’ compensation claims from any independent contractor who performs any service for the Association, if the receipt of such a certificate is practicable;

D. Fidelity bonds or insurance covering officers, directors, and employees that have access to any Association funds;

E. Officers and directors liability insurance in the minimum amounts required by California Civil Code §1365.7; and

F. Liability for non-owned and hired automobiles, such other insurance as the Members considers necessary or advisable.

 

B-22


Each Owner appoints the Association or any insurance trustee designated by the Association to act on behalf of the Owners in connection with all insurance matters arising from any insurance policy maintained by the Association, including without limitation, representing the Owners in any proceeding, negotiation, settlement or agreement.

Any insurance maintained by the Association shall contain “waiver of subrogation” as to the Association and its officers, directors and Members, the Owners and occupants of the Condominiums and mortgagees, and, if obtainable, a cross-liability or severability of interest endorsement insuring each insured against liability to each other insured. The Association shall periodically (and not less than once every three (3) years) review all insurance policies maintained by the Association to determine the adequacy of the coverage and to adjust the policies accordingly. The Association shall make available to all Members a copy of the Association’s insurance policies. The Association shall have no liability to any Owner or mortgagee if, after a good faith effort, it is unable to obtain the insurance required hereunder, because the insurance is no longer available or, if available, can be obtained only at a cost that the Members determine is unreasonable under the circumstances, or the Members fail to approve any Assessment increase needed to fund the insurance premiums.

8.2. Owner’s Insurance : Each Owner of a Unit shall insure the improvements within its Unit and its personal property against loss and shall at all times maintain in effect reasonable amounts of personal liability insurance, in accordance with this Declaration.

A. Standards for insurance:

(1) Each Owner of a Unit shall obtain, at such Owner’s expense, for at least the full replacement value thereof, covering the Unit, and all improvements within the Unit, including the mechanical equipment and appliances, fixtures, interior partitions and partition walls, furniture, wallcoverings, floorcoverings, and furnishings within the Unit and any improvements, betterments and additions made to the Unit by such Owner, or its predecessors;

(2) Personal liability insurance shall be in an amount of not less than Two Million Dollars ($2,000,000);

(3) All individually owned insurance shall contain a waiver of subrogation as to the Association and its officers, directors and Members, the Owners and occupants of the Condominiums and mortgagees, and all Members are deemed to have waived subrogation rights as to the Association and/or other Members, whether or not their policies so provide.

8.3. Damage or Destruction : If Project improvements are damaged or destroyed by fire or other casualty, the improvements shall be repaired or reconstructed pursuant to and in accordance with the provisions of this Section 8.3.

A. If the improvements within a Unit, or any portion thereof, are damaged or destroyed, the Unit Owner shall repair, restore or raze the improvements within the Unit within a reasonable period of time to the state and condition that the improvements within the Unit prior to the damage or destruction.

 

B-23


B. If the Common Area is damaged or destroyed, then the Association shall repair or restore the improvements within the Common Area to the state and condition of the improvements within the Common Area prior to the damage or destruction. In the event that insurance proceeds and other funds available to the Association for affecting the required repairs of the Common Area are not adequate to complete such repair, the Members shall consider levying a Special Assessment to and against each of the Condominium Units for the costs of such repairs that are not so covered by insurance proceeds.

C. Repair to Exclusive Use Easement Area. Repair to all elements, equipment and facilities located within any Exclusive Easement Areas shall be the responsibility of the Unit Owner that has been granted the use and benefit of such Exclusive Easement Area.

8.4 Repair Work. Any repair which is required hereunder shall be undertaken in accordance with the original as-built plans and specifications for the Project, and the particular improvements, modified as may be required by applicable building codes and regulations in force at the time of such repair.

A. In the event of damage to more than one Condominium Unit, the Owners shall each cooperate in the repair and reconstruction of their improvements and areas of responsibility by coordination of repair work and providing access where necessary over and across the respective Condominium Units and Common Area. The Association shall cooperate by coordination of repair within the Common Area, and providing such access over and across the Common Area as reasonably necessary for the Condominium Owners to effect such repair as they are required or permitted to undertake or cause hereunder.

8.5. Completion of Repairs . Repairs to the Project are to be undertaken and completed as promptly as reasonably possible under the circumstances, subject to delays that are beyond the reasonable control of the Association and the Owners. Any repair of improvements within a Condominium Unit shall be completed no later than two (2) years after the date of the casualty, subject to reasonable delays that are beyond the control of the party responsible for making the Repairs. If repairs to a Condominium Unit, or a portion thereof, require that repairs be first made to the Common Area or to other Unit, then the requirements of a Condominium Owner to complete such repair shall be subject to and contingent upon those repairs being made. The Association and the Condominium Owners shall take all appropriate steps before all repair is completed to erect necessary structures and take such precautions as are reasonable to preclude unauthorized access to the damaged areas of the Project or Condominium Units, and otherwise mitigate dangerous or hazardous conditions within the Project. To the extent which is reasonable and feasible, the Association and the Condominium Owners shall coordinate their work of repair and restoration of the portions of the Project for which they are responsible to repair or restore under this Declaration.

 

B-24


A. If the Owner of the Hotel Unit fails to commence and complete repairs to the improvements within the Hotel Unit in a reasonable manner and within a reasonably period of time, that reasonably permits the Owner of the Office Unit to repair and use the garage portion of the Office Unit that is located beneath the Hotel Unit for parking vehicles in a manner that complies with the requirements of the City for use of the Office Unit, then the Hotel Unit shall make and render available to the Owner of the Office Unit as a continuing right and license until such garage facility parking is completed and made available for use by the Owner of the Office Unit, sufficient area of land within the Hotel Unit to provide parking for the Office Unit.

8.6 Condemnation : If Project improvements are the subject of a condemnation action or eminent domain proceedings, any such action or proceedings shall be subject to the provisions of this Section 8.6.

A. The Association shall represent the Owners of the Project in any condemnation proceedings or in negotiations, settlements and agreements with the condemning authority for acquisition of the Common Area, or part thereof. In the event of a taking or acquisition of part or all of the Common Area by a condemning authority, the award or proceeds of settlement shall be payable to the Association, or any trustee appointed by the Association, for the use and benefit of the Owners and their mortgagees as their interests may appear.

B. In the event of any condemnation proceedings or action which affects only one of the Units, the Owner of that Unit shall be entitled to represent itself with respect to such proceedings or action. If such proceedings or action affects both of the Units, including any easement rights, rights of use or rights of support over any portion of the Project, then both Unit Owners shall be entitled to represent their respective interests in such proceedings or action. In the event of an award for the taking of all or a portion a Condominium Unit in the Project by eminent domain, the Owner of such Condominium Unit shall be entitled to receive the award for such taking. The Owners shall decide by majority vote whether to rebuild or repair the Project, or take other action. The remaining portion of the Project shall be resurveyed, if necessary, and this Declaration shall be amended to reflect such taking and to readjust proportionately the percentages of undivided interest of the remaining Owners in the Project. Proceeds of condemnation shall be distributed among Owners of Condominiums and their respective mortgagees according to the relative values of the Condominiums affected by the condemnation.

C. If there is a taking of substantially all of the Project, the Owners may terminate the legal status of the Project and, if necessary, bring a partition action under California Civil Code § 1359 or any successor statute, on the election to terminate by both of the Owners and the approval of Eligible Mortgage Holders holding mortgages on Condominiums which have at least fifty-one percent (51%) of the votes of Condominiums subject to Eligible Holder Mortgages. The proceeds from the partition shall be distributed to the Owners and their respective mortgagees in proportion to the fair market values of their Condominiums.

 

B-25


ARTICLE 9

GENERAL PROVISIONS

9.1. Enforcement : The Association, or any of its Members, shall have the right to enforce, by any proceeding at law or in equity, all restrictions, conditions, covenants, reservations, liens, and charges now or hereafter imposed by the provisions of this Declaration, and in such action shall be entitled to recover reasonable attorneys’ fees as are ordered by the Court. Failure by the Association or by any Owner to enforce any covenant or restriction herein contained shall in no event be deemed a waiver of the right to do so thereafter.

9.2. Invalidity of Any Provision : Should any provision or portion hereof be declared invalid or in conflict with any law of the jurisdiction where this Project is situated, the validity of all other provisions and portions hereof shall remain unaffected and in full force and effect.

9.3. Term: The covenants and restrictions of this Declaration shall run with and bind the Project, and shall inure to the benefit of and shall be enforceable by the Association or the Owner of any property subject to this Declaration, their respective legal representatives, heirs, successors, and assigns, for a term of seventy-five (75) years from the date this Declaration is recorded, after which time they shall be automatically extended for successive periods of ten (10) years, unless an instrument in writing, signed by both of the then Owners of the Condominiums, has been recorded within the year preceding the beginning of each successive period of ten (10) years, agreeing to change covenants and restrictions in whole or in part, or to terminate the same.

9.4. Amendments: Any amendment of this Declaration must be approved in writing by the Owners of both the Condominiums in the Project and must be certified in a writing executed and acknowledged by the President or Vice President of the Association and recorded and shall become effective upon being recorded in the Recorder’s office of the County of Santa Clara.

The foregoing notwithstanding, the following conditions and restrictions contained in this Declaration may not be amended without approval in writing from the City of Los Altos:

A. From Section 7.13. Trash Disposal and Trash Compactor : No refuse collection may occur before 6:00 A.M.

B. Section 7.15. Deliveries: In its entirety.

C. Section 9.15. BMR Units: In its entirety.

D. Section 9.16. Limitation on Access to Ray Avenue: In its entirety.

E. Section 9.17. Limitation on Use of Sports Court: In its entirety.

F. Section 9.18. Limitation on Use of Barbeque Area: In its entirety.

 

B-26


Additionally, this Section 9.4 of the Declaration may not be amended without approval in writing from the City of Los Altos.

9.5. Encroachment Rights : If any portion of the Common Area encroaches on any Unit or any portion of a Unit encroaches on the Common Area or the other Unit, due to engineering errors, errors or adjustment in original construction, reconstruction, repair, settlement, shifting, or movement of the Building, or any other cause, there shall be valid easements for the encroachments as long as the encroachments shall exist, and the rights and obligations of Owners shall not be altered in any way by the encroachment, settlement or shifting; provided, however, that in no event shall a valid easement for encroachment be created in favor of an Owner or Owners if the encroachment occurred due to the intentional conduct of the Owner or Owners other than adjustments by Declarant in the original construction. In the event the structure is partially or totally destroyed, and then repaired or rebuilt, the Owners agree that minor encroachments over adjoining Condominiums or Common Area shall be permitted and that there shall be valid easements for the maintenance of the encroachments so long as they shall exist. In the event that an error in engineering, design or construction results in an encroachment of a Unit into the Common Area, a correcting modification may be made in the subdivision map and/or Condominium Plan. Said modification may be in the form of a certificate of correction and shall be executed by Declarant (so long as Declarant is the sole Owner of the Project) and by Declarant’s engineer (in the case of a Condominium plan) and, in addition, by the city engineer (in the case of a subdivision map or parcel map). The Members, by vote or written approval, may authorize the execution of the certificate of correction.

9.6. Rights of First Lenders : No breach of any of the covenants, conditions and restrictions herein contained, nor the enforcement of any lien provisions herein, shall render invalid the lien of any First Mortgage on any Unit made in good faith and for value, but all of said covenants, conditions and restrictions shall be binding upon and effective against any Owner whose title is derived through Foreclosure or trustee’s sale, or otherwise. Notwithstanding any provision in the Project Documents to the contrary, First Lenders shall have the following rights:

A. Copies of Project Documents : The Association shall make available to Owners of Units and First Lenders, and to holders, insurers or guarantors of any First Mortgage, current copies of this Declaration, any Bylaws, any Rules, and the books, records and financial statements of the Association. “Available” means available for inspection and copying, upon request, during normal business hours or under other reasonable circumstances. The Association may impose a fee for providing the foregoing which may not exceed the reasonable cost to prepare and reproduce the requested documents.

B. Audited Statement : Any holder, insurer or guarantor of a First Mortgage shall be entitled, upon written request, to an audited financial statement for the immediately preceding fiscal year, free of charge to the party so requesting. Such statement shall be furnished within a reasonable time following such request.

 

B-27


C. Notice of Action : Upon written request to the Association, identifying the name and address of the Eligible Mortgage Holder or Eligible Insurer or Guarantor, and the Unit number or address, such Eligible Mortgage Holder or Eligible Insurer or Guarantor will be entitled to timely written notice of: (1) any condemnation loss or any casualty loss which affects a material portion of the Project or any Unit on which there is a First Mortgage held, insured, or guaranteed by such Eligible Mortgage Holder or Eligible Insurer or Guarantor, as applicable; (2) any default in performance of obligations under the Project Documents or delinquency in the payment of Assessments or charges owed by an Owner of a Unit subject to a First Mortgage held, insured or guaranteed by such Eligible Mortgage Holder or Eligible Insurer or Guarantor, which remains uncured for a period of sixty (60) days; (3) any lapse, cancellation or material modification of any insurance policy or fidelity bond maintained by the Association; (4) any proposed action which would require the consent of a specified percentage of Eligible Mortgage Holders as specified in Section 9.6D. The Association shall discharge its obligation to notify Eligible Mortgage Holders or Eligible Insurers or Guarantors by sending written notices required herein to such parties, at the address given on the current request for notice, in the manner prescribed by Section 9.11.*

D. Consent to Action :

(1) Except as provided by statute or by other provision of the Project Documents in case of substantial destruction or condemnation of the Project:

(a) The consent of both of the Owners of Units and the approval of Eligible Mortgage Holders holding mortgages on Units which have at least sixty-seven percent (67%) of the voting power of Units subject to Eligible Holder Mortgages, shall be required to terminate the legal status of the Project as a Condominium Project;

(b) The consent of both of the Owners of Units and the approval of Eligible Mortgage Holders holding mortgages on Units which have at least fifty-one percent (51%) of the voting power of the Units subject to Eligible Holder Mortgages, shall be required to add or amend any material provisions of the Project Documents which establish, provide for, govern or regulate any of the following: (i) voting; (ii) Assessments, assessment liens or priority of such liens; (iii) reserves for maintenance, repair and replacement of the Common Area(s) (or Units if applicable); (iv) insurance or fidelity bond; (v) rights to use of Common Areas; (vi) responsibility for maintenance and repair of the several portions of the Project; (vii) expansion or contraction of the Project or the addition, annexation or withdrawal of property to or from the Project (except as provided in paragraph D(1) above); (viii) redefinition of boundaries of any Unit, except in accordance with this Declaration; (ix) reallocation of interests in the Common Areas or rights to their use, except in accordance with this Declaration; (x) convertibility of Units into Common Areas or of Common Areas into Units; (xi) imposition of any right of first refusal or similar restriction on the right of an Owner to sell, transfer, or otherwise convey its, his or her Unit; (xii) any provisions which are for the express benefit of mortgage holders, Eligible Mortgage Holders, or Eligible Insurers or Guarantors of First Mortgages on Units; (xiii) restoration or repair of the Project (after a hazard damage or partial condemnation) in a manner other than specified herein;

 

B-28


(c) An Eligible Mortgage Holder who receives a written request to approve additions or amendments who does not deliver or post to the request party a negative response within thirty (30) days after the notice of the proposed addition or amendment shall be deemed to have approved such request, provided the notice has been delivered to the mortgage holder by certified or registered mail, return receipt request.

(2) Except as provided by statute in case of condemnation or substantial loss to the Units and/or common elements of the Project, unless the holder(s) of at least two-thirds (2/3) of the First Mortgages (based upon one (1) vote for each First Mortgage owned), or both of the Owners of the Condominiums have given their prior written approval, the Association and/or the Owners shall not be entitled to:

(a) By act or omission, seek to abandon or terminate the Project (except for abandonment or termination provided by law in the case of substantial destruction by fire or other casualty or in the case of a taking by condemnation or eminent domain);

(b) Change the pro rata interest or pro rata obligations of any individual Unit for the purpose of: (i) levying Assessments or charges or allocating distributions of hazard insurance proceeds or condemnation awards, or (ii) determining the pro rata share of ownership of each Unit in the Common Area; provided that no Owner’s undivided interest in the Common Area may be changed without the consent of that Owner;

(c) Partition or subdivide any Unit:

(d) By act or omission, seek to abandon, partition, subdivide, encumber, sell or transfer the Common Area. (The granting of easements for public utilities or for other public purposes consistent with the intended use of the Common Area by the Condominiums shall not be deemed a transfer within the meaning of this clause);

(e) Use hazard insurance proceeds for losses to any Condominium property (whether to Units or to Common Area) for other than the repair, replacement or reconstruction of such property.

E. Right of First Refusal : The right of an Owner to sell, transfer, or otherwise convey his or her Unit shall not be subject to any right of first refusal or similar restriction.

F. Reserves : Condominium dues or charges shall include an adequate reserve fund for maintenance, repairs, and replacement of those Common Area improvements which the Association is obligated to maintain and that must be replaced on a periodic basis, and shall be payable in regular installments of the Regular Assessments, rather than by Special Assessments.

G. Priority of Liens : Any lien created under the provisions of this Declaration is expressly made subject and subordinate to the lien and encumbrance of any First Mortgage that encumbers all or any portion of the Project, or any Unit. Each holder of a First Mortgage lien on a

 

B-29


Condominium who comes into possession of the Condominium by virtue of Foreclosure of the First Mortgage, or any purchaser at a foreclosure sale under a first deed of trust, will take the Condominium free of any claims for unpaid Assessments and fees, late charges, fines or interest levied in connection with such claims, against the Condominium which accrue prior to the time such holder takes title to the Condominium, except for claims for a pro rata share of such Assessments or charges to all Condominiums including the mortgaged Condominium, and except for assessment liens as to which a notice of delinquent assessment has been recorded prior to the First Mortgage.

H. Distribution of Insurance or Condemnation Proceeds : No provision of the Project Documents gives an Owner, or any other party, priority over any rights of First Lenders in the case of a distribution to Owners of insurance proceeds or condemnation awards for losses to or taking of Units and/or Common Area.

I. Status of Loss to Facilitate Resale : Any First Mortgage given to secure a loan to facilitate the resale of a Condominium after acquisition by foreclosure or by a deed in lieu of foreclosure or by an assignment in lieu of foreclosure, shall be deemed to be a loan made in good faith and for value and entitled to all of the rights and protections of Mortgages under this Declaration.

9.11. Notice : Any notice permitted or required by this Declaration of the Association may be delivered either personally or by mail. If delivery is by mail, first class or registered, it shall be deemed to have been delivered seventy-two (72) hours after a copy of the same has been deposited in the United States mail, first class, postage prepaid, addressed to the person to be notified at the current address given by such person to the Association, or addressed to the Unit of such person if no address has been given to the Association.

9.12. Alternative Dispute Resolution :

A. Prior to initiating the prosecution of a civil action solely for declaratory relief or injunctive relief to enforce the Project Documents, or for declaratory relief or injunctive relief to enforce the Project Documents in conjunction with a claim for monetary damages not in excess of five thousand dollars ($5,000), the Association and the Unit Owners shall endeavor to submit the matter to alternative dispute resolution in compliance with the provisions of Section 1354(b) of the California Civil Code.

B. The Association shall comply with the requirements of California Civil Code Section 1354(i) by providing Members of the Association annually with a summary of the provisions of California Civil Code Section 1354, including the following language: “Failure by any Member of the Association to comply with the pre-filing requirements of Section 1354 of the Civil Code may result in the loss of your rights to sue the Association or another Member of the Association regarding enforcement of the governing documents.”

 

B-30


C. Any dispute between the Owners under this Declaration or with respect to the operation of the Project, or their respective rights and duties under this Declaration (“Dispute”), shall be resolved by the Owners first seeking to resolve the dispute by mediation. If mediation fails to resolve the dispute, then the Owners shall submit the dispute to binding arbitration as hereinafter set forth:

(1) Mediation. If the Dispute cannot be resolved by negotiations among the parties involved, in the judgment of any party involved therewith that efforts at negotiations have not yielded sufficient progress to encourage further and continued negotiations, the parties to the Dispute shall submit the Dispute to mediation by a mediator mutually selected by the parties involved with the Dispute.

(a) Such mediator shall be a party experienced with the process of professional mediation in commercial real estate matters, who shall be impartial, independent and neutral, and who has no history of relationship with any party to the Dispute, except to the extent disclosed and agreed upon by all parties involved with the Dispute. If the parties are unable to agree upon a mediator within thirty (30) days from the date of service by any party upon the other parties of a notice to mediate, then the mediator shall be appointed under the procedure stipulated in the Rules of Commercial Mediation of the American Arbitration Association (“AAA”).

(b) The parties reserve no more than five (5) business days for the mediation process. If the dispute is not resolved within the reserved time period, the parties shall be required to resolve such Dispute by arbitration as set forth below.

(2) Arbitration. If a Dispute is not resolved by Mediation as set forth above, then any Dispute shall be resolved, at the request of any party to this agreement, by final and binding arbitration conducted at a location determined by the arbitrator in Los Altos, California, or such other location as the parties may agree, administered, unless the parties agree otherwise, by and in accordance with the then existing rules and procedures of the American Arbitration Association (“AAA”), Commercial Arbitration Rules, and judgment upon any award rendered by the arbitrator may be entered by any state or federal court having jurisdiction thereof.

(a) Selection of Arbitrator. The parties shall select and appoint a single Arbitrator by mutual agreement. If the parties have not agreed within ten (10) days of the notice of intention to arbitrate on the selection of an arbitrator willing to serve, then AAA shall appoint a qualified Arbitrator to serve within thirty (30) days after notice of either party to AAA that the parties were unable to select an arbitrator. (Any arbitrator chosen to serve in accordance with this subsection (a) is referred to herein as the “Arbitrator”.) The Arbitrator shall be neutral and impartial. The Arbitrator shall be fully active in the Arbitrator’s occupation or profession and knowledgeable as to the subject matter. The foregoing shall not preclude otherwise qualified retired lawyers or judges.

(b) Compensation. The Arbitrator shall be fully compensated for all time spent in connection with the arbitration proceedings, in accordance with a reasonable hourly rate, for all time spent with the arbitration proceedings. Pending final award, the Arbitrator’s compensation and expenses shall be advanced equally by the Parties.

 

B-31


(c) Fees and Costs. As soon as practicable after selection of the arbitrator, the arbitrator or his or her designated representative shall determine a reasonable estimate of anticipated fees and costs of the arbitrator, and render a statement to each party setting forth that party’s prorata share of said fees and costs. Thereafter, each party shall, within ten (10) days of receipt of said statement, deposit said sum with the arbitrator. Failure of any party to make such a deposit shall result in a forfeiture by the non-depositing party of the right to prosecute or defend the claim which is the subject of the arbitration, but shall not otherwise serve to abate, stay or suspend the arbitration proceedings.

(d) Discovery. The arbitrator shall have discretion to order a pre-hearing exchange of information by the parties, including without limitation, production of requested documents, exchange of summaries of testimony, of proposed witnesses, and examination by deposition of parties, and other such discovery the Arbitrator deems appropriate under the circumstances, taking into account the needs of the parties and the desirability of making discovery expeditious and cost-effective.

(e) Award. The Arbitrator shall promptly (within 60 days of the conclusion of the proceedings, or such longer period as to which the parties mutually agree) determine the claims of the parties, and render a final award in writing, providing a concise statement of the general basis of his or her conclusions. The Arbitrator may award all or part of a party’s reasonable attorneys’ fees and costs of arbitration, taking into account the final result of the arbitration, the conduct of the parties and other relevant factors. The Arbitrator may not award punitive damages, indirect, consequential, or special damages.

(f) Judgment. A judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator may be entered in any court having jurisdiction thereof.

9.13. Execution and Delivery of Instruments : Any party which is subject to the terms of this Declaration, whether such party is an Owner, a lessee or sublessee of an Owner, an occupant of a Unit, a Member or officer of the Association, or otherwise, shall, upon prior reasonable written request at the expense of any such other party requesting the same, execute, acknowledge and deliver to such other party such instruments, in addition to those specifically provided for herein, and take such other action as such other party may reasonably request to effectuate the provisions of this Declaration or of any transaction contemplated herein or to confirm or perfect any right to be created or transferred hereunder or pursuant to any such transaction.

9.14. Number; Gender : The singular and plural number and masculine, feminine and neuter gender shall each include the other where the context requires.

9.15. BMR Units : The BMR Units shall be leased by the Owner of the Hotel Unit to a non-profit entity for rental to qualified occupants pursuant to the City “below-market” rate residences program subject to a lease between the Hotel Unit Owner and the non-profit entity (“BMR Lease”). The BMR Units are to be provided parking in a portion of the Hotel Unit garage. At such time as the BMR Units are no longer subject to the BMR Lease, the BMR Units may be used by the Hotel Unit Owner as additional hotel rooms or as rental residences, subject to approval by the City of Los Altos.

 

B-32


9.16. Limitations on Access to Ray Avenue : There shall be no access to Ray Avenue which adjoins the Project from the Hotel Unit by any hotel occupants, guests, or employees. The Hotel Unit Owner shall establish procedures to limit pedestrian access to Ray Avenue solely to occupants of the BMR Units. There shall be no vehicular access to and from Ray Avenue to the Project, with the exception of emergency vehicles.

9.17. Limitation on Use of Sports Court : The hours of use for the sports court of the Hotel Unit shall be limited everyday to 9:00 AM to 9:00 PM.

9.18. Limitation on Use of Barbeque Area : The hours of use for the barbeque area of the Hotel Unit shall be limited to 9:00 AM to 9:00 PM, one day per week. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the occupants of any BMR Unit shall be allowed use of the barbeque area any day of the week between the hours of 9:00 AM and 9:00 PM other than that day the occupants of the remainder of the Hotel Unit use the barbeque area.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF , the undersigned, being the Declarant herein, has executed this Declaration this             day of             , 2000.

Los Altos—El Camino Associates, LLC, a California limited liability company,

 

By:

   
  Peter Pau
  Its Manager

 

B-33


STATE OF CALIFORNIA

   )
   ) ss.

COUNTY OF                     

   )

On this             day of             , 2000, before me,             , a notary public for the state, personally appeared             , known to me or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument, and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument.

WITNESS my hand and official seal.

    

Notary Public, State of California

  

 

B-34


EXHIBIT C – RULES AND REGULATIONS

4440 El Camino Building • 4440 El Camino Real • Los Altos, California

1. Reserved .

2. Reserved .

3. Obstructions . Tenant will not cause the Outside Areas, Condominium Common Areas, or sidewalks or driveways outside the Building to be obstructed. Landlord may, at Tenant’s expense, remove any such obstruction without prior notice to Tenant.

4. Trash . Tenant may not litter in the Outside Areas, or sidewalks or driveways outside the Building.

5. Public Safety . Tenant will not throw anything out of doors, windows or skylights, down passageways or over walls. Tenant will not use any fire exits or stairways in the Building except in case of emergency.

6. Keys and Locks . Landlord may from time to time install and change locks on entrances to the Project, Building, and will provide Tenant a number of keys to meet Tenant’s reasonable requirements. Additional keys will be furnished by Landlord at Tenant’s cost. At the end of the Term, Tenant will promptly return to Landlord all keys for the Building issued by Landlord to Tenant. Unless Tenant obtains Landlord’s prior written consent (which shall not be unreasonably withheld, delayed or conditioned), Tenant will not add any locks or change existing locks on any door to the Building Premises.

7. Aesthetics . Unless Tenant obtains Landlord’s prior written consent (which may be withheld in Landlord’s sole and absolute discretion), Tenant may not:

(a) Attach any awnings, signs, displays or projections to either the outside walls or windows of the Building, or to any part of the Premises visible from outside the Premises;

(b) Hang any non-Building Standard curtains, blinds, shades or screens in any window or door of the Premises;

(c) Coat or sunscreen the interior or exterior of any windows; or

(d) Place any objects on windowsills.

8. Reserved .

9. HVAC Operation . Tenant will not obstruct the HVAC convectors or diffusers, or adjust or interfere with the HVAC system. Tenant will assist the HVAC system in maintaining comfort in the Premises by drawing shades, blinds and other window coverings in the Premises as may be reasonable required. Tenant may not use any method of heating or cooling the Premises other than that supplied by Landlord.

 

C-1


10. Plumbing . Tenant will use plumbing fixtures only for the purpose for which they are constructed. Tenant will reimburse Landlord for any damage caused by Tenant’s misuse of plumbing fixtures.

11. Equipment Location . Landlord may specify the location of any of Tenant’s business machines, mechanical equipment or other property that are unusually heavy, may damage the Building, or may cause vibration, noise or annoyance to other tenants. Tenant will reimburse Landlord for any professional engineering certification or assistance reasonably required to determine the location of these items.

12. Bicycles . Tenant may not bring bicycles or other vehicles into the Building or Premises. Bicycles and other vehicles may only be parked in areas designated by Landlord. As soon as reasonably practicable following the Execution Date, Landlord will install and/or designate bicycle parking or storage at the Project, and prior thereto Tenant’s employees may store their bicycles in certain existing, caged storage areas in the Parking Garage to be reasonably designated by Landlord prior to the Delivery Date.

13. Animals . Tenant may not bring any birds or animals, excepting seeing-eye/assistance dogs, into the Building or Premises, and further excepting small fish to be kept in aquariums.

14. Reserved .

15. Plumbing . Plumbing and appliances may be used only for the purposes for which constructed. No sweeping, rubbish, rags, or other unsuitable material may be thrown or placed therein. Any stoppage or damage resulting to any fixtures or appliances from misuse by any Tenant or Tenant party is payable by Tenant.

17. Lodging . No portion of the Building may be used as lodging rooms or for any immoral or unlawful purposes.

18. Elevators . Any use of the elevators for purposes other than normal passenger use (such as moving to or from the Building or delivering freight) must be scheduled through the office of the Property Manager. Tenant will reimburse Landlord for any extra costs incurred by Landlord in connection with any such non-passenger use of the elevators.

19. Moving and Deliveries . Moving of Tenant’s Personal Property and deliveries of materials and supplies to the Premises must be made during the times and through the entrances, elevators and corridors reasonably designated by Landlord. Moving and deliveries may not be made through any of the main entrances to the Building without Landlord’s prior permission. Any hand truck or other conveyance used in the Outside Areas must be equipped with rubber tires and rubber side guards to prevent damage to the Building and its property. Tenant will promptly reimburse Landlord for the cost of repairing any damage to the Building or its property caused by any person making deliveries to the Premises.

 

C-2


20. Solicitation . Canvassing, soliciting and peddling in the Building are prohibited and Tenant will cooperate in preventing the same.

21. Food . Only persons approved from time to time by Landlord may prepare, solicit orders for, sell, serve or distribute food in or around the Project. Except as may be specified in the Lease, and excluding the cafeteria existing in the Building on the Execution Date, and except for microwave cooking within break-room areas of the Premises, Tenant will not use the Premises, or any portion thereof for preparing or dispensing food, or soliciting of orders for sale, serving or distribution of food. Notwithstanding the above, Landlord hereby consents to the periodic catering by third parties of food and meals to Tenant and its employees for consumption within the Premises or the Patio/Courtyard Area, provided that said catering by third parties otherwise is in compliance with the terms of this Lease.

22. Work Orders . Only authorized representatives of Tenant may request services or work on behalf of Tenant. Tenant may not request that Building employees perform any work outside of their duties assigned by Landlord.

23. Smoking . Neither Tenant nor its Affiliates shall smoke or permit smoking in any part of the Project in which Landlord, in Landlord’s sole and absolute discretion, prohibits smoking. Landlord may designate the entire Project a no-smoking area, excepting areas in which Landlord, in Landlord’s sole and absolute discretion, permits smoking.

24. Firearms . Tenant will not knowingly permit any Tenant party to bring any handgun, firearm or other weapons of any kind into or about the Building.

25. Rules Applied . These Rules and Regulations apply equally to Tenant’s Affiliates and others permitted by Tenant to access, use or occupy the Premises. Landlord may rescind any of these Rules and Regulations.

 

C-3


EXHIBIT D – PARKING

4440 El Camino Building • 4440 El Camino Real • Los Altos, California

1. Tenant and its employees and customers shall have exclusive rights to park in surface parking areas of the Outside Areas and in the Parking Garage (all parking in the Condominium Common Areas is reserved for the owner of Unit 2). Landlord shall not be obligated to tow cars or otherwise enforce Tenant’s exclusive use and/or parking rights in the Outside Areas or the Parking Garage, and Tenant shall be solely responsible for enforcing the same. Except for Landlord’s grant of parking rights to Tenant and its employees and customers as set forth in this paragraph, and except as required by Laws ( e.g. , with respect to the fire department and police), or except as may be provided in the Condominium Declaration, Landlord shall not grant any rights to park in the Outside Areas or in the Parking Garage. Landlord hereby confirms to Tenant that as of the Execution Date, (a) the Parking Garage contains three hundred forty five (345) parking spaces, and (2) the Outside Areas contain eleven (11) parking spaces (two of which are handicap spaces), which eleven spaces are on the side of the Building fronting El Camino Real. Tenant shall comply with and observe the requirements and restrictions of any conditions, covenants, restrictions, and easements respecting the “north” and “south” driveways providing access from El Camino Real as provided in the Condominium Declaration.

2. Landlord shall be entitled from time to time temporarily to prevent public access to all or any portion of the Outside Areas, such driveways, and the Parking Garage in order to prevent a public dedication thereof, and in connection therewith shall use reasonable efforts to minimize any disruption of Tenant’s use of such facilities.

3. Tenant shall use such all parking areas allocated to Tenant solely for purposes of parking vehicles used by its employees, clients, and contractors only for such period of time as such entities are working within the Premises or Outside Areas. Tenant shall not permit any employees, clients, contractors or other entities within its control to use such parking areas for any purposes inconsistent with the preceding sentence. Neither Tenant nor its employees, clients, or contractors shall be obligated to pay any parking charge or fee for parking within such parking areas (subject to Tenant’s obligation to pay for maintenance and operation of such parking areas as Expenses pursuant to other provisions of the Lease). Notwithstanding the foregoing, and subject to applicable Laws, Tenant shall be entitled to use parking spaces in the Parking Garage for purposes of storing containers, provided that (i) such storage area is fenced and secured in a fashion suitable to Landlord in its reasonable judgment, (ii) the location of the parking spaces so utilized for storage is approved by Landlord which approval shall not unreasonably be withheld, (iii) Tenant maintains such spaces, and is solely responsible for all security relating thereto, (iv) the property and liability insurance required to be carried by Tenant under this Lease covers such storage area, (v) such use of parking spaces for storage does not reduce the number of parking spaces available for Tenant’s exclusive use to below the minimum number of parking spaces required by the City of Los Altos to be made available for Tenant’s parking and does not otherwise violate any applicable Laws, and (vi) upon expiration or sooner termination of the Term, Tenant shall unless otherwise directed by Landlord in writing remove the fencing for such storage area and repair any damage to the Parking Garage

 

D-1


resulting from such fencing such that the areas so affected are restored to their original condition subject only to reasonable wear and tear (subject to Laws, Landlord approves of the currently fenced areas in the Parking Garage being used for such storage as of the Execution Date). Tenant shall comply with and observe any reasonable rules and regulations from time to time promulgated by Landlord respecting the use of all parking areas.

4. Landlord shall have the right from time to time to promulgate reasonable and consistently applied rules and regulations regarding the Parking Garage (and parking in the Outside Areas), the spaces and the use thereof, including, but not limited to, rules and regulations controlling the flow of traffic to and from various parking areas, the angle and direction of parking and the like. Tenant shall comply with and cause its employees and visitors to comply with all such rules and regulations as well as all reasonable additions and amendments thereto.

5. Tenant shall not store or permit its employees to store any automobiles in the Parking Garage for longer than seven (7) days without the prior written consent of Landlord. If Tenant’s employees desire to leave their automobiles in the Parking Garage for more than seven (7) days, Tenant shall provide Landlord with prior notice thereof designating the license plate number and model of such automobile and the parking space, which must be one of Tenant’s allocated reserved parking spaces. Except for emergency repairs, Tenant and its employees shall not perform any work on any automobiles while located in the Parking or at the Project.

6. Landlord shall have the right to temporarily close the Parking Garage or certain areas therein in order to perform necessary repairs, maintenance and improvements to the Parking Garage. In such event, Landlord will make available alternative parking in reasonable proximity to the Building on a space for space basis.

7. Tenant shall not assign or sublease any of the parking spaces at the Project (except to a Permitted Transferee) without the consent of Landlord, which such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed and provided that Landlord shall not be required to consider any such request except in connection with a concurrent request for a consent to a Transfer.

8. For each parking space covered under this Lease, Tenant will be provided with (1) parking permit which may be evidenced and controlled by a parking sticker or other mechanism, device or system specified by Landlord from time to time. With respect to such permits, Tenant covenants and agrees as follows:

 

  a. Only one (1) vehicle per permit shall have access to the Parking Garage.

 

  b. Tenant shall at all times maintain with Landlord a list of permits held by Tenant, which list shall be in form, scope, and substance reasonably satisfactory to Landlord, and shall identify each individual to whom a permit has been issued, the vehicle used by such individual, and the license plate number of such vehicle.

 

D-2


  c. Tenant shall be responsible for any damage to the Parking Garage caused by any person using a permit which has been issued to Tenant.

 

  d. In the event of material unauthorized or material improper use of a permit, as determined by Landlord in its reasonable judgment, Landlord may withdraw the permit and terminate Tenant’s right to use the permit, all without terminating or otherwise affecting tenant’s responsibilities, obligations, and liabilities under this Lease. Notwithstanding the foregoing, however, if such unauthorized or improper use of a permit is made by an employee of Tenant without Tenant’s knowledge, consent, or approval, then such employee may be barred by Landlord from using the permit and any parking spaces in the Garage, and in such event, Landlord shall permit Tenant to reissue the permit to another employee of Tenant subject to the provisions of this parking agreement.

 

  e. Each permit shall at all times remain the property of Landlord, and Tenant shall surrender all permits to Landlord immediately upon termination of this Lease. If any permit is lost, damaged or not returned to Landlord on request, payment of a replacement fee must be delivered to Landlord before a replacement permit is issued to Tenant.

9. Tenant shall indemnify and hold harmless Landlord from and against all claims, losses, liabilities, damages, costs, and expenses (including, but not limited to, attorneys’ fees and court costs) arising or alleged to arise out of the use of any parking permit issued hereunder. If any of the parking spaces covered by the permits provided to Tenant hereunder become unavailable for use by Tenant at any time or from time to time during the Term of this Lease, whether due to casualty or any other cause, the charges hereunder with respect to the applicable permits shall abate until such spaces again become available for use by Tenant, but otherwise this Lease shall continue in full force and effect.

10. All motor vehicles (including all contents thereof) shall be parked in the Parking Area at the sole risk of Tenant and each patron of the Parking Area, it being expressly agreed and understood Landlord has no duty to insure any of said motor vehicles (including the contents thereof), and Landlord is not responsible for the protection and security of such vehicles. NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING TO THE CONTRARY CONTAINED IN THIS LEASE, LANDLORD SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER FOR ANY PROPERTY DAMAGE WHICH MIGHT OCCUR ON THE PARKING AREA OR AS A RESULT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE PARKING OF MOTOR VEHICLES IN ANY OF THE PARKING SPACES.

 

D-3


EXHIBIT E – NOTICE OF LEASE TERM

4440 El Camino Building • 4440 El Camino Real • Los Altos, California

This NOTICE OF LEASE TERM (“NLT”) is given by BOX.NET, INC. , a Delaware corporation (“Tenant”) to BEHRINGER HARVARD EL CAMINO REAL LP , a Delaware limited partnership (“Landlord”), with respect to that certain Lease dated             , 2011 (“Lease”), under which Tenant has leased from Landlord certain premises known the 4440 El Camino Building located at 4440 El Camino Real, Los Altos, California (“Building”).

In consideration of the mutual covenants and agreements stated in the Lease, and intending that this Agreement may be relied upon by Landlord and any prospective purchaser or present or prospective Encumbrance holder, Tenant certifies and confirms the following:

 

  (a) The Delivery Date is                     , 2011.

 

  (b) The Commencement Date is                     , 20            .

 

  (b) The Expiration Date is                     , 20            .

Except for those terms expressly defined in this NLT, all initially capitalized terms will have the meanings stated for such terms in the Lease.

E XECUTED THIS              DAY OF                     2011.

 

T ENANT

B OX .N ET , I NC .,

A D ELAWARE CORPORATION

By:

   

Name:

   

Title:

   

L ANDLORD

B EHRINGER H ARVARD E L C AMINO R EAL LP,

A D ELAWARE LIMITED PARTNERSHIP

By:

 

Behringer Harvard El Camino Real GP, LLC,

 

a Delaware limited liability company,

 

Its general partner

   

By:

   
   

Name:

   
   

Title:

   

 

E-1


EXHIBIT F – WORK LETTER

4440 El Camino Building • 4440 El Camino Real • Los Altos, California

1. Preliminary . This Work Letter governs the finish out/refurbishment by Tenant of the Premises. Landlord has no obligation to make any modifications, alterations or improvements to the Premises or the Building or, except for the funding of the Construction Allowance (hereinafter defined), contribute to the cost of the Tenant Improvements (hereinafter defined) or any other alterations or improvements desired by Tenant to the Premises in connection with the Lease of which this Work Letter is a part.

2. Construction Documents .

(a) Space Plans . Within a commercially reasonable time period after the Execution Date, Tenant shall, at its sole expense (but subject to the Premises Construction Allowance), deliver to Landlord space plans prepared by an architect (“Architect”) chosen by Tenant and reasonably approved by Landlord in electronic Autocad format together with a full-size hard copy depicting all improvements and alterations desired by Tenant to be installed in or made to the Premises. Landlord shall notify Tenant whether it approves of such space plans within five (5) business days after receipt thereof. If Landlord disapproves of the space plans, Landlord shall notify Tenant thereof specifying in reasonable detail the reasons for such disapproval, in which case Tenant shall revise the space plans in accordance with Landlord’s objections and submit revised space plans in accordance with subparagraph (a) above to Landlord for its review and approval. Landlord shall notify Tenant in writing whether or not it approves of the resubmitted space plans within three (3) business days after its receipt thereof and, if Landlord disapproves, Landlord shall notify Tenant thereof specifying in reasonable detail the reasons for such disapproval. This process shall be repeated until the space plans have been finally approved by Landlord and Tenant. If Landlord fails to approve or disapprove of the space plans or the resubmitted space plans, as the case may be, within the applicable time period set forth above in this Section 2.(a), and any such failure is not cured by Landlord within three (3) business days after written notice from Tenant to Landlord of such failure, then the space plans as submitted, or as resubmitted, as the case may be, shall be deemed approved by Landlord. As used herein, “Space Plans” means the Preliminary Spaces Plans finally approved or deemed approved by Landlord as provided above. Material changes to the Space Plans shall require Landlord’s prior consent, which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld, conditioned or delayed. To the extent not attached hereto on the Execution Date, this Work Letter will be automatically amended to include as Annex 1 hereto the finally approved Space Plan.

(b) Working Drawings . Within a commercially reasonable time after approval of the Space Plan, Tenant shall, at its sole cost and expense (subject again to the Construction Allowance), provide to Landlord for its approval preliminary construction documents prepared by Architect and detailing all improvements and/or alterations that Tenant proposes to install and/or make in the Premises (“Preliminary CDs”). The Preliminary CDs shall be delivered in Autocad format together with a hard copy thereof and shall include, without limitation, the partition layout, ceiling plan, electrical outlets and switches, telephone outlets, drawings for any modifications to the

 

F-1


Base Building and reasonably detailed plans and specifications for the construction of all improvements and alterations Tenant desires to be made to the Premises. The Preliminary CDs must be consistent in all material respects with the approved Space Plan. Landlord shall notify Tenant whether it approves of the submitted Preliminary CDs within seven (7) business days after Tenant’s submission thereof. If Landlord disapproves of such Preliminary CDs, then Landlord shall notify Tenant thereof specifying in reasonable detail the reasons for such disapproval, in which case Tenant shall revise the Preliminary CDs in accordance with Landlord’s objections and submit the revised Preliminary CDs to Landlord for review and approval. Landlord shall notify Tenant in writing whether it approves of the resubmitted Preliminary CDs within five (5) business days after its receipt thereof. This process shall be repeated until the Preliminary CDs have been finally approved by Landlord; provided that Landlord shall only be entitled to disapprove any resubmitted Preliminary CDs to the extent the same fail to comply in all material respects with Landlord’s prior reasons for disapproval. If Landlord fails to approve or disapprove of the Preliminary CDs or the resubmitted Preliminary CDs, as the case may be, within the applicable time period set forth above in this Section 2.(a), and any such failure is not cured by Landlord within three (3) business days after written notice from Tenant to Landlord of such failure, then the Preliminary CDs as submitted, or as resubmitted, as the case may be, shall be deemed approved by Landlord. As used herein, (i) “Final CDs” shall mean the Preliminary CDs as finally approved by Landlord, as amended from time to time by any Change Orders (hereinafter defined), and (ii) “Tenant Improvements” shall mean, collectively, all improvements and alterations or work to be installed or performed in or made to the Premises pursuant to the Final CDs and any demolition work necessary to commence such improvements. Upon determination of the Final CDs, this Work Letter will automatically be amended to incorporate the Final CDs by reference.

(c) Approval Standard . Landlord’s approval of the Space Plan or Preliminary CDs, as applicable, shall not be unreasonably withheld, conditioned or delayed unless such are inconsistent with the approved Space Plan (with respect to the Preliminary CDs) or reveal a Design Problem, in which event Landlord may disapprove of the Space Plan or the Preliminary CDs in its sole discretion to the extent of the Design Problem only.

3. Change Orders . If Tenant desires to make any material changes to the Final CDs, Tenant shall submit to Landlord a change order request prepared by Architect and otherwise in a form reasonably required by Landlord but which shall include, in any event, changes to the Final CDs reflecting the requested change. Each such change order must receive the prior written approval of Landlord, such approval or disapproval to be made within the time periods and governed by the standards for approval of the Preliminary CDs as described above. If Landlord approves any change order request, such to be evidenced by a written change order executed by Landlord and Tenant (“Change Order”), then the incremental increase in the cost of construction of the Tenant Improvements (soft and hard costs) (collectively, “Change Order Costs”) shall be added to the Construction Costs and the Construction Budget (hereinafter defined) shall be automatically adjusted to include such costs. If all or any of the Change Order Costs are also Excess Costs ( e.g. , the total Construction Costs reflected in the Construction Budget already exceed the Construction Allowance or the Construction Allowance will be exceeded with the addition of the Change Order Costs), then

 

F-2


Landlord shall not be required to make further disbursements of the Construction Allowance until Tenant has provided evidence that it has paid for additional Construction Costs in the amount of such additional Excess Costs (or as hereafter permitted, allocated any available balance of the Construction Allowance to such Excess Costs).

4. Tenant’s Contractors/Construction Contracts .

(a) Tenant’s General Contractor . Tenant shall be responsible for bidding the Tenant Improvements and selecting the General Contractor (herein so called). Landlord shall have the right to approve the General Contractor and all subcontractors, such approval not to be unreasonably withheld, conditioned or delayed. Without limitation, it will be reasonable for Landlord to disapprove of a contractor or subcontractor on the basis that (i) such contractor or subcontractor is not licensed and bonded, or (ii) Landlord has had previous unsatisfactory experience with such contractor.

(b) Tenant’s Construction Contracts . Any construction contract for the Tenant Improvements shall provide for, without limitation, (i) a one-year warranty for all of the Tenant Improvements; and (ii) a requirement that the General Contractor perform the Tenant Improvements in accordance with the Final CDs and in a good and workmanlike manner and in compliance with all Laws.

5. Construction/Contractor Requirements .

(a) Neither Tenant nor any of Tenant’s contractors or subcontractors shall commence any of Tenant Improvements until the later to occur of (i) determination of the Final CDs, (ii) Tenant obtaining and delivering to Landlord all necessary building permits therefor; (iii) Landlord’s approval of the Construction Budget (hereinafter defined) and a construction schedule for the Tenant Improvements, and (iv) the Delivery Date. Notwithstanding, Tenant shall be permitted to perform demolition of existing improvements necessary for the performance of the Tenant Improvements from and after the Delivery Date provided that Landlord has approved of the demolition plans, such not to be unreasonably withheld, and has obtained and delivered all necessary demolition permits to Landlord.

(b) Tenant’s General Contractor and all subcontractors shall comply at all times with the Landlord’s reasonable rules and regulations for contracted services in the Building. Such rules and regulations are available from the Building’s management office.

(c) Prior to any entry onto the Building, Tenant’s General Contractor and all subcontractors shall have provided to Landlord certificates of insurance, in form and amount reasonably satisfactory to Landlord, insuring Landlord, Landlord’s property manager, any encumbrance holder and such other parties as it shall reasonably designate against any and all liability for personal injury, including workers’ compensation claims and for property damage that may arise out of or be in any manner connected with the Tenant Improvements. Landlord’s contractor insurance requirements are available from the Building’s management office.

 

F-3


(d) Landlord must receive a list of sub-contractors engaged by Tenant as of the start of the Tenant Improvements. Tenant shall provide any updates promptly to Landlord.

(e) Upon commencement of the construction of the Tenant Improvements, Tenant shall proceed with due diligence to complete same in an expeditious manner in accordance with the Final CDs. The Tenant Improvements must be performed by Tenant in a good and workmanlike manner, in compliance with all Laws, and in such a manner and at such times, so as not to materially interfere with the operation of the Building.

(f) Tenant will take commercially reasonable steps to protect its facilities affected by the performance of the Tenant Improvements and to secure the same. Construction equipment and materials are to be located in confined areas and delivery and loading of equipment and materials shall be done at such locations and at such time as Landlord shall reasonably direct so as not to overburden the operation of the Building.

(g) Tenant shall at all times keep the Outside Areas free from accumulations of waste materials or rubbish caused by its suppliers, contractors or workers. Landlord may require daily clean-up if required for fire prevention and life safety reasons or Laws and reserves the right, following notice to Tenant and a reasonable opportunity to cure, to do clean-up at the expense of Tenant if Tenant fails to comply with Landlord’s cleanup requirements. Upon Substantial Completion of the Tenant Improvements, Tenant’s contractors shall forthwith remove all rubbish and all tools, equipment and surplus materials from and about the Premises and Project. Any damage caused by Tenant’s contractors to any portion of the Building or to any property of Landlord or other tenants shall be repaired by Tenant at Tenant’s expense forthwith after written notice from Landlord as to its condition prior to such damage.

6. Substantial Completion .

(a) As used herein “Substantial Completion,” “Substantially Completed,” and any derivations thereof mean that (i) the Tenant Improvements have been substantially completed in accordance with the Final CDs as determined by Architect (and confirmed by Landlord’s construction manager, which confirmation shall not be unreasonably withheld, conditioned or delayed), (ii) Tenant can lawfully occupy the Premises for business purposes. Substantial Completion shall have occurred even though minor details of construction, decoration, landscaping and mechanical adjustments and other “punch-list” items remain to be completed. Tenant shall have the sole responsibility for obtaining any certificate of occupancy (or equivalent). When the Architect considers the Tenant Improvements to be Substantially Completed, Tenant will notify Landlord and within three (3) business days thereafter, Landlord’s Representative and Tenant’s Representative shall conduct a walk-through of the Premises and identify any necessary touch-up work, repairs and minor completion items that are necessary for final completion of the Tenant Improvements. Tenant shall use commercially reasonable efforts to cause the General Contractor performing the Tenant Improvements to complete all punch-list items within thirty (30) days after agreement thereon. Notwithstanding the above, Substantial Completion of the Tenant Improvements is not a condition to the Commencement Date or Tenant’s obligation to pay Rent under the Lease .

 

F-4


(b) All Tenant Improvements shall be the property of Landlord upon installation unless Landlord and Tenant otherwise agree in writing and provided that Landlord may designate for removal by Tenant (and at Tenant’s cost) any Tenant Improvements that are not Building Standard. For purposes of the foregoing sentence, the following shall be deemed Building Standard Tenant Improvements: usual office improvements for a general, standard office use such as standard gypsum board, partitions, typical office ceiling grids and tiles, typical office lighting panels, typical office doors and carpeting, standard break rooms and lunchrooms.

7. Payment for Tenant Improvements/Construction Allowance .

(a) Construction Costs Defined . As used in this Work Letter, “Construction Costs” shall include only (i) the cost of all labor and materials and supplies for the Tenant Improvements; (ii) the cost of all contractor, architectural, engineering and design and project consultant/manager fees (including but not limited to costs incurred in connection with the preparation of the Space Plans and the Final CDs and any other construction documents) and general conditions and permitting costs/fees; and (iii) extra janitorial expenses associated with the construction. Construction Costs shall not include the cost of acquisition, installation, set up or testing of any of Tenant’s furniture, fixtures or equipment excluding cabling and wiring for Tenant’s voice data and telecommunications systems. Prior to commencement of construction of the Tenant Improvements, Tenant shall deliver or cause to be delivered to Landlord a construction budget setting forth the estimated Construction Costs (the “Construction Budget”). Tenant shall not commence any of the Tenant Improvements until Landlord has approved of the Construction Budget, such consent not to be unreasonably withheld, conditioned, or delayed.

(b) Allowance/Disbursement . Tenant shall be responsible for the entire Construction Costs; provided, however, that Landlord shall provide to Tenant (i) a construction allowance in the amount of $20.00 per RSF of the Premises, or $1,931,240.00 (the “Construction Allowance”) to be applied toward Construction Costs. Landlord shall make disbursements of the available Construction Allowance to Tenant for Construction Costs incurred by Tenant as follows:

(1) Disbursements . If Tenant desires to apply for a disbursement of the Construction Allowance, then Tenant may apply for any such disbursement by, on or before the 5th day of any calendar month (or such other date as Landlord may designate), delivering to Landlord each of the following: (A) a request for payment of the General Contractor approved by Tenant, in the appropriate AIA form or other form approved by Landlord showing the schedule, by trade, of percentage of completion of the Tenant Improvements, detailing the portion of the Tenant Improvements completed and the portion not completed, and demonstrating that the relationship between the Construction Costs completed and the Construction Costs to be completed complies with the terms of the Construction Budget, (B) copies of invoices from Tenant’s contractors for labor rendered and materials delivered to the Premises and for which payment is sought through the subject disbursement; (C) an executed mechanic’s lien release from the General Contractor with respect to the work for which payment is sought and in a form approved by Landlord, and (D) executed mechanic’s lien releases from all subcontractors with respect to any previous draws paid by Landlord and in a

 

F-5


form approved by Landlord (the foregoing being collectively referred to herein as an “Interim Application for Payment”). As between Landlord and Tenant, Tenant’s submission of an Application for Payment shall be deemed Tenant’s acceptance and approval of the portion of the Tenant Improvements furnished and/or the materials supplied as set forth in Tenant’s payment request. Subject to the terms of this Work Letter, on or before the 30th day of the calendar month in which the Application was received, Landlord shall deliver a check to Tenant in reimbursement of the lesser of (A) the amounts so requested by Tenant, less a ten percent (10%) retention (the aggregate amount of such retentions to be known as the “Retainage”) and (B) the balance of any remaining available portion of the Construction Allowance (not including the Retainage), provided that Landlord does not dispute any request for payment based on non-compliance of any Tenant Improvements with the Finals CDs, or due to any substandard work, or for any other reasonable reason. Landlord’s payment of any Application for Payment shall not be deemed Landlord’s approval or acceptance of the work furnished or materials supplied as set forth in Tenant’s Application of Payment.

(2) Final Payment . Landlord shall pay the Retainage to Tenant following the receipt by Landlord of an executed application for payment on the appropriate AIA form or another form as is reasonably approved by Landlord and the following items: (i) with respect to payment to any persons performing work or supplying or fabricating materials for the Tenant Improvements, final lien waivers from such persons, fully executed, acknowledged and in recordable form, (ii) the Tenant’s and Architect’s certification that the Tenant Improvements have been finally completed, including all punch-list items, on the appropriate AIA form or such other form as is approved by Landlord, (iii) evidence that Tenant can lawfully occupy the Premises, (iv) Landlord has determined that no substandard work exists which adversely affects the Building Systems or the Base Building or exterior appearance of the Building, or any other tenant’s use of such other tenant’s leased premises in the Building, (iv) evidence that Tenant has paid for the entire Construction Costs that is in excess of the Construction Allowance, (vi) commissioning documents for any equipment installed as part of the Tenant Improvements that are tied into any Mechanical Systems, (vii) Tenant’s “close-out” package including information regarding all materials incorporated into the Tenant Improvements, and (viii) Tenant has furnished Landlord with an accurate record drawing of the Tenant Improvements as constructed in Autocad format together with a hard copy thereof (collectively, a “Final Application for Payment” and referred to interchangeably with an Interim Application for Payment, an “Application for Payment”). Subject to the terms of this Work Letter, Landlord shall pay to Tenant the Retainage amount within thirty (30) days following Tenant’s submission of the Final Application for Payment. Tenant’s submission of a Final Application for Payment shall constitute Tenant’s representation and warranty to Landlord that Tenant has inspected all of the Tenant Improvements and accepts same subject only to latent defects, and provided that such representation does not constitute a waiver by Tenant of any claims against its contractors. Landlord’s payment of such amounts shall not be deemed Landlord’s approval or acceptance of the work furnished or materials supplied as set forth in Tenant’s Application of Payment.

 

F-6


(c) Excess Costs . Without limitation of any of the above, if the estimated Construction Costs as reflected in the approved Construction Budget (as such may be revised to reflect any approved Change Orders Costs) is greater than the Construction Allowance (the positive difference between the Construction Costs and the Construction Allowance being “Excess Costs”), Landlord’s disbursements under Paragraph 7(b) shall be additionally conditioned upon Tenant paying to Landlord, not later than ten (10) days prior to the last date upon which Landlord would otherwise be required to fund the Application for Payment, an amount equal to the product obtained by multiplying the total amount included in the Interim Application for Payment multiplied by a fraction (expressed as percentage), the numerator of which is total Excess Costs and the denominator of which is the Construction Allowance (such amount being the “Tenant’s Excess Cost Payment”); provided, however, the provisions of this Section (c) shall not be applicable to the extent of any disbursements of the Construction Allowance paid to Tenant in reimbursement of costs previously paid by Tenant (as opposed to disbursements paid to Tenant’s contract or subcontractor) following satisfaction of the conditions set forth in Section 7(b)(2) of this Exhibit F .

(d) Additional Disbursement Conditions . Except as expressly provided elsewhere in this Work Letter, Landlord shall only be obligated to make the disbursement of the Construction Allowance to the extent costs are incurred and paid by Tenant for the Construction Costs. If an Application for Payment is incomplete or incorrect in any respect, Landlord will notify Tenant of same and the amount of the subject disbursement of the Construction Allowance applicable to the portion of such incomplete or incorrect Application for Payment only shall be deferred until twenty (20) days following Landlord’s receipt of the corrected Application for Payment. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Work Letter, Landlord shall not be obligated to make any disbursement during the pendency of any of the following: (1) Landlord has received written notice of any unpaid and delinquent claims relating to any portion of the Tenant Improvements (or, as the case may be, the Tenant Improvements) or any materials in connection therewith, other than claims which will be paid in full from such disbursement, (2) there is an unbonded lien outstanding against the Building or any of the Premises or Tenant’s interest therein by reason of work done, or claimed to have been done, or materials supplied or specifically fabricated, claimed to have been supplied or specifically fabricated, to or for Tenant or any of the Premises, (3) the conditions to the advance of the Construction Allowance are not satisfied, (4) a Default then exists, or (5) Landlord has determined, in its reasonable discretion, that substandard work exists which adversely affects the Base Building or exterior appearance of the Building, or any other tenant’s use of such other tenant’s leased premises in the Building (but in such case Landlord’s option to defer payment shall be limited to non-payment for the substandard work only ). Nothing herein shall be construed to grant Tenant the power to lien any interest of Landlord in the Project. If on the first (1st) anniversary of the Delivery Date there remains any unfunded balance of the Landlord’s Contribution not then subject to a pending or disputed request for disbursement, then such balance shall be the sole property of Landlord and Tenant shall have no further rights with respect thereto.

(e) Excess Allowance . If upon final completion of the Tenant Improvements there remains any balance of the Construction Allowance, Tenant may draw upon such balance (the “FF&E Allowance”) to pay for the cost (“FF&E Costs”) to acquire and install customary office

 

F-7


furniture, fixtures and equipment to be first used in the Premises (“FF&E”). Not later than the first (1 st ) anniversary of the Commencement Date Tenant may submit one (1) request for reimbursement of all FF&E Costs, such to be accompanied by invoices reflecting such costs as have been paid by Tenant and evidence of payment. Landlord shall reimburse for the FF&E Costs up to the FF&E Allowance within thirty (30) days after receipt of Tenant’s request. Landlord shall have no obligations to reimburse Tenant for FF&E Costs not submitted to Landlord by the first (1 st ) anniversary of the Commencement Date. Any balance of the FF&E Allowance remaining on the first (1 st ) anniversary of the Commencement Date and not subject to a pending or disputed request for reimbursements is forfeited by Tenant and the sole property of Landlord.

9. Landlord’s Oversight Role/Review . The parties acknowledge that neither Landlord nor its managing agent is an architect or engineer, and that the Tenant Improvements will be designed and performed by independent architects, engineers and Tenant’s contractors engaged by Tenant. Landlord and its managing agent shall have no responsibility for construction means, methods or techniques or safety precautions in connection with the Tenant Improvements, and do not guarantee that the Space Plans or the Final CDs (as such may be changed by change orders) will be free from errors, omissions or defects or will comply with Laws, and shall have no liability therefore notwithstanding any approval thereof. Landlord’s approval of Space Plans, the Final CDs, change orders and contracts, and Landlord’s designations, lists, recommendations or approvals concerning Tenant’s architects and contractors shall not be deemed a warranty as to the quality or adequacy thereof or of the Space Plans, the Final CDs (as such may be changed by change orders), any other construction documents or the Tenant Improvements, or the design thereof, or of its compliance with Laws. After providing Tenant’s Representative prior notice of one (1) business day (except in the event of emergency, no notice shall be required), Tenant shall permit access to the Premises, and inspection of the Tenant Improvements, by Landlord and Landlord’s architects, engineers, contractors and other representatives, at all times during the period in which the Tenant Improvements are being planned and constructed to allow Landlord and Landlord’s Representative to ensure compliance with this Work Letter. If Tenant fails to perform the Tenant Improvements as required herein or the materials supplied fail to comply herewith or with the Final CDs (as such may be changed by change orders) and such failure shall continue for five (5) business days after receipt of written notice thereof delivered by Landlord to Tenant’s Representative, Landlord shall have the right to temporarily stop the applicable portions of the Tenant Improvements pending Tenant’s cure of such failure. Landlord shall have the right, but not the obligation, to perform, on behalf of and for the account of Tenant, subject to reimbursement by Tenant, any work required to cure or complete any Tenant Improvements which has violated this Work Letter, or which pertains to patching of the Tenant Improvements and other work in the Building, or involves Tenant Improvements outside the Premises, or which affects the Base Building, provided that Tenant shall not have done so within five (5) business days after receipt of written notice thereof delivered by Landlord to Tenant or, if the same cannot be corrected within five (5) business days, Tenant fails to commence correcting the same and diligently proceeds to correct the same. No such action by Landlord shall serve to abate any Rent due under the Lease, as amended or any other obligations of Tenant therein.

 

F-8


10. In no event shall Landlord be entitled to any supervision fee in connection with the improvements contemplated by this EXHIBIT F .

11. Representatives . Landlord’s and Tenant’s representatives for coordination of construction and approval of change orders will be as follows:

 

Landlord’s Representative:

  Ernie Hughes
  950 W. Maude Ave.
  Sunnyvale, California 94085
  Office: 408.617.7646
  Cell:

Tenant’s Representative:

  Before the Commencement Date:
  Box.Net, Inc.
  220 Portage Ave.
  Palo Alto, California 94306
  Attn: Greg Strickland, VP Business Operations
  After the Commencement Date:
  Box.Net, Inc.
  4440 El Camino Real
  Los Altos, California 94022
  Attn: Greg Strickland, VP Business Operations

All inquiries, requests, instructions, authorizations and other communications with respect to the matters covered by this Work Letter will be made to Landlord’s Representative or Tenant’s Representative, as the case may be. Either party may change its representative under this Work Letter at any time by giving written notice to the other party delivered in accordance with the notice provisions of the Lease.

 

F-9


EXHIBIT G – ROOF TOP RIGHTS

Subject to the following terms and conditions of this Exhibit, Tenant shall have the non-exclusive license to install and operate on the roof of the Building (the “Roof”) one or more satellite dishes and/or antenna for the sole purposes of telecommunications bandwidth and/or satellite cable television service to the Premises and for Tenant’s own exclusive use and provided that as to each such dish or antenna the size, weight, height and other dimensions and features of such dish are approved by Landlord in writing prior to installation thereof, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld (whether a dish or antenna, such being referred to herein collectively (and together with all connections to the Premises) as the “Rooftop Communications Equipment”) and subject to the following additional terms and conditions:

1. Tenant shall install the Rooftop Communications Equipment by methods acceptable to Landlord. Tenant shall obtain, at its sole cost and expense, all permits and zoning and other approvals (collectively, “Approvals”) necessary for the installation and operation of the Rooftop Communications Equipment. The actual location of the Rooftop Equipment is subject to Landlord’s reasonable approval which, without limitation, may be based upon its requirements that such equipment not be visible from street-level and/or that such equipment be appropriately screened.

2. Landlord reserves the right, at Landlord’s sole cost and expense (and not as a part of Expenses), to relocate any or all of the Rooftop Communications Equipment on the Roof as reasonably necessary during the Term; provided that Landlord shall be required to provide a location which permits the proper orientation, line of sight and complete operation of each such relocated Rooftop Communications Equipment.

3. Tenant’s right to install the Rooftop Communications Equipment shall be subject to Landlord’s approval of plans and specifications therefor, the manner in which the Rooftop Communications Equipment is attached to the Roof and the manner in which any cables are run to and from the Rooftop Communications Equipment. The precise specifications and a general description of the Rooftop Communications Equipment along with all documents Landlord reasonably requires to review the installation of the Rooftop Communications Equipment (the “Plans and Specifications”) shall be submitted to Landlord for Landlord’s written approval no later than fifteen (15) days before Tenant commences to install the Rooftop Communications Equipment. Tenant shall notify Landlord upon completion of the installation of the Rooftop Communications Equipment. If Landlord determines that the Rooftop Communications Equipment does not comply with the approved Plans and Specifications, that the Building or Roof has been damaged during installation of the Rooftop Communications Equipment or that the installation was defective, Landlord shall notify Tenant of any noncompliance or detected problems and Tenant promptly shall cure the defects. If the Tenant fails to promptly cure the defects, Tenant shall pay to Landlord upon demand the cost, as reasonably determined by Landlord, of correcting any defects and repairing any damage to the Building caused by such installation. If at any time Landlord, in its reasonable discretion, deems it necessary, Tenant shall provide and install, at Tenant’s sole cost and expense, appropriate aesthetic screening, reasonably satisfactory to Landlord, for the Rooftop Communications Equipment (the “Aesthetic Screening”). Tenant shall clearly and conspicuously use and maintain tags to mark the Rooftop Communications Equipment with the Tenant’s name, frequency numbers, date of installation, and Tenant’s contact information.

 

G-1


4. The installation, maintenance, operation and removal of the Rooftop Communications Equipment, the appurtenances and the Aesthetic Screening, if any, is not permitted to damage the Building or the Roof, interfere with the use of the Building and Roof by Landlord, or penetrate the Roof or Roof membrane without Landlord’s prior written consent. Tenant agrees to be responsible for any damage caused to the Roof or any other part of the Building, which may be caused by Tenant or any of its agents or representatives in connection with the installation, maintenance, operation and removal of the Rooftop Communications Equipment, the appurtenances and the Aesthetic Screening, if any, including, without limitation, any damages suffered by Tenant due to Roof leakage caused by the Rooftop Communications Equipment.

5. Tenant agrees to install only equipment of types and frequencies which will not cause unreasonable interference to Landlord or existing occupants of the Project or the Condominium ( e.g. , the hotel adjacent to the Project). In the event Tenant’s equipment is proven to cause such interference, Tenant will change the frequency on which it transmits and/or receives and take any other steps necessary to eliminate the interference. If said interference cannot be eliminated within a reasonable period of time, in the judgment of Landlord, then Tenant agrees to remove the Rooftop Communications Equipment from the Roof. The parties acknowledge that there will not be an adequate remedy at law for non-compliance with the provisions of this paragraph and, therefore, either party shall have the right to specifically enforce the provisions of this paragraph at law or in equity in a court of competent jurisdiction. Landlord shall not permit installations of equipment on the Roof subsequent to installation of the Rooftop Communications Equipment to interfere with the Rooftop Communications Equipment.

6. Tenant shall, at its sole cost and expense, and at its sole risk, install, operate and maintain the Rooftop Communications Equipment in a good and workmanlike manner, and in compliance with all Building, electric, communication, and safety codes, ordinances, standards, regulations and requirements, now in effect or hereafter promulgated by any governmental agency having jurisdiction over radio or telecommunications, and of the state, city and county in which the Building is located. Under this Lease, the Landlord and its agents assume no responsibility for the licensing, operation and/or maintenance of Tenant’s equipment. The Rooftop Communications Equipment shall be connected to Landlord’s power supply in strict compliance with all applicable Building, electrical, fire and safety codes. Neither Landlord nor its agents shall have any responsibility or liability for the conduct or safety of any of Tenant’s representatives, repair, maintenance and engineering personnel while in or on any part of the Building or the Roof in connection with the installation, maintenance, operation and removal of the Rooftop Communications Equipment, the appurtenances and the Aesthetic Screening, if any.

7. The Rooftop Communications Equipment, the appurtenances and the Aesthetic Screening, if any, shall remain the personal property of Tenant, and shall be removed by Tenant at its own expense at the expiration or earlier termination of this Lease or Tenant’s right to possession under this Lease. Tenant shall repair any damage caused by such removal, including the patching of

 

G-2


any holes to match, as closely as possible, the color surrounding the area where the equipment and appurtenances were attached. Tenant agrees to maintain all of the Tenant’s equipment placed on or about the Roof or in any other part of the Building in proper operating condition and maintain same in satisfactory condition as to appearance and safety. Such maintenance and operation shall be performed in a manner to avoid any unreasonable interference with any other tenants or Landlord. Tenant shall keep the Roof free of all trash or waste materials produced by Tenant or Tenant’s agents, employees or contractors.

8. Tenant’s contractors performing the installation, repair and service for the Rooftop Communications Equipment shall be subject to Landlord’s approval, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld, conditioned or delayed. Tenant shall provide Landlord with prior written notice of any such installation, removal or repair and coordinate such work with Landlord in order to avoid voiding or otherwise adversely affecting any warranties granted to Landlord with respect to the Roof. If necessary, Tenant, at its sole cost and expense, shall retain any contractor having a then existing warranty in effect on the Roof to perform such work (to the extent that it involves the Roof) or, at Tenant’s option, to perform such work in conjunction with Tenant’s contractor.

9. Tenant shall not allow any provider of telecommunication, video, data or related services (“Communication Services”) to locate any equipment on the Roof for any purpose whatsoever, nor may Tenant use the Roof and/or Rooftop Communications Equipment to provide Communication Services to an unaffiliated tenant, occupant or licensee of the Building, the Project or any other building, or to facilitate the provision of Communication Services on behalf of any Communication Services provider.

10. If Landlord contemplates Roof repairs or requires access which (a) requires temporary removal or relocation of the Rooftop Communications Equipment, or (b) may result in an interruption in Tenant’s telecommunications services, Landlord shall notify Tenant in writing at least thirty (30) days prior to such contemplated work in order to allow Tenant to make other arrangements for such services, except in the event of an emergency, in which case Landlord shall give Tenant reasonable prior written notice. In the event such temporary removal or relocation of the Rooftop Communications Equipment or interruption in Tenant’s telecommunications services is necessary, Landlord agrees to provide alternate space to Tenant that is reasonably acceptable to Tenant for a temporary terminal if such alternative space is available. All costs of removal, relocation and re-installation shall be borne by Landlord unless the subject repair is capital in nature or unless Landlord is replacing all or a substantial portion of the roof, in which event Tenant shall be pay for removal/relocation costs.

11. Tenant (or its agents or representatives) shall, upon reasonable notice, be permitted use of and access to the Roof of the Building provided, however for purposes of examination, maintenance and repair of the Rooftop Communications Equipment, all of which shall be performed by Tenant or Tenant’s authorized representative or contractors, which shall be approved by Landlord, at Tenant’s sole cost and risk. It is agreed, however, that only authorized engineers, employees or properly authorized contractors of Tenant or persons under their direct supervision will be permitted to have access to the Roof. Tenant further agrees to exercise control over the people requiring access to the Roof in order to keep to a minimum the number of people having access to the Roof and the frequency of their visits.

 

G-3


12. Tenant’s rights with respect to the Rooftop Communications Equipment shall not be transferable to any subtenant.

13. Tenant’s Rooftop rights hereunder are non-exclusive. Landlord reserves the right to lease and license space on the Roof of the Building or elsewhere to other tenants, as Landlord may desire, for any purpose, including the installation and operation of a separate satellite transmission dish and antennas and related equipment.

14. This Exhibit does not create an easement, leasehold or any other interest in real property. Tenant’s rights under this Exhibit expire upon the expiration or the earlier termination of the Lease or Tenant’s right to occupy the Premises.

 

G-4


EXHIBIT H – LETTER OF CREDIT PROVISIONS

1. Delivery of Letter of Credit . As a condition precedent to Landlord’s obligations under this Lease, and to secure compliance and performance by Tenant of all of the terms and conditions of this Lease, Tenant shall deliver to Landlord, on or before the LOC Delivery Deadline (defined below), a letter of credit in a face amount of ONE MILLION EIGHT HUNDRED THOUSAND DOLLARS ($1,800,000.00, the “LOC Amount”, as such amount may be reduced pursuant to Section 3 below) meeting the requirements of this Exhibit, as said letter of credit may be replaced, extended, amended and/or modified from time to time (the “Letter of Credit”). As used herein, the term “LOC Delivery Date” means two (2) business days following the Execution Date.

2. Form of Letter of Credit . The Letter of Credit shall: (i) be issued by (and at all times be drawable upon) a federally insured national bank approved by Landlord in writing in its reasonable discretion (and Landlord hereby approves of Wells Fargo); (ii) be an irrevocable and unconditional standby Letter of Credit issued in the full amount of the required LOC Amount; (iii) be issued in the name of Landlord as beneficiary; (iv) have an initial term commencing on the date of issuance and ending no earlier than September 30, 2012; (v) state on its face that, notwithstanding the stated expiration date, the term of the Letter of Credit shall be automatically renewed for successive, additional one (1) year periods unless, at least sixty (60) days prior to any such date of expiration, the issuing bank shall have given written notice to Landlord, by certified mail, return receipt requested that the Letter of Credit will not be renewed; (vi) have a final expiration date of not less than sixty (60) days after the Expiration Date (as such may be adjusted for renewals and extensions); (vii) expressly provide that Landlord (and/or its successors and assigns) is entitled to make one or more draws under the Letter of Credit upon delivery to issuer of a sight draft (a “Draft”) in a banking office of issuer in Palo Alto, California (or such other location as is approved by Landlord in writing) and signed by a purported officer or authorized agent or representative of Landlord and certifying to the issuer that a Draw Event (hereinafter defined) has occurred and that Landlord is entitled to draw upon the Letter of Credit in the amount of the draft submitted therewith; (viii) allow partial draws by Landlord at its discretion from time to time subject to the other provisions of this Section 2; (ix) provide that the Letter of Credit will be honored by the issuing bank without inquiry as to the accuracy of the Draft or the authority of any person or party executing same and regardless of whether Tenant disputes the content of the Draft or the authority of any person or party executing same; (x) specifically provide that it may be transferred by Landlord, without cost to Landlord, to a subsequent owner of the Project (including a foreclosing mortgage lender) by written notice by the transferring Landlord/beneficiary to the issuer, at which time the issuer of the Letter of Credit must be obligated to issue a new Letter of Credit on the identical terms to the transferee (naming the transferee as beneficiary) upon written request by such transferee and surrender of the previously issued Letter of Credit; (xi) remain in effect notwithstanding any assignment of this Lease or subletting by Tenant; (xii) be subject to the International Standby Practices 1998 (or such other recognized standards as Landlord may elect), and (xiii) otherwise be in a form satisfactory to Landlord in its sole and absolute discretion.

 

G-5


3. Reduction of LOC Amount . As used in this Exhibit, the term “First Lease Period” shall mean the period commencing upon the Execution Date and ending on the last day of the eighteenth (18 th ) complete Month following the Commencement Date, and each succeeding twelve (12) Month period thereafter shall be referred to herein as a “Lease Period.” The amount of the Letter of Credit required for the First Lease Period shall be ONE MILLION EIGHT HUNDRED THOUSAND DOLLARS ($1,800,000.00), and the amount of the Letter of Credit required under this Lease for each succeeding Lease Period shall be the amount set forth on the following schedule; provided, however, that upon the expiration of any Lease Period the amount of the Letter of Credit applicable under this Lease shall not be reduced to the amount applicable to the succeeding Lease Period if this Lease is not then in full force and effect or if a Draw Event has occurred:

 

First Lease Period:

   $ 1,800,000   

Second Lease Period:

   $ 1,502,000   

Third Lease Period:

   $ 1,195,000   

Fourth Lease Period:

   $ 879,000   

Fifth Lease Period:

   $ 553,000   

Sixth Lease Period:

   $ 218,000   

The remaining Term of the Lease:

   $ 100,000   

If Tenant is entitled to reduce the amount of the Letter of Credit pursuant to the provisions above, then upon Tenant’s written request to Landlord, Landlord agrees that it will within five (5) business days of Tenant’s request notify in writing the issuer of the Letter of Credit that the Letter of Credit may be reduced in the amount of the reduction so authorized. Such reduction shall occur by means of delivery by Tenant and acceptance by Landlord of an amendment to the Letter of Credit (which amendment shall be subject to Landlord’s reasonable approval) reducing the amount thereof as directed by Landlord, or, at Tenant’s option, a substitute Letter of Credit in such reduced amount, in which latter event, the Letter of Credit then being held by Landlord will be returned to Tenant.

4. Extension/Replacement Letter of Credit . In the event that the expiration date of the Letter of Credit is earlier than the Expiration Date of this Lease, as such may be extended, then not later than sixty (60) days prior to the then current expiration date of the Letter of Credit, Tenant shall cause the delivery to Landlord either of a new Letter of Credit meeting the conditions and requirements hereof or an amendment to the existing Letter of Credit which provides that its expiration date is extended for a period of not less than one (1) year. If, as a result of any drawing upon the Letter of Credit, the balance secured by such Letter of Credit shall be less than the then-required LOC Amount, Tenant shall, upon demand, provide Landlord with additional letter(s) of credit which comply with the provisions of this Lease in an amount equal to restore such balance to the required LOC Amount. If the Letter of Credit is not timely renewed, or if a new Letter of Credit

 

G-6


is not timely received by Landlord, or if Tenant fails to maintain such Letter of Credit in the amount and subject to the other terms set forth herein, Landlord shall have the right (in addition to Landlord’s other rights to draw upon the Letter of Credit under this Lease and without any requirement for notice to Tenant under any provision of this Lease or otherwise) to immediately present the Letter of Credit to the issuing bank, and draw any portion of, or the entire amount of, such Letter of Credit.

5. Draws Events . As used herein, a “Draw Event” shall mean each or any of the following occurrences: (i) Tenant is in Default under this Lease; (ii) a petition has been filed by or against Tenant commencing a case under Title 11 of the United States Code or other state or federal bankruptcy or insolvency laws, as amended or reenacted with the passage of time; or (iii) Tenant has failed to cause the delivery to Landlord of a new Letter of Credit or an amendment to the existing Letter of Credit, in form and substance acceptable to Landlord, extending the expiration date of the Letter of Credit for a period of not less than one (1) year, which amendment is received by Landlord not less than sixty (60) days prior to the expiration date of the Letter of Credit, as required under Section 4 above.

6. Proceeds . The proceeds of the Letter of Credit shall be applied by Landlord in its sole discretion to amounts due and coming due to Landlord under the Lease, and the receipt by Landlord of proceeds of the Letter of Credit under one or more draws hereunder shall not relieve Tenant of any obligations to make installment or other payments of Rent under this Lease, or otherwise discharge or relieve the Tenant of compliance or performance of any terms and conditions under this Lease.

7. Letter of Credit an Independent Contract . Tenant acknowledges and agrees that the Letter of Credit shall constitute an independent contract between the issuing bank and Landlord, and the proceeds of any draws by Landlord under the Letter of Credit shall not constitute property of Tenant as debtor in any bankruptcy proceeding. Without limitation, neither the Letter of Credit nor any proceeds thereof shall constitute a security deposit under this Lease. The delivery of the Letter of Credit and/or exercise by Landlord of its rights thereunder shall not constitute liquidated damages or otherwise release, waive, or estop Landlord from asserting any and all claims, or exercising any and all rights and remedies Landlord has or may have with the passage of time under this Lease and applicable law. If a petition is filed by or against Tenant under the Bankruptcy Code or other state or federal bankruptcy or insolvency laws, as amended from time to time, then (i) Landlord shall have the right (in addition to Landlord’s other rights to draw upon the Letter of Credit and without the requirement for notice to Tenant under any provision of this Lease or otherwise) to immediately present such Letter of Credit to the issuing bank, in accordance with the terms hereof, and draw the entire amount of such Letter of Credit, which funds shall be held by Landlord and applied against Tenant’s obligations under this Lease provided that, at Landlord’s option, amounts drawn under the Letter of Credit shall be deemed to be applied first to the payment of Rent due Landlord for all periods prior to the filing of the petition.

 

G-7


8. Transfer of Letter of Credit by Landlord . In the event of a transfer of Landlord’s interest in this Lease, Landlord shall have the right to transfer the Letter of Credit to the transferee, without cost to Landlord, and thereupon Landlord shall, without any further agreement being required between the parties, be released by Tenant from all liability therefor, and it is agreed that the provisions hereof shall apply to every transfer or assignment of such Letter of Credit by Landlord to any successor to Landlord’s interest under this Lease.

9. No Assignment by Tenant . Tenant shall not transfer, assign or otherwise encumber the Letter of Credit or any part thereof. Neither Landlord nor its successors or assigns will be bound by any such attempted assignment, transfer or encumbrance by Tenant.

 

G-8

Exhibit 10.14

 

 

 

CREDIT AGREEMENT

dated as of

August 27, 2013,

among

BOX, INC.,

as Borrower,

THE LENDERS PARTY HERETO

and

CREDIT SUISSE AG, CAYMAN ISLANDS BRANCH,

as Administrative Agent and Collateral Agent

CREDIT SUISSE SECURITIES (USA) LLC

as Sole Bookrunner and Sole Lead Arranger

 

 

 


TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

         Page  

ARTICLE 1 Definitions

     1   

Section 1.01.

 

Defined Terms

     1   

Section 1.02.

 

Terms Generally

     26   

Section 1.03.

 

Classification of Loans and Borrowings

     27   

ARTICLE 2 The Credits

     27   

Section 2.01.

 

Commitments

     27   

Section 2.02.

 

Loans

     27   

Section 2.03.

 

Borrowing Procedure

     28   

Section 2.04.

 

Evidence of Debt; Repayment of Loans

     29   

Section 2.05.

 

Fees

     30   

Section 2.06.

 

Interest on Loans

     30   

Section 2.07.

 

Default Interest

     31   

Section 2.08.

 

Alternate Rate of Interest

     31   

Section 2.09.

 

Termination and Reduction of Commitments

     31   

Section 2.10.

 

Conversion and Continuation of Borrowings

     32   

Section 2.11.

 

Voluntary Prepayment

     33   

Section 2.12.

 

Mandatory Prepayments

     33   

Section 2.13.

 

Increased Costs; Capital Adequacy

     34   

Section 2.14.

 

Change in Legality

     35   

Section 2.15.

 

Breakage

     36   

Section 2.16.

 

Pro Rata Treatment

     36   

Section 2.17.

 

Sharing of Setoffs

     36   

Section 2.18.

 

Payments

     37   

Section 2.19.

 

Taxes

     37   

Section 2.20.

 

Assignment of Commitments under Certain Circumstances; Duty to Mitigate

     42   

Section 2.21.

 

Defaulting Lender

     43   

Section 2.22.

 

Incremental Facilities

     44   

Section 2.23.

 

Amend and Extend Transactions

     45   

ARTICLE 3 Representations and Warranties

     47   

Section 3.01.

 

Organization; Powers

     47   

Section 3.02.

 

Authorization

     47   

Section 3.03.

 

Enforceability

     47   

Section 3.04.

 

Governmental Approvals

     48   

Section 3.05.

 

Financial Statements

     48   

Section 3.06.

 

No Material Adverse Effect

     48   

Section 3.07.

 

Title to Properties; Possession under Leases

     48   

Section 3.08.

 

Subsidiaries

     49   


Section 3.09.

 

Litigation; Compliance with Laws

     49   

Section 3.10.

 

Agreements

     49   

Section 3.11.

 

Federal Reserve Regulations

     50   

Section 3.12.

 

Investment Company Act

     50   

Section 3.13.

 

Use of Proceeds

     50   

Section 3.14.

 

Taxes

     50   

Section 3.15.

 

No Material Misstatements

     50   

Section 3.16.

 

Employee Benefit Plans

     50   

Section 3.17.

 

Environmental Matters

     51   

Section 3.18.

 

Insurance

     52   

Section 3.19.

 

Security Documents

     52   

Section 3.20.

 

Location of Real Property and Leased Premises

     53   

Section 3.21.

 

Intellectual Property

     53   

Section 3.22.

 

Labor Matters

     53   

Section 3.23.

 

Solvency

     53   

Section 3.24.

 

Sanctioned Persons

     54   

Section 3.25.

 

Foreign Corrupt Practices Act

     54   

Section 3.26.

 

Anti-Terrorism Law

     54   

ARTICLE 4 Conditions of Lending

     54   

Section 4.01.

 

All Credit Events

     54   

Section 4.02.

 

First Credit Event

     55   

ARTICLE 5 Affirmative Covenants

     57   

Section 5.01.

 

Existence; Compliance with Laws; Businesses and Properties

     58   

Section 5.02.

 

Insurance

     58   

Section 5.03.

 

Obligations and Taxes

     59   

Section 5.04.

 

Financial Statements, Reports, etc.

     60   

Section 5.05.

 

Litigation and Other Notices

     61   

Section 5.06.

 

Information Regarding Collateral

     61   

Section 5.07.

 

Maintaining Records; Access to Properties and Inspections

     62   

Section 5.08.

 

Use of Proceeds

     62   

Section 5.09.

 

Employee Benefits

     62   

Section 5.10.

 

Compliance with Environmental Laws

     62   

Section 5.11.

 

Preparation of Environmental Reports

     63   

Section 5.12.

 

Further Assurances

     63   

ARTICLE 6 Negative Covenants

     64   

Section 6.01.

 

Indebtedness

     64   

Section 6.02.

 

Liens

     66   

Section 6.03.

 

Sale and Lease-Back Transactions

     67   

Section 6.04.

 

Investments, Loans and Advances

     68   

Section 6.05.

 

Mergers and Consolidations

     69   

 

ii


Section 6.06.

 

Dispositions

     70   

Section 6.07.

 

Restricted Payments; Restrictive Agreements

     70   

Section 6.08.

 

Transactions with Affiliates

     71   

Section 6.09.

 

Business of the Borrower and Subsidiaries

     71   

Section 6.10.

 

Other Indebtedness and Agreements

     71   

Section 6.11.

 

Minimum Liquidity

     72   

Section 6.12.

 

Fiscal Year

     72   

Section 6.13.

 

Certain Equity Securities

     72   

ARTICLE 7 Events of Default

     72   

Section 7.01.

 

Events of Default

     72   

Section 7.02.

 

Application of Proceeds

     75   

ARTICLE 8 The Administrative Agent and the Collateral Agent

     75   

Section 8.01.

 

Appointment and Authority

     75   

Section 8.02.

 

Rights as a Lender

     75   

Section 8.03.

 

Exculpatory Provisions

     75   

Section 8.04.

 

Reliance by Administrative Agent

     76   

Section 8.05.

 

Delegation of Duties

     77   

Section 8.06.

 

Resignation of the Administrative Agent

     77   

Section 8.07.

 

Non-Reliance on Administrative Agent and Other Lenders

     77   

Section 8.08.

 

No Other Duties, etc.

     78   

Section 8.09.

 

Agent May File Proofs of Claim

     78   

Section 8.10.

 

Collateral and Guarantee Matters

     78   

ARTICLE 9 Miscellaneous

     79   

Section 9.01.

 

Notices; Electronic Communications

     79   

Section 9.02.

 

Survival of Agreement

     82   

Section 9.03.

 

Binding Effect

     83   

Section 9.04.

 

Successors and Assigns

     83   

Section 9.05.

 

Expenses; Indemnity

     88   

Section 9.06.

 

Right of Setoff

     89   

Section 9.07.

 

Waivers; Amendment

     90   

Section 9.08.

 

Interest Rate Limitation

     91   

Section 9.09.

 

Entire Agreement

     91   

Section 9.10.

 

WAIVER OF JURY TRIAL

     92   

Section 9.11.

 

Severability

     92   

Section 9.12.

 

Counterparts

     92   

Section 9.13.

 

Headings

     92   

Section 9.14.

 

Applicable Law

     93   

Section 9.15.

 

Jurisdiction; Consent to Service of Process

     93   

Section 9.16.

 

Electronic Execution of Assignments

     93   

Section 9.17.

 

Confidentiality

     94   

Section 9.18.

 

Lender Action

     94   

 

iii


Section 9.19.

 

USA PATRIOT Act Notice

     95   

Section 9.20.

 

No Fiduciary Duty

     95   

 

SCHEDULES

      

Schedule 1.01(a)

  -     

Disqualified Lenders

Schedule 1.01(b)

  -     

Guarantors

Schedule 1.01(c)

  -     

Immaterial Subsidiaries

Schedule 2.01(a)

  -     

Lenders and Commitments

Schedule 3.08

  -     

Subsidiaries

Schedule 3.18

  -     

Insurance

Schedule 3.19(a)

  -     

UCC Filing Offices

Schedule 3.20(a)

  -     

Owned Real Property

Schedule 3.20(b)

  -     

Leased Real Property

Schedule 6.01(a)

  -     

Existing Indebtedness

Schedule 6.02(a)

  -     

Existing Liens

EXHIBITS

      

Exhibit A

  -     

Form of Administrative Questionnaire

Exhibit B

  -     

Form of Affiliate Subordination Agreement

Exhibit C

  -     

Form of Assignment and Acceptance

Exhibit D

  -     

Form of Borrowing Request

Exhibit E

  -     

Form of Compliance Certificate

Exhibit F

  -     

Form of Guarantee and Collateral Agreement

Exhibit G

  -     

Form of Interest Election Request

Exhibit H

  -     

Form of Revolving Note

Exhibit I-1

  -     

Form of U.S. Tax Compliance Certificate

Exhibit I-2

  -     

Form of U.S. Tax Compliance Certificate

Exhibit I-3

  -     

Form of U.S. Tax Compliance Certificate

Exhibit I-4

  -     

Form of U.S. Tax Compliance Certificate

 

iv


CREDIT AGREEMENT dated as of August 27, 2013 (this “ Agreement ”), among BOX, INC., a Delaware corporation (the “ Borrower ”), the Lenders (such term and each other capitalized term used but not defined in these introductory statements having the meaning given it in Article 1) and CREDIT SUISSE AG, CAYMAN ISLANDS BRANCH, as administrative agent (in such capacity, including any successor thereto, the “ Administrative Agent ”) and as collateral agent (in such capacity, including any successor thereto, the “ Collateral Agent ”) for the Lenders.

The Borrower has requested that the Lenders extend credit in the form of revolving Loans to the Borrower at any time and from time to time prior to the Maturity Date, in an aggregate principal amount at any time outstanding not in excess of $100,000,000. The proceeds of the Loans are to be used by the Borrower solely to (a) on the date of the initial extension of credit hereunder, (i) consummate the Refinancing and (ii) pay the Transaction Costs and (b) from time to time for general corporate purposes of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries.

The Lenders are willing to extend such credit to the Borrower on the terms and subject to the conditions set forth herein. Accordingly, the parties hereto agree as follows:

ARTICLE 1

D EFINITIONS

Section 1.01. Defined Terms . As used in this Agreement, the following terms shall have the meanings specified below:

ABR Loan ” or “ ABR Borrowing ” shall mean a Loan or a Borrowing consisting of Loans bearing interest at a rate determined by reference to the Alternate Base Rate.

Acquired Entity ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 6.04(g).

Additional Credit Extension Amendment ” shall mean an amendment to this Agreement (which may, at the option of the Administrative Agent, be in the form of an amendment and restatement of this Agreement) providing for any Incremental Commitments pursuant to Section 2.22, which shall be consistent with the applicable provisions of this Agreement and otherwise satisfactory to the parties thereto. Each Additional Credit Extension Amendment shall be executed by the Administrative Agent, the Loan Parties and the other parties specified in Section 2.22 (but not any other Lender). Any Additional Credit Extension Amendment may include conditions for delivery of opinions of counsel and other documentation consistent with the conditions in Sections 4.01 and/or 4.02, all to the extent reasonably requested by the Administrative Agent or the other parties to such Additional Credit Extension Amendment.

Additional Lender ” shall mean, at any time, any Person that is not an existing Lender and that agrees to provide any portion of any Incremental Commitments in accordance with Section 2.22 pursuant to an Additional Credit Extension Amendment;


provided that such Additional Lender shall be an Eligible Assignee with respect to the Commitments.

Adjusted LIBO Rate ” shall mean, with respect to any Eurodollar Borrowing for any Interest Period, an interest rate per annum equal to the product of (i) the LIBO Rate in effect for such Interest Period and (ii) Statutory Reserves.

Administrative Agent ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in the introductory statement to this Agreement.

Administrative Agent Fees ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 2.05(b).

Administrative Questionnaire ” shall mean an Administrative Questionnaire in the form of Exhibit A, or such other form as may be supplied from time to time by the Administrative Agent.

Affiliate ” shall mean, when used with respect to a specified Person, another Person that directly, or indirectly through one or more intermediaries, Controls or is Controlled by or is under common Control with the Person specified; provided , however, that, for purposes of the definition of “Eligible Assignee” and Section 6.08 the term “Affiliate” shall also include any Person that directly or indirectly owns 5% or more of any class of Equity Interests of the Person specified or that is an officer or director of the Person specified.

Affiliate Subordination Agreement ” shall mean an Affiliate Subordination Agreement in the form of Exhibit B pursuant to which intercompany obligations and advances owed by any Loan Party are subordinated to the Obligations.

Agents ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Article 8.

Aggregate Exposure ” shall mean the aggregate amount of the Lenders’ Exposures.

Aggregate Incremental Amount ” shall mean, at any time, the aggregate principal amount of Incremental Loans incurred at or prior to such time (assuming all Incremental Commitments established at or prior to such time are fully drawn).

Agreement ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in the introductory statement hereto.

Agreement Value ” shall mean, for each Hedging Agreement, on any date of determination, the maximum aggregate amount (giving effect to any netting agreements) that the Borrower or the applicable Subsidiary would be required to pay if such Hedging Agreement was terminated on such date.

Alternate Base Rate ” shall mean, for any day, a rate per annum equal to the greatest of (a) the Prime Rate in effect on such day, (b) the Federal Funds Effective Rate

 

2


in effect on such day plus 1/2 of 1.00% and (c) the Adjusted LIBO Rate for a one month Interest Period on such day (or if such day is not a Business Day, the immediately preceding Business Day) plus 1.00%; provided that, for the purpose of clause (c), the Adjusted LIBO Rate for any day shall be based on the rate determined on such day at approximately 11 a.m. (London time) by reference to the interest settlement rates set forth by (x) the British Bankers’ Association, (y) any successor service or entity that has been authorized by the U.K. Financial Conduct Authority to administer the London Interbank Offered Rate or (z) any service selected by the Administrative Agent that has been nominated by the relevant entity described in clause (x) or (y) of this proviso as an authorized information vendor for the purpose of displaying such rates. If the Administrative Agent shall have determined (which determination shall be conclusive absent manifest error) that it is unable to ascertain the Federal Funds Effective Rate for any reason, including the inability or failure of the Administrative Agent to obtain sufficient quotations in accordance with the terms of the definition thereof, the Alternate Base Rate shall be determined without regard to clause (b) of the preceding sentence until the circumstances giving rise to such inability no longer exist. Any change in the Alternate Base Rate due to a change in the Prime Rate, the Federal Funds Effective Rate or the Adjusted LIBO Rate shall be effective on the effective date of such change in the Prime Rate, the Federal Funds Effective Rate or the Adjusted LIBO Rate, as the case may be.

Anti-Terrorism Laws ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 3.26.

Applicable Margin ” shall mean, for any day (a) with respect to any Eurodollar Loan, 3.00% per annum and (b) with respect to any ABR Loan, 2.00% per annum.

Approved Fund ” shall mean, with respect to any Lender that is a fund or commingled investment vehicle that invests in bank loans, any other fund that invests in bank loans and is managed or advised by the same investment advisor as such Lender or by an Affiliate of such investment advisor.

Arranger ” shall mean Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC.

Assignment and Acceptance ” shall mean an assignment and acceptance entered into by a Lender and an Eligible Assignee, and accepted by the Administrative Agent, in the form of Exhibit C or such other form (including electronic documentation generated by MarkitClear or other electronic platform) as shall be approved by the Administrative Agent.

Availability ” shall mean, as of any time of determination, an amount equal to (a) the aggregate amount of Commitments in effect at such time minus (b) the Aggregate Exposure at such time.

Bankruptcy Code ” shall mean Title 11 of the United States Code entitled “ Bankruptcy ”, as now and hereafter in effect, or any successor statute.

 

3


Board ” shall mean the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System of the United States of America.

Borrower ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in the introductory statement to this Agreement.

Borrower Materials ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 9.01.

Borrower Notice ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in the definition of Real Estate Collateral Requirements.

Borrowing ” shall mean Loans of the same Type made, converted or continued on the same date and, in the case of Eurodollar Loans, as to which a single Interest Period is in effect.

Borrowing Request ” shall mean a request by the Borrower in accordance with the terms of Section 2.03 and substantially in the form of Exhibit D, or such other form as shall be approved by the Administrative Agent.

Breakage Event ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 2.15.

Business Day ” shall mean any day other than a Saturday, Sunday or day on which banks in New York City are authorized or required by law to close; provided that, when used in connection with a Eurodollar Loan, the term “ Business Day ” shall also exclude any day on which banks are not open for dealings in Dollar deposits in the London interbank market.

Capital Lease Obligations ” of any Person shall mean the obligations of such Person to pay rent or other amounts under any lease of (or other arrangement conveying the right to use) real or personal property, or a combination thereof, which obligations are required to be classified and accounted for as capital leases on a balance sheet of such Person under GAAP, and the amount of such obligations shall be the capitalized amount thereof determined in accordance with GAAP.

A “ Change in Control ” shall be deemed to have occurred if (a) prior to a Qualified Public Offering (x) the Permitted Investors shall fail to own and control, directly or indirectly, beneficially and of record, shares representing at least 51% of the aggregate ordinary voting power represented by the issued and outstanding Equity Interests of the Borrower or (y) Aaron Levie and Dylan Smith shall together fail to own and control, directly or indirectly, beneficially and of record, shares representing at least 80% of the Equity Interests of the Borrower owned by them as of the Closing Date, (b) after a Qualified Public Offering, any “ person ” or “ group ” (within the meaning of Rule 13d-5 of the Exchange Act as in effect on the date hereof), other than the Permitted Investors, shall own, directly or indirectly, beneficially or of record, shares representing more than 35% of the aggregate ordinary voting power represented by the issued and outstanding Equity Interests of the Borrower, (c) a majority of the seats (other than vacant seats) on the board of directors of the Borrower shall at any time be occupied by

 

4


persons who were neither (i) nominated by the board of directors of the Borrower nor (ii) appointed by directors so nominated or (d) any change in control (or similar event, however denominated) with respect to the Borrower or any Subsidiary shall occur under and as defined in any indenture or agreement in respect of Material Indebtedness to which the Borrower or any Subsidiary is a party.

Change in Law ” shall mean the occurrence, after the date of this Agreement, of any of the following: (a) the adoption or taking effect of any law, rule or regulation, (b) any change in any law, rule, regulation or treaty or in the administration, interpretation or application thereof by any Governmental Authority or (c) the making or issuance of any request, rule, guideline or directive (whether or not having the force of law) of any Governmental Authority; provided that, notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, (i) the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act and all requests, rules, guidelines or directives thereunder or issued in connection therewith by any Governmental Authority and (ii) all requests, rules, guidelines or directives promulgated by the Bank for International Settlements, the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (or any successor or similar authority) or the United States or foreign regulatory authorities, in each case pursuant to Basel III, shall in each case be deemed to be a “ Change in Law ,” regardless of the date enacted, adopted or issued.

Charges ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 9.08.

Class ” when used in reference to any Loan or Borrowing, refers to whether such Loan, or the Loans comprising such Borrowing, is or is not an Extended Loan and, when used in reference to any Commitment, refers to whether such Commitment is or is not an Extended Commitment.

Closing Date ” shall mean August 27, 2013.

Code ” shall mean the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended from time to time.

Collateral ” shall mean the “ Collateral ” as defined in any Security Agreement and the “ Mortgaged Property ” as defined in any Mortgage.

Collateral Agent ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in the introductory statements to this Agreement.

Commitment ” shall mean, with respect to each Lender, the commitment of such Lender to make Loans hereunder as is set forth on Schedule 2.01(a), or in the Assignment and Acceptance pursuant to which such Lender assumed its Commitment, as applicable, as the same may be (a) reduced from time to time pursuant to Section 2.09 and (b) reduced or increased from time to time pursuant to assignments by or to such Lender pursuant to Section 9.04.

Commitment Period ” shall mean the period from the Closing Date to but excluding the Termination Date.

 

5


Commitment Fee ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 2.05(a).

Commodity Exchange Act ” shall mean the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. § 1 et seq.), as amended from time to time, and any successor statute.

Communications ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 9.01.

Competitor ” of the Borrower shall mean any entity or person in the business of content collaboration and/or Enterprise Content Management (ECM) that is deployed on premise, hybrid, or via a software as a service delivery model and shall specifically include, without limitation, DropBox, Inc., Citrix Systems, Inc., Microsoft Corporation, Google Inc., Accellion Inc., Egnyte, Inc., EMC Corporation, Alfresco Software, Inc., OpenText Corporation, International Business Machines Corporation, Oracle Corporation, Salesforce.com Inc., AirWatch, LLC, BigTinCan (BTC Dashboard), Soonr, Inc., Watchdox, Inc. and Apple Inc.

Compliance Certificate ” shall mean a compliance certificate in the form of Exhibit E.

Control ” shall mean the possession, directly or indirectly, of the power to direct or cause the direction of the management or policies of a Person, whether through the ownership of voting securities, by contract or otherwise, and the terms “ Controlling ” and “ Controlled ” shall have meanings correlative thereto.

Cost Sharing Agreement ” shall mean that Cost Sharing Agreement, dated as of June 25, 2013, between the Borrower and Box Intl Technology Ltd.

Credit Event ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 4.01.

Credit Facilities ” shall mean the revolving credit and incremental facilities provided for by this Agreement.

Credit Percentage ” of any Lender at any time shall mean the percentage of the Total Commitment represented by such Lender’s Commitment. In the event the Commitments shall have expired or been terminated, the Credit Percentages shall be determined on the basis of the Commitments most recently in effect, giving effect to any subsequent assignments.

Debtor Relief Laws ” shall mean the Bankruptcy Code and all other liquidation, conservatorship, bankruptcy, assignment for the benefit of creditors, moratorium, rearrangement, receivership, insolvency, reorganization, or similar debtor relief laws of the United States or other applicable jurisdictions from time to time in effect.

Default ” shall mean any event or condition which upon notice, lapse of time or both would constitute an Event of Default.

 

6


Defaulting Lender ” shall mean, subject to Section 2.21(b), any Lender that (a) has failed to (i) fund all or any portion of its Loans within two (2) Business Days of the date such Loans were required to be funded hereunder unless such Lender notifies the Administrative Agent and the Borrower in writing that such failure is the result of such Lender’s determination that one or more conditions precedent to funding (each of which conditions precedent, together with any applicable Default, shall be specifically identified in such writing) has not been satisfied or (ii) pay to the Administrative Agent or any other Lender any other amount required to be paid by it hereunder within two (2) Business Days of the date when due, (b) has notified the Borrower or the Administrative Agent in writing that it does not intend to comply with its funding obligations hereunder, or has made a public statement to that effect (unless such writing or public statement relates to such Lender’s obligation to fund a Loan hereunder and states that such position is based on such Lender’s determination that a condition precedent to funding (which condition precedent, together with any applicable Default, shall be specifically identified in such writing or public statement) cannot be satisfied), (c) has failed, within three (3) Business Days after written request by the Administrative Agent or the Borrower, to confirm in writing to the Administrative Agent and the Borrower that it will comply with its prospective funding obligations hereunder ( provided that such Lender shall cease to be a Defaulting Lender pursuant to this clause (c) upon receipt of such written confirmation by the Administrative Agent and the Borrower) or (d) has, or has a direct or indirect parent company that has, (i) become the subject of a proceeding under any Debtor Relief Law or (ii) had appointed for it a receiver, custodian, conservator, trustee, administrator, assignee for the benefit of creditors or similar Person charged with reorganization or liquidation of its business or assets, including the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation or any other state or federal regulatory authority acting in such a capacity; provided that a Lender shall not be a Defaulting Lender solely by virtue of the ownership or acquisition of any equity interest in that Lender or any direct or indirect parent company thereof by a Governmental Authority so long as such ownership interest does not result in or provide such Lender with immunity from the jurisdiction of courts within the United States or from the enforcement of judgments or writs of attachment on its assets or permit such Lender (or such Governmental Authority) to reject, repudiate, disavow or disaffirm any contracts or agreements made with such Lender. Any determination by the Administrative Agent that a Lender is a Defaulting Lender under any one or more of clauses (a) through (d) above shall be conclusive and binding absent manifest error, and such Lender shall be deemed to be a Defaulting Lender (subject to Section 2.21(b)) upon delivery of written notice of such determination to the Borrower and each Lender.

Disposition ” shall mean, with respect to any Person, (a) the sale, transfer, license, lease or other disposition (by way of merger, casualty, condemnation or otherwise) of any property or asset of such Person (including, without limitation, any sale and leaseback transaction and the sale of any Equity Interest owned by such Person) to any other Person and (b) the issuance of Equity Interests by a subsidiary of such Person to any other Person.

Disqualified Lender ” shall have the meaning set forth on Schedule 1.01(a).

 

7


Disqualified Stock ” shall mean any Equity Interest that, by its terms (or by the terms of any security into which it is convertible or for which it is exchangeable), or upon the happening of any event, (a) matures (excluding any maturity as the result of an optional redemption by the issuer thereof) or is mandatorily redeemable, pursuant to a sinking fund obligation or otherwise, or is redeemable at the option of the holder thereof, in whole or in part, or requires the payment of any cash dividend or any other scheduled payment constituting a return of capital, in each case at any time on or prior to the first anniversary of the Maturity Date or (b) is convertible into or exchangeable (unless at the sole option of the issuer thereof) for (i) debt securities or (ii) any Equity Interest referred to in clause (a) above, in each case at any time prior to the first anniversary of the Maturity Date.

Dollars ” or “ $ ” shall mean lawful money of the United States of America.

Domestic Subsidiaries ” shall mean all Subsidiaries other than Foreign Subsidiaries.

Eligible Assignee ” shall mean (i) a Lender, (ii) an Affiliate of a Lender, (iii) an Approved Fund of a Lender and (iv) any other Person (other than a natural person) with respect to whom all consents to assignment required hereunder (including under Section 9.04(b)(iii)) have been obtained; provided that notwithstanding the foregoing, “Eligible Assignee” shall not include the Borrower or any of the Borrower’s Affiliates.

Engagement Letter ” shall mean the Engagement Letter dated July 2, 2013, between the Borrower and Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC.

Environmental Laws ” shall mean all former, current and future federal, state, local, supranational, and foreign laws (including statutory and common law), treaties, regulations, rules, ordinances, codes, decrees, injunctions, judgments, governmental restrictions or requirements, directives, orders (including consent orders), permits, and agreements in each case, relating to the indoor or outdoor environment, natural resources, human health and safety or the presence, Release of or exposure to pollutants, contaminants, wastes, chemicals or otherwise hazardous materials, or the generation, manufacture, processing, distribution, use, treatment, storage, transport, recycling, disposal or handling of, or the arrangement for such activities, with respect to any pollutants, contaminants, wastes, chemicals or otherwise hazardous materials.

Environmental Liability ” shall mean all liabilities, obligations, damages, losses, claims, actions, suits, judgments, orders, fines, penalties, fees, indemnities, expenses and costs (including administrative oversight costs, natural resource damages and remediation costs), whether known or unknown, actual or potential, vested or unvested, or contingent or otherwise, arising out of or relating to (a) any Environmental Law, (b) the generation, manufacture, processing, distribution, use, treatment, storage, transport, recycling, disposal or handling of, or the arrangement for such activities, with respect to any Hazardous Materials, (c) exposure to any Hazardous Materials, (d) the presence or Release of any Hazardous Materials or (e) any contract, agreement or other

 

8


consensual arrangement pursuant to which liability is assumed or imposed with respect to any of the foregoing.

Equity Interests ” shall mean shares of capital stock, partnership interests, membership interests in a limited liability company, beneficial interests in a trust or other equity interests in any Person and any option, warrant or other right entitling the holder thereof to purchase or otherwise acquire any such equity interest.

ERISA ” shall mean the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as the same may be amended from time to time.

ERISA Affiliate ” shall mean any trade or business (whether or not incorporated) that, together with the Borrower, is treated as a single employer under Section 414(b) or (c) of the Code, or solely for purposes of Section 302 of ERISA and Section 412 of the Code, is treated as a single employer under Section 414 of the Code. For the avoidance of doubt, when any provision of this Agreement relates to a past event or period of time, the term “ ERISA Affiliate ” includes any person who was, as to the time of such past event or period of time, an “ ERISA Affiliate ” within the meaning of the preceding sentence.

ERISA Event ” shall mean (a) any “ reportable event ,” as defined in Section 4043 of ERISA or the regulations issued thereunder, with respect to a Plan (other than an event for which the 30-day notice period is waived), (b) the requirements of Section 4043(b) of ERISA apply with respect to a contributing sponsor, as defined in Section 4001(a)(13) of ERISA, of a Plan, and an event described in paragraph (9), (10), (11), (12) or (13) of Section 4043(c) of ERISA is reasonably expected to occur with respect to such Plan, (c) a determination that any Plan is or is reasonably expected to be in “ at risk ” status (within the meaning of Section 430 of the Code or Section 303 of ERISA), (d) the filing pursuant to Section 412(c) of the Code or Section 302(c) of ERISA of an application for a waiver of the minimum funding standard with respect to any Plan, (e) the incurrence by the Borrower or any of its ERISA Affiliates of any liability under Title IV of ERISA (other than non-delinquent premiums payable to the PBGC under Sections 4006 and 4007 of ERISA), (f) the termination, or the filing of a notice of intent to terminate, any Plan pursuant to Section 4041(c) of ERISA, (g) the receipt by the Borrower or any of its ERISA Affiliates from the PBGC or a plan administrator of any notice relating to the intention to terminate any Plan or Plans or to appoint a trustee to administer any Plan, (h) the cessation of operations at a facility of the Borrower or any ERISA Affiliate in the circumstances described in Section 4062(e) of ERISA, (i) conditions contained in Section 303(k)(1)(A) of ERISA for imposition of a lien shall have been met with respect to any Plan, (j) the receipt by the Borrower or any of its ERISA Affiliates of any notice, or the receipt by any Multiemployer Plan from the Borrower or any of its ERISA Affiliates of any notice, concerning the imposition of Withdrawal Liability or a determination that a Multiemployer Plan is, or is expected to be, “ insolvent ” (within the meaning of Section 4245 of ERISA), in “ reorganization ” (within the meaning of Section 4241 of ERISA), or in “ endangered ” or “ critical ” status (within the meaning of Section 432 of the Code or Section 304 of ERISA), (k) the occurrence of a non-exempt “ prohibited transaction ” with respect to which the

 

9


Borrower or any of the Subsidiaries is a “ disqualified person ” (within the meaning of Section 4975 of the Code) or a “ party in interest ” (within the meaning of Section 406 of ERISA) or with respect to which the Borrower, any such Subsidiary or their respective ERISA Affiliates could otherwise be liable, (l) any Foreign Benefit Event or (m) any other event or condition with respect to a Plan or Multiemployer Plan that could result in liability of the Borrower or any Subsidiary.

Eurodollar Loan ” or “ Eurodollar Borrowing ” shall mean a Loan or a Borrowing consisting of Loans bearing interest at a rate determined by reference to the Adjusted LIBO Rate.

Events of Default ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 7.01.

Evidence of Flood Insurance ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in the definition of Real Estate Collateral Requirements.

Exchange Act ” shall mean the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended.

Excluded Swap Obligations ” shall mean, with respect to any Guarantor, any Swap Obligation if, and to the extent that, all or a portion of the Guarantee of such Guarantor of, or the grant by such Guarantor of a security interest to secure, such Swap Obligation (or any Guarantee thereof) (after giving effect to any keepwell guarantee or other support agreement) is or becomes illegal under the Commodity Exchange Act or any rule, regulation or order of the Commodity Futures Trading Commission (or the application or official interpretation of any thereof) by virtue of such Guarantor’s failure for any reason to constitute an “eligible contract participant” as defined in the Commodity Exchange Act and the regulations thereunder at the time the Guarantee of such Guarantor or the grant of such security interest becomes effective with respect to such Swap Obligation. If a Swap Obligation arises under a master agreement governing more than one swap, such exclusion shall apply only to the portion of such Swap Obligation that is attributable to swaps for which such Guarantee or security interest is or becomes illegal.

Excluded Taxes ” shall mean, any of the following Taxes imposed on or with respect to a Recipient or required to be withheld or deducted from a payment to a Recipient, (a) Taxes imposed on or measured by net income (however denominated), franchise Taxes, and branch profits Taxes, in each case, (i) imposed as a result of such Recipient being organized under the laws of, or having its principal office or, in the case of any Lender, its applicable lending office located in, the jurisdiction imposing such Tax (or any political subdivision thereof) or (ii) that are Other Connection Taxes, (b) in the case of a Lender, U.S. federal withholding Taxes imposed on amounts payable to or for the account of such Lender with respect to an applicable interest in a Loan or Commitment pursuant to a law in effect on the date on which (i) such Lender acquires such interest in the Loan or Commitment (other than pursuant to an assignment request by the Borrower under Section 2.20(a)) or (ii) such Lender changes its lending office, except in each case to the extent that, pursuant to Section 2.19, amounts with respect to

 

10


such Taxes were payable either to such Lender’s assignor immediately before such Lender became a party hereto or to such Lender immediately before it changed its lending office, (c) Taxes attributable to such Recipient’s failure to comply with Section 2.19(f) and (d) any U.S. federal withholding Taxes imposed under FATCA.

Executive Order ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 3.26.

Existing Debt ” shall mean any and all outstanding principal, accrued interest and fees under (i) that certain Loan and Security Agreement by and between the Borrower and Hercules Technology Growth Capital, Inc., dated as of August 23, 2011, as amended on March 28, 2012 and (ii) that certain Loan and Security Agreement by and between the Borrower and Hercules Technology Growth Capital, Inc., dated as of March 28, 2012, as amended on June 13, 2012.

Exposure ” shall mean, with respect to any Lender at any time, the aggregate principal amount at such time of all outstanding Loans of such Lender.

Extended Commitment ” shall mean any Class of Commitments the maturity of which shall have been extended pursuant to Section 2.23.

Extended Loans ” shall mean any Loans made pursuant to the Extended Commitments.

Extension ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 2.23(a).

Extension Offer ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 2.23(a).

FATCA ” shall mean Sections 1471 through 1474 of the Code as of the date of this Agreement (or any amended or successor version that is substantively comparable) and any current or future regulations or official interpretations thereof.

Federal Funds Effective Rate ” shall mean, for any day, the weighted average of the rates on overnight Federal funds transactions with members of the Federal Reserve System arranged by Federal funds brokers, as published on the next succeeding Business Day by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, or, if such rate is not so published for any day that is a Business Day, the average of the quotations for the day for such transactions received by the Administrative Agent from three Federal funds brokers of recognized standing selected by it.

Fees ” shall mean the Commitment Fees and the Administrative Agent Fees.

Financial Officer ” of any Person shall mean the chief financial officer, principal accounting officer, treasurer or controller of such Person.

Flood Laws ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in the definition of Real Estate Collateral Requirements.

 

11


Foreign Benefit Event ” shall mean, with respect to any Foreign Pension Plan, (a) the existence of unfunded liabilities in excess of the amount permitted under any applicable law, or in excess of the amount that would be permitted absent a waiver from a Governmental Authority, (b) the failure to make the required contributions or payments, under any applicable law, on or before the due date for such contributions or payments, (c) the receipt of a notice by a Governmental Authority relating to the intention to terminate any such Foreign Pension Plan or to appoint a trustee or similar official to administer any such Foreign Pension Plan, or alleging the insolvency of any such Foreign Pension Plan, (d) the incurrence of any liability in excess of $5,000,000 by the Borrower or any Subsidiary under applicable law on account of the complete or partial termination of such Foreign Pension Plan or the complete or partial withdrawal of any participating employer therein, or (e) the occurrence of any transaction that is prohibited under any applicable law and that has resulted or could reasonably be expected to result in the incurrence of any liability by the Borrower or any of the Subsidiaries, or the imposition on the Borrower or any of the Subsidiaries of any fine, excise tax or penalty resulting from any noncompliance with any applicable law, in each case in excess of $5,000,000.

Foreign Lender ” shall mean (a) with respect to a Borrower that is a U.S. Person, a Lender that is not a U.S. Person and (b) with respect to a Borrower that is not a U.S. Person, a Lender that is resident or organized under the laws of a jurisdiction other than that in which the Borrower is resident for tax purposes.

Foreign Pension Plan ” shall mean any benefit plan that under applicable law other than the laws of the United States or any political subdivision thereof, is required to be funded through a trust or other funding vehicle other than a trust or funding vehicle maintained exclusively by a Governmental Authority.

Foreign Subsidiary ” shall mean any Subsidiary that is a “controlled foreign corporation” within the meaning of Section 957 of the Code (and any subsidiary of such person).

GAAP ” shall mean United States generally accepted accounting principles applied on a basis consistent with the financial statements referenced in Section 4.02(j).

Governmental Authority ” shall mean any federal, state, local, supranational or foreign court or governmental agency, registry, authority, instrumentality or regulatory body.

Guarantee ” of or by any Person shall mean any obligation, contingent or otherwise, of such Person guaranteeing or having the economic effect of guaranteeing any Indebtedness or other obligation of any other Person (the “ primary obligor ”) in any manner, whether directly or indirectly, and including any obligation of such Person, direct or indirect, (a) to purchase or pay (or advance or supply funds for the purchase or payment of) such Indebtedness or other obligation or to purchase (or to advance or supply funds for the purchase of) any security for the payment of such Indebtedness or other obligation, (b) to purchase or lease property, securities or services for the purpose of assuring the owner of such Indebtedness or other obligation of the payment of such

 

12


Indebtedness or other obligation or (c) to maintain working capital, equity capital or any other financial statement condition or liquidity of the primary obligor so as to enable the primary obligor to pay such Indebtedness or other obligation; provided that the term “ Guarantee ” shall not include endorsements for collection or deposit in the ordinary course of business.

Guarantee and Collateral Agreement ” shall mean the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement, in the form of Exhibit F, among the Borrower, the Subsidiaries party thereto and the Collateral Agent for the benefit of the Secured Parties.

Guarantor ” shall mean each wholly-owned Domestic Subsidiary listed on Schedule 1.01(b), and each other wholly-owned Domestic Subsidiary that is or becomes a party to the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement.

Hazardous Materials ” shall mean (a) any petroleum products, derivatives or byproducts and all other hydrocarbons, coal ash, radon gas, lead, asbestos and asbestos-containing materials, toxic mold, urea formaldehyde foam insulation, polychlorinated biphenyls, infectious or medical wastes and chlorofluorocarbons and all other ozone-depleting substances, (b) any pollutant, contaminant, waste or chemical or any toxic, radioactive, ignitable, corrosive, reactive or otherwise hazardous substance, waste or material, or any substance, waste or material having any constituent elements displaying any of the foregoing characteristics or (c) any substance, waste or material that is prohibited, limited or regulated by or pursuant to or which can form the basis for liability under any Environmental Law.

Hedging Agreement ” shall mean any interest rate protection agreement, foreign currency exchange agreement, commodity price protection agreement or other interest or currency exchange rate or commodity price hedging arrangement.

Immaterial Subsidiaries ” shall mean one or more Subsidiaries for which, (a) the assets of all such designated Subsidiaries constitute, in the aggregate, no more than 5% of the total assets of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries on a consolidated basis (determined as of the last day of the most recent fiscal quarter of the Borrower for which financial statements have been delivered pursuant to Section 5.04(a) or 5.04(b)), and (b) the revenues of such Subsidiaries, in the aggregate, account for no more than 5% of the total revenues of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries on a consolidated basis for the twelve-month period ending on the last day of the most recent fiscal quarter of the Borrower for which financial statements have been delivered pursuant to Section 5.04(a) or 5.04(b). The Borrower shall notify the Administrative Agent quarterly as to all Immaterial Subsidiaries as provided in Section 5.04(c). The Borrower may designate and re-designate a Subsidiary as an Immaterial Subsidiary at any time, subject to the terms set forth in this definition. As of the Closing Date, the Immaterial Subsidiaries are set forth on Schedule 1.01(c).

Incremental Cap ” shall mean $50,000,000.

 

13


Incremental Commitment ” shall mean the commitment of any Lender, established pursuant to Section 2.22, to make an Incremental Loan to the Borrower.

Incremental Lender ” shall mean a Lender with an Incremental Commitment or an outstanding Incremental Loan.

Incremental Loans ” shall mean Loans made by one or more Incremental Lenders to the Borrower pursuant to their Incremental Commitments. Incremental Loans may only be made in the form of additional Loans.

Indebtedness ” of any Person shall mean, without duplication, (a) all obligations of such Person for borrowed money, (b) all obligations of such Person evidenced by bonds, debentures, notes or similar instruments, (c) all obligations of such Person upon which interest charges are customarily paid, (d) all obligations of such Person under conditional sale or other title retention agreements relating to property or assets purchased by such Person, (e) all obligations of such Person for the deferred purchase price of property or services (excluding trade accounts payable and accrued obligations incurred in the ordinary course of business), (f) all Indebtedness of others secured by (or for which the holder of such Indebtedness has an existing right, contingent or otherwise, to be secured by) any Lien on property owned or acquired by such Person, whether or not the obligations secured thereby have been assumed, (g) all Guarantees by such Person of Indebtedness of others, (h) all Capital Lease Obligations of such Person, (i) net obligations of such Person under any Hedging Agreements, valued at the Agreement Value thereof, (j) all obligations of such Person to purchase, redeem, retire, defease or otherwise make any payment in respect of any Equity Interests of such Person or any other Person or any warrants, rights or options to acquire such equity interests, valued, in the case of redeemable preferred interests, at the greater of its voluntary or involuntary liquidation preference plus accrued and unpaid dividends, (k) all obligations of such Person as an account party in respect of letters of credit and (l) all obligations of such Person in respect of bankers’ acceptances. The Indebtedness of any Person shall include the Indebtedness of any partnership in which such Person is a general partner.

Indemnified Taxes ” shall mean (a) Taxes, other than Excluded Taxes, imposed on or with respect to any payment made by or on account of any obligation of any Loan Party under any Loan Document and (b) to the extent not otherwise described in (a), Other Taxes.

Indemnitee ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 9.05(b).

Information ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 9.17.

Intellectual Property ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement.

Interest Election Request ” shall mean a request by the Borrower in accordance with the terms of Section 2.10 and substantially in the form of Exhibit G or such other form as shall be approved by the Administrative Agent.

 

14


Interest Payment Date ” shall mean (a) with respect to any ABR Loan, the last Business Day of each March, June, September and December and (b) with respect to any Eurodollar Borrowing, the last day of the Interest Period applicable to such Borrowing and, in the case of a Eurodollar Borrowing with an Interest Period of more than three months’ duration, each day that would have been an Interest Payment Date had successive Interest Periods of three months’ duration been applicable to such Borrowing.

Interest Period ” shall mean, with respect to any Eurodollar Borrowing, the period commencing on the date of such Borrowing and ending on the numerically corresponding day in the calendar month that is one (1), two (2), three (3) or six (6) months thereafter, as the Borrower may elect; provided that (a) if any Interest Period would end on a day other than a Business Day, such Interest Period shall be extended to the next succeeding Business Day unless such next succeeding Business Day would fall in the next calendar month, in which case such Interest Period shall end on the next preceding Business Day, (b) any Interest Period that begins on the last Business Day of a calendar month (or on a day for which there is no numerically corresponding day in the calendar month at the end of such Interest Period) shall, subject to clause (c), end on the last Business Day of the calendar month at the end of such Interest Period and (c) no Interest Period for any Borrowing shall extend beyond the applicable Maturity Date. Interest shall accrue from and including the first day of an Interest Period to but excluding the last day of such Interest Period. For purposes hereof, the date of a Borrowing initially shall be the date on which such Borrowing is made and thereafter shall be the effective date of the most recent conversion or continuation of such Borrowing.

Investment ” shall mean, as to any Person, any direct or indirect acquisition or investment by such Person, whether by means of (a) the purchase or other acquisition of Equity Interests or Indebtedness or other securities of another Person, (b) a loan, advance or capital contribution to, Guarantee or assumption of Indebtedness of, or purchase or other acquisition of any other Indebtedness or equity participation or interest in, another Person, including any partnership or joint venture interest in such other Person or (c) the purchase or other acquisition (in one transaction or a series of transactions) of all or substantially all of the property and assets or business of another Person or assets constituting a business unit, line of business or division of such Person. For purposes of compliance with Section 6.04, the amount of any Investment shall be the amount actually invested, without adjustment for subsequent increases or decreases in the value of such Investment but (x) giving effect to any returns or distributions of capital or repayment of principal actually received in cash by such Person with respect thereto, whether by disposition, return on capital, dividend or otherwise or (y) in the case of any Investment by a Loan Party in any Foreign Subsidiary, as reduced by any cash payments received by such Loan Party from any Foreign Subsidiary pursuant to the Management and Services Agreement or the Cost Sharing Agreement.

Investment Company Act ” shall mean the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended from time to time.

IRS ” shall mean the United States Internal Revenue Service.

 

15


Latest Maturity Date ” shall mean, at any time, the latest maturity or expiration date applicable to any Loan or Commitment (or, if so specified, applicable to the specified Loans or Commitments of the Class thereof) hereunder at such time.

Lenders ” shall mean (a) the Persons listed on Schedule 2.01(a) and (b) any Person that has become a party hereto as a Lender pursuant to an Assignment and Acceptance, Additional Credit Extension Amendment or otherwise in accordance with this Agreement, in each case other than any such Person that has ceased to be a party hereto pursuant to an Assignment and Acceptance.

LIBO Rate ” shall mean, with respect to any Eurodollar Borrowing for any Interest Period, the rate per annum determined by the Administrative Agent at approximately 11:00 a.m. (London time) on the date that is two Business Days prior to the commencement of such Interest Period by reference to the interest settlement rates for deposits in Dollars (as set forth by (a) the British Bankers’ Association, (b) any successor service or entity that has been authorized by the U.K. Financial Conduct Authority to administer the London Interbank Offered Rate or (c) any service selected by the Administrative Agent that has been nominated by the relevant entity described in clause (a) or (b) above as an authorized information vendor for the purpose of displaying such rates) for a period equal to such Interest Period; provided that, to the extent that an interest rate is not ascertainable pursuant to the foregoing provisions of this definition, the “LIBO Rate” shall be the interest rate per annum determined by the Administrative Agent (including by reference to any applicable published market data) to be the average of the rates per annum at which deposits in Dollars are offered for such relevant Interest Period to major banks in the London interbank market in London, England by the Administrative Agent at approximately 11:00 a.m. (London time) on the date that is two Business Days prior to the beginning of such Interest Period.

Lien ” shall mean (a) with respect to any asset, (i) any mortgage, deed of trust, lien (statutory or other), pledge, hypothecation, assignment, deposit arrangement, encumbrance, charge, preference, priority or other security interest or preferential arrangement of any kind or nature whatsoever in or on such asset and (ii) the interest of a vendor or a lessor under any conditional sale agreement, capital lease or title retention agreement (or any financing lease having substantially the same effect as any of the foregoing) relating to such asset and (b) in the case of securities, any purchase option, call or similar right of a third party with respect to such securities.

Liquidity ” shall mean, at any time of determination, the sum of (a) Availability at such time and (b) the amount of Unrestricted Cash at such time.

Loans ” shall mean the revolving loans made by the Lenders to the Borrower pursuant to Section 2.01.

Loan Documents ” shall mean this Agreement, the Security Documents, the Notes and any other document executed in connection with the foregoing.

Loan Parties ” shall mean the Borrower and the Guarantors.

 

16


Management and Services Agreement ” shall mean a Management and Services Agreement between the Borrower and Box.com (UK) Ltd substantially in the form delivered to the Administrative Agent prior to the Closing Date.

Margin Stock ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Regulation U.

Material Adverse Effect ” shall mean a material adverse effect on (a) the business, operations, property or condition, financial or otherwise, of the Borrower and the Subsidiaries, taken as a whole, (b) the ability of the Borrower and the Guarantors, taken as a whole, to perform their payment obligations under the Loan Documents or (c) the rights and remedies of or benefits available to the Lenders under the Loan Documents.

Material Indebtedness ” shall mean Indebtedness (other than the Loans) of any one or more of the Borrower or any Subsidiary in an aggregate principal amount exceeding $5,000,000. For purposes of determining Material Indebtedness, the “ principal amount ” of the obligations of the Borrower or any Subsidiary in respect of any Hedging Agreement at any time shall be the Agreement Value of such Hedging Agreement at such time.

Maturity Date ” shall mean August 27, 2015 (or, if such day is not a Business Day, the next preceding Business Day).

Maximum Rate ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 9.08.

Moody’s ” shall mean Moody’s Investors Service, Inc., or any successor thereto.

Mortgaged Properties ” shall mean, each parcel of real property and improvements thereto with respect to which a Mortgage is granted pursuant to Section 5.12.

Mortgages ” shall mean the mortgages, deeds of trust, deeds to secure debt and other similar security documents delivered pursuant to Section 5.12, each in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to the Collateral Agent and the Borrower.

Multiemployer Plan ” shall mean a multiemployer plan as defined in Section 4001(a)(3) of ERISA.

Net Cash Proceeds ” shall mean (a) with respect to any Disposition, the cash proceeds (including cash proceeds subsequently received (as and when received) in respect of noncash consideration initially received), net of (i) selling expenses (including broker’s fees or commissions, investment banking fees, legal fees, accountants’ fees, transfer and similar taxes and the Borrower’s good faith estimate of income taxes paid or payable in connection with such sale), (ii) amounts provided as a reserve, in accordance with GAAP, against any retained liabilities or liabilities under any indemnification obligations or purchase price adjustment associated with such Disposition ( provided that, to the extent and at the time any such amounts are released from such reserve, such amounts shall constitute Net Cash Proceeds) and (iii) the principal amount, premium or

 

17


penalty, if any, interest and other amounts on any Indebtedness which is secured by the asset sold in such Disposition and which is required to be repaid with such proceeds (other than (x) Indebtedness hereunder and (y) any such Indebtedness assumed by the purchaser of such asset) and (b) with respect to any issuance of Equity Interests, the cash proceeds thereof, net of all taxes and customary fees, commissions, costs and other expenses incurred in connection therewith.

NFIP ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in the definition of Real Estate Collateral Requirements.

Non-Defaulting Lender ” shall mean, at any time, each Lender that is not a Defaulting Lender at such time.

Notes ” shall mean any promissory notes evidencing the Loans, executed and delivered pursuant to Section 2.04(e) and in the form of Exhibit H.

Obligations ” shall mean (i) all principal of all Loans, all interest (including Post-Petition Interest) on such Loans and all other amounts now or hereafter payable by the Borrower pursuant to the Loan Documents and (ii) all obligations of a Loan Party to any Qualified Counterparty under any Secured Hedging Agreements, excluding in the case of this clause (ii), the Excluded Swap Obligations.

OFAC ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 3.24.

Other Connection Taxes ” shall mean, with respect to any Recipient, Taxes imposed as a result of a present or former connection between such Recipient and the jurisdiction imposing such Tax (other than connections arising from such Recipient having executed, delivered, become a party to, performed its obligations under, received payments under, received or perfected a security interest under or engaged in any other transaction pursuant to or enforced any Loan Document).

Other Taxes ” shall mean all present or future stamp, court or documentary, intangible, property, excise, mortgage, recording, filing or similar Taxes that arise from any payment made under, from the execution, delivery, recording, performance, enforcement or registration of, from the receipt or perfection of a security interest under, or otherwise with respect to, any Loan Document, except any such Taxes that are Other Connection Taxes imposed with respect to an assignment (other than an assignment made pursuant to Section 2.20(a)).

Participant ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 9.04(d).

Participant Register ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 9.04(d).

PBGC ” shall mean the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation referred to and defined in ERISA.

 

18


Perfection Certificate ” shall mean the Perfection Certificate substantially in the form of Exhibit E to the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement.

Permitted Acquisition ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 6.04(g).

Permitted Investments ” shall mean:

(a) direct obligations of, or obligations the principal of and interest on which are unconditionally guaranteed by, the United States of America (or by any agency thereof to the extent such obligations are backed by the full faith and credit of the United States of America), in each case maturing within one year from the date of issuance thereof;

(b) investments in commercial paper maturing within 270 days from the date of issuance thereof and having, at such date of acquisition, a rating of at least “ Prime 1 ” (or the then equivalent grade) by Moody’s or “ A-1 ” (or the then equivalent grade) by S&P;

(c) investments in certificates of deposit, banker’s acceptances and time deposits maturing within one year from the date of acquisition thereof issued or guaranteed by or placed with, and money market deposit accounts issued or offered by, the Administrative Agent or any domestic office of any commercial bank organized under the laws of the United States of America or any State thereof that has a combined capital and surplus and undivided profits of not less than $500,000,000 and that issues (or the parent of which issues) commercial paper rated at least “ Prime 1 ” (or the then equivalent grade) by Moody’s or “ A-1 ” (or the then equivalent grade) by S&P;

(d) fully collateralized repurchase agreements with a term of not more than 30 days for securities described in clause (a) above and entered into with a financial institution satisfying the criteria of clause (c) above;

(e) investments in “ money market funds ” within the meaning of Rule 2a-7 of the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended, substantially all of whose assets are invested in investments of the type described in clauses (a) through (d) above; and

(f) other short-term investments utilized by Foreign Subsidiaries in accordance with normal investment practices for cash management in investments of a type analogous to the foregoing.

Permitted Investors ” shall mean (a) Aaron Levie, (b) Dylan Smith, (c) Dan Levin, (d) Andreessen Horowitz, (e) Bessemer Venture Partners, (f) Coatue Management, (g) Draper Fisher Jurvetson, (h) Emergence Capital Partners, (i) General Atlantic Partners, (j) Hercules Technology Growth Capital, (k) Intel Capital, (l) Meritech Capital, (m) New Enterprise Associates, (n) SAP Ventures, (o) Scale Venture Partners, (p) The Social+Capital Partnership, (q) U.S. Venture Partners, (r) any other Person that is reasonably acceptable to the Administrative Agent and that becomes a holder of voting common or preferred Equity Interests of the Borrower on or prior to the date that is 90

 

19


days after the Closing Date and (s) any Affiliate of any of the foregoing (other than any portfolio company thereof).

Permitted Refinancing ” shall mean, with respect to any Person, any refinancing, refunding, renewal or extension or similar modification of any Indebtedness of such Person (the “ Refinanced Indebtedness ”); provided that (a) the principal amount (or accreted value, if applicable) thereof does not exceed the principal amount (or accreted value, if applicable) of the Refinanced Indebtedness except by an amount equal to any interest capitalized with, any premium or other reasonable amount paid, and fees and expenses reasonably incurred, in connection with such modification, refinancing, refunding, renewal or extension, (b) such modification, refinancing, refunding, renewal or extension has a final maturity date equal to or later than the final maturity date of, and has a weighted average life to maturity equal to or longer than the weighted average life to maturity of, the Refinanced Indebtedness, (c) if the Refinanced Indebtedness is subordinated in right of payment to the Obligations, such modification, refinancing, refunding, renewal or extension is subordinated in right of payment to the Obligations on terms at least as favorable, taken as a whole, to the Lenders as those contained in the documentation governing the Refinanced Indebtedness, (d) at the time thereof, no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing, (e) if the Refinanced Indebtedness is secured, the terms and conditions relating to collateral of any such modified, refinanced, refunded, renewed or extended Indebtedness, taken as a whole, are not materially less favorable to the Loan Parties than the terms and conditions with respect to the Collateral of the Refinanced Indebtedness, taken as a whole (and the Liens on any Collateral securing any such modified, refinanced, refunded, renewed or extended Indebtedness shall have the same (or lesser) priority as the Refinanced Indebtedness relative to the Liens on the Collateral securing the Obligations), (f) the terms and conditions (excluding any subordination, pricing, fees, rate floors, discounts, premiums and optional prepayment or redemption terms) of such modified, refinanced, refunded, renewed or extended Indebtedness, taken as a whole, shall not be materially less favorable to the Loan Parties than the Refinanced Indebtedness, except for covenants or other provisions applicable only to periods after the Latest Maturity Date and (g) such modification, refinancing, refunding, renewal or extension is incurred by the Person who is the obligor on the Refinanced Indebtedness.

Person ” shall mean any natural person, corporation, business trust, joint venture, association, company, limited liability company, partnership, Governmental Authority or other entity.

Plan ” shall mean any employee pension benefit plan (other than a Multiemployer Plan) that is covered by Section 4021 of ERISA, and in respect of which the Borrower or any ERISA Affiliate is or, if such plan were terminated under Section 4069 of ERISA, would be, deemed to be an “ employer ” as defined in Section 3(5) of ERISA.

Platform ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 9.01.

 

20


Post-Petition Interest ” shall mean any interest that accrues after the commencement of any case, proceeding or other action relating to the bankruptcy, insolvency or reorganization of any one or more of the Loan Parties (or would accrue but for the operation of applicable Debtor Relief Laws), whether or not such interest is allowed or allowable as a claim in any such proceeding.

Prime Rate ” shall mean the rate of interest per annum determined from time to time by Credit Suisse AG as its prime rate in effect at its principal office in New York City and notified to the Borrower. The prime rate is a rate set by Credit Suisse AG based upon various factors including Credit Suisse AG’s costs and desired return, general economic conditions and other factors, and is used as a reference point for pricing some loans, which may be priced at, above, or below such rate.

Public Lender ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 9.01.

Qualified Capital Stock ” of any Person shall mean any Equity Interest of such Person that is not Disqualified Stock.

Qualified Counterparty ” shall mean, with respect to any Hedging Agreement, any counterparty thereto that, at the time such Hedging Agreement was entered into, was a Lender, the Administrative Agent, the Arranger or any of their respective Affiliates.

Qualified Public Offering ” shall mean the initial underwritten public offering of common Equity Interests of the Borrower pursuant to an effective registration statement filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission in accordance with the Securities Act that results in at least $175,000,000 of Net Cash Proceeds to the Borrower.

Real Estate Collateral Requirements ” shall mean the requirement with respect to the Mortgaged Properties as required by Section 5.12, that the Collateral Agent shall have received a Mortgage for each Mortgaged Property in form and substance reasonably acceptable to the Collateral Agent and suitable for recording or filing, together with, with respect to each Mortgage, the following documents: (a) a fully paid policy of title insurance (or “ pro forma ” or marked up commitment having the same effect of a title insurance policy) (i) in form and substance reasonably acceptable to the Collateral Agent insuring the Lien of the Mortgage encumbering such property as a valid first priority Lien, (ii) in an amount reasonably satisfactory to the Collateral Agent, (iii) issued by a nationally recognized title insurance company reasonably satisfactory to the Collateral Agent (the “ Title Company ”) and (iv) that includes (A) such coinsurance and direct access reinsurance as the Collateral Agent may reasonably deem necessary or desirable and (B) such endorsements or affirmative insurance reasonably required by the Collateral Agent and available in the applicable jurisdiction (including, without limitation, endorsements on matters relating to usury, first loss, last dollar, zoning, revolving credit, doing business, variable rate, address, separate tax lot, subdivision, tie in or cluster, contiguity, access and so-called comprehensive coverage over covenants and restrictions), (b) with respect to any property located in any jurisdiction in which a zoning endorsement is not available (or for which a zoning endorsement is not available at a premium that is not excessive), if requested by the Collateral Agent, a zoning compliance

 

21


letter from the applicable municipality or a zoning report from Planning and Zoning Resource Corporation (or another person acceptable to the Collateral Agent, in each case reasonably satisfactory to the Collateral Agent, (c) upon the request of the Collateral Agent, a survey certified to Collateral Agent and the Title Company in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to the Collateral Agent, (d) upon the request of the Collateral Agent, an appraisal complying with the requirements of the Financial Institutions Reform, Recovery and Enforcement Act of 1989, by a third-party appraiser selected by the Collateral Agent, (e) an opinion of local counsel reasonably acceptable to the Collateral Agent and in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to the Collateral Agent, (f) if requested by any Lender, no later than three (3) Business Days prior to the delivery of the Mortgage, the following documents and instruments, in order to comply with the National Flood Insurance Reform Act of 1994 and related legislation (including the regulations of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System) (“ Flood Laws ”): (1) a completed standard flood hazard determination form, (2) if the improvement(s) to the improved real property is located in a special flood hazard area, a notification to the Borrower (“ Borrower Notice ”) and, if applicable, notification to the Borrower that flood insurance coverage under the National Flood Insurance Program (“ NFIP ”) is not available because the community does not participate in the NFIP, (3) documentation evidencing the Borrower’s receipt of the Borrower Notice and (4) if the Borrower Notice is required to be given and flood insurance is available in the community in which the property is located, a copy of the flood insurance policy, the Borrower’s application for a flood insurance policy plus proof of premium payment, a declaration page confirming that flood insurance has been issued, or such other evidence of flood insurance satisfactory to the Collateral Agent (any of the foregoing being “ Evidence of Flood Insurance ”), (g) upon the reasonable request of the Collateral Agent, Phase I environmental site assessment reports prepared in accordance with the current ASTM E1527 standard (“ Phase Is ”) (to the extent not already provided) and reliance letters for such Phase Is (which Phase Is and reliance letters shall be in form and substance reasonably acceptable to the Collateral Agent) and any other environmental information as the Collateral Agent shall reasonably request and (h) such other instruments and documents (including consulting engineer’s reports and lien searches) as the Collateral Agent shall reasonably request.

Recipient ” shall mean (a) the Administrative Agent and (b) any Lender, as applicable.

Refinancing ” shall mean the repayment in full and the termination of any commitment to make extensions of credit under the Existing Debt.

Register ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 9.04(c).

Regulation T ” shall mean Regulation T of the Board as from time to time in effect and all official rulings and interpretations thereunder or thereof.

Regulation U ” shall mean Regulation U of the Board as from time to time in effect and all official rulings and interpretations thereunder or thereof.

 

22


Regulation X ” shall mean Regulation X of the Board as from time to time in effect and all official rulings and interpretations thereunder or thereof.

Related Parties ” shall mean, with respect to any specified Person, such Person’s Affiliates and the respective officers, directors, employees, agents, advisors, representatives, controlling persons, members, successors and permitted assigns of such Person and such Person’s Affiliates.

Release ” shall mean any actual or threatened release, spill, emission, leaking, dumping, injection, pouring, pumping, deposit, disposal, discharge, dispersal, leaching or migration into or through the indoor or outdoor environment, including the air, soil and ground and surface water or into, through, within or upon any building, structure, facility or fixture.

Required Lenders ” shall mean, at any time, Lenders having Loans and unused Commitments representing more than 50% of the sum of all Loans outstanding and unused Commitments at such time; provided that the Loans and unused Commitments of any Defaulting Lender shall be disregarded in the determination of the Required Lenders at any time.

Resignation Effective Date ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 8.06.

Responsible Officer ” of any Person shall mean any executive officer or Financial Officer of such Person and any other officer or similar official thereof responsible for the administration of the obligations of such Person in respect of this Agreement.

Restricted Payment ” shall mean any dividend or other distribution (whether in cash, securities or other property) with respect to any Equity Interests in the Borrower or any Subsidiary, or any payment (whether in cash, securities or other property), including any sinking fund or similar deposit, on account of the purchase, redemption, retirement, acquisition, cancellation or termination of any Equity Interests in the Borrower or any Subsidiary.

Restricted Subsidiary ” shall mean any Subsidiary other than an Immaterial Subsidiary.

S&P ” shall mean Standard & Poor’s Ratings Service, or any successor thereto.

SEC ” shall mean the Securities and Exchange Commission.

Secured Hedging Agreement ” shall mean any Hedging Agreement entered into by a Loan Party and a Qualified Counterparty.

Secured Parties ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement.

 

23


Securities Act ” shall mean the Securities Act of 1933, as amended.

Security Documents ” shall mean the Mortgages, the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement and each of the security agreements, mortgages and other instruments and documents executed and delivered pursuant to any of the foregoing or pursuant to Section 5.12.

Solvent ” shall mean, (a) the sum of the liabilities (including contingent liabilities) of the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries, on a consolidated basis, does not exceed the fair value of the present assets of the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries, on a consolidated basis, (b) the present fair saleable value of the assets of the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries, on a consolidated basis, is greater than the total amount that will be required to pay the probable liabilities (including contingent liabilities) of the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries as they become absolute and matured, (c) the capital of the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries, on a consolidated basis, is not unreasonably small in relation to their business as contemplated on the determination date, (d) the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries, on a consolidated basis, have not incurred and do not intend to incur, or believe that they will incur, debts or liabilities, including current obligations beyond their ability to pay such debts or other liabilities as they become due (whether at maturity or otherwise) and (e) the Borrower and its Restricted Subsidiaries, on a consolidated basis, are “ solvent ” within the meaning given to that term and similar terms under applicable laws relating to fraudulent transfers and conveyances.

Statutory Reserves ” shall mean a fraction (expressed as a decimal), the numerator of which is the number one and the denominator of which is the number one minus the aggregate of the maximum reserve percentages (including any marginal, special, emergency or supplemental reserves) established by the Board and any other banking authority, domestic or foreign, to which the Administrative Agent or any Lender (including any branch, Affiliate or other fronting office making or holding a Loan) is subject for Eurocurrency Liabilities (as defined in Regulation D of the Board). Eurodollar Loans shall be deemed to constitute Eurocurrency Liabilities and to be subject to such reserve requirements without benefit of or credit for proration, exemptions or offsets that may be available from time to time to any Lender under such Regulation D. Statutory Reserves shall be adjusted automatically on and as of the effective date of any change in any reserve percentage.

subsidiary ” shall mean, with respect to any Person (herein referred to as the “ parent ”), any corporation, partnership, limited liability company, association or other business entity (a) of which securities or other ownership interests representing more than 50% of the equity or more than 50% of the ordinary voting power or more than 50% of the general partnership interests are, at the time any determination is being made, owned, Controlled or held, or (b) that is, at the time any determination is made, otherwise Controlled, by the parent or one or more subsidiaries of the parent or by the parent and one or more subsidiaries of the parent.

Subsidiary ” shall mean any subsidiary of the Borrower.

 

24


Swap Obligation ” shall mean, with respect to any Guarantor, any obligation to pay or perform under any agreement, contract or transaction that constitutes a “ swap ” within the meaning of section 1a(47) of the Commodity Exchange Act (including without limitation any Secured Hedging Agreement).

Taxes ” shall mean any and all present or future taxes, levies, imposts, duties, deductions, assessments, fees, charges or withholdings (including backup withholding) imposed by any Governmental Authority, including any interest, additions to tax or penalties applicable thereto.

Termination Date ” shall mean the earlier to occur of (a) the Latest Maturity Date and (b) the date on which the Commitments hereunder are terminated or expire.

Title Company ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in the definition of Real Estate Collateral Requirements.

Total Commitment ” shall mean, at any time, the aggregate amount of the Commitments as in effect at such time. The initial Total Commitment is $100,000,000.

Transaction Costs ” shall mean the fees, costs and expenses incurred in connection with the Transactions.

Transactions ” shall mean, collectively, (a) the execution, delivery and performance by the Loan Parties of the Loan Documents to which they are, or will be, a party and the making of the Borrowings hereunder, (b) the repayment of all amounts due or outstanding under or in respect of, and the termination of, the Existing Debt and (c) the payment of related fees and expenses.

Type ” when used in respect of any Loan or Borrowing, shall refer to the Rate by reference to which interest on such Loan or on the Loans comprising such Borrowing is determined. For purposes hereof, the term “ Rate ” shall mean the Adjusted LIBO Rate and the Alternate Base Rate.

Unfunded Pension Liability ” shall mean, with respect to any Plan at any time, the amount of any of its unfunded benefit liabilities as defined in Section 4001(a)(18) of ERISA.

Unrestricted Cash ” shall mean, as of any date of determination, the amount (without duplication) of unrestricted cash and Permitted Investments of the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries that is in deposit accounts or in securities accounts, or any combination thereof, that are Controlled Deposit Accounts (as defined in the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement) or Controlled Securities Accounts (as defined in the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement), as applicable.

USA PATRIOT Act ” shall mean The Uniting and Strengthening America by Providing Appropriate Tools Required to Intercept and Obstruct Terrorism Act of 2001 (Title III of Pub. L. No. 107-56 (signed into law October 26, 2001)).

 

25


U.S. Person ” shall mean any Person that is a “ United States Person ” as defined in Section 7701(a)(30) of the Code.

U.S. Tax Compliance Certificate ” shall have the meaning assigned to such term in Section 2.19(f).

Wholly Owned Subsidiary ” of any Person shall mean a subsidiary of such Person of which securities (except for directors’ qualifying shares) or other ownership interests representing 100% of the Equity Interests are, at the time any determination is being made, owned, Controlled or held by such Person or one or more wholly owned subsidiaries of such Person or by such Person and one or more wholly owned subsidiaries of such Person.

Withdrawal Liability ” shall mean liability to a Multiemployer Plan as a result of a complete or partial withdrawal from such Multiemployer Plan, as such terms are defined in Part I of Subtitle E of Title IV of ERISA.

Withholding Agent ” shall mean any Loan Party and the Administrative Agent.

Section 1.02. T erms Generally . The definitions in Section 1.01 shall apply equally to both the singular and plural forms of the terms defined. Whenever the context may require, any pronoun shall include the corresponding masculine, feminine and neuter forms. The words “ include ,” “ includes ” and “ including ” shall be deemed to be followed by the phrase “ without limitation .” The word “ will ” shall be construed to have the same meaning and effect as the word “ shall ,” and the words “ asset ” and “ property ” shall be construed as having the same meaning and effect and to refer to any and all tangible and intangible assets and properties, including cash, securities, accounts and contract rights. The words “ herein ”, “ hereto ”, “ hereof ” and “ hereunder ” and words of similar import when used in any Loan Document shall refer to such Loan Document as a whole and not to any particular provision thereof. All references herein to Articles, Sections, Exhibits and Schedules shall be deemed references to Articles and Sections of, and Exhibits and Schedules to, this Agreement unless the context shall otherwise require. Except as otherwise expressly provided herein, (a) any reference in this Agreement to any Loan Document or any other agreement, instrument or document shall mean such document as amended, restated, supplemented or otherwise modified from time to time, but only to the extent that such amendment, restatements, supplements or modifications are not prohibited by this Agreement, (b) references to any law shall include all statutory and regulatory provisions consolidating, amending, replacing, supplementing or interpreting such law, (c) all terms of an accounting or financial nature shall be construed in accordance with GAAP, as in effect from time to time; provided that if the Borrower notifies the Administrative Agent that the Borrower wishes to amend any provision of this Agreement or the other Loan Documents to eliminate the effect of any change in GAAP occurring after the date of this Agreement on the operation of such provision (or if the Administrative Agent notifies the Borrower that the Required Lenders wish to amend any provision of this Agreement or the other Loan Documents) regardless of whether any such notice is given before or after such change in GAAP, then such provision shall be interpreted on the basis of GAAP in effect immediately before the relevant change in

 

26


GAAP became effective, until either such notice is withdrawn or such provision is amended in a manner satisfactory to the Borrower and the Required Lenders and (d) all terms of an accounting or financial nature used herein shall be construed, and all computations of amounts and ratios referred to herein shall be made (i) without giving effect to any election under Accounting Standards Codification 825-10-25 (or any other Accounting Standards Codification or Financial Accounting Standard having a similar result or effect) to value any Indebtedness or other liabilities of the Borrower or any Subsidiary at “ fair value ”, as defined therein, (ii) without giving effect to any treatment of Indebtedness in respect of convertible debt instruments under Accounting Standards Codification 470-20 (or any other Accounting Standards Codification or Financial Accounting Standard having a similar result or effect) to value any such Indebtedness in a reduced or bifurcated manner as described therein, and such Indebtedness shall at all times be valued at the full stated principal amount thereof and (iii) in a manner such that the determination of whether a lease is to be treated as an operating lease or capital lease shall be made without giving effect to any change in accounting for leases pursuant to GAAP resulting from the implementation of proposed Accounting Standards Update (ASU) Leases (Topic 840) issued August 17, 2010.

Section 1.03. Classification of Loans and Borrowings . For purposes of this Agreement, Loans and Borrowings may be classified and referred to by Type (e.g., a “ Eurodollar Loan ” or a “ Eurodollar Borrowing ”).

ARTICLE 2

T HE C REDITS

Section 2.01. Commitments . Subject to the terms and conditions set forth herein, each Lender agrees to make Loans to the Borrower, at any time and from time to time during the Commitment Period in accordance with the terms hereof, in an aggregate principal amount at any time outstanding that will not result in such Lender’s Exposure exceeding such Lender’s Commitment. Within the limits set forth in the preceding sentence and subject to the terms and conditions set forth herein, amounts repaid or prepaid in respect of Loans may be reborrowed under this Section 2.01.

Section 2.02. Loans . (a) Each Loan shall be made as part of a Borrowing consisting of Loans made by the Lenders ratably in accordance with their applicable Commitments; provided that the failure of any Lender to make any Loan shall not in itself relieve any other Lender of its obligation to lend hereunder (it being understood, however, that no Lender shall be responsible for the failure of any other Lender to make any Loan required to be made by such other Lender). The Loans comprising any Borrowing shall be in an aggregate principal amount that is (i) an integral multiple of $1,000,000 and not less than $3,000,000 or (ii) equal to the remaining available balance of the applicable Commitments.

(b) Subject to Sections 2.08 and 2.14, each Borrowing shall be comprised entirely of ABR Loans or Eurodollar Loans as the Borrower may request pursuant to Section 2.03. Each Lender may at its option make any Eurodollar Loan by causing any domestic or foreign branch or Affiliate of such Lender to make such Loan; provided that

 

27


any exercise of such option shall not affect the obligation of the Borrower to repay such Loan in accordance with the terms of this Agreement. Borrowings of more than one Type may be outstanding at the same time; provided further that the Borrower shall not be entitled to request any Borrowing that, if made, would result in more than five (5) Eurodollar Borrowings outstanding hereunder at any time.

(c) Each Lender shall make each Loan to be made by it hereunder on the proposed date thereof by wire transfer of immediately available funds to such account in New York City as the Administrative Agent may designate not later than 1:00 p.m., New York City time, and the Administrative Agent shall promptly credit the amounts so received to an account designated by the Borrower in the applicable Borrowing Request or, if a Borrowing shall not occur on such date because any condition precedent herein specified shall not have been met, return the amounts so received to the respective Lenders.

(d) Unless the Administrative Agent shall have received notice from a Lender (i) in the case of a Eurodollar Loan, prior to the date of any Borrowing and (ii) in the case of an ABR Loan prior to 1:00 p.m., New York City time, on the date of any Borrowing, in either case that such Lender will not make available to the Administrative Agent such Lender’s portion of such Borrowing, the Administrative Agent may assume that such Lender has made such portion available to the Administrative Agent on the date of such Borrowing in accordance with paragraph (c) above and the Administrative Agent may, in reliance upon such assumption, make available to the Borrower on such date a corresponding amount. If the Administrative Agent shall have so made funds available then, to the extent that such Lender shall not have made such portion available to the Administrative Agent, such Lender and the Borrower severally agree to repay to the Administrative Agent forthwith on demand such corresponding amount together with interest thereon, for each day from the date such amount is made available to the Borrower to but excluding the date such amount is repaid to the Administrative Agent at (A) in the case of the Borrower, a rate per annum equal to the interest rate applicable at the time to the Loans comprising such Borrowing and (B) in the case of such Lender, a rate determined by the Administrative Agent to represent its cost of overnight or short-term funds (which determination shall be conclusive absent manifest error). If such Lender shall repay to the Administrative Agent such corresponding amount, such amount shall constitute such Lender’s Loan as part of such Borrowing for purposes of this Agreement.

(e) Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, the Borrower shall not be entitled to request any Eurodollar Borrowing if the Interest Period requested with respect thereto would end after the Maturity Date.

Section 2.03. Borrowing Procedure . In order to request a Borrowing, the Borrower shall notify the Administrative Agent of such request in writing or by telephone (a) in the case of a Eurodollar Borrowing, not later than 12:00 (noon), New York City time, three (3) Business Days before a proposed Borrowing and (b) in the case of an ABR Borrowing, not later than 12:00 (noon), New York City time, on the date of the proposed Borrowing. Each such notice shall be irrevocable, and any telephonic notice shall be

 

28


confirmed promptly by delivery of a written Borrowing Request and shall specify the following information: (i) whether such Borrowing is to be a Eurodollar Borrowing or an ABR Borrowing; (ii) the date of such Borrowing (which shall be a Business Day); (iii) the number and location of the account to which funds are to be disbursed; (iv) the amount of such Borrowing and (v) if such Borrowing is to be a Eurodollar Borrowing, the Interest Period with respect thereto; provided that, notwithstanding any contrary specification in any Borrowing Request, each requested Borrowing shall comply with the requirements set forth in Section 2.02. If no election as to the Type of Borrowing is specified in any such notice, then the requested Borrowing shall be an ABR Borrowing. If no Interest Period with respect to any Eurodollar Borrowing is specified in any such notice, then the Borrower shall be deemed to have selected an Interest Period of one month’s duration. The Administrative Agent shall promptly advise the applicable Lenders of any notice given pursuant to this Section 2.03 (and the contents thereof), and of each Lender’s pro rata share of the requested Borrowing.

Section 2.04. Evidence of Debt; Repayment of Loans . (a) The Borrower hereby unconditionally promises to pay to the Administrative Agent for the account of each Lender the then unpaid principal amount of each Loan of such Lender on the Maturity Date.

(b) Each Lender shall maintain in accordance with its usual practice an account or accounts evidencing the indebtedness of the Borrower to such Lender resulting from each Loan made by such Lender from time to time, including the amounts of principal and interest payable and paid to such Lender from time to time under this Agreement.

(c) The Administrative Agent shall, in accordance with its customary practice, maintain accounts in which it will record (i) the amount of each Loan made hereunder, the Class and Type thereof and, if applicable, the Interest Period applicable thereto, the amount of any principal or interest due and payable or to become due and payable from the Borrower to each Lender hereunder and (ii) the amount of any sum received by the Administrative Agent hereunder from the Borrower or any Guarantor and each Lender’s share thereof.

(d) The entries made in the accounts maintained pursuant to paragraphs (b) and (c) above shall be prima facie evidence of the existence and amounts of the obligations therein recorded; provided that the failure of any Lender or the Administrative Agent to maintain such accounts or any error therein shall not in any manner affect the obligations of the Borrower to repay the Loans in accordance with their terms.

(e) Any Lender may request that Loans made by it hereunder be evidenced by a Note. In such event, the Borrower shall execute and deliver to such Lender a Note payable to such Lender and its registered assigns. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, in the event any Lender shall request and receive such a Note, the interests represented by such Note shall at all times (including after any assignment of all

 

29


or part of such interests pursuant to Section 9.04) be represented by one or more Notes payable to the payee named therein or its registered assigns.

Section 2.05. Fees . (a) The Borrower agrees to pay to each Lender, through the Administrative Agent, on the last Business Day of March, June, September and December in each year and on each date on which any Commitment of such Lender shall expire or be terminated as provided herein, a commitment fee (a “ Commitment Fee ”) equal to 0.50% per annum on the daily unused amount of the Commitment of such Lender during the preceding quarter (or other period commencing with the date hereof or ending with the Maturity Date or the date on which the Commitments of such Lender shall expire or be terminated). All Commitment Fees shall be computed on the basis of the actual number of days elapsed in a year of 360 days.

(b) The Borrower agrees to pay to the Administrative Agent, for its own account, the administrative fees set forth in the Engagement Letter at the times and in the amounts specified therein (the “ Administrative Agent Fees ”).

(c) The Borrower agrees to pay on the Closing Date to each Lender party to this Agreement on the Closing Date, as compensation for the Commitment of such Lender, a closing fee in an amount equal to 0.50% of the stated principal amount of such Lender’s Commitment. Such fees shall be payable by the Borrower to each Lender on the Closing Date. Such closing fees will be in all respects fully earned, due and payable on the Closing Date and non-refundable and non-creditable thereafter.

(d) All Fees shall be paid on the dates due, in immediately available funds, to the Administrative Agent for distribution, if and as appropriate, among the Lenders. Once paid, none of the Fees shall be refundable under any circumstances.

Section 2.06. Interest on Loans . (a) Subject to the provisions of Section 2.07, the Loans comprising each ABR Borrowing shall bear interest (computed on the basis of the actual number of days elapsed over a year of 365 or 366 days, as the case may be, at all times and calculated from and including the date of such Borrowing to but excluding the date of repayment thereof) at a rate per annum equal to the Alternate Base Rate plus the Applicable Margin in effect from time to time.

(b) Subject to the provisions of Section 2.07, the Loans comprising each Eurodollar Borrowing shall bear interest (computed on the basis of the actual number of days elapsed over a year of 360 days) at a rate per annum equal to the Adjusted LIBO Rate for the Interest Period in effect for such Borrowing plus the Applicable Margin in effect from time to time.

(c) Interest on each Loan shall be payable on the Interest Payment Dates applicable to such Loan except as otherwise provided in this Agreement. The applicable Alternate Base Rate or Adjusted LIBO Rate for each Interest Period or day within an Interest Period, as the case may be, shall be determined by the Administrative Agent, and such determination shall be conclusive absent manifest error.

 

30


Section 2.07. Default Interest . If the Borrower shall default in the payment of any principal of or interest on any Loan or any other amount due hereunder or under any other Loan Document, by acceleration or otherwise, then, until such defaulted amount shall have been paid in full or such default is waived, to the extent permitted by law, all such overdue amounts shall bear interest (after as well as before judgment), payable on demand, (i) in the case of principal, at the rate otherwise applicable to such Loan pursuant to Section 2.06 plus 2.00% per annum and (ii) in all other cases, at a rate per annum (computed on the basis of the actual number of days elapsed over a year of 360 days at all times) equal to the rate that would be applicable to an ABR Loan plus 2.00% per annum.

Section 2.08. Alternate Rate of Interest . In the event, and on each occasion, that on the day two (2) Business Days prior to the commencement of any Interest Period for a Eurodollar Borrowing the Administrative Agent shall have determined that (a) Dollar deposits in the principal amounts of the Loans comprising such Borrowing are not generally available in the London interbank market, (b) the rates at which such Dollar deposits are being offered will not adequately and fairly reflect the cost to the majority of Lenders of making or maintaining Eurodollar Loans during such Interest Period or (c) reasonable means do not exist for ascertaining the Adjusted LIBO Rate, the Administrative Agent shall, as soon as practicable thereafter, give written or fax notice of such determination to the Borrower and the Lenders. In the event of any such determination, until the Administrative Agent shall have advised the Borrower and the Lenders that the circumstances giving rise to such notice no longer exist, any request by the Borrower for a Eurodollar Borrowing pursuant to Section 2.03 or Section 2.10 shall be deemed to be a request for an ABR Borrowing. Each determination by the Administrative Agent under this Section 2.08 shall be conclusive absent manifest error.

Section 2.09. Termination and Reduction of Commitments . (a) Unless previously extended pursuant to Section 2.23, the Commitments shall automatically terminate on the Maturity Date. Each Class of Extended Commitments shall automatically terminate on the date specified in the applicable Additional Credit Extension Amendment.

(b) Upon at least three (3) Business Days’ prior irrevocable written or telephone notice to the Administrative Agent, the Borrower may at any time in whole permanently terminate, or from time to time in part permanently reduce, the Commitments (any such telephone notice shall be confirmed promptly by delivery of written notice thereof); provided that (i) each partial reduction of the Commitments shall be in an integral multiple of $1,000,000 and in a minimum amount of $5,000,000, (ii) the Total Commitment shall not be reduced to an amount that is less than the Aggregate Exposure at the time and (iii) any such termination or reduction notice may state that such notice is conditioned upon the effectiveness of other financing arrangements, in which case such notice may be revoked by the Borrower (by notice to the Administrative Agent on or prior to the specified effective date) if such condition is not satisfied.

(c) Each reduction in the Commitments hereunder shall be made ratably among the Lenders in accordance with their respective applicable Commitments. The

 

31


Borrower shall pay to the Administrative Agent for the account of the applicable Lenders, on the date of each termination or reduction, the Commitment Fees on the amount of the Commitments so terminated or reduced accrued to but excluding the date of such termination or reduction.

Section 2.10. Conversion and Continuation of Borrowings . The Borrower shall have the right at any time upon written or telephonic notice to the Administrative Agent (a) not later than 12:00 (noon), New York City time, on the date of conversion, to convert any Eurodollar Borrowing into an ABR Borrowing, (b) not later than 12:00 (noon), New York City time, three (3) Business Days prior to conversion or continuation, to convert any ABR Borrowing into a Eurodollar Borrowing or to continue any Eurodollar Borrowing as a Eurodollar Borrowing for an additional Interest Period and (c) not later than 12:00 (noon), New York City time, three (3) Business Days prior to conversion, to convert the Interest Period with respect to any Eurodollar Borrowing to another permissible Interest Period, subject in each case to the following:

(i) each conversion or continuation shall be made pro rata among the Lenders in accordance with the respective principal amounts of the Loans comprising the converted or continued Borrowing;

(ii) if less than all the outstanding principal amount of any Borrowing shall be converted or continued, then each resulting Borrowing shall satisfy the limitations specified in Sections 2.02(a) and 2.02(b) regarding the principal amount and maximum number of Borrowings of the relevant Type;

(iii) each conversion shall be effected by each Lender and the Administrative Agent by recording for the account of such Lender the new Borrowing of such Lender resulting from such conversion and reducing the Borrowing (or portion thereof) of such Lender being converted by an equivalent principal amount; accrued interest on any Eurodollar Loan (or portion thereof) being converted shall be paid by the Borrower at the time of conversion;

(iv) if any Eurodollar Borrowing is converted at a time other than the end of the Interest Period applicable thereto, the Borrower shall pay, upon demand, any amounts due to the Lenders pursuant to Section 2.15;

(v) any portion of a Borrowing maturing or required to be repaid in less than one month may not be converted into or continued as a Eurodollar Borrowing;

(vi) any portion of a Eurodollar Borrowing that cannot be continued as a Eurodollar Borrowing by reason of the immediately preceding clause (v) shall be automatically converted at the end of the Interest Period in effect for such Borrowing into an ABR Borrowing; and

(vii) after the occurrence and during the continuance of an Event of Default, no outstanding Loan may be converted into, or continued as, a Eurodollar Loan.

 

32


Each such telephonic notice shall be irrevocable and shall be confirmed promptly by delivery of an Interest Election Request pursuant to this Section 2.10 and shall specify (a) the identity and amount of the Borrowing that the Borrower requests be converted or continued, (b) whether such Borrowing is to be converted to or continued as a Eurodollar Borrowing or an ABR Borrowing, (c) if such notice requests a conversion, the date of such conversion (which shall be a Business Day) and (d) if such Borrowing is to be converted to or continued as a Eurodollar Borrowing, the Interest Period with respect thereto. If no Interest Period is specified in any such notice with respect to any conversion to or continuation as a Eurodollar Borrowing, the Borrower shall be deemed to have selected an Interest Period of one month’s duration. The Administrative Agent shall promptly advise the Lenders of any notice given pursuant to this Section 2.10 and of each Lender’s pro rata share of any converted or continued Borrowing. If the Borrower shall not have given notice in accordance with this Section 2.10 to continue any Borrowing into a subsequent Interest Period (and shall not otherwise have given notice in accordance with this Section 2.10 to convert such Borrowing), such Borrowing shall, at the end of the Interest Period applicable thereto (unless repaid pursuant to the terms hereof), automatically be converted into an ABR Borrowing.

Section 2.11. Voluntary Prepayment .  (a) The Borrower shall have the right at any time and from time to time to prepay any Borrowing, in whole or in part, upon at least three (3) Business Days’ prior written notice (or telephonic notice promptly confirmed by written notice) in the case of Eurodollar Loans, or written notice (or telephonic notice promptly confirmed by written notice) at least one (1) Business Day prior to the date of prepayment in the case of ABR Loans, to the Administrative Agent before 12:00 (noon), New York City time; provided that each partial prepayment shall be in an amount that is an integral multiple of $1,000,000 and not less than $3,000,000.

(b) Each notice of prepayment shall specify the prepayment date and the principal amount of each Borrowing (or portion thereof) to be prepaid, shall be irrevocable and shall commit the Borrower to prepay such Borrowing by the amount stated therein on the date stated therein; provided that a notice of prepayment may state that such notice is conditioned upon the effectiveness of other financing arrangements, in which case such notice may be revoked by the Borrower (by notice to the Administrative Agent prior to 12:00 (noon) on the specified effective date) if such condition is not satisfied; provided further that the provisions of Section 2.15 shall apply with respect to any such revocation or extension. All prepayments under this Section 2.11 shall be subject to Section 2.15 but otherwise without premium or penalty. All prepayments under this Section 2.11 (other than prepayments of ABR Loans that are not made in connection with the termination or permanent reduction of the Commitments) shall be accompanied by accrued and unpaid interest on the principal amount to be prepaid to but excluding the date of payment.

Section 2.12. Mandatory Prepayments .  (a) In the event of any termination of all the Commitments, the Borrower shall, on the date of such termination, repay or prepay all its outstanding Borrowings. If, after giving effect to any partial reduction of the Commitments or at any other time, the Aggregate Exposure would exceed the Total

 

33


Commitment, then the Borrower shall, on the date of such reduction or at such other time, repay or prepay Borrowings in an amount sufficient to eliminate such excess.

(b) Each notice of prepayment shall specify the prepayment date, the Type of each Loan being prepaid and the principal amount of each Loan (or portion thereof) to be prepaid. All prepayments of Borrowings under this Section 2.12 shall be subject to Section 2.15, but shall otherwise be without premium or penalty, and shall be accompanied by accrued and unpaid interest on the principal amount to be prepaid to but excluding the date of payment (other than prepayments of ABR Loans that are not made in connection with the termination or permanent reduction of the Commitments).

Section 2.13. Increased Costs; Capital Adequacy .  (a) If any Change in Law shall:

(i) impose, modify or deem applicable any reserve, special deposit, compulsory loan, insurance charge or similar requirement against assets of, deposits with or for the account of or credit extended by any Lender (except any such reserve requirement which is reflected in the Adjusted LIBO Rate);

(ii) subject any Recipient to any Taxes (other than (A) Indemnified Taxes and (B) Excluded Taxes) on its loans, loan principal, commitments, or other obligations, or its deposits, reserves, other liabilities or capital attributable thereto; or

(iii) impose on any Lender or the London interbank market any other condition, cost or expense (other than Taxes) affecting this Agreement or Loans made by such Lender;

and the result of any of the foregoing shall be to increase the cost to such Lender or such other Recipient of making or maintaining any Loan or to reduce the amount of any sum received or receivable by such Lender or such other Recipient hereunder (whether of principal, interest or otherwise) then the Borrower will pay to such Lender or such other Recipient, as the case may be, upon demand such additional amount or amounts as will compensate such Lender or such other Recipient, as the case may be, for such additional costs incurred or reduction suffered.

(b) If any Lender shall have determined that any Change in Law regarding capital adequacy or liquidity requirements has or would have the effect of reducing the rate of return on such Lender’s capital or on the capital of such Lender’s holding company, if any, as a consequence of this Agreement or the Loans made by such Lender pursuant hereto to a level below that which such Lender or such Lender’s holding company could have achieved but for such Change in Law (taking into consideration such Lender’s policies and the policies of such Lender’s holding company with respect to capital adequacy or liquidity) then from time to time the Borrower shall pay to such Lender such additional amount or amounts as will compensate such Lender or such Lender’s holding company for any such reduction suffered.

 

34


(c) A certificate of a Lender or such other Recipient setting forth the amount or amounts necessary to compensate such Lender or such other Recipient or the holding company, as applicable, as specified in paragraph (a) or (b) above shall be delivered to the Borrower and shall be conclusive absent manifest error. Any such certificate shall set forth in reasonable detail a calculation of the amount owed. The Borrower shall pay such Lender or such other Recipient the amount shown as due on any such certificate delivered by it within ten (10) days after its receipt of the same.

(d) Failure or delay on the part of any Lender or other such Recipient to demand compensation pursuant to this Section shall not constitute a waiver of such Lender’s or such other Recipient’s right to demand such compensation; provided that the Borrower shall not be required to compensate any Lender or other such Recipient under paragraph (a) or (b) above pursuant to this Section for any increased costs incurred or reductions suffered more than six (6) months prior to the date that such Lender or other Recipient, as the case may be, notifies the Borrower of the Change in Law giving rise to such increased costs or reductions, and of such Lender’s or other such Recipient’s intention to claim compensation therefor (except that, if the Change in Law giving rise to such increased costs or reductions is retroactive, then the six (6) month period referred to above shall be extended to include the period of retroactive effect thereof).

Section 2.14. Change in Legality .  (a) Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, if any Change in Law shall make it unlawful for any Lender to make or maintain any Eurodollar Loan or to give effect to its obligations as contemplated hereby with respect to any Eurodollar Loan, then, by written notice to the Borrower and to the Administrative Agent:

(i) such Lender may declare that Eurodollar Loans will not thereafter (for the duration of such unlawfulness) be made by such Lender hereunder (or be continued for additional Interest Periods) and ABR Loans will not thereafter (for such duration) be converted into Eurodollar Loans, whereupon any request for a Eurodollar Borrowing (or to convert an ABR Borrowing to a Eurodollar Borrowing or to continue a Eurodollar Borrowing for an additional Interest Period) shall, as to such Lender only, be deemed a request for an ABR Loan (or a request to continue an ABR Loan as such or to convert a Eurodollar Loan into an ABR Loan, as the case may be), unless such declaration shall be subsequently withdrawn; and

(ii) such Lender may require that all outstanding Eurodollar Loans made by it be converted to ABR Loans, in which event all such Eurodollar Loans shall be automatically converted to ABR Loans as of the effective date of such notice as provided in paragraph (b) below.

In the event any Lender shall exercise its rights under (i) or (ii) above, all payments and prepayments of principal that would otherwise have been applied to repay the Eurodollar Loans that would have been made by such Lender or the converted Eurodollar Loans of such Lender shall instead be applied to repay the ABR Loans made by such Lender in lieu of, or resulting from the conversion of, such Eurodollar Loans.

 

35


(b) For purposes of this Section 2.14, a notice to the Borrower by any Lender shall be effective as to each Eurodollar Loan made by such Lender, if lawful, on the last day of the Interest Period then applicable to such Eurodollar Loan; in all other cases such notice shall be effective on the date of receipt by the Borrower.

Section 2.15. Breakage .  The Borrower shall indemnify each Lender against any loss or expense that such Lender may sustain or incur as a consequence of (a) any event, other than a default by such Lender in the performance of its obligations hereunder, which results in (i) such Lender receiving or being deemed to receive any amount on account of the principal of any Eurodollar Loan prior to the end of the Interest Period in effect therefor, (ii) the conversion of any Eurodollar Loan to an ABR Loan, or the conversion of the Interest Period with respect to any Eurodollar Loan, in each case other than on the last day of the Interest Period in effect therefor, or (iii) any Eurodollar Loan to be made by such Lender (including any Eurodollar Loan to be made pursuant to a conversion or continuation under Section 2.10) not being made after notice of such Loan shall have been given by the Borrower hereunder (any of the events referred to in this clause (a) being called a “ Breakage Event ”) or (b) any default in the making of any payment or prepayment required to be made hereunder. In the case of any Breakage Event, such loss shall include an amount equal to the excess, as reasonably determined by such Lender, of (i) its cost of obtaining funds for the Eurodollar Loan that is the subject of such Breakage Event for the period from the date of such Breakage Event to the last day of the Interest Period in effect (or that would have been in effect) for such Loan over (ii) the amount of interest likely to be realized by such Lender in redeploying the funds released or not utilized by reason of such Breakage Event for such period. A certificate of any Lender setting forth any amount or amounts which such Lender is entitled to receive pursuant to this Section 2.15 shall be delivered to the Borrower and shall be conclusive absent manifest error.

Section 2.16. Pro Rata Treatment .  Except as otherwise expressly provided herein, each Borrowing, each payment or prepayment of principal of any Borrowing, each payment of interest on the Loans, each payment of the Commitment Fees, each reduction of the Commitments and each conversion of any Borrowing to or continuation of any Borrowing as a Borrowing of any Type shall be allocated pro rata among the Lenders in accordance with their respective applicable Commitments (or, if such Commitments shall have expired or been terminated, in accordance with the respective principal amounts of their outstanding Loans). Each Lender agrees that in computing such Lender’s portion of any Borrowing to be made hereunder, the Administrative Agent may, in its discretion, round each Lender’s percentage of such Borrowing to the next higher or lower whole Dollar amount.

Section 2.17. Sharing of Setoffs .  If any Lender shall, by exercising any right of setoff or counterclaim or otherwise, obtain payment in respect of any principal of or interest on any of its Loans or other Obligations hereunder resulting in such Lender receiving payment of a proportion of the aggregate amount of its Loans and accrued interest thereon or other such obligations greater than its pro rata share thereof as provided herein, then the Lender receiving such greater proportion shall (a) notify the Administrative Agent of such fact, and (b) purchase (for cash at face value) participations

 

36


in the Loans and such other obligations of the other Lenders, or make such other adjustments as shall be equitable, so that the benefit of all such payments shall be shared by the Lenders ratably in accordance with the aggregate amount of principal of and accrued interest on their respective Loans and other amounts owing them; provided that:

(i) if any such participations are purchased and all or any portion of the payment giving rise thereto is recovered, such participations shall be rescinded and the purchase price restored to the extent of such recovery, without interest; and

(ii) the provisions of this Section 2.17 shall not be construed to apply to (x) any payment made by the Borrower pursuant to and in accordance with the express terms of this Agreement (including the application of funds arising from the existence of a Defaulting Lender), or (y) any payment obtained by a Lender as consideration for the assignment of or sale of a participation in any of its Loans or Commitments to any assignee or participant, other than to the Borrower or any of its Affiliates (as to which the provisions of this Section 2.17 shall apply).

The Borrower consents to the foregoing and agrees, to the extent it may effectively do so under applicable law, that any Lender acquiring a participation pursuant to the foregoing arrangements may exercise against each Loan Party rights of setoff and counterclaim with respect to such participation as fully as if such Lender were a direct creditor of each Loan Party in the amount of such participation.

Section 2.18. Payments .  (a) The Borrower shall make each payment (including principal of or interest on any Borrowing or any Fees or other amounts) hereunder or under any other Loan Document not later than 2:00 p.m., New York City time, on the date when due in immediately available Dollars, without setoff, defense or counterclaim. Any amounts received after such time on any date may, in the discretion of the Administrative Agent, be deemed to have been received on the next succeeding Business Day for purposes of calculating interest thereon. Each such payment shall be made to the Administrative Agent at its offices at Eleven Madison Avenue, New York, NY 10010. The Administrative Agent shall promptly distribute to each Lender any payments received by the Administrative Agent on behalf of such Lender.

(b) Except as otherwise expressly provided herein, whenever any payment (including principal of or interest on any Borrowing or any Fees or other amounts) hereunder or under any other Loan Document shall become due, or otherwise would occur, on a day that is not a Business Day, such payment may be made on the next succeeding Business Day, and such extension of time shall in such case be included in the computation of interest or Fees, if applicable.

Section 2.19. Taxes.

(a) Payments Free of Taxes . Any and all payments by or on account of any obligation of any Loan Party under any Loan Document shall be made without deduction or withholding for any Taxes, except as required by applicable law. If any applicable law

 

37


(as determined in the good faith discretion of an applicable Withholding Agent) requires the deduction or withholding of any Tax from any such payment by a Withholding Agent, then the applicable Withholding Agent shall be entitled to make such deduction or withholding and shall timely pay the full amount deducted or withheld to the relevant Governmental Authority in accordance with applicable law and, if such Tax is an Indemnified Tax, then the sum payable by the applicable Loan Party shall be increased as necessary so that after such deduction or withholding has been made (including such deductions and withholdings applicable to additional sums payable under this Section 2.19) the applicable Recipient receives an amount equal to the sum it would have received had no such deduction or withholding been made.

(b) Payment of Other Taxes by the Loan Parties . The Loan Parties shall timely pay to the relevant Governmental Authority in accordance with applicable law, or at the option of the Administrative Agent timely reimburse it for the payment of, any Other Taxes.

(c) Indemnification by the Loan Parties . The Borrower shall, and shall cause the other Loan Parties to, jointly and severally indemnify each Recipient, within 10 days after demand therefor, for the full amount of any Indemnified Taxes (including Indemnified Taxes imposed or asserted on or attributable to amounts payable under this Section 2.19) payable or paid by such Recipient or required to be withheld or deducted from a payment to such Recipient and any reasonable expenses arising therefrom or with respect thereto, whether or not such Indemnified Taxes were correctly or legally imposed or asserted by the relevant Governmental Authority. A certificate as to the amount of such payment or liability delivered to the Borrower by a Lender (with a copy to the Administrative Agent), or by the Administrative Agent on its own behalf or on behalf of a Lender, shall be conclusive absent manifest error.

(d) Indemnification by the Lenders . Each Lender shall severally indemnify the Administrative Agent, within 10 days after demand therefor, for (i) any Indemnified Taxes attributable to such Lender (but only to the extent that any Loan Party has not already indemnified the Administrative Agent for such Indemnified Taxes and without limiting the obligation of the Loan Parties to do so), (ii) any Taxes attributable to such Lender’s failure to comply with the provisions of Section 9.04(d) relating to the maintenance of a Participant Register and (iii) any Excluded Taxes attributable to such Lender, in each case, that are payable or paid by the Administrative Agent in connection with any Loan Document, and any reasonable expenses arising therefrom or with respect thereto, whether or not such Taxes were correctly or legally imposed or asserted by the relevant Governmental Authority. A certificate as to the amount of such payment or liability delivered to any Lender by the Administrative Agent shall be conclusive absent manifest error. Each Lender hereby authorizes the Administrative Agent to set off and apply any and all amounts at any time owing to such Lender under any Loan Document or otherwise payable by the Administrative Agent to the Lender from any other source against any amount due to the Administrative Agent under this paragraph (d).

(e) Evidence of Payments . As soon as practicable after any payment of Taxes by any Loan Party to a Governmental Authority pursuant to this Section 2.19, such Loan

 

38


Party shall deliver to the Administrative Agent the original or a certified copy of a receipt issued by such Governmental Authority evidencing such payment, a copy of the return reporting such payment or other evidence of such payment reasonably satisfactory to the Administrative Agent.

(f) Status of Lenders . (i) Any Lender that is entitled to an exemption from or reduction of withholding Tax with respect to payments made under any Loan Document shall deliver to the Borrower and the Administrative Agent, at the time or times reasonably requested by the Borrower or the Administrative Agent, such properly completed and executed documentation reasonably requested by the Borrower or the Administrative Agent as will permit such payments to be made without withholding or at a reduced rate of withholding. In addition, any Lender, if reasonably requested by the Borrower or the Administrative Agent, shall deliver such other documentation prescribed by applicable law or reasonably requested by the Borrower or the Administrative Agent as will enable the Borrower or the Administrative Agent to determine whether or not such Lender is subject to backup withholding or information reporting requirements. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the preceding two sentences, the completion, execution and submission of such documentation (other than such documentation set forth in Sections 2.19(f)(ii)(A), 2.19(f)(ii)(B) and (ii)(D) below) shall not be required if in the Lender’s reasonable judgment such completion, execution or submission would subject such Lender to any material unreimbursed cost or expense or would materially prejudice the legal or commercial position of such Lender.

(ii) Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, in the event that the Borrower is a U.S. Person,

(A) any Lender that is a U.S. Person shall deliver to the Borrower and the Administrative Agent on or prior to the date on which such Lender becomes a Lender under this Agreement (and from time to time thereafter upon the reasonable request of the Borrower or the Administrative Agent), executed originals of IRS Form W-9 certifying that such Lender is exempt from U.S. federal backup withholding tax;

(B) any Foreign Lender shall, to the extent it is legally entitled to do so, deliver to the Borrower and the Administrative Agent (in such number of copies as shall be requested by the recipient) on or prior to the date on which such Foreign Lender becomes a Lender under this Agreement (and from time to time thereafter upon the reasonable request of the Borrower or the Administrative Agent), whichever of the following is applicable:

(1) in the case of a Foreign Lender claiming the benefits of an income tax treaty to which the United States is a party (x) with respect to payments of interest under any Loan Document, executed originals of IRS Form W-8BEN establishing an exemption from, or reduction of, U.S. federal withholding Tax pursuant to the “interest” article of such tax treaty and (y) with

 

39


respect to any other applicable payments under any Loan Document, IRS Form W-8BEN establishing an exemption from, or reduction of, U.S. federal withholding Tax pursuant to the “business profits” or “other income” article of such tax treaty;

(2) executed originals of IRS Form W-8ECI;

(3) in the case of a Foreign Lender claiming the benefits of the exemption for portfolio interest under Section 881(c) of the Code, (x) a certificate substantially in the form of Exhibit I-1 to the effect that such Foreign Lender is not a “bank” within the meaning of Section 881(c)(3)(A) of the Code, a “10 percent shareholder” of the Borrower within the meaning of Section 881(c)(3)(B) of the Code, or a “controlled foreign corporation” described in Section 881(c)(3)(C) of the Code (a “ U.S. Tax Compliance Certificate ”) and (y) executed originals of IRS Form W-8BEN; or

(4) to the extent a Foreign Lender is not the beneficial owner, executed originals of IRS Form W-8IMY, accompanied by IRS Form W-8ECI, IRS Form W-8BEN, a U.S. Tax Compliance Certificate substantially in the form of Exhibit I-2 or Exhibit I-3, IRS Form W-9, and/or other certification documents from each beneficial owner, as applicable; provided that if the Foreign Lender is a partnership and one or more direct or indirect partners of such Foreign Lender are claiming the portfolio interest exemption, such Foreign Lender may provide a U.S. Tax Compliance Certificate substantially in the form of Exhibit I-4 on behalf of each such direct and indirect partner;

(C) any Foreign Lender shall, to the extent it is legally entitled to do so, deliver to the Borrower and the Administrative Agent (in such number of copies as shall be requested by the recipient) on or prior to the date on which such Foreign Lender becomes a Lender under this Agreement (and from time to time thereafter upon the reasonable request of the Borrower or the Administrative Agent), executed originals of any other form prescribed by applicable law as a basis for claiming exemption from or a reduction in U.S. federal withholding Tax, duly completed, together with such supplementary documentation as may be prescribed by applicable law to permit the Borrower or the Administrative Agent to determine the withholding or deduction required to be made; and

(D) if a payment made to a Lender under any Loan Document would be subject to U.S. federal withholding Tax imposed by FATCA if such Lender were to fail to comply with the applicable reporting requirements of FATCA (including those contained in Section 1471(b) or 1472(b) of the Code, as applicable), such Lender shall deliver to the

 

40


Borrower and the Administrative Agent at the time or times prescribed by law and at such time or times reasonably requested by the Borrower or the Administrative Agent such documentation prescribed by applicable law (including as prescribed by Section 1471(b)(3)(C)(i) of the Code) and such additional documentation reasonably requested by the Borrower or the Administrative Agent as may be necessary for the Borrower and the Administrative Agent to comply with their obligations under FATCA and to determine that such Lender has complied with such Lender’s obligations under FATCA or to determine the amount to deduct and withhold from such payment. Solely for purposes of this clause (D), “ FATCA ” shall include any amendments made to FATCA after the date of this Agreement.

Each Lender agrees that if any form or certification it previously delivered expires or becomes obsolete or inaccurate in any respect, it shall update such form or certification or promptly notify the Borrower and the Administrative Agent in writing of its legal inability to do so.

(g) Treatment of Certain Refunds . If any party determines, in its sole discretion exercised in good faith, that it has received a refund of any Taxes as to which it has been indemnified pursuant to this Section 2.19 (including by the payment of additional amounts pursuant to this Section 2.19), it shall pay to the indemnifying party an amount equal to such refund (but only to the extent of indemnity payments made under this Section 2.19 with respect to the Taxes giving rise to such refund), net of all out-of-pocket expenses (including Taxes imposed on the receipt of such refund) of such indemnified party and without interest (other than any interest paid by the relevant Governmental Authority with respect to such refund). Such indemnifying party, upon the request of such indemnified party, shall repay to such indemnified party the amount paid over pursuant to this paragraph (g) (plus any penalties, interest or other charges imposed by the relevant Governmental Authority) in the event that such indemnified party is required to repay such refund to such Governmental Authority. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this paragraph (g), in no event will the indemnified party be required to pay any amount to an indemnifying party pursuant to this paragraph (g) the payment of which would place the indemnified party in a less favorable net after-Tax position than the indemnified party would have been in if the Tax subject to indemnification had not been deducted, withheld or otherwise imposed and the indemnification payments or additional amounts giving rise to such refund had never been paid. This paragraph shall not be construed to require any indemnified party to make available its Tax returns (or any other information relating to its Taxes that it deems confidential) to the indemnifying party or any other Person.

(h) Survival . Each party’s obligations under this Section 2.19 shall survive the resignation or replacement of the Administrative Agent or any assignment of rights by, or the replacement of, a Lender, the termination of the Commitments and the repayment, satisfaction or discharge of all obligations under any Loan Document.

 

41


Section 2.20. Assignment of Commitments under Certain Circumstances; Duty to Mitigate .  (a) In the event (i) any Lender delivers a certificate requesting compensation pursuant to Section 2.13, (ii) any Lender delivers a notice described in Section 2.14, (iii) the Borrower is required to pay any Indemnified Taxes or additional amounts with respect thereto to any Lender or any Governmental Authority on account of any Lender pursuant to Section 2.19, (iv) any Lender refuses to consent to any amendment, waiver or other modification of any Loan Document requested by the Borrower that requires the consent of a greater percentage of the Lenders than the Required Lenders or from all affected Lenders and such amendment, waiver or other modification is consented to by the Required Lenders or (v) any Lender becomes a Defaulting Lender, then, in each case, the Borrower may, at its sole expense and effort (including with respect to the processing and recordation fee referred to in Section 9.04(b)), upon notice to such Lender and the Administrative Agent, require such Lender to transfer and assign, without recourse (in accordance with and subject to the restrictions contained in Section 9.04), all of its interests, rights and obligations under this Agreement to an Eligible Assignee that shall assume such assigned obligations (and, with respect to clause (iv) above, shall consent to such requested amendment, waiver or other modification); provided that (x) such assignment shall not conflict with any law, rule or regulation or order of any court or other Governmental Authority having jurisdiction, and (y) the Borrower or such assignee shall have paid to the affected Lender in immediately available funds an amount equal to the sum of the principal of and interest accrued to the date of such payment on the outstanding Loans of such Lender, plus all Fees and other amounts accrued for the account of such Lender hereunder with respect thereto (including any amounts under Sections 2.13, 2.15 and 2.19); provided further that if prior to any such transfer and assignment the circumstances or event that resulted in such Lender’s claim for compensation under Section 2.13, notice under Section 2.14 or the amounts paid pursuant to Section 2.19, as the case may be, cease to cause such Lender to suffer increased costs or reductions in amounts received or receivable or reduction in return on capital, cease to have the consequences specified in Section 2.14 or cease to result in amounts being payable under Section 2.19, as the case may be (including as a result of any action taken by such Lender pursuant to paragraph (b) below), or if such Lender shall waive its right to claim further compensation under Section 2.13 in respect of such circumstances or event, shall withdraw its notice under Section 2.14 or shall waive its right to further payments under Section 2.19 in respect of such circumstances or event or shall consent to the proposed amendment, waiver, consent or other modification, as the case may be, then such Lender shall not thereafter be required to make any such transfer and assignment hereunder. Each Lender hereby grants to the Administrative Agent an irrevocable power of attorney (which power is coupled with an interest) to execute and deliver, on behalf of such Lender, as assignor, any Assignment and Acceptance necessary to effectuate any assignment of such Lender’s interests hereunder in the circumstances contemplated by this Section 2.20(a).

(b) If (i) any Lender shall request compensation under Section 2.13, (ii) any Lender delivers a notice described in Section 2.14 or (iii) the Borrower is required to pay any Indemnified Taxes or additional amount with respect thereto to any Lender or any Governmental Authority on account of any Lender pursuant to Section 2.19, then such Lender shall use reasonable efforts (which shall not require such Lender to incur an

 

42


unreimbursed loss or unreimbursed cost or expense or otherwise take any action inconsistent with its internal policies or legal or regulatory restrictions or suffer any disadvantage or burden deemed by it to be significant) (x) except in the case of a requirement to pay Indemnified Taxes or additional amounts with respect thereto pursuant to Section 2.19, to file any certificate or document reasonably requested in writing by the Borrower or (y) to assign its rights (other than its existing rights to payments pursuant to Section 2.13 or Section 2.19) and delegate and transfer its obligations hereunder to another of its offices, branches or affiliates, if such filing or assignment would reduce its claims for compensation under Section 2.13 or Section 2.19 enable it to withdraw its notice pursuant to Section 2.14 or would reduce amounts payable pursuant to Section 2.19, as the case may be, in the future. The Borrower hereby agrees to pay all reasonable costs and expenses incurred by any Lender in connection with any such filing or assignment, delegation and transfer.

Section 2.21. Defaulting Lender .  (a)  Defaulting Lender Adjustments . Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, if any Lender becomes a Defaulting Lender, then, until such time as such Lender is no longer a Defaulting Lender, to the extent permitted by applicable law:

(i) Waivers and Amendments . Such Defaulting Lender’s right to approve or disapprove any amendment, waiver or consent with respect to this Agreement shall be restricted as set forth in the definition of Required Lenders.

(ii) Defaulting Lender Waterfall . Any payment of principal, interest, fees or other amounts received by the Administrative Agent for the account of such Defaulting Lender (whether voluntary or mandatory, at maturity, pursuant to Section 7.01 or otherwise) or received by the Administrative Agent from a Defaulting Lender pursuant to Section 9.06 shall be applied at such time or times as may be determined by the Administrative Agent as follows: first, to the payment of any amounts owing by such Defaulting Lender to the Administrative Agent hereunder, second, as the Borrower may request (so long as no Default or Event of Default exists), to the funding of any Loan in respect of which such Defaulting Lender has failed to fund its portion thereof as required by this Agreement, as determined by the Administrative Agent, third, if so determined by the Administrative Agent and the Borrower, to be held in a deposit account and released pro rata in order to satisfy such Defaulting Lender’s potential future funding obligations with respect to Loans under this Agreement, fourth, to the payment of any amounts owing to the Lenders as a result of any judgment of a court of competent jurisdiction obtained by any Lender against such Defaulting Lender as a result of such Defaulting Lender’s breach of its obligations under this Agreement, fifth, so long as no Default or Event of Default exists, to the payment of any amounts owing to the Borrower as a result of any judgment of a court of competent jurisdiction obtained by the Borrower against such Defaulting Lender as a result of such Defaulting Lender’s breach of its obligations under this Agreement, and sixth, to such Defaulting Lender or as otherwise directed by a court of competent jurisdiction; provided that, if (x) such payment is a payment of the principal amount of any Loans in respect of which such Defaulting Lender has

 

 

43


not fully funded its appropriate share and (y) such Loans were made at a time when the conditions set forth in Section 4.01 were satisfied or waived, such payment shall be applied solely to pay the Loans of all Non-Defaulting Lenders on a pro rata basis prior to being applied to the payment of any Loans of such Defaulting Lender until such time as all Loans are held by the Lenders pro rata in accordance with the Commitments. Any payments, prepayments or other amounts paid or payable to a Defaulting Lender that are applied (or held) to pay amounts owed by a Defaulting Lender or to post cash collateral pursuant to this Section 2.21(a)(ii) shall be deemed paid to and redirected by such Defaulting Lender, and each Lender irrevocably consents hereto.

(iii) Certain Fees . No Defaulting Lender shall be entitled to receive any Commitment Fee for any period during which that Lender is a Defaulting Lender (and the Borrower shall not be required to pay any such Commitment Fee that otherwise would have been required to have been paid to that Defaulting Lender).

(b) Defaulting Lender Cure . If the Borrower and the Administrative Agent agree in writing that a Lender is no longer a Defaulting Lender, the Administrative Agent will so notify the parties hereto, whereupon as of the effective date specified in such notice and subject to any conditions set forth therein (which may include arrangements with respect to any cash collateral of such Lender), that Lender will, to the extent applicable, purchase at par that portion of outstanding Loans of the other Lenders or take such other actions as the Administrative Agent may determine to be necessary to cause the Loans to be held pro rata by the Lenders in accordance with their Credit Percentages, whereupon such Lender will cease to be a Defaulting Lender; provided that no adjustments will be made retroactively with respect to fees accrued or payments made by or on behalf of the Borrower while that Lender was a Defaulting Lender; provided further that except to the extent otherwise expressly agreed by the affected parties, no change hereunder from Defaulting Lender to Lender will constitute a waiver or release of any claim of any party hereunder arising from that Lender’s having been a Defaulting Lender.

Section 2.22. Incremental Facilities .  (a) The Borrower may, by written notice to the Administrative Agent from time to time, request Incremental Commitments in an amount such that, after giving effect thereto, the Aggregate Incremental Amount does not exceed the Incremental Cap. Such notice shall set forth (i) the amount of the Incremental Commitments being requested (which shall be in minimum increments of $1,000,000 and a minimum amount of $5,000,000) and (ii) the date on which such Incremental Commitments are requested to become effective (which shall not be less than ten (10) Business Days nor more than sixty (60) days after the date of such notice (or such longer or shorter periods as the Administrative Agent shall agree)). The Borrower may seek Incremental Commitments from existing Lenders (each of which shall be entitled to agree or decline to participate in its sole discretion) or, to the extent that existing Lenders do not agree to provide Incremental Commitments in the amount requested, any Additional Lender.

 

44


(b) It shall be a condition precedent to the effectiveness of any Incremental Commitment that (i) no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing immediately prior to or immediately after giving effect to such Incremental Commitment, (ii) the representations and warranties set forth in Article 3 and in each other Loan Document shall be true and correct in all material respects on and as of the date such Incremental Commitments become effective, (iii) immediately after the effectiveness of such Incremental Commitment, Liquidity shall equal or exceed $30,000,000 and (iv) the terms of such Incremental Commitments and the Incremental Loans thereunder shall comply with Section 2.22(c).

(c) Each Incremental Commitment (and the Incremental Loans thereunder) shall be implemented as an increase to the Total Commitments and shall be on terms identical to the existing Commitments (and the Loans thereunder).

(d) In connection with any Incremental Commitments, the Borrower, the Administrative Agent and each applicable Incremental Lender shall execute and deliver to the Administrative Agent an Additional Credit Extension Amendment and such other documentation as the Administrative Agent shall reasonably specify to evidence the Incremental Commitment of each Incremental Lender. The Administrative Agent shall promptly notify each Lender as to the effectiveness of each Additional Credit Extension Amendment. Any Additional Credit Extension Amendment may, without consent of any other Lender, effect such amendments to this Agreement and the other Loan Documents as may be necessary or appropriate, in the reasonable opinion of the Administrative Agent and the Borrower, to effect the provisions of this Section 2.22, and such other technical amendments as may be necessary or appropriate in the reasonable opinion of the Administrative Agent and the Borrower in connection with the establishment of such new Class or tranche, in each case on terms consistent with this Section 2.22. If, on the date of such increase, there are any Loans outstanding, such Loans shall upon the effectiveness of such Incremental Commitment be prepaid from the proceeds of additional Loans made hereunder so that the Loans are thereafter held by the Lenders according to their Credit Percentages (after giving effect to the increase in Commitments), which prepayment shall be accompanied by accrued interest on the Loans being prepaid and any costs incurred by any Lender in accordance with Section 2.15. The Administrative Agent and the Lenders hereby agree that the minimum borrowing, pro rata borrowing and pro rata payment requirements contained elsewhere in this Agreement shall not apply to the transactions effected pursuant to the immediately preceding sentence.

Section 2.23. Amend and Extend Transactions .  (a) The Borrower may, by written notice to the Administrative Agent from time to time, request (each, an “ Extension ”) of the Maturity Date of any Class of Loans and Commitments to the extended maturity date specified in such notice; provided that in no event shall more than three different maturity dates be applicable to Loans and Commitments hereunder. Such notice shall set forth (i) the amount of the applicable Class of Commitments to be extended (which shall be in minimum increments of $1,000,000 and a minimum amount of $5,000,000), (ii) the date on which such Extension is requested to become effective (which shall be not less than ten (10) Business Days nor more than sixty (60) days after

 

45


the date of such Extension (or such longer or shorter periods as the Administrative Agent shall agree)) and (iii) identifying the relevant Class of Commitments to which such Extension relates. Each Lender of the applicable Class shall be offered (an “ Extension Offer ”) an opportunity to participate in such Extension on a pro rata basis and on the same terms and conditions as each other Lender of such Class pursuant to procedures established by, or reasonably acceptable to, the Administrative Agent. If the aggregate principal amount of Commitments (calculated on the face amount thereof) in respect of which Lenders shall have accepted the relevant Extension Offer shall exceed the maximum aggregate principal amount of Commitments requested to be extended by the Borrower pursuant to such Extension Offer, then the Commitments of Lenders of the applicable Class shall be extended ratably up to such maximum amount based on the respective principal amounts (but not to exceed actual holdings of record) with respect to which such Lenders have accepted such Extension Offer.

(b) It shall be a condition precedent to the effectiveness of any Extension that (i) no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing immediately prior to and immediately after giving effect to such Extension, (ii) the representations and warranties set forth in Article 3 and in each other Loan Document shall be true and correct in all material respects on and as of the date of such Extension and (iii) the terms of such Extended Commitments shall comply with Section 2.23(c).

(c) The terms of each Extension shall be determined by the Borrower and the applicable extending Lender and set forth in an Additional Credit Extension Amendment; provided that (i) the final maturity date of any Extended Commitment shall be no earlier than the Maturity Date, (ii) there shall be no scheduled amortization of the Extended Commitments, (iii) the Extended Loans will rank pari passu (or more junior) in right of payment and with respect to security with the existing Loans and the borrower and guarantors of the Extended Commitments shall be the same as the borrower and guarantors with respect to the existing Loans, (iv) the interest rate margin, rate floors, fees, original issue discounts and premiums applicable to any Extended Commitment (and the Extended Loans thereunder) shall be determined by the Borrower and the applicable extending Lender and (v) to the extent the terms of the Extended Commitments are inconsistent with the terms set forth herein (except as set forth in clause (i) through (iv) above), such terms shall be reasonably satisfactory to the Administrative Agent.

(d) In connection with any Extension, the Borrower, the Administrative Agent and each applicable extending Lender shall execute and deliver to the Administrative Agent an Additional Credit Extension Amendment and such other documentation as the Administrative Agent shall reasonably specify to evidence the Extension. The Administrative Agent shall promptly notify each Lender as to the effectiveness of each Extension. Any Additional Credit Extension Amendment may, without the consent of any other Lender, effect such amendments to this Agreement and the other Loan Documents as may be necessary or appropriate, in the reasonable opinion of the Administrative Agent and the Borrower, to implement the terms of any such Extension Offer, including any amendments necessary to establish Extended Commitments as a new Class or tranche of Commitments and such other technical amendments as may be

 

46


necessary or appropriate in the reasonable opinion of the Administrative Agent and the Borrower in connection with the establishment of such new Class or tranche (including to preserve the pro rata treatment of the extended and non-extended Classes or tranches), in each case on terms consistent with this Section 2.23).

ARTICLE 3

R EPRESENTATIONS AND W ARRANTIES

The Borrower represents and warrants to the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent and each of the Lenders on the Closing Date and on each other date contemplated by Article 4 that:

Section 3.01. Organization; Powers .  The Borrower and each of the Restricted Subsidiaries (a) is duly organized and/or established, as the case may be, validly existing and in good standing under the laws of the jurisdiction of its organization or establishment, as applicable, (b) has all requisite power and authority to own its material property and assets and to carry on its business as now conducted and as proposed to be conducted, (c) is qualified to do business in, and is in good standing in, every jurisdiction where such qualification is required, except where the failure so to qualify could not reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect, and (d) has the power and authority to execute, deliver and perform its obligations under each of the Loan Documents and each other agreement or instrument contemplated thereby to which it is or will be a party and, in the case of the Borrower, to borrow hereunder.

Section 3.02. Authorization .  The Transactions (a) have been duly authorized by all requisite corporate and, if required, stockholder action of the Borrower and each other Loan Party and (b) will not (i) violate (A) any provision of law, statute, rule or regulation, or of the certificate or articles of incorporation, partnership agreement or other constitutive documents or by-laws of the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary, (B) any order of any Governmental Authority or (C) any provision of any indenture, agreement or other instrument to which the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary is a party or by which any of them or any of their property is or may be bound, (ii) be in conflict with, result in a breach of or constitute (alone or with the giving of notice or lapse of time or both) a default under, or give rise to any right to accelerate or to require the prepayment, repurchase or redemption of any obligation under any such indenture, agreement or other instrument or (iii) result in the creation or imposition of any Lien upon or with respect to any property or assets now owned or hereafter acquired by the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary (other than any Lien created hereunder or under the Security Documents).

Section 3.03. Enforceability .  This Agreement has been duly executed and delivered by the Borrower and constitutes, and each other Loan Document when executed and delivered by each Loan Party thereto will constitute, a legal, valid and binding obligation of such Loan Party enforceable against such Loan Party in accordance with its terms, except as the enforceability thereof may be limited by bankruptcy, insolvency or similar laws affecting creditors’ rights generally and subject to general principles of equity.

 

47


Section 3.04. Governmental Approvals .  No action, consent or approval of, registration or filing with or any other action by any Governmental Authority or third party is or will be required in connection with the Transactions, except for (a) the filing of Uniform Commercial Code financing statements and filings with the United States Patent and Trademark Office and the United States Copyright Office, (b) recordation of the Mortgages and (c) such as have been made or obtained and are in full force and effect.

Section 3.05. Financial Statements .  The Borrower has, heretofore, delivered to the Lenders (a) the consolidated balance sheets and related statements of income, stockholder’s equity and cash flows of the Borrower and its consolidated Subsidiaries as of and for (i) the fiscal years ended December 31, 2011 and January 31, 2013, audited by and accompanied by the opinion of Ernst & Young LLP, independent public accountants, and (ii) the fiscal quarter and the portion of the fiscal year ended April 30, 2013, unaudited and certified by its chief financial officer and (b) consolidated statements of income, stockholder’s equity and cash flows of the Borrower and its consolidated Subsidiaries as and for the period from January 1, 2012 through and including January 31, 2012, audited by and accompanied by the opinion of Ernst & Young LLP, independent public accountants. Such financial statements present fairly in all material respects the financial condition and results of operations and cash flows of the Borrower and its consolidated Subsidiaries as of such dates and for such periods. Such balance sheets and the notes thereto disclose all material liabilities, direct or contingent, of the Borrower and its consolidated Subsidiaries as of the dates thereof that are required to be disclosed on financial statements prepared in accordance with GAAP. Such financial statements were prepared in accordance with GAAP applied on a consistent basis, subject, in the case of unaudited financial statements, to year-end audit adjustments and the absence of footnotes.

Section 3.06. No Material Adverse Effect .  No event or circumstance has occurred that has had, or could reasonably be expected to have, a Material Adverse Effect.

Section 3.07. Title to Properties; Possession under Leases .  (a) Each of the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries has good and marketable title to, valid leasehold interests in, or easements, licenses or other limited property interests in, all its properties that are necessary for the operation of their respective businesses as currently conducted and as proposed to be conducted, free and clear of all Liens (other than Liens permitted by Section 6.02).

(b) Each of the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries has complied with all obligations under all material leases to which it is a party and all such leases are in full force and effect. To the Borrower’s knowledge, each of the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries enjoys peaceful and undisturbed possession under all such material leases.

(c) As of the Closing Date, (i) no real property or other assets material to the Borrower and its Restricted Subsidiaries is affected by any fire or other casualty (whether or not covered by insurance) and (ii) the Borrower has not received any notice of, nor has

 

48


any knowledge of, any pending or contemplated condemnation proceeding (or any sale or disposition thereof in lieu of condemnation) affecting any real property or other assets material to the Borrower or its Restricted Subsidiaries.

Section 3.08. Subsidiaries .  Schedule 3.08 sets forth as of the Closing Date a list of all Subsidiaries and the percentage ownership interest of the Borrower therein. The shares of capital stock or other ownership interests so indicated on Schedule 3.08 are fully paid and nonassessable and are owned by the Borrower, directly or indirectly, free and clear of all Liens (other than Liens created under the Security Documents and nonconsensual Liens permitted by Section 6.02).

Section 3.09. Litigation; Compliance with Laws .  (a) There are no actions, suits or proceedings at law or in equity or by or before any Governmental Authority now pending or, to the knowledge of the Borrower, threatened against or affecting the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary or any business, property or rights of any such Person (i) that involve any Loan Document or the Transactions or (ii) that could reasonably be expected, individually or in the aggregate, to result in a Material Adverse Effect.

(b) None of the Borrower or any of the Restricted Subsidiaries or any of their respective material properties or assets is in violation of, nor will the continued operation of their material properties and assets as currently conducted violate, any law, rule or regulation (including any zoning, building, Environmental Law, ordinance, code or approval or any building permits) or any restrictions of record or agreements affecting the Mortgaged Property, or is in default with respect to any judgment, writ, injunction, decree or order of any Governmental Authority, where, in each case, such violation or default has resulted or could reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect.

(c) Certificates of occupancy and permits are in effect for each Mortgaged Property as currently constructed, and true and complete copies of such certificates of occupancy have been delivered to the Collateral Agent as mortgagee with respect to each Mortgaged Property.

Section 3.10. Agreements .  (a) None of the Borrower or any of the Restricted Subsidiaries is a party to any agreement or instrument or subject to any corporate restriction that has resulted or could reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect.

(b) None of the Borrower or any of the Restricted Subsidiaries is in default in any manner under any provision of any indenture or other agreement or instrument evidencing Indebtedness, or any other material agreement or instrument to which it is a party or by which it or any of its properties or assets are or may be bound, where such default has resulted or could reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect.

 

49


Section 3.11. Federal Reserve Regulations .  (a) None of the Borrower or any of the Restricted Subsidiaries is engaged principally, or as one of its important activities, in the business of extending credit for the purpose of buying or carrying Margin Stock.

(b) No part of the proceeds of any Loan will be used, whether directly or indirectly, and whether immediately, incidentally or ultimately, for any purpose that entails a violation of, or that is inconsistent with, the provisions of the regulations of the Board, including Regulation T, U or X.

Section 3.12. Investment Company Act.  None of the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary is required to register as an “ investment company ,” as defined in the Investment Company Act.

Section 3.13. Use of Proceeds .  The Borrower will use the proceeds of the Loans (other than Incremental Loans) only for the purposes specified in the introductory statement to this Agreement.

Section 3.14. Taxes .  Each of the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries has filed or caused to be filed all U.S. federal, state, local and foreign tax returns or materials required to have been filed by it and has paid or caused to be paid all Taxes due and payable by it and all assessments received by it, except Taxes that are being contested in good faith by appropriate proceedings and for which the Borrower or the applicable Restricted Subsidiary, as applicable, shall have set aside on its books adequate reserves.

Section 3.15. No Material Misstatements .  No information, report, financial statement, exhibit or schedule furnished by or on behalf of the Borrower to the Administrative Agent or any Lender, taken as a whole, in connection with the negotiation of any Loan Document or included therein or delivered pursuant thereto contained any material misstatement of fact or omitted, as of the date so furnished, to state any material fact necessary to make the statements therein, in the light of the circumstances under which they were made, not materially misleading; provided that, to the extent any such information, report, financial statement, exhibit or schedule was based upon or constitutes a forecast or projection, the Borrower represents and warrants only that it acted in good faith and utilized reasonable assumptions (based upon accounting principles consistent with the historical audited financial statements of the Borrower) and due care in the preparation of such information, report, financial statement, exhibit or schedule.

Section 3.16. Employee Benefit Plans.

(a) With respect to each employee benefit plan as defined in Section 3(3) of ERISA, the Borrower, the Restricted Subsidiaries and their respective ERISA Affiliates are in compliance with the applicable provisions of ERISA and the Code and the regulations and published interpretations thereunder, except where the failure to so comply could not reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect. No ERISA Event has occurred or is reasonably expected to occur that, when taken together with all other such ERISA Events, has resulted or could reasonably be expected to result

 

50


in a Material Adverse Effect. There exists no Unfunded Pension Liability with respect to any Plans that could reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect.

(b) Each Foreign Pension Plan is in compliance with all requirements of law applicable thereto and the respective requirements of the governing documents for such plan, except where the failure to so comply could not reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect. With respect to each Foreign Pension Plan, none of the Borrower, any Subsidiaries or any of their respective directors, officers, employees or agents has engaged in a transaction which would subject the Borrower or any Subsidiary, directly or indirectly, to a tax or civil penalty which has resulted or could reasonably be expected, individually or in the aggregate, to result in a Material Adverse Effect. With respect to each Foreign Pension Plan, reserves have been established in the financial statements furnished to Lenders in respect of any unfunded liabilities in accordance with applicable law and prudent business practice or, where required, in accordance with ordinary accounting practices in the jurisdiction in which such Foreign Pension Plan is maintained. The aggregate unfunded liabilities with respect to such Foreign Pension Plans has not resulted or could not reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect; the present value of the aggregate accumulated benefit liabilities of all such Foreign Pension Plans (based on those assumptions used to fund each such Foreign Pension Plan) did not, as of the last annual valuation date applicable thereto, exceed by more than $5,000,000 the fair market value of the assets of all such Foreign Pension Plans.

Section 3.17. Environmental Matters .  (a) Except with respect to any matters that, individually or in the aggregate, could not reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect, none of the Borrower or any of the Restricted Subsidiaries (i) has failed to comply with any Environmental Law or to obtain, maintain or comply with any permit, license or other approval required under any Environmental Law, (ii) has become subject to any Environmental Liability, (iii) has received notice of any claim with respect to any Environmental Liability or (iv) knows of any basis for any Environmental Liability.

(b) Except with respect to any matters that, individually or in the aggregate, could not reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect: (i) each Mortgaged Property is and has been in compliance with all Environmental Law and has obtained, maintained and complied with any permit, license or other approval required under any Environmental Law, (ii) there are no Environmental Liabilities that have arisen or exist in connection with or in any way relating to any of the Mortgaged Property and (iii) none of the Borrower or any of the Subsidiaries knows of any basis for any Environmental Liability in connection with or in any way relating to any of the Mortgaged Property.

(c) There has been no environmental investigation, study, audit, test, review or other analysis conducted that is within the possession, custody or control of the Borrower or any of the Subsidiaries in relation to the current or prior business the Borrower or any Subsidiary or any property or facility now or previously owned, leased

 

51


or operated by the Borrower or any Subsidiary, including the Mortgaged Properties, which has not been delivered to the Lenders at least five days prior to the date hereof.

(d) For purposes of this Section, the terms “ Borrower ” and “ Restricted Subsidiary ” shall include any business or business entity which is, in whole or in part, a predecessor of the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary.

Section 3.18. Insurance .  Schedule 3.18 sets forth a true, complete and correct description of all insurance maintained by the Borrower or by the Borrower for its Restricted Subsidiaries as of the Closing Date. As of such date, such insurance is in full force and effect and all premiums have been duly paid. The Borrower and its Restricted Subsidiaries have insurance in such amounts and covering such risks and liabilities as are in accordance with normal industry practice.

Section 3.19. Security Documents .  (a) The Guarantee and Collateral Agreement, upon execution and delivery thereof by the parties thereto, will create in favor of the Collateral Agent, for the ratable benefit of the Secured Parties, a legal, valid and enforceable security interest in the Collateral and the proceeds thereof and (i) when the Collateral that is required to be delivered to the Collateral Agent pursuant to the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement is so delivered, the Lien created under Guarantee and Collateral Agreement shall constitute a fully perfected first priority Lien on, and security interest in, all right, title and interest of the Loan Parties in such Collateral, in each case prior and superior in right to any other Person, to the extent a Lien on such Collateral may be perfected by possession, and (ii) when the financing statements in appropriate form are filed in the offices specified on Schedule 3.19(a), the Lien created under the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement will constitute a fully perfected Lien on, and security interest in, all right, title and interest of the Loan Parties in the Collateral described in such statements (other than Intellectual Property), in each case prior and superior in right to any other Person, in each case, to the extent a lien on such Collateral may be perfected by filing a financing statement, other than with respect to Liens expressly permitted by Section 6.02.

(b) Upon the recordation of the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement (or a short-form security agreement in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to the Borrower and the Collateral Agent) with the United States Patent and Trademark Office and the United States Copyright Office, together with the financing statements in appropriate form filed in the offices specified on Schedule 3.19(a), the Lien created under the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement shall constitute a fully perfected Lien on, and security interest in, all right, title and interest of the Loan Parties in the Intellectual Property in which a security interest may be perfected by filing in the United States and its territories and possessions, in each case prior and superior in right to any other Person, other than with respect to Liens expressly permitted by Section 6.02 (it being understood that subsequent recordings in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and the United States Copyright Office may be necessary to perfect a Lien on registered trademarks and patents, trademark and patent applications and registered copyrights acquired by the Loan Parties after the date hereof).

 

52


(c) Each Mortgage is effective to create in favor of the Collateral Agent, for the ratable benefit of the Secured Parties, a legal, valid and enforceable first priority Lien on all of the applicable Loan Party’s right, title and interest in and to the Mortgaged Property thereunder and the proceeds thereof, and when such Mortgage is filed in the office notified in writing by the Borrower to the Collateral Agent, such Mortgage shall constitute a fully perfected first priority Lien on, and security interest in, all right, title and interest of such Loan Party in such Mortgaged Property and the proceeds thereof, in each case prior and superior in right to any other Person, other than with respect to Liens expressly permitted by Section 6.02.

Section 3.20. Location of Real Property and Leased Premises .  (a) Schedule 3.20(a) lists completely and correctly as of the Closing Date all real property owned by the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries and the addresses thereof.

(b) Schedule 3.20(b) lists completely and correctly as of the Closing Date each parcel of real property leased, subleased, licensed or sublicensed by the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries, the address and the owner thereof, and the expiration date of the related lease, sublease, license or sublicense.

Section 3.21. Intellectual Property .  The Borrower and each Restricted Subsidiary owns or is licensed to use all of its Intellectual Property material to its respective business, and neither the use thereof nor the conduct of their respective businesses infringes, misappropriates or otherwise violates the Intellectual Property rights of any other Person, except for any such infringements, misappropriations and other violations that could not reasonably be expected, individually or in the aggregate, to result in a Material Adverse Effect.

Section 3.22. Labor Matters .  As of the Closing Date, there are no strikes, lockouts or slowdowns against the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary pending or, to the knowledge of the Borrower, threatened. The hours worked by and payments made to employees of the Borrower and the Restricted Subsidiaries have not been in violation of the Fair Labor Standards Act or any other applicable Federal, state, local or foreign law dealing with such matters except where such violation could not reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect. All payments due from the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary, or for which any claim may be made against the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary, on account of wages and employee health and welfare insurance and other benefits, have been paid or accrued as a liability on the books of the Borrower or such Restricted Subsidiary in all material respects. The consummation of the Transactions will not give rise to any right of termination or right of renegotiation on the part of any union under any collective bargaining agreement to which the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary is bound.

Section 3.23. Solvency .  Immediately after the consummation of the Transactions to occur on the Closing Date and after giving effect to each Credit Event, the Borrower and its Restricted Subsidiaries, taken as a whole, are Solvent.

 

53


Section 3.24. Sanctioned Persons .  None of the Borrower or any Subsidiary nor, to the knowledge of the Borrower, any director, officer, agent, employee or Affiliate of the Borrower or any Subsidiary is currently subject to any U.S. sanctions administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the U.S. Treasury Department (“ OFAC ”); and the Borrower will not directly or indirectly use the proceeds of the Loans or otherwise make available such proceeds to any Person, for the purpose of financing the activities of any Person currently subject to any U.S. sanctions administered by OFAC.

Section 3.25. Foreign Corrupt Practices Act .  Each of the Borrower, the Subsidiaries and their respective directors, officers, agents, employees, and any person acting for or on behalf of the Borrower or such Subsidiaries has complied with, and will comply with, the U.S. Foreign Corrupt Practices Act, as amended from time to time, or any other applicable anti-bribery or anti-corruption law, and it and they have not made, offered, promised, or authorized, and will not make, offer, promise, or authorize, whether directly or indirectly, any payment, of anything of value to: (a) an executive, official, employee or agent of a governmental department, agency or instrumentality, (b) a director, officer, employee or agent of a wholly or partially government-owned or government-controlled company or business, (c) a political party or official thereof, or candidate for political office or (d) an executive, official, employee or agent of a public international organization (e.g., the International Monetary Fund or the World Bank) (“ Government Official ”); while knowing or having a reasonable belief that all or some portion will be used for the purpose of: (i) influencing any act, decision or failure to act by a Government Official in his or her official capacity, (ii) inducing a Government Official to use his or her influence with a government or instrumentality to affect any act or decision of such government or entity or (iii) securing an improper advantage; in order to obtain, retain, or direct business.

Section 3.26. Anti-Terrorism Law .  Neither the Borrower nor any of the Subsidiaries is in violation of any legal requirement relating to any laws with respect to terrorism or money laundering (“ Anti-Terrorism Laws ”), including Executive Order No. 13224 on Terrorist Financing effective September 24, 2001 (the “ Executive Order ”) and the USA PATRIOT Act.

ARTICLE 4

C ONDITIONS OF L ENDING

The obligations of the Lenders to make Loans hereunder are subject to the satisfaction of the following conditions:

Section 4.01. All Credit Events .  On the date of each Borrowing (other than a conversion or a continuation of a Borrowing) (each such event being called a “ Credit Event ”):

(a) The Administrative Agent shall have received a notice of such Borrowing as required by Section 2.03.

 

54


(b) The representations and warranties set forth in Article 3 and in each other Loan Document shall be true and correct in all material respects on and as of the date of such Credit Event with the same effect as though made on and as of such date, except to the extent such representations and warranties expressly relate to an earlier date.

(c) At the time of and immediately after such Credit Event, no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing.

(d) Immediately after such Credit Event, Liquidity shall equal or exceed $30,000,000.

(e) Immediately after such Credit Event and the use of proceeds thereof, the aggregate amount of cash and Permitted Investments of the Borrower and the Subsidiaries shall not exceed (i) $40,000,000 plus (ii) if the Borrower issues any Qualified Capital Stock on or after August 1, 2013 to investors in transactions not involving a public offering, the lesser of (x) 50% of the net cash proceeds to the Borrower of such issuances and (y) $15,000,000; provided that if after such Credit Event the amount of cash and Permitted Investments of the Borrower and the Subsidiaries exceeds such amount solely as a result of compliance with the minimum borrowing amounts set forth in Section 2.02(a), then the Borrower shall be deemed to be in compliance with this clause (e) notwithstanding such excess.

The delivery of each Borrowing Request shall be deemed to constitute a representation and warranty by the Borrower on the date of such Credit Event as to the matters specified in paragraphs (b), (c), (d) and (e) of this Section 4.01.

Section 4.02. First Credit Event . On the Closing Date:

(a) The Administrative Agent shall have received, on behalf of itself and the Lenders, a favorable written opinion of Perkins Coie LLP, counsel for the Borrower, in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to the Administrative Agent (i) dated the Closing Date, (ii) addressed to the Administrative Agent and the Lenders and (iii) covering such other matters relating to the Loan Documents and the Transactions as the Administrative Agent shall reasonably request, and the Borrower hereby requests such counsel to deliver such opinions.

(b) The Administrative Agent shall have received (i) a copy of the certificate or articles of incorporation (or comparable organizational document), including all amendments thereto, of each Loan Party, certified as of a recent date by the Secretary of State (or comparable entity) of the jurisdiction of its organization, and a certificate as to the good standing (where such concept is applicable) of each Loan Party as of a recent date, from such Secretary of State (or comparable entity), (ii) a certificate of the Secretary or Assistant Secretary of each Loan Party dated the Closing Date and certifying (A) that attached thereto is a true and complete copy of the by-laws of such Loan Party as in effect on the Closing Date and at all times since a date prior to the date of the resolutions described in clause (B) below, (B) that attached thereto is a true and complete copy of resolutions duly adopted by the Board of Directors (or comparable governing body) of

 

55


such Loan Party authorizing the execution, delivery and performance of the Loan Documents to which such Loan Party is a party and, in the case of the Borrower, the borrowings hereunder, and that such resolutions have not been modified, rescinded or amended and are in full force and effect, (C) that the certificate or articles of incorporation (or comparable organizational document) of such Loan Party have not been amended since the date of the last amendment thereto shown on the certificate of good standing furnished pursuant to clause (i) above and (D) as to the incumbency and specimen signature of each officer executing any Loan Document or any other document delivered in connection herewith on behalf of such Loan Party; and (iii) a certificate of another officer as to the incumbency and specimen signature of the Secretary or Assistant Secretary executing the certificate pursuant to clause (ii) above.

(c) The Administrative Agent shall have received a certificate, dated the Closing Date and signed by a Responsible Officer of the Borrower, confirming compliance with the conditions precedent set forth in Section 4.01 and this Section 4.02.

(d) The Administrative Agent shall have received all Fees, all fees payable under the Engagement Letter and all other amounts due and payable on or prior to the Closing Date, including, to the extent invoiced, reimbursement or payment of all out-of-pocket expenses required to be reimbursed or paid by the Borrower hereunder or under any other Loan Document.

(e) The Administrative Agent shall have received duly executed counterparts of this Agreement from each party hereto.

(f) (i) the Administrative Agent shall have received duly executed counterparts of each Security Document from each party thereto and (ii) the Security Documents shall be in full force and effect on the Closing Date and the Collateral Agent on behalf of the Secured Parties shall have a perfected security interest in the Collateral of the type and priority described in each Security Document.

(g) The Collateral Agent shall have received a Perfection Certificate with respect to the Loan Parties dated the Closing Date and duly executed by a Responsible Officer of the Borrower, and shall have received the results of a search of the Uniform Commercial Code filings (or equivalent filings) made with respect to the Loan Parties in the states (or other jurisdictions) of formation of such Persons, in each case as indicated on such Perfection Certificate, together with copies of the financing statements (or similar documents) disclosed by such search, and accompanied by evidence satisfactory to the Collateral Agent that the Liens indicated in any such financing statement (or similar document) would be permitted under Section 6.02 or have been or will be contemporaneously released or terminated.

(h) The Administrative Agent shall have received a copy of, or a certificate as to coverage under, the insurance policies required by Section 5.02 and the applicable provisions of the Security Documents, each of which shall be endorsed or otherwise amended to include a customary lender’s loss payable endorsement and to name the

 

56


Collateral Agent as additional insured, in form and substance satisfactory to the Administrative Agent.

(i) All principal, premium, if any, interest, fees and other amounts due or outstanding under the Existing Debt shall have been or will be, substantially simultaneously with the Closing Date, paid in full, the commitments thereunder terminated and all guarantees and security in support thereof discharged and released and the Administrative Agent shall have received reasonably satisfactory evidence thereof. Immediately after giving effect to the Transactions and the other transactions contemplated hereby, the Borrower and the Subsidiaries shall have outstanding no Indebtedness or preferred stock other than (i) Indebtedness outstanding under this Agreement and (ii) Indebtedness set forth on Schedule 6.01(a).

(j) The Lenders shall have received the financial statements and opinion referred to in Section 3.05, which financial statements shall not be in a form materially inconsistent with the financial statements or forecasts previously provided to the Administrative Agent.

(k) The Administrative Agent shall have received a certificate from the chief financial officer of the Borrower certifying that the Borrower and its Restricted Subsidiaries, on a consolidated basis, after giving effect to the Transactions to occur on the Closing Date, are Solvent.

(l) All requisite Governmental Authorities and third parties shall have approved or consented to the Transactions and the other transactions contemplated hereby to the extent required, all applicable appeal periods shall have expired and there shall not be any pending or threatened litigation, governmental, administrative or judicial action that has resulted or could reasonably be expected to restrain, prevent or impose burdensome conditions on the Transactions or the other transactions contemplated hereby.

(m) The Lenders shall have received, at least three (3) Business Days prior to the Closing Date, to the extent requested, all documentation and other information required by regulatory authorities under applicable “ know your customer ” and anti-money laundering rules and regulations, including the USA PATRIOT Act.

ARTICLE 5

A FFIRMATIVE C OVENANTS

The Borrower covenants and agrees with each Lender that so long as this Agreement shall remain in effect and until the Commitments have been terminated and the principal of and interest on each Loan, all Fees and all other expenses or amounts payable under any Loan Document shall have been paid in full, unless the Required Lenders shall otherwise consent in writing, the Borrower will, and will cause each of the Restricted Subsidiaries to:

 

57


Section 5.01. Existence; Compliance with Laws; Businesses and Properties .  (a) Do or cause to be done all things necessary to preserve, renew and keep in full force and effect its legal existence, except as otherwise expressly permitted under Section 6.05.

(b) Do or cause to be done all things necessary to obtain, preserve, renew, extend and keep in full force and effect the rights, licenses, permits, franchises, authorizations and Intellectual Property material to the conduct of its business; maintain and operate such business in substantially the manner in which it is presently conducted and operated and comply in all material respects with all applicable laws, rules, regulations and decrees and orders of any Governmental Authority, whether now in effect or hereafter enacted, in each case, except to the extent any such right and/or Intellectual Property is no longer used or useful in the conduct of the Borrower’s business.

(c) (i) Maintain, preserve, and protect all of its material properties and equipment necessary in the operation of its business in good working order, repair and condition (ordinary wear and tear, casualty or condemnation excepted), (ii) make all necessary renewals, repairs, replacements, modifications, improvements, upgrades, extensions and additions thereof or thereto in accordance with prudent industry practice in order that the business carried on in connection therewith may be properly conducted at all times and (iii) keep all material leases to which it is a party in full force and effect, in each case, except to the extent any such equipment is no longer used or useful in the conduct of the Borrower’s business.

Section 5.02. Insurance .  (a) Keep its insurable properties adequately insured at all times by financially sound and reputable insurers; maintain such other insurance, to such extent and against such risks, including fire and other risks insured against by extended coverage, as is customary with companies in the same or similar businesses operating in the same or similar locations, including public liability insurance against claims for personal injury or death or property damage occurring upon, in, about or in connection with the use of any properties owned, occupied or controlled by it and maintain such other insurance as may be required by law.

(b) Cause all such policies covering any Collateral to be endorsed or otherwise amended to include a customary lender’s loss payable endorsement, in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to the Administrative Agent and the Collateral Agent, which endorsement shall provide that, from and after the Closing Date, if the insurance carrier shall have received written notice from the Administrative Agent or the Collateral Agent of the occurrence of an Event of Default, the insurance carrier shall pay all proceeds otherwise payable to the Borrower or the Loan Parties under such policies directly to the Collateral Agent; cause all such policies to provide that neither the Borrower, the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent nor any other party shall be a coinsurer thereunder and to contain a “ Replacement Cost Endorsement ,” without any deduction for depreciation, and such other provisions as the Administrative Agent or the Collateral Agent may reasonably require from time to time to protect their interests; deliver original or certified copies of all such policies to the Collateral Agent; cause each such policy to provide that it shall not be canceled, modified or not renewed (i) by reason of nonpayment of premium upon not less than 10 days’ prior written notice thereof by the

 

58


insurer to the Administrative Agent and the Collateral Agent (giving the Administrative Agent and the Collateral Agent the right to cure defaults in the payment of premiums) or (ii) for any other reason upon not less than 30 days’ prior written notice thereof by the insurer to the Administrative Agent and the Collateral Agent and deliver to the Administrative Agent and the Collateral Agent, prior to the cancellation, modification or nonrenewal of any such policy of insurance, a copy of a renewal or replacement policy (or other evidence of renewal of a policy previously delivered to the Administrative Agent and the Collateral Agent) together with evidence satisfactory to the Administrative Agent and the Collateral Agent of payment of the premium therefor.

(c) If at any time the area in which the Premises (as defined in the Mortgages) are located is designated (i) a “ flood hazard area ” in any Flood Insurance Rate Map published by the Federal Emergency Management Agency (or any successor agency), obtain flood insurance, if so requested by any Lender, in such total amount as the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent or the Required Lenders may from time to time require and otherwise comply with the NFIP as set forth in the Flood Laws or (ii) a “ Zone 1 ” area, obtain earthquake insurance in such total amount as the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent or the Required Lenders may from time to time require. Following the Closing Date, the Borrower shall deliver to the Collateral Agent annual renewals of the flood insurance policy or annual renewals of a force-placed flood insurance policy for each Mortgaged Property if flood insurance for such Mortgaged Property was requested by any Lender. In connection with any amendment to this Agreement pursuant to which any increase, extension, or renewal of Loans is contemplated, the Borrower shall, if requested by any Lender, cause to be delivered to the Collateral Agent for any Mortgaged Property, a Flood Determination Form, Borrower Notice and Evidence of Flood Insurance, as applicable.

(d) With respect to any Mortgaged Property, carry and maintain comprehensive general liability insurance including the “ broad form CGL endorsement ” and coverage on an occurrence basis against claims made for personal injury (including bodily injury, death and property damage) and umbrella liability insurance against any and all claims, in no event for a combined single limit of less than that which is customary for companies in the same or similar businesses operating in the same or similar locations, naming the Collateral Agent as an additional insured, on forms satisfactory to the Collateral Agent.

(e) Notify the Administrative Agent and the Collateral Agent promptly whenever any separate insurance concurrent in form or contributing in the event of loss with that required to be maintained under this Section 5.02 is taken out by any Loan Party and promptly deliver to the Administrative Agent and the Collateral Agent a duplicate original copy of such policy or policies.

Section 5.03. Obligations and Taxes.  Pay its Indebtedness and other obligations promptly and in accordance with their terms and pay and discharge promptly when due all Taxes, before the same shall become delinquent or in default, as well as all lawful claims for labor, materials and supplies or otherwise that, if unpaid, might give rise to a Lien upon such properties or any part thereof; provided that such payment and discharge

 

59


shall not be required with respect to (a) any amounts not exceeding $50,000; and (b) any amounts the validity or amount of which shall be contested in good faith by appropriate proceedings, the Borrower shall have set aside on its books adequate reserves with respect thereto in accordance with GAAP, such contest operates to suspend collection of the contested obligation, tax, assessment or charge and enforcement of a Lien and, in the case of a Mortgaged Property, there is no material risk of forfeiture of such property.

Section 5.04. Financial Statements, Reports, etc .  In the case of the Borrower, furnish to the Administrative Agent, which shall furnish to each Lender (including each Public Lender):

(a) within 90 days (or, in the case of the fiscal year ending January 31, 2014, as soon as available but in no event more than 120 days) after the end of each fiscal year, its consolidated balance sheet and related statements of income, stockholders’ equity and cash flows showing the financial condition of the Borrower and its consolidated Subsidiaries as of the close of such fiscal year and the results of its operations and the operations of such Subsidiaries during such year, together with comparative figures for the immediately preceding fiscal year, all audited by Ernst & Young LLP or other independent public accountants of recognized national standing and accompanied by an opinion of such accountants (which opinion shall be without a “going concern” or like qualification or exception and without any qualification or exception as to the scope of such audit) to the effect that such consolidated financial statements fairly present the financial condition and results of operations of the Borrower and its consolidated Subsidiaries on a consolidated basis in accordance with GAAP consistently applied, together with a customary “management discussion and analysis” provision;

(b) within 45 days after the end of each of the first three fiscal quarters of each fiscal year, its consolidated balance sheet and related statements of income, stockholders’ equity and cash flows showing the financial condition of the Borrower and its consolidated Subsidiaries as of the close of such fiscal quarter and the results of its operations and the operations of such Subsidiaries during such fiscal quarter and the then elapsed portion of the fiscal year, and comparative figures for the same periods in the immediately preceding fiscal year, all certified by one of its Financial Officers as fairly presenting the financial condition and results of operations of the Borrower and its consolidated Subsidiaries on a consolidated basis in accordance with GAAP consistently applied, subject to normal year-end audit adjustments, together with a customary “management discussion and analysis” provision;

(c) concurrently with any delivery of financial statements under paragraph (a) or (b) above, a certificate of a Financial Officer in the form of Exhibit E (i) certifying that no Event of Default or Default has occurred or, if such an Event of Default or Default has occurred, specifying the nature and extent thereof and any corrective action taken or proposed to be taken with respect thereto and (ii) attaching an updated Schedule 1.01(c) or certifying that no changes to such schedule are necessary;

(d) within 30 days after the beginning of each fiscal year of the Borrower, a detailed consolidated budget for such fiscal year (including a projected consolidated

 

60


balance sheet and related statements of projected operations and cash flows as of the end of and for such fiscal year and setting forth the assumptions used for purposes of preparing such budget) and, promptly when available, any significant revisions of such budget;

(e) promptly after the same become publicly available, copies of all periodic and other reports, proxy statements and other materials filed by the Borrower or any Subsidiary with the Securities and Exchange Commission, or any Governmental Authority succeeding to any or all of the functions of said Commission, or with any national securities exchange, or distributed to its shareholders, as the case may be;

(f) promptly after the receipt thereof by the Borrower or any of the Subsidiaries, a copy of any “management letter” received by any such Person from its certified public accountants and the management’s response thereto;

(g) promptly after the request by any Lender, all documentation and other information that such Lender reasonably requests in order to comply with its ongoing obligations under applicable “know your customer” and anti-money laundering rules and regulations, including the USA PATRIOT Act; and

(h) promptly, from time to time, such other information regarding the operations, business affairs and financial condition of the Borrower or any Subsidiary, or compliance with the terms of any Loan Document, as the Administrative Agent or any Lender may reasonably request.

Section 5.05. Litigation and Other Notices .  Furnish to the Administrative Agent and each Lender prompt written notice of the following:

(a) any Event of Default or Default, specifying the nature and extent thereof and the corrective action (if any) taken or proposed to be taken with respect thereto;

(b) the filing or commencement of, or any written threat or notice of intention of any Person to file or commence, any action, suit or proceeding, whether at law or in equity or by or before any Governmental Authority, against the Borrower or any Affiliate thereof that has resulted or could reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect; and

(c) any development that has resulted or could reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect.

Section 5.06. Information Regarding Collateral .  (a) Furnish to the Administrative Agent prompt written notice of any change (i) in the corporate name of any Loan Party, (ii) in the jurisdiction of organization or formation of any Loan Party, (iii) in any Loan Party’s identity or corporate structure or (iv) in any Loan Party’s Federal Taxpayer Identification Number. The Borrower agrees not to effect or permit any change referred to in the preceding sentence unless all filings have been made under the Uniform Commercial Code or otherwise that are required in order for the Collateral Agent to continue at all times following such change to have a valid, legal and perfected security

 

61


interest in all the Collateral. The Borrower also agrees promptly to notify the Administrative Agent if any material portion of the Collateral is damaged or destroyed.

(b) In the case of the Borrower, each year, at the time of delivery of the annual financial statements with respect to the preceding fiscal year pursuant to Section 5.04(a), deliver to the Administrative Agent a certificate of a Financial Officer setting forth the information required pursuant to Section 2 of the Perfection Certificate or confirming that there has been no change in such information since the date of the Perfection Certificate delivered on the Closing Date or the date of the most recent certificate delivered pursuant to this Section 5.06

Section 5.07. Maintaining Records; Access to Properties and Inspections .  Keep proper books of record and account in which full, true and correct entries in conformity with GAAP and all requirements of law are made of all dealings and transactions in relation to its business and activities. Each Loan Party will, and will cause each of its subsidiaries to, permit any representatives designated by the Administrative Agent or any Lender to visit and inspect the financial records and the properties of such Person at such reasonable times as reasonably requested and to make extracts from and copies of such financial records, and permit any representatives designated by the Administrative Agent or any Lender to discuss the affairs, finances and condition of such Person with the officers thereof and independent accountants therefor; provided that, (x) other than during the continuance of an Event of Default, the Administrative Agent and the Lenders, collectively, shall not exercise their rights under this sentence more often than once during any fiscal year and (y) no Lender shall exercise its rights under this sentence without the prior written consent of the Administrative Agent.

Section 5.08. Use of Proceeds .  Use the proceeds of the Loans only for the purposes specified in the introductory statement to this Agreement.

Section 5.09. Employee Benefits .  (a) Comply in all material respects with the provisions of ERISA and the Code applicable to employee benefit plans as defined in Section 3(3) of ERISA and the laws applicable to any Foreign Pension Plan, (b) furnish to the Administrative Agent as soon as possible after, and in any event within ten days after any responsible officer of the Borrower or any ERISA Affiliate knows or has reason to know that, any ERISA Event has occurred or is reasonably expected to occur that, alone or together with any other ERISA Event that has occurred or is reasonably expected to occur that has resulted or could reasonably be expected to result in liability of the Borrower or any ERISA Affiliate in an aggregate amount exceeding $5,000,000, a statement of a Financial Officer of the Borrower setting forth details as to such ERISA Event and the action, if any, that the Borrower proposes to take with respect thereto and (c) promptly and in any event within 30 days after the filing thereof with the United States Department of Labor, furnish to the Administrative Agent copies of each Schedule SB (Actuarial Information) to the Annual Report (Form 5500 Series) with respect to each Plan.

Section 5.10. Compliance with Environmental Laws .  Except where the failure to do so could not reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect, comply,

 

62


and cause all lessees and any other Person leasing or occupying its properties to comply, with all applicable Environmental Laws; obtain and renew all material environmental permits necessary for its operations and properties; and conduct any remedial action in accordance with Environmental Laws; provided that none of the Borrower or any Subsidiary shall be required to undertake any remedial action to the extent that its obligation to do so is being contested by the Borrower or any Subsidiary in good faith and by proper proceedings, appropriate reserves are being maintained with respect to such circumstances in accordance with GAAP and any such delay or inaction with respect to such remedial action does not violate any Environmental Law.

Section 5.11. Preparation of Environmental Reports .  If a Default caused by reason of a breach of Section 3.17 or Section 5.10 shall have occurred and be continuing for more than 20 days without the Borrower or any Subsidiary commencing activities reasonably likely to cure such Default, at the written request of the Required Lenders through the Administrative Agent, provide to the Lenders within 45 days after such request, at the expense of the Loan Parties, an environmental site assessment report regarding the matters which are the subject of such Default prepared by an environmental consulting firm reasonably acceptable to the Administrative Agent and the estimated cost of any compliance, remedial action or other corrective action in connection with such Default.

Section 5.12. Further Assurances .  (a) Execute any and all further documents, financing statements, agreements and instruments, and take all further action (including filing Uniform Commercial Code and other financing statements, mortgages and deeds of trust) that may be required under applicable law, or that the Required Lenders, the Administrative Agent or the Collateral Agent may reasonably request, in order to effectuate the transactions contemplated by the Loan Documents and in order to grant, preserve, protect and perfect the validity and first priority of the security interests created or intended to be created by the Security Documents.

(b) If, following the Closing Date, any wholly-owned Domestic Subsidiary is acquired or organized (other than any Immaterial Subsidiary), or any Immaterial Subsidiary that is a wholly-owned Domestic Subsidiary ceases to be an Immaterial Subsidiary, the Borrower shall promptly (and in any event within 30 days (or such longer period as the Collateral Agent shall agree) of such event) (i) notify the Collateral Agent thereof, (ii) cause such Subsidiary to become a Loan Party by executing the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement (or a supplement thereto in the form specified therein), (iii) deliver to the Collateral Agent all certificates or other instruments representing Equity Interests of such Subsidiary, together with stock powers or other instruments of transfer with respect thereto endorsed in blank to the extent required by the Security Documents, (iv) cause all documents and instruments, including Uniform Commercial Code financing statements and Mortgages (if required under Section 5.12(c)), required by law or reasonably requested by the Collateral Agent to be filed, registered or recorded to create the Liens intended to be created by the Security Documents and perfect or record such Liens to the extent, and with the priority, required by the Security Documents, to be filed, registered or recorded or delivered to the Collateral Agent for filing, registration or recording, (v) cause each Loan Party to take all other action required by law, under the

 

63


Security Documents or reasonably requested by the Collateral Agent to perfect, register and/or record the Liens granted by it thereunder and (vi) cause to be delivered to the Lenders all such instruments and documents (including legal opinions, title insurance policies (if required under Section 5.12(c)) and lien searches) as the Collateral Agent shall reasonably request to evidence compliance with this Section 5.12(b).

(c) If any fee owned real property located in the United States having a value in excess of $1,000,000 is acquired by any Loan Party after the Closing Date, the Borrower will notify the Collateral Agent thereof, and, if requested by the Collateral Agent or the Required Lenders, the Borrower will, no later than 90 days after such acquisition, cause such assets to be subjected to a Lien securing the Obligations and will take such actions as shall be reasonably requested by the Collateral Agent to grant and perfect such Liens, including the satisfaction of the Real Estate Collateral Requirements, all at the expense of the Borrower.

ARTICLE 6

N EGATIVE C OVENANTS

The Borrower covenants and agrees with each Lender that until the Commitments have been terminated and the principal of and interest on each Loan, all Fees and all other expenses or amounts payable under any Loan Document have been paid in full, unless the Required Lenders shall otherwise consent in writing, the Borrower will not, nor will it cause or permit any of the Restricted Subsidiaries to:

Section 6.01. Indebtedness .  Incur, create, assume or permit to exist any Indebtedness, except:

(a) Indebtedness existing on the date hereof and set forth on Schedule 6.01(a) and any Permitted Refinancing thereof;

(b) Indebtedness created hereunder and under the other Loan Documents;

(c) intercompany Indebtedness of the Borrower and the Subsidiaries to the extent permitted by Section 6.04; provided that any such Indebtedness that is owed by a Loan Party to a Subsidiary that is not a Loan Party is subordinated to the Obligations pursuant to an Affiliate Subordination Agreement;

(d) (i) Indebtedness of the Borrower or any Subsidiary incurred to finance the acquisition, construction or improvement of any fixed or capital assets; provided that (A) such Indebtedness is incurred prior to or within 120 days after such acquisition or the completion of such construction or improvement and (B) the aggregate principal amount of Indebtedness permitted by this Section 6.01(d), when combined with the aggregate principal amount of all Capital Lease Obligations incurred pursuant to Section 6.01(e), shall not exceed $5,000,000 at any time outstanding and (ii) any Permitted Refinancing of any such Indebtedness;

 

64


(e) Capital Lease Obligations in an aggregate principal amount, when combined with the aggregate principal amount of all Indebtedness incurred pursuant to Section 6.01(d), not to exceed $5,000,000 at any time outstanding;

(f) Indebtedness under performance bonds or similar obligations, or with respect to workers’ compensation claims, in each case incurred in the ordinary course of business;

(g) Indebtedness incurred by Foreign Subsidiaries in an aggregate principal amount not exceeding $5,000,000 at any time outstanding;

(h) Indebtedness of any Person that becomes a Subsidiary after the date hereof; provided that (i) such Indebtedness exists at the time such Person becomes a Subsidiary and is not created in contemplation of or in connection with such Person becoming a Subsidiary, (ii) immediately before and after such Person becomes a Subsidiary, no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing and (iii) the aggregate principal amount of Indebtedness permitted by this Section 6.01(h) shall not exceed $2,500,000 at any time outstanding;

(i) if (i) at the time of the incurrence thereof and immediately after giving effect thereto no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing, (ii) immediately after giving effect to the incurrence thereof the Borrower is in compliance with the covenant contained in Section 6.11 and (iii) the proceeds thereof are used for working capital purposes or to finance, in whole or in part, a Permitted Acquisition or other Investment permitted under Section 6.04, other unsecured Indebtedness of the Borrower or the Guarantors that is subordinated to the Obligations on terms reasonably satisfactory to the Administrative Agent in an aggregate principal amount not exceeding $5,000,000 at any time outstanding;

(j) Guarantees in respect of Indebtedness permitted under this Section 6.01; provided that (i) no Loan Party shall Guarantee the Indebtedness of any Person that is not a Loan Party unless such Guarantee is permitted by Section 6.04 and (ii) any such Guarantee permitted under this clause (j) of any Indebtedness that is subordinated to the Obligations shall be expressly subordinated to the Obligations on terms not less favorable to the Lenders than the subordination terms of such other Indebtedness;

(k) Indebtedness in respect of Secured Hedging Agreements incurred in the ordinary course of business and not for speculative purposes;

(l) Indebtedness incurred to finance deferred insurance premiums in the ordinary course of business;

(m) Indebtedness in respect of letters of credit or bankers’ acceptances supporting facility leases in an aggregate principal or face amount not exceeding $7,500,000 at any time outstanding; and

 

65


(n) Indebtedness in respect of overdraft or similar facilities incurred in the ordinary course of business in connection with deposit accounts; provided that such Indebtedness is extinguished promptly following its incurrence.

Section 6.02. Liens .  Create, incur, assume or permit to exist any Lien on any property or assets of the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary (including Equity Interests or other securities of any Person, including any Subsidiary) now owned or hereafter acquired by it or on any income or revenues or rights in respect of any thereof, except:

(a) Liens on property or assets of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries existing on the date hereof and set forth on Schedule 6.02(a); provided that such Liens shall secure only those obligations which they secure on the date hereof and any Permitted Refinancing thereof;

(b) any Lien created under the Loan Documents;

(c) any Lien existing on any property or asset prior to the acquisition thereof by the Borrower or any Subsidiary or existing on any property or assets of any Person that becomes a Subsidiary after the date hereof prior to the time such Person becomes a Subsidiary, as the case may be; provided that (i) such Lien is not created in contemplation of or in connection with such acquisition or such Person becoming a Subsidiary, (ii) such Lien does not apply to any other property or assets of the Borrower or any Subsidiary and (iii) such Lien secures only (x) those obligations which it secures on the date of such acquisition or the date such Person becomes a Subsidiary, as the case may be and (y) any Permitted Refinancing of such obligations;

(d) Liens for Taxes not yet due or which are being contested in compliance with Section 5.03;

(e) carriers’, warehousemen’s, mechanics’, materialmen’s, repairmen’s or other like Liens arising in the ordinary course of business and securing obligations that are not due and payable or which are being contested in compliance with Section 5.03;

(f) pledges and deposits made in the ordinary course of business in compliance with workmen’s compensation, unemployment insurance and other social security laws or regulations;

(g) deposits to secure the performance of bids, trade contracts (other than for Indebtedness), leases (other than Capital Lease Obligations), statutory obligations, surety and appeal bonds, performance bonds and other obligations of a like nature incurred in the ordinary course of business;

(h) zoning restrictions, easements, rights-of-way, restrictions on use of real property and other similar encumbrances incurred in the ordinary course of business which, in the aggregate, are not substantial in amount and do not materially detract from the value of the property subject thereto or interfere with the ordinary conduct of the business of the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries;

 

66


(i) security interests in respect of Indebtedness permitted by Section 6.01(d) and 6.01(e); provided that (i) such security interests are created, and the Indebtedness secured thereby is incurred, within 120 days after such acquisition (or construction), (ii) the Indebtedness secured thereby does not exceed the lesser of the cost or the fair market value of such fixed or capital assets or improvements at the time of such acquisition (or construction) and (iii) such security interests do not apply to any other property or assets of the Borrower or any Subsidiary;

(j) judgment Liens securing judgments not constituting an Event of Default under Section 7.01(i);

(k) Liens on assets of Foreign Subsidiaries; provided that (i) such Liens do not extend to, or encumber, assets that constitute Collateral or the Equity Interests of the Borrower or any of the Restricted Subsidiaries and (ii) such Liens extending to the assets of any Foreign Subsidiary secure only Indebtedness incurred by such Foreign Subsidiary pursuant to Section 6.01(g);

(l) to the extent constituting a Lien, any interest or title of a lessor under any operating lease entered into by the Borrower or any Subsidiary;

(m) Liens securing Indebtedness incurred to finance deferred insurance premiums permitted under Section 6.01(l); provided that such Liens are limited to unearned premiums and dividends or other payments under the applicable insurance policies;

(n) Liens arising in the ordinary course of business by virtue of any statutory, common law or customary contractual provision relating to banker’s liens, rights of set-off or similar rights and remedies as to deposit accounts, securities accounts or other funds maintained with a depository institution or securities intermediaries;

(o) Liens consisting of restricted cash balances not exceeding $5,000,000 at any time to secure merchant credit card processing and similar services in the ordinary course of business;

(p) Liens on cash deposits in respect of rental agreements in the ordinary course of business;

(q) Liens on cash pledged to secure obligations in respect of letters of credit or banker’s acceptances permitted under Section 6.01(m); and

(r) other Liens securing liabilities in an aggregate amount not to exceed $5,000,000 at any time outstanding.

Section 6.03. Sale and Lease-Back Transactions .  Enter into any arrangement, directly or indirectly, with any Person whereby it shall sell or transfer any property, real or personal, used or useful in its business, whether now owned or hereafter acquired, and thereafter rent or lease such property or other property which it intends to use for substantially the same purpose or purposes as the property being sold or transferred

 

67


unless (a) the sale or transfer of such property is permitted by Section 6.06 and (b) any Capital Lease Obligations or Liens arising in connection therewith are permitted by Sections 6.01 and 6.02, as the case may be.

Section 6.04. Investments, Loans and Advances .  Purchase, hold or acquire any Investment in a Person except:

(a) (i) Investments by the Borrower and the Subsidiaries existing on the date hereof in the Equity Interests of the Subsidiaries and (ii) additional Investments by the Borrower and the Subsidiaries in the Equity Interests of the Subsidiaries; provided that (A) any such Investment in the form of Equity Interests held by a Loan Party shall be pledged pursuant to the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement (subject to any limitations applicable to voting stock of a Foreign Subsidiary referred to therein), (B) no part of any such Investment by a Loan Party to a non-Loan Party shall take the form of a contribution of Intellectual Property (other than any contribution or transfer to a Foreign Subsidiary of Intellectual Property that is necessary to, or useful in, the business of such Foreign Subsidiary pursuant to the Management and Services Agreement or the Cost Sharing Agreement) and (C) the aggregate amount of Investments by the Loan Parties in Subsidiaries that are not Loan Parties (determined without regard to any write-downs or write-offs of such Investments) shall not exceed $50,000,000;

(b) Permitted Investments;

(c) loans or advances made by the Borrower to any Subsidiary and made by the Borrower or any Subsidiary to the Borrower or any other Subsidiary; provided that (i) any such loans and advances made by a Loan Party shall be evidenced by a promissory note pledged to the Collateral Agent for the ratable benefit of the Secured Parties pursuant to the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement, (ii) such loans and advances shall be unsecured and, to the extent owed by a Loan Party to a Person that is not a Loan Party, subordinated to the Obligations pursuant to an Affiliate Subordination Agreement and (iii) the amount of such loans and advances made by Loan Parties to Subsidiaries that are not Loan Parties shall be subject to the limitation set forth in clause (a) above;

(d) Investments received in connection with the bankruptcy or reorganization of, or settlement of delinquent accounts and disputes with, customers and suppliers, in each case in the ordinary course of business;

(e) the Borrower and the Subsidiaries may make loans and advances in the ordinary course of business in accordance with their usual practice to their respective employees so long as the aggregate principal amount thereof at any time outstanding (determined without regard to any write-downs or write-offs of such loans and advances) shall not exceed $2,500,000;

(f) the Borrower and the Subsidiaries may enter into Secured Hedging Agreements that are entered into the ordinary course of business and not for speculative purposes;

 

68


(g) the Borrower or any Subsidiary may acquire all or substantially all the assets of a Person or line of business of such Person or not less than 100% of the Equity Interests of a Person whether by merger or otherwise (referred to herein as the “ Acquired Entity ”); provided that (i) such acquisition was not preceded by an unsolicited tender offer for such Equity Interests by, or proxy contest initiated by, the Borrower or any Subsidiary; (ii) the Acquired Entity shall be in a similar or ancillary line of business as that of the Borrower and the Subsidiaries as conducted during the current and most recent calendar year, (iii) at the time of such transaction (A) both before and after giving effect thereto, no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing, (B) after giving effect to such acquisition, the Borrower shall be in compliance with the covenant contained in Section 6.11, (C) the Borrower shall have delivered a certificate of a Financial Officer, certifying as to the foregoing, in form and substance satisfactory to the Administrative Agent and (D) the Borrower shall comply, and shall cause the Acquired Entity to comply, with the applicable provisions of Section 5.12 and the Security Documents and (iv) the aggregate amount of consideration expended to acquire Acquired Entities that do not become Loan Parties shall not exceed $5,000,000 in the aggregate (any acquisition of an Acquired Entity meeting all the criteria of this Section 6.04(g) being referred to herein as a “ Permitted Acquisition ”);

(h) Investments constituting non-cash consideration received by the Borrower or any Subsidiary in respect of any Dispositions permitted under Section 6.06;

(i) Investments to the extent that payment for such Investments is made solely with Qualified Capital Stock of the Borrower in a transaction permitted under Section 6.05; and

(j) in addition to Investments permitted by paragraphs (a) through (i) above, additional Investments by the Borrower and the Subsidiaries so long as the aggregate amount invested, loaned or advanced pursuant to this paragraph (j) (determined without regard to any write-downs or write-offs of such Investments) does not exceed $5,000,000 in the aggregate.

Section 6.05. Mergers and Consolidations .  Merge into or consolidate with any other Person, or permit any other Person to merge into or consolidate with it, or sell, transfer, lease or otherwise dispose of (in one transaction or in a series of transactions) all or substantially all the assets of the Borrower, except that (i) if at the time thereof and immediately after giving effect thereto no Event of Default or Default shall have occurred and be continuing (x) any Subsidiary may merge into the Borrower in a transaction in which the Borrower is the surviving corporation, and (y) any Subsidiary may merge into or consolidate with any other Subsidiary ( provided that if any party to any such transaction is (1) a Wholly Owned Subsidiary, the surviving entity of such transaction shall be a Wholly Owned Subsidiary, and (2) a Loan Party, the surviving entity of such transaction shall be a Loan Party; provided , further, that if any such transaction also involves a Subsidiary that is not a Wholly Owned Subsidiary, such transaction must also be permitted under Section 6.04) and (ii) the Borrower and the Subsidiaries may make Permitted Acquisitions and Dispositions permitted under Section 6.06.

 

69


Section 6.06. Dispositions .  Dispose of any property or assets, other than:

(a) Dispositions of worn-out, obsolete or surplus equipment and property no longer used or useful in the business of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries, in each case in the ordinary course of business;

(b) Dispositions of inventory in the ordinary course of business;

(c) Dispositions of Permitted Investments;

(d) Dispositions between and among the Borrower and the Subsidiaries; provided that if the transferor in such a transaction is a Loan Party, then either (x) the transferee must be a Loan Party or (y) the portion of any such Disposition made for less than fair market value and any non-cash consideration received in exchange for such Disposition shall in each case constitute an Investment in such Subsidiary and must be otherwise permitted hereunder;

(e) Dispositions constituting leases or subleases of any real property or personal property in the ordinary course of business;

(f) Dispositions constituting non-exclusive licenses of intellectual property in the ordinary course of business which do not materially interfere with the business of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries;

(g) Dispositions resulting from any casualty, taking or condemnation of any property of the Borrower or any Subsidiary; and

(h) Dispositions not otherwise permitted hereunder; provided that (i) at the time of such Disposition, no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing or would result from such Disposition, (ii) not less than seventy-five percent (75%) of the aggregate sale price from such disposition shall be paid in cash, (iii) the aggregate Net Cash Proceeds of all Dispositions pursuant to this paragraph (h) shall not exceed $5,000,000 in any fiscal year and (iv) all such Dispositions shall be for at least the fair market value of the assets or property subject to such Disposition.

Section 6.07. Restricted Payments; Restrictive Agreements .  (a) Declare or make, or agree to declare or make, directly or indirectly, any Restricted Payment, or incur any obligation (contingent or otherwise) to do so; except:

(i) any Subsidiary may declare and pay dividends or make other distributions ratably to its equity holders; and

(ii) so long as no Event of Default or Default shall have occurred and be continuing or would result therefrom, the Borrower may repurchase its Equity Interests owned by employees of the Borrower or the Subsidiaries or make payments to employees of the Borrower or the Subsidiaries upon termination of employment in connection with the exercise of stock options, stock appreciation rights or similar equity incentives or equity based incentives pursuant to

 

70


management incentive plans or in connection with the death or disability of such employees in an aggregate amount not to exceed $2,000,000 in any fiscal year.

(b) Enter into, incur or permit to exist any agreement or other arrangement that prohibits, restricts or imposes any condition upon (i) the ability of the Borrower or any Subsidiary to create, incur or permit to exist any Lien upon any of its property or assets, or (ii) the ability of any Subsidiary to pay dividends or other distributions with respect to any of its Equity Interests or to make or repay loans or advances to the Borrower or any other Subsidiary or to Guarantee Indebtedness of the Borrower or any other Subsidiary; provided that (A) the foregoing shall not apply to restrictions and conditions imposed by law or by any Loan Document, (B) the foregoing shall not apply to customary restrictions and conditions contained in agreements relating to the sale of a Subsidiary pending such sale; provided such restrictions and conditions apply only to the Subsidiary that is to be sold and such sale is permitted hereunder, (C) the foregoing shall not apply to restrictions and conditions imposed on any Foreign Subsidiary by the terms of any Indebtedness of such Foreign Subsidiary permitted to be incurred hereunder, (D) clause (i) of the foregoing shall not apply to restrictions or conditions imposed by any agreement relating to secured Indebtedness permitted by this Agreement if such restrictions or conditions apply only to the property or assets securing such Indebtedness and (E) clause (i) of the foregoing shall not apply to customary provisions in leases and other contracts restricting the assignment thereof.

Section 6.08. Transactions with Affiliates .  Sell or transfer any property or assets to, or purchase or acquire any property or assets from, or otherwise engage in any other transactions with, any of its Affiliates, except:

(a) transactions between or among Loan Parties;

(b) any Restricted Payment permitted by Section 6.07; and

(c) transactions permitted under Section 6.04(e), including related security arrangements; and

(d) the Borrower or any Subsidiary may engage in any of the foregoing transactions in the ordinary course of business at prices and on terms and conditions not less favorable to the Borrower or such Subsidiary than could be obtained on an arm’s-length basis from unrelated third parties.

Section 6.09. Business of the Borrower and Subsidiaries .  Engage at any time in any business or business activity other than the business currently conducted by them and business activities reasonably incidental thereto.

Section 6.10. Other Indebtedness and Agreements .  (a) Permit (i) any waiver, supplement, modification, amendment, termination or release of any indenture, instrument or agreement pursuant to which any Material Indebtedness of the Borrower or any of the Subsidiaries is outstanding if the effect of such waiver, supplement, modification, amendment, termination or release would materially increase the obligations of the obligor or confer additional material rights on the holder of such

 

71


Indebtedness in a manner adverse to the Borrower, any of the Subsidiaries or the Lenders or would permit payment thereunder otherwise prohibited by Section 6.10(b) or (ii) any waiver, supplement, modification or amendment of its certificate of incorporation, by-laws, operating, management or partnership agreement or other organizational documents to the extent any such waiver, supplement, modification or amendment would be adverse to the Lenders in any material respect.

(b) (i) Make any distribution, whether in cash, property, securities or a combination thereof, in respect of, or pay, or commit to pay, or directly or indirectly redeem, repurchase, retire or otherwise acquire for consideration, or set apart any sum for the aforesaid purposes, any Indebtedness except (A) the payment of (x) the Indebtedness created hereunder and (y) other Indebtedness permitted under Section 6.01 ( provided that any such payment shall be permitted by any provisions pursuant to which such Indebtedness is subordinated to the Obligations, if applicable), (B) refinancings of Indebtedness permitted by Section 6.01 and (C) the payment of secured Indebtedness that becomes due as a result of the voluntary sale or transfer of the property or assets securing such Indebtedness or (ii) pay in cash any amount in respect of any Indebtedness or preferred Equity Interests that may at the obligor’s option be paid in kind or in other securities.

Section 6.11. Minimum Liquidity .  Permit Liquidity to be less than $30,000,000 as of the last day of any calendar month.

Section 6.12. Fiscal Year .  With respect to the Borrower, change its fiscal year-end to a date other than January 31.

Section 6.13. Certain Equity Securities .  Issue any Equity Interest that is not Qualified Capital Stock.

ARTICLE 7

E VENTS OF D EFAULT

Section 7.01. Events of Default .  In case of the happening of any of the following events (“ Events of Default ”):

(a) any representation or warranty made or deemed made in or in connection with any Loan Document, or any representation, warranty, statement or information contained in any report, certificate, financial statement or other instrument furnished in connection with or pursuant to any Loan Document, shall prove to have been false or misleading in any material respect when so made, deemed made or furnished;

(b) default shall be made in the payment of any principal of any Loan when and as the same shall become due and payable, whether at the due date thereof or at a date fixed for prepayment thereof or by acceleration thereof or otherwise;

(c) default shall be made in the payment of any interest on any Loan or any Fee or any other amount (other than an amount referred to in (b) above) due under any

 

72


Loan Document, when and as the same shall become due and payable, and such default shall continue unremedied for a period of three (3) Business Days;

(d) default shall be made in the due observance or performance by the Borrower or any Subsidiary of any covenant, condition or agreement contained in Section 5.01(a), 5.02, 5.05, 5.08 or 5.09 or in Article 6.

(e) default shall be made in the due observance or performance by the Borrower or any Subsidiary of any covenant, condition or agreement contained in any Loan Document (other than those specified in (b), (c) or (d) above) and such default shall continue unremedied for a period of 30 days after the notice thereof from the Administrative Agent to the Borrower (which notice shall also be given at the request of any Lender);

(f) (i) the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary shall fail to pay any principal or interest due in respect of any Material Indebtedness, when and as the same shall become due and payable, or (ii) any other event or condition occurs that results in any Material Indebtedness becoming due prior to its scheduled maturity or that enables or permits (with or without the giving of notice, the lapse of time or both) the holder or holders of any Material Indebtedness or any trustee or agent on its or their behalf to cause any Material Indebtedness to become due, or to require the prepayment, repurchase, redemption or defeasance thereof, prior to its scheduled maturity; provided that this clause (ii) shall not apply to secured Indebtedness that becomes due as a result of the voluntary sale or transfer of the property or assets securing such Indebtedness;

(g) an involuntary proceeding shall be commenced or an involuntary petition shall be filed in a court of competent jurisdiction seeking (i) relief in respect of the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary, or of a substantial part of the property or assets of the Borrower or a Restricted Subsidiary, under Title 11 of the United States Code, as now constituted or hereafter amended, or any other Federal, state or foreign bankruptcy, insolvency, receivership or similar law, (ii) the appointment of a receiver, trustee, custodian, sequestrator, conservator or similar official for the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary or for a substantial part of the property or assets of the Borrower or a Restricted Subsidiary or (iii) the winding-up or liquidation of the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary; and such proceeding or petition shall continue undismissed for 60 days or an order or decree approving or ordering any of the foregoing shall be entered;

(h) the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary shall (i) voluntarily commence any proceeding or file any petition seeking relief under Title 11 of the United States Code, as now constituted or hereafter amended, or any other Federal, state or foreign bankruptcy, insolvency, receivership or similar law, (ii) consent to the institution of, or fail to contest in a timely and appropriate manner, any proceeding or the filing of any petition described in paragraph (g) above, (iii) apply for or consent to the appointment of a receiver, trustee, custodian, sequestrator, conservator or similar official for the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary or for a substantial part of the property or assets of the Borrower or any Restricted Subsidiary, (iv) file an answer admitting the material allegations of a petition filed against it in any such proceeding, (v) make a general

 

73


assignment for the benefit of creditors, (vi) become unable, admit in writing its inability or fail generally to pay its debts as they become due or (vii) take any action for the purpose of effecting any of the foregoing;

(i) one or more judgments shall be rendered against the Borrower, any Restricted Subsidiary or any combination thereof and the same shall remain undischarged for a period of 30 consecutive days during which execution shall not be effectively stayed, or any action shall be legally taken by a judgment creditor to levy upon assets or properties of the Borrower or any Subsidiary to enforce any such judgment and such judgment either (i) is for the payment of money in an aggregate amount in excess of $5,000,000 or (ii) is for injunctive relief and has resulted or could reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect;

(j) an ERISA Event shall have occurred or is reasonably expected to occur that, in the opinion of the Required Lenders, when taken either alone or together with all other such ERISA Events, has resulted or could reasonably be expected to result in liability of the Borrower, any Subsidiary and their respective ERISA Affiliates in an aggregate amount exceeding $5,000,000;

(k) any Guarantee under the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement for any reason shall cease to be in full force and effect (other than in accordance with its terms), or any Guarantor shall deny in writing that it has any further liability under the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement (other than as a result of the discharge of such Guarantor in accordance with the terms of the Loan Documents);

(l) any security interest purported to be created by any Security Document shall cease to be, or shall be asserted by the Borrower or any other Loan Party not to be, a valid, perfected, first priority (except as otherwise expressly provided in this Agreement or such Security Document) security interest in the securities, assets or properties covered thereby; or

(m) there shall have occurred a Change in Control;

then, and in every such event (other than an event with respect to the Borrower described in paragraph (g) or (h) above), and at any time thereafter during the continuance of such event, the Administrative Agent may, and at the request of the Required Lenders shall, by notice to the Borrower, take either or both of the following actions, at the same or different times: (i) terminate forthwith the Commitments and (ii) declare the Loans then outstanding to be forthwith due and payable in whole or in part, whereupon the principal of the Loans so declared to be due and payable, together with accrued interest thereon and any unpaid accrued Fees and all other liabilities of the Borrower accrued hereunder and under any other Loan Document, shall become forthwith due and payable, without presentment, demand, protest or any other notice of any kind, all of which are hereby expressly waived by the Borrower, anything contained herein or in any other Loan Document to the contrary notwithstanding; and in any event with respect to the Borrower described in paragraph (g) or (h) above, the Commitments shall automatically terminate and the principal of the Loans then outstanding, together

 

74


with accrued interest thereon and any unpaid accrued Fees and all other liabilities of the Borrower accrued hereunder and under any other Loan Document, shall automatically become due and payable, without presentment, demand, protest or any other notice of any kind, all of which are hereby expressly waived by the Borrower, anything contained herein or in any other Loan Document to the contrary notwithstanding.

Section 7.02. Application of Proceeds .  Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, upon the occurrence and during the continuance of an Event of Default, the proceeds of any sale of, or other realization upon, all or any part of the Collateral shall be applied in the order specified in the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement.

ARTICLE 8

T HE A DMINISTRATIVE A GENT AND THE C OLLATERAL A GENT

Section 8.01. Appointment and Authority .  Each Lender hereby irrevocably appoints the Administrative Agent and the Collateral Agent (for purposes of this Article 8, the Administrative Agent and the Collateral Agent are referred to collectively as the “ Agents ”) its agent, and authorizes the Agents to take such actions on its behalf and to exercise such powers as are delegated to such Agent by the terms of the Loan Documents, together with such actions and powers as are reasonably incidental thereto. The provisions of this Article 8 are solely for the benefit of the Agents and the Lenders, and neither the Borrower nor any other Loan Party shall have rights as a third-party beneficiary of any of such provisions. It is understood and agreed that the use of the term “Agent” or “agent” herein or in any other Loan Documents (or any other similar term) with reference to an Agent, is not intended to connote any fiduciary or other implied (or express) obligations arising under agency doctrine of any applicable law. Instead, such term is used as a matter of market custom, and is intended to create or reflect only an administrative relationship between the contracting parties. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the Agents are hereby expressly authorized to (a) execute any and all documents (including releases) with respect to the Collateral and the rights of the Secured Parties with respect thereto, as contemplated by and in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement and the Security Documents and (b) negotiate, enforce or settle any claim, action or proceeding affecting the Lenders in their capacity as such, at the direction of the Required Lenders, which negotiation, enforcement or settlement will be binding upon each Lender.

Section 8.02. Rights as a Lender .  The institution serving as the Administrative Agent and/or the Collateral Agent hereunder shall have the same rights and powers in its capacity as a Lender as any other Lender, and may exercise the same as though it were not an Agent, and such bank and its Affiliates may accept deposits from, lend money to, own securities of, act as the financial advisor or in any other advisory capacity for, and generally engage in any kind of business with the Borrower or any Subsidiary or other Affiliate thereof as if it were not an Agent hereunder.

Section 8.03. Exculpatory Provisions .  Neither Agent shall have any duties or obligations except those expressly set forth in the Loan Documents, and its duties

 

75


hereunder shall be administrative in nature. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, (a) neither Agent shall be subject to any fiduciary or other implied duties, regardless of whether a Default or an Event of Default has occurred and is continuing, (b) neither Agent shall have any duty to take any discretionary action or exercise any discretionary powers, except discretionary rights and powers expressly contemplated hereby that such Agent is instructed in writing to exercise by the Required Lenders (or such other number or percentage of the Lenders as shall be necessary under the circumstances as provided in Section 9.07), provided that no Agent shall be required to take any action that, in its opinion or the opinion of its counsel, may expose such Agent to liability or that is contrary to any Loan Document or applicable law, including for the avoidance of doubt any action that may be in violation of the automatic stay under any Debtor Relief Law or that may effect a forfeiture, modification or termination of property of a Defaulting Lender in violation of any Debtor Relief Law and (c) except as expressly set forth in the Loan Documents, neither Agent shall have any duty to disclose, nor shall it be liable for the failure to disclose, any information relating to the Borrower or any of the Subsidiaries that is communicated to or obtained by the bank serving as Administrative Agent and/or Collateral Agent or any of its Affiliates in any capacity. Neither Agent shall be liable for any action taken or not taken by it with the consent or at the request of the Required Lenders, or such other number or percentage of the Lenders as shall be necessary or as such Agent shall in good faith believe to be necessary under the circumstances as provided in Section 9.07, or in the absence of its own gross negligence or willful misconduct as determined by a court of competent jurisdiction by final and nonappealable judgment. Neither Agent shall be deemed to have knowledge of any Default or Event of Default unless and until written notice thereof is given to such Agent by the Borrower or a Lender, and neither Agent shall be responsible for or have any duty to ascertain or inquire into (i) any statement, warranty or representation made in or in connection with any Loan Document, (ii) the contents of any certificate, report or other document delivered thereunder or in connection therewith, (iii) the performance or observance of any of the covenants, agreements or other terms or conditions set forth in any Loan Document, (iv) the validity, enforceability, effectiveness or genuineness of any Loan Document or any other agreement, instrument or document, or (v) the satisfaction of any condition set forth in Article 4 or elsewhere in any Loan Document, other than to confirm receipt of items expressly required to be delivered to such Agent.

Section 8.04. Reliance by Administrative Agent .  Each Agent shall be entitled to rely upon, and shall not incur any liability for relying upon, any notice, request, certificate, consent, statement, instrument, document or other writing believed by it to be genuine and to have been signed, sent or otherwise authenticated by the proper Person. Each Agent may also rely upon any statement made to it orally or by telephone and believed by it to have been made by the proper Person, and shall not incur any liability for relying thereon. In determining compliance with any condition hereunder to the making of a Loan that by its terms must be fulfilled to the satisfaction of a Lender, the Administrative Agent may presume that such condition is satisfactory to such Lender unless the Administrative Agent shall have received notice to the contrary from such Lender prior to the making of such Loan. Each Agent may consult with legal counsel (who may be counsel for the Borrower), independent accountants and other experts

 

76


selected by it, and shall not be liable for any action taken or not taken by it in accordance with the advice of any such counsel, accountants or experts.

Section 8.05. Delegation of Duties .  Each Agent may perform any and all its duties and exercise its rights and powers by or through any one or more subagents appointed by it. Each Agent and any such subagent may perform any and all its duties and exercise its rights and powers by or through their respective Related Parties. The exculpatory provisions of the preceding paragraphs shall apply to any such subagent and to the Related Parties of each Agent and any such subagent, and shall apply to their respective activities in connection with the syndication of the Credit Facilities as well as activities as Agent. No Agent shall be responsible for the negligence or misconduct of any subagents except to the extent that a court of competent jurisdiction determines in a final and nonappealable judgment that such Agent acted with gross negligence or willful misconduct in the selection of such subagents.

Section 8.06. Resignation of the Administrative Agent.  Subject to the appointment and acceptance of a successor Agent as provided below, either Agent may resign at any time by notifying the Lenders and the Borrower. Upon any such resignation, the Required Lenders shall have the right, in consultation with the Borrower, to appoint a successor. If no successor shall have been so appointed by the Required Lenders and shall have accepted such appointment within 30 days after the retiring Agent gives notice of its resignation, (or such earlier day as shall be agreed by the Required Lenders) (the “ Resignation Effective Date ”), then the retiring Agent may (but shall not be obligated to), on behalf of the Lenders, appoint a successor Agent which shall be a bank with an office in New York, New York, or an Affiliate of any such bank. If no successor Agent has been appointed pursuant to the immediately preceding sentence by the Resignation Effective Date, such Agent’s resignation shall become effective and the Required Lenders shall thereafter perform all the duties of such Agent hereunder and/or under any other Loan Document until such time, if any, as the Required Lenders appoint a successor Administrative Agent and/or Collateral Agent, as the case may be. Upon the acceptance of its appointment as Agent hereunder by a successor, such successor shall succeed to, and become vested with, all the rights, powers, privileges and duties of the retiring Agent, and the retiring Agent shall be discharged from its duties and obligations hereunder. The Administrative Agent Fees payable by the Borrower to a successor Agent shall be the same as those payable to its predecessor unless otherwise agreed between the Borrower and such successor. After an Agent’s resignation hereunder, the provisions of this Article 8 and Section 9.05 shall continue in effect for the benefit of such retiring Agent, its subagents and their respective Related Parties in respect of any actions taken or omitted to be taken by any of them while acting as Agent.

Section 8.07. Non-Reliance on Administrative Agent and Other Lenders .  Each Lender acknowledges that it has, independently and without reliance upon the Agents or any other Lender and based on such documents and information as it has deemed appropriate, made its own credit analysis and decision to enter into this Agreement. Each Lender also acknowledges that it will, independently and without reliance upon the Agents or any other Lender and based on such documents and information as it shall from time to time deem appropriate, continue to make its own decisions in taking or not

 

77


taking action under or based upon this Agreement or any other Loan Document, any related agreement or any document furnished hereunder or thereunder.

Section 8.08. No Other Duties, etc .  Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement or any provision of any other Loan Document, the Arranger is named as such for recognition purposes only, and in its capacity as such shall have no duties, responsibilities or liabilities with respect to this Agreement or any other Loan Document; it being understood and agreed that the Arranger shall be entitled to all indemnification and reimbursement rights in favor of the Agents provided herein and in the other Loan Documents. Without limitation of the foregoing, the Arranger in its capacity as such shall not, by reason of this Agreement or any other Loan Document, have any fiduciary relationship in respect of any Lender, Loan Party or any other Person.

Section 8.09. Agent May File Proofs of Claim .  In case of the pendency of any proceeding under any Debtor Relief Law, each Agent (irrespective of whether the principal of any Loan or Obligation shall then be due and payable as herein expressed or by declaration or otherwise and irrespective of whether the Agent shall have made any demand on the Borrower) shall be entitled and empowered (but not obligated) by intervention in such proceeding or otherwise:

(i) to file and prove a claim for the whole amount of the principal and interest owing and unpaid in respect of the Loans and all other Obligations that are owing and unpaid and to file such other documents as may be necessary or advisable in order to have the claims of the Lenders and each Agent (including any claim for the reasonable compensation, expenses, disbursements and advances of the Lenders and each Agent and their respective agents and counsel and all other amounts due the Lenders and each Agent under Sections 2.05 and 9.05) allowed in such judicial proceeding; and

(ii) to collect and receive any monies or other property payable or deliverable on any such claims and to distribute the same;

and any custodian, receiver, assignee, trustee, liquidator, sequestrator or other similar official in any such judicial proceeding is hereby authorized by each Lender to make such payments to such Agent and, in the event that such Agent shall consent to the making of such payments directly to the Lenders, to pay to such Agent any amount due for the reasonable compensation, expenses, disbursements and advances of such Agent and its agents and counsel, and any other amounts due such Agent under Sections 2.05 and 9.05.

Section 8.10. Collateral and Guarantee Matters .  (a) The Lenders irrevocably authorize the Collateral Agent, at its option and in its sole discretion:

(i) to release any Lien on any property granted to, or held by, the Collateral Agent under any Loan Document (x) on or after the date that the Obligations (other than contingent indemnity and expense reimbursement obligations as to which no claim has been made) have been paid in full and the Commitments have been terminated, (y) with respect to any property that is sold

 

78


or otherwise disposed of or to be sold or otherwise disposed of as part of or in connection with any sale or other disposition permitted under the Loan Documents or (z), if approved, authorized or ratified in writing by the Required Lenders (or such other number of Lenders as shall be required hereunder);

(ii) to subordinate any Lien on any property granted to, or held by, the Collateral Agent under any Loan Document to the holder of any Lien on such property that is permitted by Section 6.02(i); and

(iii) to release any Subsidiary from its obligations under the Loan Documents if such Person ceases to be a Subsidiary as a result of a transaction permitted under the Loan Documents.

(b) Upon request by the Collateral Agent at any time, the Required Lenders will confirm in writing the Collateral Agent’s authority to release or subordinate its interest in particular types or items of property, or to release any Subsidiary from its obligations under the Loan Documents pursuant to this Section 8.10.

(c) Except as otherwise expressly set forth herein or in the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement, no Qualified Counterparty that obtains the benefits of any Guarantee pursuant to the Guarantee and Collateral Agreement or any Collateral by virtue of the provisions hereof or of any Security Document shall have any right to notice of any action or to consent to, direct or object to any action hereunder or under any other Loan Document or otherwise in respect of the Collateral (including the release or impairment of any Collateral) other than in its capacity as a Lender and, in such case, only to the extent expressly provided in the Loan Documents. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Article 8 to the contrary, the Administrative Agent shall not be required to verify the payment of, or that other satisfactory arrangements have been made with respect to, obligations with respect to any Secured Hedging Agreement unless the Administrative Agent has received written notice of such obligations, together with such supporting documentation as the Administrative Agent may request, from the applicable Qualified Counterparty.

(d) The Collateral Agent shall not be responsible for, or have a duty to, ascertain or inquire into any representation or warranty regarding the existence, value or collectability of any Collateral, the existence, priority or perfection of the Collateral Agent’s Lien thereon, or any certificate prepared by any Loan Party in connection therewith, nor shall the Collateral Agent be responsible or liable to the Lenders for any failure to monitor or maintain any portion of the Collateral.

ARTICLE 9

M ISCELLANEOUS

Section 9.01. Notices; Electronic Communications .  Except for notices and other communications expressly permitted to be given by telephone hereunder (and except as provided in this Section 9.01), notices and other communications provided for herein

 

79


shall be in writing and shall be delivered by hand or overnight courier service, mailed by certified or registered mail or sent by fax, as follows:

(a) if to the Borrower, to it at 4400 El Camino Real, Los Altos, CA 94022, Attention of VP Finance & Treasurer (Fax No. 888-418-6762);

(b) if to the Administrative Agent, to Credit Suisse AG, Cayman Islands Branch, Eleven Madison Avenue, 23 rd Floor, New York, NY 10010, Attention of: Loan Operations – Agency Manager, Telephone No. 919-994-6369, Fax No. 212-322-2291, Email: agency.loanops@credit-suisse.com;

(c) if to the Collateral Agent, to Credit Suisse AG, Cayman Islands Branch, Eleven Madison Avenue, EMA-23, New York, NY 10010, Attention of: Loan Operations – Boutique Management, Telephone No. 212-538-3525, Email: Ops-collateral@credit-suisse.com; and

(d) if to a Lender, to it at its address (or fax number) set forth on Schedule 2.01(a) or in the Assignment and Acceptance pursuant to which such Lender shall have become a party hereto.

All notices and other communications given to any party hereto, in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement, shall be deemed to have been given on the date of receipt if delivered by hand or overnight courier service, or sent by fax or on the date five (5) Business Days after dispatch by certified or registered mail if mailed, in each case delivered, sent or mailed (properly addressed) to such party as provided in this Section 9.01, or in accordance with the latest unrevoked direction from such party given in accordance with this Section 9.01. As agreed to among the Borrower, the Administrative Agent and the applicable Lenders from time to time, notices and other communications may also be delivered by e-mail to the e-mail address of a representative of the applicable Person provided from time to time by such Person.

The Borrower hereby agrees, unless directed otherwise by the Administrative Agent or unless the electronic mail address referred to below has not been provided by the Administrative Agent to the Borrower, that it will, and will cause its Subsidiaries to, provide to the Administrative Agent all information, documents and other materials that it is obligated to furnish to the Administrative Agent pursuant to the Loan Documents or to the Lenders under Article 5, including all notices, requests, financial statements, financial and other reports, certificates and other information materials, but excluding any such communication that (i) is or relates to a Borrowing Request or a notice pursuant to Section 2.10, (ii) relates to the payment of any principal or other amount due under this Agreement prior to the scheduled date therefor, (iii) provides notice of any Default or Event of Default under this Agreement or any other Loan Document or (iv) is required to be delivered to satisfy any condition precedent to the effectiveness of this Agreement and/or any Borrowing or other extension of credit hereunder (all such nonexcluded communications being referred to herein collectively as “ Communications ”), by transmitting the Communications in an electronic/soft medium that is properly identified in a format acceptable to the Administrative Agent to an electronic mail address as

 

80


directed by the Administrative Agent. In addition, the Borrower agrees, and agrees to cause its Subsidiaries, to continue to provide the Communications to the Administrative Agent or the Lenders, as the case may be, in the manner specified in the Loan Documents but only to the extent requested by the Administrative Agent.

The Borrower hereby acknowledges that (a) the Administrative Agent will make available to the Lenders materials and/or information provided by, or on behalf of, the Borrower hereunder (collectively, the “ Borrower Materials ”) by posting the Borrower Materials on or through Box, Intralinks or another similar electronic system (the “ Platform ”) and (b) certain of the Lenders may be “ public-side ” Lenders (i.e., Lenders that do not wish to receive material nonpublic information with respect to the Borrower or its securities) (each, a “ Public Lender ”). The Borrower hereby agrees that (i) all Borrower Materials that are to be made available to Public Lenders shall be clearly and conspicuously marked “ PUBLIC ” which, at a minimum, shall mean that the word “ PUBLIC ” shall appear prominently on the first page thereof, (ii) by marking Borrower Materials “ PUBLIC ,” the Borrower shall be deemed to have authorized the Administrative Agent and the Lenders to treat such Borrower Materials as not containing any material nonpublic information with respect to the Borrower or its securities for purposes of United States Federal and state securities laws ( provided that to the extent such Borrower Materials constitute Information, they shall be treated as set forth in Section 9.17), (iii) all Borrower Materials marked “ PUBLIC ” are permitted to be made available through a portion of the Platform designated as “ Public Investor ” and (iv) the Administrative Agent shall be entitled to treat any Borrower Materials that are not marked “ PUBLIC ” as being suitable only for posting on a portion of the Platform not marked as “ Public Investor .” Notwithstanding the foregoing, the following Borrower Materials shall be deemed to be marked “ PUBLIC ,” unless the Borrower notifies the Administrative Agent promptly that any such document contains material nonpublic information: (1) the Loan Documents, (2) any notification of changes in the terms of the Credit Facilities and (3) all information delivered pursuant to Section 5.04 (other than pursuant to clause (d) thereof).

Each Public Lender agrees to cause at least one individual at or on behalf of such Public Lender to at all times have selected the “ Private Side Information ” or similar designation on the content declaration screen of the Platform in order to enable such Public Lender or its delegate, in accordance with such Public Lender’s compliance procedures and applicable law, including United States Federal and state securities laws, to make reference to Communications that are not made available through the “ Public Side Information ” portion of the Platform and that may contain material non-public information with respect to the Borrower or its securities for purposes of United States Federal or state securities laws.

THE PLATFORM IS PROVIDED “ AS IS ” AND “ AS AVAILABLE .” NEITHER THE ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT NOR ANY OF ITS RELATED PARTIES WARRANTS THE ACCURACY OR COMPLETENESS OF THE COMMUNICATIONS OR THE ADEQUACY OF THE PLATFORM AND EACH EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS LIABILITY FOR ERRORS OR OMISSIONS IN THE COMMUNICATIONS. NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR

 

81


STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY RIGHTS OR FREEDOM FROM VIRUSES OR OTHER CODE DEFECTS IS MADE BY THE ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT OR ANY OF ITS RELATED PARTIES IN CONNECTION WITH THE COMMUNICATIONS OR THE PLATFORM. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT OR ANY OF ITS RELATED PARTIES HAVE ANY LIABILITY TO ANY LOAN PARTY, ANY LENDER OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, WHETHER OR NOT BASED ON STRICT LIABILITY AND INCLUDING DIRECT OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSSES OR EXPENSES (WHETHER IN TORT, CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE) ARISING OUT OF ANY LOAN PARTY’S OR THE ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT’S TRANSMISSION OF COMMUNICATIONS THROUGH THE INTERNET, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THE LIABILITY OF ANY SUCH PERSON IS FOUND IN A FINAL RULING BY A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION TO HAVE RESULTED FROM SUCH PERSON’S GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT.

The Administrative Agent agrees that the receipt of the Communications by the Administrative Agent at its electronic mail address set forth above shall constitute effective delivery of the Communications to the Administrative Agent for purposes of the Loan Documents. Each Lender agrees that receipt of notice to it (as provided in the next sentence) specifying that the Communications have been posted to the Platform shall constitute effective delivery of the Communications to such Lender for purposes of the Loan Documents. Each Lender agrees to notify the Administrative Agent in writing (including by electronic communication) from time to time of such Lender’s electronic mail address to which the foregoing notice may be sent by electronic transmission and that the foregoing notice may be sent to such e-mail address. Nothing herein shall prejudice the right of the Administrative Agent or any Lender to give any notice or other communication pursuant to any Loan Document in any other manner specified in such Loan Document.

Section 9.02. Survival of Agreement .  All covenants, agreements, representations and warranties made by the Borrower herein and in the certificates or other instruments prepared or delivered in connection with or pursuant to this Agreement or any other Loan Document shall be considered to have been relied upon by the Lenders and shall survive the making by the Lenders of the Loans, regardless of any investigation made by the Lenders or on their behalf, and shall continue in full force and effect as long as the principal of or any accrued interest on any Loan or any Fee or any other amount payable under this Agreement or any other Loan Document is outstanding and so long as the Commitments have not been terminated. The provisions of Sections 2.13, 2.15, 2.19 and 9.05 shall remain operative and in full force and effect regardless of the expiration of the term of this Agreement, the consummation of the transactions contemplated hereby, the repayment of any of the Loans, the expiration of the Commitments, the invalidity or unenforceability of any term or provision of this Agreement or any other Loan Document or any investigation made by or on behalf of the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent or any Lender.

 

82


Section 9.03. Binding Effect .  Subject to Section 4.02, this Agreement shall become effective when it shall have been executed by the Borrower and the Administrative Agent and when the Administrative Agent shall have received counterparts hereof which, when taken together, bear the signatures of each of the other parties hereto.

Section 9.04. Successors and Assigns.

(a) Successors and Assigns Generally . The provisions of this Agreement shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of the parties hereto and their respective successors and assigns permitted hereby, except that neither the Borrower nor any other Loan Party may assign or otherwise transfer any of its rights or obligations hereunder without the prior written consent of the Administrative Agent and each Lender, and no Lender may assign or otherwise transfer any of its rights or obligations hereunder except (i) to an assignee in accordance with the provisions of Section 9.04(b), (ii) by way of participation in accordance with the provisions of Section 9.04(d) or (iii) by way of pledge or assignment of a security interest subject to the restrictions of Section 9.04(e) (and any other attempted assignment or transfer by any party hereto shall be null and void). Nothing in this Agreement, expressed or implied, shall be construed to confer upon any Person (other than the parties hereto, their respective successors and assigns permitted hereby, Participants to the extent provided in Section 9.04(d) and, to the extent expressly contemplated hereby, the Related Parties of each of the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent and the Lenders) any legal or equitable right, remedy or claim under or by reason of this Agreement.

(b) Assignments by Lenders . Any Lender may at any time assign to one or more assignees (other than as provided in Sections 9.04(b)(v) and 9.04(b)(vi) below) all or a portion of its rights and obligations under this Agreement (including all or a portion of its Commitment and the Loans at the time owing to it); provided that any such assignment shall be subject to the following conditions:

(i) Minimum Amounts .

(A) in the case of an assignment of the entire remaining amount of the assigning Lender’s Commitment and/or the Loans at the time owing to it (in each case with respect to any Class) or contemporaneous assignments to related Approved Funds that equal at least the amount specified in Section 9.04(b)(i)(B) in the aggregate or in the case of an assignment to a Lender, an Affiliate of a Lender or an Approved Fund, no minimum amount need be assigned; and

(B) in any case not described in Section 9.04(b)(i)(A), the aggregate amount of the Commitment (which for this purpose includes Loans outstanding thereunder) or, if the applicable Commitment is not then in effect, the principal outstanding balance of the Loans of the assigning Lender subject to each such assignment (determined as of the date the Assignment and Acceptance with respect to such assignment is

 

83


delivered to the Administrative Agent or, if “Trade Date” is specified in the Assignment and Acceptance, as of the Trade Date) shall not be less than $5,000,000, unless each of the Administrative Agent and, so long as no Event of Default has occurred and is continuing, the Borrower otherwise consents (each such consent not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed).

(ii) Proportionate Amounts . Each partial assignment shall be made as an assignment of a proportionate part of all the assigning Lender’s rights and obligations under this Agreement with respect to the Loan or the Commitment assigned, except that this clause (ii) shall not prohibit any Lender from assigning all or a portion of its rights and obligations among separate Classes on a non-pro rata basis.

(iii) Required Consents . No consent shall be required for any assignment except to the extent required by Section 9.04(b)(i)(B) and, in addition:

(A) the consent of the Borrower shall be required if such assignment is to a Disqualified Lender unless an Event of Default has occurred and is continuing at the time of such assignment; and

(B) the consent of the Administrative Agent (such consent not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed) shall be required unless such assignment is to a Lender with a Commitment in respect of such Class, an Affiliate of such Lender or an Approved Fund with respect to such Lender.

(iv) Assignment and Acceptance . The parties to each assignment shall (A) execute and deliver to the Administrative Agent an Assignment and Acceptance via an electronic settlement system acceptable to the Administrative Agent or (B) if previously agreed with the Administrative Agent, manually execute and deliver to the Administrative Agent an Assignment and Acceptance, in each case, together with a processing and recordation fee of $3,500; provided that the Administrative Agent may, in its sole discretion, elect to waive or reduce such processing and recordation fee in the case of any assignment. For the avoidance of doubt, except as set forth in Section 2.20, the Borrower shall not, in any event, be responsible for payment of any processing or recordation fee incurred in connection with any assignment permitted pursuant to this Section 9.04. The assignee, if it is not a Lender, shall deliver to the Administrative Agent an Administrative Questionnaire (in which the assignee shall designate one or more credit contacts to whom all syndicate level information (which may contain material nonpublic information about the Loan Parties and their Related Parties or their respective securities) will be made available and who may receive such information in accordance with the assignee’s compliance procedures and applicable laws, including Federal and state securities laws) and all applicable tax forms.

 

84


(v) No Assignment to Certain Persons . No such assignment shall be made to (A) the Borrower or any of the Borrower’s Affiliates or Subsidiaries, (B) any Competitor of the Borrower or a Controlled Affiliate of any such Competitor ( provided that any Lender may rely on a representation and warranty from the assignee that it is not a Competitor of the Borrower or a Controlled Affiliate of any such Competitor), or (C) to any Defaulting Lender or any of its Subsidiaries, or any Person who, upon becoming a Lender hereunder, would constitute any of the foregoing Persons described in this clause (C).

(vi) No Assignment to Natural Persons . No such assignment shall be made to a natural Person.

(vii) Certain Additional Payments . In connection with any assignment of rights and obligations of any Defaulting Lender hereunder, no such assignment shall be effective unless and until, in addition to the other conditions thereto set forth herein, the parties to the assignment shall make such additional payments to the Administrative Agent in an aggregate amount sufficient, upon distribution thereof as appropriate (which may be outright payment, purchases by the assignee of participations or subparticipations or other compensating actions, including funding, with the consent of the Borrower and the Administrative Agent, the applicable pro rata share of Loans previously requested but not funded by the Defaulting Lender, to each of which the applicable assignee and assignor hereby irrevocably consent) to (x) pay and satisfy in full all payment liabilities then owed by such Defaulting Lender to the Administrative Agent and each other Lender hereunder (and interest accrued thereon) and (y) acquire (and fund as appropriate) its full pro rata share of all Loans. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event that any assignment of rights and obligations of any Defaulting Lender hereunder shall become effective under applicable law without compliance with the provisions of this paragraph, then the assignee of such interest shall be deemed to be a Defaulting Lender for all purposes of this Agreement until such compliance occurs.

Subject to acceptance and recording thereof by the Administrative Agent pursuant to paragraph (c) of this Section, from and after the effective date specified in each Assignment and Acceptance, the assignee thereunder shall be a party to this Agreement and, to the extent of the interest assigned by such Assignment and Acceptance, have the rights and obligations of a Lender under this Agreement, and the assigning Lender thereunder shall, to the extent of the interest assigned by such Assignment and Acceptance, be released from its obligations under this Agreement (and, in the case of an Assignment and Acceptance covering all of the assigning Lender’s rights and obligations under this Agreement, such Lender shall cease to be a party hereto) but shall continue to be entitled to the benefits of Sections 2.13, 2.15, 2.19 and 9.05, with respect to facts and circumstances occurring prior to the effective date of such assignment as well as to any Fees accrued for its account and not yet paid; provided that except to the extent otherwise expressly agreed by the affected parties, no assignment by a Defaulting Lender will constitute a waiver or release of any claim of any party hereunder arising from that Lender’s having been a Defaulting Lender. Any assignment or transfer by a Lender of

 

85


rights or obligations under this Agreement that does not comply with this paragraph shall be treated for purposes of this Agreement as a sale by such Lender of a participation in such rights and obligations in accordance with Section 9.04(d). The Borrower and each Lender acknowledges and agrees that the Administrative Agent shall not have any responsibility or obligation to determine whether any assignee is an ineligible assignee and the Administrative Agent shall have no liability with respect to any assignment made to an ineligible assignee.

(c) Register . The Administrative Agent, acting solely for this purpose as an agent of the Borrower, shall maintain at one of its offices in The City of New York a copy of each Assignment and Acceptance delivered to it and a register for the recordation of the names and addresses of the Lenders, and the Commitments of, and principal amounts (and stated interest) of the Loans owing to, each Lender pursuant to the terms hereof from time to time (the “ Register ”). The entries in the Register shall be conclusive absent manifest error, and the Borrower, the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent and the Lenders shall treat each Person whose name is recorded in the Register pursuant to the terms hereof as a Lender hereunder for all purposes of this Agreement. The Register shall be available for inspection by the Borrower and any Lender, at any reasonable time and from time to time upon reasonable prior notice.

Upon its receipt of, and consent to, a duly completed Assignment and Acceptance executed by an assigning Lender and an assignee, an Administrative Questionnaire completed in respect of the assignee (unless the assignee shall already be a Lender hereunder), the processing and recordation fee referred to in paragraph (b) above, if applicable, and the written consent of the Administrative Agent and, if required, the Borrower to such assignment and any applicable tax forms, the Administrative Agent shall (i) accept such Assignment and Acceptance and (ii) promptly record the information contained therein in the Register. No assignment shall be effective unless it has been recorded in the Register as provided in this paragraph.

(d) Participations . Any Lender may at any time, without the consent of, or notice to, the Borrower or the Administrative Agent, sell participations to any Person (other than a natural Person, the Borrower or any of the Borrower’s Affiliates or Subsidiaries or any Competitor of the Borrower or a Controlled Affiliate of any such Competitor ( provided that any Lender may rely on a representation and warranty from the participant that it is not a Competitor of the Borrower or a Controlled Affiliate of any such Competitor )) (each, a “ Participant ”) in all or a portion of such Lender’s rights and/or obligations under this Agreement (including all or a portion of its Commitment and/or the Loans owing to it); provided that (i) such Lender’s obligations under this Agreement shall remain unchanged, (ii) such Lender shall remain solely responsible to the other parties hereto for the performance of such obligations and (iii) the Borrower, the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent and the other Lenders shall continue to deal solely and directly with such Lender in connection with such Lender’s rights and obligations under this Agreement. For the avoidance of doubt, each Lender shall be responsible for the indemnity under Section 9.05(c) with respect to any payments made by such Lender to its Participant(s).

 

86


Any agreement or instrument pursuant to which a Lender sells such a participation shall provide that such Lender shall retain the sole right to enforce this Agreement and to approve any amendment, modification or waiver of any provision of this Agreement; provided that such agreement or instrument may provide that such Lender will not, without the consent of the Participant, agree to any amendment, modification or waiver with respect to the following: decreasing any fees payable to such Participant hereunder or the amount of principal of or the rate at which interest is payable on the Loans in which such Participant has an interest, or extending any scheduled principal payment date or date fixed for the payment of interest on the Loans in which such Participant has an interest, increasing or extending the Commitments in which such Participant has an interest or releasing Guarantors (other than in connection with the sale of any Guarantor in a transaction permitted by Section 6.05) or all or substantially all of the Collateral). The Borrower agrees that each Participant shall be entitled to the benefits of Sections 2.13, 2.15 and 2.19 (subject to the requirements and limitations therein, including the requirements under Section 2.19 (it being understood that the documentation required under Section 2.19(f) shall be delivered to the participating Lender)) to the same extent as if it were a Lender and had acquired its interest by assignment pursuant to Section 9.04(b); provided that such Participant (A) agrees to be subject to the provisions of Section 2.20 as if it were an assignee under Section 9.04(b)) and (B) shall not be entitled to receive any greater payment under Sections 2.13, 2.15 or 2.19 with respect to any participation, than its participating Lender would have been entitled to receive, except to the extent such entitlement to receive a greater payment results from a Change in Law that occurs after the Participant acquired the applicable participation. Each Lender that sells a participation agrees, at the Borrower’s request and expense, to use reasonable efforts to cooperate with the Borrower to effectuate the provisions of Section 2.20 with respect to any Participant. To the extent permitted by law, each Participant also shall be entitled to the benefits of Section 9.06 as though it were a Lender; provided that such Participant agrees to be subject to Section 2.17 as though it were a Lender. Each Lender that sells a participation shall, acting solely for this purpose as an agent of the Borrower, maintain a register on which it enters the name and address of each Participant and the principal amounts (and stated interest) of each Participant’s interest in the Loans or other obligations under the Loan Documents (the “ Participant Register ”); provided that no Lender shall have any obligation to disclose all or any portion of the Participant Register (including the identity of any Participant or any information relating to a Participant’s interest in any commitments, loans or its other obligations under any Loan Document) to any Person except to the extent that such disclosure is necessary to establish that such commitment, loan or other obligation is in registered form under Section 5f.103-1(c) of the United States Treasury Regulations. The entries in the Participant Register shall be conclusive absent manifest error, and such Lender shall treat each Person whose name is recorded in the Participant Register as the owner of such participation for all purposes of this Agreement notwithstanding any notice to the contrary. For the avoidance of doubt, the Administrative Agent (in its capacity as Administrative Agent) shall have no responsibility for maintaining a Participant Register.

(e) Certain Pledges . Any Lender may at any time pledge or assign a security interest in all or any portion of its rights under this Agreement to secure obligations of such Lender, including any pledge or assignment to secure obligations to a Federal

 

87


Reserve Bank; provided that no such pledge or assignment shall release such Lender from any of its obligations hereunder or substitute any such pledgee or assignee for such Lender as a party hereto.

Section 9.05. Expenses; Indemnity .  (a) The Borrower agrees to pay all out-of-pocket expenses incurred by the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent and the Arranger (and each of their respective Affiliates) in connection with the syndication of the Credit Facilities and the preparation and administration of this Agreement and the other Loan Documents or in connection with any amendments, modifications or waivers of the provisions hereof or thereof (whether or not the transactions hereby or thereby contemplated shall be consummated) or incurred by the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent, the Arranger (and each of their respective Affiliates) or any Lender in connection with the enforcement or protection of its rights in connection with the Engagement Letter, this Agreement and the other Loan Documents or in connection with the Loans made hereunder, including (i) the reasonable fees, charges and disbursements of Davis Polk & Wardwell LLP, counsel for the Administrative Agent and the Collateral Agent, and any other counsel engaged with the consent of the Borrower (such consent not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed) and (ii) in connection with any such enforcement or protection, the fees, charges and disbursements of one or more additional counsel as a result of one or more actual or perceived conflicts of interests and any special counsel and local counsel in each applicable jurisdiction, for the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent, the Arranger and the Lenders (and each of their respective Affiliates).

(b) The Borrower agrees to indemnify the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent, each Lender and each Related Party of any of the foregoing Persons (each such Person being called an “ Indemnitee ”) against, and to hold each Indemnitee harmless from, any and all losses, claims, damages, liabilities and related expenses, including reasonable consultant or other expert fees, charges and disbursements and the reasonable and documents fees, charges and disbursements of one firm of counsel to all Indemnitees (and one or more additional counsel as a result of one or more actual or perceived conflicts of interest and any special counsel and local counsel in each applicable jurisdiction), incurred by or asserted against any Indemnitee arising out of, in any way connected with, or as a result of (i) the execution or delivery of this Agreement or any other Loan Document or any agreement or instrument contemplated thereby, the performance by the parties thereto of their respective obligations thereunder or the consummation of the Transactions and the other transactions contemplated thereby (including the syndication of the Credit Facilities), (ii) the use of the proceeds of the Loans, (iii) any Environmental Liability related in any way to the Loan Parties, any of their respective subsidiaries or predecessors or any property currently or formerly owned, leased or operated by the Loan Parties or any of their respective subsidiaries or predecessors, including the Mortgaged Properties, or (iv) any claim, litigation, investigation or proceeding relating to any of the foregoing, whether or not any Indemnitee is a party thereto (and regardless of whether such matter is initiated by the Borrower, any other Loan Party or any of their respective Affiliates or any other Person); provided that such indemnity shall not, as to any Indemnitee, be available to the extent that such losses, claims, damages, liabilities or related expenses are determined by a court of competent jurisdiction by final and nonappealable judgment to have resulted from the

 

88


gross negligence or willful misconduct of such Indemnitee. This Section 9.05(b) shall not apply with respect to Taxes other than any Taxes that represent losses, claims, damages, liabilities and related expenses arising from any non-Tax claim.

(c) To the extent that the Borrower fails to pay any amount required to be paid by it to the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent or the Arranger (or any of their respective Affiliates) under paragraph (a) or (b) of this Section 9.05, each Lender severally agrees to pay to the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent or the Arranger (or any of their respective Affiliates), as the case may be, such Lender’s pro rata share (determined as of the time that the applicable unreimbursed expense or indemnity payment is sought) of such unpaid amount; (including any such unpaid amount in respect of a claim asserted by such Lender); provided that the unreimbursed expense or indemnified loss, claim, damage, liability or related expense, as the case may be, was incurred by or asserted against the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent or the Arranger (or any of their respective Affiliates) in its capacity as such. For purposes hereof, a Lender’s “ pro rata share ” shall be determined based upon its share of the sum of the Aggregate Exposure and unused Commitments at the time (in each case, determined as if no Lender were a Defaulting Lender).

(d) To the extent permitted by applicable law, the Borrower shall not assert, and hereby waives, any claim against any Indemnitee, on any theory of liability, for special, indirect, consequential or punitive damages (as opposed to direct or actual damages) arising out of, in connection with, or as a result of, this Agreement or any agreement or instrument contemplated hereby, the Transactions, any Loan or the use of the proceeds thereof.

(e) All amounts due under this Section 9.05 shall be payable on written demand therefor.

Section 9.06. Right of Setoff .  If an Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing, each Lender is hereby authorized at any time and from time to time, except to the extent prohibited by law, to set off and apply any and all deposits (general or special, time or demand, provisional or final) at any time held and other indebtedness at any time owing by such Lender to or for the credit or the account of the Borrower against any and all of the obligations of the Borrower now or hereafter existing under this Agreement and other Loan Documents held by such Lender, irrespective of whether or not such Lender shall have made any demand under this Agreement or such other Loan Document and although such obligations may be unmatured; provided that in the event that any Defaulting Lender shall exercise any such right of setoff, (a) all amounts so set off shall be paid over immediately to the Administrative Agent for further application in accordance with the provisions of Section 2.21 and, pending such payment, shall be segregated by such Defaulting Lender from its other funds and deemed held in trust for the benefit of the Administrative Agent and the Lenders and (b) such Defaulting Lender shall provide promptly to the Administrative Agent a statement describing in reasonable detail the Obligations owing to such Defaulting Lender as to which it exercised such right of setoff. The rights of each Lender under this Section 9.06 are in addition to other rights and remedies (including other rights of setoff) which such Lender may have.

 

89


Section 9.07. Waivers; Amendment .  (a) No failure or delay of the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent or any Lender in exercising any power or right hereunder or under any other Loan Document shall operate as a waiver thereof, nor shall any single or partial exercise of any such right or power, or any abandonment or discontinuance of steps to enforce such a right or power, preclude any other or further exercise thereof or the exercise of any other right or power. The rights and remedies of the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent and the Lenders hereunder and under the other Loan Documents are cumulative and are not exclusive of any rights or remedies that they would otherwise have. No waiver of any provision of this Agreement or any other Loan Document or consent to any departure by the Borrower or any other Loan Party therefrom shall in any event be effective unless the same shall be permitted by paragraph (b) below, and then such waiver or consent shall be effective only in the specific instance and for the purpose for which given. No notice or demand on the Borrower in any case shall entitle the Borrower to any other or further notice or demand in similar or other circumstances.

(b) No Loan Document or provision thereof may be waived, amended or modified except, in the case of this Agreement, by an agreement or agreements in writing entered into by the Borrower and the Required Lenders or, in the case of any other Loan Document, by an agreement or agreements in writing entered into by the parties thereto with the consent of the Required Lenders; provided that, in addition to the approval of the Required Lenders, no such agreement shall:

(i) decrease the principal amount of, or extend the maturity of or any scheduled principal payment date or date for the payment of any interest on any Loan, or waive or excuse any such payment or any part thereof or decrease the rate of interest on any Loan, without the prior written consent of each Lender directly adversely affected thereby; provided , that the Required Lenders may waive payment of any default interest accruing at any time under Section 2.07,

(ii) increase or extend the Commitment or decrease or extend the date for payment of any Fees of any Lender without the prior written consent of such Lender,

(iii) amend or modify the pro rata requirements of Section 2.16, the provisions of Section 9.04(a) relating to an assignment or other transfer by the Borrower or any other Loan Party of any of its rights or obligations hereunder or release all or substantially all of the Guarantors (other than in connection with the sale of such Guarantor in a transaction permitted by Section 6.06) or all or substantially all of the Collateral, without the prior written consent of each Lender,

(iv) change the provisions of any Loan Document in a manner that by its terms adversely affects the rights of Lenders holding Loans or Commitments of one Class differently from the rights of Lenders holding Loans or Commitments of any other Class without the prior written consent of Lenders

 

90


holding a majority in interest of the outstanding Loans and unused Commitments of each adversely affected Class, or

(v) reduce the percentage contained in the definition of the term “ Required Lenders ” or the provision of this Section 9.07 without the prior written consent of each Lender (it being understood that with the consent of the Required Lenders, additional extensions of credit pursuant to this Agreement may be included in the determination of the Required Lenders on substantially the same basis as the Commitments on the date hereof);

provided further that no such agreement shall amend, modify or otherwise affect the rights or duties of the Administrative Agent or the Collateral Agent hereunder or under any other Loan Document without the prior written consent of the Administrative Agent or the Collateral Agent, respectively.

(c) Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Agreement or any other Loan Document, the Administrative Agent and the Borrower may amend any Loan Document (i) to correct administrative errors or omissions, or to effect administrative changes that are not adverse to any Lender, (ii) to make modifications contemplated by Sections 2.22 or 2.23 pursuant to an Additional Credit Extension Amendment or in connection with an Extension, as applicable, (iii) to correct, amend, cure any ambiguity, inconsistency, defect or correct any typographical error or other manifest error in this Agreement or any other Loan Document, (iv) to comply with local law or advice of local counsel in respect of a Security Document or (v) to cause a Security Document to be consistent with this Agreement and other Loan Documents. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein, such amendment shall become effective without any further consent of any other party to such Loan Document.

Section 9.08. Interest Rate Limitation .  Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if at any time the interest rate applicable to any Loan, together with all fees, charges and other amounts which are treated as interest on such Loan under applicable law (collectively, the “ Charges ”), shall exceed the maximum lawful rate (the “ Maximum Rate ”) which may be contracted for, charged, taken, received or reserved by the Lender holding such Loan or participation in accordance with applicable law, the rate of interest payable in respect of such Loan or participation hereunder, together with all Charges payable in respect thereof, shall be limited to the Maximum Rate and, to the extent lawful, the interest and Charges that would have been payable in respect of such Loan or participation but were not payable as a result of the operation of this Section 9.08 shall be cumulated and the interest and Charges payable to such Lender in respect of other Loans or participations or periods shall be increased (but not above the Maximum Rate therefor) until such cumulated amount, together with interest thereon at the Federal Funds Effective Rate to the date of repayment, shall have been received by such Lender.

Section 9.09. Entire Agreement .  This Agreement, the Engagement Letter and the other Loan Documents constitute the entire contract between the parties relative to the subject matter hereof. Unless otherwise specified therein, any other previous agreement among the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof is superseded by this

 

91


Agreement and the other Loan Documents. Nothing in this Agreement or in the other Loan Documents, expressed or implied, is intended to confer upon any Person (other than the parties hereto and thereto, their respective successors and assigns permitted hereunder and, to the extent expressly contemplated hereby, the Related Parties of each of the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent and the Lenders) any rights, remedies, obligations or liabilities under or by reason of this Agreement or the other Loan Documents.

Section 9.10. WAIVER OF JURY TRIAL .  EACH PARTY HERETO HEREBY WAIVES, TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, ANY RIGHT IT MAY HAVE TO A TRIAL BY JURY IN RESPECT OF ANY LITIGATION DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY ARISING OUT OF, UNDER OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT OR ANY OF THE OTHER LOAN DOCUMENTS. EACH PARTY HERETO (A) CERTIFIES THAT NO REPRESENTATIVE, AGENT OR ATTORNEY OF ANY OTHER PARTY HAS REPRESENTED, EXPRESSLY OR OTHERWISE, THAT SUCH OTHER PARTY WOULD NOT, IN THE EVENT OF LITIGATION, SEEK TO ENFORCE THE FOREGOING WAIVER AND (B) ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT AND THE OTHER PARTIES HERETO HAVE BEEN INDUCED TO ENTER INTO THIS AGREEMENT AND THE OTHER LOAN DOCUMENTS, AS APPLICABLE, BY, AMONG OTHER THINGS, THE MUTUAL WAIVERS AND CERTIFICATIONS IN THIS SECTION 9.10.

Section 9.11. Severability .  In the event any one or more of the provisions contained in this Agreement or in any other Loan Document should be held invalid, illegal or unenforceable in any respect, the validity, legality and enforceability of the remaining provisions contained herein and therein shall not in any way be affected or impaired thereby (it being understood that the invalidity of a particular provision in a particular jurisdiction shall not in and of itself affect the validity of such provision in any other jurisdiction). The parties shall endeavor in good-faith negotiations to replace the invalid, illegal or unenforceable provisions with valid provisions the economic effect of which comes as close as possible to that of the invalid, illegal or unenforceable provisions.

Section 9.12. Counterparts .  This Agreement may be executed in counterparts (and by different parties hereto on different counterparts), each of which shall constitute an original but all of which when taken together shall constitute a single contract, and shall become effective as provided in Section 9.03. Delivery of an executed signature page to this Agreement by facsimile transmission or other customary means of electronic transmission (e.g. “ pdf ”) shall be as effective as delivery of a manually signed counterpart of this Agreement.

Section 9.13. Headings .  Article and Section headings and the Table of Contents used herein are for convenience of reference only, are not part of this Agreement and are not to affect the construction of, or to be taken into consideration in interpreting, this Agreement.

 

92


Section 9.14. Applicable Law .  THIS AGREEMENT AND THE OTHER LOAN DOCUMENTS (OTHER THAN AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN OTHER LOAN DOCUMENTS) AND ANY CLAIM, CONTROVERSY OR DISPUTE ARISING UNDER OR RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT OR ANY SUCH OTHER LOAN DOCUMENTS (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY CLAIMS SOUNDING IN CONTRACT LAW OR TORT LAW ARISING OUT OF THE SUBJECT MATTER HEREOF) SHALL BE CONSTRUED IN ACCORDANCE WITH AND GOVERNED BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK.

Section 9.15. Jurisdiction ; Consent to Service of Process .  (a) The Borrower hereby irrevocably and unconditionally agrees that it will not commence any action, litigation or proceeding of any kind or description, whether in law or equity, whether in contract or tort or otherwise, against the Administrative Agent, any Lender or any Related Party of the foregoing in any way relating to this Agreement or any other Loan Document (except as otherwise expressly stated therein) or the transactions relating hereto or thereto, in any forum other than any New York State court or Federal court of the United States of America sitting in the borough of Manhattan in New York City, and any appellate court from any thereof, and each of the parties hereto hereby irrevocably and unconditionally agrees that all claims in respect of any such action or proceeding may be heard and determined in such New York State or, to the extent permitted by law, in such Federal court. Each of the parties hereto agrees that a final judgment in any such action or proceeding shall be conclusive and may be enforced in other jurisdictions by suit on the judgment or in any other manner provided by law. Nothing in this Agreement shall affect any right that the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent or any Lender may otherwise have to bring any action or proceeding relating to this Agreement or the other Loan Documents against the Borrower or its properties in the courts of any jurisdiction.

(b) The Borrower hereby irrevocably and unconditionally waives, to the fullest extent it may legally and effectively do so, any objection which it may now or hereafter have to the laying of venue of any suit, action or proceeding arising out of, or relating to, this Agreement or the other Loan Documents in any New York State or Federal court. Each of the parties hereto hereby irrevocably waives, to the fullest extent permitted by law, the defense of an inconvenient forum to the maintenance of such action or proceeding in any such court.

(c) Each party to this Agreement irrevocably consents to service of process in the manner provided for notices in Section 9.01. Nothing in this Agreement will affect the right of any party to this Agreement to serve process in any other manner permitted by law.

Section 9.16. Electronic Execution of Assignments .  The words “ execution ,” “ signed ,” “ signature ,” and words of like import in any Assignment and Acceptance shall be deemed to include electronic signatures or the keeping of records in electronic form, each of which shall be of the same legal effect, validity or enforceability as a manually executed signature or the use of a paper-based recordkeeping system, as the case may be, to the extent and as provided for in any applicable law, including the Federal Electronic

 

93


Signatures in Global and National Commerce Act, the New York State Electronic Signatures and Records Act, or any other similar state laws based on the Uniform Electronic Transactions Act.

Section 9.17. Confidentiality .  Each of the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent and the Lenders agrees to maintain the confidentiality of the Information (as defined below), except that Information may be disclosed (a) to its and its Affiliates’ Related Parties (it being understood that the Persons to whom such disclosure is made will be informed of the confidential nature of such Information and instructed to keep such Information confidential), (b) to the extent requested by any regulatory authority or quasi-regulatory authority (such as the National Association of Insurance Commissioners), (c) to the extent required by applicable laws or regulations or by any subpoena or similar legal process, (d) in connection with the exercise of any remedies hereunder or under the other Loan Documents or any suit, action or proceeding relating to the enforcement of its rights hereunder or thereunder, (e) to any other party hereto and, subject to an agreement containing provisions no less restrictive than this Section 9.17, to (i) any actual or prospective assignee of or Participant in any of its rights or obligations under this Agreement and the other Loan Documents or (ii) any actual or prospective counterparty (or its advisors) to any swap, derivative or other transaction under which payments are to be made by reference to the Borrower or any Subsidiary or any of their respective obligations, this Agreement or payments hereunder, (f) with the consent of the Borrower, (g) to the extent such Information (x) becomes publicly available other than as a result of a breach of this Section 9.17, or (y) becomes available to the Administrative Agent, any Lender or any of their respective Affiliates on a non-confidential basis from a source other than the Borrower or (h) on a confidential basis to (w) any rating agency in connection with rating the Borrower or its Subsidiaries or the Credit Facilities hereunder, (x) the CUSIP Service Bureau or any similar agency in connection with the issuance and monitoring of CUSIP numbers with respect to the Credit Facilities, (y) service providers to the Administrative Agent in connection with the administration and management of this Agreement and the Loan Documents and (z) market data collectors and similar service providers to the lending industry. For the purposes of this Section 9.17, “ Information ” shall mean all information received from the Borrower and related to the Borrower or its business, other than any such information that was available to the Administrative Agent, the Collateral Agent or any Lender on a nonconfidential basis prior to its disclosure by the Borrower. Any Person required to maintain the confidentiality of Information as provided in this Section 9.17 shall be considered to have complied with its obligation to do so if such Person has exercised the same degree of care to maintain the confidentiality of such Information as such Person would accord its own confidential information.

Section 9.18. Lender Action .  Each Lender agrees that it shall not take or institute any actions or proceedings, judicial or otherwise, for any right or remedy against any Loan Party or any other obligor under any of the Loan Documents (including the exercise of any right of setoff, rights on account of any banker’s lien or similar claim or other rights of self-help), or institute any actions or proceedings, or otherwise commence any remedial procedures, with respect to any Collateral or any other property of any such Loan Party, unless expressly provided for herein or in any other Loan Document, without

 

94


the prior written consent of the Administrative Agent. The provisions of this Section 9.18 are for the sole benefit of the Lenders and shall not afford any right to, or constitute a defense available to, any Loan Party.

Section 9.19. USA PATRIOT Act Notice .  Each Lender and the Administrative Agent (for itself and not on behalf of any Lender) hereby notifies the Borrower that pursuant to the requirements of the USA PATRIOT Act, it is required to obtain, verify and record information that identifies the Borrower, which information includes the name and address of the Borrower and other information that will allow such Lender or the Administrative Agent, as applicable, to identify the Borrower in accordance with the USA PATRIOT Act.

Section 9.20. No Fiduciary Duty .  Each Agent, each Lender and their respective Affiliates (collectively, solely for purposes of this paragraph, the “ Lenders ”), may have economic interests that conflict with those of the Loan Parties, their stockholders and/or their Affiliates. Each Loan Party agrees that nothing in the Loan Documents or otherwise will be deemed to create an advisory, fiduciary or agency relationship or fiduciary or other implied duty between any Lender, on the one hand, and such Loan Party, its equityholders or its Affiliates, on the other. The Loan Parties acknowledge and agree that (i) the transactions contemplated by the Loan Documents (including the exercise of rights and remedies hereunder and thereunder) are arm’s-length commercial transactions between Lenders, on the one hand, and the Loan Parties, on the other, and (ii) in connection therewith and with the process leading thereto, (x) no Lender has assumed an advisory or fiduciary responsibility in favor of any Loan Party, its equityholders or its Affiliates with respect to the transactions contemplated hereby (or the exercise of rights or remedies with respect thereto) or the process leading thereto (irrespective of whether any Lender has advised, is currently advising or will advise any Loan Party, its equityholders or its Affiliates on other matters) or any other obligation to any Loan Party except the obligations expressly set forth in the Loan Documents and (y) each Lender is acting solely as principal and not as the agent or fiduciary of any Loan Party, its management, equityholders, creditors or any other Person. Each Loan Party acknowledges and agrees that it has consulted its own legal and financial advisors to the extent it deemed appropriate and that it is responsible for making its own independent judgment with respect to such transactions and the process leading thereto. Each Loan Party agrees that it will not claim that any Lender has rendered advisory services of any nature or respect, or owes a fiduciary or similar duty to such Loan Party, in connection with such transaction or the process leading thereto.

 

95


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be duly executed by their respective authorized officers as of the day and year first above written.

 

BOX, INC.
By:  

/s/ Dylan Smith

Name:   Dylan Smith
Title:   CFO
By:  

/s/ Jennifer Ceran

Name:   Jennifer Ceran
Title:   VP Finance & Treasurer

[Signature Page to Credit Agreement]


CREDIT SUISSE AG, CAYMAN ISLANDS BRANCH, individually and as Administrative Agent and Collateral Agent,
By:  

/s/ William O’Daly

Name:   William O’Daly
Title:   Authorized Signatory
By:  

/s/ Philipp Horat

Name:   Philipp Horat
Title:   Authorized Signatory

[Signature Page to Credit Agreement]


JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A.
By:  

/s/ John Kowalczuk

Name:   John Kowalczuk
Title:   Executive Director

[Signature Page to Credit Agreement]


Morgan Stanley Senior Funding, Inc.
By:  

/s/ Sherrese Clarke

Name:   Sherrese Clarke
Title:   Vice President

[Signature Page to Credit Agreement]


BMO Harris Financing, Inc.
By:  

/s/ Elizabeth Armstrong

Name:   Elizabeth Armstrong
Title:   Director

[Signature Page to Credit Agreement]


Schedule 1.01(a)

Disqualified Lenders

Disqualified Lender ” shall mean any Person other than (a) a Lender, (b) an Affiliate of a Lender, (c) an Approved Fund of a Lender and (d) any other Person (other than a natural person) consented to by the Borrower; provided that with respect to any assignment after the first anniversary of the Closing Date, such consent of the Borrower shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed.


Schedule 1.01(b)

Guarantors

None.


Schedule 1.01(c)

Immaterial Subsidiaries

 

    Crocodoc;

 

    Box Intl Holdings Ltd;

 

    Box Intl Technology Ltd;

 

    Box.com (UK) Ltd;

 

    Box France SARL;

 

    Box Deutschland GmbH;

 

    KK Box Japan.


Schedule 2.01(a)

Lenders and Commitments

 

Lender

   Commitment  

Credit Suisse AG, Cayman Islands Branch

   $ 50,000,000   

JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A.

   $ 20,000,000   

Morgan Stanley Senior Funding, Inc.

   $ 20,000,000   

BMO Harris Financing, Inc.

   $ 10,000,000   


Schedule 3.08

Subsidiaries

 

    Crocodoc;

 

    Box Intl Holdings Ltd;

 

    Box Intl Technology Ltd;

 

    Box.com (UK) Ltd;

 

    Box France SARL;

 

    Box Deutschland GmbH;

 

    KK Box Japan.


Schedule 3.18

Insurance

 

Coverage

  

Carrier

   A.M. Best
Rating
   Effective Date   Policy Number  

Limits

  

Deductibles

Property    Berkley/ StarNet Insurance Company    A+, XV    7/1/13-7/1/14   TCP7002778-11  

$ 20,000,000 Blanket Personal Property

$ 3,000,000 Blanket Business Income / Extra Expense

$ 5,000,000 Earthquake Sprinkler Leakage

$ 250,000 Contingent Business Income

$ 500,000 Personal Property Unscheduled Locations

  

$1,000 Property Deductible, EXCEPT

as noted below

24 Hours Business Income Waiting Period

$100K, 24 Hrs Earthquake Sprinkler Leakage

Liability    Berkley/ StarNet Insurance Company    A+, XV    7/1/13-7/1/14   TCP7002778-11  

Commercial General Liability

$ 1,000,000 Each Occurrence

$ 2,000,000 General Aggregate

$ 2,000,000 Products/Completed Operations - Aggregate

$ 1,000,000 Personal and Advertising Injury

$ 1,000,000 Damage to Premise Rented to You

$ 10,000 Medical Payments

Employee Benefits Liability

$ 1,000,000 Each Claim

$ 3,000,000 Aggregate

Contingent Auto Liability

$ 1,000,000 Each Accident (Hired & Non-Owned Autos)

$ 10,000 Medical Payments (Hired Autos)

$ 50,000 Physical Damage (Hired Autos)

Foreign Voluntary Workers Compensation

State of Hire - US Nationals

Country of Permanent Residence - Third Country Nationals

Employers Liability

$ 1,000,000 Bodily Injury by accident - each accident

$ 1,000,000 Bodily injury by disease - each employee

$ 1,000,000 Bodily injury by disease - policy limit

Repatriation Expense

$ 1,000,000 Each Employee

$ 1,000,000 Aggregate

  

 

 

 

 

$ 1,000 Employee Benefits Liability

 

 

$ 1,000 Physical Damage Deductible

Automobile Liability    Berkley/ StarNet Insurance Company    A+, XV    7/1/13-7/1/14   TCP7002778-11  

$ 1,000,000 Liability - Per Accident (Hired &

Non-Owned Autos)

ACV Physical Damage (Hired Autos)

  

$ 100 Comprehensive

 

$ 1,000 Collision


Umbrella   

Berkley/ Berkley

National Ins Co

     A+, XV         7/1/13-7/1/14         TUL7002808-10       $ 20,000,000 Occurrence   
Workers Compensation   

Berkley/ Berkley

National Ins Co

     A+, XV         7/1/13-7/1/14         TWC7002779-12      

Workers Compensation - Statutory Benefits

Employers Liability

$ 1,000,000 Bodily Injury by accident - each accident

$ 1,000,000 Bodily injury by disease - each employee

$ 1,000,000 Bodily injury by disease - policy limit

  
Local UK EL   

WR Berkley

Ins(Europe) LTD

     A+, XV         7/1/13-7/1/14         GIL130G8F073       £ 5,000,000 Limit of Indemnity   


Coverage

  

Carrier

  

A.M. Best
Rating

  

Effective Date

  

Policy Number

  

Limits

  

Deductibles

Errors & Omissions    Zurich American Ins Co    A+, XV    7/1/13-7/1/14    EOC5761260-00   

$ 10,000,000 Aggregate for All Damages, Claim Expenses

and Privacy Event Expenses under all Coverages

Information Technology and Internet Liability

(incl Media Liability)

$ 10,000,000 Each Claim

$ 10,000,000 Aggregate

9/26/2008 Retroactive Date

System Security and Privacy Liability

$ 10,000,000 Each Claim

$ 10,000,000 Aggregate

$ 1,000,000 Each Claim - Regulatory Proceeding

Sublimit

$ 1,000,000 Aggregate - Regulatory Proceeding

Sublimit

9/26/2008 Retroactive

Date Privacy Breach Cost

$ 2,000,000 Each Claim

$ 2,000,000 Aggregate

  

$ 100,000 SIR Each Claim

 

$ 100,000 SIR Each Claim

$ 100,000 SIR Each Claim

(Regulatory Proceeding)

 

 

 

 

 

$ 100,000 Retention

                 
                 
Excess E&O $10mil xs $10mil   

ACE American

Ins Co

   A+, XV    7/1/13-7/1/14    G23671621 001   

$ 10,000,000 Limit of Liability excess over

underlying E&O layer of $10,000,000

  
Excess E&O $10mil xs $20mil    XL / Greenwich Ins Co    A, XV    7/1/13-7/1/14    MTE 0041520   

$ 10,000,000 Limit of Liability excess over

underlying E&O layer of $20,000,000

  
Excess E&O $10mil xs $30mil    AXIS Ins Co    A, XV    7/1/13-7/1/14   

MSN 775222

/01/2013

  

$ 10,000,000 Limit of Liability excess over

underlying E&O layer of $30,000,000

  
Excess E&O $10mil xs $40mil    CNA / Continental Casualty Co    A, XV    7/1/13-7/1/14   

MSN 775222

/01/2013

  

$ 10,000,000 Limit of Liability excess over

underlying E&O layer of $40,000,000

  


Coverage

  

Carrier

   A.M. Best
Rating
   Effective Date    Policy Number   

Limits

  

Deductibles

Fiduciary Liability    Chubb / Federal Ins Co    A++, XV    7/1/13-7/1/14    8224-1170    $ 1,000,000 Aggregate Limit of Liability   
Crime    Chubb / Federal Ins Co    A++, XV    7/1/13-7/1/14    8224-1170   

$ 5,000,000 Employee Theft

$ 2,000,000 Premises

$ 2,000,000 In Transit

$ 2,000,000 Forgery

$ 2,000,000 Computer Fraud

$ 2,000,000 Funds Transfer Fraud

$ 2,000,000 Money Orders and Counterfeit Money

$ 2,000,000 Credit Card Fraud

$ 5,000,000 Client Coverage

$ 100,000 Expense

   $ 5,000 Retention
Employment Practices Liability    HCC    A+, XIV    3/21/13-3/21/14    14-MGU-13

-A28851

   $ 5,000,000 Aggregate Limit of Liability    $ 100,000 Retention
Primary Directors & Officers    HCC    A+, XIV    3/21/13-3/21/14    14-MGU-13

-A28851

   $ 5,000,000 Aggregate Limit of Liability   

$ - Retention (Insuring Agreement A)

Non-indemnifiable Loss

$ 50,000 Retention (Insuring Agreement A)

Indemnifiable Loss

$ 50,000 Retention (Insuring Agreement B)

Excess Directors & Officers

$5mil xs $5mil

   ACE / U.S. Specialty Ins Co    A+, XV    3/21/13-3/21/14    DOX
G26793038
  

$ 5,000,000 Limit of Liability excess over

underlying D&O layers of $5,000,000

  

 

Proprietary Information : Data provided on this page is proprietary between Aon and Box, Inc.

This summary is furnished to you for general informational purposes and is accurate only as of the effective date of your coverage. This document is not an insurance policy and does not amend, alter or extend the coverage afforded by the listed proposed policy(ies);

please consult your policy(ies) for the actual terms, conditions and limits that apply to your coverage. ©Aon Corporation, 2012. All rights Reserved.

The Borrower also subscribes to the following employee benefit plans:

 

    Medical: Kaiser and Anthem

 

    Dental and Vision: Guardian

 

    Life/Disability: Guardian

 

    Business Travel Accident, Medical Benefits Abroad, and International Medical: Cigna


Schedule 3.19(a)

UCC Filing Offices

Secretary of State of the State of Delaware.


Schedule 3.20(a)

Owned Real Property

None.


Schedule 3.20(b)

Leased Real Property

Office Lease by and between Borrower and Behringer Harvard El Camino Real LP for the lease of the premises located at 4440 El Camino Real, Los Altos, California, effective July 1, 2011 (the “ El Camino Lease ”).

Lease Agreement by and between the Borrower and J&R Realty Borrower for the lease of the premises located at 409 Sherman Avenue, Palo Alto, CA 94306, dated June 10, 2008 (the “ Sherman Lease ”). The property leased pursuant to the Sherman Lease is the subject of a Sublease by and between Borrower and Groupon, Inc., dated September 2010.

Lease Agreement by and between the Borrower and El Camino Center for the lease of the premises located at 200-380 Portage Drive, Palo Alto, CA 94306, dated March 31, 2010 (the “ Portage Lease ”). The property leased pursuant to the Portage Lease is the subject of (i) a Sublease by and between Borrower and Cloudera, Inc., as the Subtenant, for the premises located at 220 Portage Avenue, Palo Alto, CA 94306, dated March 12, 2012; and (ii) a Sublease by and between Borrower and Wepay, Inc., as the Subtenant, for the premises located at 380 Portage Avenue, Palo Alto, CA 94306, May 24, 2012.

Office Lease by and between the Borrower and Kilroy Realty, L.P. for the premises located at 100 First Street, 13th Floor, San Francisco, CA, dated May 11, 2012 (the “ First Street Lease ”).

Sublease by and among the Borrower, as the Subtenant, LeMessurier Consultants Inc., as the Tenant, and USREIF Central Plaza Massachusetts, LLC, as the Landlord, for the lease of the premises located at 675 Massachusetts Avenue, Cambridge, MA 02139, dated June 1, 2010, as amended (the “ Massachusetts Lease ”). A portion of the property leased pursuant to the Massachusetts Lease is the subject of a Sublease by and between Borrower and Biff Labs, Inc., dated September 1, 2011.

Lease by and between the Borrower and 4410 Los Altos, LLC for the lease of the premises located at 4410 El Camino Real, Suites 102, 106, 107, 206 & 210, Los Altos, CA, dated August 10, 2011, as amended on September 2, 2011 and October 27, 2011 (the “ Los Altos Lease ”). The property leased pursuant to the Los Altos Lease is the subject of (i) a Sublease by and between Borrower, as Sublessor, and Voyageprive.com for Suite 206 of the premises located at 4410 El Camino Real, Los Altos, CA, dated September 13, 2011, and (ii) a Sublease by and between Borrower, as Sublessor, and WebFilings for Suite 200 of the premises located at 4410 El Camino Real, Los Altos, CA, dated September 30, 2011.


Schedule 6.01(a)

Existing Indebtedness

Irrevocable Standby Letter of Credit, dated June 24, 2011, issued by Wells Fargo Bank, N.A. on behalf of the Borrower in connection with the Office Lease by and between Borrower and Behringer Harvard El Camino Real LP for the lease of the premises located at 4440 El Camino Real, Los Altos, California, effective July 1, 2011.

Irrevocable Standby Letter of Credit, dated May 11, 2012, issued by Wells Fargo Bank, N.A. on behalf of the Borrower in connection with the Office Lease by and between the Borrower and Kilroy Realty, L.P. for the premises located at 100 First Street, 13th Floor, San Francisco, CA, dated May 11, 2012 (the “ First Street LOC ”).

Shares of the Borrower’s Series A Preferred Stock, Series B Preferred Stock, Series C Preferred Stock, Series D Preferred Stock, Series D-1 Preferred Stock, Series D-2 Preferred Stock, and Series E Preferred Stock are redeemable if requested by the holders of not less than sixty-six and two/thirds percent (66-2/3%) of the outstanding shares of Preferred Stock of the Borrower, voting as a single class, at any time after July 20, 2017; provided , however , that if such a request is made, the prior approval of the holders of at least a majority of the outstanding shares of Series E Preferred Stock shall also be required to redeem the shares of Series E Preferred Stock.


Schedule 6.02(a)

Existing Liens

Security Agreement issued by the Borrower to Wells Fargo Bank, N.A., in connection with the First Street LOC referenced in Section 6.01(a) above.


EXHIBIT A

[Form of]

ADMINISTRATIVE QUESTIONNAIRE

Box, Inc.

 

Agent Address:    Credit Suisse AG                          Return form to: William O’Daly
   Eleven Madison Avenue            Telephone: (212) 325-1986
   New York, NY 10010                    Facsimile: (212) 743-2254
      E-mail: william.o’daly@credit-suisse.com

 

It is very important that all of the requested information be completed accurately and that this questionnaire be returned promptly. If your institution is sub-allocating its allocation, please fill out an administrative questionnaire for each legal entity.

Legal Name of Lender to appear in Documentation:

 

 

 

Signature Block Information:  

 

 

•    Signing Credit Agreement

   ¨    Yes    ¨    No   

•    Coming in via Assignment

   ¨    Yes    ¨    No   

Type of Lender:                     

(Bank, Asset Manager, Broker/Dealer, CLO/CDO; Finance Company, Hedge Fund, Insurance, Mutual Fund, Pension Fund, Other Regulated Investment Fund, Special Purpose Vehicle, Other- please specify)

 

Lender Parent:  

 

 

Domestic Address      Eurodollar Address

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

A-1


Contacts/Notification Methods: Borrowings, Paydowns, Interest, Fees, etc.
   Primary Credit Contact       Secondary Credit Contact
Name:   

 

     

 

Company:   

 

     

 

Title:   

 

     

 

Address:   

 

     

 

  

 

     

 

Telephone:   

 

     

 

Facsimile:   

 

     

 

E-Mail Address:   

 

     

 

   Primary Operations Contact       Secondary Operations Contact
Name:   

 

     

 

Company:   

 

     

 

Title:   

 

     

 

Address:   

 

     

 

  

 

     

 

Telephone:   

 

     

 

Facsimile:   

 

     

 

E-Mail Address:   

 

     

 

Lender’s Domestic Wire Instructions
Bank Name:   

 

ABA/Routing No.:   

 

Account Name:   

 

Account No.:   

 

FFC Account Name:   

 

FFC Account No.:   

 

Attention:   

 

Reference:   

 

 

A-2


Lender’s Foreign Wire Instructions
Currency:   

 

Bank Name:   

 

Swift/Routing No.:   

 

Account Name:   

 

Account No.:   

 

FFC Account Name:   

 

FFC Account No.:   

 

Attention:   

 

Reference:   

 

Agent’s Wire Instructions
[The Agent’s wire instructions will be disclosed at the time of closing.]
Bank Name:   

 

ABA/Routing No.:   

 

Account Name:   

 

Account No.:   

 

FFC Account Name:   

 

FFC Account No.:   

 

Attention:   

 

Reference:   

 

 

A-3


Tax Documents

NON-U.S. LENDER INSTITUTIONS:

I. Corporations :

If your institution is incorporated outside of the United States for U.S. federal income tax purposes, and is the beneficial owner of the interest and other income it receives, you must complete one of the following tax forms, as applicable to your institution: a.) Form W-8BEN ( Certificate of Foreign Status of Beneficial Owner ) or b.) Form W-8ECI ( Income Effectively Connected to a U.S. Trade or Business )

A U.S. taxpayer identification number is required for any institution submitting Form W-8ECI. It is also required on Form W-8BEN for certain institutions claiming the benefits of a tax treaty with the U.S. Please refer to the instructions when completing the form applicable to your institution. In addition, please be advised that U.S. tax regulations do not permit the acceptance of faxed forms. An original tax form must be submitted .

II. Flow-Through Entities :

If your institution is organized outside the U.S., and is classified for U.S. federal income tax purposes as either a Partnership, Trust, Qualified or Non-Qualified Intermediary, or other non- U.S. flow-through entity, an original Form W-8IMY ( Certificate of Foreign Intermediary, Foreign Flow-Through Entity, or Certain U.S. Branches for United States Tax Withholding ) must be completed by the intermediary together with a withholding statement. Flow-through entities other than Qualified Intermediaries are required to include tax forms for each of the underlying beneficial owners.

Please refer to the instructions when completing this form. In addition, please be advised that U.S. tax regulations do not permit the acceptance of faxed forms. Original tax form(s) must be submitted .

U.S. LENDER INSTITUTIONS:

If your institution is incorporated or organized within the United States, you must complete and return Form W-9 ( Request for Taxpayer Identification Number and Certification ). Please be advised that we request that you submit an original Form W-9 .

Pursuant to the language contained in the tax section of the Credit Agreement, the applicable tax form for your institution must be completed and returned prior to the first payment of income. Failure to provide the proper tax form when requested may subject your institution to U.S. tax withholding.

 

A-4


EXHIBIT B

[Form of]

AFFILIATE SUBORDINATION AGREEMENT

Section 1. Agreement to Subordinate . [INSERT NAME OF OBLIGOR]’s (the “ Company ”) obligations to [INSERT NAME OF LENDER] (the “ Subordinated Lender ”) under [INSERT NAME OF DOCUMENT] (the “ Subordinated Obligations ”) are subordinated in right of payment, to the extent and in the manner provided in this Affiliate Subordination Agreement (this “ Instrument ”), to the prior payment of all Senior Debt. “ Senior Debt ” means the Obligations (as defined in the Credit Agreement dated as of July [     ], 2013 (as amended, restated, supplemented or otherwise modified from time to time, the “ Credit Agreement ”) among Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, as the borrower, the lenders that are parties thereto from time to time and Credit Suisse AG, as administrative agent for the Lenders and collateral agent for the Secured Parties) and “ Senior Lender ” means the holder from time to time of the Senior Debt. The subordination provisions of this Instrument are for the benefit of and enforceable by the Senior Lender or its designated representatives.

Section 2. Liquidation, Dissolution, Bankruptcy. Upon any payment or distribution of the assets of the Company to creditors upon a total or partial liquidation or a total or partial dissolution of the Company or in a bankruptcy, reorganization, insolvency, receivership or similar proceeding relating to the Company or its property:

(1) the Senior Lender is entitled to receive payment in full in cash of all Senior Debt, including all interest accrued or accruing on the Senior Debt after the commencement of any bankruptcy, insolvency or reorganization or similar case or proceeding at the contract rate (including, without limitation, any contract rate applicable upon default) specified in the Credit Agreement, whether or not the claim for the interest is allowed or allowable as a claim in the case or proceeding with respect to the Senior Debt (only such payment constituting “ payment in full ”) before the Subordinated Lender will be entitled to receive any payment of principal of or interest on the Subordinated Obligations; and

(2) until the Senior Debt is paid in full, any payment or distribution to which the Subordinated Lender would be entitled but for these subordination provisions shall instead be made to the Senior Lender as its interests may appear.

Section 3. Default or Event of Default on Senior Debt . Except with the written consent of, or upon demand by, the Senior Lender, the Company shall not pay any Subordinated Obligations and the Subordinated Lender shall not take or receive from the Company, directly or indirectly, in cash or other property or by set-off or in any other manner, including, without limitation, from or by way of collateral, payment of all or any of the Subordinated Obligations if, at the time, (i) the maturity of some or all of the Senior Debt shall have been accelerated or (ii) any Default or Event of Default (as defined under the Credit Agreement) has occurred or is continuing and (in the case of this clause (ii)) the Senior Lender shall have given notice to the Company prohibiting such payment.

 

B-1


Section 4. When Distribution Must Be Paid Over . If a payment or other distribution is made to the Subordinated Lender that because of these subordination provisions should not have been made to it, the Subordinated Lender shall hold it in trust for the Senior Lender and pay it over to the Senior Lender as its interests may appear.

Section 5. Subrogation . A distribution made under these subordination provisions to the Senior Lender which otherwise would have been made to the Subordinated Lender is not, as between the Company and the Subordinated Lender, a payment by the Company on the Senior Debt. After all Senior Debt is paid in full and until the Subordinated Obligations are paid in full, the Subordinated Lender will be subrogated to the rights of the Senior Lender to receive payments in respect of the Senior Debt.

Section 6. Relative Rights; Subordination Not to Prevent Events of Default or Limit Right to Accelerate . These subordination provisions define the relative rights of the Subordinated Lender and the Senior Lender and do not impair, as between the Company and the Subordinated Lender, the obligation of the Company, which is absolute and unconditional, to pay principal of and interest on the Subordinated Obligations in accordance with their terms; provided that so long as any Default or Event of Default (as defined in the Credit Agreement) has occurred and is continuing, the Subordinated Lender shall not be entitled to, and waives its right to, accelerate the maturity of the Subordinated Obligations upon a Default under this Instrument or exercise any remedies upon a Default under this Instrument. The failure to make a payment on the Subordinated Obligations by reason of these subordination provisions does not prevent the occurrence of a Default under this Instrument.

Section 7. Subordinated Lender Entitled to Rely . For the purpose of ascertaining the outstanding amount of the Senior Debt, the Senior Lender, and all other information relevant to making any payment or distribution to the Senior Lender pursuant hereto, the Subordinated Lender is entitled to rely upon an order or decree of a court of competent jurisdiction in which any proceedings of the nature referred to in Section 2 above are pending, a certificate of the liquidating trustee or other person making a payment or distribution to the Subordinated Lender, or information provided by the Senior Lender or any of the Lenders.

Section 8. Subordination May Not Be Impaired By Company . No right of the Senior Lender to enforce the subordination of the Subordinated Obligations will be impaired by any act or failure to act by the Company or by its failure to comply with the provisions hereunder.

Section 9. Reliance by Senior Lender on Subordination Provisions; No Waiver . (a) The Subordinated Lender acknowledges and agrees that these subordination provisions are, and are intended to be, an inducement and a consideration to the Senior Lender, whether the Senior Debt was created or acquired before or after the incurrence of the Subordinated Obligations, to acquire or to hold the Senior Debt, and the Senior Lender will be deemed conclusively to have relied on these subordination provisions in acquiring and holding such Senior Debt.

 

B-2


(b) The Senior Lender may, at any time and from time to time, without the consent of or notice to the Subordinated Lender, without incurring any liability or responsibility to the Subordinated Lender, and without impairing the rights of the Senior Lender under these subordination provisions, do any of the following:

(1) change the manner, place or terms of payment or extend the time of payment of, or renew or alter, the Senior Debt or any instrument evidencing the same or any agreement under which the Senior Debt is outstanding or secured;

(2) sell, exchange, release or otherwise deal with any property pledged, mortgaged or otherwise securing the Senior Debt;

(3) release any person liable in any manner for the payment of the Senior Debt; or

(4) exercise or refrain from exercising any rights against the Company and any other person.

[Signature Pages Follow]

 

B-3


[OBLIGOR]
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  
[LENDER]
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  

 

B-4


EXHIBIT C

[Form of]

ASSIGNMENT AND ACCEPTANCE

This Assignment and Acceptance (the “ Assignment and Acceptance ”) is dated as of the Effective Date set forth below and is entered into by and between [ Insert name of Assignor ] (the “ Assignor ”) and [ Insert name of Assignee ] (the “ Assignee ”). Capitalized terms used but not defined herein shall have the meanings given to them in the Credit Agreement (defined below), receipt of a copy of which is hereby acknowledged by the Assignee. The Standard Terms and Conditions set forth in Annex 1 attached hereto are hereby agreed to and incorporated herein by reference and made a part of this Assignment and Acceptance as if set forth herein in full.

For an agreed consideration, the Assignor hereby irrevocably sells and assigns to the Assignee, and the Assignee hereby irrevocably purchases and assumes from the Assignor, subject to and in accordance with the Standard Terms and Conditions and the Credit Agreement, as of the Effective Date inserted by the Administrative Agent as contemplated below, (i) all of the Assignor’s rights and obligations in its capacity as a Lender under the Credit Agreement and any other documents or instruments delivered pursuant thereto to the extent related to the amount and percentage interest identified below of all of such outstanding rights and obligations of the Assignor under the respective facilities identified below (including participations in any Letters of Credit included in such facilities) and (ii) to the extent permitted to be assigned under applicable law, all claims, suits, causes of action and any other right of the Assignor (in its capacity as a Lender) against any person, whether known or unknown, arising under or in connection with the Credit Agreement, any other documents or instruments delivered pursuant thereto or the loan transactions governed thereby or in any way based on or related to any of the foregoing, including, but not limited to, contract claims, tort claims, malpractice claims, statutory claims and all other claims at law or in equity related to the rights and obligations sold and assigned pursuant to clause (i) above (the rights and obligations sold and assigned pursuant to clauses (i) and (ii) above being referred to herein collectively as, the “ Assigned Interest ”). The Assignee represents and warrants that the Assignee is not a competitor of Box, Inc. or its subsidiaries or a controlled affiliate of any such competitor (the “ No Competitor Representation ”). Such sale and assignment is without recourse to the Assignor and, except as expressly provided in this Assignment and Acceptance, without representation or warranty by the Assignor.

 

1.    Assignor:   

 

2.    Assignee:   

 

      [and is an Affiliate of [ identify Lender ]]
3.    Borrower:    BOX, INC.
4.    Administrative Agent: Credit Suisse AG, as the administrative agent under the Credit Agreement

 

C-1


5.    Credit Agreement: The Credit Agreement, dated as of [            ], 2013 (as amended, amended and restated, supplemented or otherwise modified from time to time, the “ Credit Agreement ”), among Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, as a borrower, the lenders that are parties thereto and Credit Suisse AG, as administrative agent for the Lenders and collateral agent for the Secured Parties.
6.    Assigned Interest:

 

Facility Assigned

  

Aggregate Amount of

Commitment/Loans for

all Lenders

   Amount of
Commitment/Loans
Assigned
   Percentage Assigned of
Commitment/Loans 1
     CUSIP Number

Revolving Credit Commitment

   $    $      %      

 

 

1   Set forth, to at least 9 decimals, as a percentage of the Commitment/Loans of all Lenders thereunder.

 

C-2


Effective Date:             , 201    [TO BE INSERTED BY ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT AND WHICH SHALL BE THE EFFECTIVE DATE OF RECORDATION OF TRANSFER IN THE REGISTER THEREFOR.]

The terms set forth in this Assignment and Acceptance are hereby agreed to:

 

ASSIGNOR
[NAME OF ASSIGNOR]
By:  

 

Title:  
ASSIGNEE
[NAME OF ASSIGNEE]
By:  

 

Title:  

 

C-3


Consented to and Accepted:
BOX, INC. 2
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  
CREDIT SUISSE AG, CAYMAN ISLANDS
 

BRANCH

as Administrative Agent 3

By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  

 

 

 

2   To be completed to the extent consent is required under Section 9.04(b) or the definition of “Eligible Assignee”.
3   To be completed to the extent consent is required under Section 9.04(b) or the definition of “Eligible Assignee”.

 

C-4


ANNEX 1 to Assignment and Acceptance

BOX, INC.

CREDIT AGREEMENT

STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR

ASSIGNMENT AND ACCEPTANCE

1. Representations and Warranties.

1.1 Assignor . The Assignor (a) represents and warrants that (i) it is the legal and beneficial owner of the Assigned Interest, (ii) the Assigned Interest is free and clear of any lien, encumbrance or other adverse claim and (iii) it has full power and authority, and has taken all action necessary, to execute and deliver this Assignment and Acceptance and to consummate the transactions contemplated hereby, and (b) assumes no responsibility with respect to (i) any statements, warranties or representations made in or in connection with the Credit Agreement or any other Loan Document, (ii) the execution, legality, validity, enforceability, genuineness, sufficiency or value of the Loan Documents or any collateral thereunder, (iii) the financial condition of the Borrower, the Subsidiaries or any of their Affiliates or any other person obligated in respect of any Loan Document or (iv) the performance or observance by the Borrower, the Subsidiaries or any of their Affiliates or any other person of any of their respective obligations under any Loan Document.

1.2. Assignee . The Assignee (a) represents and warrants that (i) it has full power and authority, and has taken all action necessary, to execute and deliver this Assignment and Acceptance and to consummate the transactions contemplated hereby and to become a Lender under the Credit Agreement, (ii) it meets all requirements of an Eligible Assignee under the Credit Agreement (subject to receipt of such consents as may be required under the Credit Agreement), (iii) from and after the Effective Date, it shall be bound by the provisions of the Credit Agreement as a Lender thereunder and, to the extent of the Assigned Interest, shall have the obligations of a Lender thereunder, (iv) it is sophisticated with respect to decisions to acquire assets of the type represented by the Assigned Interest and either it, or the Person exercising discretion in making its decision to acquire the Assigned Interest, is experienced in acquiring assets of such type, (v) it has received a copy of the Credit Agreement, and has received, or has been accorded the opportunity to receive, copies of the most recent financial statements delivered pursuant to Sections 4.02(j) or 5.04 thereof, as applicable, and such other documents and information as it has deemed appropriate to make its own credit analysis and decision to enter into this Assignment and Acceptance and to purchase the Assigned Interest, (vi) it has, independently and without reliance upon the Administrative Agent or any other Lender and based on such documents and information as it has deemed appropriate, made its own credit analysis and decision to enter into this Assignment and Acceptance and to purchase the Assigned Interest, (vii) it has duly completed an Administrative Questionnaire substantially in the form of Exhibit A to the Credit Agreement, unless it is already a Lender under the Credit Agreement, (viii) the Administrative Agent has

 

C-5


received a processing and recordation fee of $3,500 as of the Effective Date (unless such fee has been waived by the Administrative Agent), and (ix) if it is a Foreign Lender, attached to the Assignment and Acceptance is any documentation required to be delivered by it pursuant to Section 2. 19(f) of the Credit Agreement, duly completed and executed by the Assignee; and (b) agrees that (i) it will, independently and without reliance on the Administrative Agent, the Assignor or any other Lender, and based on such documents and information as it shall deem appropriate at the time, continue to make its own credit decisions in taking or not taking action under the Loan Documents and (ii) it will perform in accordance with their terms all of the obligations that by the terms of the Loan Documents are required to be performed by it as a Lender.

2. Payments . From and after the Effective Date, the Administrative Agent shall make all payments in respect of the Assigned Interest (including payments of principal, interest, fees and other amounts) to the Assignor for amounts that have accrued to but excluding the Effective Date and to the Assignee for amounts that have accrued from and after the Effective Date.

3. General Provisions . This Assignment and Acceptance shall be binding upon, and inure to the benefit of, the parties hereto and their respective successors and assigns. This Assignment and Acceptance may be executed in any number of counterparts, which together shall constitute one instrument. Delivery of an executed counterpart of a signature page of this Assignment and Acceptance by telecopy shall be effective as delivery of a manually executed counterpart of this Assignment and Acceptance. This Assignment and Acceptance shall be construed in accordance with and governed by, the law of the State of New York without regard to conflicts of principles of law that would require the application of the laws of another jurisdiction. The Borrower shall be a third party beneficiary of the No Competitor Representation of the Assignee.

 

C-6


EXHIBIT D

[Form of]

BORROWING REQUEST

Credit Suisse AG

      as Administrative Agent for

the Lenders referred to below,

Eleven Madison Avenue

New York, NY 10010

Attention: [                    ]

Re: BOX, INC.

[Date]

Ladies and Gentlemen:

Reference is made to the Credit Agreement, dated as of [            ], 2013 (the “ Credit Agreement ”), among Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, as a borrower, the lenders that are parties thereto and Credit Suisse AG, as administrative agent for the Lenders and collateral agent for the Secured Parties. Capitalized terms used but not defined herein shall have the meanings given to them in the Credit Agreement. The undersigned Borrower hereby gives you notice pursuant to Section 2.03 of the Credit Agreement that it requests a Borrowing under the Credit Agreement, and in that connection sets forth below the terms on which such Borrowing is requested to be made:

 

(A)   

Borrower

   Box, Inc.
(B)   

Class of Borrowing

   Revolving Borrowing
(C)   

Principal amount of Borrowing 1

  

 

(D)   

Date of Borrowing (which is a Business Day)

  

 

(E)   

Type of Borrowing

   [ABR] [Eurodollar]
(F)   

For Eurodollar Borrowing, the Interest Period and the last day thereof

  

 

(G)   

Funds are requested to be disbursed to the undersigned Borrower’s account with [BANK] (Account No.             ).

  

 

 

 

1   Loans requested shall be in an aggregate principal amount that is (i) an integral multiple of $1.0 million and not less than $5.0 million or (ii) equal to the remaining available balance of the applicable Commitments.

 

D-1


The undersigned Borrower hereby certifies that on the proposed Date of Borrowing, both before and after giving effect thereto and to the application of proceeds therefrom, the Borrowing complies with the terms and conditions of the Credit Agreement (including, without limitation, Sections 4.01(b)-(e) of the Credit Agreement).

[Signature Page Follows]

 

D-2


BOX, INC.
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:   [Responsible Officer]
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:   [Responsible Officer]

 

D-3


EXHIBIT E

[Form of]

COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE

Reference is made to the Credit Agreement, dated as of [            ], 2013 (the “ Credit Agreement ”), among Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, as a borrower, the lenders that are parties thereto and Credit Suisse AG, as administrative agent for the Lenders and collateral agent for the Secured Parties. Capitalized terms used but not defined herein shall have the meanings given to them in the Credit Agreement. Pursuant to Section 5.04(c) of the Credit Agreement, [            ], [Financial Officer] of [            ] (in such capacity and not in his or her individual capacity), hereby certifies as follows:

a. No Default or Event of Default has occurred under the Credit Agreement which has not been previously disclosed in writing to the Administrative Agent pursuant to a Compliance Certificate.

b. As of the date of this certificate, the following constitute the Immaterial Subsidiaries: [     ].

 

E-1


Dates this [    ] day of [        ], 201[  ].

 

BOX, INC.
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:   [Financial Officer]

 

E-2


EXHIBIT F

[Form of]

GUARANTEE AND COLLATERAL AGREEMENT

(Under separate cover)

 

F-1


EXHIBIT G

[Form of]

INTEREST ELECTION REQUEST

Credit Suisse AG

      as Administrative Agent for

the Lenders referred to below,

Eleven Madison Avenue

New York, NY 10010

Attention: [                    ]

[Date]

Re: BOX, INC.

Ladies and Gentlemen:

This Interest Election Request is delivered to you pursuant to Section 2.10 of the Credit Agreement, dated as of [             ], 2013 (the “ Credit Agreement ”), among Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, as a borrower, the lenders that are parties thereto and Credit Suisse AG, as administrative agent for the Lenders and collateral agent for the Secured Parties. Capitalized terms used herein but not defined shall have the meanings given to them in the Credit Agreement. The undersigned Borrower hereby requests that on [            ] 1 (the “ Interest Election Date ”),

1. $[        ] of the presently outstanding principal amount of the Revolving Loans originally made on [                    ],

2. all presently being maintained as [ABR Loans][Eurodollar Loans],

3. be [converted into][continued as]

4. [Eurodollar Loans having an Interest Period of [one/two/three/six]months] [ABR Loans].

[Signature Page Follows]

 

 

1   Shall be a Business Day that is (a) the date hereof in the case of a conversion into ABR Borrowing to the extent this Interest Election Request is delivered to the Administrative Agent prior to 12:00 (noon), New York City time on the date hereof, otherwise the Business Day following the date of delivery hereof, and (b) three Business Days following the date hereof in the case of a conversion into/continuation of Eurodollar Borrowings to the extent this Interest Election Request is delivered to the Administrative Agent prior to 12:00 (noon), New York City time on the date hereof, otherwise the fourth Business Day following the date of delivery hereof, in each case.

 

G-1


The undersigned Borrower has caused this Interest Election Request to be executed and delivered by its duly authorized officer as of the date first written above.

 

BOX, INC.
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  

 

G-2


EXHIBIT H

[Form of]

REVOLVING NOTE

 

$            New York, New York
  [Date]

FOR VALUE RECEIVED, the undersigned, BOX, INC., a Delaware corporation (the Borrower ), hereby promises to pay to the order of [        ] (the “ Lender ”) on the Maturity Date (as defined in the Credit Agreement referred to below), in lawful money of the United States and in immediately available funds, the principal amount of the lesser of (a)           DOLLARS ($        ) and (b) the aggregate unpaid principal amount of all Loans of the Lender outstanding under the Credit Agreement referred to below. The Borrower further agrees to pay interest in like money at such office specified in Section 2.18 of the Credit Agreement on the unpaid principal amount hereof from time to time from the date hereof at the rates, and on the dates, specified in Section 2.06 of such Credit Agreement.

The Lender may endorse and attach a schedule to reflect the date, Type and amount of each Loan of the Lender outstanding under the Credit Agreement, the date and amount of each payment or prepayment of principal hereof, and the date of each interest rate conversion or continuation pursuant to Section 2.10 of the Credit Agreement and the principal amount subject thereto; provided that the failure of the Lender to make any such recordation (or any error in such recordation) shall not affect the obligations of the Borrower hereunder or under the Credit Agreement.

This Revolving Note is one of the Notes referred to in the Credit Agreement, dated as of [            ], 2013 (as amended, amended and restated, supplemented or otherwise modified from time to time, the “ Credit Agreement ”), among Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, as a borrower, the lenders party that are parties thereto and Credit Suisse AG, as administrative agent for the Lenders and collateral agent for the Secured Parties, is subject to the provisions thereof and is subject to optional and mandatory prepayment in whole or in part as provided therein. Terms used herein which are defined in the Credit Agreement shall have such defined meanings unless otherwise defined herein or unless the context otherwise requires.

This Revolving Note is secured and guaranteed as provided in the Credit Agreement and the Security Documents. Reference is hereby made to the Credit Agreement and the Security Documents for a description of the properties and assets in which a security interest has been granted, the nature and extent of the security and guarantees, the terms and conditions upon which the security interest and each guarantee was granted and the rights of the holder of this Revolving Note in respect thereof.

During the continuance of any one or more of the Events of Default specified in the Credit Agreement, all amounts then remaining unpaid on this Revolving Note may be declared to be immediately due and payable, all as provided in Section 7.01 thereof.

 

H-1


All parties now and hereafter liable with respect to this Revolving Note, whether maker, principal, surety, guarantor, endorser or otherwise, hereby waive presentment, demand, protest and all other notices of any kind.

THIS REVOLVING NOTE MAY NOT BE TRANSFERRED EXCEPT IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS OF THE CREDIT AGREEMENT. TRANSFERS OF THIS REVOLVING NOTE MUST BE RECORDED IN THE REGISTER MAINTAINED BY THE ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT PURSUANT TO THE TERMS OF THE CREDIT AGREEMENT.

THIS REVOLVING NOTE AND ANY CLAIM, CONTROVERSY OR DISPUTE ARISING UNDER OR RELATED TO THIS REVOLVING NOTE (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY CLAIMS SOUNDING IN CONTRACT LAW OR TORT LAW ARISING OUT OF THE SUBJECT MATTER HEREOF) SHALL BE CONSTRUED IN ACCORDANCE WITH AND GOVERNED BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK.

[Signature Page Follows]

 

H-2


BOX, INC.,

as Borrower

By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  

 

H-3


EXHIBIT I-1

[Form of]

U.S. TAX COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE

(For Foreign Lenders That Are Not Partnerships For U.S. Federal Income Tax Purposes) Reference is hereby made to the Credit Agreement dated as of [    ],          2013 (as amended, supplemented or otherwise modified from time to time, the “ Credit Agreement ”), among Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, as a borrower, the lenders that are parties thereto and Credit Suisse AG, as administrative agent for the Lenders and collateral agent for the Secured Parties.

Pursuant to the provisions of Section 2.19 of the Credit Agreement, the undersigned hereby certifies that (i) it is the sole record and beneficial owner of the Loan(s) (as well as any Note(s) evidencing such Loan(s)) in respect of which it is providing this certificate, (ii) it is not a bank within the meaning of Section 881(c)(3)(A) of the Code, (iii) it is not a ten percent shareholder of the Borrower within the meaning of Section 871(h)(3)(B) of the Code and (iv) it is not a controlled foreign corporation related to the Borrower as described in Section 881(c)(3)(C) of the Code.

The undersigned has furnished the Administrative Agent and the Borrower with a certificate of its non-U.S. Person status on IRS Form W-8BEN. By executing this certificate, the undersigned agrees that (1) if the information provided on this certificate changes, the undersigned shall promptly so inform the Borrower and the Administrative Agent, and (2) the undersigned shall have at all times furnished the Borrower and the Administrative Agent with a properly completed and currently effective certificate in either the calendar year in which each payment is to be made to the undersigned, or in either of the two calendar years preceding such payments.

Unless otherwise defined herein, terms defined in the Credit Agreement and used herein shall have the meanings given to them in the Credit Agreement.

 

I-1-1


[NAME OF LENDER]
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  

Date:              , 201[  ]

 

I-1-2


EXHIBIT I-2

[Form of]

U.S. TAX COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE

(For Foreign Participants That Are Not Partnerships For U.S. Federal Income Tax Purposes)

Reference is hereby made to the Credit Agreement dated as of March 23, 2012 (as amended, supplemented or otherwise modified from time to time, the “ Credit Agreement ”), among Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, as a borrower, the lenders that are parties thereto and Credit Suisse AG, as administrative agent for the Lenders and collateral agent for the Secured Parties.

Pursuant to the provisions of Section 2.19 of the Credit Agreement, the undersigned hereby certifies that (i) it is the sole record and beneficial owner of the participation in respect of which it is providing this certificate, (ii) it is not a bank within the meaning of Section 881(c)(3)(A) of the Code, (iii) it is not a ten percent shareholder of the Borrower within the meaning of Section 871(h)(3)(B) of the Code, and (iv) it is not a controlled foreign corporation related to the Borrower as described in Section 881(c)(3)(C) of the Code.

The undersigned has furnished its participating Lender with a certificate of its non-U.S. Person status on IRS Form W-8BEN. By executing this certificate, the undersigned agrees that (1) if the information provided on this certificate changes, the undersigned shall promptly so inform such Lender in writing, and (2) the undersigned shall have at all times furnished such Lender with a properly completed and currently effective certificate in either the calendar year in which each payment is to be made to the undersigned, or in either of the two calendar years preceding such payments.

Unless otherwise defined herein, terms defined in the Credit Agreement and used herein shall have the meanings given to them in the Credit Agreement.

 

I-2-1


[NAME OF PARTICIPANT]
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  

Date:              , 201[  ]

 

I-2-2


EXHIBIT I-3

[Form of]

U.S. TAX COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE

(For Foreign Participants That Are Partnerships For U.S. Federal Income Tax Purposes)

Reference is hereby made to the Credit Agreement dated as of [            ], 2013 (as amended, supplemented or otherwise modified from time to time, the “ Credit Agreement ”), among Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, as a borrower, the lenders that are parties thereto and Credit Suisse AG, as administrative agent for the Lenders and collateral agent for the Secured Parties.

Pursuant to the provisions of Section 2.19 of the Credit Agreement, the undersigned hereby certifies that (i) it is the sole record owner of the participation in respect of which it is providing this certificate, (ii) its direct or indirect partners/members are the sole beneficial owners of such participation, (iii) with respect such participation, neither the undersigned nor any of its direct or indirect partners/members is a bank extending credit pursuant to a loan agreement entered into in the ordinary course of its trade or business within the meaning of Section 881(c)(3)(A) of the Code, (iv) none of its direct or indirect partners/members is a ten percent shareholder of the Borrower within the meaning of Section 871(h)(3)(B) of the Code and (v) none of its direct or indirect partners/members is a controlled foreign corporation related to the Borrower as described in Section 881(c)(3)(C) of the Code.

The undersigned has furnished its participating Lender with IRS Form W-8IMY accompanied by one of the following forms from each of its partners/members that is claiming the portfolio interest exemption: (i) an IRS Form W-8BEN or (ii) an IRS Form W-8IMY accompanied by an IRS Form W-8BEN from each of such partner’s/member’s beneficial owners that is claiming the portfolio interest exemption. By executing this certificate, the undersigned agrees that (1) if the information provided on this certificate changes, the undersigned shall promptly so inform such Lender and (2) the undersigned shall have at all times furnished such Lender with a properly completed and currently effective certificate in either the calendar year in which each payment is to be made to the undersigned, or in either of the two calendar years preceding such payments.

Unless otherwise defined herein, terms defined in the Credit Agreement and used herein shall have the meanings given to them in the Credit Agreement.

 

I-3-1


[NAME OF PARTICIPANT]
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  

Date:             , 201[  ]

 

I-3-2


EXHIBIT I-4

[Form of]

U.S. TAX COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE

(For Foreign Lenders That Are Partnerships For U.S. Federal Income Tax Purposes)

Reference is hereby made to the Credit Agreement dated as of [            ], 2013 (as amended, supplemented or otherwise modified from time to time, the “ Credit Agreement ”), among Box, Inc., a Delaware corporation, as a borrower, the lenders that are parties thereto and Credit Suisse AG, as administrative agent for the Lenders and collateral agent for the Secured Parties.

Pursuant to the provisions of Section 2.19 of the Credit Agreement, the undersigned hereby certifies that (i) it is the sole record owner of the Loan(s) (as well as any Note(s) evidencing such Loan(s)) in respect of which it is providing this certificate, (ii) its direct or indirect partners/members are the sole beneficial owners of such Loan(s) (as well as any Note(s) evidencing such Loan(s)), (iii) with respect to the extension of credit pursuant to this Credit Agreement or any other Loan Document, neither the undersigned nor any of its direct or indirect partners/members is a bank extending credit pursuant to a loan agreement entered into in the ordinary course of its trade or business within the meaning of Section 881(c)(3)(A) of the Code, (iv) none of its direct or indirect partners/members is a ten percent shareholder of the Borrower within the meaning of Section 871(h)(3)(B) of the Code and (v) none of its direct or indirect partners/members is a controlled foreign corporation related to the Borrower as described in Section 881(c)(3)(C) of the Code.

The undersigned has furnished the Administrative Agent and the Borrower with IRS Form W-8IMY accompanied by one of the following forms from each of its partners/members that is claiming the portfolio interest exemption: (i) an IRS Form W-8BEN or (ii) an IRS Form W-8IMY accompanied by an IRS Form W-8BEN from each of such partner’s/member’s beneficial owners that is claiming the portfolio interest exemption. By executing this certificate, the undersigned agrees that (1) if the information provided on this certificate changes, the undersigned shall promptly so inform the Borrower and the Administrative Agent, and (2) the undersigned shall have at all times furnished the Borrower and the Administrative Agent with a properly completed and currently effective certificate in either the calendar year in which each payment is to be made to the undersigned, or in either of the two calendar years preceding such payments.

Unless otherwise defined herein, terms defined in the Credit Agreement and used herein shall have the meanings given to them in the Credit Agreement.

 

I-4-1


[NAME OF LENDER]
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  

Date:              , 201[  ]

 

I-4-2

Exhibit 10.15

MASTER LICENSE AND SERVICE AGREEMENT

THIS MASTER LICENSE AND SERVICE AGREEMENT (“ Agreement ”) by and between [***] , L.L.C. , a Delaware limited liability company (“Licensor”) and BOX.NET, INC., a Washington corporation (‘Customer”) is entered into as of this 17 th day of March, 2008.

 

  1. SERVICES; TERM; PAYMENT

1.1 General . Customer shall, for the applicable Term (as defined below), license the Space (as defined below) in the Building (as defined below) from Licensor, and pay all amounts under this Agreement in connection therewith, and license and pay for the applicable Services (as defined below) to be provided to Customer pursuant to the terms of this Agreement. Licensor shall provide the applicable Services to Customer, to the extent expressly set forth in any Addendum (as defined below). Order Form (as defined below) or other document executed by Licensor and Customer in connection herewith, subject to and in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement.

Term ” is defined as the term of this Agreement with respect to a particular Service or the Space, as applicable, as set forth in an Addendum, Order Form and/or any other agreement executed by Customer and Licensor in connection with this Agreement. “ Building ” is defined as that certain building at [***] , together with all appurtenances, common areas and parking facilities relating thereto. “ Space ” is defined as the portion, if any, of the Building made available to Customer, as expressly specified in the Addendum or Order Form, or other agreement executed by Licensor and Customer in connection with this Agreement, as applicable, including, without limitation, any applicable cage, cabinet., conduit space and/or innerduct space; Customer accepts the Space “As Is”, “With All Faults”, - without any representations or warranties”. “ Services ” is defined as all services, to the extent expressly set forth in the applicable Addendum, Order Form or other agreement executed by Licensor and Customer in connection with this Agreement, such as colocation services, power. MDF services (e.g., cross-connections), remote hands services, and Any 2 IX Subscriber services. Customer shall not be entitled to contract directly with any utility for Services or otherwise in connection with the Building or this Agreement.

Addendum ” is defined as any Addendum mutually executed by Licensor and Customer in connection with this Agreement. Any Addendum shall be deemed a part of this Agreement and all obligations and liabilities of Customer under this Agreement shall fully apply to all matters set forth in any Addendum. In the event of conflict between the terms of this Agreement and the terms of any Addendum, the terms of the applicable Addendum shall control. “ Order Form ” means any work order form mutually executed by Licensor and Customer in connection with this Agreement. Any Order Form shall be deemed a part of this Agreement, and all obligations and liabilities of Customer under this Agreement shall fully apply to all matters set forth in any Order Form. In the event of conflict between the terms of this Agreement or the terms of any Addendum and an Order Form, the terms of this Agreement and/or the Addendum, as applicable, shall control.

 

[***] Information has been omitted and submitted separately to the Securities and Exchange Commission. Confidential treatment has been requested with respect to the omitted portions.


1.2 Term . Upon the expiration or earlier termination of the Term with respect to a particular Service, Licensor may discontinue such Service. If Customer holds over in the Space (i.e., continues to use or occupy the Space after the expiration or earlier termination of the term of this Agreement with respect to the Space), the same shall be from month-to-month only, and shall not constitute a renewal or an extension, and, in such case, Customer shall pay Licensor monthly License Fees (as defined below) equal to one-hundred ten percent (110%) of the monthly License Fees in effect during the final month of the term of this Agreement for the Space, in addition to all other amounts (including, without limitation, Service Fees) payable by Customer in connection with this Agreement. Nothing contained herein shall be construed as consent by Licensor to any holding over or to any use of the Space or Services after the expiration or earlier termination of the term of this Agreement.

On the expiration or earlier termination of this Agreement, Customer shall remove from the Space and Building all Customer Equipment (as defined below) and shall return the Space to Licensor in the same condition as it was when delivered to Customer, ordinary wear and tear excepted. “ Customer Equipment ” means the equipment placed by or on behalf of Customer in the Space and/or Building (including, without limitation, cabling and wiring and contents belonging to Customer that are placed in any conduit or innerduct that is part of the Space). Without limiting the foregoing, unless otherwise designated by Licensor in its sole absolute discretion, upon the expiration or earlier termination of the term of this Agreement, Customer shall immediately remove all wiring and cabling and shall promptly repair all damage resulting from such removal. If Customer does not remove the Customer Equipment (or any other items) as required by this Agreement. Licensor may, without limiting any other rights or remedies, remove and store the same, at Customer’s expense.

License Fees is defined as the fees for the license of the Space, as identified in the applicable Addendum and/or Order Form and/or other documents executed by Customer and Licensor in connection herewith, as applicable. “Service Fees” is defined as the fees for Services, as identified in the applicable Addendum and/or Order Form and/or other documents executed by Customer and Licensor in connection herewith, as applicable.

1.3 Payment . Customer shall pay all Service Fees, License Fees, and all other monthly recurring amounts in connection with this Agreement, in advance, on the first day of each month, without demand, setoff or deduction. Except to the extent otherwise specified in this Agreement, any amounts payable by Customer that are not monthly recurring amounts, shall be paid by Customer within thirty (30) days after Customer’s receipt of invoice; provided, however, any Non-Recurring Fees set forth in the Addendum(s) attached hereto shall be paid by Customer to Licensor concurrently with Customer’s execution of the applicable Addendum. Under no circumstances shall Customer be entitled to any refund of any Non-Recurring Fees, including, without limitation, in connection with any termination of this Agreement. If Service Fees, License Fees or other amounts payable by Customer are not paid within five (5) business days from when due, a late fee of three percent (3%) of the overdue amount shall be due and payable by Customer. The parties agree that it would he impracticable or extremely difficult to fix Licensor’s actual damages in the event of a late payment. Such charges for late payments are separate and cumulative and are in addition to and shall not

 

2


diminish or represent a substitute for any or all of Licensor’s rights or remedies under any other provision of this Agreement. All payments to Licensor are exclusive of all applicable taxes, fees or levies, now or in the future imposed on the transaction or the delivery of Services, all of which Customer shall pay in full as invoiced by Licensor, provided that Customer will not be responsible for Licensor’s income taxes.

1.4 Security Deposit . If a security deposit is required from Customer pursuant to an agreement mutually executed and delivered by Customer and Licensor (e.g., a mutually executed and delivered Addendum), such deposit shall secure the compliance of Customer with the terms of this Agreement, and shall be in the amount indicated on the applicable Addendum or Order Form or other agreement executed by Licensor and Customer. Such security deposit shall be delivered to Licensor concurrently with Customer’s execution and delivery of this Agreement. Notwithstanding any provision of this Agreement to the contrary, Licensor shall have the right to retain and/or apply that portion of the security deposit necessary to pay for any overdue amounts, damages incurred by Licensor for Customer’s breach of this Agreement or Default or any other damages caused by Customer or any of the Customer Parties (as defined in Section 5 below). Customer shall immediately replenish any security deposit to the extent applied or used by Licensor. Licensor shall not be required to keep the security deposit in trust, segregate it or keep it separate from Licensor’s general funds, but Licensor may commingle the security deposit with its general funds and Customer shall not be entitled to interest on such deposit.

 

  2. SPACE; CUSTOMER EQUIPMENT; CONNECTIONS

2.1 Installation . The layout, contents and weights of the Customer Equipment shall be subject to the prior written consent of Licensor (not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed). Customer shall, at Customer’s sole cost and expense, comply with all of Licensor’s and Licensor’s engineers’ floor load requirements affecting the Space and/or Building (as such requirements may be reasonably modified by Licensor from time to time) and shall, at Customer’s sole cost and expense, comply with all requirements of Licensor and Licensor’s engineers with respect to the floors, ceilings, walls, structure and systems of the Space and/or Building. Customer shall not cause or permit any Hazardous Material (as defined below) to enter or be brought, kept or used in or about the Space and/or Building. “ Hazardous Material ” means any hazardous or toxic material, or other material which is or becomes regulated by any applicable governmental authority.

2.2 Access and Use . Licensor shall have access to the Space in the event of emergency, as may be required by law, to perform repairs or improvements (without obligation to do so) to perform Services, or, upon reasonable prior notice to Customer, to show or inspect the Space. Customer may use the Space only for purposes of maintaining and operating Customer Equipment in a manner reasonably acceptable to Licensor. Customer shall not use the Space for general office use or for any other purpose. Customer shall not interfere with the use or operations of the Building by Licensor, or other customers, occupants, licensees, invitees or designees of Licensor. No improvements or alterations to the Space or Building (including, without limitation, any installation of contents in any conduit and/or innerduct that is part of the Space) shall be performed by Customer unless approved in writing by Licensor (in its sole and absolute discretion), and Customer shall not cause or allow any liens to be imposed upon the Building or any of Licensor’s property.

 

3


Without limiting the foregoing, (a) Customer shall at its sole cost and expense, comply at all times with all laws, rules, regulations, codes and ordinances and matters of record which may be in effect from time to time (including, without limitation, those set forth by the Federal Communications Commission): and (b) Customer shall obtain and maintain at all times, at its sole cost and expense, all necessary or required approvals, permits, certificates and licenses, and Licensor shall have no obligation in connection with the same. Customer shall not use any apparatus, machinery, device or equipment which may cause any substantial or unreasonable noise or vibration. Customer shall not distribute leaflets or other advertising material in the Building. Licensor does not guarantee the security of the Customer Equipment or the Space or Building, and Licensor shall not be liable for any inability, failure or mistake in doing so. Customer shall provide to the Building manager any keys or any other means necessary to access the Space and Customer Equipment during emergencies.

Notwithstanding anything to the contrary set forth in this Agreement except to the extent expressly set forth in an Addendum or Order Form, Customer shall not be entitled (A) to access or use outside of the Space (if any) any conduits, innerducts, shafts, risers, fiber, wiring or cabling; (B) to use or access any portion of the Building outside of the Space (if any); (C) to make connections with any other customer or other party in the Building; (D) to have any conduits, innerducts or connections “stop-off” in any room outside of the Space (if any) or any portion of the Building outside the Space (if any); or (E) to use or consume any power, electricity, water, gas or other utilities or services. Without limiting any other rights and remedies of Licensor, in the event of a material breach of the preceding sentence and Customer’s failure to cure such breach within 3 business days of written notice from Licensor describing such breach. Customer shall be obligated to pay to Licensor without offset or deduction, within ten (10) business days after demand, the Unjust Enrichment Charge. The “ Unjust Enrichment Charge ” means one hundred twenty-five percent (125%) of the amount that Licensor determines, in good faith, that it would charge an unaffiliated third-party customer for the item in question for the period of time during which the use or access, as applicable, occurred. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary set forth in this Agreement, unless and to the extent otherwise agreed to in writing by Licensor (in its sole and absolute discretion). Licensor shall have no obligation to provide any electricity, power, water, gas, other utilities or janitorial (or cleaning) services.

2.3 Cross-connections . If Customer is entitled to cross-connections under this Agreement, then Customer shall follow the procedures and rules set forth in this Agreement, and shall pay Licensor’s standard charges for the cross-connections, as specified and modified by Licensor from time to time. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary set forth herein, Customer shall not have any right to perform cross-connections, except to the extent agreed to in writing between Customer and Licensor (but in any event, subject to the consent of all parties to whom Customer wishes to connect). Except to the extent otherwise designated by Licensor in writing, all cross-connections by Customer shall be via the MUX and/or MDF Rooms then offered by Licensor and no cross-connections shall be performed in any other manner or location, unless otherwise designated by Licensor in writing.

2.4 Relocation . Licensor shall have the right, for legitimate business purposes, to relocate the Customer Equipment and/or Space upon at least twenty (20) days prior written notice to Customer. In connection with any such relocation, Licensor shall use commercially reasonable

 

4


efforts to minimize disruption with Customer’s use of the Services, and Customer shall cooperate in good faith with Licensor to facilitate such relocation. Licensor shall be responsible for the reasonable, out-of-pocket costs paid by Customer to unaffiliated third parties in connection with such relocation. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if such relocation is due to interference of Customer Equipment, Customer shall be responsible for the costs of such relocation.

 

  3. INSURANCE

3.1 Customer Minimum Insurance Levels . Customer shall, at its sole cost and expense, procure and maintain the following insurance during the term of this Agreement: (a) comprehensive general liability insurance in an amount not less than Two Million Dollars ($2,000,000.00) per occurrence and Three Million Dollars (S3.000.000.00) in the annual aggregate for bodily injury arid property damage and personal injury coverage, covering the insuring provisions of this Agreement; and (b) a policy of standard fire, extended coverage and special extended coverage insurance (all risks), in an amount equal to the full replacement value new without deduction for depreciation of all Customer Equipment and other property of Customer in the Building and/or Space. Such insurance shall be with insurers reasonably acceptable to Licensor: shall have commercially reasonable deductibles: shall name Licensor and its lenders, lessors and managers as additional insureds (Licensor and such additional parties shall be referred to herein as the “Additional Insureds”); shall provide that Customer’s insurance is primary and that any insurance carried by Licensor or any other Additional Insured is excess and non-contributing: and shall provide that such insurance cannot be canceled or modified upon less than thirty (30) days prior written notice to Licensor. Prior to any installation of Customer Equipment in the Space (or any other access to the Space) and prior to any expiration date of the insurance policies, Customer will furnish copies of certificates which evidence that Customer has obtained and maintains the insurance coverage required hereunder. Customer shall carry and maintain, at Customer’s sole cost and expense, increased amounts of the insurance required to be carried by Customer pursuant to this Section 3.1 and such other reasonable types of insurance coverage and in such reasonable amounts as may be reasonably required by Licensor from time to time. Customer shall require that its contractors (and any subcontractors) and any other party performing work for Customer, carry and maintain, and provide evidence thereof to Licensor, insurance policies evidencing insurance reasonably acceptable to Licensor, including, without limitation, Builder’s Risk insurance and commercial general liability insurance, in amounts reasonably acceptable to Licensor.

3.2 Waiver of Subrogation . Licensor and Customer hereby waive and shall cause their respective property insurance carriers to waive any and all rights of recovery, claim, action or causes of action against the other and their respective trustees, principals, members, affiliates, beneficiaries, partners, officers, directors, agents, employees and lenders, for any loss or damage that may occur to Licensor or Customer or any party claiming by, through or under Licensor or Customer, as the case may be, with respect to any Customer Equipment or the Space or Building, including ail rights of recovery, claims, actions or causes of action arising out of the negligence of Licensor or the negligence of Customer which loss or damage is (or would have been, had the property insurance required by this Agreement been carried) covered by property insurance.

 

5


  4. NO LEASE OR EASEMENT

This Agreement (including, without limitation, any Addenda and any Order Forms) is a services agreement and does not constitute a lease, sublease or easement of or with respect to real property. Customer acknowledges and agrees that it has been granted only a limited license to use the Space, and to obtain the Services, as applicable, in accordance with this Agreement. Licensor reserves the right to lease and/or license other portions of the Building to other parties for telecommunications purposes, or for any other purposes, including, without limitation, parties that may be direct competitors of Customer, engaging in the same business at the Building as is being engaged in by Customer in the Space or Building. Licensor makes no representations or warranties regarding the makeup of the licensees or other occupants in the Building, or the business to be conducted in the Building by any other party. Licensor shall be free, in its sole and absolute discretion, to enter into leases, licenses and other agreements with respect to the Building and/or Services, with any parties, and on any terms, that Licensor desires. Except with respect to Customer’s right to use the interior of any applicable cabinet or cage constituting the Space under this Agreement (specifically excluding conduits and innerducts, the use of which shall be on a non-exclusive basis, except as may be expressly set forth to the contrary in any applicable Addendum or Order Form executed by Licensor in connection herewith), all rights of Customer, and all Space and Services, shall be on a non-exclusive basis (and Customer expressly acknowledges that Licensor. Licensor’s designees, other customers, licensees and/or third parties may also be using such applicable Space and/or Services, as designated by Licensor from time to time).

 

  5. INDEMNIFICATION

Except to the extent caused by Licensor’s negligence or willful misconduct. Customer shall and does hereby indemnify, defend, protect and hold harmless Licensor and its officers, members, partners, affiliates, representatives, lenders, directors, principals, managers and employees, together with all of their respective successors and assigns (together with Licensor, collectively, the –“ Indemnified Parties ”), from and against any and all claims, judgments, damages, penalties, fines, costs, liabilities, and losses (including, but not limited to, reasonable attorneys’ fees and costs) resulting from any claim, suit, action, or proceeding brought by any third party against any Indemnified Party alleging (a) the infringement or misappropriation of any intellectual property right or other unlawful or illegal wrongdoing by Customer or its customers, members, affiliates, partners, representatives, officers, directors, principals, licensees, invitees, representatives, employees, agents and/or sublicensees, and their respective successors and assigns (together with Customer, collectively, the “Customer Parties”); (b) injury or property damage caused by any of the Customer Parties; (c) any negligence or willful misconduct by any of the Customer Parties; (d) any breach of this Agreement by Customer; and/or (e) the use by any of the Customer Parties of the Space or Building. This Section 5 shall survive the expiration or earlier termination of this Agreement.

 

  6. MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR; DAMAGES

6.1 Maintenance and Repair . Customer shall, at its sole cost and expense, maintain and repair the Space and Customer Equipment in good condition and repair, in accordance with industry standards, ordinary wear and tear excepted and shall be responsible for all costs and expenses relating to the maintenance and/or repair of the Space and/or Customer Equipment. If

 

6


Customer or any of the Customer Parties damages any portion of the Building or Space, or any equipment of Licensor or any customer, licensee, invitee, lessor, lender, occupant or designee of Licensor, then Customer shall be responsible for the costs incurred in connection therewith, payable within thirty (30) days after written request.

6.2 Damages . Licensor’s liability arising out of or relating to this Agreement shall be subject to the other terms of this Agreement and shall in no event exceed the amounts paid by Customer to Licensor for License Fees under this Agreement. Each of the covenants, undertakings and agreements of Licensor are made and intended not as personal covenants, undertakings and agreements of any of the indemnified Parties, or for the purpose of binding any of the Indemnified Parties personally, and that no personal liability or personal responsibility is assumed by, nor shall at any time be asserted or enforceable against any of the Indemnified Parties. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement. Licensor (and the other Indemnified Parties) shall not, under any circumstances, be liable for any consequential, indirect, punitive, exemplary or special damages of’ any nature, or for any loss of data, lost revenues, lost profits, loss of business or anticipatory profits, regardless of the form of action, whether in contract, tort (including, without limitation, negligence), strict liability or otherwise. Neither Licensor nor any of the other Indemnified Parties makes any express and/or implied warranties of any kind, including, but not limited to, warranties of fitness for a particular purpose, merchantability, noninfringement of intellectual property rights and title, or any warranties arising from a course of dealing, usage, or trade practice.

6.3 Damage to Customer Equipment . In the event Customer damages the Space, Customer shall, at its sole cost and expense, repair the Space to the state it was in prior to the damage. Licensor assumes no liability for, and Customer hereby releases Licensor and the Indemnified Parties for, any damage to, or loss of, any Customer Equipment resulting from any cause (except Licensor’s own willful misconduct or gross negligence). In any event, Licensor and the Indemnified Parties shall not, under any circumstances, be liable for any damage resulting from any type of conduct if such loss is covered by Customer’s insurance. Licensor shall not be liable for lost data or software.

 

  7. DEFAULT; REMEDIES

7.1 Default . The term - Default” is defined as any of the following items (a) through (f): (a) the failure by Customer to pay Service Fees, License Fees or other amounts due under this Agreement for five (5) business days after written notice that such Service Fees, License Fees or other amounts (as applicable), are due; (b) any material interference by Customer with the business or equipment of any other customer, licensee or occupant in the Building for two (2) business days after Licensor’s delivery of written notice to Customer: provided, however, if Licensor shall deliver three (3) notices of interference within any twelve (12) month period, then there shall be no cure period and a Default shall be deemed to have occurred; (c) with respect to any material breach not described in (a) or (b) above, or (d) through (f) below, the failure by Customer to cure such breach within thirty (30) days after receipt of written notice of such breach from Licensor; (d) the filing by Customer of a voluntary petition in bankruptcy or commences any voluntary proceeding relating to insolvency, receivership, liquidation, or composition or assignment for the benefit of its creditors; (e) Customer becomes the subject of an involuntary petition, in bankruptcy or

 

7


any involuntary proceeding relating to insolvency, receivership, liquidation or composition or assignment for the benefit of creditors if such petition or proceeding is not dismissed within thirty (30) days of filing; or (f) any “Default” specified elsewhere in this Agreement.

7.2 Licensor Remedies . In the event of a Default, Licensor shall have the right to exercise all of its available rights and remedies at law and in equity. Without limiting any other right or remedy available to Licensor, Licensor, at its sole election, shall have the right to (a) terminate this Agreement (and any Addenda. Order Forms and/or any other agreement between Customer and Licensor), and (b) require that Customer pay to Licensor, within ten (10) days of Licensor’s delivery• of its notice of such election, an amount equal to one-hundred percent (100%) of the Service Fees, License Fees and all other amounts payable for all of the remaining applicable term of this Agreement. All rights and remedies of Licensor shall be cumulative and not alternative and shall be in addition to all rights and remedies given to Licensor by law or at equity, and the exercise of one or more rights or remedies shall not impair Licensor’s right to exercise any other right or remedy. If Customer fails to perform any act to be performed under this Agreement. Licensor may, but shall not be obligated to, without waiving or releasing Customer from any obligations of Customer, perform such act on Customer’s part. All sums so paid by Licensor shall be paid to Licensor by Customer within thirty (30) days after demand.

7.3 Licensor Default . Licensor shall not be in default under this Agreement unless Licensor fails to perform obligations required of Licensor within ten (10) days after written notice is delivered by Customer to Licensor specifying the obligation which Licensor has failed to perform: provided, however, that if the nature of Licensor’s obligation is such that more than ten (10) days are required for performance, then Licensor shall not be in default if Licensor commences performance within such thirty (30) day period and thereafter diligently prosecutes the same to completion. Customer hereby waives the benefit of any laws granting it the right to perform Licensor’s obligations, and Customer shall not be entitled to perform any of Licensor’s obligations.

 

  8. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

8.1 Casualty/Condemnation . Licensor may terminate this Agreement by written notice to Customer in the event (a) the Building is materially damaged by fire, windstorm, tornado, flood or by similar causes, whether or not the Space or Services are affected, and one or more of the following conditions are present: (I) in Licensor’s reasonable judgment, the repairs cannot be accomplished within 120 days after the date of discovery of the damage, provided that Licensor terminates all similarly situated license agreements for which Licensor has a termination right, (ii) any lender or lessor of Licensor requires that this Agreement be terminated, or (iii) the damage is not fully covered by Licensor’s insurance, or (b) all or any portion of the Building is taken by eminent domain (and Licensor shall retain all eminent domain proceeds).

8.2 Force Majeure . This Agreement and the obligations of each party hereunder shall not be affected or impaired because either party is unable to fulfill any of its obligations hereunder or is delayed in doing so, if such inability or delay is caused by reason of Force Majeure Event and each party’s obligations under this Agreement shall be forgiven and suspended by any such Force Majeure Event. “ Force Majeure Event ” is defined as any cause beyond each party’s reasonable control or anticipation, including, without limitation, acts of war, acts of God, terrorism,

 

8


earthquake, hurricanes, flood, fire or other casualty, embargo, riot, sabotage, labor shortage or dispute, governmental act, insurrections, epidemics, quarantines, inability to procure materials or transportation facilities, restrictive governmental laws or regulations, condemnation, failure of the Internet or other reason that is beyond the reasonable control of either party.

8.3 Governing Law; Attorneys’ Fees . This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State in which the Building is located. In any action or proceeding arising in connection with this Agreement, Licensor and Customer consent to the jurisdiction of any competent court within the County in which the Building is located. In any action to enforce this agreement, the losing party shall pay the successful party a reasonable sum for attorneys’ fees and costs in such suit.

8.4 Severability: Waiver . In the event any provision of this Agreement is held by a tribunal of competent jurisdiction to be contrary to any law or regulation, the remaining provisions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect. A party shall not be deemed to waive any of their rights or remedies under this Agreement unless such waiver is in writing and signed by the party to be bound. The waiver of any breach or default of this Agreement will not constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach or default.

8.5 Assignment . This Agreement and the rights accorded Customer under this Agreement (including, without limitation, any Addenda or Order Forms), are personal to Customer and may not be assigned, sub-licensed, or otherwise transferred by Customer (each a “ Transfer ”) in any fashion, regardless of whether such an arrangement is characterized as an assignment, a sublicense, a colocation agreement or any other agreement, without the prior written consent of Licensor, which consent may not be unreasonably withheld by Licensor. Licensor may require any transferee to execute documentation reasonably acceptable to Licensor in connection with the applicable Transfer, including, without limitation, an assumption agreement whereby the transferee assumes all of Customer’s liabilities, duties and obligations under this Agreement. In any event, no Transfer shall relieve or release Customer of its obligations, duties or liabilities under this Agreement. Whether or not Licensor consents to any proposed Transfer, Customer shall pay Licensor’s reasonable attorney’s fees incurred by Licensor in connection with the proposed Transfer, within thirty (30) days after written request by Licensor. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Agreement, Licensor may, in its sole and absolute discretion, assign this Agreement and/or delegate its obligations under this Agreement in whole or in part without obtaining the consent of Customer or any other party. Upon request of Licensor, Customer shall attorn to Licensor’s transferee upon any transfer and to recognize such transferee as the licensor under this Agreement.

8.6 Notices . Any notice or communication required or permitted to be given under this Agreement may be delivered by hand, sent by overnight courier, sent by United States certified mail, return receipt requested, or sent by facsimile, at the addresses set forth in the Addendum(s) or at such other address as may hereafter be furnished in writing to the other party. Such notice will be deemed to have been given as of the date it is delivered.

8.7 Entire Agreement; Counterparts . This Agreement (including, without limitation, all applicable Addenda and Order Forms) constitutes the complete and exclusive agreement between the Parties with respect to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes and replaces any and all prior or contemporaneous discussions, negotiations, understandings and agreements,

 

9


written and oral, regarding such subject matter. This Agreement may be executed in counterparts, each of which, when combined, shall constitute one agreement.

8.8 Binding Effect; Relationship of Parties . Subject to Section 8.5 above, this Agreement will bind and inure to the benefit of each party and each party’s successors and permitted assigns. There shall be no third party beneficiaries to this Agreement. The parties are independent of one another and this Agreement will not create any partnership, joint venture, employment, franchise or agency between Licensor and Customer.

8.9 Delivery of Certificate . Customer shall, within ten (10) business days’ prior written notice from Licensor (but only in connection with a sale, financing, transfer, lease or similar transaction), deliver to Licensor a signed statement certifying the following information, (but not limited to the following information in the event further information is reasonably requested by Licensor): (i) that this Agreement is unmodified and in full force and effect (or, if modified, stating the nature of such modification and certifying that this Agreement, as modified, is in full force and effect): (ii) the dates to which the Service Fees, License Fees and other charges are paid in advance, if any; (iii) the amount of Customer’s security deposit, if any; and (iv) acknowledging that there are not any uncured defaults on the part of Licensor under this Agreement (including, without limitation, all Addenda and Order Forms), and no events or conditions then in existence which, with the passage of time or notice or both, would constitute a default on the part of Licensor under this Agreement (including all Addenda and Order Forms), or specifying such defaults, events or conditions, if any are claimed. Any such statement may be relied upon by any prospective purchaser or encumbrancer of Licensor. Customer’s failure to deliver such statement within such ten (10) business day period shall, after a 3-day written reminder notice, constitute a Default.

8.10 Subordinate Agreement . Customer agrees that, notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Agreement, this Agreement shall be subject and subordinate to any mortgage, deed of trust, ground lease and/or Master Lease of Licensor and to any renewals, modifications, consolidation, refinancing, and extensions thereof, whether existing or future. Customer acknowledges that (a) Licensor may be a master tenant under a master lease agreement (the “ Master Lease ”) with the owner of the Building (or other applicable party) (the “ Master Landlord ”) with respect to certain portions of the Building, (b) the Space may be leased by Licensor, as tenant, from the Master Landlord, as landlord, and Licensor’s interest in the Space and Building may be that of lessee, rather than owner, and (c) the Master Landlord may, from time to time, encumber the Building (and/or the land on which the Building is located) with mortgages, deeds of trust and/or other similar security agreements. The foregoing provisions of this Section 8.10 are hereby declared to be self-operative and no further instrument shall be required to effect such subordination of this Agreement; provided, however, Customer shall, within ten (10) days after Licensor’s written request therefor, execute, acknowledge and deliver any documents reasonably requested by Licensor to assure the subordination of this Agreement to any of the same. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if any Master Landlord or the holder of any such mortgage or deed of trust advises Licensor that they desire or require this Agreement to be prior and superior thereto, upon written request of Licensor to Customer, Customer agrees to promptly execute, acknowledge and deliver any documents which Licensor or such Master Landlord or holder(s) reasonably deem necessary for purposes thereof (and, in such event, Customer shall, at the request of Licensor, attorn to such party).

 

10


8.11 Other Taxes and Charges . Customer shall pay, prior to delinquency, all taxes assessed against or levied upon any Customer Equipment or any of’ Customer’s other property. In the event any or all of Customer’s personal property shall be assessed and taxed with property of Licensor and, as a result, taxes for the Building are increased, Customer shall pay to Licensor, within ten (10) days after written demand, the amount of taxes applicable to Customer’s property. Customer shall timely pay for all business License Fees, gross receipts taxes and similar taxes and impositions which may from time to time be assessed against or levied upon Customer, as and when the same become due and before delinquency. Customer shall be solely responsible to timely pay all taxes, consignment charges, importing and exporting fees, customs charges and duties, tariffs, shipping charges, freight charges, and all other charges, taxes, fees, duties and amounts relating to importing/exporting, delivery, shipping and/or inter-country/inter-state/cross-border transfers (all of the foregoing collectively referred to herein as “ Importing Charges ”). Without limiting any other remedies, Licensor may, without liability, in Licensor’s sole and absolute discretion, refuse, reject and turn away delivery of Customer Equipment (and other Customer property) at or to the Building. Neither Licensor nor any other Indemnified Party shall be responsible for any wrongful acceptance or rejection of delivery, or any wrongful payment of (or refusal to pay) Importing Charges. In the event Licensor or any other Indemnified Party incur any Importing Charges, including, without limitation, as a result of Licensor’s payment of any Importing Charges, then Customer shall reimburse the applicable party for all Importing Charges within thirty (30) days after written demand.

8.12 Parking; Signage . Licensor shall not be obligated to provide any parking. Customer shall not inscribe an inscription, or post, place, or in any manner display any sign, notice, picture, placard or poster, or any advertising matter, anywhere in or about the Space or Building.

8.13 Brokers . Customer warrants and represents that it has not had any dealings with any person or entity who is or might be entitled to a commission, finder’s fee or other like payment in connection herewith and does hereby indemnify, defend and agree to hold the Indemnified Parties harmless from and against any and all losses, liabilities, costs and expenses that Licensor may incur should such warranty and representation prove incorrect inaccurate or false. This Section 8.13 shall survive the expiration or earlier termination of this Agreement.

8.14 Confidentiality . Customer acknowledges that the content of this Agreement and any related documents are confidential information. Customer shall keep such confidential information strictly confidential and shall not disclose such confidential information to any person or entity other than Customer’s financial and legal consultants.

8.15 Time is of the Essence . Time is of the essence with respect to the performance of this Agreement.

8.16 Facsimile & PDF Signatures . Delivery of signatures by facsimile shall have the same force and effect as original ink signatures. Additionally, signatures delivered by electronic mail in PDF or similar scanned format shall have the same force and effect as original ink signatures.

8.17 Internet/Online Orders . Customer represents and warrants that any person completing and/or submitting and/or executing any orders or service requests on behalf of Customer

 

11


by way of the Internet or other electronic or online means (including but not limited to via the Customer Resource Center) or otherwise, has the authority to do so on Customer’s behalf and any such orders or service requests shall be binding on Customer. “ Customer Resource Center ” is defined as any website (currently http://apps.[***].com/login.aspx ) and/or any other remote electronic access by which customer may order Services for the Space; provided, however, Licensor makes no representations or warranties in connection with the Customer Resource Center, and shall have no liability in connection with the Customer Resource Center (including, without limitation, as a result of breakdowns, lost data, lost orders, failures or malfunctions). Licensor may modify, suspend or discontinue the Customer Resource Center.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement as of the date first above written.

CUSTOMER:

 

BOX.NET, INC.
By:  

/s/ Aaron Levie

Name:  

Aaron Levie

Its:  

CEO

Date:  

3/24/2008

Licensor

 

[***], L.L.C.
By:  

/s/ Neil R. Giles

Name:   Neil R. Giles, CPM
Title:  

Managing Director for [***], L.L.C.,

as authorized agent for [***], L.L.C.

26 March 2008

Date:  

 

[***] Information has been omitted and submitted separately to the Securities and Exchange Commission. Confidential treatment has been requested with respect to the omitted portions.

 

12

Exhibit 10.16

 

LOGO

MASTER SERVICE AGREEMENT

 

This Master Service Agreement (“ Agreement ”) is entered into on April 29th , 2008 (“ MSA Effective Date ”) by and between Equinix Operating Co., Inc. (“ Equinix ”) and the undersigned customer (“ Customer ”), and includes the following exhibits:

 

  a. Exhibit A – Confidentiality Provisions; and

 

  b. Exhibit B – Sublicensing Provisions.

Capitalized terms used herein but not otherwise defined will have the meaning ascribed to them in Section 10.

 

1. Services .

Subject to the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement, Equinix will provide the Services to Customer.

 

2. Ordering .

a. Customer may request Services during the Term by (i) executing a statement of work prepared by Equinix (“ SOW ”), (ii) placing an online order via the Customer Care Website (“ Online Order ”), or (iii) placing a phone order (“ Phone Order ”). SOWs, Online Orders and Phone Orders may also be collectively referred to as “Orders”. SOWs will not be effective unless signed by both Parties. Online Orders and Phone Orders do not need to be signed by both Parties to be effective, but they will only be effective if Equinix accepts the Online Order or Phone Order in accordance with Equinix’s then-current ordering procedures or Equinix begins providing the Service ordered in the Online Order or Phone Order. Customer and Equinix may execute multiple Orders under this Agreement and all Orders will be governed by the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Each additional Order will supplement rather than replace the prior Orders, unless otherwise stated by the Parties in writing. If Customer requests a change to an existing Order, Equinix will prepare a change order (“ Change Order ”) which will be effective when signed by the Parties or when Equinix sends an Order Confirmation. Change Orders will amend existing Orders but will not replace them, unless otherwise agreed to by the Parties in writing. Equinix has no obligation to execute, or to amend, any Order, including any Change Order, with Customer.

        b. Equinix will provide Customer with an account and password to access the Customer Care Website. Customer is responsible for maintaining the confidentiality of its account and password and for restricting and granting access thereto. Notwithstanding anything in this Agreement to the contrary, Customer is responsible and liable for all activities that occur under Customer’s account (including all payments owed for any Orders that are placed under Customer’s account), regardless of whether such activities are conducted by Customer, a Sublicensee or any other third party, and regardless of whether such Orders are authorized by Customer. Equinix does not have any obligation to verify that anyone using Customer’s account and password has Customer’s authorization.

 

3 . Payment Terms and Taxes.

a. Unless otherwise agreed between the Parties in writing, Service Fees for the Services will begin to accrue on the Billing Commencement Date. Equinix will invoice Customer for the Services on a monthly basis (partial months will be billed on a pro rata basis based on a thirty (30) day month) and Customer will pay for the Services in accordance with this Section 3. Customer will pay in full all invoices (excluding Disputed Amounts, subject to a pending dispute) from Equinix within thirty (30) days of the invoice. Any past due amounts owed (excluding Disputed Amounts, subject to a pending dispute() by Customer will accrue interest at the lesser of one and a half percent (1.5%) per month or the highest rate permitted by applicable law. Unless

otherwise stated in the Order, all invoices will be paid in U.S. Dollars. Unless otherwise agreed to by the parties in writing, Equinix will invoice in advance each month for all recurring Services (except for the first partial month, if applicable, of recurring Services).

b. The Service Fees for Services ordered through SOWs will be listed on the SOWs. For Online Orders and Phone Orders, the Service Fees will be Equinix’s then-current list price for such Services, unless otherwise agreed to by the Parties in writing or in an Order Confirmation. Customer agrees to pay for each Service for the duration of the applicable Order. Notwithstanding anything in this Agreement to the contrary, upon sixty (60) days prior notice to Customer, Equinix may in its reasonable discretion change the rates and fees for any and all Services at any time(s) after twelve (12) months from the effective date of the applicable SOW for such Service, unless otherwise agreed to by the Parties in writing. For purposes of the prior sentence, in the case of each Online Order and Phone Order, the “applicable SOW” shall mean the SOW which contains the Licensed Space in which the Services ordered on such Online Order or Phone Order are installed.

c. Equinix is not responsible or in any way liable for any Taxes or third-party charges related to the activities, or the ownership or operation of the equipment (including Customer’s Equipment), of any of the following: Customer’s Authorized Persons, Accompanying Persons, and Associated Entities, at any IBX Center, or attributable to, any IBX Center. Without limiting the foregoing, Customer will be responsible for paying any and all Taxes separately imposed, levied or assessed against Customer by, and preparing and filing any necessary return with, any governmental, quasi-governmental or tax authorities by the date such payments and returns are due. In no event will Customer’s Equipment be construed to be fixtures. Service Fees are exclusive of any Taxes imposed on Service Fees. Customer will be responsible for paying any Taxes imposed on Service Fees at the same time it pays the Service Fees. Customer will be responsible for timely paying in full all Taxes.

        d. In the event that Customer’s account is past due (excluding Disputed Amounts, subject to a pending dispute) two (2) or more times in any twelve (12) month period, Equinix may charge Customer a deposit equal to one (1) month of the recurring Service Fees that are billable at the time such deposit is charged (the “ Deposit ”). The Deposit shall be held by Equinix and returned or credited to Customer, without interest, upon termination of this Agreement if Customer so requests in writing at that time. In the event of breach of this Agreement by Customer, Equinix shall, without limiting its remedies otherwise available, have the right to apply the Deposit to the damages suffered by Equinix as a result of such breach.

e. If Customer wishes to dispute a charge listed on an Equinix invoice to Customer (a “ Disputed Amount ”), Customer must submit a written dispute notice that includes reasonably sufficient supporting documentation within ninety (90) days of receipt of the initial invoice on which the Disputed Amount appears. If Customer does not submit such written dispute notice and reasonably sufficient supporting documentation to Equinix within such ninety (90) day period, then notwithstanding anything in this Agreement to the contrary, Customer waives all rights to dispute such Disputed Amount and to file a claim of any kind relating to such Disputed Amount (and Customer also waives all rights to otherwise claim that it does not owe such Disputed Amount or to seek any set-offs or reimbursements or other amounts of any kind based upon or relating to such Disputed Amount).

 

4. Access and Use of the IBX Centers, and Use of Customer’s Equipment .

a. Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, Customer will have access to the Licensed Space twenty-four (24) hours per day, three hundred sixty-five (365) days per year.

 

 

Equinix MSA   Equinix Proprietary and Confidential        
USA Version 02/12/08  
Box.net_MSA_v3_hbc_clean  
  Page 1 of 8        

 

LOGO


b. Unless otherwise expressly provided in an Order (and then only to the extent otherwise expressly provided therein), Customer will be responsible for configuring, providing, placing, installing, upgrading, adding, maintaining, repairing, and operating Customer’s Equipment, which actions Customer may engage in only to the extent permitted by, and subject to, the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Customer represents, warrants and covenants that it has obtained and will maintain throughout the Term the legal right and authority (including regulatory consents) to operate, configure, provide, place, install, upgrade, add, maintain and repair Customer’s Equipment as contemplated by this Agreement. Without limiting the foregoing, Customer will obtain and maintain throughout the Term consent from Customer’s subcontractors, third party providers, vendors, Sublicensees and any other parties necessary to permit Equinix (including any contractors or others acting at Equinix’s request) to access Customer’s Equipment to provide the Services. Except as set forth in Section 5 (which is further limited by Section 6), Equinix will not have any responsibility for any loss or damage to Customer’s Equipment.

c. Equinix and Customer will comply with the Policies, which have been furnished to customer and which are incorporated by reference into this Agreement. Subject to Customer’s termination right in Section 8(c). Equinix may modify the Policies at any time(s), and any modification by Equinix to the Policies will be effective upon notice to Customer, except modifications to the Shipping Policies, which will be effective immediately upon being made.

d. Customer will be responsible and liable for all acts or omissions of Customer’s Authorized Persons, Accompanying Persons, and Associated Entities, and all such acts or omissions will be attributed to Customer for all purposes under this Agreement (to the same extent as if Customer had committed the act or omission), including for purposes of determining responsibility, liability and indemnification obligations.

e. Customer will not file a mechanic’s lien or similar lien on the Licensed Space or IBX Centers, and Customer will be responsible for any mechanic’s lien or similar lien filed by any Authorized Person, Accompanying Person or Associated Entity. Without limiting the foregoing, in the event any such lien is filed, Customer will be responsible for the immediate satisfaction, payment or bonding of any such lien.

 

5. Indemnification .

a. Equinix will indemnify, defend and hold harmless the Customer Parties from any and all liability, damages, costs and expenses (including reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses) for claims brought by third parties for personal injury or damage to tangible property resulting from the gross negligence or willful misconduct of Equinix.

b. Customer will indemnify, defend and hold harmless

the Equinix Parties from any and all liability, damages, costs and expenses (including reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses) for (i) claims brought by third parties for personal injury or damage to tangible property resulting from the gross negligence or willful misconduct of Customer (ii) any claim by any of Customer’s Authorized Persons, Accompanying Persons or Associated Entities or any employee of Customer other than a claim based on the gross negligence or willful misconduct of Equinix; (iii) any claim relating to, or arising out of, Customer’s, or any of its customers’, services, equipment (including Customer’s Equipment) or Customer’s use of the Services provided under this Agreement (including claims relating to interruptions, suspensions, failures, defects, delays, impairments or inadequacies in any of the aforementioned services, including the Services from Equinix), other than a claim based on the gross negligence or willful misconduct of Equinix; (iv) any claim that Customer has failed to fulfill a contractual obligation with a third party, and (v) any claim resulting from Customer’s failure to obtain or maintain the required consents pursuant to Section (4(b).

c. Through counsel of its own choosing, the indemnified Party has the right to participate in (but not control the defense of) any proceeding

in which it is being indemnified under this Agreement, but in such event the indemnified Party will be solely responsible for paying the legal fees and expenses for its own counsel. The indemnifying Party will, however, continue to be solely responsible for all other expenses relating to the action, including the legal fees and expenses of the counsel it selects to defend the claims. The indemnifying Party shall not take any action, which unreasonably exposes the indemnified Party to a risk of damages, which would not be covered by such indemnity, and may not settle any matter without the prior written consent of the indemnified Party, which shall not be unreasonably withheld.

 

6. Warranty Disclaimer, Limitation of Liability, Credits .

a. EQUINIX DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SERVICES PROVIDED HEREUNDER WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED, ERROR-FREE, OR COMPLETELY SECURE. EQUINIX DOES NOT MAKE, AND EQUINIX HEREBY DISCLAIMS, ANY AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THE SERVICES, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT, EQUINIX DOES NOT MAKE, AND HEREBY DISCLAIMS, ALL EXPRESS WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THE SERVICES. ALL SERVICES PROVIDED PURSUANT TO THIS AGREEMENT ARE PROVIDED OR PERFORMED ON AN “AS IS”, “AS AVAILABLE” BASIS, AND CUSTOMER’S USE OF THE SERVICES IS SOLELY AT ITS OWN RISK.

b. NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING TO THE CONTRARY IN THIS AGREEMENT, IN NO EVENT WILL EQUINIX OR CUSTOMER BE LIABLE TO THE OTHER PARTY FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, RELIANCE, EXEMPLARY OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, INCLUDING LOST PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF REVENUES, LOSS OF DATA, INTERRUPTION OR CORRUPTION OF DATA, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR ANY OTHER TYPE OF DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT DAMAGES.

        c. NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING TO THE CONTRARY IN THIS AGREEMENT, EXCLUDING LIABILITY UNDER SECTION 5, EQUIFAX’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO CUSTOMER IN THE AGGREGATE FOR THE ENTIRE TERM (AND REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE CLAIMS ARE BROUGHT DURING OR AFTER THE TERM) WITH RESPECT TO ALL CLAIMS ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS AGREEMENT’ (INCLUDING ATTORNEY’S FEES) WILL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY CUSTOMER TO EQUIFAX FOR THE THREE (3) MONTH PERIOD IMMEDIATELY PRECEDING THE MONTH IN WHICH THE FIRST CLAIM BROUGHT BY CUSTOMER AGAINST EQUINIX RELATING TO THIS AGREEMENT AROSE. AS A FURTHER LIMITATION, EQUINIX’S MAXIMUM LIABILITY FOR ANY CLAIMS RELATING TO SERVICES OFFERED OR PROVIDED BY EQUINIX (I) FOR A NON-RECURRING CHARGE ONLY, OR (II) AS SMART HANDS SERVICES, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF THE SERVICE FEE FOR SUCH SERVICE PROVIDED ON THE OCCASION GIVING RISE TO THE CLAIM. NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING IN THIS AGREEMENT TO THE CONTRARY, BUT EXCLUDING LIABILITY UNDER SECTION 6, SECTION (G) OF EXHIBIT B AND CUSTOMER’S OBLIGATION TO PAY CHARGES HEREUNDER, CUSTOMER’S TOTAL LIABILITY IN THE AGGREGATE FOR THE ENTIRE TERM (AND THEREAFTER IF ANY CLAIMS ARE BROUGHT AFTER THE TERM) FOR DAMAGES TO EQUINIX WITH RESPECT TO ANY AND ALL CLAIMS IN THE AGGREGATE AT ANY AND ALL TIMES ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS AGREEMENT WILL BE LIMITED TO, AND WILL NOT EXCEED, THE RECURRING CHARGES ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE THREE (3) MONTHS IMMEDIATELY PRIOR TO THE MONTH IN WHICH THE FIRST CLAIM BROUGHT BY EQUINIX AGAINST CUSTOMER RELATING TO THIS AGREEMENT AROSE.

 

 

Equinix MSA   Equinix Proprietary and Confidential        
USA Version 02/12/08  
Box.net_MSA_v3_hbc_clean  
  Page 2 of 8        

 

LOGO


d. THE LIMITATIONS SET FORTH IN SECTIONS 6(b)-(c) WILL APPLY TO ANY AND ALL CLAIMS AND CAUSES OF ACTION WHATSOEVER, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER THEORY.

e. Equinix and Customer each waive the right to bring any claim against the other Party arising or in any way relating to this Agreement more than one (1) year after the date this Agreement expires or is earlier terminated.

f. If some or all of the Licensed Space is not usable for a period exceeding one (1) hour (the “ Temporarily Unusable Licensed Space ”), subject to the remainder of this Section 6(f), Customer will be entitled to a credit for each full hour that such Temporarily Unusable Licensed Space is unusable. The credit shall equal one seven hundred twentieth (1/720) of the monthly recurring Service Fee for each of the following: (i) the Temporarily Unusable Licensed Space; (ii) the Power Services in such Temporarily Unusable Licensed Space; and (iii) the Cross-Connects installed in such Temporarily Unusable Licensed Space. This credit is Customer’s sole and exclusive remedy for interruptions, suspensions, failures, defects, delays, impairments or inadequacies in any of the Services. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Customer will only have the right to receive a credit if (i) Customer notifies Equinix within five (5) days of its inability to use the Temporarily Unusable Licensed Space and (ii) the Temporarily Unusable Licensed Space is not usable for reasons other than for (a) the actions or omissions of Customer, Customer’s Authorized Persons, Accompanying Persons or Associated Entities; (b) Customer’s Equipment, or the equipment of any of Customer’s Authorized Persons, Accompanying Persons, or Associated Entities; or a Force Majeure Event. In the event that two (2) events entitling Customer to a credit occur within a six (6) month consecutive month period, Customer may terminate this Agreement upon written notice to Equinix, provided that such notice is provided within five (5) days of the event giving rise to Customer’s right to terminate as provided herein.

 

7. Insurance .

        a. Customer agrees to maintain appropriate insurance, at its expense, for each IBX Center during the entire time this Agreement is in effect, which at a minimum shall consist of (i) Commercial General Liability Insurance in an amount not less than One Million U.S. Dollars ($1,000,000), or the local currency equivalent, per occurrence for bodily injury, death and property damage, which policy will include contractual liability coverage related to this Agreement; (ii) Workers’ Compensation and employer’s liability insurance in an amount not less than that prescribed by applicable law; and (iii) umbrella or excess liability insurance with a combined single limit of no less than Two Million U.S. Dollars ($2,000,000) or the local currency equivalent. Prior to any use of the Licensed Space at an IBX Center (including, but not limited to, delivery of any of Customer’s Equipment to an IBX Center). Customer will furnish Equinix with certificates of insurance that evidence the minimum levels of insurance set forth herein and which list Equinix and Equinix’s landlord as additional insureds (but the insurance must only list Equinix’s landlord as an additional insured if Equinix so requests). In addition, Customer will notify Equinix of any non-renewal, cancellation, reduction in policy limit or other material change in Customer’s coverage at least forty-five (45) days prior to such change in coverage.

b. Customer will cause and ensure that each insurance policy referred to in Section 7(a), will provide that the insurers waive all claims and rights of recovery by subrogation against the Equinix Parties in connection with any liability or damage covered by Customer’s insurance policies. As to any property insurance carried by Equinix on the IBX Centers where any of the Licensed Space is located, Equinix will obtain a waiver of subrogation in favor of Customer.

8. Term of Agreement, Suspension of Service, Termination, and Removal of Customer’s Equipment .

a. This Agreement will commence on the MSA Effective Date and, unless terminated earlier in accordance with this Agreement, will terminate on the date the last Order then in effect expires or is terminated. Either Party may terminate this Agreement by giving written notice of termination to the other Party if the other Party breaches any material term or condition of this Agreement and fails to cure such breach within thirty (30) days after receipt of such notice. If the breach (other than where Customer has failed to pay Service Fees owed) cannot be cured within thirty (30) days, the breaching Party shall be given a reasonable period of time, but not to exceed sixty (60) days, to cure the breach, provided that the breaching Party acts promptly and diligently to cure such breach. Equinix may also terminate this Agreement if (i) it exercises any of its rights under Section 8(b) three (3) or more times during any twelve (12) month period; (ii) Customer’s breach referenced in Section 8(b) (ii) or (iii) continues for at least ten (10) days after Customer’s receipt of written notice from Equinix, or (iii) Customer liquidates, ceases to do business, or becomes insolvent. Notwithstanding anything in this Section 8(a) to the contrary, except where Customer has failed to timely cure a monetary breach, if Customer has Licensed Space in more than one IBX Center, and a Party fails to timely cure a material breach as to fewer than all such IBX Centers, then the non-breaching Party may only terminate the Orders for Services in the IBX Center(s) where the material breach has not been timely cured, and this Agreement and all other Orders will remain in full force and effect as to all other IBX Centers.

        b. Equinix may suspend the provision of Services, including discontinuing the supply of power and denying access to the IBX Center, if (i) Customer fails to cure any monetary breach of this Agreement (e.g. fails to pay any amounts owed) within ten (10) days of notice of the same (or within five (5) days of notice of the same in the event Customer’s account is past due on two (2) or more occasions during a six (6) month period); (ii) Customer breaches any provision of this Agreement that in Equinix’s reasonable judgment interferes with Equinix’s operation or maintenance of the IBX Center or with one or more of its other customer’s use thereof, and Customer fails to cure such breach within one (1) hour of being notified (either by fax, e-mail or phone call, at the option of Equinix as to which form of notification) of the same; or (iii) Customer breaches any provision of this Agreement that in Equinix’s reasonable judgment has the potential to interfere with Equinix’s operation or maintenance of the IBX Center or with one or more of its other customers’ use thereof, and Customer fails to cure such breach within forty-eight (48) hours of being notified (either by fax, e-mail or phone call, at the option of Equinix as to which form of notification) of the same. If Equinix suspends a Service pursuant to this Section 8(b), unless Equinix has subsequently terminated this Agreement as permitted under this Agreement, Equinix will resume the discontinued Service within twenty-four (24) hours after it is reasonably satisfied that Customer has cured the breach (es) which gave rise to the suspension, and Equinix may charge a reinstatement fee equal to the direct out-of-pocket expenses incurred by Equinix to discontinue and to then resume the Service.

c. Equinix or Customer may terminate this Agreement as to any affected Licensed Space or IBX Center if any portion of the IBX Center in which the affected Licensed Space is located becomes subject to a condemnation proceeding or is condemned, Equinix’s possession is otherwise terminated or abated, or Equinix cannot provide Customer with access to the affected Licensed Space as contemplated herein for a period exceeding thirty (30) days. Customer may terminate this Agreement as to a Licensed Space if Equinix modifies the Policies in a way that materially adversely affects Customer’s use of the Services in such Licensed Space, but only if Customer provides written notification that it wishes to terminate this Agreement within thirty (30) days after Customer received notification of such changes in the Policies.

d. Upon expiration or termination of this Agreement, or an Order (or any portion thereof), all rights of Customer with respect to the Licensed

 

 

Equinix MSA   Equinix Proprietary and Confidential        
USA Version 02/12/08  
Box.net_MSA_v3_hbc_clean  
  Page 3 of 8        

 

LOGO


Space (or the affected portion thereof) (“ Terminated Space ”), will terminate, and Customer will immediately remove all of Customer’s Equipment and other tangible items of any kind belonging to Customer, Customer’s Authorized Persons, Accompanying Persons and/or Associated Entities located in such Terminated Space, but not any wiring, cable or other equipment or property owned, leased or licensed by Equinix. If Customer fails to remove any such property (including Customer’s Equipment) in accordance with this Section 8(d), Equinix will be entitled to pursue all available legal remedies against Customer, including (i) immediately removing any or all such property and storing it at Customer’s expense at an on-site or off-site location; (ii) shipping such property to the address set forth at the end of this Agreement at Customer’s risk and expense; or (iii) liquidating such property in any commercially reasonable manner and charging Customer for all costs associated with the liquidation if Equinix provides thirty (30) days’ prior notice to Customer. If Customers account is past due (excluding Disputed Amounts, subject to a pending dispute), including during the time after this Agreement or any Order or portion thereof expires or is terminated then, notwithstanding anything in this Agreement to the contrary, Customer may not remove any of Customer’s Equipment from an IBX Center and hereby waives its right to do so. Additionally, Equinix may (i) immediately remove any or all such property and store it at Customer’s expense at an on-site or off-site location until Customer pays all amounts owed to Equinix and then retrieves the property, or (ii) liquidate such property in any commercially reasonable manner and charge Customer for all costs associated with the liquidation and retain from the liquidation all amounts necessary to pay Equinix the past due amounts if Equinix provides thirty (30) days’ prior notice to Customer and Customer fails to pay all such amounts.

e. While Customer has no right to use the Services provided under an Order after the end of the term of such Order, if Customer does so, Customer will be obligated to pay for such Services pursuant to the terms and conditions of this Agreement and any such Order, and any such Order will continue in effect for as long as the Services are used by Customer. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in such event, any such Order will be terminable at will by Equinix effective immediately upon notice to Customer. In addition, notwithstanding anything in this Agreement to the contrary, if this Agreement would have otherwise terminated prior to Customer’s cessation of its use of the Services, this Agreement will continue in effect for as long as the Services are used by Customer, but this Agreement will be terminable at will by Equinix effective immediately upon notice to Customer.

f. Neither Party will be liable to the other Party for properly terminating this Agreement or any portion thereof in accordance with its terms, but Customer will be liable to Equinix for any amounts owed prior to the effective date of termination. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Agreement, Equinix has the right to recover from Customer all damages recoverable under law for the period past the end of the Term, if Equinix terminates this Agreement prior to the end of the full Term due to Customer’s material breach.

g. Notwithstanding anything in this Agreement (including in any Order) to the contrary, under no circumstances will any Order survive the expiration or earlier termination of this Agreement, and under no circumstances will any Order pertaining to an IBX Center survive the termination of this Agreement as to that IBX Center. Equinix will not have any obligation to provide any Services after the expiration or earlier termination of this Agreement, and Equinix will not have any obligation to provide any Services at an IBX Center after the expiration or earlier termination of this Agreement as to such IBX Center.

 

9. Miscellaneous .

a. Notice . Except where otherwise expressly stated in the Agreement(e.g. 8(b) (ii) and (iii)), (and regardless of whether certain provisions in this Agreement expressly require written notice, consent or approval) all notices, consent, or approvals required by this Agreement will only be effective if in wiring and sent by (i) certified or registered air

mail, postage prepaid; (ii) overnight delivery requiring a signature upon receipt; (iii) delivery by hand; or (iv) facsimile or electronic mail (promptly confirmed by certified or registered mail or overnight delivery), to the Parties at the respective street addresses, facsimile numbers, or electronic mail addresses set forth at the end of this Agreement or such other addresses or facsimile numbers as may be designated in writing by the respective Parties. Notices, consents and approvals will be deemed effective on the date of receipt. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Agreement, notices sent by Equinix pursuant to Sections 3(a), 3(b) and 4(c) may be sent by first class US mail, and receipt of such notices shall be presumed to occur five (5) days after mailing.

b. Governing Law; Forum; Attorneys’ Fees . This Agreement will be governed in all respects by the internal laws of the State of California without regard to its conflict of laws provisions. The Parties irrevocably agree to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of San Francisco, California. If any legal action is brought by either Party arising from, or related to, the subject matter of this Agreement, the prevailing Party will be entitled to an award of its reasonable attorney’s fees and costs.

c. Entire Agreement . This Agreement, the exhibits, the Policies then in effect, and all Orders executed at any time during the Term, all of which are incorporated herein by reference into this Agreement, constitute the complete and entire agreement between the Parties with respect to the subject matter hereof, and supersede and replace any and all prior or contemporaneous discussions, negotiations, proposals, understandings and agreements, written and oral, regarding such subject matter, as well as any industry custom. This Agreement will be effective only when signed by each Party. This Agreement may be executed in two or more counterparts, each of which will be deemed an original, but all of which together will constitute one and the same instrument. This Agreement may be amended only in writing by an instrument signed by each Party. For the avoidance of doubt, the prior sentence is not meant to prohibit the Order procedure described in Section 2 or prohibit Equinix from modifying the rates and fees or the Policies pursuant to Sections 3(b) and 4(c), respectively.

        d. Construction . Each Party acknowledges and agrees that it has reviewed, and has had an opportunity to have reviewed, this Agreement (including the exhibits and the Policies), and it is the Parties’ intent that this Agreement will not be construed against any Party. The section headings and captions throughout this Agreement are for convenience and reference only, and will not be used to construe this Agreement. If any provision of this Agreement, as applied to any Party or to any circumstance, is adjudged by a court to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, the same will not affect the validity, legality, or enforceability of the portion of the provision, if any, that is not invalid, illegal or unenforceable, the application of such provision in any other circumstances, or the validity, legality, or enforceability of any other provision of this Agreement. All terms and conditions of this Agreement will be deemed enforceable to the fullest extent permissible under applicable law, and, when necessary, the court in any action between the Parties is requested to reform any and all terms or conditions to give them as much effect as possible.

e. Survival . Sections 4(b), 5, 6, 8, 9(d), (e), (h), (i), Exhibit A, and Section (g) of Exhibit B will survive the termination of this Agreement, but Exhibit A will only survive for one (1) year after the end of the Term. In addition, all provisions of this Agreement that can only be given proper effect if they survive the termination of this Agreement will survive the termination of this Agreement. This Agreement will be valid as to any obligation incurred prior to termination of this Agreement, including any Service Fees owed by Customer.

f. License . This Agreement, and the rights of Customer hereunder, are, without any further action by any Party, subject and subordinate to the leases for the IBX Centers and all superior instruments to such leases (including, without limitation, mortgages or ground leases for the IBX Centers). This Agreement is a services agreement and is not intended to and will not constitute a lease of any real or personal property. Customer acknowledges and agrees that (i) it

 

 

Equinix MSA   Equinix Proprietary and Confidential        
USA Version 02/12/08  
Box.net_MSA_v3_hbc_clean  
  Page 4 of 8        

 

LOGO


has been granted only a license (“ License ”) to use the Licensed Space in accordance with this Agreement: (ii) Customer has not been granted any real property interest under this Agreement; and (iii) Customer has no rights as a tenant or otherwise under any real property or landlord/tenant laws, regulations, or ordinances. Equinix hereby reserves, with respect to the IBX Centers, all rights not specifically granted to Customer in this Agreement, including, without limitation, the right (i) of access to and use of the IBX Centers for its own use or the use of others; (ii) to grant additional licenses to other persons or co-location customers for the use of portions of the IBX Centers; and (iii) to exercise or grant other rights not inconsistent with the rights granted in this Agreement. Unless otherwise expressly agreed to by the Parties in writing, Equinix will retain title to all parts and materials used or provided by Equinix or third parties acting on Equinix’s behalf in the performance and/or furnishing of the Services.

a. Equinix Affiliates, Independent Contractors; Assignment . Equinix may permit any other Equinix Affiliate, or any independent contractor or other third party, to perform any of Equinix’s obligations hereunder, and Equinix may assign this Agreement to any person or entity at any time. Customer may assign this Agreement without Equinix’s prior consent (in which event Customer must provide Equinix with prior notice of the assignment) only where the party to whom this Agreement is assigned by Customer is either an Affiliate of Customer, or is acquiring all or substantially all of Customer’s business or assets, including through merger. This Agreement will be binding upon and inure to the benefit of all successors and permitted assigns of Equinix and Customer, who will be bound by all of the obligations of their predecessors or assignors. Except as set forth in Exhibit B of this Agreement with respect to sublicensing only, and this Section 9(g) with respect to an assignment of the entire Agreement under the conditions specified above only. Customer will not assign, delegate, transfer or sublicense all or any part of the Licensed Space.

b. Force Majeure . Excluding Customer’s obligation to pay amounts owed under this Agreement, including Service Fees, neither Party will be responsible or in any way liable to the other Party, and neither Party will have any termination or other rights, arising out of or relating to any failure by the other Party to perform or any hindrance in the performance of the obligations under this Agreement if such failure or hindrance is caused by events or circumstances beyond such nonperforming Party’s control, including acts of God, war, labor strike, terrorist act, fire, flood, earthquake, any law, order, regulation or other action of any governing authority or agency thereof, or failure of the Internet , ( each a “Force Majeure Event ”). In the event of a Force Majeure Event substantially prevents or hinders Equinix’s ability to provide Customer with the Services contemplated by this Agreement or substantially prevents or hinders Customer’s ability to use the Service for more than thirty (30) consecutive days, Customer may terminate this Agreement upon prior written notice of termination of not less than thirty (30) days in advance of the effective date of termination and Equinix

receives such notice of termination no later than thirty (30) days after the date Customer’s right to terminate arises pursuant to this Section 9(h).

c. Conflicts . All Orders are at all times subject to all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement. In the event of a conflict between the body of this Agreement and an Order, the body of this Agreement will control, unless the body of this Agreement, or the Order in writing, states that the conflicting term in the Order controls. In the event of a conflict between (1) the Policies and (2) either the body of this Agreement or any Order, the body of this Agreement or any Order will control.

d. General . Except where otherwise expressly stated herein, and subject to the limitations set forth in Section 6, the rights and remedies provided for herein are cumulative and not exclusive of any rights or remedies that a Party would otherwise have.

Each Party recognizes and agrees that the warranty disclaimers and liability and remedy limitations in this Agreement are material bargained for bases of this Agreement and that they have been taken into account

and reflected in determining the consideration to be given by each Party under this Agreement and in the decision by each Party to enter into this Agreement.

Equinix and Customer are independent contractors and this Agreement will not establish any relationship of partnership, joint venture, employment, franchise or agency between Equinix and Customer. Neither Equinix nor Customer will have the power to bind the other or incur obligations on the other’s behalf without the other’s prior written consent.

The Parties agree that there will be no third party beneficiaries to this Agreement, including, but not limited to, any Accompanying Person, Associated Entity (which includes any Sublicensee), Authorized Person, end user, customer or the insurance providers for either Party.

No Party’s directors, officers or employees will have any liability to any other Party with respect to this Agreement. Except as may be specifically otherwise consented to in writing by an Affiliate of a Party (and none of the other terms of this Agreement shall be deemed to constitute such consent), no Party’s Affiliates will have any liability to any other Party with respect to this Agreement, including with respect to any Orders.

No waiver of any breach of any provision of this Agreement will constitute a waiver of any prior, concurrent or subsequent breach of the same or any other provisions hereof, and no waiver will be effective unless made in writing and signed by an authorized representative of the waiving Party.

 

10. Definitions .

Accompanying Person : Each person (other than an employee of Equinix) who is accompanied by an Authorized Person while at an IBX Center.

Affiliate : As to a Party, means any entity controlling, controlled by, or under common control with such Party, where the term “ control ” and its correlative meanings, “ controlling ,” “ controlled by ,” and “ under common control with ,” means the legal, beneficial or equitable ownership, directly or indirectly, of more than fifty percent (50%) of the aggregate of all voting equity interests in an entity. Without limiting the foregoing, but in addition thereto, any Affiliate of, or subsidiary of, Equinix, Inc. shall be deemed to be an Affiliate of Equinix.

Associated Entity : Each individual, company, partnership or other entity of any type which employs, contracts with, or is otherwise associated or affiliated with any of Customer’s Authorized Persons or Accompanying Persons. Without limiting the foregoing definition, each Sublicensee that has sublicensed Sublicensed Space at an IBX Center will be an Associated Entity at such IBX Center.

 

Authorized Person : Each person who is then included on the most recent list of Authorized Persons given to Equinix by Customer in accordance with the Policies.

Billing Commencement Date : For a Service ordered in a SOW – the date designated in the SOW as the Billing Commencement Date. For a Service ordered in an Online Order or Phone Order – the date Equinix begins providing the Service to Customer, unless otherwise agreed to by the Parties in the Order.

Cross-Connect : A physical or wireless interconnection within an IBX Center that (i) exits Customer’s cage or (ii) connects Customer to another Equinix customer.

Customer Care Website : The customer care website accessible via the Internet at a location designated by Equinix, which it has the right to change from time to time.

Customer Cross-Connect : A physical interconnection, including cable, connections, and other wiring, that (i) does not exit Customer’s cage, (ii) does not connect Customer to another Equinix customer, and (iii)

 

 

Equinix MSA   Equinix Proprietary and Confidential        
USA Version 02/12/08  
Box.net_MSA_v3_hbc_clean  
  Page 5 of 8        

 

LOGO


interconnects (a) Equipment belonging to the Customer or (b) POD Equipment that is provided by Equinix and that is in Customer’s cage with Customer’s Equipment.

Customer’s Equipment : All network and/or computer equipment (including wiring and Customer Cross-Connects between such equipment and Customer’s POD Equipment) that is located in the Licensed Space, regardless of whether such equipment is owned, leased, licensed or otherwise obtained for use by Customer, Customer’s Authorized Persons, Accompanying Persons or Associated Entities (but this does not include Cross-Connects or POD Equipment that is provided by Equinix and that is located in Customer’s Licensed Space).

Customer Parties : Customer and the Affiliates, owners, officers, directors, employees, and agents of Customer or of the Affiliates of Customer.

Equinix Parties : Equinix and the Affiliates, owners, officers, directors, employees, and agents of Equinix or of the Affiliates of Equinix.

IBX Centers : The Internet Business Exchange Centers in which Customer licensees Licensed Space or receives Services from Equinix pursuant to an Order.

Licensed Space : The areas licensed by Customer under this Agreement and the Orders and as identified in the Orders as to the amount of space. For each Licensed Space, Equinix will determine at all times during the Term the exact location in the IBX Centers where the Licensed Space will be located, and Equinix will notify Customer accordingly.

Order Confirmation : A document sent by Equinix that confirms, among other things, the Services, the quantity of such Services, and the prices of such Services. Not all Online Orders or Phone Orders require Order Confirmations, and Equinix will determine at all time(s) which Online Orders or Phone Orders require Order Confirmations to be effective.

Parties : Customer and Equinix.

Party : Customer or Equinix.

POD Equipment : The (i) patch panels, DSX panels for category 6 twisted pair, co-axial, single and multi-mode fiber, or (ii) other appropriate (as reasonably determined by Equinix) point of demarcation equipment.

Policies : The procedures, rules, regulations, security practices and policies adopted by Equinix that are then in effect for the IBX Centers, and as they may be amended from time to time by Equinix.

Services : All services, goods and other offerings of any kind requested under an Order agreed to by Equinix, and to be provided by Equinix to Customer pursuant to this Agreement.

Service Fees : Charges and fees for Services charged to Customer by Equinix pursuant to this Agreement.

Shipping Policies : The portion of the Policies entitled Shipping Policies.

Smart Hands Services : Services that are defined as Smart Hand Services under the then current Policies.

Sublicensed Space : The portion of the Licensed Space sublicensed to a Sublicensee by Customer pursuant to the terms of this Agreement.

Sublicensee : A customer of Customer or other third party who sublicenses all or part of the Licensed Space from Customer.

Taxes : Sales, use, transfer, privilege, excuse, VAT, GST, consumption tax, and other similar taxes and duties, whether foreign, national, state or local, however designated, now in force or enacted in the future, which are leveled or imposed by reason of the performance by Equinix or Customer under this Agreement or by Customer with respect to its operations and use of the Services, but excluding taxes on Equinix’s net income.

Term : The term of this Agreement as determined in accordance with Section 8(a) of this Agreement.

 

 

This Master Service Agreement has been entered into between the Parties as of the MSA Effective Date.

 

Customer to complete :

The person signing below hereby warrants and represents that he or she has full authority to execute this Agreement for the Party on whose behalf he or she is signing.

 

Customer Name:  

Box.net, Inc.

  (Complete Legal Name)
Authorized Signature:  

/s/ Aaron Levie

Printed Name:  

Aaron Levie

Title:  

CEO

Street address for notices:

 

 

Phone:  

 

Facsimile number:  

 

Electronic mail address:  

 

Equinix to complete :

The person signing below hereby warrants and represents that he or she has full authority to execute this Agreement for the Parties on whose behalf he or she is signing.

 

Authorized Signature:  

/s/ Heidi B. Caparro

Printed Name:  

Heidi B. Caparro

Title:  

Senior Customer Contracts Manager

Street address for notices:

 

 

Phone:  

 

Facsimile number:  

 

Electronic mail address:  

 

 

 

Equinix MSA   Equinix Proprietary and Confidential        
USA Version 02/12/08  
Box.net_MSA_v3_hbc_clean  
  Page 6 of 8        

 

LOGO


Exhibit A

Confidentiality Provisions

 

The following provisions apply with respect to the treatment of confidential information disclosed by the Parties hereto. All capitalized terms not defined in this exhibit will have the respective meanings specified in the Master Service Agreement to which this Exhibit A is attached and incorporated by reference.

a. Except as expressly permitted in this Exhibit A, no Party will, without the prior written consent of the other Party, disclose any Confidential Information of the other Party to any third party. Information will be considered Confidential Information of a Party if it is (a) identified, with in writing or orally, as confidential at the time of disclosure; and (b) it contains the disclosing Party’s customer lists, customer information, technical information, pricing information, pricing methodologies, financial position, trade secrets, customer communications or proposals, benchmarking information, satisfaction surveys, or information regarding the disclosing Party’s business planning or business operations. In addition, notwithstanding anything in this Agreement to the contrary, (i) the terms of this Agreement will be deemed Confidential Information of each Party; and (ii) the design of the IBX Centers, the Services provided and equipment used at the IBX Centers and the configuration, interconnection, switching and routing of telecommunication cables, networks and services at the IBX Centers will be considered Confidential Information of Equinix.

b. Other than the terms and conditions of this Agreement, information will not be deemed Confidential Information hereunder if such information (i) is known to the receiving Party prior to receipt from the disclosing Party directly or indirectly from a source other than one having an obligation of confidentiality to the disclosing Party; (ii) becomes known (independently of disclosure by the disclosing Party) to the receiving Party directly or indirectly from a source other than one having an obligation of confidentiality to the disclosing Party; (iii) becomes publicly known or otherwise ceases to be secret or confidential, except through a breach of this Agreement by the receiving Party; or (iv) is independently developed by the receiving Party.

c. Each Party will secure and protect the Confidential Information of the other Party (including, without limitation, the terms of this Agreement) in a manner consistent with the steps taken to protect its own trade secrets and confidential information, but not less than a reasonable degree of care. Each Party may disclose the other Party’s Confidential Information where (i) the disclosure is required by applicable law or regulation or by an order of a court or other governmental body having jurisdiction after giving reasonable notice to the other Party with adequate time for such other Party to seek a protective order, (ii) if in the opinion of counsel for such Party, disclosure is advisable under any applicable securities laws regarding public disclosure of business information; or (iii) the disclosure is reasonably necessary and is to that Party’s, or its Affiliates’, employees, officers, directors, attorneys, accountants and other advisors, or the disclosure is otherwise necessary for a Party to exercise its rights and perform its obligations under the Agreement, so long as in all cases referenced in the clauses above the disclosure is no broader than necessary and the person or entity who receives the disclosure agrees prior to receiving the disclosure to keep the information confidential. Each Party is responsible for ensuring that any Confidential Information of the other Party that the first Party discloses pursuant to this Exhibit A (other than disclosures pursuant to clauses (i) and (ii) above that cannot be kept confidential by the first Party) is kept confidential by the person receiving the disclosure to the same extent that the receiving Party must keep the information confidential.

d. Neither Customer nor Equinix grants the other the right to use its trademarks, service marks, trade names, logos, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights or other designations in any promotion, publication, or press release without the prior written consent of the other Party in each case. Notwithstanding the restrictions set forth in this Exhibit A during the Term, (i) Equinix may issue a press release announcing Customer’s entry into the IBX Centers without obtaining Customer’s consent; and (ii) either Party may publicly refer to the other Party, orally and in writing, as a customer or vendor of services of or to the other Party, as the case may be, without obtaining consent from such other Party.

 

 

EXHIBIT A

Equinix MSA   Equinix Proprietary and Confidential        
USA Version 02/12/08  
Box.net_MSA_v3_hbc_clean  
  Page 7 of 8        

 

LOGO


Exhibit B

Sublicensing Provisions

 

The following provisions apply with respect to any sublicense of Licensed Space (all capitalized terms herein having the respective meanings specified in the Master Service Agreement to which this Exhibit B is attached and incorporated by reference).

a. Customer may sublicense the Sublicensed Space to Sublicensees provided that (i) the terms and conditions of such Sublicense will be no less restrictive than the Agreement; (ii) Customer will not in its dealing with such Sublicensees act or purport to act on behalf of Equinix or landlords of Equinix; (iii) Customer will require the Sublicensees to abide by the rules set forth in the Policies; (iv) the agreement between Customer and Sublicensee will provide that Sublicensee has no right to sublicense, Space to any other person or entity without Equinix’s written consent, which consent may be withheld for any reason whatsoever or no reason, and without such consent any such sublicense, delegation, assignment or transfer will be null and void; and (v) Customer will cause all Sublicensees to agree in writing that in consideration for the sublicense, Sublicensees waive, to the maximum extent permitted under law, any and all claims of any and all types against Equinix and the landlords of Equinix, at all times, and that in no event will Equinix, or landlords of Equinix, have any liability to such Sublicensees, including liability to such Sublicensees for any damages whatsoever, including direct damages.

b. Notwithstanding anything in this Agreement to the contrary, Customer will remain responsible to Equinix for the performance of all of Customer’s obligations under this Agreement (including the payment of all amounts owed under this Agreement) and all other agreements between Equinix and Customer (“ Rotated Agreements ”). No sublicense agreement or arrangement between Customer and any Sublicensees will relieve Customer from any liability under this Agreement or any Related Agreements. Without limiting the foregoing, Customer is responsible for paying the Service Fees for all of the Licensed Space (including Sublicensed Space) and the charges for Services for, or relating to, any or all of the Licensed Space (including Sublicensed Space). In no event will Equinix be deemed to be providing any Services to any Sublicensee for, or relating to, the Sublicensed Space, as the provision of any such Services will be deemed to be to Customer for all purposes under this Agreement. In addition, notwithstanding anything in this Agreement to the contrary, under no circumstances shall Equinix be deemed to have any obligations to any Sublicensee.

        c. Customer must ensure that each and every sublicense agreement or other sublicense arrangement that Customer has with a Sublicensee does not have any terms and conditions that (i) are inconsistent with this Agreement, or (ii) seek to provide any Sublicensee with rights that Customer does not have under this Agreement. Without limiting the foregoing or any other restrictions on Sublicensees, no Sublicensee will have any right to use its Sublicensed Space in any manner that Customer is not permitted to use the Licensed Space, and Customer will ensure that its agreement with each Sublicensee will clearly indicate that Sublicensee does not have any right to use its Sublicensed Space in any manner that Customer is not permitted to use the Licensed Space.

d. Sublicensees do not have any rights, separate and apart from Customer’s rights, to access their Sublicensed Space. Accordingly, only Customer’s Authorized Persons at an IBX Center may access the Sublicensed Space of Sublicensees at such IBX Center. Furthermore, Equinix is not responsible for restricting a

Sublicensee’s access to Customer’s Licensed Space located in a cage or suite to which that Sublicensee has access.

e. Notwithstanding anything in this Agreement to the contrary, a Sublicensee has no right to sublicense, delegate, assign or otherwise transfer its rights to use the Sublicensed Space to any other person or entity without Equinix’s written consent which consent may be withheld for any reason whatsoever or no reason. Any such sublicense, delegation, assignment or transfer will be null and void.

f. If the Parties agree, Equinix and Customer will participate in a joint press announcement to announce when a Sublicensee sublicenses Sublicensed Space at an IBX Center.

g. Without limiting Customer’s indemnification obligations under Section 6, Customer will indemnify and hold harmless the Equinix Parties from any and all liability, damages, costs and expenses (including reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses) arising from or relating to (i) any claim from any person or entity, including any Sublicensee, arising from or relating to any breach by Customer of any provision of this Exhibit B; (ii) any claim from any person or entity, including any Sublicensee, arising from or relating to any sublicense or Sublicensed Space; (iii) any claim by a customer, vendor, third-party provider or end-user of any Sublicensee, or any person or entity acting on behalf, or at the direction, of any Sublicensee, relating to, or arising out of, a Sublicensee’s or any of its customers’ services, Customer’s or any of its customers’ services, or the Services provided under this Agreement (including claims relating to interruptions, suspensions, failures, defects, delays, impairments or inadequacies in any of the aforementioned services, including the Services from Equinix); and (iv) any claim by a Sublicensee to the extent that such claim, if sustained, would result in any greater obligation or liability of Equinix to such Sublicensee than Equinix has undertaken to Customer under this Agreement.

 

 

EXHIBIT B

Equinix MSA   Equinix Proprietary and Confidential        
USA Version 02/12/08  
Box.net_MSA_v3_hbc_clean  
  Page 8 of 8        

 

LOGO

Exhibit 10.17

 

LOGO   No:                     

COLOCATION FACILITIES AGREEMENT

 

This Colocation Facilities Agreement is made by and between Switch Communications Group L.L.C., a Nevada limited liability company (“ Switch ”) and the customer indicated in the signature block below (“ Customer ”). This Colocation Facilities Agreement is effective as of the date of Switch’s signature below (the “ Effective Date ”); provided that neither party shall he bound until both parties have signed.

 

1. Services.

1.1 Definitions . “ Agreement ” means a collective reference to this Colocation Facilities Agreement and Exhibits hereto. “ Colocation Space ” means the colocation space described on a Service Order. “ Colocation Services ” means a collective reference to the Colocation Space together with associated power, cooling and other services to be provided by Switch pursuant to a Service Order (exclusive of Carrier Services). “ Carrier Services ” means a collective reference to internet, transport and other services provided by one or more third party telecommunications carriers (each a “ Carrier ”) which are resold to Customer by Switch or procured directly by Customer. “ Customer Equipment ” means the computer equipment, software, hardware and other materials placed by or for Customer in the Colocation Space, other than Switch equipment. Capitalized terms not defined herein have the meaning provided in the Service Order.

1.2 Service Orders . From time to time, the parties may execute Service Orders which reference this Agreement and this Agreement is hereby incorporated into such Service Orders. This Agreement shall govern over any inconsistent terms and conditions contained in a Service Order. For clarity, each Service Order is a separate and distinct agreement between Switch and Customer.

1.3 Commencement of Services . The “ Commencement Date ” for the Colocation Space and the Colocation Services shall be the earlier of: (i) the date Switch makes the Colocation Space available to Customer (which shall not be prior to the Target Service Commencement Date) or (ii) the date Customer places any Customer Equipment in the Colocation Space. The Commencement Date for Carrier Services shall be the date on which the Carrier Services are made available to Customer by the applicable Carrier.

 

2. Colocation Space .

        2.1 License Grant. Starting on the applicable Commencement Date, Switch hereby grants Customer a limited, revocable (pursuant to Section 5.3) license to install and operate the Customer Equipment within the Colocation Space and for no other purpose.

2.2 Installation and Management . Customer will be solely responsible for the immediate removal from the Premises of all packaging materials (especially flammable materials) associated with the Customer Equipment and will maintain the Colocation Space in a clean, safe and orderly fashion. Customer must adhere to industry standards for cable management. Cables must be properly installed and either enclosed in cable management trays or in clean bundles for proper presentation and identification.

2.3 Location and Configuration . The Colocation Space is located within a t-scift TM as described on Exhibit B and Customer agrees to abide by the engineering standards inherent in such a structure; including minimizing Customer’s carbon footprint by working with Switch to maintain a hot aisle temperature between 100° and 110°. The standard cabinet height for the t-scif is 79 inches (42U). All non-standard height cabinets will require a reasonable customization fee for installation within a thermal-scif. No cabinets above 90 inches will be allowed. Modifications to the Customer Equipment configuration within the Colocation Space require Switch’s prior written consent.

2.4 Customer Equipment . All Customer Equipment must be UL60950 compliant. The Colocation Space is not intended to provide the Special Requirements for an Information Technology Equipment Room as contemplated by ANSI/NFPA 70, Article 645 and NFPA 75. The Customer Equipment shall be listed and labeled under UL Standard 60950 or other standard reasonably acceptable to Switch. The Customer Equipment and its installation shall conform to the requirements contemplated by ANSI / NFPA 70, National Electric Code, Chapters 1 through 4. Customer shall not install Customer Equipment that requires the additional safeguards contemplated by ANSI /NEPA 70, Article 645 and NFPA 75.

2.5 Access . Customer will have access to the Colocation Space 24-hours a day, seven (7) days per week. All access to the Premises shall be in accordance with Switch’s security and access procedures which may be provided to Customer in writing upon request. Customer is responsible for any and all actions of Customer’s representatives, agents and persons escorted by or on behalf of Customer (collectively, “ Customer Representatives ”) while on the Premises. Switch may suspend access by any Customer Representative or other person to the Premises including the Colocation Space for security violations or in the event of an emergency. Switch shall promptly notify Customer in the event any such suspension occurs. Customer shall receive two access badges at no cost. Additional badges arc available for $100 each.

2.6 Smarthands Services . At Customer’s request, Switch may assist Customer in performing light duties or correcting minor problems with respect to the Customer Equipment. Customer agrees to pay Switch’s fees for such services.

        2.7 Removal of Customer Equipment . Customer will provide Switch with notice at least two (2) days before Customer desires to remove a significant piece of Customer Equipment from the Colocation Space so logistics may be arranged within the Premises. Before authorizing the removal of any significant Customer Equipment, Switch’s accounting department will promptly verify that Customer’s account is in good standing, provided such verification will not delay the removal of Customer Equipment.

2.8 Vacating the Colocation Space . In the event Customer continues its presence in the Colocation Space after the termination of the applicable Service Order or this Agreement, Customer agrees to be subject to all the terms and provisions of this Agreement during such occupancy period and to pay for such space an amount equal to twice the MRC due for the period immediately preceding termination of the

 

 

Switch Confidential Document: Intended for Designated Customer Only

COLOCATION FACILITIES AGREEMENT

    Customer Initials JQ


Service Order or this Agreement, unless and to the extent the delay is caused by Switch. No occupancy of the Colocation Space or payments of money by Customer after termination shall prevent Switch’s immediate recovery of the Colocation Space. Customer shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless Switch from and against any and all claims, actions, proceedings or demands made by other customers of Switch (each a “ Claim’ ) and related Costs arising from or related to Customer’s failure to timely vacate the Colocation Space unless and to the extent the delay is caused by Switch.

2.9 Relocation of Customer Equipment . Switch shall not arbitrarily require Customer to relocate the Customer Equipment. However, upon prior notice of at least thirty (30) days, or in the event of an emergency, Switch may require Customer to relocate the Customer Equipment: provided that the relocation site shall afford comparable environmental conditions for space, power consumption, cooling and accessibility to the Customer Equipment. The reasonable direct costs of the relocation shall be borne by Switch unless the relocation is required to accommodate Customer’s requests. The Premises were designed to meet Uptime Institute’s Tier 4 standards for power throughputs. If Customer requires power in excess of these thresholds, then Customer shall comply with Switch’s request to move Customer to Switch’s higher density power data center at no cost to Switch.

2.10 Cross-Connections/Carrier Services . Upon request, Switch will provide Customer with a list of approved Carriers. Customer shall order all cross-connections from Switch. Such cross-connections are subject to Switch’s processes and procedures. All cross-connections shall be installed by Switch. Customer will notify the applicable Carrier and Switch when Customer desires to terminate or modify any cross-connections. Customer will be solely responsible for all payments due to the Carriers unless the Carrier Services are being provided through Switch, in which case payment shall be made to Switch. Customer acknowledges and agrees that the Carrier Services will be provided by one or more third party Carriers who are not under the control of Switch. Customer understands that Switch does not own or control any of the Carrier Services. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Switch is not responsible or liable for performance or non-performance of the Carriers even when resold by Switch except that Switch shall (a) be responsible for all actions or inactions with respect to the installation of cross-connections made by Switch or any third party acting on its behalf and (b) pass through any service credits provided to Switch by a Carrier pursuant to the applicable Carrier Service Level Agreement.

 

3. Fees and Billing .

3.1 Recurring MRC . Customer agrees to pay the minimum Monthly Recurring Charges indicated on the Service Order and all other amounts indicated in this Agreement (collectively, the “ MRC ”).

3.2 Non-Recurring Charges . Non-Recurring Charges (“ NRC ”) are due and payable upon execution of the Service Order by Switch and Customer. Along with the NRC, Customer shall deliver to Switch a Security Deposit equal to one month’s MRC or such other amount as may be indicated on the Service Order, which will be promptly returned to Customer upon expiration or termination of this Agreement, or applied against the MRC then due. In the event Switch needs to utilize all or any part of the Security Deposit, Customer agrees to replenish the Security Deposit within five (5) business days. Switch will not have any obligation to perform under any Service Order unless and until Switch receives the NRC and the Security Deposit.

3.3 Timing of Payment . Switch shall invoice Customer monthly for MRC in advance, and Customer shall pay such within thirty (30) days after the invoice date. MRC and any other sums not paid within five (5) days after the due date are subject to an interest charge on the outstanding balance equal to the lower of one and one-half percent (1.5%) per month or the maximum allowable rate under applicable law. During the Service Commitment Period, MRC may increase by an amount not to exceed seven percent (7%) in any calendar year with at least sixty (60) days-notice to Customer. Power MRC may increase an additional amount to proportionately reflect increases in third party utility charges.

3.4 Bankruptcy/Insolvency . If Customer .fails to make any payments hereunder, or if a petition is brought by or against Customer under any state or federal insolvency law, Switch may modify the payment terms to secure Customer’s payment obligations before providing any additional services.

3.5 Taxes . NRC and MRC are exclusive of applicable taxes, duties and similar charges. Customer will be responsible for and will pay in full all such amounts (exclusive of income taxes payable by Switch), whether imposed on Switch or directly on Customer and that are set forth in an invoice submitted by Switch.

3.6 Service Credits . In the event of unavailability or failure of the Colocation Services, Customer will receive Service Credits as set forth in the Service Level Agreement (“ SLA ”) attached hereto as Exhibit A . Customer acknowledges and agrees that Customer’s sole and exclusive remedies regarding the unavailability or failure of’ the Colocation Services are those provided in the SLA and Section 5.3.

 

4. Additional Responsibilities .

4.1 Customer Equipment . Customer has sole control and responsibility for installation, testing and operation of the Customer Equipment (including services not provided by Switch). In no event will the untimely installation or non-operation of Customer Equipment (including Off-Net Local Access when procured by Customer) relieve Customer of its obligation to pay MRC.

4.2 Customer’s End Users . As between Customer and Switch, Customer is solely responsible for providing its end users with customer service.

         4.3 Compliance with Law/AUP . Both Switch and Customer shall at all times fully comply with and faithfully carry out all laws, statutes, ordinances, regulations, promulgations and mandates of all duly constituted authorities applicable to the operations of their respective businesses, and any failure to do so shall constitute a default under this Agreement it’ not cured within the cure period set forth in Section 5 in which event the effected portion of this Agreement may be immediately terminated by either party by written notice delivered prior to the effect of a cure. Both Switch and Customer shall at all times maintain in good standing and effect all necessary and proper business licenses and other licenses and permits relating to its business operations. Customer acknowledges that Switch exercises no control over the content of the information passing through the Customer’s telecommunications network and that it is Customer’s sole responsibility to ensure that the information Customer transmits and receives complies with all applicable laws and regulations. Customer shall cooperate with any investigation by any governmental authority or Switch, and shall promptly rectify any illegal use, failure to do so will be in material breach of this Agreement. Customer’s use of the Colocation Space and operations therein shall comply with Switch’s and each Carrier’s then

 

 

Switch Confidential Document: Intended for Designated Customer Only

COLOCATION FACILITIES AGREEMENT

  2   Customer Initials JQ


current Acceptable Use Policy (each an “ AUP ”). Switch’s AUP is available at www.switchnap.com and a current copy is attached as Exhibit C . Without limiting the foregoing or anything to the contrary, Switch acknowledges and agrees that Customer may, in connection with its business, send or transmit emails that involve commercial advertising or other informational announcements. Customer or its end customers will be solely responsible for any transmission of any material in violation of any law or regulation or that may otherwise violate the AUP. Any access made to other networks connected to the Switch Network must comply with the rules of the other network and the AUP.

 

5. Term and Termination .

5.1 Term . This Agreement is effective as of the Effective Date and shall remain in effect until expiration of the last Service Order issued hereunder unless terminated earlier as set forth in this Section 5. The Service Commitment Period for a Service Order starts on the Service Commencement Date. Service Orders shall remain in effect for the Service Commitment Period, unless terminated earlier as set forth in this Section 5. After conclusion of the Service Commitment Period, unless Customer notifies Switch of its intent not to renew the Service Commitment Period, each Service Order shall automatically renew on a month-to-month basis unless, in Customer’s discretion, a new Service Commitment Period is established.

5.2 Conditions of Breach . A party is in breach of this Agreement if such party violates its obligations under this Agreement and such failure is not cured within thirty (30) clays after notice by the other party (excepting payment obligations which arc breached if not paid on the due date specified in Section 3.3).

5.3 Certain Remedies for Breach . If Customer is in breach of this Agreement and has failed to cure such breach within the cure period in Section 5.2, Switch may discontinue providing any or all of the Colocation Services and/or Carrier Services. Customer agrees to pay the expenses Switch may incur in collection efforts including any attorneys’ fees to the extent Switch is the prevailing party. Additionally, Switch reserves its rights in law and in equity, including the ability to collect the MRC for the balance of the Service Commitment Period (except to the extent Customer is terminating this Agreement due to Switch’s uncured breach). If Switch is in breach of this Agreement and has failed to cure such breach within the cure period in Section 5.2, then prior to Switch’s cure, Customer may terminate this Agreement and/or any applicable Service Order for Colocation Services at no penalty and pay only the MRC for such services through the termination date and receive a pro-rated refunded of any prepaid MRC.

        5.4 Service Commitment Period . Subject to Section 5.2 and 5.3, Service Orders are non-cancellable during the Commitment Period. As a material inducement for Switch to enter into this Agreement and each Service Order, Customer acknowledges, agrees and covenants that, subject to Section 5.2 and 5.3, (i) Customer is responsible for full payment of the services for the entire Commitment Period regardless of the portion of the services actually consumed; and (ii) termination of the Service Order or this Agreement (other than for breach by Switch) or suspension of services as permitted in this Agreement shall not relieve Customer of its obligation to pay the full MRC for the duration of Commitment Period (subject to any applicable Service Credits).

5.5 Network Protection . In the event of an emergency and to the extent necessary to protect the Switch Network or to remedy AUP violations, Switch may temporarily restrict or suspend Customer’s rights under this Agreement, including the Colocation Services and Carrier Services, without liability to Customer. Except in an emergency, Switch

will notify Customer prior to any such restriction, or suspension and will notify Customer promptly when such restriction or suspension is no longer necessary. Subject to Section 11.1, suspension of Colocation Services and/or Carrier Services pursuant to this Section shall not be a violation of this Agreement or contribute towards Service Credits.

5.6 Effect of Termination . Upon termination of this Agreement: (i) Switch may immediately cease providing services; and (ii) all MRC will become immediately due and payable except as otherwise set forth in Section 5.3. In the event Customer has not removed the Customer Equipment as of the termination date, Switch may remove the Customer Equipment from the Colocation Space and place the Customer Equipment in storage at Customer’s risk and expense and/or, after providing Customer with at least thirty (30) days’ notice, dispose of the Customer Equipment.

 

6. [ Reserved. ]

7. Insurance . At all times (i) each party shall maintain commercial general liability insurance of not less than $1,000,000 per occurrence; and (ii) worker’s compensation insurance at or greater than the minimum levels required by applicable law; and (iii) Customer shall also maintain (a) “all risk” personal property insurance reasonably estimated to cover the value of the Customer Equipment and (b) business loss and interruption insurance in an amount sufficient to compensate Customer and Customer’s end users for loss of the Colocation Services or the Carrier Services. Switch’s insurance policies do not provide coverage for Customer’s personal property. Customer shall provide policy endorsements upon request. Each party shall ensure that each policy required hereunder contains a waiver of subrogation provision for the benefit of the other party.

 

8. Limitations of Liability .

8.1 Personal Injury . Each Customer Representative and any other person visiting the Premises does so at his or her own risk and Switch shall not be liable for any harm to such persons, except to the extent such harm arises out of Switch’s negligence or willful misconduct.

        8.2 Liability . IN NO EVENT SHALL EITHER PARTY BE LIABLE TO THE OTHER, OR ANY CUSTOMER REPRESENTATIVE, ANY THIRD PARTY OR OTHERWISE, FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING LOST REVENUE, LOST PROFITS, DAMAGE TO CUSTOMER EQUIPMENT, LOSS OF TECHNOLOGY, LOSS OF DATA, NON-DELIVERIES, OR IN ANY WAY RELATED TO THE SERVICES OR ANY ASPECT OF CUSTOMER’S BUSINESS, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, WHETHER UNDER THEORY OF CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), STRICT’ LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE.

NOTWITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING, THE ABOVE LIMITA’T’IONS WILL NOT APPLY TO ANY DAMAGES AWARDED TO A THIRD PARTY IN CONNECTION WITH EITHER PARTY’S INDEMNIFICATION OBLIGATIONS HEREUNDER. IN NO EVENT WILL EITHER PARTY’S AGGREGATE LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT UNDER ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT INVOICED AND, IN SWITCH’S CASE, PAID BY CUSTOMER FOR THE SERVICES WHICH ARE THE SUBJECT OF THE DISPUTE IN THE SIX (6) MONTHS IMMEDIATELY PRECEDING THE DATE ON WHICH THE SUBJECT CLAIM AROSE. THESE LIMITATIONS SHALL APPLY DESPITE THE FAILURE OF THE ESSENTIAL PURPOSE

 

 

Switch Confidential Document: Intended for Designated Customer Only

COLOCATION FACILITIES AGREEMENT

  3   Customer Initials JQ


OF ANY REMEDY. THE PROVISIONS OF THIS SECTION SHALL NOT BE INTERPRETED TO REDUCE COMPENSATION WHICH IS OTHERWISE DUE TO SWITCH PURSUANT TO SECTION 5.4. •

 

9. Indemnification .

9.1 Customer agrees and covenants to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Switch, its directors, officers, managers, members, employees, agents, affiliates and customers (collective with Switch, the “ Switch Covered Entities ” from and against any and all costs, expenses, damages, losses and/or liabilities (including attorney fees) (collectively, “ Costs ”) arising from or related to Claims made by or against any of the Switch Covered Entities alleging: (i) infringement or misappropriation of any intellectual property rights relating to the Customer Equipment or Customer’s use thereof: (ii) damage caused by or related to Customer’s operations, including any violation of Switch’s or any Carrier’s AUP (including the Anti-Spam Policy); (iii) any damage or destruction to the Colocation Space, the Premises, Switch equipment or to another Switch customer which damage is caused by or results from negligent or willful misconduct of Customer or any Customer Representative: (iv) any property damage or personal injury to any Customer Representative arising out of such individual’s negligent or willful misconduct: (v) any damage arising from or related to the Customer Equipment (except for Switch’s negligence or willful misconduct) (collectively, the “ Switch Covered Claims ”). In the event of a Switch Covered Claim, the Switch Covered Entity may select its own counsel to participate in the defense of such Claim. Customer will not settle a Switch Covered Claim in a manner that imposes liability or obligation upon a Switch Covered Entity.

9.2 Switch agrees and covenants to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Customer, its directors, officers, managers, members, employees, agents, and affiliates and customers (collectively, with Customer, the “ Customer Covered Entities ”) from and against any and all Costs arising from or related to third party Claims made against any of the Customer Covered Entities alleging (i) infringement or misappropriation of any intellectual property rights related to Colocation Services or (ii) personal injury to Customer or any Customer Representative to the extent arising out of Switch’s activities at the Premises (including due to its negligence or willful misconduct) or (iii) any damage or destruction to the Customer Equipment which damage is caused by or results from negligent or willful misconduct of Switch or anyone acting on Switch’s behalf (collectively, the “ Customer Covered Claims ”). In the event of a Customer Covered Claim, the Customer Covered Entity may select its own counsel to participate in the defense of such Claim. Switch will not settle a Customer Covered Claim in a manner that imposes liability or obligation upon a Customer Covered Entity.

        9.3 Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, neither party shall be liable for any property damage except to the extent such damage results from the negligent or intentional acts or omissions of a party or its representatives and a party’s liability for any property damage, shall not exceed $100,000 in any occurrence.

10. Hazardous Materials . “ Hazardous Materials ” means any substance referred to, or defined in any law, as a hazardous material or hazardous substance (or other similar term). Customer will not knowingly cause or permit any Hazardous Materials to be brought upon, kept, stored, discharged, released or used in, under or about any portion of the Premises. Customer will cause all Hazardous Materials brought to the Premises by or on behalf of Customer to be removed from the Premises in compliance with all applicable laws. If Customer or its agents performs any act or omission which contaminates or expands the

scope of contamination of the Premises then Customer will promptly, at Customer’s expense, take all investigatory and remedial actions necessary to fully remove and dispose of such Hazardous Materials and any contamination so caused in compliance with all applicable laws. Customer will also repair all damage to the Premises caused by such contamination and remediation.

 

11. Miscellaneous Provisions .

11.1 Force Majeure . Neither party will be liable for any failure or delay in its performance under this Agreement due to any cause beyond its reasonable control, including acts of war, acts of God, earthquake, flood, embargo, riot, sabotage, labor shortage or dispute, governmental act or failure of the Carrier or the Internet. Switch will use its all commercially reasonable efforts to promptly mitigate and remedy any such failure or delay due to such force majeure events and will provide. Customer with notice describing the measures taken by Switch to remedy such failure or delay. In the event that either party is unable to remedy a delay due to a Force Majeure event within thirty (30) days from the initial occurrence of such delay, the other party may, in its discretion, terminate this Agreement and receive a prorated refund of any prepaid MRC paid for Colocation Services not rendered as of the termination date.

11.2 No Lease . Customer acknowledges and agrees that Customer has not been granted any real property interest in the Colocation Space or the Premises, and Customer has no rights as a tenant or otherwise under any real property or landlord/tenant laws or regulations. Customer shall not record any notice of this Agreement. Customer shall not permit any liens to be placed on the Premises or portion thereof and shall have any such liens immediately removed.

        11.3 Confidentiality . The parties acknowledge and agree (i) that this Agreement is the confidential information of each party: (ii) the technical aspects of Customer’s deployment in the Colocation Space is the confidential information of Customer and (iii) the design of the Premises and the manner by which Switch provides the Colocation Services and Carrier Services are the confidential information of Switch (collectively, “ Confidential Information ”). Confidential Information may only be used by the recipient in connection with its performance under this Agreement. Confidential Information may not be disclosed except to those employees or contractors of the recipient with a need to know and who agree to hold the information in confidence. If the recipient is legally compelled to disclose Confidential Information, the recipient shall provide the discloser with notice of such requirement prior to disclosure (if permissible) so that the discloser may seek any appropriate remedy. Confidential Information excludes information that: (i) is or becomes generally available to the public through no wrongful act of the recipient; (ii) is received from a third party with the right to supply it; or (iii) is independently developed by the recipient. Upon written request, the recipient will return the Confidential Information to the discloser and shall not retain any copies of such Confidential Information. The parties acknowledge and agree that Switch does not require access to any Confidential Information (including end customer information) which may be located on the Customer Equipment. Switch covenants not to attempt to access any information on the Customer Equipment without the prior written consent of Customer and Customer covenants not to provide Switch with access to Such information without the prior written consent of Switch. In the event Switch receives access to any customer Confidential Information, regardless of the manner, then it shall be subject to the provisions of this Section.

 

 

Switch Confidential Document: Intended for Designated Customer Only

COLOCATION FACILITIES AGREEMENT

  4   Customer Initials JQ


11.4 Assignment . Neither party may assign this Agreement without the prior written consent of the other party, except as part of a merger, acquisition or financing. Any attempted assignment in violation of this Section will be null and void. This Agreement will bind and inure to the benefit of each party’s permitted successors and assigns. Successors and assigns shall assume the assignor’s obligations hereunder in writing satisfactory to the non-assigning party.

11.5 Notices . Any notice or communication given hereunder may be delivered personally, by electronic mail (other than notices of breach or termination), deposited with an overnight courier or mailed by registered mail, return receipt requested, postage prepaid, to the address of the receiving party indicated on the Service Order, or at such other address as either party may provide to the other. Notices will be deemed delivered upon receipt.

11.6 No Waiver . No term or provision of this Agreement shall be deemed waived and no breach or default shall be deemed excused unless such waiver or consent is in writing and signed by the parties. A consent to waiver of or excuse for a breach or default by either party, whether express or implied shall not constitute a consent to, waiver of, or excuse for any different or subsequent breach or default.

11.7 Relationship of Parties . Switch and, Customer are independent contractors and this Agreement does not establish any relationship of partnership, joint venture, employment, franchise or agency between Switch and Customer. Neither Switch nor Customer will have the power to bind the other or incur obligations on the other’s behalf without the other’s prior written consent.

11.8 Choice of Law . This Agreement shall be construed in accordance with and all disputes hereunder shall be governed by the laws ante State of New York, excluding its conflict of law rules save only for any state specific regulatory issues.

11.9 Entire Agreement . This Agreement together with the Service Orders represents the complete agreement of the parties with respect to the subject matter herein, and supersedes any other agreement or understanding, written or oral. This Agreement may be modified only through a written instrument signed by both parties. There are no third party beneficiaries to this Agreement. Except as expressly stated herein, all rights and remedies herein are cumulative and without prejudice to each other or any other remedies available in law or equity.

11.10 Severability . In the event any provision of’ this Agreement is held by a court or other tribunal of competent jurisdiction to be unenforceable, that provision will be reformed and enforced to the

maximum extent permissible under applicable law, and the other provisions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect.

11.11 Warranties . Both parties represent and warrant that they have full corporate power and authority to execute and deliver this Agreement and to perform their obligations under this Agreement and the person whose signature appears on the Service Order is authorized to enter into this Agreement on behalf of the respective party. The Colocation Space itself is provided on an “AS-IS” basis. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION AND THE SLA, SWITCH SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL EXPRESS. IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE SERVICES AND THE PREMISES, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF MERCHANTABILITY AND AGAINST’ INFRINGEMENT. SWITCH EXERCISES NO CONTROL WI IATSOEVER OVER THE CONTENT OF THE INFORMATION PASSING THROUGH THE SWITCH NETWORK OR OVER THE INTERNET. USE OF ANY INFORMATION OBTAINED OVER THE SWITCH NETWORK OR THE IN’T’ERNET IS AT CUSTOMER’S OWN RISK.

11.12 Headings/Interpretation . Headings in this Agreement are for reference purposes only and in no way define, limit, or describe the scope or extent of a Section or in any way affect this Agreement. The word “including” shall be read as “including without limitation.” No provision of this Agreement shall be construed against or interpreted to the disadvantage of any party by any court or other authority by reason of such party having or being deemed to have drafted such provision.

11.13 Survival . The provisions of Sections 1.1, 3.3, 5.6, 2.8, 8, 9, 10 and 9 shall survive the expiration or termination of this Agreement for any reason, along with all indemnity obligations hereunder.

11.14 Confirmation . Periodically, an entity with whom Switch has a financial relationship (such as a lender) may request confirmation from Customer that this Agreement is in existence, that it is then in force, that Switch is not in breach of this Agreement and similar information (a “ Confirmation ”). Customer will use commercially reasonable efforts to review and respond to any such requests that are reasonably requested by Switch.

11.15 Counterparts . This Agreement may be executed in counterparts with the same force and effect as if each party had executed the same instrument, provided that no party shall be hound until both parties have executed and delivered a counterpart of this Agreement to the other.

 

 

WHEREFORE, intending to be bound, the parties have executed this Colocation Facilities Agreement through their authorized representative as of the dates set Forth below.

 

SWITCH COMMUNICATIONS GROUP L.L.C     BOX.NET, INC
By:  

/s/ Lesley Dick

    By:  

/s/ Jeffrey Queisser

Name:  

Lesley Dick

    Name:  

Jeffrey Queisser

Title:  

SVP Facility Services

    Title:  

VP Technical Operations

Date:  

12/20/11

    Date:  

11/29/2011

Address:       Address:  

 

 

Switch Confidential Document: Intended for Designated Customer Only

COLOCATION FACILITIES AGREEMENT

  5   Customer Initials JQ


LOGO   Exhibit “A”

SERVICE LEVEL AGREEMENT

This Service Level Agreement is a part of the Agreement between Customer and Switch.

 

1. Service Credits

Switch is pleased to offer Customer the following service levels regarding the following items:

 

    Network Availability

 

    Network Latency

 

    Packet Delivery

 

    Power Delivery

If Switch fails to meet any of these service levels, Switch will provide Customer with a Service Credit. A “ Service Credit ” is equal to the result of dividing (i) the MRC paid by Customer for the effected service during the calendar month in which the Service Credit was earned by (ii) 30 (the average number of days in a calendar month). Service Credits may be provided as whole units or as fractional units (e.g. Customer could be entitled to “2.5” Service Credits in a given month). “ Network Access Fees ” are the fees charged to Customer for access to and use of the Switch Network. “ Switch Network ” means the telecommunications/data communications network and network components owned, operated and controlled by Switch within the Premises. The Switch Network does not include any Customer Equipment or any networks or network equipment not operated and controlled by Switch.

 

2. Switch Network Availability

Switch provides 99.99% availability of the Switch Network in any calendar month, as calculated from the ingress to and egress from the Switch Network. For each cumulative hour or fraction thereof that Customer experiences Switch Network unavailability, Customer may request Service Credits. A Network Service Credit will be given only for those outages that were reported to Switch at the time of the outage. An outage is measured from the time it is reported to the time it is resolved.

 

3. Switch Network Latency

The Switch Network carries packets with an average Network Latency per month of less than 75 milliseconds. Switch monitors aggregate latency within the Switch Network by monitoring round trip times between a sample of backbone hubs on an ongoing basis. “ Network Latency ” (or “ round trip time ”) is defined as the average time taken for an IP packet to make a round trip between specified backbone hubs on the Switch Network.

After Customer notifies Switch of average Network Latency in excess of 75 milliseconds per month, Switch will use commercially reasonable efforts to determine the source of such excess Network Latency and to correct such problem to the extent that the source of the problem is on the Switch Network. If Switch fails to remedy such Network Latency on the Switch Network within 24 hours of being notified of any excess Network Latency and the average Network Latency for the preceding month has exceeded 75 milliseconds, Switch will issue Service Credits to Customer’s account for each hour or fraction thereof from time of notification by Customer until the Network Latency is less than 75 milliseconds.

 

4. Switch Network Packet Delivery

The Switch Network has an average monthly Packet loss of 0.1% (or successful delivery of 99.9% of packets). Switch monitors aggregate packet loss within the Switch Network on an ongoing basis and compiles the collected data into a monthly average Packet Loss measurement for the Switch Network. “ Packet loss ” is defined as the percentage of packets that are dropped within the Switch Network.

After being notified by Customer of Packet Loss in excess of 0.1% in a given calendar month (“ Excess Packet Loss ”), Switch will use commercially reasonable efforts to determine the source of such Excess Packet Loss and to correct such problem to the extent that the source of the problem is on the Switch Network. If Switch fails to remedy such Excess Packet Loss within 24 hours of being notified of any Excess Packet Loss on the Switch Network and average Packet Loss for the preceding month exceeds 0.1%, Switch will issue Service Credits to Customer’s account for the period commencing at the time of receipt notification from Customer until the Packet Loss is less than 0.1%.

 

5. Power Service Availability

Switch is committed to providing 100% power availability if, and only if, Customer elects to deploy dual feed (A&B) power. Switch strongly recommends dual power and monitor-ready ATS and PDU’s be correctly deployed in every rack and cabinet to ensure 100% uptime.

 

Switch Confidential Document: Intended for Designated Customer Only

SERVICE LEVEL AGREEMENT

COLOCATION FACILITIES AGREEMENT

  A-1   Customer Initials JQ


Customer UPS’s are not allowed to be used down-line from the Switch mission critical power system. Switch Operations must approve all power distribution systems deployed within the Customer’s Colocation Space. All equipment must first be tested on house power prior to plugging into the Switch UPS receptacles. For each hour or fraction thereof (greater than one minute) that Customer experiences both A&B power unavailability, Customer may request Service Credits for the cabinets experiencing the power loss from Switch.

A Power Service Credit will be given only for those interruptions that were reported to Switch at the time of the interruption. If Customer only has single-sided power, Customer will not receive Power Service Credits. Customer must perform fail-over testing procedures at least twice each year to ensure all Customer Equipment will function properly in the unlikely event or a single sided power interruption. This is for the Customer’s protection. Failure to perform this testing could result in forfeiture of Power Service Credits.

 

6. Environmental Guarantee .

Switch guarantees availability of HVAC capacity to maintain temperatures, as measured by Switch, in the area around the Colocation Space between 64 and 78 degrees Fahrenheit in the cold aisles, and relative humidity between 30% and 70%, excluding events caused by Customer. Customer may request a Colocation Space Service Credit for each 15 minutes in which these environmental thresholds are exceeded.

 

7. Measured Bandwidth Service Billing Methodology .

The concept behind offering a usage based Internet product is simple: charge the customer for what they actually use. This product is ideal for those customers who either experience substantial swings in monthly usage or are anticipating growth. When traffic patterns will be unpredictable, the customer can have the security of having enough bandwidth to handle heavy use months, but also retain the flexibility to pay less when traffic declines.

Customer’s monthly burstable usage is determined by calculating the 95th percentile of data usage that is used over and above Customer’s contracted floor amount. As is with most data, Internet traffic has peak times throughout the day. Actually, it has peak times within any measurement interval whether it be a day, an hour, or five minutes. Billing on the 95th percentile eliminates the top five percent (5%) of measurement peaks, and bills on the Mb level at the remaining highest measurement. The purpose for billing at the 95th percentile versus actual peak utilization is to eliminate any abnormal peaks throughout the month.

Within the router, a counter that keeps track of all bytes passed through each interface, a PERL script using SNMP will poll each applicable Customer interface every five minutes. At every five minute pass, the code will read the counter and compare the result against the previous reading. The difference between the two will be converted from byte counts to a data rate, polling this data every five minutes results in 8640 data records per month. These records are then sorted from high to low usage and the top 5% are discarded. The remaining data rate is then used to determine the billing level for the month. For example, out of 100 data points the top ten are;

 

100         34.2 Mb    97         34.08 Mb    94         33.91 Mb    91         33.66 Mb
99         34.18 Mb    96         34.02 Mb    93         33.84 Mb   
98         34.11 Mb    95         33.98 Mb    92         33.70 Mb   

Eliminating the top 5% leaves the data rate of 33.98Mb. This is the rate at which Switch will bill Customer for the month.

 

8. Conditions .

This SLA and Section 5.3 provides Customer’s sole and exclusive remedies for any service interruptions, deficiencies, or failures of any kind. The parties agree that the Service Credits constitute liquidated damages. No Service Credits shall be issued for Exempted Occurrences. “ Exempted Occurrence ” means any occurrence which adversely impacts a service that is caused by: (i) any permissible suspension of service pursuant to the Agreement; (ii) scheduled or emergency maintenance, alteration or implementation; (iii) Force Majeure events; (iv) the unavailability of necessary Customer Representatives, including as a result of failure to provide Switch with accurate, current contact information; (v) the acts or omissions of Customer or any Customer Representative; or (vi) failure or malfunction of equipment, applications or systems not owned or controlled by Switch. All performance measurements for the determination of Service Credits are based upon Switch’s records.

The parties acknowledge and agree that Switch manages traffic on the Switch Network on the basis of utilization of the Switch Network by its customers and that changes in such utilization impact Switch’s ability to manage network traffic. Therefore, notwithstanding any provision to the contrary herein or the Agreement, if Customer significantly changes its utilization of the Switch Network and such change creates a material and adverse effect on the traffic balance of the Switch Network, Switch may either modify the Service Credits which may have otherwise accrued or modify Switch’s provision of the affected services.

Customer must request any credit due hereunder within 60 days after the date on which the credit accrues. Customer waives any right to credits not requested within this 60 clay period. Customer will not be eligible to accrue any otherwise applicable Service Credits while Customer is: (i) past due

 

Switch Confidential Document: Intended for Designated Customer Only

SERVICE LEVEL AGREEMENT

COLOCATION FACILITIES AGREEMENT

  A-2   Customer Initials JQ


on MRC or other amounts owed under the Agreement; or (ii) Customer is in violation of an AUP. In no event shall Service Credits exceed 50% of the MRC for the affected service(s) during the calendar month in which the Service Credits are earned.

 

Switch Confidential Document: Intended for Designated Customer Only

SERVICE LEVEL AGREEMENT

COLOCATION FACILITIES AGREEMENT

  A-3   Customer Initials JQ


LOGO   Exhibit “B”

T-SCIF TM DESCRIPTION_

 

LOGO

All computerized equipment generates heat. The Switch t-scif TM is designed to protect all of the customers in the facility from heat outputs. All equipment placed into the t-scif must vent the heat directly into the enclosed center aisle, where it is then contained and prevented from mixing back into the cold room.

 

Switch Confidential Document: Intended for Designated Customer Only

T-SCIF DESCRIPTION

COLOCATION FACILITIES AGREEMENT

  B-1   Customer Initials JQ

Exhibit 21.1

SUBSIDIARIES OF BOX, INC.

 

Name of Subsidiary

           

Jurisdiction of Organization

Box Intl Holdings Ltd

          United Kingdom

Box Intl Technology Ltd

          United Kingdom

Box.com (UK) Ltd

          United Kingdom

Exhibit 23.1

Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

We consent to the reference to our firm under the caption “Experts” and to the use of our report dated March 24, 2014, in the Registration Statement (Form S-1) and related Prospectus of Box, Inc. for the registration of shares of its Class A common stock.

 

/s/ Ernst & Young LLP

San Francisco, California

March 24, 2014